> ,
} § i
Pe gh
e 5 ‘7
- "
ey

al al * le

THE CANADIAN

~ RECORD OF SCIENCE

INCLUDING THE PROCEEDINGS OF
THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL,

‘AND REPLACING

Ta ORNL AN NATURA List:

WOOL. VP 4894=1895.)

Ps Dae ee

MONTREAL:
PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.
1896.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME VI.

PAGE

Preliminary Notes on Recent Discoveries of Batrachians

and other Air-breathers in the Coal Formation of
Nova Scotia. By Sir J. Wittiam Dawson........ ]

Our Record of Canadian Earthquakes. By Sir J. Wiiuiam
ANT ce et, Mae: eh eR May SMR ATER eR OR Le ar eC MIRE 8

Check-List of European and North-American Mosses
(Bryinee.) By N. Conn. Finpsere, Ph.D....... gy

Contributions to Canadian Botany. By James M.
VACOUING , fh agec vs 23, 76,141, 198, 264, 318, 405, 459

The Composition of Limestones and Dolomites from a

Number of Geological Horizons in Canada. By B. J.
EPA RIVENC PON i: du) EADS, Pa. a sok Wee A Aig, wide bs Bh 27

On the Formation of Pegmatite Veins. By Prorrssor
W. C. Broecsr, Stockholm, Sweden ............ poy OL

The Cambrian Terrain at Tejrovie, Bohemia. fs Gad:
MPTOR INADA et co: 22 Re a ai aie le ode WEE code wah 46

Proceedings of the Natural History Society ..49, 105, 113,
PEL RE OE AE TOL, eee te a Baer 239, 308

Lehrbuch der Petrographie von Dr. Ferdinand Zirkel.
‘cL ahs SiN Date AS: tee SANTA eh. 3 TAR RENT CEEOL 5D

Notes on the Geology of Middleton Island, Alaska. By
Dn: Guoren' M: “Dawson: (Notice. jae. ol 58

Notes on the Occurrence of Mammoth Remains in the
Yukon District of Canada and in Alaska. By Dr.
Ce De WeON: CIN OMGeM aii sb. Dates i. ¢ tide bee D9

Note on the Recent Discovery of Large Unio-like Shells
in the Coal Measures at the South Joggins, N.S.. By
Bret des VEEN E WA Vor ho A ted I, fea ae A Mla 59

Iv Canadian Record of Science.

Preliminary Note on the Limestones of the Laurentian
System. By Exirric Drew Ina@atL..............
Teratological Notes... By D. P. P—nnautow............
Ancient Myriapods. _ By G. F. Marrnew, F.R,8.C......
Annual Presidential Address; Nat. His. Soc., Montreal.
By Pror. Westey Minis, M.A., M.D., etc. ..... 99;
Book Notice :
The Canadian Ice Age. By Sir J. Witiiam
Dawson, CMG ase. 4... tee eee
Notes on the Bivalve Shells of the Coal-Formation of
Nova Scotia. By Sm J/ Wiis1am Dawson, LL.D.,

The Recent Exploration of the Labrador Peninsula. By

ACER TY ows 2D SAL Sc ane at bil. ae eu See
Viscometry. By Anruony MoGu, B.A., B.Sc........
Parasitic Protozoa. By W. E. Dzexs, B.A., M.D.......

eA aa Ssele: Diey Sse te ne). 0 Se ee 164,
Appendix to Paper on Bivalve Shells. By Str J. W.
DAWEONG whinge 1b. i

Note to Paper-on: Viscomierny i. ...04/.4<.5 . ox Baie
On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation of
Canada. By Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc., Ph.D.....
A Satisfactory Sulphuretted Hydrogen Generator. By
Nevit Norton Evans, M.A.Se:...... Te ins 9 Mead V2
The Apatite Bearing Rocks of the Ottawa District. By
BOW. Bias, SOLA ee ia: ©. ... 4. ee geek tae
Notes on Canadian Fossil Bryozoa. By H. M. Amr......
The Rideau Lakes. By A. T. Drummonp.........
Obituary :
George Huntingdon Williams.... .
Book Review :

On the Cambrian Formation of the Eastern Salt Range
of India. By Dr. Fritz Nariine, of the Geo-
logical Survey of dindagt yi S.%. 2: Pee a oak a ie

Remarkable Flight of Certain Birds from the Atlantic
Coast up the St. Lawrence to the Great Lakes. By
H..D. Wintin. ... a2 hoa a ee

Unusual Occurrence of Razor-Billed Auk at Montreal. By
el) ¢ WANTOR J. c08k

LS)

~J

~ Contents.

Notes on Special Migrations. By J. Bo Wititame ©. 2).
Notes on Recent Canadian Unionide. By J. F.Wurrnaves
A Caddis-Fly from the Leda Clays of the Vicinity of

Ottawa... by, SéAMueL, Ei. /SCUDDER.} oe ok ae

The New Director of the Geological Survey. Dr. G. M.

UAW SOMES See NG Mat one ayia. x wnt nee Shee. Goa es Bee

Book Notices :

From the Greeks to Darwin, an Outline of the
Development of the Evolution Idea. By Henry
FairFIELD Osporn, ScD., Da Costa Professor
of Biology in Columbia College, Curator of the
American Museum of Natural History ........

Amphioxus and the Ancestry of the Vertebrates. By
PARENTS NCH Lic W) A SO Te ues ete Statik oe /ediye

Notes on some Fossils from the Cretaceous Rocks of
British Columbia, with descriptions of two species
that appear to be new. By J... WuHiTEAvEs......
The Gold Deposit of Mount Morgan, Queensland. By
ieee Dera Ms ety DN, Nec tke cre rerum eek aera sat ace
Some of the Rarer Summer Flowers of Canada. By
Rosrer-€amesrn:, D.D.,. MiAs oo eye... Ms
Note on a Specimen of Beluga Catodon, from the Leda
Clay, Montreal. By Sire J. Witiiam Dawson,
i Mies eae GU na ahh KUM ee a S © gh ee Na as fea a
The Timber of Canada. By Hon. J. K. Warp........
Additional Notes on Recent Canadian Unionide. By J. F.
DY NARUU MUNA ENG Ai aigi'c) «Balle tks MaMa os atas, al
Obituary Notice :

Gaston, Marquis de Saporta. By Str J. Winn

OA WSON, EbCL.. 2) kaw ted 5 2s Gi a ir
Report of Chairman of Council of the Natural History

Society of Montreal, for the year ending 27th May,

LR one es st RESIN icon.

Pre pontet tie, Hon Cortera. sy. ead aes
Peporh ot the Mon, Treasuret.. 62.000. 6 te le ea ES
Beport of the library Committee... 2... 2.0. ate es

310

311

1s eee — Canadian Record of Science.
PAGE

onott of the Natural History Society of Montreal for
1895, to the Royal Society of Canada............. 382

Report of Editing and Exchange Committee ....... a dee go

Descriptions of Eight New Species of Fossils from the
(Galena) Trenton Limestones of Lake Winnipeg and

the Red River Valley. By J. F. Wurreavgs...... 387
The Flora of Montreal Island. By Roserr Camppuut,

DID. “SLA 2" Aue eee: . es 2 397
On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation of -

Canada. By Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc., Ph.D..... 416
Obituary Notices:

William Crawford Williamson, LL.D., FR.S....... 443

Professor; James waeht Dana-"2a uae yk. ce ee 448

The Right Hon. T. H. Huxley, D.C.L., F.B.S., ete.. 451
Review of the Evidence for the Animal Nature of Eozoén
Canadense. By Srr J. Witttam Dawson, C.M.G.. 470
The Chemical Composition of Andradite from Two
Localities in Ontario. By B. J. Harrinerton, M.A.,
bard © OMA on yf AR RM CEG 479
Some Dykes Cutting the Laurentian System, Counties of
Frontenac, Leeds and Lanark, Ont. By W. G.

MELER Boy ROCK... anomyken ys beta ee 482
On the Ferns in the Vicinity of Montreal. By Haronp B.

CusHine, B.A. ae Co Ee Me een aan oe 489
Gold and Silver. nee oe the Sonar B.C. By dase:

WEIN G ene Oe, ces ee a a eae ee 494

Book Notices :
Ein Pra-Kambrisches Fossil, Paleeontologishe Notizen.
Dy VON seamen INEN |< ccagistcos. | oon oe 498
Minerals and How to Study Them: a Book for
Beginners in Mineralogy. By Epwarp SaLisBuRY
DANA. 5 cee... rete acer age 5 “ate 499
Life and Rocks: a Collection of Zoological and Geological
Essays. By R. Lypexxer, B.A., Cantab; F.Z.S.... 500

Pe Yon @ Rs”
Gr ta fe FS gd Y,
-%
tee Te ae ,
Teak

Published quarterly; Price $3.00 the Volume of eight numbers.
MOLUME Wii oho i _ NUMBER 1.

THE CANADIAN

RECORD OF SCIENCE

INCLUDING THE PROCEEDINGS OF eS ae

THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAW; C ie Ors
AND REPLACING Mi ieaaf 3 FY
THE CANADIAN NATURAL: ST. Sr acy
1f>.
5 4
CONTENTS. a Ta men be
PAGE ee
Preliminary Note on Recent Discoveries of Batrachiang and other Air-breathers in
the Coal-Formation of Nova Scotia. By Sir J. WitLiamM DAwson.........+ i
Our Record of Canadian Earthquakes. By Sir J. Witiiam DAawson........++-...005 8
Check-list of European and North American Mosses (Bryines.) By N. Conr. Kinp-
MT ORTEE BRE otc cco Wicinre' alpen Sa'ainlg eke taiy a et) gO iaiehe sta 38s’ xiale) s/h atalplraladm Gin \eumidieeaia aa ees 17
Contributions to Canadian Botany. By Jas. M. MACOUN...seeee. ec cceeeeccceeecenns 23
The Composition of Limestones and Dolomites from a Number of Geological Hori-
zons in Canada. By B. J. Harrineton, B. A., Ph. D.....-.ccececeveevececeesss 27

On the Formation of Pegmatite Veins. By Prof. W.C. Briaerr, Stockholm,Sweden. 33
The Cambrian Terrain at Tejrovic, Bohemia, By G. F. Marrurew, F.R.S.C......... 46
Proceedings of the Natural History Society.........ccccscececeecesceeccteeeeecrceess 48
Notices of Books and Papers :—

Lehrbuch der Petrographie von Dr. Ferdinand Zirkel—Zweite ganzlich neu
verfasste Auflage—Erster Band—Wilhelm Engelman, Leipzig, 1893..... 55
Notes on the Geology of Middleton Island, Alaska, By Grorase M. Dawson,
C.M.G., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., Bull. Geol. Soc. America, 1892.....-.+... 58
Notes on the Occurrence of Mammoth Remains in the Yukon District of Can-
ada and in Alaska. By Guoras M. Dawson, Geol. Mag., 1893.0-++e0.... 59
Note on the recent discovery of large Unio-like shells in the Coal Measures at
the South Joggins, N.S. By J. F. Whiteaves. Trans. Royal Society of
Canada. 1893. COTS eee eeeeeseeeeeetens Cor eeesresaseeseee Seosene eeoeeoenteeose ° 59

a eee

MONTREAL:
PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

LONDON, ENGLAND : BOSTON, MASS.
Couuins, 157 Great Portland St. A. A. WateRrmay & Co., 36 Bromfield

1894,

OFFICERS—SESSION 1898- 4.

Patron:
en His Excuntency THE GOVERNOR Guntanar OF * CanapA.
es Hon. President:
" | Sir J. Wittram Dawson, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.C.
: | President:
| Dr. T. Westey Mitts. Chae
1st Vice-President. \
ine JoHN 8. SHEARER.
‘gt 3 Vice-Presidents :
Hon. Smnator Mourpay. Rev. Ropert CAMPBELL, D.D.
| J. H. R. Motson. GrorGb SUMNER. |
J. STEVENSON Brown. Very Rev. Dnan CARMICHAEL, Abe
| Sir Donatp A. SmirH. M.A,, D.C.L. % oe
| B. J. Harrineron, Ph.D., F.R.S.C. J. H. Josuen. e:
” Hon. Recording Secretary : Hon. Corresponding Secretary .
R. W. McLacauan. | Dr. J. W. Srreiine.

| Honorary Curator : ; Honorary Treasurer:

ASB. Winn. | | JAMES GARDNER. ‘

Members of Council:
Gero. SuMNER, Chairman.

EpcGar JUDGE. JUDGH WURTELB.
Frank D. Apams, M.A., Sc., Ph. D. JQSEPH FORTIER.
ALBERT HoLDEN. . S. Fin ey.

Masor L. A. H. Larour, M.A. Pror. J. Cox, M.A.

C. S. J. PHrups.

Editing and Exchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, Ph. D., Chairman.
G.F.Martruew, F’.R.8.C., St.Joun,N. B| Ray. R. CaMPBELL, D.D.
J. F. WuHiTEAVEs, ERS. ORE Ottawa. | Dr. T. Westey MILts.
Dr. B. J. Harrineron, B.A.,Ph.D., | Rev. W. J. Smyru, B.A.,B.Se.,Ph.D.
F.G.S. Pror, J. Cox, M.A.

Nuvit Norton Evans, M.A.se, Be A

Library Committee : ; “* a

E. T. Coamemrs, Chairman. iad ie

J. A. U. Braupry, C.E. JOSEPH FoRTIER. " =.

R. W. McLacauan. A. F. Winn. es:
J. F. Hausen. ey

Lecture Committee :
Dr. B. J. Harrineron, Chairman. Wie
REV. Rost. CampBeiy, D.D. Dr. J. W. Sree. Yee
Pror. JoHn Cox. Ray. W. J. Smyra. . aa
Very Rey. Dpan CARMICHAEL. Dr. T. Westny MILLs. .

House Committee :
Jno. 8. SHHARER, Chairman.
EpGark JUDGE. | Gro. SUMNER.

Membership Committee :
J. Srpvenson Brown, Chairman:
EpaGar JUDGE. | Jon §. SHEARER.
JOSEPH FORTIRR.
Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN

_

THE
CANADIAN RECORD

OF SCIENCE.

VOL, VI... JANUARY, 1894. NO. 1.

_—_—

PRELIMINARY NOTE ON RECENT DISCOVERIES OF
.BATRACHIANS AND OTHER AIR-BREATHERS IN
THE CoaL-FORMATION OF Nova SCOTIA.
By Sir J. Wrtiram Dawson.

This note is intended to record the fact of the discovery,
in 1893, of erect trees containing remains of land animals
at two horizons in the coal-formation of the South Joggins,
in addition to that in which such remains were found by Sir
C. Lyell and the writer in 1351, and from which so many
additional trees of this character have been extracted in
subsequent years. Details as to the species in the recently
discovered trees will be published when their contents have
been worked out and studied.

The remarkable section of coal-formation rocks at the
South Joggins, in Cumberland County, Nova Scotia, has
long been known as one of the most instructive in the
world ; exhibiting as it does a thickness of 5,000 feet of
strata of the coal-formation in a cliff of considerable height,
kept clean by the tides and waves, and in the reefs extend-

‘Ing from this to the shore, which at low tide expose the

beds very perfectly. It was first described in detail by the
1

2 Canadian Record of Science.

*

late Sir W. E. Logan,’ and afterwards the middle portion
of it was examined in greater detail by the author, more
especially in connection with the fossil remains character-
istic of the several beds, and the vegetable constituents and
accompaniments of the numerous seams of coal.?_ It was on
occasion of a visit of the author, in company with Sir Chas.
Lyell, and in the pursuit of these investigations, that one
of the most remarkable features of the section was dis-
closed in 1851. This is the occurrence, in the trunks of
certain trees imbedded in an erect position in the sand-
stones of Coal-mine Point, of remains of small reptiles,
which, with one exception, a specimen from the Pictou
coal-field, were the first ever discovered in the Carboniferous
rocks of the American continent, and are still the most
perfect examples known of a most interesting family of
coal-formation animals, intermediate in some respects be-
tween reptiles proper and batrachians, and known as Micro-
sauria, With these were found the first known Carbonif-
erous land-snails and millipedes. Very complete collections —
of these remains have been placed by the auther with his
other specimens in the Peter Redpath Museum of McGill
University. The manner in which these remains were
entombed may be stated as follows: |

A forest or grove of the large ribbed trees known as
Sigillarize was either submerged by subsidence, or, growing
on low ground, was invaded with the muddy waters of an
inundation, or successive inundations, so that the trunks
were buried to the depth of several feet. The projecting
tops having been removed by subaerial decay, the buried
stumps became hollow, while their hard outer bark re.
mained intact. They thus became hollow cylinders in a
vertical position and open at top. ‘Che surface having then
become dry land, covered with vegetation, was haunted by
small quadrupeds and other land animals, which from time
to time fell into the open holes, in some cases nine feet deep,

'* Report Geol. Survey of Canada,” 1844.

*“ Journal London Geological Society,” vol. x., pp. 1 et seq-, 1853; “ Acadian
Geology,” pp. 1&6 et seq.

Preliminary Note on Recent Discoveries. 3

and could not extricate themselves. On their death, and
the decomposition of their soft parts, their bones and other
hard portions remained in the bottom of the tree, inter-
mixed with any vegetable débris or soil washed in by rain).
and which formed thin layers separating successive animal
deposits from each other. Finally the area was again sub-
merged, or overflowed with water bearing sand and mud.
The hollow trees were filled to the top and their animal
contents thus sealed up. At length the material filling the
trees was by pressure and the access of cementing matter
hardened into stone, not infrequently harder than that of
the containing beds, and the whole being tilted to an angle
of 20°, and elevated into land exposed to the action of the
tides and waves, these singular coffins present themselves
as stony cylinders projecting from the cliff or reef, and can
be extracted and their contents studied.
_ The singular combination of accidents above detailed
was, of course, of very rare occurrence, and in point of fact
until the year 1893 these conditions were known to occur
in only one set of beds: under the thick-bedded sandstone
in Division 4, Section XV. Coal-group 15, of my section of
the South Joggins.'

In the spring of 1893, however, Mr. P. W. McNaughton,
of the Joggins Coal Mine, whu had been so kind as to watch
the exposures of trees in the cliff at my request, was so for-
tunate as to find two productive trees in beds considerably
below that which had afforded the previous discoveries.
According to Mr. McNaughton’s observations, the lowest of
these trees is in Division 4, Section XII., Coal-group 26, of
my section, or 414 feet lower in the series than the original
bed, and abeut 1,617 feet distant from it along the shore.
The intervening beds, besides sandstones, shales and under-
clays, include fifteen small seams of coal. and five beds of
bituminous limestone and calcareo-bituminous shale, so that
they must. represent a considerable lapse of time. The tree
was rooted in a shaly underclay, with coaly streaks and

1** Acadian Geology.’’

4 Cunadian Record of Sctence.

stigmaria roots. It was one 1 foot 11 inches in diameter .
near the base. Below this, as is often the case with erect
sigillarie, there was a slight swelling or bulb. The lower
part is imbedded in gray sandstone and shale for 5 feet 2
inches. Above this are 2 feet 6 inches of gray shale.
Above this is a sandstone 12 feet thick, but the tree pene-
trates this only about 8 inches, when it is broken off. Thus
the total remaining height is 8 feet 4 inches. The tree was
probably a ribbed Sigillaria, and the bark at the base is
unusually thick and rugged for trees of this kind. The
remains of woody matter contained in it have not yet been
examined microscopically. In the fi gure the tree is repre-
sented in its original vertical position, without reference
to the dip ( Fig. 1.) .

Five feet of the lower part of this tree are filled with
matter which must have been introduced into it while it
remained an open pit, accessible to land animals. This
material, while all probably introduced by rain-wash or
accidental falling from the surface, is of varied character,
At the bottom there is a layer of mineral charcoal about an
inch in thickness, and immediately above this is a black
shaly layer, with bones of small batrachians, remains of
millipedes and coprolitic matter. Above this is a hard ma-
terial, composed partly of indurated calcareous clay and
partly of vegetable fragments arranged in very irregular
layers, which have usually a shallow basin shape, being
hollowed toward the centre. This is partly an effect of
compression of the vegetable matter, and is partly caused
by the greater thickness of the earthy beds toward the
sides, a consequence of rain-wash from the surface. Here
and there, throughout this part of the stem, there are thin,
black, coaly or shaly bands marking surfaces of some dur-
ation. Toward the upper part of the productive five feet,
sandstone predominates, but there are still occasional dark
beds. Throughout all these layers there are animal re-
mains, which are, however, more abundant in the dark and
laminated beds. There is, more especially in the lower
part of the tree, much coprolitic matter, sometimes in dis-

wt Re

. a a ee
‘ 7 ¢ nae

*

Preliminary Note on Recent Discoveries S,

7/ stay
Uwe ets i, CEE Y nhhyt FUNY Y a Bae Tanne LOMAS OA Ee
Thee) eo. Mp NOOR ne, ary 4 ae i on te 4 AWD won TO V4 S026 Gy TP 4y
My
i ee “a 4 Y Ww /
“yt (AOS PA) RT; A y ne ‘e 7 Mi 4 Leo hp 4Uuwnt th ; s
wig \ eae Bae Lh 7. Ue Tp. foe SRG th Tt be

nou ° ig Ee eT Ty A ie
i, OT AM Ne Tale i Ce as) CD Ye a te Ly
er Ly : i

Loi (Pm PAM ee SET ee OTN Oe ee
Z
at h 4 ty 4 SLATE TC AIA TE GN LD
-
Tete 4
“ah LEGS LE LL io 47 yy 4, yy VASO Lien Ce OIE ADT BOT Le Se
CEO MDM EMR AEG. I z CIT aie
a

— — rl

——
ey
———— ——
—ee ee
erat Barer lar
F oe fa a
——
SS eae ey
eee
: —— ee
—— Ss

———
ee

—— cr hc lhl

— i See

AT TOTO

Fic. 1.—Section of tree No. 1, Division 4, Section XTI., Coal-group
26, of South Joggins section; as observed in situ By Mr P: We
McNaughton. (Scale 2 feet ts an inch.)

Enclosing Beds.—(1) Underclay ; (2) coaly layer; (4) alternations
of shale and sandstone, 6 feet 2 inches; (4) shale, 2. feet 6
inhes; (5) sandstone, 12 feet.

Filling of Trunk.—(A) Mineral charcoal: and thin carbonaceous
lamine. (B) Arenaceous and argillaceous matter, irregularly
bedded and with many vegetable fragments. (C) Sandy lay-
ers, depressed in centre, with occasional shaly bands and
vegetable fragments ; remains of land animals up to top of C.
(D) Barren sandstone, same with overlying bed.

6 Canadian. Record of Science.:

tinet layers, and rich in phosphate of calcium. Under the
lens it is seen to contain fragments of bones of smail reptiles .
and of chitinous matter of millipedes or insects. It is in
short in some places a very fine bone-breccia and in others
an indurated guano.

The whole of the material of this tree was carefully taken
out by Mr. McNaughton, with the aid of Mr. J. Devine,
and packed in boxes, keeping separate the lower, middle
and upper portions, and is now in process of being split up
and examined—-a work requiring much time and labour. So
far as yet observed, the species represented are Dendrerpeton
Acadianum and D. Oweni and Hylonomus Lyelli, which, as
in all trees hitherto examined; predominate in numbers.
Hylerpeton Dawsoni and H. longidentatum also occur, and }
there are bones which probably indicate two new species.
Pupa vetusta also occurs, though rarely, and there are
numerons fragmentary specimens of millipedes of the gen-
era Xylobias and Archiulus. This tree is remarkable above
all others hitherto found for the great thickness of the pro
ductive layers and the abundance of coprolitic matter,
which probably indicate that it remained open a long time,
and that some of the animals continued to live and subsist
on their feebler companions for some time after they fell -
into it. It results, however, from this that the bones of the
smaller species are much scattered. The devourers of.
these smaller animals would seem to have been the species |
of Dendrerpeton whose bones are least scattered, and in |
some ceses associated with carbonised cuticle. One speci-
men of Dendrerpeton Acadianum is the largest yet found, the
skull being '\4 inches in length. It may have been nearly
3 feet long, and could not therefore extend itself within its
prison. |

The second tree found by Mr. McNaughton is in Division
4, Section XIII, Group 20, of the Section. It is thus 203
feet 7 inches below the original bed at Coal-Mine Point, and
is about half way between this and the new tree in Group
26. Itis remarkable as standing on a bituminous shale,
one of the few beds of this kind which have been elevated

PRS ts ove

Preliminary Note on Recent Discoveries. 7

to constitute forest soils. It is 22 inches in diameter, and is
about seven in height; but only about 18 inches of the lower
part are productive, and are largely composed of a dark-
coloured laminated material, much damaged by the percola-
tion of ferruginous water. The enclosing beds are, in
ascending order, coarse shale and sandstone 3 feet, sand-
stone 4 feet, and beds of coal with shaly partings 2 feet.
The contents of this tree have as yet been only cursorily
examined, and though it contains. many small bones, these
are for the most part not in so good preservation as in the
other tree. They include specimens of Dendrerpeton and
Hylonomus.

It is probable that at least twenty batrachians found a
grave in the first mentioned tree. Among the vegetable
matter mixed with the bones, I have noticed fragments of
Lepidodendron and Calamites, and leaves of Cordaites and
ferns, and stems with numbers of rial roots of the type of
Psaronius ; but most are mere scraps of bark and decayed
wood, such as might drop in, or be washed i in from the sur-
face by rain.

On the whole the preliminary examination of these
trees does not indicate material change of fauna during the
deposition of fifteen successive coal-beds and their accom-
paniments. It would also seem to show that the trees
previously extracted, about thirty in number, have nearly
exhausted the terrestrial vertebrate fauna of the locality.

For descriptions of the species hitherto discovered in
these singular repositories ; reference may be made to the
author’s “Geology of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick and
Prince Edward Island,” chapter xviii., to his ‘‘Air-breathers
of the Coal Period,” and to his paper on ‘“ Erect Trees con-
taining Animal Remains” in the Transactions of the Royal

Society of London, Part IJ., 1882, and for a summary of the

facts to “Salient Points in the Science of the Earth,”
chapter x. More detailed notices of the fossils found in
the trees recently discovered will appear in the future.

8 Canadian Record of Science.

Our RECORD OF CANADIAN EARTHQUAKES.
By Sir J. Witi1am Dawson.

In the “Canadian Naturalist,” 1st series, vol. v., on
occasion of the earthquake of October 17, 1860, an account
was given by the writer of this article of all previously re-
corded. Canadian earthquakes, with remarks on their
periodicity, local peculiarities and probable causes. In the
same periodical, new series, vol. i., the record was kept
up to 1864. In vol. v. of the same series it was continued
to the earthquake of October 20, 1870; and in vol. viii.
to that of November 4, 1877, which was the most consider-
able since that of May, 1871. The severity of the shock of
Nov. 27th, 1893, has again attracted public attention to the
subject, and lurnishes a suitable occasion for continuing the
record.

Subsequently to 1877, the following earthquakes have
been noted at Montreal, but have not been recorded in this
journal. They are given as reported in the newspapers of
the time, and the dates are of course véry imperfect: —

1879—A pril 7—St. Paul’s Bay, at midnight, slight and local.
June 11—Montreal and elsewhere in the Province of
Quebec ; smart shock with rumbling noise.
Aug. 21—Various places in Ontario; slight shock (in
the morning.) |
1880— Feb. 8—Ottawa, slight shock. 7
April 3—Quebec and Ottawa, 10 p.m., slight.
Nov. 24—Quebec, 11.45, smart shock.
Nov. 29—Bay St. Paul, smart shock.
Dec. 30—Cap des Monts, smart shock.
1881—May 31—Lower St. Lawrence, at -L’ Islet, 4.30 a.m. ;
Murray Bay, 3.30 a.m.
1882 —Oct. 10—Montreal, at daybreak, slight.
Dec. 4—Various places in Ontario and Eastern Town-
ships of Quebec, smart shock; at Welland, 6.30 p.m.
1883—Jan. 1—Various places in the Maritime Provinces.
At St. John, four minutes before 10 a.m., slight.

Our Record of Canadian Earthquakes. 9

March 11—10h. 57m. and 11h. 7m.—Two distinct shocks
at Waterloo, P.Q., St. Johns and Cowansville (R).’
March 23—21h. 25m., at Huntington, P.Q., slight (R).

April 1—Hamilton, Ont., smart shock at Lh.

Oct. 15, Nov. 5, Nov. 22, Dec. 32—Slight shocks at
Point des Monts, P.Q. |

1884—Jan. 29—Three light shocks at Rothesay, near St.

John, N.B. (R).

Feb. 16—Very shght, Point des Monts, P.Q.

March i8—South-eastern Newfoundland (R).

Aug. 10—Strong in New England and Middle States,
light in Canada (R). |

Sept. 16—Moderate in Ohio and neighbouring States ;
felt slightly in Western Ontario (R).

Oct. 24, Oh. 14m.—Huntington, P.Q., slight.

1885— March 11, 10h. 57m.—Two very light shocks; 11h.
Tm., a third at St. Johns and Waterloo, P.Q., in a
severe snowstorm. ~

March 18, 19h. 45m.—Very light, at Point des Monts,

P.Q.
March 23—Very light and rumbling noise, various
places, P.Q.

April 16, 9h.—Light, St. Fidéle and Murray Bay, P.Q.
1886—This was a remarkable year for earthquakes and
voleanic eruptions. In June occurred the terrible
eruptions at Mount Taracuera, in New Zealand. On
July 23 there was a violent eruption of Cotopaxi,
in the Andes. On August 28 began the great.
series of earthquakes so destructive at Zante and
elsewhere in Greece, and which were felt through-
out the Mediterranean region. On August 31 and
following days occurred the severe earthquakes
which, centering at Charleston, South Carolina, ex.
tended over a great part of the United States, and
were felt slightly even in the Lake region of Canada.
From the observations of Prof. McLeod, of McGill

1 Those marked thus (R) are from the printed Reports of Prof. Rockwood, of
Princeton.

10 Canadian Record of Science.

University, it would appear that on “August 31
earthquake shocks were felt at Toronto, London, St.
Catharines and Petrolia, but none were recorded in
Eastern Canada; nor does the year 1886 appear to
have been one of unusual seismic activity in Canada.
- At Montreal it would appear that no earthquake
shock was observed in 1886. For the other slight.
shocks experienced in Canada in 1886 reference is
made to the report of Prof. McLeod, appended.
_1887—Murray Bay and elsewhere in the Lower St. Law-
rence, several slight shocks at different dates.
1888—Jany. 11—Ottawa Valley, several smart shocks.
Feby—Slight shock at Ottawa.
July 1—Montreal, slight shock.
Nov.—Lower St. Lawrence, several shocks at different
dates.
1890—Sept. 26—Montreal, 2.45 a.m., perceptible shock and
rumbling noise.
1892—July 26—10 p.m., observed by Dr. Ells between
Petite Nation and Lievre River, a smart shock.
1893—Nov. 24—Montreal (McGill College), 11.47 a.m,
Ottawa, as observed at Geological Survey, began
11 47’ 05” continued 15 seconds, ended 11 47’ 20”.
Several observers report it as double, the second
being most severe. Quebec, 11.47 a.m. At all the
above places the shock was asmart one, shaking
buildings and causing some alarm and displacing
unstable objects. As observed by Prof. McLeod at the
Observatory, McGill College, the barometer stood at
30 in. 15 and falling, the thermometer 24° 5’, the wind
was from the north-east and the sky overcast. The
vibration seemed to be propagated from the N. EH.
This was a shock sufficiently violent and widely ex-
tended to excite much public attention.

The following extracts from the newspapers show the
effects which the earthquake produced, as noticed at the
time in the public press. At 11.47 o’clock this forenoon,
the city and the country generally round about felt

‘ an S é ete ‘ at ‘ : .
t Jae ; ey =
\ ¥ - ’ :

/

Our Record of Canadian Earthquakes. 11
~< :
the most severe shock of earthquake that. has visited
this part of the continent for several yeasr. Buildings
rocked and trembled as if about to be thrown down
by the percussion of an explosion. At first came a
heaving sensation like that of a ship rising over a heavy
dead swell; the buildings creaked as if every joint and
fastening was being tested by some invisible force, and
then a dull, muffled deep-toned sound like that of a subter-
ranean explosion. The shock was felt from foundation to
turret of the most substantiaJly built edifice in the city, and
then came the settling back, and for an instant it felt as if
everything was going down—then a moment of suspense
and the earthquake had passed. Prof. McLeod, of McGill
Observatory, noted the time; it was just thirteen minutes
to twelve o’clock, and the shock apparently came from the
north-east and moved towards the south-west. It was dis-
tinctly felt in the Observatory and all through the College
buildings, but not so severely as in the lower part of the
city. Perhaps that part of the city situated along the brow
of the hill between Dorchester and St. Antoine street felt
the shock most distinctly, and there the people were the
most frightened. Many offices and public buildings were
rapidly emptied of their occupants, and in others persons
ran into the corridors, but had not time to get farther be-
fore the shock was over. As usual in such cases, animals
-were much frightened, and some horses on the cab stands
ran away.—(M ontreal Evening Papers, Nov. 27.)
OrmstowN—About this place the earthquake shock on
Monday appears to have been most severely felt. The
foundation and brick work of the school were cracked. The
iron bridge rattled and some stones fell out of the abut-
ments. John Ligget’s brick house was cracked in three
places. Cattle huddled together in great fright. Wells
were disturbed, some chimneys toppled over, and window
glass was broken. In Mr. Dewar’s drug shop some bottles
were upset and broken. Those who were in the woods state
that the ground had a waving motion for about a minute.
It was the heaviest earthquake for thirty-five years.

a Oahadian Record of Science.

VauDREUIL, P.Q.—Several chimneys were thrown down
and the walls of houses were cracked. The people were
much excited.

The earthquake seems to have been felt throughout Que- |

bec and Ontario and in the New England States and New
York. So far as appears from the newspaper accounts it
seems to have been most severe in Western Quebec and
Eastern Ontario.

In Montreal it was sufficiently violent to cause a percep-
tible movement in buildings, enough in many cases to
produces a panic among the inmates, the effect being de-
scribed as resembling that of a violent explosion within the
building, or the fall of some heavy object from the ceiling.
The higher buildings in the lower part of the city were
naturally the most affected, but no serious damage is re-
corded except in one instance, from the fall of planks from
a scaffolding. In a few instances cracks were produced in
the walls of buildings.

Dec. 1—Another shock was felt at several places on the
Lower St. Lawrence. Moisie, Labrador, 5 a.m.; Seven
Islands, Saguenay, 5.30 a.m. The shock is said to have
been strong.

The following hints as to recording the intensity of earth-
quake shocks, based upon the Rossi-Forel scale, adopted by
the Italian and Swiss seismologists, are taken from Prof.
Rockwood, for the benefit of future observers, (American
Journal of Science, July, 1886) :

General Designation. More Particular Classification.
( I. Recorded by a single seismograph
or by seismographs of the same
We econciamic shook ; model, but not putting in motion
} seismographs of different patterns ;
| reported by experienced observers
C > onhy:
( II. Shock recorded by several seis no-
graphs of different patterns; re-
ported by a small number of’ per-
Very light....:.:... 4 sons at rest.
{It. Shock reported by a number of
persons at rest; duration or’ direc-
| tion noted.

a:
Le

Our Record of Canadian Earthquakes. Lee &

IV. Shock reported by persons in mo-
tion; shaking of movable objects,
doors and windows; cracking of
ceilings.

( V. Shock felt generally by every one .
furniture shaken ; some bells rung;
VI. General awakening of sleepers;

Moderate :.-)...c.. 052% { general ringing of bells; swinging

: | of chandeliers ; stopping of clocks ;
visible swaying of trees; some per-

| sons run out of buildings.
( VII. Overturning of loose objects ; fall

Ae ; of plaster; striking of church bells;

ag rc argo } general fright, without damage to
| | buildings.

: : VIII. Fall of chimneys; cracks in the

OPE Cannes dct: ess | tralle of mailings

(1X. Partial or total destruction of
some buildings.
Destructive......... { X. Great disasters; overturning of
| rocks; fissures in the surface of the
| earth; mountain slides.

‘’o these may be added the following questions addressed
to the public, on behalf of the Geological Survey of the
United States, on occasion of the Charleston earthquake of
1886 (Science, Sept. 10, 1886) :

“1, At what hour, minute and second of standard time
was it felt? When this can be accurately given, it is of the
very greatest importance. Be particularly careful to state
whether it is standard (railway) time or local time; whether
the watch or clock was compared with sume standard clock
at a railway station or elsewnere, how soon, what the error
was, and whether you corrected your observation by this
comparison or not.

“2. How long did its perceptible motion continue ?

‘3. Was it accompanied by any unusual noise? If so,
describe it.

‘‘4. Was there more than one shock felt? If so, how
many? When several were felt, give accurately, or even
roughly, the number, duration and character of each, and
the interval between them. |

i

PIR rer sett rox

14 Canadian Record of Science.

“5. Which of the following measures of intensity would
best describe what happened in your vicinity ?—No. 1. Very
light; noticed by a few persons; not generally felt. No.
2. Light; felt by the majority of persons; rattling of win-
dows and crockery. No.3. Moderate ; sufficient to set sus-
pended objects, chandeliers, etc., swinging, or to overthrow
light objects. No. 4. Strong; sufficient to crack the plas-
ter in houses or to throw down some bricks from chimneys.
No. 5. Severe; overthrowing chimneys and injuring the
walls of houses.

“6. Do you know of any other cause for what happened
than an earthquake? Give also any further particulars of
interest, stating whether they are from observation or hear-
say: for instance, whether the shock seemed like a tremor
or jar, or an undulatory movement; and whether it seemed
to come horizontally or vertically; whether any idea of
direction of shock was formed, and if people agreed in their
idea as to such direction, Mention any unusual condition
of the atmosphere ; any strange effects on animals (it is
often said that they will feel the first tremors of a shock
before people notice it at all); character of damage to
buildings ; genera! direction in which walls, chimneys, etc.,

were overthrown. Springs, rivers and wells are often:

noticeably affected by even slight shocks, and such facts
are especially interesting. Ifa clock was stopped, give the
time it indicated, and some idea as to how fast or how slow
it was, its position, the direction in which it was standing
or facing, and the approximate weight and length of the
pendulum. Ifa chandelier was noticed toswing decidedly,
describe it and state direction of swing. If pictures swung,
state direction of wall, and whether pictures on the wall at
right angles to it were also putin motion. If doors were
closed or opened, state the direction of the wall in whi h
they were set. All such little facts, if noticed, remem-
bered and recorded, are of great value.”

_ By attending to these directions, persons of ordinary ob-
servation, and without the aid of instruments, may contri-
bute valuable information, which, if sent to the editors of

Y®RAR.

« nm
ewer

/

Our Record of Canadian Earthquakes. 15

this journal, or to the Meteorological Office at Toronto or
the Geological Survey, Ottawa, would probably be recorded.
Even if published in any local newspaper, it will be likely
to reach pers ns interested in the subject.

As to the causes and general phenomena of earthquakes,
and the best methods of observing them, reference may be
made to the excellent little work of Milne on ‘“‘ Earthquakes
and other Harth-movements,” (International Scientific
Series. )

The following record, consisting largely of reports to the
Meteorological office, Toronto, kindly furnished by Prof.
McLeod, of McGill College Observatory, is appended, as
containing many additional notices of slight and local shocks
between 1883 and 1894.

STATEMENT OF HARTHQUAKE SHOCKS FELT IN CANADA.

MontH &

Dax. PLACE.

1884.) March 18.) St. John, Nfld., Trinity Bay, Harbor Grace,
es Heart’s Content, Bay Robert and Holywood
at 1.30 to 1.45 p.m, movement north to south.
| Feby. 16.; Point des Monts, 9 a.m.
Sept. 19.| London, Ont., 3.21 p.m.
es Dresden, Oat., 3.20 p m.
Oct. 24.; Huntingdon, Que., 9 a-m.
Nov. 21.' Point des Monts, two shocks, 6.30 p.m. and
| during night.
“« 22.) Shock felt between St. Flavie and Gaspé last
night, lasting 45 to 50 seconds.
1885.| April 26.) Point des Monts, 5.30 a.m.
Feby. 5. Huntingdon, 0.20 a.m.
eee 3 do 0.30 p.m.
1886.| Feby. 13.| Port Hope, Ont.
March 16.) Victoria, B.C., 0.35 p.m.
__ “€ 21.) Point des Monts, 5 p.m.
May 16.;| do 10.25 a.m.
an a te do 2.30 p.m., strong.
Aug. 12.) St. Marguerite, St. Adele, St. Sauveur, shock
early in morning, lasting over six minutes.
“—_19.} Cooksville, Ont., 3 a.m., shock felt along banks
of Credit River.
“ _31.| Toronto, London, St. Catharines, and Petrolia,
shocks felt at 9.45 a.m.
Oct. 14.! Sydney, N.S., 10.30 p.m., lasting ten seconds.
“ _ 27.] Point des Monts, slight shock.
Sept. 2.| St. Catharines, Petrolia, Ont. '

1 There is no record of a shock at Montreal in 1886.

16

Canadian Record of Science.

HARTHQUAKE

YWPAR.

1887.

- 1888.

1889.
1890.

1891.

1893.

1894.

| Monta &

Day.

Jany. 7.

Feby. 15

sO ba
at, SO
| March 19.
June 30.

i

SHOCKS FELT IN CANADA.—Continued.

PLAcB.

Point des Monts, 6.40 a.m.
do 2.47 p.m.
St. Anne des Monts, 1.30 p.m., N.W. to S.E.
Point des Monts, 2.08 p.m.
do "5.59. p.m., strong.
Joly, Parry Sound, Ont., 11.45 p.m., W. to E.
do do 10.50 p.m. , slight.
Point des Monts, 10.20 p m.
Huntingdon, 2. 30 p.m., slight.
Pembroke, Ont., 4 a.m.
Ottawa, early morning.
Huntingdon, 4.30 p.m., slight.
River du Loup, 0.40 a.m., N. to S., 3 to 4 secs.
St. Paul’s Bay, 0.30 a.m., strong, 3 mins. (?,
Montreal, slight shock, 4.00 to 4.01 p.m
Shock felt in district between Belleville and
Kingston, ll p.m. Felt at Tamworth 11.15
p-m.; also at Newburgh, Moscow, Yarker
and Napanee.
Father Point, 9.26 a.m.
St. Flavie, 9.25 a.m., strong, 30 secs.
Trois Pistoles, 9.35 a.m. ; also at Rimouski.

Point des Monts, 8.30 p.m.

.| Montreal, slight shock at 3.3 a.m.

Meach Lake, 12 miles from Hull, Q., 5.30 p.m.

Esquimalt, B.C., two distinct shocks, 3.30 pm,
hOB. é - 3.50 p.m., EK. to W.

Esquimalt, B.C., 3.20 p-m.

Carmanah, 3.15 p.m., two shocks.

.| Masset, Queen Charlotte Island, sharp shock

at daybreak.
Alexandria, Ont., 11.49 a.m., sharp.
Montreal at 11. 47, sharp shock.

.| Godbout, Point des Monts, Pentecost, Seven

Islands and Moise, P.Q., between 4.07 and
4.30 a.m., lasting 10 seconds.
Toronto, 11 p.m., felt in eastern part.

fe eed ica» YT .
i Sah ae

Check-list. of European and N. A. Mosses. 17

CHECK-LIST OF EUROPEAN AND NortH AMERICAN
MossEs (Bryinez).
By N. Conr. Kinppere, PE. D.

While at work on my Catalogue of Canadian Plants, I
met with great difficulty in getting my collections of mosses
correctly named. After submitting them to various special-
ists for a series of years, I saw that as species multiplied the
confusion became greater, many diverse forms were being

placed together, and often no two bryologists agreed as to
. what certain specimens should be called. In fact, they

neither had time nor inclination to work up my material,
and so gave names without sufficient examination. In the
winter of 1886 Dr. Kindberg, of Linkceping, Sweden, took
the matter up and entered heartily into the work of making
careful examination of all my Canadian collections of
Mosses. Since then he has been able to bring comparative
order out of chaos. Part VI. of my Catalogue of Canadian
Plants, containing the Musci and including over two
hundred descriptions of new species, was in great part his
work. Since the publication of Part VI. he has been con-
tinuously engaged on a synopsis of the moss flora of North
America, and has one section— the Pleurocarpous Mosses—
written. The list now published is the outcome of that
work and is intended to show the mosses of both Europe
and America in a tabulated form.

As this list adds many names to my catalogue and alters
others and includes many species collected since its publica-
tion, | propose following the list with a series of papers on
Canadian Musci, which will include, besides Dr. Kindberg’s
work, that of Mrs. E. G. Britton of Columbia College, New
York, and the revisions of M. Jules Cardot of Stenay, France,
and others engaged in special work. The intention of the
writer is to see that Canadian Bryology will be kept abreast
of the times, although other duties cause him to pass the
microscopic work of examination into the hands of special.

ist who are more competent to do the work.
JOHN Macoun.
Ottawa, March 12th, 1894.
2

18 Canadian Record of Science.

Series l. PLEUROCARPOUS.
Tribe 1. HAPLOLEGRIDEOUS.

Endostome without longitudinal line or wanting.

Fam. 1. CRYPH# ACE.
1. Hedwigia, Ehrh.

ciliata (Brid.), Ehrh.
*subnuda, Kindb.—America.
imberbis (Nees et Hsch.), Spruce.
—Europe.
alopecura (Brid.), Kindb.—Eu-

rope.
californica(Lesq.), Kindb.—-Am-
erica.

2. Leucodon, Schwegr.

sciuroides (L.), Schw.
*morensis, Schw.—Europe.

brachypus, Brid.—America.
julaceus (L.), Sulliv.—America.

3. Lasia, Brid.
trichomitria (H.), Brid.-- Am-

erica.

floridana (Lindb.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

immersa (Mohr), Kindb,—Amer-
ica.

ohroensis (Sulliv.), C. M.—Amer-
ica.

nitida(Lindb.), Kindb.—America

Ravenellii (Aust.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

4. Cryphaa, Mohr.

arborea (L.), Lindb. —Europe.
*Lamyi, Montagne.—Europe.
pendula, Lesq. et Jam.—Amer-
ica.
glomerata, Schimp.— America.
nervosa (Hook.et Wilf.), Schimp.
—America.

5. Antitrichia, Brid.
curtipendula (l..), Brid.

gigantea (Sull. et Lesq.), Kindb.
—America.

tenella, Kindb.—America.
pseudo-californica (Hook. et
Arn.), Kindb.—America.

Fam. 2.. ANOMODONTACEZ.
6. Anomodon, Hook. et. Tayl.

nervosus (Brid.), Hueben.
Moseri, Kindb.—America.
heteroideus, Kindb.—America.
tectorum (Al. Braun), Kindb.
rostratus (H.), Schimp.
rigidulus, Kindb.—Europe.
californicus, Lesq.—America.
longifolius, C. J. Harton.—Eu-
rope.
attenuatus (Schreb.), Hueben.
viticulosus (L.), Hook. et Tayl.
apiculatus, Schimp.
platyphyllus, Kindb.—America.
obtusifolius, Schimp.—America.

Fam. 3. FABRONIACE.
7. Fabronia, Raddi.

pusilla, Raddi.

gymnostoma, Sull. et Lesq.—
America.

octablepharis (Schleich.), Schw.

Wrightii, Sulliv.—America.

Ravenellii, Sulliv.— America.

8. Clasmatodon, Hook. et Wils.
parvulus (Hampe), Sull.
rupestris (Sulliv. et Lesq.),
Kindb.— America.
9. Habrodon, Schimp.
perpusillus (De Not.), Lindb.
Fam. 4. LEPTODONTACE.

10. Leptodon, Mohr.
Smithvi (Dicks.), Mohr.—Europe.

Tribe 2, DIPLOLEPIDEOUS:
Endostome with longitudinal line.

Fam. 5. CLIMACIACEZ.
11. Porvtrichum, Brid.

Bigelowii (Sell.), Kindb.—Amer-
ica.

12. Taxithelium, Mitt.

planum (Brid.), Mitt.—-America,

"
ag oxi:

pe ba > *
= i pete
_- e ene

a*

Pare

“

“ 13. Thamnium, Schimp.

Toccoe (Sull. et Lesq.), Kindb.—

America.

~ Seale ),Kindb. _—Eu-

ao.

alopecurum (L.), Sehimp.—Eu-

“J Suaghiniense. ‘C. M.), Schimp.—

America.
Leibergii, Britton.—America.
angustifolium, Holt.
micro-alopecurum, Kindb.—Am-
erica.

14. Pleurozium (Sull.), Kindb.,
Le;

umbratum (Ehbrh.)
pyrenacium (Spruce).

flagellare (Dicks.).—Europe.
brevirostre (Ehrh.)

calvescens (Wils.).—Europe.
Schreberi ( Willd.)

purum (L.)—Europe.
megaptilum (Sull.)—America.
striatum (Schreb.)—Europe.
meridionale (De Not.)—Europe.

15. Pleuroziopsis, Kindb, n. g.
prolifera (L.) |

alaskana (James).
ruthenica (Weinm.)—America.

; triquetra (L.)

16. Alsia, Sulliv.

abietina (Hook.),Sull.— America.
longipes, Sull. et Lq.—America.

17. Climaciuwm, Web. et Mohr.

dendroides (L.), W. M.
americanum, Brid.—America.

18. Isothecium, Brid.

myur um | (Poll.), Brid.—Europe.
circinnans(Schimp, ), Sant.—Eu-

rope.
aplocladum, Mitt.—America.
brachycladon,Kindb.— America.
obtusatulum, Kindb.—America.

Breweri (Lesq.), Kindb.—Amer- |

ica.

*Howei, Kindb.—America. -
myurellum, Kindb.— Ameriea.
pleurozioides, Kindb.—America.
aggregatum, Mitt.—America.
myosuroides (L.), Brid.
tenuinerve, Kindb.

Peemeer te aye eh
4 KG | SG v3 ;
. BIST" ie tee

Check-list of European and N. A. Mosses. 19

Holtii, Kinab.—Europe.

striatulum eukase” Kindb.—
urope

Fess, aes (Hook.), Brid.—

America.

spiculiferum, Mitt.—America.
Cardoti, Kindb.—America.

19. Pterogonium, Swartz.
ornithopodioides(Huds.), Lindb.
20. Pterobryum, Hornsch.
cymbifolium (Sull.), Mitt.—Am-

erica.
Ludovicie (C. M.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

Fam. 6. HOOKERIACE.
21. Huokeria, Tayl.

leetevirens, Tayl.—Europe.
varians, Sull.—America.

22. Pterygophyllum, Brid.

lucens, (L.), Brid.
Sullivantii, C. M.—America.

23. Daltonia, Tay).

splachnoides, Hook. et Tayl.—
Europe.

Fam. 7. METEORIAC#-
24. Callicostella, C. M.

cruceana, (Dubq.), Sauerb. et

Jaq.—America.
25. Papillaria, C. M.
nigrescens (Sw.), Sb. et Jaq.—
America.
*Donnellii(Aust.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.
floridana (Aust.). Kindb. —Am-
erica.
26. Meteorium, Brid.
pendulum, Sull.—America.
Fam. 8. LESKEACEZ.
27. Thelia, Sulliv.

hirtella (H.), Sull.—America.
compacta, Kindb.—America.

ee

20) Canadian Record of Science.

robusta, Dubq. ~America.
asprella (Schimp.), Sull.—Amer-

ica.
Lescurii, Sull.—America,
28. Myurella, Bruch et Schimp.

julacea (Vill.), Br. eur.
*gracillima, Kindb.—Europe.

apiculata (Hueben.), Br. eur.

gracilis (Weinm.), Lindb.

29. Pterygynandrum, Hedw.

filiforme, Hedw.
*decipiens, W. M.—Europe.
*papillosulum, C. M. et Kindb.

30. Leskea, Hedw.

rivalis (Schimp.), Kindb.—Eu-
rope.

polycarpa, Ehrh.

obscura, H.—America.

cardoti, Kindb.—America.

subobtusifolia, C. M. et Kindb.—

brachyptera, (Mitt.), Kindb.—
America.

3). Heterocladium, Schimp.

procurrens (Mitt.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

aberrans, Ren. et Card.—-Amer-
ica.

dimorphum (Brid.), Br. eur.

Austini (Sull.), Kindb.— Amer-
ica.

triste (Cesati), Kindb.

frullaniopsis, C M. et Kindb.—
America.

32. Thuidiwm, Schimp.
a. Claopodium.

erispifolium, (Hook.), Kindb.—
America.
leuconeuron (Sull. et Lq.), Lesq.

—America.

Whipplei (Sull.), Kindb.—Am.-
erica.

laxifolium (Schw.), Kindb.—
America.
pseudo-pygmaeum
Kindb.— America,

(Schimp. ),

bh. Micro-Thuidium.

minutulum (H.), Br. eur.
erectum, Dubq.—America.

scitwm (P. B.), Aust.—America. |

gracile, Br. et Schimp.—Amer-
ica. :
“pallens, Lindb.-—-Europe.
*calyptratum, Sull.—_-America.
lignicola, Kindb.—-America.
punctulatum, De Not.—Europe.

c. Hu-Thuidium.

tamariscinum, (H.), Br. eur.—
Europe.

delicatulum (H.), Lindb.

recognitum (H.), Lindb.

Alleni, Aust.—America.

d. Hlodium.

abietinum (L.), Br. eur.
*nachycladon, Kindb.-America.
Blandowii, Web. et Mohr.
paludosum (Sulliv.), Kindb.—
America.
pseudo-abietinum, Kindb.—Aim-
erica.

33. Pseudoleskea, Br. eur.
rupestris (Bergyr.), Kindb.—Eu-

rope.

denticulata (Sull.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

occidentalis (Sull.), Kindb.—
America.

heteroptera (Bruch.), Schimp.

vancouveriensis, Kindb.—Amer-

ica.
papillosa (Lindb.), Schimp.—-Eu-

Be
Wolleit (Aust.), Kindb.—Amer-’

ica. ;
catenulata (Brid.), Br. eur.—Eu-

rope.

“laacifolia, Kindb.—Europe.
malacoclada, C. M. et Kindb.
pulchella (De Not.), Kindb,—Eu-

rope.
atrovirens (Dicks.), Br. eur.—
Europe.
*“filamentosa (Dichf.), Kindb,—
Europe.
ticinensis, Bottini.—Europe.
patens(Lindb.), Kindb.—Europe.
brachyclados (Schwegr.), Kindb.
—Europe.
*borealis, Kindb.—Europe.
rigescens (Wilf.), Lindb.--Amer-
1

ca.
atricha, Kindb.—America.
falcicuspis, C. M. et Kindb,—
America.
oligoclada, Kindb,—Ameriea.
sciuroides, Kindb.—-America.
*denudata, Kindb.— America.

stenophylla, Ren. et Card.—Am-
erica.

algamica (Schimp.), Kindb.—
Europe.

Fam. 9. NECKERACEA.

34. ITypnella, C. M.

Wrightit (Sulliv.), Sb. et Jog.—

America.

35. Neckera, Hedw.

Menziesii, Drumm.—America.
*amblyclada,Kinab.— America.

turgida, Yur.—Europe.

Douglasii, Hook.—America.

crispa (L.), Hedw.—Europe.

pennata (L.), Hedw.

oligocarpa, Bruch.

pterantha, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

pumila, Hedw.

complanata (1.), Hueben.

tenella, Kindb.—Europe.

gracilis (Jam.), Kindb.—Amer-
ica.

Besseri (Lobarz. ), Zur.— Europe.

36. Homalia, Brid.

lusitanica, Schimp.— Europe.

8 trichomanoides (Schreb.), Brid.

Europe.
Jamesvi, Schimp.—America.
Macounii, C. M. et. Kindb.—
America.

37. Neckeropsis, Reichardt.
undulata (H.), Reichdt.— Amer-
ica.
disticha (H.), Kindb.— America.

Fam. 10. HYPNACE.

38. Orthothecium, Schimp.

chryseum (Schwegr.), Br. eur.
r ufescens (Dichf.), Schimp.
*complanatum, Kindb. -Europe.
rubellum (Mitt.), Kindb.—Eu-
rope.
*strictum, Lor.
intricatum, C. J. Hartin.

39. Macouniella, Kindb., n.g.
californica (Sull.), Kindb.

Check-list of European and N. A. Mosses. 21

40 Myrinia Schimp.

pulvinata (Wahlenb.), Schimp.

corticola Kindb.— America.

Dreckii Ren et Card.— America.

subcapillata (H.), Kindb.—
America.

41 Entodon C.M.
orthocarpus (Dela Pet.), Lindb.

Drummondii (Br. et Sch.),
Kindb.—Amecica.

Macounti -C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

acicularis C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

cladorhizans (Hidw.), C. M.—
America.

*minutipes Kindb.--America.

Schleicheri (Schimp), Kindb. —
America.

*transsilvanicus Demeter.--Eu-
rope.

compressus(H.), C.M.—-America.

brevisetum (Hook et Wig.),
Kindb.—-America.

seductrix (H.), C. M.—America.

Sullivantii C. M.—America.

subflaceus C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

42 Platygyrum Schimp.

repens (Bird.) ,—Schimp.
brachycladon (Bir d.),—Kindb.—
America.

43 Pylaisia Schimp.

intricata C. M. et Kindb.-—Am-
erica.

ontariensis C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

Selwynii Kindb.— America.

heteromalla Br. et Sch.—Amer-
ica.

pseudo-platygyrium Kindb.—
America.

filari-acuminata C. M. et Kind.

—America.
polyanthos (Schri'.), Schimp.
suecica (Schimp), Lindb. —Eur-
ope.
‘ena Kindb. Site
alpicola (Lindb.), Kindb.—Eur-
ope.

44 Pylaisiella Kindb., n. 2

velutina(Schimp.), Kindb.— Am-
erica.

22 Canadian Record of Science.

subdenticulata (Schimp), Kindb.
—America.

45 Tripterocladium C. M.

ecompressulum C. M.—America.
deucocladulum C. M.—America.
rupestre Kindb.—America.

46 Lescurwa Schimp.

striata (Schw.), Sch.—-Europe.
*saxicola Molendo,~ Europe.
imperfecta C. M. et Kindb.

47 Platyloma Kindb., n

Lescurii (Sull.), Kindb.—-Amer-
ica.

48 Amblystegium Schimp.

compactum C. M.—America.
subcompactum C. M. et Kindb.
—America.
dissitifolium Kindb.—America.
varium (H.), Lindb.—
*orthocladon. (P. B.), Kindb.-
America.
*radicale (P. B.), Br. eur. —Eur-

Aor ah Ganteuan Lindb.

*“Yuratzke Shimp.

eplophylire Schimp. eas
serpens (L.), Br. eur.

*Columbie Kindb.—America.
speirophyllum Kindb.— America
distantifolium WKindb.—Kindb. |

America.
Senestratum Kindb.—America.
Sprucei Bruch.

*minutissimum Sull. et Lg.
subtile (H) Br. eur.
tenuissimum Guemb.—Europe.
confervoides (Brod.), Br. eur.
pseudo-confervoides Kindb.—

America.
adnatum(H.), Kindb.—-America.
hispidulum (Brid.), Kindb. _
Sommerfeltii (Myrin), Kindb.
*byssirameum C.M., et Kindb.—
America.

49 Eurhynchium Schimp.
a. Stokesiella.

prolongum (L.), Schimp.
*abbreviatum ‘Schimp. ~Europe.
*hians (Hedw.), Lindb.

pumilum (Wilf.), Schimp.—Eur-
ope. .

ticinense Kindb.— Europe.
Bolanderi (Lesq.), Kindb.—Am-
erica,
Stokesii (Turn.), Br. eur.
*pseudo-speciosum Kindb.-Am-
erica.
oreganum (Sull.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.
speciosum (Brid.), Br. eur. —Eur-
ope.
Dawsoni Kindb.— America.
velutinoides (Bruch),—Europe.
*Villardi Ren. et Card.-—Amer-
ica.

b. Pseudo-Rhynchostegium.

rotundifolium (Scop.), Milde.—
Europe.

styriacum (Limpr.
Kindb.—Europe.

murale (Nesk.), Milde.--Europe.

confectum (Dichf.), Milde.—Eur-
ope.

rusciforme (Weis.), Milde.

subintegrifolium
erica.

megapolitanum (Bland.), Milde.
—Kurope.

serrula tum (H.), Kindb.—-Amer-
ica.

*eriense Kindb.— America.
*hispidifolium Kindb.—Amer-
ica.

et. Bricol.),

revelstokiense Kindb.—-Ameriea.

c. Leiopodium.

collinum (Sehleitz.), Kindb.
Bryhnii (Kaur.), Kindb.—Eur-

ope.

pseudo-collinum Kindb.—Amer-
ica

a Kindb. —Amer-

re Pree: (C. M.), Kindb. —Amer-
ica.

strigosum (Hoffm.), Br. eur.
*nroecox (H.), Kindb.
“diversifolium Br. eur.

substrigosum Kindb.—-America.

d. Illecebrina.

cespitosum (Wilf.), Kindb.
Macounii Kindb.—America.
illecebrum (P. B.), Kindb.
obtusifolium (Drum.), Kindb.—

e. Scabridaria.

Sullivantii (Spruce), Kindb.—

America.

Kindb. Ais

subscabridum Kindb. —~America

scabridum Lindb.—Europe.

chloropterum C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

Nove-Angliew (Sull. et Lesq.),
Kindb.—America.

J. Starkeella.

reflecum (Starke), Kindb.
Starkei (Brid.), Kindb.
oedipodium (Mitt.), Kindb.
glaciale (C. Harton), Kindb.
Roellii Ren. et Card.—-America.
scleropus Schimp.—Europe.

pseudo-serrulatum Kindb.--Am-

erica.

- Contributions to Canadian Botany. 23

*nanopes C. M. et Kindb.—Am-
erica.

erythrorhizon (Harton), Kindb.
*Thedenii (Harton), Kindb.

harpidioides C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

semiasperum C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

50 Rhynchostegium Schimp.

depressum Bruch.— Europe.

geophilum Aust.— America.

deplanatum (Schimp), Kindb.-—

membranosum Kindb.—Amer-
ica.

pratense (Koch), Kindb.

lentum (Mitt.), Kindb.—Amer-

ica pseudo-pratense Kindb.—Amer-

ica.
g. Brachythesiopsis.

populeum (H.), Kindb.
\

CONTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN Botany.
By Jas. M. Macoun.
7:

Since the publication in 1890 of Part V. of Prof. John
Macoun’s Catalogue of Canadian Plants the geographical
range of many species has been extended, many additional
species have been added to the Flora of Canada and nota
few species and varieties have been discovered that have
proved new to science.

A record of these later discoveries has been kept by the
writer and it is proposed in these papers to publish such
notes as it is thought will prove of general interest to
botanists.

This plan will exclude such facts as are of local interest
only. That a plant common in various parts of Ontario,
for example, should have been found in another part in
which it was not known to grow, will not be considered of
sufficient general interest to be recorded here but when the
plant is quite new to the country, of extreme rarity, or of
very restricted distribution new stations for it will be con-
sidered worthy of record and when pos-ible its habitat,
mode of growth etc., will also be given.

24 Canadian Record of Science.

Descriptions of new species will also be published, and
where recent revisions of genera or orders have made note-
worthy changes in the nomenclature of Canadian plants,
corrections will be made in the work already done.

Aconitum CoLumMBraNnuMm, Nutt.

This beautiful aconite was first collected in Canada by
Mr. Jas. McEvoy between Stump and Chaperon Lakes
South of Kamloops, B. C. Mr. McEvoy describes it as
growing in rich soil in open spaces between thickets and
as being frequently found three feet in height. It was
afterwards noted by Mr. McEvoy in several localities
between the Spullamacheen or Shuswap River and where
it was first found by him.

BRASSENIA PELTATA, Pursh.

Common in Kastern Canada ; collected in Langford Lake,
Varcouver Island and in 1893 in Stanley Park, Vancouver,
B. C., not before recorded from Western Canada.

CARDAMINE BELLIDIFOLIA, Linn.

Until 1890 this little cress had not been collected in
Canada since the time of Franklin’s Second Journey when
it was found in the Rocky Mountains by Drummond and
the arctic regions by Dr. Richardson, In 1890 it was dis-
covered by the writer on Avalanche Mt. near Roger’s Pass
in the Selkirk Mountains, B. C., at 7,500 ft. altitude. But
tive specimens in all were found, none of them exceeding
an inch in height. They were growing in mud close to a
rock over which water continually trickled. A few spe-
cimens of this species were also found by Prof. Macoun on
Mt. Aylmer, Devil’s Lake, Rocky Mts. in 1891, alt. 8000 ft.

LEPEDIUM oxycARPuM, T. & G.

Specimens of a reduced form of this plant were collected
in 1893 by Prof. Macoun at Cadboro Bay near Victoria
Van. Island. New to Canada.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 25

THYSANOCARPUS PUSILLUS, Hook.

Common in parts of Vancouver Island but not found in
Brit. Columbia until 1890 when it was collected at Sproat
on the Columbia River by Prof. Macoun.

CLAYTONIA CORDIFOLIA, Wat.

Found by Prof. Macoun at an attitude of 5000 ft. on the
mountains near Warm Springs, Kootanie Lake, B. C.
New to Canada.

KLATINE AMERICANA, Arn.

In his catalogue of Canadian Plants Prof. Macoun gives
but one station for this species—-Long Lake in Assinaboia.
During the past four years it has been found in widly
separated localities so that we may now safely say that
though of local occurrence it ranges in Canada from the
Atlantic to the Pacific. New stations for this species are
Tadousac Lake, Que. (Geo. G. Kennedy.) Hull, Que., and
Alberni, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.) Port Sandfield,
Muskoka, Ont. (Dr. and Mrs. Britton and Miss Timmerman.)

ASTRAGALUS LEUCOPSIS, Torr.

One clump of this plant was found by Prof. Macoun near
Nanaimo, Van. Island in 1893. The seed was doubtless
brought from California in ballast.

LUDWIGIA ALTERNIFOLIA, L.

Collected by Mr. Alex. Wherry of Windsor, Ont. in
1893. Mr. Wherry writes:—“ It is found in low rich,

swampy ground generally meadows and pastures, about

2 miles west of Sandwich, Ont.; also within half mile of
Windsor, Ont. Quite common in these places but not met
with elsewhere by me.”

This species is credited to Canada in Torrey & Gray’s
Flora and in Hooker’s Flora but no localities are mentioned.
Both this and the next species are common in Michigan
and that they have been so recently found on the Canadian

- side of the Detroit River in a region that has been well

26 Canadian Record of Science.

botanized may go to show that they are extending their
limits. ‘

LUDWIGIA POLYCARPA, Short & Peter.

Found by Prof. Macoun in 1891, growing in ditches and
along the railway track near Amherstburg, Ont.

GRINDELIA SQUARROSA, Duval.

This common prairie plant has become naturalized in the
vicinity of Skead’s Mills near Ottawa, Ont., where it was
found by Mr. Wm. Scott in 1890, the seed having been
doubtless brought from the west either in grain or attached
to cars of the Canadian Pacific Railway.

ApLopappus LYALLI, Gray.

This plant is probably to be found on most of the higher
mountains in British Columbia but was overlooked until
1890, when it was collected in the Gold Range by Mr. Jas.
McEvoy and by the writer on a high mountain near
Kicking Horse Lake in the Rocky Mountains.

That it was not collected before, is I believe to be
attributed to its close resemblance to a form of Solidago
multiradiata var. scopulorum, Gray, Common on all the
mountains in British Columbia with which it was growing
when found by me. With it Aplopappus Brandegei also
grew and it was while collecting specimens of this plant
that I noticed what appeared to be two forms of the
Solidago referred to, but one of which proved on examin-
ation to be A. Lyallii.

This species was again found by Prof. Macoun in August,
1891, in abundance on the mountains around Lake Agnes,
near Laggan, Rocky Mountains.

ASTER STENOMERES, Gray.

Until 1890 confined, so far as known, to Idaho and
Montana. In that year young plants were found by Prof.
Macoun on a mountain near the Columbia River at Sproat,
B. C., they were brought to camp, placed in water and at
the end of a week were in full bloom.

*

Composition of Limestones and Dolomites. 27

Arnica Parryl, Gray.

Collected first at Kicking Horse Lake in the Rocky
Mountains by Prof. Macoun in 1885, but referred to A.
foliosa. Again collected at the same place in 1890, and

correctly determined and afterwards in 1891 at Lake Agnes
‘and Lake Louise near Laggan, Rocky Mountains. New

to Canada.

HEMICARPHA SUBSQUARROSA, Nees.

This minute sedge was found in 1891 by Prof. Macoun
growing in damp sandy soil near Amherstburg, Ont. New —
to Canada.

THE COMPOSITION OF LIMESTONES AND DOLOMITES
FROM A NUMBER OF GEOLOGICAL HORIZONS
IN CANADA.
By B. J. Harrineton, B.A., Ph. D.

The followibg analyses of limestones and dolomites from
various localities in Canada have been brought together in
the hope that they may be of interest to students of geology
or of value for technical purposes. Some of them have
appeared in previous papers or reports by the writer, but

others are now published for the first time. In some cases

they are incomplete, the main object as a rule having been
to ascertain the proportions of calcium and magnesium car-
bonates. .They are arranged in the order of the geological
formations: from which they are supposed to have been
derived, — 3 |

CAMBRIAN ?

1. From about six miles above Yale on the Fraser River,
British Columbia. The limestone at this locality is white
and crystalline, and occurs interstratified with grey gneiss,
A specimen collected by the writer was found to contain :

A ALONE CAV DORAUG henna cise of wu shaveetevar, s¥' cad aye tee 91.55
PEATE IMIEM Ws: ty urs cat 8 cic ng een eee din ogee wetter koko
Ferrous Paes tahoe die aun tAt 2 eam seach 0.16
MERIUTA se Chemin: ccd eis oot aN nbiet sce been a 0527
MCU IG TIS ULE tisthoreres boa cab hatte le oie Ride wle Sos oa 5.62

28 Canadian Record of Science.

A small quantity of the stone has been used for making
lime.

_ Levis Formation. (Siluro-Cambrian.)

2. From Little Metis Bay on the Lower St. Lawrence,
where thin bands of impure rusty-weathering dolomite are
interstratified with black shales. A specimen from one of
these bands gave on analysis:

Calcium carbonate .....e. ..cceeees eevee: es» sO Ta
Magnesium Soi ccseteerelds BN irs 7. oe aa
Ferrous “& a adit tetuteh gute: Bibel rei al inre ocula!s vat State Re

Insoluble, maiter..ccrecr ae a evo ee

98.72
It was in the black shales of this locality that the fossil

sponges'described by Sir William Dawson and Dr. Hinde
were discovered.

3. From the third range of Wickham, in the Eastern
Townships. <A_blackish-grey limestone with somewhat
conchoidal fracture. The dark colour is due to the presence
of a little carbonaceous matter, which, however, burns away
during calcination, leaving a buff-coloured lime from which
gelatinous silica separates on treatment with hydrochloric
acid. Analysis gave: |

Calcivim’ carbonate 2.2 . ois ists 40 ao oe oe te ee 70.53
Maoresiuin io. ss vee | wees alent, tienen kam
Ferrous Je EAT SUA ay a Sete ty Soy he 98 3.02
Aluniiniags saved bis te. a ao idee that ele nee ete ee
GRC: aid 0 Ze Clk Se: ALE cds bebe 2 ee ee eee 15.95
Carbonaceous matter-........... ~ Ae ass, e ds e

100.12

4 The limestone used in the blast-furnace at Drummond-
ville, P.Q., and probably from the Levis formation of that
region, Analysis gave;

Calcium’ carbomate ssi i< i) isc So cada woe. alee oe ee ete 52.12
Maenesium (96 geile es caren nines ant ero Araigs 3.86
Ferrous SE a RO ete ees a APE aA oY oy by es 4.82
Adnming : . .. sw bas Sree aca e abner eee 2.93
insoluble matter. sos acs. ane wees ue he teehee ke 35.50
ten ERE Cee coe Cire Aes (SR ie See traces

99.23

Composition of Limestones and Dolomites. 29

CALOIFEROUS FORMATION.

5. From the township of Rigaud, near to the Riviere a la
Graisse and also to the boundary line between Quebec and
Ontario. A hard rusty-weathering dolomite supposed to
be from the Calciferous formation. Its analysis gave :

Calcium CAFDONAGEH s< < ci0 8) 6g. 04a ire eee oo 39 9]
Mee NOSLUMD 8 ol Sega sjere< a.s SEE Oe PN the een 32.85
Pela WAITING ANC TCRPIC UOX10C160 00 «cc» aceceo oo cepnaa- oO
Emme HIG TIVGEUAT? & oo) i esl caches wid Garces a. nani ace a 23.54
99.86
The insoluble portion contained,

eT ie eel ee coghs lea aydcge calc ri sy wat aad decd hy see ee pace 76.34
APIA AOOMOITIC ORIG oo-e 5a veceesscs peeeseverev nee 14.74
MUA it otare cies tachi Uae y Greate cdeeasengnes cdubdeord Og
UMESIRGS Aa WAN pas tho) < occ dsm kv ute (esbhnes seamcadene seme ds © « 4.99
100.09

6. McNab, Ontario, Range III, lot Il. .A compact, dark
brownish-grey limestone with conchoidal fracture. It was
found to contain :

Waleiu ny CaTHONAates oe oes serene cote stances 81.78
Magnesium “_ ........ Sika lola haus Are ia glare haw bites 13.68

The stone is somewhat fossiliferous and probably less
magnesian than the average material from the Calciferous.
It has been used for building purposes at Arnprior.

7. MeNab, Ontario, Range XIV, lot IX. From close to
the shore of Lac des Chats on the Ottawa, and about two
miles above the mouth of the Madawaska. A compact _
brownish-grey dolomite dotted with occasional crystals of

; white calcite. A. partial analysis gave :

ey ‘
wv POA IGUM CAT DOMALO! « sie/s'b.0 enc olen nn: De arn aes 53.00.
[ MPPMMUOBULIE ACh a kate do daa 05 Liaise yg’ bine caw aed 43.88
>

From the same set of beds as No. 6, but considerably
lower in the formation.

CHAZY FORMATION.

8. Pembroke, Ontario, Range I, lot XII. Compact, light

30 Canadian Record of Science.

brownish-grey limestone, with conchoidal fracture. Ana-
lysis gave:

Calerith. Cat DOnate so cscre d oss senshi ce Beneeoaeee eae 83.96
Mi aperitif oo Saad smtnge ervicaci'eo da ins Sn SoRatsaneecanneas 9.29
Ferrous Fo WE NAME ok «Scions cats Sept eeeeeea ee 0.69
Tridolat bie raster 2h cei eis nnn fsncces dls capastesence eae

100.00

The stone occurs in beds from six to eighteen inches
thick and has been used for building purposes.

BLack River: FORMATION.

9. From the ‘ Rockland Quarry,” on the bank of the
Ottawa River, two miles south-east of Rockland Village,
Clarence County, Ontario. A very compact grey limestone
containing a little carbonaceous matter. A specimen with
specific gravity 2.704 was found to contain:

Caleitim /Carbona te <icc..25.5<<2.2 cosecaentanncawiens saseaeaes 94.70
Magnesiatin s: S03 lu, .csa(asssrecasensiges xohcenenaeemeen 2.37
Ferrous Pik) Sudans wait oaebeeapvasnscas acer dtm mere 0.18
Insoluble (including carbonaceous matter)......... 2.78

100.00

This is an excellent stone both for structural purposes
and for making lime. _It is classed here as from the Black
River formation, but according to Dr. Ami the beds at the
quarry belong in part to the Trenton, and a sharp line
cannot be drawn between the two formations.

TRENTON FORMATION ?

10. From Mount Royal Park, Montreal, a short distance
north-east of the Park-keeper’s house. A white to grey lime-
stone whose crystalline texture has no doubt bcen induced
by thermal action in connection with the eruptive mass of
Mount Royal. A specimen of this limestone was found to
have a specific gravity of 2.768 and gave on analysis :

Lime ere ci ee Ne i eee Se 42.07
Wig en SB ath. be seconds vsBis 2 a sbinwep cet eae aetee 1.85
FOrrotis GRIGG. siecle vas ss cata ctee FOE ee ee 1-15
Adominais. cea tckeds eet ee eee . 2.96
Carbon diowitiG seers ccSs ceca eee eee ee 29.83
NHLLIGA vice vasncehs sok sapatcnndbeeenel sie’. cck eek eee eee ee 22.19

MOIStUT Gs fisicho aoe nchc ne Tedeaee tents eee . 0.06

Composition of Limestones and Dolomites. 31

This analysis was made by Mr. Herbert Molson, student

_ in Applied Science.

NIAGARA FORMATION. ;
11. Grimsby, Ontario. Brownish-grey dolomitic lime
stone, holding a few fossils. Analysis gave:

@aleitim:. Carbonate «. «. + ccs Socewcisss shit ries 68.92
PAE MOMENT ai TGF cere ees a ne a a'c os PE 29.48
Ferrous TAS SE ee I Rn oly oP a er 1.10
TRMOIODNG: PIAEOT ie ao. fie hind Vo el cuca es Pee hie OOO

100.00

12. Dundas, Ontario. Brownish-grey compact dolomite,
A specimen was found to contain:

Calcium carbonate.......... a Seah ee ae 51.85
Meaeennenis tere os oiks so Syren dan so sw ora tape eve 0 41.65
Ferrous oD MRE Pe ons CaS (pia ae gee i Oe ee an 0.62
eRRMIN EEN GS FINGET EGE Ss. 25n.c coke asale twice OSs bos Gita wave at's 5.88

100.00

CARBONIFEROUS ?

13. From the Thompson River, British Columbia, 185
miles above Vancouver and about seven miles above Spence’s
Bridge. A thick bed of grey limestone, well suited for
making lime, exposed in a cutting on the line of the Canada
Pacific Railway. Analysis of a specimen collected by the
writer gave:

Be AIPIIIT CEPHONAGOs fe aids hs oe paced meee wees e o00 97.81
UCNCR IGEN ph hicks Ricia vets eae ts wth ev iG Kise St6 1.08
Ferrous 2 gil Mian EMRES ae Bese Lea tes: 0.72
PEM or oa Lice ick Ges © 15.208 Soe owe eo wes 0.14
esaeve abs GALA NGAUS 0) ky ae cla he Lo elas aes Be oh 0.90

100.65

PERMO-CARBONIFEROUS.

14. From Miminigash on the west coast of Prince Edward
Island. A reddish-grey limestone containing less insoluble
matter than most of the limestones found on the Island.
Analysis of a specimen gave :

AGG? Cah OTURION hole oct see ca Rk. nes eh ae 78.07
SE MNOMLELTTN ait ATG AC Yas. 4) wAvanty ven Sag op tabases aadodewes ono
MMGITING ANC (ATTIC OXIME... <ce f cols es acess Beeanecen 2.69
Insoluble matter............ nt bay hal Re ke UE oh 15.49

99.76

32 : Canadian Record of Science.

15. From New Londun, Prince Edward Island. One of
the reddish “ conglomerate limestones,” occurring in many
localities on the Island. Composition:

Galel ais Carbonate iicicmantas te 05's». ew pea eee 59.52
Mimenne tiny pe 50, etait. asec ale 6. Sip be Rete 1.04
Alumina and ferric oxide........ 2... as ele-e hE 2.47
Thsoluble Matters vse tse wes wees oo ete eceee dd-02

98 .55

16. From Kildare, Prince Edward Island. A red con-
glomerate magnesian limestone, occurring in association
with the red sandstones and shales of Kildare. Analysis gave :

Calon Cat bOnate ss oie. Gahsee ee eek © cso ee - 44.00
Magnesium “..... aS ee Palsicie wp stiles 22.93
Ajgmine. and-forvic OIG. <>. esas00s 0.0 oe uioc, s 3.73
Tneoluble: matter 2. Cees ce es wo ow ow hoe a bites ALOU
97.25

TRIASSIC.

17. Peace River, British Columbia. *Blackish-grey car-
bonaceous limestone, containing fragments of Monotis sub-
circularis, A specimen collected by Dr. Selwyn was found
to have aspecific gravity of 2.67, and gave on analysis :

Galcium! Ganbonate ac siccs oc ccs Sie 6 chine ea SORT.
Magnesium: 6 Sree ii sye ee oie So cle s apni’ aaa mena 5.85
Ferrous Py nig teig CANS Ghorvipiale Aig een ee ie tawie -» 0.85
THRONE WAAELSN. 405555 ooo) oe voleseis aloe Bower eee 42.26
Carbonaceous matter, water and logs............ 2DT

1u0.00

18. Peace River. Another specimen from the same region
as the last was lighter in colour, being less carbonaceous, but
also very impure. It was collected by Dr. Selwyn and its
analysis gave :

Calcium: carbonates 3.1) siren feds is. Go deteaicete i BBLOR

Diapnesiwm, 408 ada ctsen = birtitoueseeesen aay 7.59

Ferrous - Sets Wea aielha. ae cae lone tert eaee. a ae

Ensoluble wiatlens. <bssier fev k.s See Melewel mate eee 13

Carbonaceous matter, water and loss........... 1.16
+

100.00

* See Rept. Geol. Survey of Canada 1875-76 p. 75, and 1876-77 p. 485.

Nore.—In numbers 5, 14, 15, 16, the iron in the soluble portion of the rock
may have been present partly or "entirely as carbonate. The “insoluble matter”
of the analysis is the portion that did not dissolve in boiling for about half an
hour in hydrochloric acid.

= |

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 33

ON THE FORMATION OF PEGMATITE VEINS.
By Prof. W. C. Broacer, of Stockholm, Sweden.
(Translated from “Die Mineralien der Syenitpegmatitgange der

siidnorwegischen Augit und Nephelinsyenite,” by Nevin
Norton Evans, M. A. 8c.) !

As reviews of the older opinions with regard to the ori-
gin of pegmatite veins have already been presented by
several authors,” it seems to me unnecessary to refer to these
in detail, and I shall, therefore, leave unnoticed those which
have no probability and which are held by no one at the
present time, * and consider only the principal and more
rational views concerning them.

Many of the older authorities considered pegmatite veins
to be simply eruptive injections; to them, acid granitic
pegmatite veins were almost the only ones known, and
therefore their statements refer almost entirely to such acid
veins. Charpentier, in 1823, (in his ‘‘ Essai sur la constit.
géeogn. d. Pyrénés”) expressed the perfectly correct view,
according to my opinion, that the granite pegmatites are
fissure-veins “ which were formed immediately or very soon
after the solidification of the granite enclosing them”
(quoted from Naumann, |. ¢., p. 232) ; they were, therefore,
“injections of granitic material, which, originating in the
still fluid granite deep down, were pressed into the cracks
of the already solidified granite above—after-births, as it
were, of the same granite formation in the district of which
they occur.” (Naumann, l. c.)

1 One of the most important contributions which has been made in recent years
to our knowledge of the igneous rocks, is the summary by Prof. Brogger, of the
results of his admirable and long continued studies in the Christiania district,
which appears in the first part of this book. As the question of the true origin of
pegmatite veins is one of great importance tothe right understanding of many
facts in connection with our Archean geology, it has been thought well to present
a translation of the chapter which deals with the general conclusions reached by
Prof. Brogger concerning these veins, referring the reader tothe monograph itself
for a detailed statement of the evidence on which these views were based.

2e.g.C. F. Naumann, ‘‘ Lehrbuch d. Geognosie,’’ 1862, 2, 231-233; F. Klock-
mann, ‘‘ Beitrag z. Kenntn. d. granit. Gesteine d. Riesengebirges,’’ Zeitschr. d.d.-
geol. Ges. 1882, 34, 405-406, etc.

3 With regard to the views of Alluaud, Ramond, Carne, etc., see Naumann, I. c.,
p. 282; with regard to Garrigous’s views, see Bull. d. 1. soc. géol. d. France, Ser.
III. § ,1.

3

34 Canadian Record of Science.

The essential features of pegmatite formation seem to me
to be expressed in the above quotation with remarkable
clearness and distinctness. With this view of Charpentier’s
most of the succeeding authorities seem to have come into
accord (such as De la Beche, Angelot, Bronn, G. Rose,’ C.
F. Naumann, K.W. v. Giimbel, Th. Kjerulf, etc.) ; in France,
this view appears still to be very generally accepted. ”

In opposition to this conception are the views with re-
gard to the genesis of pegmatite veins according to which
they were deposited from aqueous solution; this theory
propounded by Saussure has since been modified in many
ways by different authorities.

The hypothesis which at present is perhaps most gener-
ally accepted in Germany, explains the formation of the
pegmatite veins upon the so-called Lateral Secretion Theory;
this view has also been very generally adopted as an expla-
nation of the formation of veins of ore and of other similar
mineral veins. This principle laid down by Forchhammer
(hinted at also by older authorities), and advocated in re-
cent times- chiefly by F. Sandberger -and his followers, is,
however, even as regards the genesis of ore veins, by no
means proven, but on the other hand is most uncertain and,
according to my experience in the Norwegian ore deposits;
is quite improbable ; it has lately been strongly attacked by
A, W. Stelzner and others, and, as it appears to me, with
good reason. *

The very general adoption of this theory for the explana-
tion of the genesis of pegmatite veins was brought about
largely by Sterry Hunt’s work on Canadian pegmatite
veins, ‘ and by a treatise, in many respects excellent, by H.
Credner, “ Die granitischen Gange des sichsischen Granul-

1 Pogg. Ann. 1842, 56. ; :

“Cf. A. Lapparent’s Geology ; also A. Michel-Lévy, ‘‘ Structure et classifica-
tion des roches éruptives,”’ Paris 1889, p. 15.

3“ Die Lateralsecretions-Theorie,” ete., Berg-u, Hiittenm. Jahrb. ete.,
1889, 37.

4“ Geology of Canada.’’ 1863 (p. 476 and 644); ‘‘ Notes on granitic rocks,”
“‘Amer. Journ. of Science,” Ser. III, 1871 and 1872, ‘‘ On Granites and Granitic
Veinstones” in Chem. and Geol. Essays, 1875, p. 187.

:
.
e
3
©
’
sf
:
rt
£
$
%
i

~~ "i
Peet

“a

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 35

itgebirges.”' Credner here expresses very clearly and dis-
tinctly this view with regard to the Saxon occurrences
studied by him:* ‘The mineral matter of our granitic
veins is not derived from mineral springs, perhaps hot,
rising from the depths, but from a partial decomposition
and leaching-out of the neighboring rocks by water which,
oozing through them, gradually becomes a mineral solu-
tion,” etc. Credner’s authority seems both in Germany and
elsewhere to have exercised very great influence upon the
theories with regard to the genesis of granitic veins; for
example, we find this explanation acopted by F. Klock-
mann,* although not without careful reservations. In
Sweden it was the view generally held until I opposed it in
my lectures at the Hochschule, in Stockholm, in 1883. ‘
The incorrectness of this view is, however, very easily
proved and with absolute certainty. It is not true, as Cred-
ner considered it to be of certain pegmatite veins of the
Saxon granulite district, that a certain correspondence can in
general be observed between thecom position of the pegmatite
vein itself and that of the wall-rock. On the contrary, this
is found only exceptionally, whereas, according to a rule of
general applicability, there is a more or less striking corre-
spondence between the pegmatite veins and contiguous
eruptive masses genetically related to them. When the
pegmatite veins, as ix very often the case, occur in those
eruptive rocks with which they are genetically connected,
there is a correspondence between the vein and the wall-
rock; otherwise there is generally no such correspondence.
It is easy to enumerate a number of striking examples.
I remember, first, the veins of Hitteré, in the south-west
corner of Norway, so long celebrated for their richness in
interesting accessory minerals (gadolinite, kainosite, orth-

1 Zeitschr. d. d. geol. Ges. 1875, 27 ; also 34, 500.

2L. c. p. 218.

3 * Beitrag z. Kenntn. d. granitischen Gesteine des Riesengebirges,’’ Zeitschr.
d. d. geol. Ges. 1882, 34, 373-426.

4 Compare Geol. Foren, Forhandl., 4, 116. May, 1878. ‘‘ Mr. Tornebohm re-
marked that in the last twenty years or so hardly a single Swedish geologist has
advocated the eruptive origin of pegmatite.’’ ~See also 0. Torell, 12 Skand.
Naturforskermédes Forhandl., p. 262.

36 Canadian Record of Science.
5 ahh

ite, fergusonite, aeschynite, polykrase. xenotime, mala-
konite, etc.). ‘These veins, which in all their characteris-
tics correspond completely with the no less celebrated veins
of granitic pegmatite of Arendal, which occur in gneiss and
other crystalline schists, occur in a very basic rock, which
in its composition is very unlike that of the vein; it is a
labradorite rock (in part anorthite). To that excellent
observer, Th. Scheerer, who, upon various grounds which
at present must appear of no moment (occurrence of quartz
in the veins, nature of the so-called pyrognomic minerals,
etc.), declared against the eruptive origin of these veins,
this circumstance appeared of so much weight that, unwill-
ing as he then was to do so, he was obliged to assume that
the material of the veins must in some way have been trans-
ported thither : ‘‘I believe that we are obliged to consider the
granite as a mass in some way conveyed to the norite, when
we consider how great the difference is which exists be-
tween the two rocks. We have seen that the constituents
of the norite adjacent to the granite veins are labradorite,
a peculiar. soda feldspar, and, in part, hypersthene and
titanic iron, while the mass of the granite consists. mostly
of orthoclase, oligoclase and quartz,” etc.

The explanation of the exact correspondence of the nu-
merous granitic pegmatite veins of Hitteré with those of
the environs of Arendal is simply this, that in both local-
ities they occur distributed along, although at a certain
distance from, the boundary of a granite district with which
they are SL connected.

In many other districts we notice that eee veins
occur in rocks which, in their composition, do not at all cor-
respond to that of the veins. For instance, W. C, Kerr
mentions” that the well-known pegmatite veins of North
Carolina, so rich in minerals, occur in gneiss ard mica
schist. A. de Lapparent® describes granitic pegmatite

1 Gaea Norvegica, 1884, 2, 339.

2 “The Mica Veins of North Carolina,’ Transactions of the Am. Inst. of .

Mining Engineers, Feb., 1880. See Ref. in Neues. Jahrb., 1881, 2, 387.
3 Note sur la pegmatite de Luchon,” Bull. d. 1. soc. géol. de France; 1880, Sér.
Eth; Ss.

*

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 37

veins at Luchon, which rise through mica schist and super-
imposed ‘‘schistes noirs carburés ou pyriteux,”’ etc. An
example, instar omnium, is the occurrence of akmite granite
pegmatite at Rundemyr, on the Eker, already mentioned
and described by me, in Silurian schists and limestones,
_ about a kilometer from the boundary of the adjacent aegirine
granite district of Kyrfjeld-Hamrefjeld, etc. This last ex-
ample, so absolutely different to all the others, is of all the
more interest, as it further invalidates the old erroneous
idea that pegmatite veins never occur in the younger sedi-
mentary rocks.' Further, the syenitic pegmatite veins
occurring in augite porphyry to about one-half a kilometer
away from the boundary of the augite syenite of Ramsas,
west of Birkedalen, might also be introduced as an example
of the fact that the composition of the pegmatite veins is
independent of that of the wall-rock.

That these last-mentioned veins, as also those occurring
in the Devonian sandstone of the boundary zone on the
Langesundfjord, have, on account of resorption from the
wall-rock, a composition somewhat different to that of the
veins occurring in the augite syenite, does not alter the main
result. Perhaps the connection between wall-rock and
vein-material, which Credner records among his observations
in the Saxony granulite district, may to some small extent
be explained in a similar way; to a certain extent, veins
formed in various ways seem to have been treated in
Credner’s description from a common point of view.

The above mentioned examples, particularly the ordinary
acid granitic pegmatite veins in the basic labradorite and
norite rock of Hitteré, and the egirine granite pegmatite
vein of Rudemyr in Silurian limestones and schists, demon-
strate conclusively that Credner’s opinion with regard to
the formation of true pegmatite veins, by a leaching-out of
the wall-rocks through the agency of percolating water at

1 See e. g. A. v. Groddeck, ‘‘ Ueber Tourmalin enthaltende Kupfererze,” etc.,
Zeitschrift d. d. geol. Ges., 1887, 39, 256: ‘“ First of all, granitic veins (peg-
matite, graphic-granite) must be mentioned ; these occur exclusively in eruptive
(granite) and archaic rocks, and never. break through younger sedimentary
rocks.”’

88 Canadian Record of Science.

ordinary temperatures, is absolutely untenable. On the
contrary, by closer investigation, it will everywhere be
found that each system of pegmatite veins of no matter
what variety, may in general be referred to a mass of plu-
tonic rock connected with it, and of closely related compo-
sition, and this quite independent of the nature of the wall-
rock. The veins may occur in the corresponding plutonic
mass itself, or within a certain distance outside it, but this
will generally exert little influence on their composition.
On the other hand the composition of the veins and that of
the allied plutonic mass will, as far as the principal ma-
terials are concerned, be very nearly identical (the rarer
pneumatolitic minerals which generally occur in small quan-
tities and which are formed by special processes, by “agents
minéralisateurs,” are not considered here), ana any local
variation in the mineral associates of the pegmatite veins
can, for the most part, be referred to peculiarities in the
composition of the mass with which the veins are con-
nected, and which they generally accompany as final and
contact products.

If Credner’s views upon the origin of pegmatite veins
cannot be accepted as correct, it is still possible that these
veins were deposited, as G. vom Rath concluded from his
observations upon the celebrated Elba pegmatite veins, from
solutions rising up from the depths.’ The reason why
vom Rath did not attempt to account for the Elba pegma-
tite veins according to the older Charpentier-Naumann
theory, was this, “‘ that tourmaline, beryl, lithia-mica, etc.,
are foreign to normal granite.” In comparing the Elba
veins with those of Brevig, ‘unequalled in their occur-
rences of minerals,” and occurring in syenite, he further
remarks: “ These veins, on account of their wealth in rare
and peculiar minerals, which for the most part are wanting
in the wall-rocks, necessitate the assumption of a special

1G, vom Rath, ‘* Die Insel Elba” (Geogn.-min. Fragmente aus Italien, VIII)
in Zeitschr. d. d. geol. Ges. 1870, 22, 649: “ While proposing the hypothesis that
the materials of the minerals in the veins of S. Piero have been brought up in
solution from the depths of the earth and not from the wall-rocks, we must
admit that many considerations are opposed to this view.”’

hk SOE Lae pcan. Poe at oo aime git py em

rte

as

bal |

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 39

mode of formation quite different to that assumed for the
wall-rock.”

That these rare minerals, not generally found in the wall-
rock, occur in the pegmatite veins, is no reason whatever
for believing that the veinstone itself is to be considered as
having been deposited from ascending aqueous solutions,
even should such an explanation satisfactorily account for
the rare minerals themselves which occur in small quantity,
and of which by far the greater number have been formed
by the agency of special “ agents minéralisateurs.”’

Strictly speaking, as the more recent results of petro-
graphy have shown, it is true that aqueo-igneous (hydato-
pyrogene) magmas such as those from which great masses
of plutonic rocks as well as the pegmatite veins have been
formed, are to be regarded as silicate solutions; thus, to a
certain extent, vom Rath is correct in his opinion, though
not in the sense in which at that time he must have meant
it. From ordinary “hot springs” “rising from the
depths of earth” the pegmatite veins, as far as their vein-
stone as a whole is concerned, have certainly not been
formed; this is proved by many circumstances which for
the most part have already been touched upon, and of which
a résumé will be given below.

Formerly pegmatite veins were very often looked upon
as ‘‘contemporary secretions” or ‘“‘ concretions of the sur-
rounding eruptive rock.”' Views of this kind have been
especially insisted upon in connection with our syenite and
nepheline syenite pegmatite veins by many authors. Thus,
B. M. Keilhau says:* “They form an excellent example of
veinlike segregations, which cannot be regarded as having
been formed by the filling in of cracks, by any one who con-
siders the intimate connection and, with the exception of the
size of the grains, the complete agreement in character of the
enclosing rock with the enclosed masses, and who also lays
due weight upon the fact of their almost horizontal posi-

1 Compare v. Groddeck |. c., p. 266.
2 Gaea Norvegica, 1838, 1, 58.

40) Canadian Record of Science.

tion.” J. Fr. L. Hausmann! also remarks that they “ are
without doubt segregations, not filled cracks, and conse-
quently of on origin contemporaneous with the formation of
the whole syenite mass.” Similar opinions were held with
respect to the Arendal granite pegmatite veins by G.
Kreischer, * and for those of Kénigshain in Oberlausitz, by
G. Woitschach.? The latter remarks concerning the “ segre-
gations” of pegmatite granite: ‘ Actual veins of this kind
were never observed ; the masses appear bounded on all
sides by normal granite, and must be considered as local
variations of the same whose origin was contemporaneous
with that of the main mass,” etc. He remarks further of
the granite of Kénigshain, that it contains a number of
cavities which, analogous to those occurring at Elba and
Striegau, are lined with crystallized minerals, and adds :
“An essential difference between pegmatite and these
cavities does not exist ; they are distinguished only by the
accidental method of formation.” EK. Kalkowsky, ‘ although
he expresses himself rather indefinitely, also seems to re-
gard the pegmatite veins in the Saxon granulite (which he
connects with the Mittwida granite) as “segregation veins,”
(Ausscheidungstriimer).

H. Rosenbusch, in a very sagacious way, connects the
formation of the pegmatite veins with the fine-drusy, mia-
rolitie structure of the granite rock. After he has described °
the fresh feldspar, quartz, etc., formed as “filling” of the
miarolitic druses, and has delincated their graphic-granite
structure, he proceeds: ‘If by the crystallization of the rock
there had been formed, instead of innumerable small miaro-
litic cells, single larger druses and vein-like cavities, in the
case of these a gradual secondary filling-up with feldspar
and quartz, as well as with other minerals, could take place,

1 Bemerk. tib. d. Zirkonsyenit, 1. c., p. 8 (Sep.-Abdr.); see also Reise durch
Scandinavien, 2, 106.

2 Neues. Jahrb. f. Min. 1869, p. 209.

3° Das Granitgebirge von Kénigshain,” Abhandl. d. Naturf. Gesellsch. zu
Gorlitz, 1881, 1'7, 10 (Sep.-Abdr.).

4‘ Jeberden Ursprung d. granitischen Ginge im Granulit in Sachsen,” Zeit-
schr. d. d. geol. Ges. 1881, 33, 653.

5 Mikr. Phys. d. mass. Gest., 2 Ausg., 2, 39.

et a

pelea Sagat

DEOMI meni, Chip baete: Sia”. 7 - ast <n, tan leat aie 2 ee ae

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 41

and this would exhibit symmetrical arrangement. The

filling-up is sometimes complete and sometimes only partial.

The preponderating feldspar is here significantly micro-
cline. Such a process might in many cases account for the
formation of the graphic granite and pegmatitic masses,
which form the mostly lenticular or vein-like accessory
component masses of granite rock.” Rosenbusch expresses
himself very cautiously, so that it is rather difficult to
understand whether he proposes to consider the “ gradual
Secondary filling-up’”’ as purely aqueous (hydatogenous), or
not. :

J. J. Harris Teall says of pegmatites: ‘ They occur
rather as segregations than as independent masses of erup-
tive origin.” (British Petrography, p. 291.)

Citations such as the above will suffice to show how, on
all sides, the difficulty of accounting for the pegmatitic
druses in the granite and for the larger occurences of peg-
matite in veins as formed by the same processes, has been felt.

Ifso much stress has generally been laid on the fact of small

pegmatitic druses and larger pegmatite vein-masses oc-
curring together in granite, and from this there has been
deduced a common interpretation of both as “‘simultaneous
segregations’”’ (gleichzeitige Ausscheidungen) ; ‘‘ separated
masses’? (Aussonderungen); “segregation veins” (Aus-
scheidungstriimer), (cf. Primirtriimer, Lossen), or as simi-
larly formed “secondary fillings,” etc., then this may per-
haps be essentially due to the fact that no correct conception
has been had of the extraordinarily frequent occurrence of
true pegmatite in the form of veins in rocks other than
granite. | }

In my paper on the pegmatite veins at Moss I have men-
tioned how these veins, on the Anneréd peninsula for ex-
ample, have a direction across that of the gneiss. Many of
these veins were followed for a distance of 200 to 250
metres, and were often 5 metres thick. The veins here
occur in gneiss, hornblende-schist and other crystalline
schists. Also along the coast between Langesund and
Christiansand, particula: ly between 'T'vedestrand and Aren-

42 . Canadian Record of Science.

dal the innumerable pegmatite veins occur as regular veins

not only in the contiguous granite with which they are.

genetically connected, but also in various crystalline schists.
The conditions at Hitteré have already been mentioned. I
think I may assert that probably very few geologists have
seen so many and such various occurrences of pegmatite as
I have,’ and, according to my experience, pegmatite veins
occur at least as abundantly outside the boundaries of the
corresponding eruptive rock as within it. Any theory with
regard to the formation of pegmatite must therefore, in the
first place, be able to account for the true vein occurrences
which are completely independent of the wall. rock, with-

out at the same time losing sight of their close relationship —

with the scattered. pegmatitic druses.

J. Lehmann,’ in his large and excellent work upon “ The
Granulite District of Saxony,” endeavours to account for
the pegmatite veins of that district. He starts out with
the “‘ hydatopyrogene” formation of granite, and pronounces
the veins in a sense to be injection veins; with complete

correctness, he distinctly emphasizes the fact that their

feldspar, etc., has not been deposited from ordinary per-
colating water. ‘The granitic veins of the granulite dis-
trict have originated, no doubt, with the aid of more or less
water, but this has not been atmospheric water which has
percolated downwards through the cracks of the granite,
but it is eruptive water, which was given up from the
granite to the surrounding rocks, and which, under peculiar
conditions obtaining at great depths,was supersaturated with
mineral matter.” Lehmann assumes for the granitic magma
a gelatinous consistency, which was to be accounted for
presumably by the presence of ‘viscous silicic acid.”
‘These fluid secretions of granite may be compared to hot

jelly.” . . . “The capacity of silica to form jellies
with much or with little water invites strongly to this hypo-
thesis.” . . . “ Between such a gelatinous magma

1 Th. Scheerer remarks (Pogg. Ann. 1842, 56, 493), that pegmatite veins “‘ may
be met with in Norway (and also in Sweden) in greater frequency than in other
countries.”

2 Granulitgebirge, p. 52-58.

eR ee ae ee ee ee te eee ee ee

Ps ‘

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 48

-. and a saturated aqueous solution a large number of con-

secutive intermediate stages can be imagined. In this way,
it seems to me, the connection between the pegmatitic
veins and the ordinary granites, the remarkable segrega-
tions in the shape of pegmatitic veins opening out into
druses, and finally the connection of these with vein-fillings
which consist only of quartz, tourmaline and potash mica,
or of quartz alone, can be explained,” etc., etc.

On the whole I must agree with Lehmann, since he
considers the pegmatite veins as true injection veins, erup-
tive veins, formed in essentially the same way as the granite
itself; in his peculiar speculations upon the special condi-
tions under which the plutonic rocks have been formed, I
cannot agree with him in everything. He assumes for in-
stance (l. c., p. 54) a relatively low temperature for the
original granitic magma, (about 500° C.), because in the
minerals of the granite no glass inclusions nor any attend-
ant phenomena of corrosion have been recognised. This,
however, is no evidence against a high temperature of the
granitic magma, as the formation of glass is dependent
naturally upon rapid cooling, which at the relatively great
depths at which the magmas would solidify to granites,
etc., is not possible. The strict connection of extruded
eruptive masses with plutonic rocks! which is now known
in many localities, would, according to Lehmann’s hypo-
thesis, lead to the remarkable result, that an eruptive
magma, solidifying at a great depth, must have possessed a
much lower temperature than the same magma solidifying
at the surface; the extrusion of a magma must, therefore,
have been accompanied on its upward way to the surface
by an extraordinary increase of temperature! The depth,
too, which Lehmann assumes as the horizon of granitic
solidification is more or less conjectural. “It is not impos-
sible that a line of fissure some 35 km. in length, such as
that of the principal line of fracture in the Saxon granulite

1 For granite rocks, fer example, K. Dalmer’s work “‘ Die Quarztrachyte von
Campiglia,’”’ etc., Neues. Jahrb. 1887, 2, 206-221, may be consulted. In the
Christiania district I know excellent examples (for instance, tre series of augite
syenite to rhombic porphyry, with glassy enclosures in the apatite needles), etc.

‘ . . F
44 Canadian Record of Science.

district on which there is an almost continuous succession
of granites from Penig to away beyond Béhringen, and
which is as much as 13 km. broad, should be as deep as it
is long. Let us assume, however, only half this depth,
174 km.” etc., ete. That granite can be formed at such a
depth is indeed possible ; there are certainly, however, no
grounds for such an assertion. On the other hand, it may
be demonstrated from the Christiania district with the
greatest certainty, that the granitites and other post-Silu-
rian plutonic rocks occurring here, were formed at a much
less depth below the then existing surface. The laccolitic
mass of granite at Drammen, for instance, is covered by
Silurian strata of Etage 8; it is here, therefore, absolutely
certain that, at the time of its formation, it can have been
covered at the very most by asuperimposed mass! of about
2,000 ft., or about 600 m. At other places in the Christiania
district, the depths at which the plutonic rocks (augite
syenite at Kodal, in Ramnis, etc.,) have solidified were only
a few hundred feet; this is absolutely certain, as here they
continue upwards into the porphyry covering. Also at
Langesundfjord, where the augite syenites and nepheline
syenites come into contact with the the augite porphyries
and rhombic porphyries, the depth at which the solidifica-
tion of the nepheline syenite occurred can have been only
a few hundred feet. At Heivand, between Skien and Slem-
dal, the nordmarkite mass is similarly overspread with a
cover of rhombic porphyry ; hence the depth at which: the
nordmarkite mass solidified can have been at most only a
few hundred feet. These observations are numerous and
indisputable, and they demonstrate unequivocally that a
depth of even a few hundred metres was sufficient to pro-
duce by solidification true eugranitic plutonic rocks from
that part of the magma which did not reach the surface.
Whether also at the depths postulated by Lehmann, 17,500

or 35,000 m., granitic magmas solidify to plutonic rocks or

1 Namely, a few hundred feet of Etage 8, then Devonian sandstone 1,000 to
2,000 feet, then a few hundred feet of augite porphyry and rhombic porphyry.
The only uncertainty is with regard to the thickness of the rhombic porphyry
covering, but thousands of feet it certainly cannot have been.

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 45

not is a matter of superfluous speculation, as we know no-
thing about it.

The above mentioned observations in the Christiania dis-
trict, which demonstrate definitely that here the granitic
and syenitic, as well as other plutonic rocks, have been
formed at relatively small depths below the surface, show '
also that Lehmann’s assumption that “it is sufficient to
assume for the granite magma no higher temperature than
that which prevails at the minimum depth which must be
assumed for granite” (1. ¢., p. 55), must be incorrect, and
further that the pressure under which the plutonic rocks
solidified is not always so tremendously great as has often
been assumed by Lehmann and other authorities. (He
assumes, for instance, a pressure of 4,000 atmospheres. )

The principal requirement for the solidification of deep-
seated magmas to holocrystalline plutonic rocks seems, there-
fore, to consist in a sufficiently slow cooling of the water-
bearing magma, under a pressure of superimposed matter
great enough to prevent the water separated out by crystal-
lization from freely escaping to the surface, and compelling
it by a pressure exerted from above to pass into the wall-
rock (contact metamorphism.)” The temperature of the
deep magma must, however, certainly have been consider-
able. The protecting covering of strata, which quickly
became impregnated with and warmed by the escaping
water-vapor, had, in the Christiania region, a thickness of
but a few hundred metres, but was, nevertheless, sufficient
to bring about this slow cooling. Of course the rate of
cooling is further dependent upon the quantity of the
magma solidifying at any one time. —

The peculiar gelatinous consistency of the magma which
Lehmann seems. inclined to assume, the ‘viscous silica
jelly,” ete., of which he speaks, seems also hardly to be

1 Similar conclusions may also be drawn from other eruptive districts which
have recently been described.

2 That contact metamorphosis is characterised by molecular re-arrangement,
and only to a very smallextent, and locally in direct contact with the eruptive
rock itself, by any addition of material, shows that Lehmann’s assumption, that
the escaping water could not exist at the level of solidification of the granite in
a liquid condition, is highly improbable,

46 Canadian Record of Science.

borne out by the studies which have been made of the gran-
itic and syenitic rocks of the Christiania district. The true
granular, the aplitic, the granophyric, as well as the peg-
matitic apophyses, those, for example, of the boundary of
the granitite-laccolite in Hértekollen, which run into the
overlying Silurian limestones and schists from the under-
lying granitic rocks, indicate by their peculiarities a very
fluid condition of the magma; even the narrowest veins and
strings in the metamorphic schists are filled, even to their
microscopically minute branches, with genuine granitic
aplite or granophyre. Younger veins are represented by
small quartz strings. That these last, the quartz veins,
should be considered as ‘secretions,’ or, to use Reyer’s
expression, “‘ exudations” of the solidifying granitic mass,’
is most probable. The pegmatite veins themselves, however,
according to my opinion, are in general not to be considered
as secretion veins (Reyer, 1. c., the same) etc., but as genuine
magmatic eruptive veins formed under peculiar conditions.

(To be continued.)

THE CAMBRIAN TERRAIN AT TEJROVIC, BOHEMIA.
By G. I. Marruew, F.R.S.C.

The geological student will find matter of interest in the
pamphlet published by Dr. J. J. Jahn of Vienna, on the
Cambrian beds of the above locality. In Bohemia the
illustrious Barrande discovered what was once thought to be
the oldest Paleozoic Fauna (which he named ‘‘Primordial’”) —
and hence the region must ever remain classic ground to
the geologist.

The interest in Dr. Jahn’s pamphlet centres in the fact
that he has carefully gone over the Cambrian section at
Tejrovic, fixed there the stratigraphical place of Barrande’s
Primordial Fauna, and shown the existence of the Primor-
dial genera both above and below the typical horizon.

The foundation of the Cambrian terrain at Tejrovic is the

1 See “ Theoretische Geologie,’’ Stuttgart, 1888, p. 101,
2 Verh. der k. k. geologischen Reichsanstalt, Wien, 1893.

*

Cambrian Terrain. 47

black slates of Barrande’s Ktage B., which are plainly
laminated and are discordant in stratification to the Prim-
ordial Strata. These at the bottom consist of conglomerate
and sandstone with some thin clay slates ; and, beside Orthis
Remingeri, Barr., contain trilobites of the genus Solenopleura
and a genus allied to Anomocare. This member of the series
is about 20 metres thick and is followed by a dark, crumbling
conglomerate 2 to 4 metres thick.

Above this conglomerate is a sandstone bed of 10 metres
with broken but unquestionable remains of trilobites, and
then a zone of dark conglomerate of 4 to 6 metres. Upon
these beds follow the great zone of Paradoxides slates, 100
metres thick, with numerous fossils of the well known
Primordial Fauna.

Above this zone follows one about 30 metres thick, of
a schistose porphyritic rock, corresponding in dip and strike
to the slates, &c. To this succeeds a zone of slate with
sandstone layers. This set of beds is 10 to 15 metres thick,
and in it has been found a head of Conocephalites striatus,
Emm. The upper bed has a very rich fauna, and is chiefly
characterised by Lllipsocephalus Germari, Barr.; the next
‘most frequent species are Conocephalites striatus, Kmm.,
Paradoxides spinosus, Barr.. and Lichenoides priscus, Bavv. ;
besides these, but much less frequent, are Conocephalites
Sulzeri, Schloth., C. Coronatus, Barr., and Arionellus cetice-
phalus, Barr. Much more frequent is a new species of
Arionellus, A. Spinosus, very much like Liostracus aculectus.
[L. Onangondianus, Htt., is the Canadian form, G. F. M.];
there also occurs here a species of the genus resembling
Anomocare, cited above, and an Agnostus, as well as three
species of cystideans, and two minute orthids, besides O.
Remingeri.

Above these slates is a thick zone of conglomerate alter-
nating with sandstone and. Paradoxides slate. This highest
conglomerate of the Cambrian is very similar to that near
the bottom of the terrain, being dark, crumbling and very
coarse grained. There are numerous remains of Paradoxides
scattered through the whole mass, and Sao hirsuta, Barr.,

48 Canadian Record of Science

also occurs. This fact has not heretofore been recognized,
and is significant as showing that no higher fauna is known
in the Bohemian Cambrian Terrain. The next band of
rock is a thick zone of aphanite.

According to Dr. Jahn the chief result of his studies on
the Cambrian fauna of Tejrovic is to show that the Para-
doxides stage alone is recognizable there; and that so far,
neither the Olenellus, nor the Olenus stage can be distin-
guished.

The fauna of this station has heretofore on the authority
of Kusta, been reckoned ante-primordial.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.
MontrEAL, October 29th, 1893.

The first monthly meeting was held this evening.

Dr. Wesley Mills in the chair.

The minutes of the last sn ale meeting were read and
approved.

The minutes of Council meetings of May 29th, June 5th,
September 21st, and October 23rd, were read.

Dr. Wesley Mills reported that the special committee
appointed to enquire into the condition of the Society had
met and reported progress. 3

The Librarian reported a large number of exchanges
received. |

The Curator reported the following additions to the
Museum :—

Two lizards, a bat, and seaweed from Captain Clift.

A model of a sailing canoe or surf boat from Samoa from
J. Murray Smith.

Fossils from Radnor Forges from J. Spurrier.

A specimen of bark of the giant trees of California and
a stone axe from H. J. Tiffin.

A large exotic beetle from C, Ellacombe.

A beautiful exotic moth from Miss Aurbach, and iron
sand of the Moisie from J. Miller. ’

The following were elected ordinary members :—

eS SO ee

-
Pa

— Se eS ee ee

Natural History Soctety 49

Charles Gurd, proposed by Geo. Sumner, seconded by
J. Gardiner.

C. Gurd, Jr., associate member, proposed by Geo. Sumner.
seconded by James Gardiner.

-§. W. Ewing, proposed by J. S. Shearer, seconded by
James Gardiner.

Dr. J. G. Adami, proposed by Dr. R. F. Ruttan, seconded
by Dr. Wesley Mills.

F. W. Richards, proposed by E. D. Wintle, seconded by
A. Ingles. .

W. A. Carlyle, Ma. E., proposed by Dr. F. D. Adams,
seconded by Dr. Wesley Mills.

Professor J. T. Nicolson, proposed by Dr. Wesley Mills,
seconded by Dr. F. D. Adams.

J. A. Nicholson, M A., proposed by Dr. Wesley Mills,
seconded by Dr. F. D. Adams.

Hon. John S. Hall, proposed by J. S. Shearer, seconded
by Hon. Justice Wurtele.

R. L. Gault, proposed by J. S. Shearer, seconded by J.
Gardiner,

Alfred Thibideau, proposed by John S. Shearer, seconded
by Jos. Forbes.

Ald. W. Clendenning, proposed by J.S. Shearer, seconded
by J. H. Joseph.

C. J. Coyle, proposed by J. S. Shearer, seconded by E. T.
Chambers.

Owen McGarvey, proposed by Edward Murphy, seconded
by J. S. Shearer.

Hon. L. O. Taillon, proposed by Hon. Justice Wurtele,
‘ seconded by J. S. Shearer.

Ald. J. H. Starnes, proposed by J. S, Shearer, seconded
by James Gardiner.

J. D. Rolland, proposed by J. S. Shearer, seconded by G.
Sumner. All as ordinary members.

Sir William Dawson, read a paper entitled ‘“ Some notes
on the Guanches or Aborigines of the Canary Islands.”
The paper was highly interesting, and there were nearly 100
visitors present.-

4

50 Canadian Record of Science.

After a stimulating discussion a vote of thanks to Sir
William was proposed by the Rev. Dr. Campbell, seconded
by Walter Drake.

R. W. McLacuuan,

; Secretary.
Dr. Wesitey MILLs, ;

President.

MontreaL, November 27th, 1893.
The second monthly meeting of the Society was held
this evening, Dr. Wesley Mills, president, in the chair.
Minutes of last meeting were read and approved.
Minutes of Council meeting of November 20th were read.
The usual exchanges were reported by the Librarian.
The Curator reported two wasps’ nests received from Mr.
James Ferrier. On motion the thanks of the Society were

tendered to Mr. Ferrier.
Mr. H. J. Tiffin was proposed as an ordinary member by |
R. W. McLachlan, seconded by J,S. Shearer; and A. E.

Holden, proposed by Dr. Mills, seconded by A. Holden; and
H. W. Shearer, proposed by Dr. Mills, seconded by Joseph
Fortin, as associate members. |

On motion of KE. T. Chambers, seconded by J. H. Joseph
the rules were suspended and these members elected by
acclamation.

Dr. Wesley Mills then read his paper on “ Hibernation
and allied states in the lower animals and in man.”

After some discussion Mr. Edgar Judge moved, seconded
by Mr. E. T. Chambers, that the thanks of the Society be
given to Dr. Mills for his interesting paper.

Sir William Dawson asked for information regarding the
earthquake of the forenoon of this day.

_R. W. McLacuuan,

Secretary.
Dr. Westry MILLs,
President.

MonTREAL, January 29th, 1894.
The third monthly meeting of the Society was held this
evening in the Chemistry Lecture-room of McGill College,
Dr. Wesley Mills, president, in the chair,

Natural History Society. 51

The minutes of last meeting were read and approved.

The minutes of Council were left over until next meet-
ing.

‘On motion of R. W. McLachlan, seconded by EK. T.
Chambers, the rules were suspended and the following
were elected ordinary members by acclamation.

J.S. Buchan, proposed by Sir William Dawson, seconded
by Dr. F. D. Adams; Nevil Norton Evans, proposed by Dr.
Adams, seconded by A. F. Winn; De Lery Macdonald,
proposed by J. S. Shearer, seconded by George Sumner.

Mr. Nevil Norton Evans then gave an interesting address,
with experiments: entitled ‘‘ How a chemical analysis is
made.”

On motion of Mr. Smaile, seconded by Professor Donald,
the thanks of the Society were tendered to Mr. Evans.

Moved by George Sumner, seconded by Henry Lyman,
that the thanks of the Society be tendered to the Corpor-
ation of McGill College for the use of their lecture hall and

apparatus.
R. W. McLacuuan,

Secretary
Dr. WeEs.LeyY MILLs,
President.

Montreal, February 26th, 1894.

The fourth monthly meeting of the Society was held this
evening, Dr. Wesley Mills, president, in the chair.

The minutes of last meeting were read and approved.

The minutes of Council meetings of November 20th,
December 18th, 1893, January 22nd and February 19th,
1894, were read.

Mr. Achille Fortier, proposed by Joseph Fortier, seconded
by the Rev. Robert Campbell; Mr. C. T. Williams, pro-
posed by R. W. McLachlan, seconded by Dr. Wesley Mills;
and Mr. Pierre Bedard, proposed by Mr. J. A. U. Beaudry,
seconded by M. de Beaujeu, were, on motion of George
Sumner, seconded by J. S. Shearer, elected by acclamation.

Letters were read from the Hon. L. O. Taillon and J. T,
Buchan asking to be excused for non-attendance.

52 Canadian Record of Science.

Dr. F, D. Adams then read a paper on “ Denudation
or-the Waste of Land,” which was illustrated by a large
number of excellent lantern slides.

On motion of Sir William Dawson, seconded by Mr.
Geo. Sumner the thanks of the Society were given to the
lecturer for his interesting paper.

Montreat, March 5th, 1894.

A special meeting of the Society was held this evening to
receive report of the committee to enquire into the
improvement of the Society and the committee on publica-
tion of the Record of Science.

Dr. Wesley Mills, president, in the chair.

‘The minutes of the special meeting of the Council were
accepted as read.

Moved by Judge Wurtele seconded by Mr. Drake that the
recommendations of the Council with regard to the publica-
tion of the Record be adopted. Carried.

Moved by Dr. Adams seconded by the Rev. Dr. Campbell
that Mr. Nevil Norton Evans be added to the Editing Com-
mittee.

The report of the committee appointed to enquire into
the condition of the Society was then taken up seriatum
and adopted.

The committee beg ‘to report that they have held a
number of meetings and have carefully considered the
whole subject submitted to them.

They desire to make the following recommendations :—

1. That the range of subjects presented to the Society at
its monthly meetings be extended so as to include both the
natural and the physical sciences.

2. That authors presenting papers to the Society be
requested, in reading them, to make use of language as free
from technicalities .as Baaale, it being understood that
those papers accepted by the Society for publication in the
Record of Science may there appear in the technical language
of the author.

Natural History Society. 58

It is thought that in this way a more popular character
may be given to the meetings.

3. That strenuous efforts be made to secure the Govern-
ment grant for the publication of the Record of Science
from year to year.

4, That the Somerville bequest of $4,000.00 be freed as
soon as possible.

5. That reports of the monthly meetings, with short
summaries of the papers read, be regularly published in the
daily papers.

6. That the Museum be eee free_ to the public,
provided that the extra expense necessitated be secured by
a special grant from the City Council or otherwise.

7. That the Microscopical Society, the Entomological
Society and the Agassiz Association be affiliated with the
Natural History Society on the terms set forth in the
accompanying report of the sub-committee on affiliation.

8. That Associate members be admitted to the Society
who shall pay subscriptions at the rate of $1.00 per annum.
These members to have all the privileges of the Society
except that of voting, holding office and receiving the
Record of Science.

9, That the committee recognizing that tHe usefulness of
the Society is largely dependent upon the Record of
Science, recommend that every effort be made to continue
its publication.

Report of the sub-committee appointed to enquire into
the possibility of securing the affiliation of the various
societies in Montreal, which are engaged in the study of
Natur:l History, with the Montreal Nutural History Society
and tor the purpose of ascertaining the terms on which such
affiliation could be affected.

The sub-committee beg to report that they have held a
number of meetings and have entered into negotiations with
the following societies:—The Microscopical Society, The
Entomological Society and the Agassiz Association.

All these societies have agreed to affiliate with the
Natural History Society, but.each desires ut the same time
to retain its name and thus preserve its identity.

54 Canadian Record of Science.

The committee of the Microscopical Society have agreed
to affiliate on the following terms :—

Ist. The Microscopical Society shall hereafter be known
as the Microscopical Society of Montreal, being the Micros-
copical section of the Natural History Society.

2nd. That those members of the Microscopical Society
who are not already members of the Natural History Society
be allowed the privileges of this latter Society, except
those of voting or becoming officers, on payment of an
annual fee of $2.00 which however would not include the
Record of Science, it being optional with the members
individually to join the Natural History Society under
these conditions or not, as they may desire.

3rd. 'The Microscopical Society shall pay the Natural
History Society $20.00 per annum for the use of its Library
as a place of meeting and for the privileges stated above,
and when the membership of the Microscopical Society
warrants it an increased amount may be charged.

4th. A reciprocity of attendance at meetings is to be
arranged for.

The Entomological Society is also willing to affiliate but
desires to retain its name, being known in future as the
Entomological Society of Montreal, being the Entomological
section of the Natural History Society. The affiliation is
to be arranged for on such reasonable terms as may be
mutually agreed to.

It is suggested that the Natural History Society should
offer this society the same terms as those arranged for in
connection with the Microscopical Society, except that if
the Entomological Society desire to use the Library as a
place of meeting, two dollars a night is to be charged, which
is practically the amount paid by the Microscopical Society.

The Agassiz Association also agrees to accept the
proposal made by the Natural History Society for affiliation,
upon the following terms :—

“1st. That it be allowed to continue its name and identity
observing its present constitution and by-laws as heretofore,
and reserving, moreover, all rights and proprietorship in
its museum, as well as powers as to the disposal of the same.

Notices of Books and Papers. 55

2nd. That all certified members of the Society in good
standing may become Associate members of the Natural
History Society with the usual privileges of access to their
library, museum, etc., on payment by such members to that
Society of fifty cents annually. This in addition to the
regular fee of fifty cents payable to the Agassiz Society
itself.

It was understood by this committee in carrying out its
negotiations for these affiliations that the object aimed at
was not in any way to improve the financial position of one
society at the expense of another, but to bring the workers
in the various branches of Natural History in Montreal into

closer contact, thus strengthening all the societies and
making their work more efficient.

It is hoped as a result of these affiliations, if they be
carried out, that early next autumn a list, giving the dates
of meeting of all the branches of the Natural History
Society, for three or possibly six months in advance, may
be issued, together with the titles of the papers to be read
at the several meetings. Also that once or twice during
the winter these branches may hold a meeting on a date
appointed for one of the regular monthly meetings of the
Natural History Society, such joint meetings being devoted
to the consideration of such subjects as these several
branches shall determine.

»

Notices oF BooKs AND PAPERS.

LEHRBUCH DER PETROGRAPHIE VON DR. FERDINAND ZIRKEL
—ZWEITE GANZLICH NEU VERFASSTE AUFLAGE—HRSTER
BanpD— WILHELM ENGILMAN, LeErpzia, 1893.

The appearance of the first volume of the new edition of Prof.
Zirkel’s Text-Book of Petrography will be most heartily welcomed
by all students of this science. The first edition of the work
appeared in-1866, Prof. Zirkel being one of the earliest workers in
modern petrography, and since that time principally owing to the
introduction of the microscope into petrographical work, the science
has grown so enormously and its literature has become so exten-

56 Canadian Record of Science.

sive that from a single volume in the first edition the work has
grown to three ponderous volumes of which the first, just published
comprises no less than 845 pages. The work has been entirely
rewritten, as it was found that owing to the great strides which
have been made in petrographical science little or nothing in the
original edition could now be reproduced.

The work has been eagerly expected for some years past but
various causes have contributed to delay its appearance, among
others the fact that the author’s time has been largely devoted to
editing successive editions of Nauman’s Mineralogy, so extensively
used as a text-book in Germany. The second and third volumes
however are also finished and are promised within the present
year, thus completing the work. pare

The work aims at being a complete compendium of the whole
science of petrography, incorporating the results of all the liter-
ature of the science up to date, with a critical treatment of certain
subjects. It is thus essentially one of those monumental
summaries of a science, which are so usefui to investigators and
to advanced students, and which are given to the world principally
by the German Universities.

The present volume deals first with general Petrography, under
thirteen headings, as follows: General Characters of Rocks ;
Methods of Petrographical Investigation; Form and Structure
of Rock Constituents; Mineralogical Composition of Rocks ; Struct-
ure of Rocks; Secretions, Concretions, Inclusions, etc. ; Joints, etc.;
Mode of Occurrence of Rocks; Transitional Forms; Magnetic and
Thermal Relations; Origin of Rocks; Alteration of Rocks; Classi-
fication of Rocks.

This is followed by a description of the general characters of the
Massive Igneous rocks which closes the present volume. -

It will thus be observed that the work is not confined to Petro-
grapby in the narrower. sense in which the word is usually
employed but treats in a general way of the arrangement of the
various rocks in the architecture of the earth’s crust, a depart-
ment of science usually known as Structural Geology, as well.
No cuts or illustrations are given, and although these are not
especially required in the treatment of that portion of the subject
dealt with in the first volume, it is feared that their absence in
the subsequent portions of the work, dealing with microscopic
petrography, will make itself felt. It is often a matter of regret to
the reader that Prof. Zirkel, when presenting the results of the
work of others and their opinions on debated points, has not more
frequently given his own opinions, which in many of these cases at
least would carry great weight, but in such an exhaustive treatise

Notices of Books and Papers. ST

- where so many points come up for discussion this perhaps would

not always be possible.

It is beyond the scope of the peedttt notice even to mention the
many excellencies of the book. The present volume will be found
especially useful as presenting a resumé of our present knowledge of
various parts of the science in which rapid advances are now being
made, as for instance the question of the chemical relations of the
eruptive rocks, now so widely investigated and discussed—the
artificial reproduction of rocks, etc. It may be noted however that
even in the time which has elapsed since the writing of the earlier
parts of this volume some of the incorporated material has
already become somewhat antiquated.

It is a matter of much satisfaction and one which will afford
much relief to geologists in general to find that in his classification
of the eruptive rocks Prof. Zirkel agrees in the main with
Prof. Rosenbusch, whose scheme is now in general use. It thus
seems that at least in its principal features the petrographical
classification has been generally agreed upon. Many modifications
will undoubtedly be found to be necessary with the advance of
the science, but we now have at least a good nome classifi-
cation.

Prof. Zirkel rejects Rosenbusch’s division of Dyke Rocks, to
which many objections have been raised by others as well, and
although refusing to admit that the geological occurrence of an
igneous rock is a proper basis for classification, he substitutes for this
its structure, which in the great majority of cases depends on its.
geological occurrence, and this substitution does not therefore
materially affect the form of the classification.

The separation of the “old” from the “new ” volcanic rocks is
still retained and justified on the ground that although their differ-
ences may be due merely to alteration, nevertheless since the dis-
tinction can be made in most cases the double nomenclature should
be retained, it being quite as convenient to use the terms Rhyolite.
and Quartz-Porphyry as the terms kc. Rhyolite, Carbonifer-
ous Rhyolite, &c.

This argument has especial weight in the case of the German
rocks, but since any classification universally adopted must be one
which will be suitable and convenient for all countries, it remains.
to be seen whether this dual nomenclature for the eruptive rocks,
so long opposed by English petrographers and fast losing its hold
in all directions will not eventually be disgarded, being replaced
perhaps by some simple method of distinction such as that
recently proposed by Dr. Williams and Miss Bascomb, which
consists in placing the prefix apo before the name of any rock which

58 Canadian Record of Science.

can be proved to have been derived from any of the ordinary
types by a process of alteration. Thus there would be Rhyolites
and Aporhyolites, Andesites and Apandesites, and so on.

Another point in the classification adopted by Prof. Zirkel is
the retention of the old use of the terms Diabase and Gabbro, the
former being a rock composed of plagioclase and augite and the
latter one composed of plagioclase and diallage, the distinction
between the two being thus made to depend on the presence or
absence of a cleavage parallel to the orthopinacoid of the pyroxene.
This cleavage, which is often nothing more than a parting, is now
generally considered to be a most unsatisfactory basis of division,
not nearly so good as that afforded by the ophitic (diabase) and
granitoid structures displayed respectively by the two rocks—which
structures although occasionally found in different portions of the
same mass, certainly form a better and more distinct ground of
classification than a more or less distinct or indistinct orthopina-
coidal parting in a single constituent.

Prof. Zirkel’s book is an excellent one and represents an
enormous amount of careful work, and will take rank with the
works of Prof. Rosenbusch as one which must find a place in the
library of every petrographer. Frank D. ADAms.

Notes on THE GEoLocy oF MIppLETON IsLAND, ALASKA, BY
Grorce M. Dawson, C.M.G., LL.D., F.RS., F.GS.,
Buu. Grou. Soc. AMERICA, vol. 4, pp. 427-431, 1892.

In this paper Dr. Geo. Dawson records the discovery made by
Mr. J. M. Macoun, on June 15, 1892, of “ boulder clay” or “true
till” which on examination proved to be fossiliferous. Mr.
Macoun furnishes an interesting sketch of the leading physical
features of the island. The pebbles or rocks contained in the “till”
are chiefly of Triassic age and form part of the “ Vancouver
Group.” Numerous fragments of shells are found together with
‘foraminifera.

Mr. Whiteaves has recognised the following foraminifera.

1. Polystomelia striatopunctata, Frichtel & Moll.

2. Pulvinulina Karsteni, Reuss.

3. Probably Nodosaria (Glandulina) laevigata, D’Orb.

Dr. Dall’s observations on Middleton Island had led him to
‘Suppose the ‘“‘clay-stone” to be Post-Pliocene and _ possibly
Pliocene.

Dr. Dawson also found shells of Cardium blandum in the till of
Middleton Island and the samples of sand collected by Mr. Macoun
were submitted by Dr. Dawson to Mr. Ferrier and the results incor-

porated in the paper.
ti: H. M. Amt.

*

Notices of Books and Papers. 59

‘“< NOTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF MAMMOTH: REMAINS IN THE
Yuxon District of CANADA AND IN ALASKA.” By
GrorGe M. Dawson, C.M.G., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G:S.

The following “Notice of Memoirs read before the Geological
Society of London, England,” occurs in the December number of
the Geological Magazine, for 1893, pp. 574-575.

In this paper various recorded occurrences of Mammoth
remains are noted and discussed. The remains are abundant
in, if not strictly confined to, the limit of a great unglaciated area
in the north-western part of the North American Continent;
whilst within the area which was covered by the great ice mass
which the author has described as the Cordilleran glacier, remains
of the Mammoth are either entirely wanting or are very scarce.
As the time of the existence of the Mammoth the North American
and Asiatic land was continuous, for an elevation of the land
sufficient to enable the Mammoth to reach those islands of the
Behring Séa where these bones have been found would result in
the obliteration of Behring Straits.

The bones occur along the northern coast of Alaska, in a layer
of clay resting on the somewhat impure “ ground-ice formation”
which gives indications of stratification; and above the clay isa
peaty layer. The author considers this “ yround-ice ” was formed
as a deposit when more continental conditions prevailed, by snow-
fallon a region without the slopes necessary to produce moving
glaciers. The Mammoth may be supposed to have passed between
Asia and America at this time. At a later date, when Behring
Straits were opened and the perennial accumulation of snow ceased
on the lowlands, the clay was probably carried down from the
highlands and deposited during the overflow of rivers. Over this
land the Mammoth roamed, and wherever local areas of decay of
ice arose, bogs would be produced which served as veritable sink-
traps. The author considers it probable that the accumulation of
*‘ground-ice” was coincident with the second (and latest) epoch
of maximum glaciation, which was followed by an important
subsidence in British Columbia.”

NOTE ON THE RECENT DISCOVERY OF LARGE UNIO-LIKE SHELLS
IN THE CoAL MEASURES AT THE SoutH Joaains, N.S.
By J. F. WHiTeaves. Trans. Roya Society or CAn-
ADA, SEPARATE COPIES.
Pl. L, Figs. 1, 2, pp. 21-24, 1ssupp Decpmenmr, 1893.

Beside the Presidential Address for the year, Mr. Whiteaves
contributed a second paper to Section Four of the Royal Society and

60 Canadian Record of Science.

in it describes under the name of Asthenodonta Westoni, a large
species of Carboniferous mollusc whose affinities and structure
show a strong resemblance to the genera Anthracosia, Plagiodon
and Unio.

Mr. Whiteaves briefly and succiently reviews the literature of
shells whose affinities and habitat have caused them to be referred
to the Unionidae and allied forms in Palaeozoic and later times.

Choffat, Douvillé, D’Orbigny, 8. P. Woodward, Forbes, Sowerby,
Phillips, Hibbert and Brown, in Europe have written on this
subject, while Meek, Vanuxem, Hall/Sir Wm. Dawson and others
_ in America have written on the same subject.

This species was discovered by Mr. Weston during the summer
season of 1893, and named in his honour by Mr. Whiteaves. It
may be stated here that from the same horizon at the same locality
Sir William Dawson has obtained a large number of trunks of trees.
containing remains of microsauria, molluscs and insects.

H. M. Amt.

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF OC#BER, 1893.
Meteorological Observations McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.
THERMOMETER. * BAROMETER. 36 z |
———_——— — ——_— t Mean yee sae A =i a5
pres- |relative ais] 33 =2 Es
DAY. sure of | humid- $2 8 Es €3 3S DAY
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.J Mean. | § Max. | § Min. | Range. | V2POur- | ity. Boul “a= of | a8
4 Ea] 3
: sure Mee bisy A See ey ete eee | Dae A as oP! seamen nee
SUNDAV..... be 4 care 64.0 41.0 B4EO MEO sipisiei |, aineies ¢ Sa cUmecieite ty Wie vacces N. 15-4 |: ee ee ee .SUNDAY
2 54.67] €4.0 46.0 18.0 29.9537 | 30-020 29.906 114 2800 66.8 43.0 N. 5 6 Tia) zal lo : ¥. 2
3| 52-37] 60.5 44.0 16.5 30.0288 | 30.095 29.964 131 3142 80.0 46.2 N. 11.6 2.0] 6} o 5 trad bee)
4| 57-05 64.0 47-5 16.5 29.9120 29.970 29.845 125 3863 83.8 51.7 S.E. 12.1 8.3] 10] 0 é 0.04 4
5 | 58.43} 62.0 55.9 7-0 32.0185 | 30.077 29.964 113 4125 84.5 537 S.W. 13.2 1.8] 8] 0 Se nOxOSr gles
6} 58.63 | 72.0 47.8 24.2 29.9810 | 30.103 29.837 -266 3795 78.3 51.3 S.E. 96 4375) Oot 0 ; Pees ars
- 7| 58-25] 65.5 | 55-0 | 10.5 | 29.8560 | 29.917 29.770 +147 +3937 | 81.2 | 52.2 S.W. 19.4 | 9.0] 10] 3 .. |o.22] 7
SUNDAY ...... Bo Semanal 62.5 47.0 Oe.) (Rl 7 te ese nh | eas eM Keen ok heer Bers nine S,W. RASAMMMME se |ees| oc sco. | Inap. | 8) 00d. Sonpay
9] 53-52| 65.6 46.5 19.1 29.6973 | 29.980 29.466 “514 3155 74-7 45 +2 S.W. 24.7 | 5:8| 10] o wee | 0.29] 9
10 47-28 55.0 39.0 16.0 30.1533 30.231 30.028 203 2213 67.5 36.8 Ww. 15.8 Des) 210 s Re ec)
II 50.33 58.0 43-0 150 30.2323 30.207 30.184 113 2742 75.8 42.7 E. 6.2 1.5] 9] 0 ee Bae.) bs
12| 55.55 | 68.3 43-0 25.3 30.0770 | 30.166 30.003 -163 «3330 76.5 47°7 E. 6.7 1.8] 8] 0 a Been Vee
13,| 62.13 | 71.6 52.6 19.0 29.9077 | 30-043 29-700 -343 3552 64-7 49-7 S.E. 12.0 7.7\10| o E we | 13
2 YA) 16x52 72.5 54-0 16.5 29.1735 | 29-446 29.016 » 430 4052 71.8 52.2 S.E. 24.5 7-7 |10| 0 0.46 | 14
SUNDAY .......15 see! | S0n2 40.0 CGR nereehaiets Soiae MEIER cc ale Apa ANE. ate wees W. sec) RBG es « (0006.1 35 «scenes s SUNDAY
16 40.33 45-4 35-5 30.2520 30.347 30 063 .284 1855 74.2 42.3 Ww. 38.2 ON eto ate) | Hh oe aaa oe 16
17| 47-42 | 55-5 37.0 30.3382 | 30.366 30.263 103 2615 80.2 41.2 Ww. 14.2 J 5.0/10] of 53 Fs ‘ 17
18 | 40.25 | 53-2 36.0 30.5497 | 30.602 30.474 128 1662 66 5 29-7 N. 17.5 1.2| 4| of 78 ‘ 18
19 | 43.08] 54.0 32.0 30.4522 30.558 30.363 -195 2157 75.9 355 SEs 12.3 s.0| 9| of 58 = 19
20 | 48.92] 58.0 40.5 30.2197 | 30.374 30.091 -283 2792 81.0 43.2 Ss. 16.3 6.5| 10] of 66 20
2t| 52.17] 60.0 45.0 30.1322 | 30.259 30.056 203 3143 80.8 46.2 S.W. 15.2 6.0|/ 10] of 48 aax
SUNDAY........ 93 sh sotoes 59.3 FECT ON| Shs | PCcohooch|itecendae |. cengep ete MU neetnce Whee aes N.E. QEAMNEE «++ | sone oe 58 : Bf! doranesans.t SuNDAY
23] 59.58] 67.8 48.0 30.1998 | 30.313 30.029 .284 4092 81.0 B3a.3 S.E. 15.6 7.0| 10] of 51 che oh Brits oeeey es
U 24 | 60.13] 65.5 57-5 29.7338 | 29.920 29.639 -287 - 4675 89.8 57-0 S.E. 13.9 9.3] 10| 3] 00 0.16 rie 0.16 | 23
25 46.08 60.4 38.0 30.0303 30.221 29.780 -441 2243 70.2 36.7 Ww. 19.4 5.2| 9| o 20 0.01 eee 0.01 | 25
26 | 40.28] 50.0 32.0 30.1870 | 30 307 29.999 2308 1792 71.2 Brey N. 16.7 6.3 | 10| Of 50 0.01 ses | 0.04 | 26
27| 50.831 54.5 42.5 29.8847 | 29 967 29.844 123 +3413 GI.7 48.3 S.E. 15.9 } 10.0| 10| 10f oo 0.48 cae 0.48 | 27
28} 46.25 | 52.5 42.0 29.7527 | 29.817 29.700 117 2457 78.3 39-7 WwW. 15.7 8.0]/10| 1] 65 0.40 see | 0.40 7 28
SUNDIAW cretciasijs0 29) tae |p dO nS Bay idee | (is aoouon|) stocae || sooaesn ‘pe ahs eno bra S.W. Cece... |...>| .. | x8 | Inap | Inap |\Inap P29 .........- SUNNAY
30 30.17 43-7 28.0 30.3940 30.453 30.283 +170 1270 715-7 23.5 Ww. 9.2 5.0] 10] o 43 sake wees Se! hic)
3r | 32.42) 38.3 25.0 30.3808 | 30.467 30.265 +202 1382 75:7 25.7 oe 7-6 2.0} 4| of 67 ees 31
Sogn -++++Means} 50.29] 58.94 | 42.35 30.0576 =o Gann 223 -2933 76.80 | 42.55 1S. 43° W T4eG5NNeeS-03| -- | -. 48 9} 2.18 0.00 (|@r xe iI SUNOS. sinninies slants
tg Years means : | 1g Years means for
for and including 45.42 | 52.43] 38.69 30.0011 eisiainieie -209 2437 7630)\|| Bes so |) eartieistaln . cb 6.42 141.79] 3-17 1.41 3.3t J {and including this
this month ..... month,
ANALYSIS OFWIND RECORD. Thunder was heard on {two days without) range of temperature of 47.0 degrees. Warmest
' ; e | lightning. day wasthe 13th. Coldest day wasthe 3lst. High-
Direction........ _N. N.E. E. _S.E. Bet SW. | OW. |, NW. CaLu Lightning was seen on one day without thunder. | est barometer reading was 30.602 on the 18th; low-
Miles............| 1606 368 388 2735 772 2182 2659 416 Solar halo on four days. est barometer was 29.016 on the 14th, giving a
Darati h aa Gecmemin leaner 4 Sara Al | oc Gea * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | range of 1.586 inches. Maximum relative humid-
ae peri TB ae 33 5 77 54 % | 745 < he temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. ity was 100 on the 4th. Minimum relative humid- |
Mean velocity...| 12.7 11.2 7.8 23.4 14.3 17.0 | 18.3 14.9 § Observed. ity was 48 on the 13th.

the 15th.

Resultant mileage 2340.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 43 on the 15th.
Greatest velocity in gusts 60 miles per hour, o2

Resultant direction, S. 48° W.
Total mileage, 11126.

Average mileage per hour 14,95.

+ Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.

t Humidity relative, saturation being 100.

1 12 years only.

The greatest heat was 72.0 on the 6th; and
the greatest cold was 25.0 on the 3lst, giving a

Rain fell on 18 days.

Snow fell on 1 day.

Rain or snow fell on 13 days.
Auroras were Observed on 1 night.
Lunar halo on one night.

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF NOVEMBER, 1893.

Meteorological Observations McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet.C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

SKY CLo
THERMOMETER. * BAROMETER. WIND N Tantus, [3.6 E
a a °
eS ee eS eee ——| + Mean ele = —_—— ———_— San =4 Semi abacd
pres- [relative] Dew : es] = 33 |=s32
DAY. sure of umid-} point. n : 228) gs 232 | 32
i ‘ Hi General |velocityy ££ | ¥ | ¢4i°S5) deg 2 ao DAY.
Mean.| Max. | Min. |Range.| Mean. | § Max. | § Min. | Range. |V@P°ur- | ity. direction. |in mile’ g s fs a ris Ae wa
h a
— - —-—_|— -_---—- — —— —— ee - ¥ =
I 43-17 | 51.0 32.0 19.0 30.1272 | 30.259 30.048 oZrt 1885 66.8 32.8 Ss. ‘ 7.0] 10] of 66 pie To eH - =
2) 47-92] 53-5 44.0 9.5 29.9787 | 30.217 29.827 290 2578 77° 41.2 Ss. ; 4:7] 10] of 22 | o.os 3 0.05] 2
3] 44.83] 500 38.0 12.0 29.9107 | 30.080 29.776 =304 2388 79 38.7 S.W 6.7] 10] of 42 0.33 i os 0-33 3
4| 36.25] 42.5 32.5 10.0 32.128 30.158 30, 109 «049 1443 67 26.7 ae : 4.7] 10] 0 Rid Be mn 4
SuNDAY..... Tee! |i orake pilte 47-3 30.0 PTA] (uhapaoen | coccaee || .aocmee aco.| eae ? 5 ++ sssees. SUNDAY
6 41.10 46.7 36.3 10.4 30.2423 30.437 30.076 ~36r 1583 61 28.3 S.W. 22 2.3} 10} of 96 M 6
7) .35.25)} 44.0 29.0 15.0 30.4368 | 30.527 30.328 +199 1333 65 24.5 E. “5 08} 3] of 93 pee 7
8] 41.67] 48.5 30.0 18.5 30.1903 | 30.348 30.060 -288 1647 63 29.7 3 2 5:-7| to] of 36 * ae 8
9 | 36.58] 48.5 28.5 20.0 30.2150 | 30.318 30.106 212 1563 7o 28.0 N.E, I 2.2|10] of 69 ‘ 9
10 | 29.25 | 35-0 23.1 11.9 30.3250 | 30.378 30.286 og2 1308 80 24 3 N.E. Are) 05] 3] of 96 ‘on 10
tr | 34.42 | 39-5 | 26.8 | 12.7 | 30.3947 | 30.406 30.358 +048 1500 | 75 27 5 plu -9 | 8.3 | 10} of oo One a Ir
dohie BE. : Bailacer (ore) : weet
Sunpay,...:...12 | ..... | 46.0 29.2 26.80 IMac eee ie. a || eecaee. Rr El weleiaa 7 - 1.+, SUNDAY
13 | 43-251 49.3 36.8 12.5 29.9225 30.098 29.824 +274 2272 81 37-7 Sa -0 5-8|10] of oo 0.04 . 3
™% | 40.17] 47.8 35-3 12.5 | 29.8323 | 29.942 29.732 210 1927 71 33-5 S.W. -9 | 7-8| 10] of 28 | Inap Soe 14
15 | 33-58 | 43-2 29.0 14.2 29.5352 | 29.737 29.407 -330 1468 76 27.0 S.W. 3 547\|10| x 35 qaay Inap 15
16 | 27.38 | 32.0 23.3 8.7 29.7187 | 29.992 29.450 542 1188 80 21.8 S.W. .6 5.2}10] of 15 Inap 16
17 38.05 49-7 21.2 28.5 29.7525 30.025 » 29.604 421 1978 71 29.0 Ss. 2 6.8}10] of 65 ahs Inap 17
18} 35.67 | 49-5 26.5 23.0 29.7973 | 30.020 29.607 +413 1388 62 24.0 S.W. “7 4.8] 10] of 85 0.09 18
eee S.W. SSeilss.. | 10] Of ZO eters Inap 19 seeeee, 4.SUNDAY
SUNDAY...+.4+419 sratelaia 35.0 24.8 Pork || oAabados|| acocndan || onoqe neon || tOBAOn
20 | 28.67] 32.2 26.3 5:9 30.0037 | 30.077 29.908 -169 1308 82 24. S.W. 4 8.5 | 10] 1] 00 Le 0.9 20
2r 31.75 37.0 23.8 13,2 29.9427 30.079 29.826 253 1470 8x 26. S.E. 15.3 9-7| 10] 8 15 crite Inap 21
22| 34.47| 36.8 32.0 4.8 29.6018 | 29.775 29.510 .265 1857 93 32. S.E. 14.9 10.0] 10] 10] Oo 0.23 I.1 24
23] 35.92] 39-0 33-2 5-8 29.5928 | 29.035 29.539 +096 1667 79 30. S.W. 24.2 } 9.8} 10} g} 0° | 0.06 Peer 22
24 | 26.40] 39-0 15.8 23.2 29.7272 29.922 29.638 -284 1150 78 arn Ww. 22.0 | 10.0 | 10| 10 J 00 a0 0.3 23
25 | 18.12] 24.0 14.0 10.0 30 2170 | 30 381 30.066 +315 0795 80 13. Ww. 22.4 7.0/10] of 46 0.0 25
sed Ww. TAGAMEEL os [eves 96 3 aon BO) Poetleschs SuNDAY
SUNDAY,.......26 state Os 18.5 8.8 CiiyA | | abGonen 4) Acoso |) ocisdee le weenie
27 | 24.42 | 30.8 15.5 15.3 30-3472 | 30.615 30,066 +549 1093 Sr 19. N.E. 8.3] 10] of oo 30 AO 27
28 | 38.33] 46.3 25.5 20.8 29.6123 | 29.918 29.486 432 2025 87 34 S.W. 10.0| 10] 10 Oo 0.32 ana 28
29 | 35-75 | 39-8 33-0 6.8 29.7385 | 29.835 29.567 +268 1708 81 30. S.W, 92]10] 5} 93 0.09 0.9 29
30 | 33.30| 36.0 29.8 6.2 29.7365 | 29.793 29.629 -164 1570 82 28.7 S.W. 824))| 10%] ain) ax 0.10 0.2 30
ees soeeeeMeans| 35.21 | 41-28 | 27.80} 13.48 | 29.9626] ...... | «sco .2707 1619 76.3 28.3 JS. 36°% W. Gesuiees +345 | 1.31 en Sums ...... goad
19 Years means aay Sain 1g Years means for
for and including 32.43 | 38.90] 26.53 £250 9 3010078 |) coms Ml wees a -2623 1558 reyackty We Sco.) Eoooes 9-37 7.295 | 2.32 | 12.88 and including this
this month...... month,
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and sea of et -208 jnshes. bespecees Sethe ae
‘ , 32° ity was 95 on the 22n t th an t! ini-
Direction........ N. N.E E. S.E. Ss. S.W. Ww. N.W. CaLM temperature of 32 Fahrenheit. mum relative humidity was 44 on the 7th.
Seal eR eae oe ——_— ——_ |__| —_-———| _ 5 Observed. Rain fell on 11 days
Miles..........- 295 815 573 985 | 236t | 4585 | 2454 X10 t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary. Snow fell on 12 save
Duration in hrs. . 17 52 57 Sr 138 241 128 6 t Humidity relative, saturation being 100. Rain or snow fell on 18 days.
— pares SR | Pa ee ea teen | ——|——| —__——---—}_ 12 years only. Snow and rain fell on 5 days.
Mean velocity...| 17.4 | 15.7 BOs ean te 19:0 | 19,2 | 18.3 The greatest heat was £3.5 on the 2nd; and Auroras were Observed on 3 nights.

the greatest cold was 8.8 on the 26th, giving a

Resultant mileage 6635.
Resultant direction, S. 363° W.
Total mileage, 12178.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 39 on the 29:h.

Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour, on
he 18t h.

range of temperature of 44.7 degrees, Warmest
day wasthe 2nd. Coldest day wasthe 26th. High-
est barometer reading was 30.615 on the 27th; low-
est barometer was 29.407 on the 15th, giving a

Luna halos on 19th and 26th.
Solar halos on 4th, 8th, 12th and 21st.
Rainbow 2nd.

Sharp earthquake shock at llh. 47m. on the
27th, apparent direction N.E. to 3,W.

Se sens
ive

oe

Be

2

’ +
» ;
4 Se
" 1
4 As &
a5 fi
\ ard Pa caf . t
. § -- i al oi \ 7 . f
Sh tt ey eel ae } ny
- hy e, « * ' * y aa.
{ = 3 - aie! Be | oy '
- ar Exe 7 . ‘| % r
> re > ‘ - —_ 3S
S ed vow ha ot =
re Ph; igeat i
; =F “3 =o £
nee ¥ eee . ad Z Ret
a Z . as : ‘ ‘
‘Za Fea paw <a * | ? i
Kot cL aa) <a ee : ‘
Laks :
4 - H oy i '
= : A ; ~. wh i ;
2 * R. ee -
$4 ¥ : - ~ :
= ye! = \ we = “
J ; H
: s ‘ : f
: ‘ =
bei WOR, Shee Be i i ot
© ~ . , o *
‘ « | ails | L
} i ' ,
: j a , ‘
i ! . = wt
‘ Rpors? irr ; i
: t : : : “¢
ee ene ae eee eee a
ate eter. a So 2 "
Vi ae Ss - - ie= i
ee es . ‘. F .
“ es — é J ae ai 4 . ™
i : os - * ae fhe we ’ oe x . "
¥ ere, F 2% is * 7 ; .
A = 7 . - “ ‘
r~ 5 wa. Picwsen ort t -
Geese” eae te w eeesevererr)* Ss * Che eat eet tame os SES Rare ere ge Fara amen noe ~ ~~ Pd 4 i
Die cH : - : t : y : - ti
x : e “ ; i R : =~ 1
$i “3° wet, S ey ab es ; vv swe : “ es : 5
LY m=, Y “~- ae = . , }
= aS Savin +2 r 4 ‘ + § >
A z* +92 Pe cs A ee i
a <, “ i - > i * nes
+ pe cen — : . < * Pwd ; t | -
Sy Ravn o eer eye ee BV cig eS eae ig ee ee Yovisy ES mote ihe Sane xs ee ‘| ;
rie . : : = ‘ i
% ~—* . Ms b, : 3 _ :
5 7 : , - = : . 4 « ; 3 2 rie * ah oo : 4
i : ep oar, 3 y ¢ A Bi pes fs “9 : ie
i ? ens S ‘ 2 ar i) : + t - . <a
7 = ‘ > ped . x - « ~ U i
rr 2 * = a * ~ é e: a + ’ >
he * eo ao at i . a » “ ee ae \ a ;
Li f ate. F : : . = ’ 1 Q ‘ ; i
f + es , a. > oo - hese meee “ Fok
ae at a ee S aise : ae ‘ z = 3 . ; ; . > . ts
C4 : ren ' v . Hon , t 3
aS é - Lo p 2 ee Snir s a P -
ee ee eeenrenn eee nee ee ee eee arr aa ee ; oe ah. oe : [
ey : i ; ‘ Hi , ‘ 7 ’ : Lay f
3 P P ’ be ;
i| 7 . nee ae — “J * 4 - 7 ad tb. Pr i=
s = ‘ cS 5 ; - ‘ + By ’ Ae < ts ‘ |
‘ 2 es $ : - i '
a ; 1s - x
i :
1
'

Ss
—— SEER

————— oe

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF DECEMBER, 1893.

Meteorological Observations, eg ee Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEO D, Superintendent.
3 Sky C) ouDkKD
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. Wie. fin Tome [s.¢ 4 | a 18
= a
————— SS ee | Na ——_—_—_ —_ pape || ees =, Eee
pres- |relative| Dew Mean Beg ae 33 | zs
pay: ; : SES GE Pad Rone General |velocity) § | 4 | ¢]°3 5| Be | Ee | 3 DAY.
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range Max. Min. | Range. WA fe direction. jin mile} S | 5 |= |S**| 37 ee | 8
perhour]! = = Io =] a 3
1 |° 22.67°| 35-2 18.0 17.2 29.969 29.805 ~164 0935 75.8 16.3 Ww. 9.1 8.2]10) 2] 58 ws aia 0-15 | 1 Ts
2 8.10 | 20.5 4-5 16.0 30.396 30.062 +334 +0473 75-8 1e7, Ww. 12.5 20|10| of 94 i Aes. | ae
SUNDAY........ 3 Cue 14.3 6.5 7-8 Baraearara lteneitoneas Biden "Weal kas Wass SP N.E. ‘Opie ABAD esce 00 gis) (0:05; [ques cee :
4| 5-17] 13-5 1.8 | 21.7 30.478 29.954 +524 0415 | 75-5 |— 0.8 Ww. SS 040) 55 7.|/:20) |'aOn I NsOOIE | eareaey 1 menrercceea srerten | Meg
5 1.57 8.5 |— 6.2 14.7 30.546 30.154 +392 0398 86.0 |— 2.0 N. 10.0 | 10.0 | 10 | 10 fete} avs ceae ae 5
6 17.67 | 27.4 6.5 20.9 30.244 30.022 222 0352 85 2 13.8 Saws 14.5 7.0|10} of 20 en Inap | Inap| 6
7 23.78 29.5 19.8 9-7 30.315 go.148 +167 1135 88.7 21.0 S.W. 14.4 3-8 | 10 ° 17 ara 0.4 | 0.04 7
8] 17.72} 22.2 12.8 9-4 30.421 30.194 227 0868 89.2 15 2 S.W. 95 | 6.5| 10] of oo Sec Inap |Inap| 8
9] 30.25 |. 34-3 14.8 19.5 30.280 29.702 478 1432 84.7 26.3 Ss. 15.5 | 9.5 | 10] 7] 00 sees | Inap |Inap] 9
SuNDAY,,.......10] ... 38.5 21.2 GET \ ea. cell Monricn en | eae matdass Soete| Men aae tear Sire S.W. 2628. \Nieiset | etaleal eos 0.18 1.0 | 0.26] 10 ......,.,, SUNDAY
11 }— 0.68 | 275 |— 4.2 | 31-7 30-334 29 923 411 6337 | 79-7 |—5 8 Ww. 25.7 | 08] 3] of 96 ve Saenet || tees Ww
12 |— 2.25 1.8 |— 5.8 7-6 30-385 29.979 +406 +0337 | 87.2 -- 55 N.E. 19.5 | 7-7] 10] © oo ae 4-4 | 0.38 | 12
13 |— 9-33 |— 9-5 |—13-2 12.7 30.813 30-515 -298 -0238 86.0 |—12.3 Ww. 17.0 2.2!| 8| of 52 neon Ratan soe | 33
14 |— 5-20 0.0 |—13.8 13.8 30. 882 30.448 434 0298 87.8 |— 8.3 Ww. 10.3 6.3] 10] of 32 ¢ ao sibierst|| XA
15 5-42} 139 |— 4-3 17-3 30.317 29-995 322 O512 88.7 2.7 N.E, 15.5 [10.0] 10] 10} 00 ; 3-7. | 9.37 | 15
16] 15.58] 24.5 11.0 13.5 29 .867 29.345 §22 0808 go.2 13.2 N. 22.9 # 10.0 | 10 | 10} oo ae 4.6 | 0.46 | 16
SUNDAY. ....05- Palate 25.8 3.4 226A ME os Mee llee seni |e aceite ied |b Baers Sreas Prch S.W. O°: Nl c inns | see |e Me 0.8 | 0.08 | 17 ...:... ..SUNDAY
18 3.20 7-5 |— 3-2 10.7 29.971 29.801 170 0440 86.3 05 S.W. 10.5 | 5.5 | 10] of 87 ne 0.9 | 0.08 | 18
PCo lel ee oe Be <o 3.5 16.0 29.774 29.550 224 0760 90.3 12.6 N. 1.5 | 10.0] 10] 10} 00 tet 4-1 | 0.34 | 19
20 1.27 | 19.0 |— 5.2 24.2 39.357 30.009 +348 -0382 79-7 |— 3.8 W. 28.7 | 5.0| 10] of 96 +s» | Inap | Inap]} 20
2t 27.58 33.0 |— 0.2 33-2 30 150 29.903 +247 1275 83.7 23.3 S.W. 28.5 | 100] 10 | 10 f oo Inap 0.3 0.03 | 2
22 2.27 A255) acca 35.2 30.532 30.239 +293 0418 86.5 |— x.5 N. 18.2 5.2} 10] oO 95 hie o.1 0.01 | 22
23 | 23 78| 36.9 1.3 35-6 30.156 29.856 300 1302 92.7 22.0 S.W. 14.5 } 10.0 | 10 | 10 oo Inap 2.1 | 0.21 | 23
SunpayY....... MAN melee sic 41.0 34.0 P| | Woaek . cotlernsPerrenl Oke SCtnaT ae | Weert ae AG Soe S.W. PERCY pnon bas} oa) | seh) 0.15 Siege, | OsE5i || mdi eelenesiene SuNDAY
25; 25 75| 37-8 18 8 eye! 30.003 29.717 -286 1367 94-5 24.3 N. 12.0 | 10.0 | I0 | 10} 00 0.43 2.0 | 0.63 | 25
26 7.00 19.5 3.0 16.5 39. 432 30.109 +323 +0490 82.0 2.5 N. 14.7 0.0} O}| Of 97 ouse see Borer 4
27 18.45 | 30.2 4.6 25.6 30.289 29.721 +568 +0953 go.2 16.3 W. 10.0 g.2| 10] 6] oo A 1.0 | 0.10 | 27
28 | 3065} 33.8 26.9 6.9 29.688 29.357 -331 1588 | 927 | 28.8 S.W 19.1 } 10.0] 10| 10] 3 ; 2.6 | 0.26 | 28
29 | 27.17] 35.0 9-5 25-5 jo 049 29.474 -675 1450 | 90.8 24.8 Ww. 14.8 | 8.8|10| 4] 17 0.2 | 0.01 | 29
30 |— 4.97 18.0 |— 9.8 27.8 30.361 30.213 .148 0312 90.7 |— 7.0 w. 18.6 1.8] 10] of 95 Inap | Inap |} 30
SUNDAY: ......s BTS |e aterusielsye 5.8 |= 4.7 TOS, 10) fee deine |p| re cecien, |llt Pejeinie’als sees «ee eee W. 12.7 weve [oe [ee 4° » 1:2 | 0-09 | 3 serewnee SuNDAY
seteh ecco Means} 11.81 | 22.76 4:79 | 17-97 Faaialet weeens +339 .0761 86.2 8.4 §. 80° W. 16.3] 6.6] .. 34] 0.76 40.4 | 4.60 |Sums ......

19 Years means ar na. i}>>” az Pas] peelicnee | 1g Years means for
for and including DONS ale 25750 ieeteess |) wkd odd Maa. Omar ac tein a lets lols = 289 -0974 8233) ||) verte lla ese 7.0 128.9] 1-33 | 24.0 3-68 | {and including this
this month.... month,

ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | range of 1.537 inches. Maximum relative humid-
: l temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. ity was 100 onthe12th. Minimum relative humid-
Direction........ N. | N.E. E. §.E. || °S. S.W. | WwW. | N.W. Cau § Observed. ity was 59 on the Ist.
Miles ee cee 6 eee | eee Say 7 ae ihe es ae ey —| ft Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary. Rain fell on 5 days.
ae oe red oe) UD |e NWSE ES 1 EERE, 9°97 aes se Rs t Humidity relative, saturation being 100. Snow fell on 23 days.
Durationin hrs..| 136 69 23 12 58 209 193 38 6 1 12 years only. Rain or snow fell on 24 days.
F ares pee hes ee te The greatest heat was 41,0 on the 24th; and | Lunar haloson one night.
Mean velocity..-| 14.3 19.0 75 10.6 16.3 20.5 14.1 11.4 Solar halos on two days.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 45 on the 10th
and 21st.

Greatest velocity in gusts 60 miles per hour, on
the 10th.

Resultant mileage 5,131.

Resultant direction, S, 80° W.
Total mileage, 12,135.

Average velocity, 16.3 m. per hour.

| the greatest cold was —13.8 on the 14th, giving a

range of temperature of 54.8degrees. Warmest
day wasthe 28th. Coldest day was the 13th. High-
est barometer reading was 30.882 0n the 14th; low- |
est barometer was 29.345 on the 16th, giving a |

ie Br ne= ‘ ” ;
“ } -. be
~ .
. y
r >
- re * - -
gb) < » y *
a4 —
a « * =
2 ee MIR bs ~, +
Sot as
a
ror
i
‘
= 7
~ :
¢
‘
!
:
,
; ‘ ee. 0 ae clas
area a a ee a | >a — ? &
: rae ea ae te pci &
ek SRE RS I a Po ran atten oe Seca? saris
i =X be _ t > :
PS al ¥ ’ - : by : 2

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF JANUARY, 1894.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

Sky CLoupeD
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In Taweae, 3.95] a 5
Se a ah Mean, Penn —_——_ ——|— See ee eh es
pres- |relative| Dew Mean Sga| 38 | 33 | ss
sureof | humid-} point. F a -| , fox S| so psy RE ire DAY.
F : vapour it General jvelocity] € | ¥| = |uoF| 88 Eg gq
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.J Mean. Max. Min. Pours y. direction. jin miles} © s |e aie Sa | 4
perhour) = 4 = a iS
I 7.80 | 10.8 1.8 g.o 30.3042 | 30.360 30.184 0543 87.7 4.8 Ww. 19.5 2.7 | 10 = 95 aia am 0.02] 1 i
2 13.40 | 17.0 5.6 Il.4 30.0187 | 30.238 29.937 0720 89.3 II.o Ww. 9.0 8.3 | 10 | of O° , 0:1 | 0.01% 2
3] 15-75 | 20.0 12.5 7-5 29-7918 | 29.951 29.685 .0825 93.0 13.8 E. 8.6 5.0] 10] of 27 ae Inap | Inap| 3
4} 3t-02| 41.2 12.0 | 29.2 | 29.6622 | 29.845 29.497 «1645 Qr.5 | 28.7 s.W. 27-0 | 9.2} 10} 5] 9 | or pan \VOuan |g
5 il) 25-30) |) 37.0 8.6 28.4 29.9827 | 30 070 29.913 0758 82.3 11.0 N. 25.2 | 10.0| 10] 10 J 00 oe 1.8 |0.18] 5
6 9-90} 14 3 6.2 8.1 30.1202 | 30.187 29.992 0603 89.2 7.3 N. 6.4 9.8} 10] gf 13 ae Eee O54) 60 5
SUNDAY... ...... 7 oe a 22.3 6.8 15-5 ss sietalels Ato te ples oocmal leoroce POA er S.W. Bey cates ditvewtel ee 45 ae 1.2 0.12 Fas cad do A SODA,
8] 10.22] 19.8 4.2 15.6 30,2088 | 30.354 29.943 0540 77.8 4.8 Ww. 19 9 3-7| 10] of 60 Rae Inap |Inap]| 8
9| 4-57 | 12.7 |— 6.1 18.8 30.3870 | 30.430 30. 339 0453 84.0 0.8 Ww. 14.2 | 1.2| 5} of 89 apy i vee | 9
to |— 8.12 |— 0.5 |—12.7 12.2 30.2210 | 30.344 30.092 0268 91.0 |—10.2 N.E, 13.1 4.3 | 10] of 32 sak acee | 20
tr} 16.05 | 31.2 |— 5.9 3762 29.6527 | 30.035 29 358 ogo2 84.7 12.3 S.E, 16.5 g.0|10| 4] 00 ; 0.18 | ar
12 1.27 | 26.0 |— 6.9 32.9 29.8512 30.095 29 56: 0385 78.8 |— 3.8 Ww. 32.0 1.0] 4] of 95 ie eee! | 22
13 |— 0.88 45 |—7-5 12.0 30.0992 30.184 29.947 0320 77-5 |— 6.7 Wr 16.7 1.8 | 10 | of 100 ae eee | 13
SuNDay ....... 14 sone | 127 [— 40 16.7 mite « Mes Sararacts An oL One Re eGo 2) Neer yeh os tee E, BOS aaE lroinive ve 99 ee seine Ul! Thkeseven, Mics Sunpay
tS |) s23'50) ||), (30-2 10.2 21.0 29.9827 | 30.087 29-916 1175 87.7 20.7 Ss. 9-5 | 10.0| 10 | 1of 90 0.20 eieeet ROCAOs sre
16 | 21.97 | 30-2 g.0 21.2 30.2055 | 30.521 29.971 1083 88 2 19 2 N. 18.6 6.7| 10] of oo Inap 2.1 | 0 21 | 16
17 5-52] 15-3 0.8 14.5 30.6518 | 30.71c 30 551 0480 84.7 2.0 N.E. 17.7 0.7. | 2} Of O05 as eal see | 17
18} 25.25 | 3597 20 337 30.2128 | 30.493 30.010 1330 89.3 22.7 Sy 21.7 7-3| 10] of 23 0.12 fe 0.12 | 18
19 | 20,05 | 36.7 I0.c 26.7 30.5860 | 30.762 30.272 0987 83 2 15 8 N.W. 13 3 0.3| 2] of 97 Inap Inap | 19
20] 13.48| 34.0 0.3 33-7 30.5422 | 30.776 30.282 0748 84.5 9.8 ‘E, 14 3 4.0] 10] of 50 0.05 0.05 | 20
SUNDA © sic ccs 2%p ll “ania ce 37-5 21.3 16.2 a= ieee OADG Che Sconces, | le aap) lmetercae ae PACh Suey EM Eapaeal Wier sei (te Bee ioe | aweoateees «SUNDAY
22] 25.85] 37.3 6.5 32.8 30.0615 30.317 29.906 1227 81.5 21.0 S.wW, 22 1 5-5 | 10] of 63 aie sano see | 22
23| 7-37] 15-2 |—0.5 | 15.7 | 30-4457 | 30.508 30.391 0515 | 83.7 3.2 N.E. 7.4 | 3-7| 8] of 72 3ae : wes | 23
24 24.25 40.2 5-5 34-7 29.9037 30.384 29-542 1235 87.8 20.7 S.E, 23.2 9-8 | 10 9 fole) 0.32 o.1 0.33 | 24
25 4.68 | 39.8 °3 39-5 30.4080 | 30.634 30.088 0403 73-7 Laff S.W. 25.3 0.2 xr] of 96 cone ae 25
26 1.07 55 |— 6.2 11.7 30.5650 | 30.705 30. 382 0393 86.2 |—20 .N.E, 10.1 85 :|ron | al 0 re o.r | 0.01 | 26
27 | 10.23] 15.2 3.0 12.2 30.1682 | 39.337 30.084 0620 88.8 755 N. go 6.3 | 10] of 73 0.9 | 0.09 | 27
SuNDAY .......28 ee eelhrzor2 10.4 iQ) Bo ecic | Marea weneis y Wena cies awit cee. nei S.W. sacha] ectoeianll See 79 Of. Osor'| 48. alee eeers ++» SUNDAY
29 14 72 21.2 5.8 15-4 30.1190 | 30.349 29.730 -619 0802 g2.0 13.0 N. 12.2 8.3] 10] of oo oe 0.8 | 0.08 | 29
30 | 20.90] 25.2 18.0 7.2 29.4152 | 29.563 29.273 -290 0930 84.2 16.8 N.E, 39-5 8.3 | 10] of oo a 8.5 | 0.85 | 30
3r | 15.78) 21.2 8.3 12.9 29.8640 | 30.054 29.662 | -394 0797 88.5 13.2 Ww. 26,2 1.7|10| of 88 Ee an soos | 32
Means} 12.99] 23-57 3.85 | 19.72] 30.1271 Dae . - 362 0766 85.6 9.60 IS. 784%° W.} 17.2] 5.45] -- 45 0.90 19.2 | 2.81 |Sums ..... smaeiescae
zo Years means a ‘ a Py ai | Ses] |e ol | 20 Years means for
for and including 11.78 | 20.33 3-80 | 16.52] 30.0569 aes Bereetare -333 0722 81.1 SE) a 6.4 133-0 | 0.83 28.4 | 3.61 | and including this
this month .... ‘ Divbe Ni ve | a month,
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | range of 1.503 inches. Maximum relative humid-
i i 5 | temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. ity was 100 onthe 15th, 18th and 24th. Minimum
De peean: Sant see Bee See) eeey pical | Lev Elias pee 22 Ges ___| § Observed. relative humidity was 49 on the Ist.
Miles...... 1563 2128 505 IIIT 1481 2092 3540 413 t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercury. Rain fell on 7 days.
== = |—— | Tele cowl) ceenlo ae | |:«COs Et Mumidity-relative, saturation being 100. Snow fell on 15 days.
4 8 6 6 8 6 3 :
Pasion mikes. pene? 7A Ste ras (Bee | RRO] MS MR lie ee S53 285 De Stl) .13yenre onion Rain or snow fell on 20 days.
Mean velocity...| 16.1 18.0 8.0 17.4 14.4 21.3 21.3 14.7 The greatest heat was 41.2 on the 4th; and Auroras were observed on 3 nights.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 69 on the 30ch.

Greatest velocity in gusts 84 miles per hour, on
the 30th.

Resultant mileage 2,592.

Resultant direction, S. 78/° W.
Total mileage, 12,833.
Thunder storm on 4th.

Lightning on 24th.

Hoar frost on 1 day.
Solar halos on 10th, 20th, 24th, 26th and 27th.

the greatest cold was — 12.7 on the 10th, giving a
range of temperature of 53.9 degrees. Warmest
day wasthe 4th. Coldest day was the 10th High-
est barometer reading was 30.776 on the 20th; low-
est barometer was 29.273 on the 20th, giving a

en * 4 %
Eat, rN ian LEGS
Tigi < ; "
Pe oe
J ” . a
i . "

, ‘ ~N, oe a
~ » s . r. ~ a . os
“4 . ‘ Pine * 4 +
5 ee ee ee INL CO ALE ASP LORE. RP Cc ap Vey Porgy ot ee tS rey 5S TI PR,
tare acenciin wets enemy ee rede sill eal are ame ew ea ea ere et ee ee ee { ~
. s » fry f . ~ Py ree: » .
‘sh! r ; x bet pea’ > 2 dea .
ha ail 2 a ho ’ an | ~ a
Lg pn ¥ , * ~ 6 “
- 9 5 aa r ‘s ' ‘. ', 4
F . 4 t “2 Vie ee) - +
ns . . rc P|
“ _ : . ¥ ~ e t
ey: = Ee al =7 : : %
+ > * s ¢ ~ é
a ® sd Ss , mw ‘ ‘
as | : , ~~ t - e
* a 8 i;
¥
, a . r =
5 « .
= > a i. Sry , ¢ - ‘
eee Ware, es Te. 4s . ;
ll Ye at ad é a & 4 ee see R : < 4 : “
‘ 4 r . ‘
Lie eh oh nd “o ae es 3 . 7
aes a - ate ba Aitend 32 5 z ‘ i ,
ee I RE ie 1 ee a Se on dee we J 7 as 7
= ~ -
o 4 ~ .
ees Eg = 7 f ii :
Fy y > 4 * ’ ~
‘ “ ‘ =
- F 4 4
g > - caieaied ~~ “ - oo or r
as ’ ee 1
. ae
. .
‘ z ou
. : - ‘ 3
* - 2 & . a2 ’ >
~ ‘ bs ae | 4 2 “
' is . et ‘ ce a
” af § = is -
<< ve ae -
= : _
ee * S ‘
- ~ . - . ee ee ss . so
~ F ,
‘4 ,
A ‘ :
_ 4 '
Ke s ' 2 7 r ~~, ,
* ®
~ ¥ -_ - '
7 a cr is is He os Sarees 4

Mi atge CRE: a hee =a
— y ~ 4 = bd i ae

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF FEBRUARY, 1894.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD Superintendent.

Sky CLoupED

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. Pome E
ls N °
——————— | t Mean Pies = ——— ee ose 5 cal aes
pres- |relative| Dew as] 33 33a
DAY. sure of | humid-| point. Mean ‘ S32| 25 | 23 | 32
: . vapour. it General |yelocity eo} e12s5| a2 Eo | ao DAY.
Mean. | Max. | Min. | Range.} Mean. Max. Min. | Range. 2 vy. direction. |in miles &/) [Sam -3- od |
=/= Ia = ie =]
1 g.42| 12.8 SiBn | i7es 30.0028 | 30.102 29.933 ~169 0557 83.8 5.3 S.W. es eran alee eal er
2 10.13 17-7 2.7 15.0 30.0508 30.202 29.864 +338 .c602 85.3 6.7 ise E 45 a a ees Inap| 2
; 3 25.12 30.5 16.0 14.5 29.6858 29.770 29.644 -126 1152 83.8 21.3 SZ o]} oo fe ° y ©.01 3
SUNDAY........ 4 Boon 27.5 |— 2.7 28.2 | woe. . steee teeees toes Po cease .. prea N. a 45 atataie F eee Baie muiss ¢ SuNDay
5 |— 0.83 3.8 |— 8.5 12.3 39.3557 | 30-371 30-314 +057 0353 84.3 |— 4.8 N. of 94 es ‘ on 5
6| 12.85] 19 5 0.3 19.2 30.1720 | 30 333 39.017 +316 0628 77-2 7.2 S3 of 88 ie 2 ahs 6
7 | 26.37) 32-3 18.0 14.3 29.8748 | 30.007 29.804 -203 1187 gate 2x.7 SE, oh a oe = “aa alas
8] 33-75] 38.3 28.0 10.3 29,8832 | 30.107 29.719 388 1655 85.2 29.7 Ww. of 5: ae Spite) atonal {ies
Ip) e20e00) |) 200% 14.3 14.8 30.0432 30.187 29.884 +303 IOI5 90.0 19.2 N. to} OF an 0.3 | 9.03 9
to | 33-57] 38.0 26.3 11.7 29.6710 | 29.806 29.603 203 + 1692 88.5 30.3 Ss, g} 00 a 2.3 0.23 | 10
SUNDA acoso a XXs|ieeenen|| e24e5 9.0 15.5 AAA 3. IP costes eren cocon| | meemGe mera Boon S.W. .. | 08 eo £0 |(0.10)] TX asevs. «ce. SUNDAY,
12 2.60 8.4 |— 3.2 11.6 30.3543 | 30-500 30.144 +356 0385 78.0 |— 2.3 N. o} 60 ie fie -4) weniexa
13 0.03 58) 15.6 Il.4 30.2802 | 30.393 30 x3C -263 0373 865 |I—33 N.E. of 76 ey oe . | 33
14 |— 1.18 6.0 |—97 I5.7 30.3110 | 30-464 40.120 +344 0373 92.2 |— 3.7 ‘NE, of o4 ee 0.2 | 0.02 | 14
15 9.87 18.3 2.1 16.2 29.6707 30.004 29.462 542 0620 89.3 7-5 N.W. 9} 20 12s 2.7 | 0.27 | 15
16 |— 0.82] 13.1 |— 8.2 21.3 30.0835 | 30.436 29.678 +758 0348 8z.5 [— 5.5 Ww. of 94 a ae wee | 16
17 4-47 | 25.0 |— 9.5 34.5 30.2053 30.491 29.889 .602 0515 87.3 1.7 S.E, ° 30 uf iar Pee ey;
SUNDAY a liiewien Lon |mesctsics 38 7 25 2 135 Anos = cee aonor Patel (E tecene SeGE Baton S.W aap 493 0.12 ° 0.53). 08 oe epee . SUNDAY
19 | 30.42 38.0 21.0 17.0 29.9252 | 30.103 29.809 +294 1283 74.7 23.3 S.W. of 64 oe ar s+ | 19
20] 15.55 | 31.0 10.0 21.0 30.0598 | 30.128 29.920 208 0612 68.2 7.9 s.W, of 83 Sante Ls ee. | 20
ar. |eta-mep |) 27.0 8.0 9.6 30.1023 | 30.150 30.063 -087 0610 80.2 7.5 s.W. of 51 ce 0.2 | 0.02 | 21
az} 15.85 | 23.8 6.2 17.6 30.0118 | 30.184 29.825 +359 0690 76.7 9.8 S.W. 6] 39 neve 4 22
23) 0.17] 21.8 |—14.1 35-9 | 30-2045 | 30.539 29 883 654 0395 79-3 |—50 S.W. of} 93 ats Sapa lick 23
24 |—12.58 |— 8.0 |—19.5 II.5 30.7555 | 30-833 30.631 +202 0197 83.5 |—16.3 S.W. of 94 : ; aacen hae
SUNDAY .......25 ehiak 8.5 |—13.1 ZO. |e eigeccd Hie Speesa sages Sclewel) (avert “nee Pica Ss. .. | 66 : ae one [h4S a eeerceus SUNDA
26 8.25 | 178 |—2.5 20.3 30.2867 | 30.359 30.222 +137 +0505 76.8 3.0 N. of 94 ae, as a6
27 16.47 | 24.2 8.0 16.2 30.3265 30.393 30.242 +151 -0697 74.8 9-7 Ss. ° 89 ‘ ae spond hey;
28 | 30.62] 34.5 20.0 14-5 30.1545 | 30.234 30.111 123 1325 77-2 24.3 Ss. 10 | 00 oer Inap | Inap | 28
1€.88 | 30.1033 8.x JS. 4934° W. «sf 47 0.12 G.I |-.03 |SUMS ..ccccrcnecececs
zo Years means ; eae! res 20 Years means for
for and including 15 43| 23.81 6.78 | 17.03 | 30-0483 Orin |) eaters 141.3 | 0.82 22.4 | 2.97] 4and including this
this month... month,
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | range of 1.371 inches. Maximum relative humid-
; : } | temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. ity was 99 on the 10th. Minimum relative humid-
Direction........ N. N.E. E. S.E. Ss. S.W. Ww. N.W. Cam. § Observed. ity was 42 on the 2nd.
Miles. |. ptedesas «| "xaey fone a San ay) ee | ran AG ses aaa eae eR Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary. Rain fell on 1 day.
- aa a ees ee | eee es |_| | ¢ Humidity relative, saturation being 1Uu. Snow fell on 11 days.
Duration in hrs | 99 59 14 58 130 178 87 39 8 ‘1 13 years only. Rain or snow fell on 11 days.
Mean velocity...| 14.2 18.1 123 Ge Wieio. | 22.1 18.3 Taare cr The greatest heat was 38.7 onthe 18th; and Auroras were observed on 2 nights.
Hoar frost on 6 days.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 44 on the 13th.
Pe del velocity in gusts 54 miles per hour, on
) 3

Resultant mileage 4,334.
Kesultant direction, S. 493° W.
Total mileage, 11,949.

the greatest cold was — 19.5 on the 24th, giving a
range of temperature of 58,2 degrees. Warmest
day wasthe 8th. Coldest day was the 24th. High-
est barometer reading was 30.833 on the 24th; low-
est barometer was 29.462 on the 15th, giving a

Lunar halos on 13th, 15th, 18th and 19th.
Solar halos on 4th, 7th, 12th, 13th, 17th and 2lst.
Lightning on 7th.

—— a reerenenienenernnenneeninneneereninneeneinnEieeenReIReEIEREEEEIEEEEEEEE

Se
| “, -
iP ma
“>> ~
: - ; 5
- c= i : > 7 .
_ “A 7. A € ~
~ “ , {
A - ; s ~
\
Dat gh ince an lh —— a os -
SS - a “ata Sek a RS nl ail -
mare ses a go a a ee ee a i A
= x De: - . ¥ ss Pn i
= be “iy 2.8 2 ,
es - ~~ v }
} ‘
+ - “s +e
ce a
- : hp
We ik < :
: ‘ ~
tn + »
aon, * ® ‘ ;
} - ' ;
¥, '
»
ae
4 ;
P # Sa
aes ae of be ete ee ae . 7k , ;
: Pg a) ee) tay te ee oe ae . :
~ ae on Phe 2 Pe, Pa ee ye ota a é ' i
2 os Vi en i eae hic -- } :
a ay ¥ 3 eee oe i ;
»* ks a .
~ Peete Sore ee te et ml a A + : a
é : Pp ah. ; pie my sy pas ts . + > =
pale ee la Sd ae ona ee a
ye ~ ¢ ¢ x * - * - °
at «ye Sys ~~ oes i ay _
> We Tg Ot om ge oe tet t A
5 4] — “a 2 ; A
es . ie ee oo = ee, > ,
‘ ‘
af Toe o ~
Bea? ta 5S s.
. fi i . an, =e
2. : J :
4 wey ae ae .
Sacre rt a tyra Bay yrs wa
pts te ay oetean
ve 5, x
Sie MER Regist So in = ‘
ms ro : : "
3 ie Jere ‘ : t Camp ‘ i
: + te, — -
on tLe SS :
sy oy i - ” ‘ ;
a aa 3 Z a i : +
= ee aN a —— ee 3 / - ‘
| | s
pArate ao MAE eth vent ls
Sie eel Fe ecg Shes re en erent ok -
: a : i
‘ 4 7" Say
. = — 8 ers “av
> *_s a —-
<¢ 3 ;
er ule me of os .
¥ 3 - ‘ i
- e Bs
ee ie, RUS =.
mi I bo ae
a ° ‘ *
as 5
, “ ‘
Bid: > ee * at set
Zz 5 4
‘ i oo = y hy . ;
¥ 3 oo + ; eer .
— Ra srs Pow » i meses *.
ae OT oar. 5 Sn = reat
- s = m, —_ -< s

4 Se encnmnnes oe

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF MARCH, 1894.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

: Y
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND Tey (a pU ee E
. N Tentus. [35 ,°| « r=] =
SS ae he MBS Ei t Mean pene = —_——— ——_— Soe = F =. Dey
pres-_ |relative| Dew Bes) Szi{s
DAY. = al . Mean Z oa2) Sc ao as
: ‘ Sure Oh beats point. | General lvelocits} § | 4| ¢|2S5| Be | Be | 2s DAY.
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.}| Mean. Max. Min. Range. Deuxe Ye direction. lin miles} & | = | = Jo%™® am 38 aa
perhour]:= | = | = | a a
1 | 35-03 | 40.2 27.0 13.2 30.0417 | 30.147 29.925 2222 1465 71-7 26.8 S: 12.3 3.5 eal Wire: go aes. aaa a eilews Si Nin ae
2) 37-20] 49.8 35-0 5-8 29.9053 | 30.016 29 843 -173 1933 870 33-7 S.W. 21.1 J} 10.0] 10| 10] © | 0,04 Fie POSEY El
4 3| 32-37] 38.5 | 29.0 9-5 | 30-2850 | 30.356 30. 161 195 1392 76.0 | 25.5 S.W. 19.6 | 1.8] 10] of 79 a es woth he
SUNDAY. ...... 4 Srila llnen uae | 28.7 1207 « elk nie ee aiy Shes, tieleine« Scr ite ote Picci crore Ss, ZO: ll vscnceel| eee eee 60 . AAil eat oye oem . SUNDAY
5 | 42.20] 47.2 36.6 10.6 30.1540 | 30.218 30.096 122 1713 63.3 30.7 Ss. 19.5 5-5| 10] of 93 Ina) Ina
6| 46.07) 523 40.1 12.2 29.9537 | 30.098 29.819 +279 2082 66.5 35-3 Ss. 18.1 Ae 1o| of 6 oe 4 se c
7| 36.63} 47-7 | 29-3 18.4 | 29.9453 | 30-094 29.742 +352 1845 82.0 | 31.8 Ww. 21.9 | 4.7| 10] of 54 | 0,32 0.32 | 7
8 | 28.43} 31.8 25-7 6.1 30,1200 | 30.187 30.075 112 1235 78.8 22.8 N. 5-9 60|10|] of 26 as os Ae 8
9 | 28.72] 33.8 21.4 12.4 30.1408 | 30.230 30.063 -167 1315 82.8 24.2 N.E. 7.6 5-0} 10] of 44 ate ; - 9
Io | 30.68 | 43.0 28.2 14.8 20,1293 30.199 30.010 . 189 1735 79.2 30.8 Ss. 11.4 2.8]/10] of 95 san A Io
SUNDAY .,,....11 ree |) 4853 36.0 PEE Tal [RM coisa Mertaeeerie tears Be aa, veee uaien S.W. 28.8- fs eaer|meenlt ee nego 0.05 Pl a bP ee . SUNDAY
12) 34-95 | 39-0 32-3 6.7 29.9355 | 29.971 29 837 -084 1265 62.7 23.5 S.W. 17.8 5-5 | 10] of 47 vale AN ety gl (i
13 | 34-47| 41-5 | 26.2 15.3 29.6840 | 29.935 29.43 +532 1482 737 | 26.8 S.Bs 14.4 | 9-0] 10] 5] 14 | 0.24 worn || ora lias
14} 30.85 | 39.5 | 245 15.0 } 29.6692 | 30.058 29.396 +662 1493 bebe) |) loci W. 21.0 | 8.3] 10| 1] °° | oo2 2.5 | 0.27] 14
ts | 24.37] 29.0 | 16.5 | 12.5 J 30.0168 | 30.181 29-719 -462 +0937 | 7£.0 | 16.7 W. to.r J 5.7| 10] of 29 ... | Inap | Inap} x5
16 | 33.73 | 38-2 26.4 12.0 29-7053 | 29-917 29-594 +323 1538 719 3 28.0 Ss. 18 5 9.7| 10] g] 00 0 05 0.3 | 0.08 | 16
17 | 33-30] 36.8 28.0 8.8 30.1870 | 30.220 30 III 109 1225 64.5 22.7 N.W, 118 40|]10}] of 94 — Ge Broom
SUNDAY........ RBH eitornoe 38 3 31.5 GiSs ei... aa one coral Sadagee betel eee omen S.E, TZ.Te MP scape: Nero Maret OS 0.26 0.26 | 18 ....... . SUNDAY
19 | 42.18} 57.0 32.6 24.4 29.7480 | 30.154 29.402 752 2182 77-2 35-5 Ss. 276 5.8| 10] of 27 0.12 dred) (OGRA) } XO
ao | 9r,95.) 37.8 26.8 11.0 30.3553 | 30.419 30.287 132 1093 60 8 20.3 N. 12.4 4-2] 9] Of 95 ataiene a sinter || 40
21 33.22 38.5 29.9 9-5 29.9710 30.292 29.733 -559 1662 86.3 29.7 N. 11.2 10.0 | 10 | 10 J oo 0.28 ciaiele 0.28 | 21
22| 31.82 | 34-7 29-5 5.2 30 0858 | 30.153 30.007 152 1275 70.3 23.3 N. 17.5 82]|10] 1] 00 cee Inap | Inap |} 22
23| 31.77| 37-4 26.5 10.9 29.6553 | 29.939 29.465 -474 1588 88.2 28.5 Ww. 22.5 8.5 | 10] x] 00 4.3 | 0.43 | 23
24 28.58 37-5 19-7 17.8 29.99)0 30.138 29-734 404 1163 71.8 20.7 W. 13.5 4-7 | 10 ° qt wines cece | 24
SunpAy!s eccen 25 Ree ey Ar 239 DSO) bo « Bropaca oll yrieibiacc crete fc wreray arte Soi? | Maken mage Ag S.w, P55) \Pheweonlen 35 Inap | Imap| 25 ........0 Sunpary
24 6 11.5 13-1 29.9478 | 30.062 20.905 +157 0658 69-5 9.0 W. 21.4 4.5| 10] of 93 oor « | 26
18.0 5.0 13.0 30.2112 | 30.290 30.166 124 0492 64.2 2.8 Ww. 20.7 1.7| 8] of 95 Ae A Pe goo key,
29.8 12.0 17.8 30.3242 32. 388 30.253 +135 .0937 76.2 16.2 S.W. 16.3 RP esi So 78 ee Inap | Inap | 28
34-5 23.3 11.2 29.4642 30 210 29 821 389 1330 80.8 24.3 W. 11.7 5-0| 10} oO 29 Sav 0.2 0.02
35.8 25 8 10 0 29.9265 30.025 29.871 154 1107 64.8 20.5 Ww. 15 4 553 9) 1S 72 eee aio +.
39-0 19.2 19.8 29-7745 30 o16 29.506 510 1260 80.8 22.0 N.E 13.0 ]} 10.0] 10} 10 f 09 0.07 0.1 | 0,08
g
eS ere eam mes | ae poms S|) Sas | a a ee eee a
38.37 | 26.c3] 12.34] 29.9939 Stick wee Soa 293 1385 74-5 24.4 |S. 491° W.| 16.5] 5.9] -- | -- | 45-8 1.45 Todo] 2p XO UME Tc 5 cis sleics vere cis F
zo Years means ms Ye hie aa cs <7 20 Years means for
for and including 24.39 | 3-71 | 16.99] 14.72 | 29-9706 | ...0- | sees -262 1087 75:5.) || ac coed aeons 60 146.3 | 0,96 23.7. | 3-32 | 4and including this
this month...... | | i . 5a month. m!
|
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | range of 1.023 inches. Maximum relative humid-
| temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. ity was 98 on the 21st and 23rd. Minimum relative
Direction.......- N. N.E. E. S.E S. S.W. | W. | N.W. Cat § Observed. humidity was 46 on the 20th.
- —_ |— SS SS SS —_-—_——_——| __ t+ Pressure of vapour in inches of mercury. ee cals i fee
Miles: .cteytecee ace 82x 49° 479 886 2815 2834 3108 878 t Humidity relative, saturation being 100. now fellonv days. _
Mee ee | | at Ran orsnow fll ob days
5 - 6 as wer y s.
Duration in hrs.. 72 39 41 65 ee oor 143 165 tees 6 es The greatest heat was 57.0 onthe 19th; Hoar font: one daen
Mean velocity...| 11.4 12 6 11.7 13.6 17.1 19.8 18.8 18.3 the greatest cold was 5.0 on the 27th, giving a Lunar halos on 1 night.
| range of temperature of 52.0 degrees. Warmest Solarhalos ono dase
Greatest mileage in one hour was 47 on the 19:h. | Resultant mileage 5,630. day wasthe 6th. Coldest day was the 27th. High- Thunder without Lightning on 7th.
Greatest velocity in gusts 60 miles per hour, on | Resultant direction, S. 494° W. est barometer reading was 30.419 on the 20th i low-
the 19th. est barometer was 29.396 on the 15th, giving a

| Total mileage, 12,311.

AS ee eS

+

-

Sy

hs

a RRR CERIN CON Ne a STINET: ST TRS PEST pm nett anaeaaae

b mht

2

4 ee.
mp bertee ah igechplia mechan sat —aemevenen or Tips est ae

——$—

Meteorological Abstract for the Year fSoc;

Observations made at McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. — Height above sea level 187 ft, Latitude N. 45° 30’ 17”. Longitude 4" 54™ 18555 W.
C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

f)
o o =o . . oe a3
THERMOMETER. * BAROMETER. 5 e Wino. in| £ | We EB | BS Feu ous Mor.
au |e. ess | 8 | Cee Sam her | Ba loa
RS | 22) 8 Bemez| 3 | Ske) s | oe | sug] seg | oes
, {1 Devia- ‘ a ga|/s. Mean same?’ | 5 | oe = Be} OES] oe | SHS
Mone. g |tion from) ,, ; g be g 4 Bp | Se 4 == | Resultant | velocity] ©, | 32/ £ : 28 S$ |2b:|34 ria ses SSE pao
& | 19years| 3 & | o38 & S S | Sas | Su | SE] 2S] direction. jin miles] BS) 22) 2 |42"| 2 | Ses) HEF] sie] ose
= | means. | & Ss | ace = = i moan Wee Wee (ee perhour.| “°| 85) 4 2 Fea | ey ae Hom SS) east et or
January ..,.-..+-| 4:08 | — 7.f4 | 41.7 | — 16.4) 12.81 29.9449 | 30.637 | 28.943} .220 -0475 | 81.3} 0.1]7S.77° W 14.8 57. 84.0) 0.10 1 22.4 16 2.49 1 16 JANUATY «esse ees
February -.--.... 12.99 | — 2.58 | 40.8 |—12.7| 15.50 30.0611 | 30.866 | 29.296 365 -0690 | 80.8 | 0.978 71° W. 18 9 61. 40.0 0.42 4 21.1 12 |. 2:81 2 14 February.......-
March ..........| 25.25 | + 1.22) 42.9!— 0.8; 14.52 | 30 0136 | 30.633 | 29.441 263 1150 | 77.5 | 19.4] S. 46° W. 19.6 54. 41.0 1.28 5 6.1 y 1.97 0 14 March ....05 ++
April? .......-..+| 90.80 | — 2.88 60.8 1.9) 15.96 30.0005 | 30.580 | 29 204 274 -1494 | 67.8 | 26.5] S. 48° W 18.1 62. 42.2 1.32 12 8.4 4 2.18 2 14 April..«+..
May ........ veces! 58.87 | — 0.47 | 84.8 34.9} 17.43 29.8364 | 30.261 | 29.245 212 .2856 | 69.7 | 43.0} S. 65° W. 16.6 68. 41.6 3.36 19 nes . 3.36 “is 19 May’. sewenss eae
PUT @ sereietarele eraxele .-| 68.01 | + 3.26 | 865 §3.2| 17.Y0 29.9597 | 30.187 | 29.612 | .131 -5109 | 74.5 | 59.2] S. 40° W. 11.2 59. §0.0 4.99 14 ayate “ 4.99 on 14 JUNE..0... oeee
July -....+ Basis 67.69 | — 1.14 | 87.1 52.0} 17.66 29.8624 | 30.186 | 29.530.; .154 -4884 | 72.6 | 57.948. T° W, 12.7 ol- §8.0) 4.59 16 atid me 4.59 | .. 16 July. . toes ves
August ......- ...| 67.85] + 0.89 | 99.0 48.0) 16.38 29.9175 | 30.169 | 29.124 | .166 .5113 | 75.5 | 59.1 | S. 894° W 11.4 52. 55.9 7.37 15 pase oH 1.37 | ss 15 August.... .
September ......} 54 83 | — 3.63 | 76.5 38.5| 15.74 29.9750 | 30.384 | 29.415 189 -3845 | 77.4 | 47.5 | 8.6052 W. 12.3 54. - 49.9 2.40 12 weve a 2.40) . 12 September....--
Metabers..scs 5: 40.29 | + 4.89 | 72.01 25.0] 16.59 30.0576 | 30 602 | 29.016 228 . 2933 | 76.8 | 42.57 S. 438° W. 14.9 50. 48.9 2.18 13 0.0 Lett 2.18), 1 1s October........-
November ....... 35.20) + 2.78.) 5350 | 8.8 | 13.48 29.9626 | 30.615 | 29.407 | .271 .1619 | 76.3 | 28.3] S.36i° W. 16 9 65. 34.5 1.31 11 5.8 12 1.97 5 18 November..-.--...
December ....... 11.81; — 6.76 | 41.9 | — 13.8 17.97 30.1009 | 30.882 | 29.345 | .339 -0761 | 86.2] 8.4] S. 8° W. 16 3 66. 34.0| 0.76 5 40.4 23 4.60 | 4 24 December.... ...
Sums for 1893 ....| ... bad dee Spouea mont Ath. A og apt onarete cats : ap S. 603° W. pon Ser. a. 30.14 | 127, 104 2 tt 140.91 | 16 189 Sums for 1893 ...
Means for 1893 ..| 40.72) — 1.01] .... Siteleu fi loss 29.9744) .... S000 - 234 -2536 | 76.4 | 33. 4c. 15 31 59.1 44.1 wen eae ee 3.41 ee 16 Means for 1893 ..
Means for 19 | : Means for 19
years ending? | 41.73 malay Rate wiepePstivifh A vatgte 29.9871 | ws. ae piste -2500 | 74.4] .... eeee * 15.21 61.3. |§45.7 | 28.18 | 133 122.6 82 40.14) 16 200 years ending
Dee. 31, 1893. | Dee. 31, 1893.

* Barometer readings reduced to 22° Fah. and-to sea level. + Inches of mercury. {Saturation 100. § For twelve years only. * For seven years only. 1 “‘t’’ indicates that the temperature has been higher: “—’’ that it has
been Jower than the average for 19 vears inclusive of 1893. The monthly meas are derived from readings taken every 4th hour. beginning with 3h, 0 m. astern Standard time. The anemometer and wind vane are on the sum-
mit of Mount Royal 57 feet above the ground and 810 feet above the sea level. /

The greatest heat was 99.0 on August 11: the greatest cold was 16.4 below zero on January 11, and 16.3 below zero on January 12.
in one day was 40.3 on February 6; least range was 41 on April 15. The warmest day was August ll, when the mean temperature was 78.57. The coldest day was January 11, when the mean temperature was 12.63 below zero.
The highest barometer reading was 30.882 on December 14. Lowest barometer reading was 23.943 on January 2, giving a range of 1.939 for the year. The lowest relative humidity was 23 on May 12. The greatest mileage of wind

recorded in one hour was 62 on January 29, and the greatest velocity in gusts was at the rate of 72 m.p. bh. on January 29. The total mileage of wind was 134,972. The resultant direction of the wind for the year was S.603° W..
Thunder storms on 23days. Lightning without thunder, on5 days. Lunar halos on 16 nights. Lunar coronas on 5 nights. Solar

The extreme range of temperature was therefore 106.4. Greatest range of the thermometer

and the resultant mileage was 49.458. Auroras were observed on 28 nights. Fogs on 5 days, h Be p
Halos on 10 days ‘he first snowfall of the autumn was on October 29. The first sleighing of the winter was on December 3. On November 27, at 11 h. 47 m., there was a very sharp earthquake shock. its apparent direction

was N. E.toS.W.
Nott.—The yearly means of the above, are the averages of the monthly means, except for the velocity of the wind.

Sele «ay ted.
< r 4

tr, ee ie ee
oi ie

.
Tey

NOTICES

F Society, 32 University Street, Montreal.

Rejected articles will be returned if desired, and if stamps are
enclosed for that purpose. The editors will not hold themselves
responsible for any views expressed by authors.

Subscribers who fail to receive the Recorp, or who change
their residences, are requested to notify the Editors accordingly.

Back Numbers of the Recorp may be obtained of the Hditors,
at forty cents per number.

Volumes, unbound, may be had as follows:

Vou. I.,4 Nos. - - - - - - $1.50
Vor @aii 8 Nosseach, 02.9). =!" %- 3.00 per vol.
The Recorp is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers,
or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage
paid, is as follows : |

Canada and the United States, - - $3.00
Great Britain’ - - - = - £013 0

PUBLISHED 20th APRIL, 1894.

ey Evan communications and exchanges should be carefully
addressed to Canapian Recorp or Screncz, Natural History

“INCLUDING THE PROCEEDINGS OF
THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL, | ‘
AND REPLACING

THE CANADIAN NATURALIS

CChIN TOA ee IN L.S:
On the Formation of Pegmatite Veins. By PRor. W. C. Briéaeer, Stesichokne, vk
og or, PR ee ae ay Mae AC A i An a a Per a Ge nea Ce ge Meat OE
Check-list of European and North ee. nas: Mosses, (Bryinez). By N. Conr
KinpgerG,; Ph. D..... eh AE GAD He Sy cine ods lal Met aectatara’S Ceaveidin ale eh eeaeanne Bek wasetel< bap Ee
- Contributions to Canadian Botany. By JAs. M. MAcoun ......essceeecceeciacseess 6
Preliminary Note on the Limestones of the Laurentian System. By Hirric Drew
GE Edis elie AE Males mines elorgh Unie eltb' sib evel omene but. atelelels cohen Qe mipaanatan Ricoto 88
Teratological Notes. By D. P. PENHALLOW ....ceee-ceceee eens a Stes Catena Neo MESS 91
Ancient Myriapods. By G. F. Matruew, F.R.S.C ....-..cseeeeees Laas Sew uote ce 93
Annual Presidential Address ; Nat. His. Soc., Montreal. ie Prof. WrsLry MILLs,
Ae UB Heiress eau PUR oe albie Adc. c-cieu aig ole aces pe erin eis-s die wage cm eraahemrite Nea pniae: oo
Proceedings of the Natural History Society.........-c.ccccssesseccccecsces Las ee Pr 105

Notices of Books and Papers :—

The Canadian Ice Age. By Sin J. Witu1Am Dawson, C.M.G., F.R.S. ........ 113

MONTREAL:
PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.
LONDON, ENGLAND : BOSTON, MASS.

Couuins, 157 Great Portlana $ A. A. WaTEeRMAN & Co., 36 Bromfield St..

1894.

ae
N ATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF ‘MONTREAL

[Incorporated 1832.]

OFFICERS—SESSION 1894-95..
Patron:
Hrs ExcmLueNcy THE GOVERNOR G®NBRAL OF CANADA.
Hon. President:
Sr J. Wittram Dawson, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.C.
President:
Dr. T. Westry Mitts.
lst Vice-President.
JOHN S. SHEARER.
Vice-Presidents :

Hon. Spnator Murray. Rev. Ropprt CAMPBELL, D.D.
J. H. R. Motson. GnHoRGH SUMNER.
Sm Donaup A. Suita, K.C.M.G. EpGar JUDGE.
B. J. Harrineron, Ph.D., F.R.S.C. J. H. Josppx.
Hon. Justice WuRTELB.

Hon. Recording Secretary : Hon. Corresponding Secretary .

R. W. McLacutan. | Jonn W. Srreime, M.D., Edin.
Honorary Curator : Honorary Treasurer :

E. D. WINTLE. | F. W. Ricwarps.

Members of Council:
GEO. SUMNER, Chairman.
Frank D. ADAMS, M.A., Sc., Ph. D. JAMES GARDNER.

ALBERT HOoLDEN. JOSBPH FORTIER.
Masor L. A. H. Latour, MLA. Hon. J. K. Warp.
Nevil Norton Evans. A. F. Winn.

J. STEVENSON Brown.
Editing and Exchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, M.A., 8c., Ph. D. Chairman.

G.F.Marrupw, St. Jon, N.B. Ray. R. Camppety, D.D.
1 A ty Wuirravns, Ottawa. Dr. Wastrey MIs.
B. J. Harrineton, B.A., Ph.D., me | Nevil Norton Evans.
Library Committee :
EK. T. Coamemrs, Chairman.
J. A. U. Braupry, C.E. JOSEPH FORTIER.
R. W. McLacuian. A. F. Winn:
J. F. Hausen.
Museum Committee :
E. D. Wintin, Chairman.
A. F. WINN. J. B. WIturaMs.
J. F. Hausen. N. N. Evans.
E. T. CHAMBERS. J. S. Brown.

Ray. R. Campsati, D.D.
Lecture Committee :°
Dr. Wustey Minis, Chairman.
Rev. Rozt. CamppELt, D.D. Dr. J. W. STIRLinG.
Pror. JoHN Cox. Ray. W. J. SMyru.
Very Rey. Dpan CARMICHABL. Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.
House Committee :
Jno. S. SHHARER, Chairman.
EDGAR JUDGE. | Gro. SUMNER.
Membership Committee :
J. StpvVENSON Brown, Chairman:
EpGAR JUDGE. | Joon S. SHEARER.
JOSEPH FORTIBR.
Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN

THE

CANADIAN RECORD

OF, SCLEN.C EH,

VOL. VI. APRIL, 1894. NO. 2.

ON THE FORMATION OF PEGMATITE VEINS.
By Prof. W. C. Broacur, of Stockholm, Sweden.

(Translated from “Die Mineralien der Syenitpegmatitginge der
siidnorwegischen Augit und Nephelinsyenite,” by Nervi.
Norton Evans, M. A. Sc.).

(Concluded. )

This hypothesis is supported by a large number of facts ;
in what follows, will be given a résumé of the more important
of these.

1. As far as the principal minerals are concerned, the
composition of pegmatite veins corresponds, with great
uniformity, and frequently over long distances, to that of
the allied eruptive rock of the magma of which the veins
are generally the final ejections. With certain special iso-
lated exceptions, their composition is quite independent of
the nature of their wall-rock.

As examples, we may again cite the norite pegmatites
occurring in the norite and labradorite rocks of the large
norite-labradorite district of the south-west part of Nor-
way; the augite syenite pegmatites of the region round ,
Fredriksvirn, corresponding to the augite syenites; the

62 Canadian Record of Science.

nepheline syenite pegmatites of the boundary zone along
the Langesundfjord, corresponding to the nepheline syenite
rocks of the neighborhood, and quite uninfluenced by the
fact of whether they occur in rocks poor or rich in nephe-
line, 7. e. whether they occur in laurvikite or in nepheline
syenite; the akmite granite pegmatite of Rundemyr, Hker,
in Silurian limestones and slates, corresponding to the ad-
jacent 4egerine granite of Kyrfjeld, etc.; the granite peg-
matites of Hitter6 in labradorite rock and norite, corres-
ponding to the granitite of the neighboring main-land, etc.
From the occurrence of certain mineral species, such as
albite, some authorities have wished to deduce certain con-
clusions with regard to the origin of pegmatite veins in
general,’ Although at the present time it ought to be
superfluous to reply to such propositions made many years
ago, similar views are still put forward from time to time
and render a reference to them necessary. Among the
first to describe the microperthitic intergrowth of orthoclase
and albite, or microcline and albite, from the above-men-
tioned locality, was Credner, and he quite correctly con-
sidered it to be a primary intergrowth ; as far as this phe-
nomenon is concerned, it also occurs very plentifully in the
syenite and nepheline syenite veins which have been dis-
cussed in this treatise (‘‘ Die Mineralien der Syenitpegma-
titginge”’); it occurs, however, developed in an exactly
corresponding manner, very commonly, indeed predomin-
atingly, in the normal-grained trachytoidal foyaites of Lau-
genthal which are true eruptive veins, and even in the
same combination, microcline-albite, as in the pegmatite
veins of the Langesundfjord, etc. Albite also occurs inde-
pendently in the same rocks, though not widely distributed,
in the form of individual crystals developed tabularly
parallel to the brachypinacoid. In view of these facts, all

1 See H. Credner, 1. c. p. 179: ‘* Albite forms for the association of minerals of
which it is a member a ‘guide’ for aqueous formation. Now as albite is most
intimately intergrown with the principal component of our pegmitite and granite
veins, with orthoclase,—as the one, so the other of these two feldspars must have
originated, and also the quartz which penetrates them hoth in the graphic
granite structure ;”’ see also F, Klockmann, l. c. p. 406.

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 63

theories which hold the presence ot albite as proof of
aqueous origin must fall to the ground. !

It has been sufficiently dwelt upon above that all the
minerals uf the pegmatite veins (even all the albite) have
not necessarily been formed by crystallization from a
magma, \

2. In their geological occurrence the pegmatite views are
similar to other eruptive veins; they traverse all sorts of
rocks, contain fragments of the same, etc. Hxamples of
the first statement have already been cited, the presence of
foreign fragments in pegmatite veins is so common that it
is quite unnecessary to cite special cases. It can hardly
be superfluous, however, to state explicitly that both in
acid granite pegmatite veins (several of the veins in the
neighborhood of Arendal) and in nepheline syenite peg-
matite veins (southern point of Stoké) I have observed
foreign fragments of the wall-rock exhibiting an arrange-
ment relative to one another such as is possible only in the
case of a rock formed from an eruptive magma.

The extremely intimate relations of pegmatite veins to
veins formed in a different manner but of corresponding
composition and of undoubted eruptive origin are also of
weight in this connection; the gradual passage of the ne-
pheline syenitic pegmatite veins of the boundary zone on
the Langesundfjord into the normal-grained nepheline
syenite veinstones of the same locality has been amply
described above; in the case of ordinary acid granitic peg-
matite veins this phenomenon is well known, and has been
frequently and deservedly referred to by prominent petro-
graphers. * The same thing is also true of granite types

1See further : Alfred Gerhard, ‘‘ Beitrag zur Kenntniss d. sogen. Soda-
granite,’ Neues Jahrb. f. Min. 1887, 2, 267-275 ; he found as principal component
of the vein-form granite of Ulfserud, Sweden, an almost pure albite, with micro-

cline, quartz, biotite and muscovite, zircon, apatite. Significantly this granite
rich in albite was a vein granite !

2 Michel-Lévy (Struct. et class. d. roches érupt. p. 15) remarks, for instance,
“notre structure pegmatoide (pegmatite graphique 4 grands éléments) dont nous
affirmons la liaison intime tant avec les granulites massives qu’ avec les granu
lites en filons (aplites),”? &c- See alsotheexcellent and instructive remarks of J.
Lehmann, l. c. p. 26: ‘' It is not admissible to separate the half pegmatitic, half
granular vein formations and the smaller veins of purely granular structure from

~

64 Canadian Record of Science.

which differ from these in composition; in a special part
of this Treatise, under akmite, the relationship between
the fine-grained apophyses of the acgerine granite district
and the akmite pegmatite vein of Rundemyr, is pointed
out.

To every one who has occupied himself with a thorough
study of the methods of formation of pegmatitic veins and
has had opportunity of investigating in the case of hundreds
and hundreds of veins of all varieties of occurrence, their
close approximation to the normal eruptive vein type and
their very various transitions to and connections with the
same, these purely geognostic peculiarities of occurrence
will perhaps be considered as the strongest proof of the un-
doubted eruptive origin of the veins.

3. The varieties of structure of pegmatite rocks are of
kinds which in part at least are known only in eruptive
rocks. In the case of acid granitic pegmatite veins there is
very often a purely eugranitic granular structure with
coarse grain (é. g. in the granitite of numberless pegmatite
veins near Stockholm) ; in the nepheline syenite pegmatite
veins, aS has been mentioned above, a coarse-grained typical
trachytoidal structure, corresponding to the foyaites of the
Laugenthal (e. g. Laven), is frequently observed. The drusy
structure of many pegmatite veins, particularly of granitic
ones, is not (as considered e. g. by Klockmann l. ¢. p. 407)
an argument against the eruptive nature of pegmatite, but
is frequently very characteristically developed as large
laccolites in the boundary zones of granitic rocks themselves
(e. g. Hortekollen, Solbergfjeld, near Drammen, Norway,
Holmsboe and Rodtangen on the Drammenfjord, etc.). The
peculiarity of structure most convincing in its nature,
which must be considered virtually as proof of the eruptive
formation and magmatic solidification of pegmatite veins in
general, is the centric structure (spheroidal structure) first
described by L. v Buch, afterwards by G. Rose, and re-
the more massive granites recognized as eruptive. An unprejudiced observer
will not wish to make such a separation,” &c. J. H. L. Vogt ‘Kristiania Vid.

Selsk. Forhandl. 1881, No. 9. p. 28), describes, occurring at Skarningsfos, a gran-
ite pegmatite apophysis in gneiss, &c,, passing directly into the main granitite,

-

On the Formation of Peg matite. 65

cently by Klockmann, in the granitic pegmatite veins of
Kynast, of Schwarzbach, .etc., in Silesia (1. ¢. p. 399) ;
Klockmann himself, although otherwise agreeing with
Credner, has pointed out quite correctly that this structure
can hardly be brought into accord with Credner’s theory.
In this connection it also deserves mention that Mr. H.
Baickstrém and I have found perfectly pegmatitic large-
grained feldspar individuals forming the cores of spheres
occurring in centrically-formed massive granitite at Vasas-
taden near Stockholm. '

A further argument in favor of the magmatic solidifica-
tion of the pegmatite veins consists in the peculiarities of
structure which point towards a simultaneous crystalliza-
tion. First, the graphic structure which was more parti-
cularly referred to above, and which also occurs in a similar
way in massive eruptive rocks, must be mentioned. Further
also, must be considered the incomplete formation of the
pegmatite vein minerals which is generally evident when
these minerals have not crystallized out into drusy cavities
originally open (sometimes still so); this fact also was
more fully treated above. Such incomplete idiomorphically-
bounded crystals exhibit through their whole nature une-
quivocally, that they have crystallized out from a surround-
ing magma.

As a peculiar detail of structure, which is also satisfac-
torily explained only upon the assumption of magmatic
solidification, may be mentioned the very frequent occur-
rence of bent, broken, and in part re-cemented crystals;
examples have been described above in many places.

As special structural forms, may be mentioned the some-
times exceptionally distinct fluid structures (Fluidalstruc-
turen) of the nepheline syenite pegmatite veins on the Lan-
gesundfjord.

In assuming an eruptive origin for pegmatitic veins,
some have found great difficulty in the fact of the occasional

1See W.C. Brégger and H. Biickstrém: ‘Om forekomsten af ‘klotgranit’,

i Vasastaden, Stockholm.’’ Geol. Féren. Férhandl. 1887, 9, 331 and 382, also Fig.
6, p. 325.

66 Canadian Record of Science.

banded or zone-form arrangement of the vein material.
This however is never laminated, as in the case of mineral
veins deposited from genuine aqueous solution,’ but only
indistinctly zonal inasmuch as the outer zones pass con-
tinuously into the inner.* The zonal structure, when any
such is present, which however is generally not the case,
usually makes itself evident only in a finer-grained condition
of the vein boundaries, and sometimes (especially in the
case of granitic pegmatite veins) in a zone with graphic
structure next the fine-grained eugranitic marginal zone,
upon which there frequently follows (especially in acid
granitic pegmatite veins) in the middle of the vein a
tremendous size of grain, here often with special enrich-
ment in rarer minerals and (also particularly in acid veins)
not seldom with open or distinctly drusy cavities filled with
peculiar mineral deposits. age

Thus, this “zonal,” band-form, etc., structure, as it oc-
curs In genuine pegmatitic veins, may without any great
difficulty be accounted for through magmatic ecrystalliza-
tion.® finer grained structure along the sides of the veins
is in general characteristic of eruptive veins, the graphic
structure is explainable only through magmatic crystalliza-
tion, and the drusy structure of the middle of the vein,
which however is frequently wanting, ‘ may be explained
as quite in accordance with the formation of miarolytic
drusy cavities in normal grained eugranitic rocks. More-
over, it must again be remarked, that the minerals which
have crystallized out in the drusy cavities have in part fre-
quently had a different mode of formation to those of the

1 Compare also G. Vom Rath, Il. ¢. p. 649. ‘‘It reminds one of the almost sym-
metrical grouping of the minerals of certain ore veins. Nevertheless the two
phenomena are quite distinct.”’

2 I must distinctly remark, that I here leave out of the question a part of the
‘ sranitic” veins described by H. Credner in his treatise; in this treatise certain
mineral deposits belonging to ‘ regional metamorphism’ are evidently treated
from the same point of view as true pegmatitic vein formations. To enter here
more into detail would lead too far.

3 Compare also J. Lehmann, Granulitgebirge, &c., p. 46. ‘* A zonal structure
of our granitic veins has in it nothing exceptional and speaks neither for nor
against formation by injection.”

4 Tn the veins of the Annerid Peninsula this is very rare.

—

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 67

main vein mass; and further, in the case of the formation
of pegmatite veins, a8 compared with that of the corres-
ponding normal-grained massive rocks, peculiar conditions
of formation, the coédperation of particular ‘‘agents miné-
ralisateurs,” have in a high degree made themselves felt
along with direct separation through simple cooling of the
magmatic solution.

As far as the unusual coarse-grainedness which freq uent-
ly occurs in pegmatitic veins of the most various composi-
tions is concerned, this must in some may be connected
with what was recognized some time ago,! i.e. that the
pegmatitic veins generally (though not always) may be
looked upon as end products of the series of eruptions with
with which they are connected; both when they occur in
the main mass of the allied eruptive rock, and when they
occur in the neighborhood—and one of the two is always
the case—we may assume that the rock surrounding the
veinstone was first heated to a high temperature and that
therefore the cooling must have taken place unusually
slowly and uniformly; and upon this fact primarily the
largeness of the grains may be explained. ”

That this explanation of the coarse grain and of the im-
perfect zonal structure of many pegmatite veins is correct,
is rendered probable in the highest degree by the frequent
occurrence of pegmatitic structure in those portions of rock
bordering on the open drusy cavities of many massive
granites. I interpret these as analogous to the formation
of the pegmatitic veins themselves, in the following way :
First, on account of the contraction due to crystallization
of the rock already for the most part solidified, there were
formed crystal-free lumina; * the mixture of magma and

1See C. F. Naumann’s Lehrb. d. Geogn. 2, 230.

2 In the pegmatite veins at Kure, south of Moss, I have seen feldspar indi-
viduals measuring more than 10m. in length.

3 That these (‘‘ miarolitiseche Drusenriume’”’) are so plentiful in acidie rocks,
while they are almost always wanting in basic rocks, may perhaps be connected,
with the difference in specific gravity between the glass and the holocrystalline
aggregates of the respective rocks. In the case of acidic rocks this difference is
very great, in the case of basic rocks often very small; in the first case therefore
the contraction during the cooling of the magma would be greater, and in the
latter less. ‘

68 Canadian Record of Science.

crystals so formed, which must have constituted a some-
what solid rock, was however completely permeated by
the magma (which on account of the crystallization already
taken place would frequently have become somewhat more
acidic), and with this these crystal-free spaces would
naturally have been filled. By continued cooling this
magma, beginning at the walls, also crystallized out slowly
and uninterruptedly, often mixed with minerals which had
been formed by special “ agents minéralisateurs”; the con-
ditions df such crystallization proceeding from the walls of
the lumina inwards, must have been somewhat different from
those of the former crystallization which took place within
the mass of the whole solidifying rock-matter, where the
separate individuals must have crowded upon one another,
etc.; hence the ever increasing size of grain, the zonal
structure (conditioned by the crystallization from the walls
inward), ete. If the magmatic silicate solution were not
concentrated to such an extent that the lumina were com-
pletely filled by its crystallization, first, open drusy cavities
must have resulted, which finally through continued cir-
culation might be filled in with minerals deposited from
solutions at first still hot but later less and less hot (ce. f.
the description of the separate phases of vein formation of
the veins of the boundary zone on the Langesundfjord,
‘Die Mineralien der Syenitpegmatitginge.”) The filling
up of the drusy cavities corresponds according to this inter-
pretation pretty exactly to the complete vein formation
of the pegmatitic veins which occur outside the normal-
grained rock mass; the explanation throws light in both
cases upon the continuous transition from the rock formed
purely by magmatic solidification to the final minerals of
the druses deposited from solutions not exactly magmatic
(less concentrated)’

This successive filling up of the drusy cavities under
conditions of formation changing little by little, which in a

1 The difference between the explanation given above and that of Rosenbusch
and others is not so very great, and is, essentially, that I consider the principal

filling of the drusy cavities as also the pegmatitic veins to be magmatic, which it
will be diffreult to deny in face of the totality of the observations given above.

On the Formation of Peg-matite. 69

corresponding way must also be assumed in the case of the
formation of the minerals in the pegmatite veins them-
selves, is naturally also important for the correct under-
standing of many veins not truly pegmatitic, but clearly
very closely connected with these. Between crack-fillings,
principally magmatic, of a pegmatitic character, and those
corresponding only to the later stages of mineral deposit in
the pegmatitic druses and veins (e.g. in the class of acid
granitic pégmatite veins, as final member, the quartz veins, )
all possible gradations are known, as has been correctly
emphasized by earlier authors (particularly by Lehmann) ;
it must, however, always be borne in mind, that these
erack-fillings, although genetically in part related, are how-
ever in no sense pegmatitic veins. Pegmatites form only
one stage in the series of vein equivalents of a massive
plutonic rock; granitite, granophyre, aplite, pegmatite, are
different stages in the magmatic vein formations of the
plutonic rocks, the pegmatites as a rule still in the main
magmatically solidified veins, therefore formed under some-
what altered conditions, and even passing‘ into the crack-
fillings which succeed them in point of time and which are
not in the main, or are not at all, deposited from true mag-
matic solutions.’ Although in what has been said above,
the coarse-grained structure, as usual, has been very
strongly emphasized, it must be remembered that this
alone does not condition the pegmatitic nature of the veins,
nor is even necessarily present in order to justify the

1 That many large-grained veins of a pegmatitic structure have been formed
principally by pueumatolitic processes, and not mainly by magmatic solidifica-
tion, has already been stated above many times; such are the apatite bearing basic
veins, also many occurrences of cassiterite, of tourmaline and topas, &e. That
also the muscovite granite pegmatite veins, containing especially beryl, topas,
etc., and having as principal minerals microcline, oligoclase, albite, quartz, mus-
covite, are, in comparison with the ordinary granite pegmatite veins with which
they frequently occur and which among fine-grained veins correspond to the
genuine aplites rich in muscovite, perhaps of a somewhat later formation than
these which are of a slightly different magma and to a larger extent of pneuma-
tolitic formation, is for many reasons probable; this would also explain very well
why they occur along the eruptive boundary of genuine granitite or within the
granitite along with genuine granitite pegmatite veins, although massive rocks of
corresponding composition are generally wanting in the neighbourhood. ‘To enter
into details would lead too far.

70 Canadian Record of Science.

appellation ‘ pegmatitic.” In the boundary zone on
the Langesundfjord are many veins, truly pegmatitic,
which are less coarse-grained than the surrounding
laurvikite, e. g. the hiortdahlite-bearing vein of Lan-
godden, Ober-Aré. It is the habitus as a whole which
determines this: the relatively irregular nature of min-
eral composition and structure in the different parts of
the vein, the foreign appearance of the veinstone caused by
the wealth in accessory pneumatolitic minerals, the in-
timate intergrowth with the wall rock, etc. The very in-
definiteness of these limitations, which must always adhere
to the definition of the pegmatite idea, is itself character-
istic and gives a completely correct expression of the actual
condition of things, that altogether between pegmatitic and
not pegmatitic rock formation in nature often no sharp
line can be drawn and indeed is not present.

Structure is, as Lossen' has so aptly said “of the first
rank as an exponent of the geological relationships of
rocks ;” that the structural peculiarities of the pegmatite
veins are in the main such as we otherwise find in the case
of undoubtedly eruptive rocks only, is therefore one of the
strongest evidences of their eruptive origin as veins formed
principally through magmatic solidification.

4. In connection with the structural peculiarities, stand
the age relations of the individual vein minerals, which may
be comprehended under the common conception “ order of
crystallization” (Krystallisationsfolge).

One of the principal results of the study of eruptive
rocks in the light of the newer petrography is that, within
certain limits, a regularity in the order of crystallization of
the minerals of these rocks can be observed ; researches by
Rosenbusch, Michel-Lévy, Iddings and numerous other in-
vestigators have determined pretty certainly the leading
features of this regularity in the order of crystallization for
a large number of rock-types. The sequence is dependent

1K. A. Lossen : ‘‘ Uber die Anforderungen der Geologie an die petrographische
Systematik,’’ Jahrb. d. kgl. preuss. geol. Landesanstalt f. d. J. 1883, Berlin, 1884,
p. 512.

On the Formation of Pegmatite. 71

upon the composition, temperature and pressure prevailing
during the time of cooling of the magma, as well as upon
the alterations in these conditions,and finally upon the action
of special “agents minéralisateurs.” As the crystallization
intervals of the different minerals separating out from the
magma frequently overlap for considerable distances, the
order, as every mineralogist knows, is not an absolute one,
but only determined within certain limits; it is only right
to mention here also that the order of crystallization has
been determined mainly with regard to the principal min-
erals and in a less degree for a number of accessory minerals
produced by special processes, although for many of the
latter the period of formation is pretty sharply defined.

For the nephcline syenite pegmatite veins of the boundary
zone of the Langesundfjord it was evidenced above, that the
order of crystallization over large areas is, within certain
limits, a definite one, and the same as in the corresponding
boundary rock of the Laugenthal which is undoubtedly
eruptive. Similarly, for example, for the genuine granitite
pegmatite veins (with black biotite) the crystallization
order is in all probability a definite one and corresponds to
that of the massive granitite.

This circumstance is also one of the strongest arguments
for the eruptive genesis of the genuine pegmatitic veins ;
it can as little be accidental for the latter as for the rocks
which have certainly crystallized out from a magma, and
must in both cases be explained in similar ways.

72 Canadian Record of Science.

CHECK-LIST OF EUROPEAN AND NortH AMERICAN
MosskEs (Bryinez).
By N. Conr. Krnppera, Ph. D.

(Concluded.)

Series I. PLEUROCARPOUS.

Tribe 2. DIPLOLEPIDEOUS.

Endostome with longitudinal line.

51. Heterophyllum (Schimp.),
C. M.

nemorosum (Koch), Kindb. °

52. Calliergon (Sull.), Kindb.

cordifolium (H.)
*Richardsoni (Mitt.)
giganteum (Schimp.)
sarmentosum (Wahlenb.)
badium (C. J. Hartm.)
cuspidatum (L.)
scorpioides (L.)
trifarium (Web. et Mohr).
stramineum (Dicks.)
*nivale (Lorentz).— Europe.
dilatatum (Wils.)
circulifolium, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

turgescens (Th. Jensen).

alpestre (Swartz).

arcticum (Sommerf.)

Goulardi (Schimp.)

torrentis, C. M. et Kindb.—Am-
erica.

columbico-palustre, C. M. et
Kindb.—America.

53. Plagiotheciwm, Schimp.

undulatum (L,), Br. eur.
neckeroideum,Schimp.—Europe.
denticulatum (l.), Br. eur.
*subfalcatum, Aust.—America.
silvaticum (1.), Br. eur.
Boscii (Hampe), Schimp.
*aciculari-pungens, C. M. et
Kindb.— America.
letum (Berggr.), Schimp.
*attenuatirameum, WKindb. —
America.
brevipungens, Kindb.— America.
piliferum (Sw.), Br. eur.
latebricola (Wils.), Br. eur.
decursivifolium, Kindb.—Amer-
ica.

54. Tsopterygium, Mitt.

Ssilesiacum (Schiz.), Kindb.
turfaceum, Lindb.
*pseudo-silesiacum (Schimp.)—-

America.

elegans (Hook.), Lindb.

nitidulum (Wahlenb.), Lindb.

*Muelleri (Schimp.)

pulchellum (H.), Kinbd.

Bottinii, Breidl.—Europe.

pseudo-latebricola, Kindb.—Am-
erica.

subadnatum, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

passaicense (Austin.), Kindb.—
America.

albulm C. M.), Kindb.—Amer-
erica.

geminum (Mitt.), Kindb.—Amer-
ica.

fulvum (Hook. et Wils.), Kindb.
—America.

55. Ptychodium, Schimp.

plicatum (Schleich.), Schimp.—
Europe.
hyperboreum, C. M.—Europe.

56. Campylium (Sull.), Mitten.

stellatum (Schreb.), Kindb.
protensum (Brid.), Kindb.
polygamum (Br. eur.), Kindb.
striatellum (Brid.), Kindb.
Fitzgeraldi (Renauld), Kindb.—
America.
elodes (Spruce), Kindb.—Europe.
*densum (Milde).— Europe.
subsecundum, Kindb.—Ameriea.
chrysophyllum (Brid.)—Kindb.
unicostatum, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.
decursivulum, C. M. et Kindb.—
America,

Check-list of European and N. A: Mosses.

hygrophilum (Jar.), Kindb.—
Kurope.

bergenense (Aust.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

Duriewi (Mont.), Kindb. — Bu-
rope.

57. Myuriwm, Schimp.
/

Boscii (Schwagr.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

Hebridarum, Schimp.—Europe.

53. Campothecium, Schimp.

nitens (Schreb.), Schimp.
sericeum (L.), Kindb.
Geheebii (Schimp.), Kindb.—Eu-

rope.

sericeoides, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

Philippeanum (Spruce), Kindb.
—Europe.

nevadense (Lesq.), Kindb.—Am-
A mesic, Ren. et Card.—America.
alsioides, Kindb.— America.
lutescens (Huds.), Schimp.
*ceeneum (Mitt.)—America.
aureum (Lagasca), Br. eur.
pinnatifidum (Sull. et Lesq.)—
Kindb.—America.
arenarium, Lesq.—America.
Nuttallit (Wils.), Sechimp.—Am-
erica.
hamatidens, Kindb.—America.
leucodontoides, Kindb.—Amer-
ica.
aureolum, Kindb.

59° Brachythecium, Schimp.
a. Eurhynchiopsis.

piliferum (Schreb.), Kindb.

Ryani, Kaur.—Europe.
Vaucheri (Schimp.), Kindb.
*fagineum (H. Muell.)—Kurope.

cirrhosum (Schw.), Schimp.

crassinervium (Tayl. ), Kindb.—
Europe.

colyr ophyllum (Sull.), Kindb.—

America,

b. Rutabularia.

rivulare, Bruch.
*flavescens (Brid.), Kindb.—Eu-
rope.
*latifolium, Lindb.
Rutabulum ea, Br. eur.
rutabuliforme, Kindb.-—Amer-
1Ca

73

spurto-rutabulum, CC. M. et
Kindb.— America,
*columbico-rutabulum, WKindb.

—America.

platycladum, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

cavernosum, Kindb.— America.

asperrimum, Mitt.—America.

vallium (Sul. et Lesq.), Kindb.
—America.

lamprochryseum, C. M. et Kindb.
—America.

c. Plumosaria.

plumosum (Sw.), Br. eur.

gemmascens, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

campestre, Bruch.

leucoglaucum, C. M. et Kindb.—-
America.

mirabundum, C. M. et Kindb.—
Ameriea.

d. Salebrosaria.

Mildei (Schimp.), Kindb.

acuminatum (H.), Kindb.—Am-
erica.

spurio-acuminatum, C. M.
Kindb.—America.

pseudo-albicans, Kindb.—Amer-
ica.

biventrosum, C. M.—America.

Pitzgeraldi, C. M.—America.

mammilligerum, Kindb.—Am-
erica.

albicans (Neck.), Br. eur.

glareosum, Bruch.

turgidum, C. Harton.

digastrum, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.

salebrosum (Hoffm.), Br. eur.

letum (Brid.), Kindb.--America.

levisetum, Kindb.—America.

luteolum, Kindb.—Europe.

et

e. Velutinaria.

velutinum (L.), Br. eur.
intricatum (H.), Kindb.
*salicinum, Br. eur.—Europe.
subintricatum, Kindb.—Amer-
ica.
trachypodium (Brid.), Br. eur.
curvisetum (Brid.), Kindb.
Teesdalei (Sm.), Kindb.—Europe.
venustum, De Not.—Europe.

californicum (Lesq.), Kindb.—
America.
tenéllum (Dicks.), Kindb.—Eu-

rope.

14 /

Donnellit (Aust.) Kindb.—Am-
erica.
Fendleri (Sull. et Lesq. ), Kindb.

—America.
Hillebrandi (Lesq.), Sull.—Am-

erica.
Jf. Camptotheciopsis.

oxycladon (Brid.), Kindb.—Am-

erica.
60. Raphidostegium.
Lorentzit (Mol.), Kindb. — Eu-
rope.
Roellii, Ren. et Card.—-America.
recurvens (Mich.), Sauerb. et

Jag.—America.
laxepatulum (Jarn.), Kindb.—

America.

cylindricarpum, C. M.—Amer-
ica.

expallens, C. M. et Kindb.—Am-
erica.

demissum (Wils.), De Not.

Kegelianumn, C. M.

microcarpum (Brid.), Sb. et Jeg.
—America.

*admixtum (Sulliv.)—-America.
subdemissum, Kindb.—America.
carolinianum, C. M.—America,
Welwitschii (Schimp.), Kindb.—

Europe.
marylandicum, C. M.

61. Limnobium, Schimp.

ochraceum (Turn. et Wils.), Br.
eur.

eugyrium, Schimp.

polare (Lindb.), Kindb.

palustre (L.), Schimp.

pseudo-arcticum, Kindb.--Amer-
ica.

viridulym (Harton), Kindb.

montanum, (Wils.), Kindb.

pseudo- montanum, Kindb.—
America.

micans (Wils.), Kindb.

submolle, Kindb.—Europe.

62. Hypnum (Dillen.), L.
Alaria.

commutatum, Hedw.
*sulcatum, Schimp.—Europe.
faleatum, Brid.
*irrigatum, Zetteryt.—Europe.
decipiens (De Not.), Kindb.

Cunadian Record of Science.

b. Cratoneuron.

filicinum, Ty,

“curvicaule, Jur.—Europe.
*Vallis Clause, Brid.—Europe.
*fallax, Brid.

uviatile, Swartz. :
‘irriguum, Hook. et Wilf.

c. Harpidium.

revolvens, Swartz. ,
*Cossoni, Schimp.
*“vernicosum, Lindb.
*rigidwm, Kindb. —Europe.
Bambergeri, Schimp.
lycopodioides, Schweegr.
aduncum (.), Hedw.
Wilsoni, Schimp.
riparium, lL.
*capillifolium, Warnst.
*Kochit, Br. eur.
vacillans (Sulliv.), Lesq. et Jam.
fluitans, L.
exannulatum, Br. eur.
*pseudo-stramineum, C. M.
Kneiffi, Schimp.
*Sendtneri, Schimp.
conflatum, C. M. et Kindb.—
America.
hamifolium, Schimp.
uncinatum, Hedw.
* Moseri, Kindb.

Europe.

d. Rhytidium.
rugosum, Ehrh.

e. Drepanium.

curvifolium, Hedw.—America.
*Renauldi, Kindb.
*Lindbergti, Mitt.
*nseudo-drepanium,
Kindb.—America.

arcuatiforme, Kindb.—America.

7 Pulvam.

©. MM. et

crista-castrensis, L.
subimponens, Lesa.

America.
g. Hylocomium.
squarrosum, L.
loreum, L.
robustum, Hook.—America.
h. Cupressina.
Haldanianum, Grev.

flaccum, C. M. et Kindb.—Am-
erica.

’

;

Check-list of European and N. A. Mosses. 15

Jamesti (Sull.), Lesq. et J.—
America.

pseudo-recurvans, Kindb.—Am-
erica.

pseudo-complecum, Kind b.—
America.

circinnale, Hook.

Sequoieti, C. M.—America.
callichroum, Brid.

Alaska, Kindb.—America.
Dieckii, Ren. et Card.—Amer-

ica.
fertile, Sendtner.
imponens, Hedwig.
canadense, Kindb.—A merica.
plicatile (Mitt. ), Lesq. et Jam.
reptile, Michaux.
micro-reptile. Kindb.
pseudo-fastigiatum,

Kindb.
perichetiale, Br. eur.
reptiliforme, Kindb.—America.
molluscum, Hedw.
molluscoides, Kindb.—America.
procerrimum, Mol.—Enrope.
hamulosum, Br. eur.
fastigiatum, Brid.

*dolomiticum, Milde.—Europe.

*“Sauteri, Br. eur.—EKurope.
filiforme, Kindb.—America.
dovrense, Kindb.—Europe.
Hatlleri, L. fil.
cupressiforme, L.

* WVaghornei, Kindb.—America.
resupinatam, Wils.—Europe.
Vaucheri, Lesq.
complexum (Mitt.), Lesq. et J.—

America.
subcomplexcum, Kindb.—Amer-
ica.
depressulum, C. M.— America.
incurvatum, Schrad.

Ce NE: “et

Fam. J1. FoNTINALACE.

63. Fontinalis, L.

disticha, Hook. a Wils.—Amer-
ica.
jiliformis, Sull. et Lesq.--Amer-
ica.
Sullivantii, Lindb.— America.
Lescurti, Sull.— America.
squamosa, L.—Europe.
dalecarlica, Bruch et Sch.
dichelymoides, Lindb.
seriata, Lindb.— -Europe.
maritima, C. M.—America.
Nove- Anglic, Sull.—A merica.
hypnoides, C. J. Harton.
antipyr etica, L.
“or acilis, Lindb.—Eur ope.
“califor nica, Sull.—America.
*Duriewi, Schimp.
*Kindbergii, Ren. et Card.
“gigantea, Sull. —America.
Heldreichii, C. M.—Europe.
gothica, Card.et Arnell, ee he ope.
mollis, C. M. —Ameriea.
biformis, Sull.—America.
neomexicana, Sull. et Lesq.—
America.

64. Dichelyma, Myrin.

Salcatum (H.), Myr.

pallescens, Br. eur. —America.

uncinatum, Mitt.—America.

cylindricarpum, Aust.—Amer-
ica.

capillaceum (Dicks.), Br. et Sch.

65. Brachelyma, Schimp.

subulatum (P. B.), Schimp.—

America.

INDEX OF THE GENERA.

SE haa hl ga AER BS ie ai No. 16
Amsplystecnini 5... ..:~-. 0. 48
Emo om 20. 2.4.5... 0...

PRIUELEP IOI f). eu. eos. - 5
rete nel Wt. Stee 8 oe en se a 65
Brachytheeiumyr 2.2: ....... 59
Salhicostella... 382 5..5 253... 24
Ue fer as 52
Camptothecium.......... .. 58
Re rPEEPVY UIT. die ys =), patere «0s 56
Cnet POGGR:. 2)! oi. be, s,s. 8
CROLULG Cle ge ar aaa if

CL es ie ieee ee 4 |

Daltonia: i 2o ee eee No. 23
Diehely ned... x; Jck,0s cee ee 64
Batodon tay. 46 eee 41
Burhyrchiuen. «us ooee s: 49
Babronia\..2.)004. Sees see 1
Foutmelis. 2.0.4 Sites 63
Aa hPodent, 465 e eee ae 9
Hedwitian. 2.004. Eee s S 1
Heterocladiim ...2.2 25. -7?.: 31
Heterophyliam.\ tee. dl
HoOMmalin=. 2. occa 36
HOpR eras 3) Uae ee 21

76 Canadian Record of Science.

Hy pnella,; > arias heme Mo. 'S4 |; Mapilaria.:; soe loa Bo No. 25
Pepnum. / Paha es ee ie 62: Plagiotheciam ts... v4nataees 53
Play gyri <scoars 28ilen eee 43
Isoptervgi cat Seb yLOMNe oF ae SLR heater 47
tery ou As. w/a. cee hie : kg ] .
Esothecihtintes: Host ee 18 | Pleuroziopsis .............. 15
Pleurozim.”)- <...0 5. 14
Tee 3 ‘Porotrichiwie: i)6 athe Ae tee 1l
BUT + + >= Sir Sh babies Ae hme aaa : Pseeudoleskesin.J)5.. kus 33
Leptodon Pe ets geet ea a Pierobry wm. 1045. gene 20
Pee Wes ee Saar gia eae Ee a Pterozonium in sige Soak 19
ee ee: aT EN Ni Seer ae Dani eee “y | eterygophyllum ... 35/44 22
I na ha: Serra Tr Geen Mate 6] | Pterygynandrum ........... 29
AED OSE Soni an ae ete aa 7 Pimobed (umn a nt hee sae 55
IP VIAISIS..« 6c saa kt ee ee 43
Mia GOUMUIEIEG bec ten cara Votes Peet Bo | “Pry aistella.,...att. withers 44
INDE CEGE DTU! <0 8 ow cote oe ae 26 ;
REINA OL eet ss ee eaters 4) | Raphidostecium, .; 2.¢650 ax 60
Wyre lia Weds. tee cose ee 28 | Rhynchostegium ........... 50
My air: 20 or. sce on ee 57
Lam enelign:, « <0.4 5. eee 12
Necker. a0 ve oe are oo f “Eh siiniiey «Gale Apa ae ee 13
N@ekerepsiss..:. oo tedgak wv ocak fit A Salt bron ct eae 27
Thieves 32
Grthovhecigm . >. 70 Coe Sys <4 ws uo! Eripterocladiam,...-s40sao8 45

CONTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN BOTANY.
By Jas. M. Macoun.

It.

THALICTRUM FENDLERI, Engelim.

Kicking Horse Lake, Rocky Mts. 1890. (Jas. M. Macoun.)
Only Canadian station.

THALICTRUM OCCIDENTALE, Gray.

The western limit of this species is placed by Prof.
Macoun (Cat. Can. Plants p. 479) in the Selkirk Mts., B.C.
Recent collections and a re-examination of our specimens
have greatly extended its range.’ Mountains near K ootanie
Lake, B.C.; Sproat, B.C.; Mountains near Griffin Lake,
B.C.; Nanaimo, Vancouver Island. (/ohn Macoun.) Moun-
tains near Spence’s Bridge, B.C. (Jas. JZ, Macoun.) Dean
or Salmon River, B.C. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.)

THALICTRUM POLYGAMUM, Muhl.
T. Cornutt, Linn.

1 The Geographical limits given in these papers refer to Canada only.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. ti

This species is confined to Hastern Canada and does not
extend across the continent as stated in Macoun’s Cat. Can.
Plants, p. 15. Our most western specimens are from Flat
Rock Portage, Lake Nipigon, Ont.

THALICTRUM PURPURASCENS, Linn.

Long Lake, Assiniboia; Warm Springs, Kootanie Lake,
B.C. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Ontario.
References under var. ceriferum, Macoun’s Cat. Can. Plants,
p. 479 go here. j

THALICTRUM VENULOSUM, release.

Additional stations for this rare species are Manitoba
House, Lake Manitoba; Kicking Horse Lake, Rocky Mts.
(John Macoun).

THALICTRUM DIOICUM X PURPURASCENS.

Specimens from Eel River, Restigouche, N.B., (2. Chal-
mers.) with leaves glandular and fruit intermediate have
been referred here by Dr. Trelease.

Note—All the specimens of Thalictrum referred to above
have been examined by Dr. Wm. Trelease and our deter-
minations confirmed or corrected by him.

ANEMONE DELTOIDEA, Dougl.

Specimens collected in the Coast Range by Dr. G. M.
Dawson, were referred here by Prof. Macoun, (Cat. Can.
Plants p. 13.) <A recent examination of these specimens
shews them to be A. Pichardsoni. A. deltoidea has not been >
found in Canada. |

ANEMONE HEPATICA, L.

A few leaves collected by Dr. Robt. Bell on the Upper
Savage Islands, Hudson Straits, (Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
p. 478), prove to be the root-leaves of Saxifraga cernua and
not A. Hepatica.

ANEMONE LYALLII, Britton, Annals of N. Y. Academy of

Sciences, Vol. VI. p. 227.
6

78 Canadian Record of Science.

A, nemorosa, Linn., var. (?), Macoun, Cat. Uan, Plants,
Vol. I, p. 478. :

A. Oregana, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. II, p. 295.

Slender, erect, nearly glabrous throughout, 10-40 em.
high, from a short horizontal root-stock. Radical leaves
not seen: leaves of the involucre on very slender petioles
1.5-3 cm. long., 3-divided, the divisions sessile, ovate, or the
terminal ones sometimes nearly orbicular, dentate-crenate,
or sometimes incised, acute, or obtuse, very thin, more or
less ciliate along the margins; flowers solitary white, about
1 em. broad, its peduncle slightly exceeding the petiols of
the involucral leaves, sepals about 5, oval-oblong, obtuse;
young achenia quite densely strigose-pubescent.

Dean or Salmon River, B.C., (Dawson). Near Victoria,
V.L., (Fletcher), Goldstream, V.I., and Burnside Road near
Victoria. V.I., (Macoun. ‘Herb. Nos. 912, 913).!

ANEMONE QUINQUEFOLIA, L.

A. nemorosa, Amer. Authors.

‘“ Readily distinguishable from the European A. nemorosa
by its slender habit, slender petioles, less lobed divisions of
the involucral leaves, paler green of the foliage and smaller
flowers.” (Dr. N. L. Britton.)

The western limit of this species as shown by our herbar-
ium specimens is Wingham, Ont.

Note. See Revision of the genus Anemone by Dr. N. L.
Britton in Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences,
Vol. VI. pp. 215-238.

AQUILEGIA CHRYSANTHA, Gray.

On the portage between Hope and the head of the Simil-
kemeen River, B.C., (A. J. Hill.), New to Canada.

Arasis Macountt, Watson, Proc, Am, Acad. of Arts and
Sciences, p. 124.
Biennial, branched from the base, slender, pubescent

1 Whenever herbarium numbers are given, they are the numbers under which
specimens have been distributed from the herbarium of the Geological Survey of
Canada,

Contributions to Canadian Botany. ey

below with mostly stellate spreading hairs, glabrous above
or but sparingly puberulent, a foot high; leaves small and
narrow, 4+ inch long or less, the lower very rarely few-
toothed, the cauline sagittate at base; flowers very small,
pale rose-colour, 2 lines long; pods very narrow, 1 to 14
inches long and about 4} line broad, glabrous, slightly
curved, mostly divaricate on very slender pedicels 2 to 4
lines long, acute, the stigma nearly sessile; seeds (imma-
ture) approximately 1 rowed, apparently wingless ; near
A. hirsuta.

Gravelly banks, Revelstoke, B.C., May 13th, 1890. (John
Macoun.)

TRIFOLIUM PROCUMBENS, Linn.

An erect form of this plant was found by Prof. Macoun
in 1893, growing in fields at Comox, Vancouver Island. Not
recorded before from western Canada, though the var. minus
is common on Vancouver Island.

TRIFOLIUM INVOLUCRATUM, Willd.

Collected at Revelstoke, B.C. in 1890 by Prof. Macoun.
Abundant on Vancouver Island, but not before collected in
the interior of British Columbia,

TRIFOLIUM MICROCEPHALUM, Pursh.

Collected at Revelstoke and Sproat on the Columbia
River, B.C. in 1890 by Prof. Macoun. Common on Van-
couver Island, but not before recorded from interior of Brit-
ish Columbia.

Lotus cornicutatus, Linn.

Recorded from New Brunswick. Collected in 1890 at
Victoria, Vancouver Island, by Rev. Edw. L. Greene.

AsTRALAGUS RoBBINSII, Gr. var. OCCIDENTALIS, Wat.

Not before separated in Canada from A.alpinus, the western
form of which it somewhat resembles. Bow River at Mor-
ley, Alberta; near the Glacier at. Lake Louise, Rocky Mts. ;
Deer Park, Columbia River, B.C. (John Macoun.) Gui-

80 Canadian .Record of Science.

\

chon Creek, B.C. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) All the above
specimens were found growing on gravelly shores or banks.

FRAGARIA CANADENSIS, Michx.

This plant has been separated from F. Virginiana by Dr.
N. L. Britton. (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, Vol. XIX., p. 222.)
At the time Dr. Britton’s note was written our herbarium
contained no specimens of this species. In 1892, however,
it was collected by Miss EK. Taylor at Fort Smith, on the
Great Slave River, and in 1893 by Mr. Jas. W. Tyrrell on
the banks of the Black River, east of Lake Athabasca.
“The leaflets are much narrower, oblong or the middle one
obovate and cuneate at the base, all obtuse rather sparingly
and not deeply toothed.” In Miss Taylor’s specimens the
largest leaflet is 20 lines long and but 7 lines broad at its
widest part. The plants here referred to are very much
slenderer than any of our specimens of /’. Virginiana. The
stations given for this species by Dr. Britton are Lake
Mistassini, (Michaux.) Arctic America, (Dr. Richardson.)
Elk River [Athabasca River] (Kennicott.)

EPILOBIUM, Linn.

In the last addendum to his catalogue of Canadian Plants
(Vol. IL., p. 323), Prof. Macoun wrote: ‘“ Many additional
species and varieties of Hpilobium have been added to our
flora since the publication of Part III, but our whole series
of this genus is now being examined by Prof. Trelease who
is unable to report upon them in time to include them in
this part.” Since the above was written botanical explora-
tions in the Rocky Mountains, British Columbia, and else-
where have added greatly to our knowledge of this genus,
and the revision here given covers all the specimens in our
herbarium and gives the distribution of each species as we
now understand it. All our specimens have been examined
by Dr. Wm. Trelease, and references to many of them have
been included in his revision of this genus. (See Second
Annual Report, Missouri Botanic Gardens, pp. 69-116.)

Contributions to Canadian Botany. — 81

(1.) E. sprcatum, Lam.

Common from the Atlantic to the Pacific and north to the
Arctic Circle. The most northern specimens in our herbar-
ium are from the mouth of the Mackenzie River (Miss EL.
Taylor.) and from Lat. 60° 20, Long. 104° 30. (Jas. W.
Tyrrell.) |

Var. CANESCENS, Wood.

“An albino variety with more than usually canescent
pods.” Marmora Village, Hastings- Co. and Owen Sound,
Ont. (John Macoun.) Lake of the Woods, Ont. (Burgess ;
Dawson.) Norway House, Lake Winnipeg. (Otto Klotz.)

(2.) EK. pAtiFouioum, L.

Newfoundland, Labrador and the Gaspé Peninsula; Bow
River, Rocky Mts., to the Pacific Coast and throughout
Canada north of Lat. 53°. Most of the northern specimens
in our herbarium are the broad-petaled variety grandiflorum,
Britton. Specimens collected by Mr. Jas. W. Tyrrell in
Lat. 64° Long. 101° were just coming into flower Aug. 25th,
1893. Albinos with very large cream-coloured flowers
have been collected on both sides of Hudson Bay by Mr.
Jas. M. Macoun.

(3.) HE. nrrsurum, L.

Naturalized at Niagara Falls, Ont. (#. Cameron.) Intro-
duced in garden seed.

(4.) E. puteum, Pursh.

Abundant by rivulets and on damp grassy slopes in the
Selkirk Mts., B.C., between Beaver Creek and the Glacier
House, but not known to occur elsewhere in Canada. The
petals are bright yellow a little lighter than those of
(Hnothera biennis.

(5.) EK. pantcuLatum, Nutt.

Abundant at Colpoy’s Bay, Georgian Bay, Lake Huron.
(John Macoun.), but not found in any other part of Eastern
Canada. Rare in the prairie region, but common in British
Columbia and on Vancouver Island.

82 Canadian Record of Science.

(6.) EK. minutum, Lindl. | /

From several localities in British Columbia and common
on Vancouver Island. The form named adscendens by
Suksdorf, was collected on Mt. Benson, Van. Island, by
Prof. Macoun in 1893. |

Var. Fouiosum, ‘Torr. & Gray.

Sproat, Columbia River, B.C., (John Macoun) and Yale
Mt., B.C., (Fletcher.) Common on Vancouver Island.

(7.) E. strtctum, Muhl.

E. molle, Torr. of Macoun Cat. of Canadian Plants p. 171
in part and p. 530.

Specimens in our herbarium are from Kast Pt., P.E.I.,
and Belleville, Ont. (John Macoun); Cartwright, Ont.
(W. Scott.)

(8.) HE. pingARE, Muhl.

Common from Prince Edward Island west to Beaver
Creek, Selkirk Mts., B.C.

(9.) H. pALUSTRE, L.

Common from the Atlantic to the iRpelcy Mts. No speci-
mens in our herbarium from British Columbia, but found
north of that province by Dr. G. M. Dawson on the Lewis
River in Lat. 62°.

(10.) E. paLUSTRE X LINEARE. (LY. pseudolineare, Hausskn.)

Spevimens collected by Prof. Macoun at Ellis Bay, An-
ticosti, have been referred here by Dr. Trelease.

(11.) EK. pAvurRiocum, Fisch.

“ Habit of #. palustre; stems terete or with occasional
low decurrent lines; seeds fusiform, prominently beaked.”

A span or two high mostly simple, the very slender stem
sparingly incurved-pubescent, otherwise glabrous; roots
densely fascicled; leaves Jess than 15 mm. long, somewhat
crowded at base, alternate and remote above, linear or
oblong, obtuse, remotely denticulate, sessile 1-nerved ;
flowers pale not very numerous, nodding; capsules erect

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 83

40 mm., or long slender peduncles; seeds, -4 & 1:5 mm.;
coma white.

In bogs, Beaver Creek, Selkirk Mts., B.C., Aug. 14th,
1885. (John Macoun.) In one of these specimens “ the
beak of the seed is very narrow and 3 mm. long.”

(12.) E. Franciscanum, Barbey.

Of many of our specimens examined by Dr. Trelease, but
one collected at Qualicum, Vancouver Island, has been de-
finitely referred to this species. Of other specimens ex-
amined by him he says: ‘‘ Specimens collected on Vancou-
ver Island and in British Columbia are doubtfully referred
here, though they may belong to adenocaulon. ‘Lhe smaller,
more Closely crisp-hairy form approaches the next species.
[H. Watsoni.| A curious simple plant with large glossy
thin leaves, scarcely to be referred elsewhere occurs from
Queen Charlotte Islands, B.C. (Dawson, July 10th, 1878.)”

Specimens collected by Prof. Macoun on Vancouver Is-
land in 1893 are placed here, though “too near FH. adeno-
caulon var. occidentale.” The specimens now referred to this
species were formerly included under £, coloratum.

(13.) E. covoratum, Muhl.

Represented in our herbarium by but one specimen from
Casselman, Ont. All the eastern specimens placed under
Fi. coloratum, and most of the western placed under #. color-
atum and EH. tetragonuim in Prof. Macoun’s Catalogue of
Canadian Plants, (pp. 169-170) have been referred to Z.
adenocaulon by Dr. Trelease. |

Specimens from Salt Lake, Anticosti; Little Flat, Rock
Portage, Nipigon River, Ont., and Little Slave Lake,
N.W.T., are probably coloratum x adenocaulon.

(14.) HE, ADENOcAULON, Hausskn.

Common from the Atlantic to British Columbia. Dr.
Trelease considers that a very small crisp-pubescent form
(14 to 3 inches in height), collected by Prof. Macoun at
Brackley Pt., P.H.I., may be LE. ciliatum, Raf.

84 Canadian Record of Science.

Var. OCCIDENTALE, T'release.

Lake Okanagan and Burrard Inlet, B.C., and common on
Vancouver Island. ‘Sometimes comes too near #. Fran-
ciscanum, but differs in its usually smaller flowers less
corymbosely clustered and more acute at base, and in its .
shorter glandular pubescence.”

(15.) E. aLANDuLosum, Lehm.

In damp places at an altitude of 5,000 feet at Warm
Springs, Kootanie Lake, B.C. (John Macoun.)

(16.) HE. Brevisryium, Barbey. —
Specimens from mountains south of Tulameen River

B.C. (Dawson), have been doubtfully referred here by Dr.
T'release.

(17.) EK. Hatieanum, Hausskn.

Collected by Prof. Macoun in 1887 on Cedar Hill, Van-
couver Island, and in 1893 at Hsquimault, V. I.

(18.) EK. Drummonnn, Hausskn.

Young specimens from Stewart’s Lake, B.C., (Macoun)
with leaves in whorls of 3, have been doubtfully referred
here'by Dr. 'Trelease.

(19.) E. teprocarrum, Hausskn.

A span or less high, glabrous except for some incurved
pubescence on the stem ; leaves less than 20 mm. long,
broadly lanceolate, sparingly low-toothed, tapering from
near the middle to the obtuse or subacute apex and winged
petiole ; flowers abundant for the size of the plant; calyx-
tube narrow; petals about 3 mm. long, rosy; capsules 20
mm., on very slender peduncles of nearly equal length ;
seeds nearly ellipsoidal, shortly hyaline beaked, :25 « ‘75
mm.; coma at length cinnamon-colored.

Var. Macountt, Trelease.

Less branched, crisp-pubescent in lines, the same pubes-
cence more or less abundant also on the flowers and cap-
sules; leaves more ovate; seeds 1 mm. long; coma paler.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 85

New variety first collected in 1878 near Lake Athabasca
by Prof. Macoun, for whom it is named, and again by him
at the head of Lake Louise, Rocky Mts., in 1891.

(20.) EK. HornemMannt, Reichenb.
Nearly all the references under 2. origanifolium, Lam.,

Macoun’s Catalogue of Canadian Plants, p. 169, belong here.
In one or other of its forms from Labrador to Vancouver
Island.

(21.) H. auprnum, L.

From Kicking Horse Lake to Vancouver Island. Gener-
ally found with the preceding species which it greatly
resembles. £. Hornemanni is ‘somewhat crisp-hairy in the
inflorescence and along the decurrent lines or slightly glan-
dular at top, otherwise glabrate” ; in #. alpinum the inflor-
escence and decurrent lines are more nearly glabrous. In
the former species the seeds are “rather abruptly short-
appendaged, from nearly smooth to very rough ;” in the
latter they are “smooth gradually alternated at apex with
very evident beak.”

(22.) KE. OREGONENSE, Hausskn.

Borders of rivulets, Swamp River, B.C. (Macoun.) Only
Canadian station.

(23.) E. ANAGALLIDIFOLIUM, Lam.

Specimens in our herbarium are from Cape Chudleigh,
Hudson Strait. (Dr. Bell.) Rocky Mts. (Drummond.) Kick-
ing Horse Lake, Rocky Mts., and Mt. Benson, Vancouver
Island. (Macoun.) :

(24.) E. chavatum, Trelease.

A span high, mostly densely caspitose, the’slender stems
ascending, glabrate to sparingly glandular’ throughout ;
leaves 15 to 20 mm. long, divergent, broadly ovate, very
obtuse, subentire to remotely serrulate, mostly rounded to
evident petioles, firm, drying brownish; flowers rather few,
suberect, petals rose-colored, about 5 mm. long; capsules 25
mm., subclavate arcuately divergent, the lowest often not

86 Canadian Record of Science.

a

reaching the apex of the stem, their slender peduncles
equalling the subtending leaves; seeds fusiform, tapering
into a pale beak, nearly smooth to coarsely papillate, -4 to
‘6 X 15 to 2 mm.; coma barely dingy.

First collected in Canada by Jas. M. Macoun in 1890, at
an altitude of 7,500 feet on mountains near Kicking Horse
Lake, Rocky Mts. In 1891 by Prof. Macoun on several
mountains near Banff and Lake Louise, Rocky Mts.

AnaeLicA Lyauui, Wat.

Specimens collected by Dr. Geo. M. Dawson on the sum-
mit of the South Kootanie Pass in 1891, were doubtfully
referred here by Prof. Macoun (Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. [., p.
535.) These specimens have sinee been examined by
Coulter and Rose, who confirm his determination. This
species has since been found at Sproat, Columbia River,
B.C., 1890, (John Macoun) and at Chaperon Lake, B.C.,
(Jas. McEvoy.) |

KcuIuM VULGARE, Linn.

Though well naturalized and spreading in Canada, east of
the great Lakes, of very local occurrence in the west. Our
western specimens are from Wabigon Tank, on the C. P.
Railway, east of Lake of the Woods, (Wm. McInnes) and
Cariboo, B.C. (John Macoun. )

MentHA CANADENSIS, L.

Colquitz River, near Victoria, V.I., and Sooke, V. L.,
1893. (John Macoun, Herb. Nos. 1054, 1055.) Not before
recorded from Vancouver Island.

MenTHA CANADENSIS, L. var. GLABRATA, Benth.

Fort Simpson, Mackenzie River. (Miss EH. Taylor.)
Sproat, B.C.; Kamloops, B.C.; Sproat Lake, Vancouver
Island. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Rocky
Mountains.

Nepeta Cartaria, L.

Beacon Hill, near Victoria, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macoun, Herb. No. 977.) Not before recorded west
of Ontario.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 87

Sracuys cILIATA, Dougl. var. pUBENS, Gray.

New Westminster, B.C., 1892. (Law.) Fishery Bay,
Nasse River, B.C. (Jas. McHvoy, Herb. No. 1096.) Our
only other specimen is from Queen Charlotte Islands. |

MenTHA viripis, L..

Growing in the streets of Victoria, Vancouver Island,
1893. Naturalized. (John Macoun, Herb. No. 1052.)

ASARUM CAUDATUM, Lindl.

Common at Revelstoke, B.C. (John Macoun.) THastern
limit in Canada.

Eprpactis HELLEBORINE, Crantz.

First found in Canada in 1890 at Lambton Mills, Humber
River, Ont., by W. & O. White, and more recently (1892)
on Mount Royal, Montreal, Que., by N. D. Keith.

The only stations given for this species in the last edition
of Gray’s Manual are Syracuse and buffalo, N.Y.

EPIPACTIS GIGANTEA, Dougl.

Collected by Dr. G. M. Dawson in 1877-at Osoyoos Lake,
B.C., but not again until 1890, when it was found by Prof.
Macoun at Lower Arrow Lake, Columbia River,.and Hot
Springs, Kootanie Lake, B.C.

Auuium Nervi, Watson.

Found growing on gravelly banks at Botanie near
Spence’s Bridge, B.C., by Jas. McEvoy. Found on Vancou-
ver Island, but not before on the mainland.

Juncus GERARDI, Lois.

This rush, though common on the Atlantic Coast, had
not been found on the Pacific Coast until it was discovered
in 1887 by Prof Macoun near Victoria, Vancouver Island.
It was again collected by him at Nanaimo, V. I. in 1893.
As in the east it was found growing in salt marshes and is
without doubt indigenous.

88 Canadian Record of Science.

"a

PoOTAMOGETON NATANS, Linn.

Enderby, B.C., and Shuswap Lake, B.C. (Jas. M. Mac-
oun.) Griffin Lake, B.C., and Revelstoke, B.C. (John
-Macoun.) Not before recorded from British Columbia.

POTAMOGETON PAUCIFLORUS, Pursh.

Revelstoke, B.C., 1890. (John Macoun.) Not before re-
corded from British Columbia.

BotTRYCHIUM LANCEOLATUM, Angst.

Near Niagara Falls, Ont. (2. Cameron.) Not before found
in Ontario.

PRELIMINARY Note On THE LIMESTONES OF THE
LAURENTIAN SYSTEM.

By Exrric Drew INGALL.
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, OTTAWA.

In view of the attention which is now being directed to
the above mentioned subject, in connection with the work
of the Geological-Survey of Canada in the Laurentian area
lying north of Ottawa, it is deemed a fitting time to record
the observations and conclusions of the writer on the ques-
tion above denoted.

These observations were made whilst studying the mode
of occurrence of the phosphate deposits of the county of
Ottawa, Province of (Quebec in the years 1888, 1889 and
1890, and have not before been presented to the public
owing to the pressure of other duties in connection with
the supervision of the division of Mineral Statistics and
Mines of the Geological Survey. A fuller and more com-
plete statement of results must even yet await the evidence
to be adduced from a microscopical study of the very com-
plete series of rock specimens collected.

At the commencement of the investigation with a view
to prevent any prejudice in observation special care was
taken to avoid any preconceived theoretical bias and the

Preliminary Note. 89

views arrived at are simply the result of an extended and
detailed study of the phenomena observable in the field.
Apart frora the chief object of the investigation—i.e. the
mode of the occurrence of the phsophate deposits—it was
intended to show the distribution of the rocks over a

typical area which should include the chief mines of the

district, and in this way it became necessary to attempt a
delimitation of certain limestone areas, in doing which the
following features were brought forcibly to light.

Their mode of occurrence was extremely indefinite and
irregular.. Although great pains were taken it was found
impossible in most places to draw any very sharp line be-
tween the limestones and the surrounding rocks.

They contained inclusions of gneissic and other associated

rocks in the form of bands, nodules, ete.
- The proportion of this included rock in relation to the
limestone proper was extremely variable so that whilst at
some places limestone with inclusions might be a fitting
designation, at others one would rather describe as gneiss
with intercalated ribbons or bands of calcite. Thus, in
passing from a limestone area on to another rock, it became
a question of percentage as to where one would draw a line
between the two and in the area of gneiss, etc., proper, one
would often find little scattering patches of limestone.

These limestone areas show a very constant and more or
less definite striping or parallel structure which always
maintained a marked parallelism with that of the surround-
ing gneiss in all its variations of direction.

On close observation, the inclusions in these limestone
areas, show some very interesting features. In shape they
are varied. One exposure might show a number of con-
torted bands of gneissic material running parallel to each
other, separated by limestone, and much thickened at the
sharp bends by doubling. At other places these inclusions
form a comparatively small proportion of the rock mass
showing as detached nodules, of irregular shape. These
nodules are very commonly roughly lenticular, showing a
tendency to taper off at either end along the striping of the

90 Canadian Record of Science.

enclosing limestone; at places this tapering off is seen, on
closer inspection, to be due to strings of particles of fel-
spathic and similar material arranged in line.

All these inclusions of whatever shape seem to have one
feature incommon. ‘Their exterior surface it hackly, pit-
ted and with a generally corroded appearance.

The general striping of the limestones would seem, on
careful study, to be due, either to little irregular chains of
such particles or to a different colouring of the replacing
calcite crystals, probably marking the places where such
particles have been.

The detailed explanation offered by the writer seems to
him to satisfactorily and thoroughly explain these and
other features of the limestones of the Laurentian. He is
led to the conclusion that they simply represent areas of
eneissic and similar rocks altered in place’into limestones.
Furthermore, that the extent and location of these areas
have been largely determined by the presence of the abrupt
bends and other contortions of these rocks, whose folic
would thus be separated and opened up to the complete
action of the subterranean waters. Where such contor-
tions and crumpling of the rocks had extended over a con-
siderable area, the alteration would have gone further and
have produced the solid limestone masses so frequently
found. In these the inclusions would naturally be scarcer
and represent the more solid portions of the ribs of the
gneiss which for this reason or owing to their mineral
composition were less amenable to change than the rest of
the area. These would naturally show the corroded sur-
face already alluded to, and the tapering off along the strip-
ing of the rock. The lesser and scattering occurrences of
limestone throughout the district, which are a very confus-
ing feature on any other supposition, would thus be satis-
factorily accounted for as well as the extreme irregularity
of the boundaries of these limestone areas and other
phenomena of their occurrence.

Doubtless also the mineral constitution of the original
rocks must have been an important factor in the determina-
tion of the position, etc., of these alteration areas.

ee

Teratological Notes. 91

The occurrence of these limestones at the anticlinal
folds of the formation has been noticed in a general way
by Dr. Ells, of the Geological Survey staff, who is now en-
gaged in mapping the general geology of a very large
district north of the Ottawa River, extending from Ottawa
city eastward, nearly to Montreal. The writer, however,
believes that this is the first attempt to explain in detail
the reason of this association on the basis of subsequent
alteration in place, and to put forward a theory which
should harmonize all the features observable both in the
larger and more definite areas and in the smaller and scat-
tering patches found throughout the district.

Since writing the above I understand from Dr. Selwyn, the Director of the
Geological Survey, that in some correspondence he had with Messrs. Rowney
and King in regard to their book on Rock Metamorphism, issued in connection
with the Eozoon controversy in 1881, he wrote as follows: “ I am led to believe
that the two kinds of limestone or dolomite have had a distinct origin and that
the non-fossiliferous and generally crystalline set are newer than the strata
with which they are associated. Nearly if not quite all our Laurentian and
Huronian limestones seem to me to have this non-contemporaneous character

notwithstanding that they conform more or less perfectly with the lamination
and with the larger flexures of the associated gneiss.”’

TERATOLOGICAL NoTEs.
By D. P. Pennattow, McGill University.

Marked departures from the ordinary course of develop-
ment in plants are interesting, and often instructive, as
throwing additional light upon the morphological charac-
ter of organs, the original features of which have become
lost in the course of development and adaptation to special
functions. This is particularly true where these changes
are of the nature of reversions to the primitive type of
structure. The present notes are designed to draw atten-
tion to a few instances of such reversions which have lately
come under notice, and which have already served an im-
portant purpose in the instruction of students. During the
past winter, Mr. N. N. Evans brought to my notice a com-
mon cultivated tulip which displayed an alteration in some
respects most unusual. The flower was perfectly normal

92 Canadian Record of Science..

as to form and size, and exhibited three normal carpels in
the pistil. There were, however, seven stamens instead of
six, and seven divisions of the perianth instead of six. The
addition of an extra number to each of these whorls of
orgins was found, upon examination, to be a result of
chorisis or deduplication, an .alteration which is by no,
means rare, but which leads to the breaking up of a nor-
mally single organ into two or more organs of the same
kind. The most marked change, and one which is com-
paratively rare, was to be found in the presence of a bract
below the flower. This organ was found to arise from the
scape at a distance of about one and one-half inches below
the flower. It was two and one half inches long and one-
half inch wide. One margin, for a width of about one-
eighth of an inch, was distinctly petaloid, showing the
tendency for this organ to become a true spathe. This
case has more recently been paralleled by the occurrence
of a double calla lily, in which a second spathe of full size
and form was developed below the normal spathe at a dis-
tance of about one inch.

In a flower of the common fuchsia all parts were normal
with the exception of one calyx lobe, which had developed
into a perfectly normal leaf except along one margin, where
it remained attached to the adjoining sepal.

In the common pelargonium one flower was completely
replaced by a branch bearing well-developed and normal
leaves.

Roses under cultivation often exhibit interesting condi-
tions of reversion in the flower, less frequently do they
show them in the leaves. ‘Two specimens in our collection
give a clear indication of the reversion of a compound leaf
to the simple form of that organ. The specimens are of the
common wild rose (Rosa carolina). In one case the flower
is normal, and only one leaf shows reversion. Here the
five normal leaflets are replaced by two leaflets. The basal
one of these shows from its position that its opposite was
arrested in development. The terminal leaflet shows three
strong lobes, with a prominent vein running into each, so

Ancient Myrtiapods. — 93

that if we consider these three lobes as three leaflets which
have become united, we then have a complete correspond-
ence with the number of parts in a normal leaf. In
the second case the flower was proliferous and greatly
reduced in size, while five leaves exhibited various stages of
reversion. In all five leaves the three terminal leaflets had
become joined so as to form a more or less strongly three-
lobed leaflet. Counting these lobes as the representatives
of leaflets, it was then found that there was an exact numer-
ical correspondence with the parts, 5-7, of a normal leaf.

ANCIENT MYRIAPODS.
G. F. Marramw, F. B.S. C.

The Common Karwig is the best known example of a
class of articulate animals, not very familiar to us because
of their comparative scarcity and secretive habits. In these
respects they are the opposite of some species of the im-
mensely more numerous, and obtrusively familiar Hexapods
or Trve Insects. Myriapods differ strikingly from the lat-
ter in their long worm-like bodies composed of numerous
segments, and having equally numerous or more numerous
feet.

So distinct are the Myriapods in these and other respects
from the true insects, that many writers recognize them as
a separate class, of equal rank with the Crustaceans, Hexa-
pods and Arachnids (spiders and scorpions).

Though now comparatively rare, in past ages the Myria-
pods played an important partin peopling the land areas of
the globe, and possessed great diversity of structure. Only
afew species from the Paleozoic rocks have been known
until of late years, but gradually the number has been in-
creased, and as their diversity of form has been recognized,
the importance of their bearing upon the classification of
insects has become more manifest.

A sketch of the discoveries of fossil Myriapods which
have been made from time to time, may serve to show how

\

94 Canadian Record of Science.

rare an event is the discovery of the remains of one of these
little animals.

In 1854 C. L. Koch and J. C. Berendt described the Crus-
taceans, Myriapods and Spiders of the Amber of Vorwelt,
North Germany. These amber fragments contain a rich
insect fauna, admirably preserved, have yielded 35 species
of Myriapods (15 Chilopods and 20 Diplopods) and are of
late Tertiary age.

In 1859 Sir J. W. Dawson found and described! re-
mains of a species of Millipede (Yylobius Sigillariw) in
erect stumps of trees in the Coal Measures at the Joggins in
Nova Scotia. Ata later period (1873) Dr. S. H. Scudder,
of Cambridge, Mass., reviewed the Millipede remains from
these stumps and found three species of the genus estab-
lished by Sir Wm. Dawson and established the new genus,
—Archiulus.

In 1863 J. W. Salter described two fossils from the Eng-
lish Coal Measures under the genus Hurypterus. These
specimens were re-examined by Mr. Henry Woodward and
found to be of other genera. One 4. armatus he suggested
was a gigantic Arachnid, and the other #. ferox was plainly
a species of Meek and Worthen’s new genus Huphoderia and
therefore a Myriapod.

Salter in that year also described a Eurypterus from the
Plant Beds at St. John, N.B. Later discoveries lead the
author to think that this species, H. pulicaris, should also
be referred to the Myriapods, or to the Insects.

In 1868, A. Dohrn described a Millipede from the coal
beds of Saarbruck, in bh ate These beds are of Per-
mian Age.

In 1868, Meek and Wor then began to make known those
remarkable Myriapods from the Lower Coal Measures of
Mazon Creek, Il., which, together with the plants found
there, have made that locality famous. These remains
were more fully described by Dr. Scudder at a later date
with more ample material at his command, and such was

1 Journal Geol. Society of London, Vol, XV1. p. 268, 1859.

Ancient Myriapods. 95

the extraordinary nature of these remains that their study
quite revolutionized the classification of the Myriapods.

In 1871, H. Woodward discovered a Myriapod (Eupho-
beria) in the English Coal Measures, and a few years later
(1878) P. L. Bertkau one in the Brown Coal of Rott, near
Bonn, Miocene in age.

In 1882, B. N. Peach carried back a knowledge of these
creatures to the Devonian, describing two forms from the
old red Sandstone of Forfarshire, in Scotland.

In 1886, Dr. Scudder issued a systematic review of the
Insects, Myriapods and Arachnids whieh remains to-day the
most systematic and philosophical grouping of the Insectea.
He has since made some important changes however, as for
instance in recognizing Chilopods among the Carboniferous
Myriapods. |

The insect faunas of the Tertiary deposits are notably
poor in remains of Myriapods. Prof. Oswald Heer, in
1862, described the Insect Fauna of Giningen, in Bavaria,
finding no less than 844 species of insects chiefly beetles,
and almost all of living families, But, as quoted by Lyell,
he does not mention the occurrence of a single Myriapod.
Rev. P. B. Brodie described no less than 24 families of in-
sects from the Lower Lias, Great Britain, but Myriapods
are equally wanting there.

For ten years (1881-1890), Dr. Scudder was at work on
the Insect Fauna of the Tertiary lake basin of Florissant
and other localities of Western North America. His re-
sults were published by the U. 8S. Geological Survey and
fill a large quarto volume with 28 plates, representing this
extensive series of fossils.

The remarkable richness of the Florissant fauna may be
inferred from Dr. Scudder’s statement that in one summer
about 10,000 specimens were collected from these beds ;
whereas it had taken Heer thirty years to gather the 5,000
specimens from Ciningen, on which he founded his de-
scriptions. Yet from all the material gathered at Lake
Florissant, Dr. Scudder has figured only one broken ex-
ample of a Myriapod.

96 Canadian Record of Science.

Modern Myriapods are divided into three orders, Chilo-
pods, Decapods and Pauropods; the third of which, only
known as Recent, is insignificant both in numbers and size.
Dr. Scudder was once disposed to claim that these orders
like those of the ‘T'rue Insects had originated in the Second-
ary Rocks (Mesozoic), and that all the Paleozoic Myriapods
were included in his new orders, Paleeosygnatha and Archi-
polypoda; but he has since discovered examples of the
Chilopod forms in the Carboniferous beds. It follows that
three if not four of the orders of the Myriapods existed in
the Paleozoic rocks.

The Chilopods are distinguished from the Diplopods by
the possession of only one pair of feet to each joint of the
body, whereas the Diplopods have the ventral plate of each
joint in two pieces and carry two pairs of legs to each joint
except a few anterior joints which have only one pair;
their feet therefore are twice as numerous as those of the
Chilopods (except on the anterior joints). The Chilopods
differ also in having the body flattened. Some small species
of this order has been found ir the plant beds at St. John.

Dr. Scudder has made a separate order, Protosygnatha,
of that singular larva-like form described by Meek and
Worthen under the name Palexocampus. It has only a few
joints (12) and is covered with tufted bristles. A Myriapod
with the bristles more uniformly diffused and having more
numerous joints occurs at St. John.

Omitting Protosygnatha and the few Chilopods from
view, the bulk of the Paleozoic Myriapods are included in
the extensive order Archipolypoda, characterized by a
rounded body of many joints, and having the ventral
plate of each somite as in Diplopoda divided into two
pieces, with a pair of legs attached to each piece. The an-
terior half of each dorsal plate is elevated, ridged trans-
versely to the body and frequently bears spines or tubercles ;
while the posterior portion is flatter and lower. The body
in the Myriapods of this order is elongated, fusiform,
largest in the middle or towards the anterior end, and is
composed of many segments,

Ancient Myriapods. 97

A peculiar family, Archidesmide, referred by Scudder to
this order has been found in the Devonian rocks of Scot-
land; in this family the halves of the dorsal plate of the
several joints are scarcely consolidated; but the anterior
half is more important, both by its size and by the ex-
panded lateral lamelle that ornament it. These curious
Myriapods are found in the old red sandstone of Forfar-
shire.

The most important family of the Paleozoic Myriapods
is the Huphoberide, distinguished from the last by the
more or less complete soldering of the two portions of the
dorsal plate; in this the elevated anterior portion is orna-
mented with large, often forked spines, or with tubercles.
The EKuphoberide are the typical forms of the order Archi-
polypoda, and some are of great size. According to Dr.
Scudder some species were amphibious, being provided
with organs, apparently of the nature of gills, beside the
ordinary spiracles, and with lamellate legs. They appear
to have been far more abundant in the new world than in
the old, and in the latter are scarcely known outside of
Great Britain.

The ironstone nodules of the shales on Mazon Creek, IIL.,
have produced the greatest number and the most remark-
able forms of these archaic Myriapods, though some have
been found in the British carboniferous deposits. Those
found at Coldbrook Dale were at first taken to be the cater-
pillers of certain butterflies, and afterwards as belonging to
the Merostomata. Myriapods of this family have lately
been found at St. John, N.B.

A third family of ancient Myr lapads. 1 is that designated
as Archiulide by Dr. Scudder. In this group a near ap-
proach to Diplopoda of modern Myriapods is seen. The
two pieces of the dorsal plate are closely consolidated, but
still are distinctly visible, though the anterior is rarely
elevated much above the posterior, the body is almost
smooth or covered more or less abundantly with serially
disposed papilla, from which in some cases hairs or small
spines arise. The members of this family resemble modern

98 Canadian Record. of Science.

Diplopoda in their general appearance much more closely
than either of the preceding families. Sir Wm. Dawson,
who first discovered their forms in the Palwozoic rocks,
classed the m with the Diplopoda, and spoke of them as the
oldest ‘‘ gally worms” known. Sir William’s figures would
indicate that the back (not the front part as Scudder says)
was the more elevated. While first found in the erect
stumps of Sigillarian trees at the Joggins, they have since
been detected in the Coal Measures of Great Britain and on
the continent of Europe. Possibly also some species found
in the Dyas of Bohemia may belong to this family. Two
species have been found at Mazon Creek.

As regards the development of the Myriapods, Dr. Scud
der says that in the early life of Pauropus and the Diplo-
poda we have what may be fairly considered a true larval
form, in which for a brief period after leaving the egg the
pody, much shorter than in after life, is provided with three
pairs of legs, borne on the anterior segments of the body.
These segments are never fully provided with legs, though
most of the segments posterior to them, both those which
exist during the larva! state and those which originate sub-
sequently, bear each two pairs. In the Chilopoda on the
other hand, although the appendages of the anterior
segment develop earlier than those behind them there is no
true larval condition, or perhaps one may say a larval con-
dition is permanent, in that the same anterior legs become
early and permanently developed, as organs subsidiary to
manducation, while each segment of the hinder part of the
body develops only a single pair of legs.

To close these remarks it may be said that nine genera
of Paleozoic Myriapods have been recognized in the Coal
Measures, and two in the Devonian rocks of Scotland.
While of those found at St. John and which are supposed
to be older, the genera are the same as those of the Coal
Measures or are nearly related to them.

The air-breathing articulates of the Plant bed of St. John
so far recognized, consist of :—

Tnsects, nine species of eight genera. ..........00 eases 9

Presidential Address. 99

Myriapods, six species of several genera...........sceeeseeees 6
Arachnid, similar to Anthracomartus .......... secccscscesees 1
Erobable Padipalp (Hurypterella:) .;..cc.cs6c sc cccespeeeesseinee ar
Probable Arachnid or Isopod (Amphipeltis)......... ...... 1
Bcerpion (Paleophonus arctus)....0...2..- sc... cite senssennseas 1

Two species of land snails also have been found, raising
the number to twenty or twenty-one kinds of air-breathing
animals found in the Plant Beds at St. Johns.

ANNUAL PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY, MONTREAL.
By Prof. Wxstey Mitts, M.A., M.D., etc.

In accordance with the custom of my predecessors, I pre-
sent a brief retrospect of the year that has just closed, and
offer a few suggestions for your consideration.

The Executive began its work with the duty before it of
carrying into effect a motion passed at the last annual
meeting which directed that we should ascertain the exact
standing and condition of our Society, and if possible de-
vise means for its improvement. To my own mind this wasa
good indication—a sign of life and a progressive spirit—for
the society, like the individual, that is perfectly satisfied
with present attainments is apt to be in a stage of in-
cipitnt decline, if it has not already reached a condition of
advanced atrophy.

The Special Committee appointed to investigate the sub-
ject, held many meetings, and with the assistance of sub-
committees finally devised a scheme which was presented
to a special meeting of the society, and unanimously adopted.

The principal features of this plan of improvement were :
Affiliation with other local societies having kindred aims;
broadening the range of subjects to be brought under dis-
cussion; making the themes presented somewhat more
popular in form; and finally reporting them regularly and
adequately for the public press of the city. The first part
of the scheme has yet to be tried, but if the right spirit

100 Canadian Record of sence

prevails we have no doubt our society will find, as all
other organizations have done, that union is strength.
Several of the other parts of the plan have been fairly tested
this year, and I am sure you will agree with me, most suc-
cessfully.

The attendance of members has not been smaller, while
that of the general public has been considerable, so that
perhaps never before were the regular meetings as well at-
tended ; while the notices in the press prior to the meet-
ing and the reports afterwards, both of which emanated
frum the Society, were a great improvement on the scanty
references of the past. , | é

The abstracts of the Somerville lectures supplied by the
lecturers, and kindly published by some of the newspapers
in full, were all that could be desired.

This has entailed considerable labour, but it seems to me
that it is worth while, for in a community like ours we must
sow the seed of science beside all waters if we would see
even a little fruit. Those of scientific tastes have no more
excuse for exclusiveness or selfishness—of which there is
still surely more than enough in the world—than other
people.

Thanks largely to the forethought and generosity of one
man, the Rev. Dr. Somerville, this society for about sixty
years has been in a position to invite those who would
to come to its annual feasts of popularized science. °

That the courses of lectures have been the means of do-
ing great good there can be no doubt. It may be said that
without reference to age, sex, social position or any other
distinction thousands have been interested listeners during
the last half century to those unfoldings of nature’s ways,
which have been attempted in this historic lecture course.

May the Society never underestimate their importance,
and never cease to welcome the poor man and the poor
child, as well as the rich, who may wish to put themselves
under the ennobling influence of a loving contact with
nature and so attain to true scienee—real knowledge.

For some years the Society has attempted to have the lec-

—

Presidential Address. 101

tures of the Somerville course not only consecutive but on
subjects connected by natural affinities. Many people attend
the whole course when thus arranged and recvive an amount
of educational benefit not possible, when the lectures, how-
ever good in themselves, are not closely related. It should .
be the object of every teacher—no matter what his exact
position, to beget a desire on the part of his hearers to
know more and to attempt to investigate in some humble
way for themselves—for after all, we know just so much as
we really make a part of our individual nature by personal
observation or experience.

This year the Society appropriated such asum as it could
afford for illustrating the Somerville course, in carrying out
which we were efficiently assisted by Mr. Williams So
great is the tendency to use illustrations these days that it
is scarcely possible to be up to the times without them. On
the other hand we witness almost daily evidence of their
abuse, and | should be sorry ever to see Mr. Somerville’s
noble purpose degraded into the giving of a mere show or
exhibitiun for amusement. I cannot believe it is ever the
purpose of science as science to amuse.

People who regard our domestic animals merely as objects
of amusement, a sort of animated toys, never rise to pro-
per conceptions of these creatures. On the contrary, from
the student’s point of view, all creatures are alike worthy
of the most earnest, perhaps I may say reverent study, as
illustrating great laws which apply throughout the universe.

I therefore think that the Somerville course of lectures of
last winter on our domestic animals, given by persons who
were thoroughly competent to treat of them, should have
done much to lead to a better study of those creatures that
have been most truthfully termed ‘‘ our dumb friends.”

It is scarcely possible to observe wild animals so closely
and to study their relations to their surroundings so suc-
cessfully as in the case of domestic animals. That part of
natural history which we can best understand is what per-
tains to the working of the animal body, because we can
supplement study of wild and domestic forms of life by
observation on ourselves.

102 Canadian Record of Science.

By a study of ourselves and those animals that live under
conditions most akin to our own we are, inmy opinion, best
prepared for a really profitable study of wild forms. ‘To go
no further than the mere external forms of things is not to
really understand nature. It was said of old, and is re-
peated to-day, that the proper study of mankind is man.
The naturalist may grant this because it is only through
our own experiences that we can understand other creatures.
Man can understand animals because he is himself an animal
—and but for a similarity of nature this would be impos-
sible. I have often thought of late that our domestic
animals receive far too little attention at the hands of
naturalists—amateur and professional.

There seems to have been but one opinion in regard to
the Somerville course of this year—that it was an unquali-
fied success. The lantern and other illustrations were of
great service, yet never abused ; the serious aims of science
were never subordinated to mere amusement.

We must remember, too, that the better living creatures
are understood, the happier the lot of our domestic animals,
if not all animals, will become. Knowledge in this case is
sure to beget kindliness—-true sympathy, and I know of
no other way by which it is possible. I therefore think the
moral effect of the course of last winter will be especially

vood.,
f We have to congratulate ourselves on the widening of
our sphere of study to include physical science; and those
who heard Professsor Nicolson’s lecture on ‘The Me-
chanics of Haulage,” as applicable to the drawing of loads
by horses—coming as it did just after the close of the
Somerville course, will agree that the change has been a
wise one. The Society had already tried the happy experi-
ment of a course of popular lectures a year ago on physical
science kindly given by the professors of the Faculty of
Applied Science in McGill University, and constituting the
Somerville course of last year.

Noticing the extent to which our museum is used on the
evenings of the Somerville lectures one cannot but feel that

Presidential Address. 103

it would be well if it could be open to the public daily free
of charge. It seems a pity that such a valuable collection
of nature’s treasures should not be more used. The museum
is admirably located, and I hope that some means may be
devised by which it may become a school in which nature’s
lessons may be effectively if silently taught.

As you all know, for two years the existence of THE
ReEcoRD OF ScrENcE, the Society’s publication, with so long
and worthy a history as the chief medium for the publica-
tion of general natural science in the Dominion, has been
imperilled by the withdrawal of the Provincial Government
grant. Weare not without hope that this well deserved grant
may be restored. But the Society, with an independence
and a fc rtitude which will command admiration and respect,
has resolved that this evidence of its life and progress shall
not cease to exist—grant or no grant.

We have many subjecis of congratulation. One of our
most frequent contributors to THE REcoRD or SclENCE—a
man who has done so much to make Canada known by his
long continued and valuable scientific researches, Mr. G. F.
Matthew, of St. John, N.B., has added to the success of
our monthly meetings by sending us a paper on a subject
and in a form suitable for one of our regular monthly
meetings. This action on his part has been greatly appre-
ciated on all hands and will, I trust, be imitated by others.

It is a source of satisfaction to find that all or nearly all
the veteran members still retain their connection with
the Society and encourage younger men by their presence
and faithful attention to the duties assigned to them.

Sir Wm. Dawson, for so many years the President of the
Society, and one of its warmest friends and supporters,
though incapacitated by feeble health from taking part in
those many duties and enterprises which have made him
s0 well-known and respected in this city and throughout
America, has still given the Society a goodly share of the
energy he has had at command. ‘There are few things that
have more impressed me in connection with Sir William
Dawson than his close attendance at the meetings of this

104 Canadian Record of Science.

Society for so many years, when he was occupied with mat
ters of great importance, and often when the meetings were

very poorly attended. It is to be hoped that this example

will not be lost on us. In a society like ours the duty of
mutual encouragement is clear.

Dr. Harrington, one of the good friends of this Society,
who did so much for it in the past, when resigning his
position as president, urged that the Society should consider
the advisability of attempting to bring to this city some of
the eminent scientific workers or teachers from the United
States and offer to the public a lecture or two from them
during the winter in some large hall. Considering how
little is done in Montreal in the way of providing lectures
for its citizens by distinguished men, this proposition of Dr.
Harrington’s should not, I feel, be allowed to pass into
oblivion. I have myself for many years felt the great need
of such lectures in this city, though it must be confessed the
financial risk is considerable in attempting to carry such a
scheme into effect.

In a society like ours we must never forget that it exists
to increase the knowledge of science and to spread that
knowledge. This implies the need above every thing else
of a body of enthusiastic workers, and no material acquisi-
tion can ever compensate for the lack of such people. With-
out these a natural history society is poor, poor indeed.

I am, therefore, deeply concerned as to how we shall dis-
cover and enlist the co-operation of men, especially young
men, who will infuse into ussome of that enthusiasm which
nearly always means success in achievement and give us a
promise of a fullness of the life-tide of science which will
widen and deepen the channels which the same enthusiasm
and the work it begets, have worn in the past.

Our superintendent, Mr. Griffin, has continued to dis-
charge his duties with intelligence, energy, courtesy and
success generally, and I have always found him ready to
assist in any matter which has been brought to his notice.

From the reports of the various officers and committees
read this evening you will be able to judge somewhat as to

|

Proceedings. 105

the faithfulness and efficiency of those to whom the Society
has entrusted its management.

Before resigning my office, [ wish to thank the officers of
the Society and all with whom I have come in contact in
the discharge of my duties, for their uniform courtesy and
kindness, which have greatly lightened the labours and
added to the pleasures associated with my office.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

MontrREAL, 26th March, 1894.

The fifth monthly meeting of the Society was held this
evening, Dr. Wesley Mills, President, in the chair.

The minutes of the regular meeting of February 26th,
and of the special meeting of March 5th, were read and
approved.

The minutes of Council meetings of March 5th and 19th
were read.

The Librarian reported that ‘ Bechstein’s Natural His-
tory of Cage Birds,” and “ Minot’s Land and Game Birds of
New England,” were donated to the Society by Mr. H, D.
Wintle. .

On motion by Mr. EK. T. Chambers, seconded by Mr.
James Gardner, the thanks of the Society were given to Mr.
Wintle for this valuable donation.

Mr. J. W. Marling, proposed by Edgar Judge, seconded
by J.S. Shearer, and J. Bickertoun Williams, proposed by
Dr. Wesley Mills, seconded by George Sumner, were, on
motion of J. A. U. Beaudry, seconded by J. H. Joseph,
elected as ordinary members by acclamation.

A letter was read from J. Thorburn, of the Geological
Survey, asking regarding certain volumes sent to the Sur-
vey from Italy, and also inquiring about the affiliation of
the various societies in Montreal. Referred to the Librarian
and Secretary to answer.

Prof. J. T. Nicolson then read his paper on the ‘“ Mechan-
ics of Haulage.”

106 Canadian Record of Science.

On motion of R. W. McLachlan, seconded by Joseph
Fortier, the thanks of the Society were tendered to Prof.
Nicolson for his interesting paper.

MonrreaL, April 30th, 1894.

The sixth monthly meeting of the Society was held this
evening, J. H. Joseph, Vice-President, in the chair.

The minutes of last meeting were read ard approved.

The minutes of Council of April 23rd were read.

It was moved by the Rev. Dr. Campbell, seconded by J.
A. U. Beaudry, that the Society begs to offer its congratu-
lations to Dr. Wesley Mills upon the success of the Somer-
ville course, arranged by him, for the present season, and
records its appreciation of the exceedingly instructive and
valuable lectures delivered by him and the other professors
of the Faculty of Comparative Medicine in McGill Univer-
sity, Dr. D. McKachran, Dr. Baker and Dr. Adami, who
aided him in favoring the public with this course, under
the auspices of this society.

A letter was read from Dr. F. D. Adams, enclosing one
from Mr. Lamb, of the Geological Survey, Ottawa, offering
to give the Society a valuable exchange for four sponges
which he had borrowed from the Society’s collection, some
time ayo, on order of Sir William Dawson. On motion, the
letter was referred to Messrs. Winn and Chambers.

Mr. J. M. M. Duff, proposed by J. A. U. Beaudry, sec-
onded by George Sumner, was, on motion that the rules be
suspended, elected an ordinary member by acclamation.

Mr. J. 8S. Shearer reported, on behalf of the Field Day
Committee, that the committee had arranged for the field
day to be held on the 2nd of June; the train to start from
Windsor Station at 8 a.m. for Labelle, about forty miles
beyond St. Agathe, the place selected for last year’s field
day.

On motion by R. W. McLachlan, seconded by Joseph
Fortier, the report was adopted; the price of tickets to be
$1.50 for adults and 75 cents for children, Dp

Proceedings. 107

As Mr. Joseph had to leave, Mr. Shearer was called to
the chair.

A paper by Mr. G. F. Matthew on “ Ancient Myriapods”’
was read by the Rev. Dr. Campbell.

It was moved by Dr. Campbell, seconded by George
Sumner, that the thanks of the Society be given to Mr.
Matthew for his valuable paper, and that he be requested
to furnish specimens of some of these Myriapods for the
Society’s museum,

MontreAt, 28th May, 1894.

The annual meeting of the Society was held on Monday,
the 28th of May, Dr. Wesley Mills in the chair.
The following reports were read and adopted :—

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL,

GENTLEMEN,—The Chairman of Council begs to report that for the
session 1893-94 eleven meetings of Council were held, all of which
were well attended.

The Society held six ordinary meetings and one special meeting.
At the six regular meetings, interesting papers were contributed by
Sir Wm. Dawson, Dr. Wesley Mills, Nevil Norton Evans, Dr.
Frank D. Adams, Prof. J. T. Nicolson, and F. B. Matthew.

The Somerville Course of Lectures for the past season proved
of unusual interest, and the Society is indebted to the lecture com-
mittee for arranging the course and particularly to our President,
Dr. Wesley Mills, for his untiring efforts in watching over the
course so faithfully and giving so much of his valuable time to make
the course such a complete success. A well deserved vote of thanks
was tendered by the Society to the several gentlemen who delivered
the lectures. Those attending were so deeply impressed with the
importance of some of the subjects brought before them, that at two
of the meetings committees were named to wait upon the Health
Committee of this city and urge that a proper inspection should be
made of all dairies supplying milk to the city as also of all animals
sold for food, with a view of stamping out the disease tuberculosis ;
joint committees of the Natural History Society and Board of T'rade
accordingly waited upon the Health Committee of this city and
urged very strongly the importance of having duly qualified in-
spectors appointed. The health committee received the deputation
very kindly and after the subject had been well discussed, requested

-

108 Canadian Record of Science.

Prof. Duncan McEachran and Dr. Wesley Mills tojformulate a plan

covering the object desired, which was done by these gentlemen,
when the health committee at once adopted the proposition and
asked the Council for funds to carry out this important recom-
mendation. It is most desirable that the matter should be pressed
to a conclusion.

On the arrival of the Earl of Aberdeen in Canada, he was asked
to accept the position of Patron of the Society, to which he
graciously consented.

In June of last year a committee was appointed to see in what
manner the usefulness of the Society could be increased, which
resulted in the affiliation of the Microscopical Society, the Entomo-
logical Society, and the Aggassiz Association with this Society ; and
we trust that this may prove to the mutual advantage of all con-
cerned. A full report of the committee was presented to the Society
on the 25th of March last ; it has been suggested that it would be
very desirable to celebrate the affiliation in an especial manner
next autumn.

We were informed by the Hon. J. S. Hall, Treasurer of the
Province, on the 19th of February last, that he regretted that the
usual Government grant made to the Society for the publication of
the RrecorpD or SciENcE, could not be given this year.

The Annual Field Day of the Society-was held at Ste Agathe last
year, on the 3rd of June, and proved to be one of the most success-
ful and enjoyable ever held by the Society.

During the year the membership has been increased by the
addition of three associate and twenty-seven ordinary members,
being an increase of thirty for the year.

We mourn the loss of Messrs. W. F. Kay, G. Knowlton and Hollis
Shorey, who died during the past year.

The whole respectfully submitted,

Gro. SUMNER,
Chairman of Council.

Report oF Hon. CuRATOR.

GENTLEMEN :—During the past season the following donations
have been received and put in their places in the museum :—

Fossils from Radnor forges.

Model surf boat from Samoa.

Indian war canoe.

Bark from California giant trees.

Stone axe.

Two lizards.

Proceedings. 109

One bat.

Specimens of seaweed.

Bone of Mastodon and other geological specimens from R. Felch,
Esq.

Magnetic iron sand.

‘wo wasps’ nests.

Brazilian beetles.

Exotic butterfly —Morpho—sp.

Also the following specimens from Bermuda presented by J. S.
Buchan :—

Specimen of coral rock from Bermuda, the ordinary building
material of the country.

The same hardened into limestone.

Stalagmite from the surface of the rock at Ireland Island, near
the dockyard, Bermuda, taken from a surface about 30 feet above
sea level, possibly the site of an ancient cave.

Specimens of Bermuda juniper.

Compared with the last few years but little work has been done
at the museum. The case of mammals, which was being destroyed
by moths has been thoroughly overhauled and all traces of the in-
vaders exterminated, and when our birds have all received a similar
“soing-over’ the museum will present a much better appearance.
But this work is almost endless and it is to be hoped that the in-
coming Hon. Curator will be able to organize a strong museum
committee and give the whole collection a general and much
needed revision.

The number of visitors to the museum shows a shight falling off
from last year, which is accounted for, probably, by the decrease of
American travel last summer.

Respectfully submitted,
ALBERT F. WINN,
Hon. Curator.

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

GENTLEMEN :—On behalf of the library committee I am glad to
report that the books of your library have been more used by
members than they have for some years past. Not only have many
books been taken out, but the library itself has been more used for
purposes of reference than in former years.

No meetings of the committee have been called, as the work of
arranging and cataloguing cannot be proceeded with on account of
the large number of volumes waiting for the binder. The number
requiring binding now exceeds 200. :

Ly Canadian Record of Science.

Thave to acknowledge the great assistance received from Mr.
Griffin, the superintendent, who is always ready and willing to help
the committee—especially in caring for and acknowledging the large
and increasing number of exchanges received by the library.

The following donations have been. received :—

From E. D. Wintle, Esq., ‘The Land and Game Birds of New
England,” “The Natural History of Cage Birds.”

From Dr. G. M. Dawson, “ Geological Notes on the Coasts and
Islands of Behring Sea and its Vicinity.” “On the Occurrence of
Mammoth Remains in the Yukon District.”

E. T. CHAMBERS,
Hon. Librarian.

REPoRT OF THE EDITING AND EXCHANGE COMMITTER.

GENTLEMEN :—During the past year the _ publication of the
CANADIAN REcorD OF Science has continued as usual. Three numbers
have already issued, while the fourth is now in ‘press. The with-
drawal of the Government grant to the Society during the past two
years has made it doubtful whether the publication of the Recorp
or SCIBNCE can be continued, and although the Council of the Society
have decided to carry it on for the coming year the financial
difficulties have rendered it impossible during the past year to issue
the several numbers at the dates on which they should have
appeared.

The rule of accepting only papers of merit and as far as possible
original papers, for publication, has been adhered to and a high
standard has thus been maintained. One or two papers which
appeared in German periodicals, and which were of especial import-
ance to scientific workers in Canada, have also been translated
and published in the Rrcorp.

As in past years a large number of valuable exchanges have been
received for the Recorp and placed in the library.

Respectfully submitted,

FRANK D. ADAMS,
Chairman.

The rules having been suspended, Mr. F. Notman was
elected an ordinary member of the Society by acclamation.
Mr. Justice Wurtele, who had been appointed as the
Society's delegate to the meeting of the Royal Society at
Ottawa, reported that he had attended the said meeting

Proceedings. it

and presented a report of the work done by the Natural
History Society. This report was then handed to the sec-
retary.

The following officers were then elected for the ensuing
year :

Honorary President—Sir. J. Wm. Dawson.

President—Dr. Wesley Mills.

Vice. Presidents—J no. 8. Shearer, Sir Donald Smith, Hon.
Edward Murphy, Hon. Justice Wurtele, Rev. Dr. Campbell,
Dr. B. J. Harrington, George Sumner, J. H. R. Molson,
Edgar Judge and J. H. Joseph.

Recording-Secretary—R. W. McLachlan.
Corresponding Secretary—Dr. J. W. Stirling.
Treasurer —F. W. Richards.

Curator—K. D. Wintle.

Librarian—K. T. Chambers.

Members of Councitl—Dr. Frank D. Adams, N. N. Evans,
Joseph Fortier, J. 8. Brown, James Gardner, Hon. J. K.
Ward, Major L. A. H. Latour, A. Holden and F. Winn.

Editing and Exchange Committee—Dr. Frank D. Adams,
N. N. Evans, J. F. Whiteaves, G. F. Matthews, Dr. Wesley
_ Mills, Dr. B. J. Harrington.

It was moved by Hon. Justice Wurtele, seconded by
George Sumner, that the sincere thanks of the Society be
tendered to Mr. James Gardner for his services as treasurer
during the past five years.—Carried.

A similar vote of thanks was tendered to Dr. Adams for
his services in connection with the Recorp or ScIENCE.

A motion was passed requesting the Council to appoint
a committee to assist the Curator in rearranging the
museum.

Canadian Record of Science.

112

Lb

00°06 $
; 00° FE hits Rice eeesoeeeeaeoeeoneeeeee es 9[Q¥I99[
-[09 peateptsuos suodiaosqng preduy’
00°% Ph a a aed mie eee MeL eS. 18. Ve qued ‘opuoqe’y "TOT
OOF ce quar ‘qn vlad

000SS" "FEST ‘AVI T 09 Quay Jo souryeq
‘Agotog uviuenbyuy pur 4siqyeusiwmnny

fija10g ay) 02 aEnG szUNo0~F

‘OWA
I1°S06TS
je900 so Qoudtog JO pxOdex{ ,,
gg’e ee eee ioe atetokenrae = an) sy'*>*\'s ne! a) syncene'y or ie ALVIQUT ri
Gi era ele ar hee umesny, .,
Te gouvausuy ».
P| ee a somnqooy
Gergen cree Shee sexe], |,
e60ST fe ge ae jour.
ZF ORT Ck COG ET eR Cec ci iene Ti eT ras Po URI Dao VYSVT “A
OL F&Z A was vie Na) ol Resta, lei Sire <0, sosuodxq Aarpung ¥
00° goes a Hep Ay eh e016, Kile le oleae 6, Je . * SUOTSSTUI

-Wl09 or. Aavyeg sjuepueqiiasedng <q

‘SLNEWASUN ASIC,

DNPTELLS “AOE

"POST ‘ABTA 9z ‘[eorq UOT

JOALMOI PUNOL PUD paUrwUlinaxesy

IT S061
00° 0&Z ope | OI SE Cle ee) Bite o * patlafsuUnd}- QA
puny JUVUMOpPUuy _drys10q uo JN] osUT 6
Cbg ete eet atee tne nee aseroruy
OORT cotta Sees conway
9608 San Wt Reciel w Se, tee hays ese eee) \p; \@ ejier 7 snj{dang Avp-p]ely if
OORL99 ae suoTjdimosqng [enuuy Siequiep, ,,
rf EE equstr
LP LG & She beawes, bie, ata ae aCe Deo areok 4Se] WOT sourleq OJ,
"‘SLdAIGONY

eee oo
SS ee

‘GUASVAN], "NOH ‘UINGUVD ‘SVE HLIM LNAOOOV NI TVAULNOW JO ALAIOOS AYOLSIH IVYOLVN

Book Notices. | 1138

Book NOTICEs.

THe CanapiAN Icre-Ace. By Sir J. William Dawson,
C.M.G., F.R.S. (Montreal: Wm. V. Dawson. New
York and London: The Scientific Publishing Com-
pany, 1893.)

It is continually brought to the notice of geologists that the most
recent period in the long history of the earth is also that which
excites the greatest controversy. Wecan deal complacently with
earth-movements, mountain-thrusts, and submergences of half a
continent, so long as the organisms affected by these occurrences
are less specialized mammals than ourselves; but we find it hard
to believe in great physical or climatic changes within the limits
of our own written or unwritten history. Moreover, our knowledge
of the post-Pliocene period is burdened with an excess of detail;
and broad and sweeping generalizations seem at present out of the
question. And, if we go one step further, we may fairly attribute
our friendly agreement with regard to the conditions of the older
periods to our ignorance rather than to our information.

Sir William Dawson, in the present work, summarizes several
previous papers of his own, just as M. Gaudry’s detailed memoirs
were summarized for general use in “ Les Ancetres de nos Ani-
maux.” This handy paper-bound volume deals strictly with Can-
ada, and is in no way a “Theory of the Earth.” It is moderate in
tone, and forms a serious plea for a rational treatment of the glacial
epoch. Whatever caused the cold conditions in the northern hemi-
sphere, or in parts of the northern hemisphere, it is pointed out
that the land-ice in Canada radiated from two local centres, and
not from the hypothetical ice-cap at the pole. Readers of Nature
will remember the evidence brought forward by Dr. G. M. Dawson
as to the “ Laurentide” centre of glaciation on the east and the
“Cordilleran” centre on the west (Nature, vol. xlii., p. 650). The
conditions maintained by Sir W. Dawson as most favourable to the
development of glaciers are high masses of land in proximity to
cold seas; and, as he properly points out, these conditions still
prevail in North America to a greater extent than in North Europe.
They prevail, moreover, in Greenland, but not in Grinnell Land,
to cite two closely neighbouring areas.

It will be clear, then, that Sir W. Dawson urges that differential
earth-movement was the main factor in the production of Canadian
glaciation. The evidence of marine shells in the drift, of the
bones of whales, of the character of the deposits themselves, all
points to the existence of wide areas of submergence. With regard

114 Canadian Record of Science.

for example, to the Cordilleran centre in British Columbia, our
author writes:

“ The conditions were combined of a high mountain chain with
the Pacific on the west, and the then submerged area of the great
plains on the east, affording next to Greenland the grandest gather-
ing-ground for snow and ice that the northern hemisphere has
seen.”

Of recent years it has been far too generally assumed that we
have to picture the glaciers of the ice-age moving across the features
of the country as we at present know them. The views of Prof.
Suess with regard to earth-movements in the historic period are
perhaps only fair criticism of somewhat hasty observations; but,
in face of the extraordinary evidence of post-Pliocene upheavals, it
is at least irrational to believe that these terminated with man’s
appearance on the globe. Many English “ glacialists” accept a
recent submergence of their country to a depth of 500 feet, and yet
postulate the most catastrophic occurrences to account for marine
beds at twice that height above the sea. Yet we now have, in
addition to the old Lyellian instances, such as the Astian or even
later beds in Sicily, which are elevated some 3,000 feet, evidence
given us by Prof. Andrew Lawson of a post-Pliocene uplift of the
continental coast of California to heights of from 800 to 1,500 feet ;
and Sir W. Dawson’s requirements to explain the distribution of
the Canadian drift are such as will seem moderate and natural to
every rational uniformitarian.

On page 111 of the present work, the author discusses the pos-
sibility of distinguishing striations produced by the “ huge ice-
islands” in shallow seas from the deeper and firmer markings of
true glacier-ice. ‘Granted the submergence, which in itself assists
in the formation of snow and ice, the phenomena of the distribution
of boulders receive at once their simplest explanation; and in
chapter v. the local details of the drifts are taken, area by area,
into consideration. Our own British islands must similarly be
discussed area by area. Because it seems probable that Scotland
in the glacial epoch was a local Greenland, there is no reason why
England should also have been lifted above the sea. The evidence
accumulating in Ireland gogs far in favour of long submergence of
that country, with the production of an archipelago of picturesque
and snow-capped islands. Hence it is that we may welcome Sir
W. Dawson’s summary of results in Canada as a reminder that
land-ice and enormous terminal moraines are not to be left in
undisputed possession of the field. We can even sympathize with
him in his final sense of irritation, when he charges some glacial-
ists with “ misunderstanding or misrepresenting the glacial work

Book Notices. 115

now going on in the arctic and boreal regions.” ‘These are grave
accusations,” he continues, “but I find none of the memoirs or
other writings of the current school of glacialists free from such
errors; and I think it is time that reasonable men should dis-
countenance these misrepresentations, and adopt more moderate
and rational views.”

Of course Sir W. Dawson cannot resist the temptation of stating
as “an inevitable conclusion” (page 289) “that the origin of specific
types is quite distinct from varietal modification”; but this is a
cheerful side-thrust, as it were,in a work on quite another subject.
On page 36 the use of “ Neozoic” as equivalent to “ Tertiary ”
seems unusual; and on page 51 there is a sentence on the origin
of fiords, quoted from an earlier paper by the author, which
describes them as “often evidences of the action of the waves.”
They may have nothing to do with glacial excavation, but still less
can they be regarded as products of marine erosion, unless the
author confines himself to the cases that he has specially examined

in Nova Scotia.
GAG:

CORRECTIONS.
Vol. V., No. 6, April, 18938, p. 366, line 20 from top, for “ $1.60 to
$2.00” read “$160 to $200.”
Vol. V., No. 7, July, 1898, p. 433, in title of articie and in head-

ings of following pages, for ‘‘ Cambrian-Siberian ” read “ Cambrian-
Silurian.”

—_

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF APRIL, 1894.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory,

Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet, C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

the Ist.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 42 on the Ist. |
Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour, on

Resultant mileage 1,908.

Kesultant direction, N. 232° W.

Total mileage, 11,640-
Average velocity 16.2 m.p. h.

giving a range of temperature of 54.5 degrees.
Warmest day was the 30th. Coldest day was the
2nd Highest barometer reading was 30.386 on the
10th; lowest barometer was 29.623 on the 8rd,

Lunar coronas on 1 night.
Solar halos on 7 days.
Thunder and Lightning on 1 night.

We, Cs y ” Sky CLoupkp ; =
CHERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In Tentas [3 ,¢| = a 5
—————— sf ——_——_——_——_-—} t Mean |f Meau —_— —-———$] 282) =. ae 25
=25) =% 324 7
pres-_ |relative| Dew M | Bina) aS ae les
DAY. sure of | humid-) point. oat 3 .(825| <6 2a ss DAY
f arya ity Geueral velocity} 3 a)| = bog As ES ad x
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.| Mean. Max. Min. Range. Bons : direction. jin miles} © | 5 |= ]2 3 g- |
= ml i =
perhow, = n 2
SUNDAY t BA Palle? Leite 31.8 14.3 Fdlleteloser’,| lI anaes amet i. tee : W. 27-9 Poss | ee, 72 | 0.04 @. WPSAOE AT OS A oe ee SuNDay
2| (21.37.| 31.8 15.0 16.8 30.1038 | 30.227 29 967 260 0658 567 8.8 N.W. 17.2 0.7| 3] Of 93 ee Boal hee
3 29.03 | 35-5 15.0 20.5 30.1915 30.301 30.029 272 .0852 51.8 14-3 W. 11.5 5.0] 10] of 86 i we 3
4| 35-82] 4ro 31.2 9.8 29-7397 | 29.987 29.623 -364 1888 89 5 33.0 Ss. 17-9 8.8 | 10} 4] 3 0.01 1.2 [0.13] 4
5 | 39-92 | 45-3 33-8 1I.5 29.7525 | 29 947 29.630 +317 1873 75-3 32-5 S.W. 21.2 8.5] 10) 2] 97 | 0o.or ‘ o.or| 5 «
6 32.23 | 365 28.0 8.5 30.0538 30.136 29.998 .138 1127 61.7 20.7 N.W. 8.6 5-3] 10} of 76 px . % 6
7 \e aioe | 7 eas 26.8 15.7 30,1070 | 30.162 30.005 +097 1020 49-7 18.7 N. 6.7 43] 9|] oO} 47 5 aes, re Te |
SUNDAW eames eUOll weiner 4naa 27.8 Peal bocooe ogc eae aac Roan) Giese tee Ati N. 18.8 Jo... Jessel. f 14 ae a il tat eee Aes Sunpay
9 | 36.13] 46.0 28.8 17.2 30.3570 | 30.379 30.331 -048 1183 56.8 22.2 N. 22.7 0.7] 2] of 94 ros 9
10 | 38.35 | 47.0 27.8 19.2 20.1863 | 30. 386 30.053 -333 1297 56.5 24.0 N.E, 17.5 3-5] 8] of 78 Sn : see | 10
tr | 39-40 | 49.2 30.8 18.4 29.9885 | 30.051 29.912 -139 1265 53.8 23.5 N.E. 22.1 5-51 9| Of 37 an ef 11
12 | 41.97 | 51.8 33-0 18.8 30.1113 | 39.130 30.c80 050 1353 51.8 25 2 N.E. 25.0 7.2 |10}) of 40 2 js 12
13| 43.70] 540 34.0 20.0 30.0760 | 30-159 30.016 -143 1198 43-7 22.2 NE 26.9 4.7] tO} of gt .- see 13
(4 | 43.99 | 54-4 325 21.9 30 0228 | 30.083 29.970 213 1123 42.0 20.5 N.E. 22.0 0.3] 2] of 89 : 4 4
SUNDAY........ oy es aa 63.5 32.2 40.3", || Secwetie ve eee Fy air oe eee see N 8.0 Jee. | eee! 95 see | TS oeeeeee «SUNDAY
16 | 46.77 | 59.8 33-8 26.0 30.1078 | 30.166 30.044 122 1245 40.7 22.8 N-E, 98 4-8] 8] of 85 ee eKG
17 | 49.60{ 62.0 35-5 26.5 30.1612 | 30.179 30 150 029 1550 46.2 27.8 N. 13.9 03] 2/ of 94 Z seey | a7
18 52.60} 66,8 35 0 31 38 30.1170 30.258 29.981 277 -1945 51.5 33-3 S.E, 6.5 6.2) 10} of 58 aue'|) 2S
19 | 55.90] 60.8 49-8 11.0 29.9197 | 30.041 29.849 192 2820 63.3 43-3 Ss. 11 6 9-3 | 10 | 6] 93 Tnap | 19
20] 58.07/ 68.8 54.0 14.8 29.7983 | 29.906 29.681 225 4500 90.7 55.8 Ss. 7.6 9-8} 10} 8] 06 0.38 | 20
2t| 53.35 | 60.8 43.8 12.6 29 7198 | 209.784 29.667 117 -3387 83.0 48.2 S.W. 11,0 82] 10} of oo o.or | 24
SUNDAY ....... 22 ate 53-5 43.0 10.5 ate ia A ee i Real) Suse sae ee N. 12.8 1 eee] .. f 00 aa ire Sila || aa Citas ies . SUNDAY
23] 46.85] 55.2 40.2 15.0 29.8655 | 29.896 29 848 048 .28g90 89.8 43-7 S.W. 6.4 g.8 | 10 | 9] 00 0.14 son [OnTa: | 23
24] 47.80] 55.9 42.1 13.8 30.0342 | 30.152 29.964 183 2107 66.0 36.3 N. 18.5 Sieiiemey| Of x1 HA : Huet le
a5 | 47.30] 56.1 349 21.2 30.1282 | 30.229 30.033 +196 1343 42.0 24.7 N. 18.3 2.2) °9)| OF 94 25
26] 53.65 | 65.0 41.0 24.0 29.9362 | 30.033 29.856 -177 2270 53-7 37-0 S.W. 28.5 2.3 |e] Of OF 4 3 26
27 58.33 68.5 47-3 21.2 29.8602 29.945 29.781 -164 2377 50.2 39.0 S.W. 23.8 a5 7| o} 7 27
28 55-60] 64.0 43-5 20.5 29.9042 30.113 29.829 284 2365 51.8 37.2 N.W. 1355 6.8|10. of 35 28
SUNDAY .c.0 sles. aay Spade 55-5 35-6 19.9% || Goateeae eeaPa tts dtl . Sees ae an arsfata Prick N. 11.0 So) >- 7 96 oat he AD a stance SunpDay
30 | 58.68 | 69.5 30 5 30 0 30-2007 | 30.348 30.057 291 2257 46.0 37-3 S.W, 18.0 5.8} 10| of 67 Inap -... |Inap] 30
Means] 44.89 | 53-61 | 35.08 | 18.52 | 30.0177 SS ee ro 1840 53.6 go 1 JN, 252° 16.2] 5.3)|eee -. $54.3 | 0.59 reat. 7R. TO UNNIS Gas deine We
zo Years means aes 7 [<2 a Dee ee eerie’ Mame oT. eg, loom = 20 Years means for
for and including 39.94] 48.43 | 32.22 16:9) |) s2g4QRODM|) y ostucsen [ee eee 204 1688 66.1 Abb baPoaecte ¥ 6.2) | toe ae) 5106 1.54 6.4 | 2.19 |4and including this
this month ae | ’ montb.
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Baroweter readings reduced to sea-level and | giving a range of 0.762 inches. Maximum relative
temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. humidity was 99 on the 20th. Minimum relative
& | ~ 3. a
Direction. os N. N-E. EB. S.E. S. S.W. w. | N.W. Gara 3 Observed. | humidity was J7 on the 14th.
= as S| FS | | —____—_—__| _ ft Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary. Rain fell on 8 days.
Ra oho 228a),| 3083 346 351 756 | 3142 | 969 eoee { Humidity relative, saturation being 100. Snow.fell on 1 day.
Durationin hrs..| 144 164 24 38 56 172 | 53 sen ae 1 13 years only Rain or snow fell on 8 days.
a cee, 8 Sarg er TDs a Sh —— | ———_| ——_ --_—| The greatest heat was 69°.5 onthe 30th; Auroras were observed on 17th, 24th, 25ch.
Mean velocity...) 15.4 | 19.4 | 14.4 Cea) WEIS || Sodas | 183 | 11.7 the greates cold was 15°.0 on the 2ndand 8rd, | Lunar halos on 2 nights.

ee
ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF MAY, 1894.
Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet, C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.
: 7 i Sky CLovben} | | = arr
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In Tentus. [5 ,9°| 3 a 3
ae, | (SE + Mean os D mea a] see = 4 = a se
pres- |relative| Dew anal S = ze
“ sure of [humid-| point. | General uae ajaig 52 Z as €4 a5 DAY.
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.}| Mean. | Max. Min. VETO) | ae direction. |in miles! © ss oD) a ef | a8
perhour} = | im a n z
t| 68.12] 79.0 56.7 22.3 29.9192 | 30.060 29.816 3278 48.0 47-2 S.W. ean 5-7 | 10 5 7o i *r' Soa aae os 1
2 62.82 76.0 50.5 25-5 29.8852 30. 106 29.952 3913 67.7 51.5 S.W. 7-7 | 10|| 2 43 0.01 - 0.0L 2
Ri 153027) 64.0 42.3 21.7 30.1250 | 30.196 30.048 2425 58.3 39-2 N, 2.2| 6| of 92 aod 3
4$ 56-92] 638 59.8 13.0 29-9747 30.051 29.919 3922 84.3 52.2 Ss. 6.3 || 10}} of 9° 0.10 0.10 | 4
5| 57-93 | 68.0 | 47.3 | 20.7 | 29.9700 | 30 076 29 .806 +3407 | 74.0 | 48.8 E. 5.8 | 10)) 2] 59 | Inap .. |Inap| 5
SUNDA. wee) ore 0), --ea-' || 7578 57.0 18.8 asaaieee teesiee +o oats . mais é S. eceniaemm) -- | 24 0.39 G-40) i (Gs esveveion .. SUNDAY
7| 56.72] 64.5 | 51.8 12.7 | 29.5170 | 29.601 29.436 3378 72.0 47-5 S.W. 7-0} 10) of 58 | 0.45 oe | 0-45.47
8 | 54.62 | 63.4 49.0 14.4 29,6655 | 29.775 29.623 2473 58.0 49.0 S.W. 3-7 | 10)) of 49 0.02 eee | 9.02] 8
9 53-23 | 60.8 45-1 T57 29.9947 30.212 29.835 2473 61.0 39.8 S.W. 5-5 aa of 52 Inap . |Inap| 9
Ta) 53.25 | O209 41.1 20.2 30.2643 | 30.353 30.130 2405 59-3 39.0 E, 1.3| 4] of 98 oe + | 10
11 55-85 64.5 49.0 15.5 20.1293 30.284 30.002 2702 60.8 42.0 S.W, 27.0 4.0] 10| o 55 0.12 of oe me 6 4
12 | 58.02] 68.0 46.9 21.1 30.2260 | 39.372 30.c40 2508 52.7 40.2 S.W, 22.7 2.0 a | ° 83 ee ig cami} 22
SUNDAY cisiec « ik Le aioite 63.6 44.8 19.1 deletes Rieter od 5 err, Ae N.W. 24.2 ei .. 1 90 p AY, 6 IZ svecves ¢sSUNDAY¥
14| 47.52 | 59.0 37-7 27.3) 30.1518 | 30.269 30.030 1285 39-3 24.0 N.W. 2.0] 10) of 99 Risin - mee ee
15 | 52.08 | 64.5 38.6 25-9 29.9305 | 30.069 29.837 1593 42.0 28.0 N.W. 0.0| 0) of 99 sees vee | 15
16 | 56.30] 68.0 47-0 21.0 29.8022 | 29.890 29.726 2423 52.2 38.8 N.W, 4.0] 10) o 98 ach 7 alate 16
17 | 58.45 | 69-5 | 47-0 | 22-5 29.7333 | 29-799 29 664 2547 53-8 40-7 N. 92] 10) 5} 2 Pe lec) | We 7
18 | 56.62{ 635 53-7 98 29.6332 29.681 29.592 4118 89.7 53-0 S. 10.9 | 10 | zo J 00 0.57 . 0.57 | 18
19 | 57-83 | 64.8 52-7 12.1 29.7507 | 29.889 29.647 4502 93-7 56.2 N.E, Io.0 | 10 | 104 00 0.12 0.12 | 19
SUNDAY .,.....20 cone, |) (eine 54-0 15.1 SBCpEOD | sotmad seemes on tees S60 S.E, sesitaeen| «. | 59 Sptic ewe | eee | 20 cecseeee . SUNDAY
21] 58.63] 68.1 47-5 20.6 30.2465 | 30.301 39.199 2875 59-3 44.0 E. 6.7] 10, of 96 cee rae a ae
22| 59.47| 70-5 46.0 24.5 30.0773 | 30.211 29.940 2582 52.8 41.0 S. : 5.8| 10] of 83 aise coce See Pe
23 | 61.55 | 68.3 54.2 14.6 29.8990 | 29.963 29 865 3793 69.5 51-5 N.E A 9-3) 10), 5] 36 Inap se aeo || Dap eas
24 | 58.32] 69.0 51.8 17.2 29.7605 | 29.846 29.609 4100 83.2 53-3 N.E 1304 97|10| 8] 16 0 09 0.09 | 24
a5 | 53-55 | 56.2 50 I 6.1 29.7168 | 29.772 29.665 3252 80.2 47.0 N.E. 21.7 [| 10.0 | 10 | 10 J 00 O.51 0.58 | 25
26| 56.82] 66.5 48.0 18.5 29.8340 | 29,884 29.790 3398 74.8 48.3 N. 5 7-7| 10), of 68 vee F eee | 26
SUNDAY is cc.e0's6027) ||, vaicees | 71-0 50.6 Chori || sand Ac. || Neoorter - 0 ae So 868 50 oo Sak, eae 14 erie Senet] 7d we piee sires SunDayY
a8 |) 55.57 | 71-0 44.6 26.4 29.7768 | 29.839 29.704 -3927 88 0 51.8 S.E, 83] 10) of oo 0.85 0.85 | 28
29 | 46.53 | 54.2 40.0 14.2 29.8847 | 29 965 29.833 .2367 76.0 38.8 S.W. 6.5 | 10) of 49 0.32 . 0.32 | 29 |
30 | 51.05 59.0 40.8 18.2 30.0048 | 30 036 29.960 -2755 75-3 42.8 S.E. . 6.8|10, of 25 Inap ee Inap | 30
31 | §2.40 | 57-1 49.0 8.1 29.7925 | 29.927 29.633 3342 85 3 48.0 E 5 10.0 | 10 10 J 00 0.18 oe o 18 | 31
SBICO + .«eee»Means| 56.04] 65.92 | 47.91 18.01 J 29.9135 send seeeee . 3030 67.0 44.2 |S. 5014? Ww. (B2i|] << | ; 51-0] 3.73 3573. (SUM Se ceghie suxae °
20 Years means ee ex a Fags a 20 Years means for
for and including 54.42 | 63.69] 45.50] 18.69 | 29.9318 ares -. ae 2833 65.5 satire fee ate 6.3) ..]] 50.2 | 2.94 2.94 | 4 and including this
this month ..... | month, |
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. *Barometer readings reduced to sea-level ana | giving a range of 0.936 inches. Maximum relative |
. : 2 | temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. humidity was 99 on the 18th, 19th, 25th and 30th, i
Direction...-..--|_N. N-E. E. _S.E. pst S.W. | W. | N.W. CatM. § Observed. Minimum relative humidity was 25 on the 13th.
1097 1429 634 733 1160 4255 | 556 1108 t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary. Rain fell on 17 days. |
— —$—$_|___ || Humidity relative, saturation being 10 Auroras were observed on 7th, 13th, & 30th.
Duration in hrs. . I 6 7o 6 20 I 62 2 t : ‘ s
ae ee Ete. Sia (oe) poe | Mee | eat) 13: years only. Fog on 3 days.
Mean velocity...| 12.1 14.4 9.2 10.5 12.1 21,0 17-9 17.9 a greatest rae pete ae Ist ; 4 Thunderstorms on 4 days. d
Greatest mileage in one hour was 44 on the 25th. Resultanthnsl 9.29 dee ee cold was 37.7 on the 14th giying
Greatest velocity in gusts 60 miles per hour, on esultant mileage 2,828. a range of tewperature of 41.3 degrees.
the 7th. Resultant direction, 5. 50}° W. Warmest day was the Ist. Coldest day was the
Total mileage, 10,972 29th. Highest barometer reading was 30.372 on the i
SI 12th; lowest barometer was 29.436 on the 7th,

. * 4 ,
. | Y
= ‘ }
. |
- i '
i
1 i
1 '
1
'
~ —_ — = i
j
+ }

ae a ee
. ; |
ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF JURE, 1894.
Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet, C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.
= i a Sky CLoupny, a WIPE
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In TenTHs. }3,<¢) s =
———$—— — ———— |] —- ——-—__—-1 | Mean es i —_—— S| | —— famed Pe a4 en
pres- {relative ew ; S| as ao 33
DAY. sure of |humid-| point. | \ me = | — Bee 23 Ee DAY.
: . vapour. ity. xeneral |velocityi 3 | S|) e&iuc7) 85 28 eet
Mean.| Max. | Min. |Range.| Mean. | Max. Min. | Range. direction. |in miles} © 2 Ss pd l=
=} = I =] a oS
perhour} = D =
a | —— en sees | ee — OO | |] —- - ——-~ _ ——— —S—
I 50.63 | 55-7 46.3 9-4 29.4633 | 29.548 29.377 -17I 3190 86.7 46.5 S.W. 12.0 8.5 | 10] 1] 00 0, 38 . | 0-38 1
2 53-62 61.0 45.0 16.0 29.5860 29.600 29.567 +033 3210 79-3 46.7 Stee 9.9 10.0 | 10} 10} OF 0.29 0.29
SOND EEE ie ||| O72 50.5 16.7 ceases seeee senes fume Gccne sees one S.W. 5.7) |) -aeenlame 1 43 | 0 25 weve | R625 10S des cata SSD N ET
‘a 54 28 60.0 49.2 10.8 29-6337 29.759 29.506 +253 3008 ine 44.2 Ww, 15-9 5-5 | 10] Of 44 0.01 mate c.0¢ 4
5 50.15 | 60.0 46 8 13.2 29.7362 29 789 29.661 128 +2947 81.5 44-7 W. 7-7 8.3] 10] of 36 0,28 AAS 0. 28 5
6] 49.78 | 56.4 45-0 11.4 29.9015 | 29.945 29.845 103 «2305 69.7 40.0 Ww. 13.1 3.8 | 10} of O4 Inap Inap | 6
7 | 55-58] 65.0 44.8 20.2 29.7792 | 29.815 29.742 073 -2502 59-5 40.8 W. 10.2 1.3) 3 Of 72 Aas Lee cies | i 7
8 53.62 63.8 44.8 24.0 29.9177 29.940 29.885 +055 -3262 66.8 47.0 Ww. 19.0 5.0] 10] of 68 Tore eevee tee 8 z
9g | 63-23 | 71-4 53-4 18.0 29.9810 | 30.029 29.897 +132 +3830 67.3 51.5 Ww, 18.1 5.0] 10} of 33 Bone . wee 9
SUNDIAwSa see erexO: | eee or 79-4 56.6 22.8 sosrastebe | etee se are - dale ao meine Ste sek 3 25.9 I) ocsrecell ete 58 feet Shas. | senda] Obst eee SOD Ae
11 72.80 | 84.0 64.8 19.2 29.9567 | 29.983 29.926 057 +5405 68.3 61.2 S.W. 232 5.8] 10] of 32 resi Ce es ee
12 60.65 73.0 55-6 17-4 30.0347 32.090 30 CII -079 -4350 82 3 55-2 N. Toeey 8 3] 10} of 09 Inap Sate Inap | 12
13 | 64.63] 75 8 59.4 25.4 30.1625 | 39.190 30.124 -066 -3635 62.7 50.3 N. 9.8 5-5] 10} Of 49 sieve * vee cose | 13
14| 63.65 79.6 55 0 24.6 30.1362 30.213 30.048 165 4832 70.3 57.8 S.W. 14.3 2.5 | 10] of 28 ee ee aaret (OX
15 | 73.48 | 83.0 62.0 21.0 29.9600 | 30.052 29 goo 152 5777 cio lega 62.8 S.W. 2200 4.3 | Io} Of 41 oe atch eee coe | 15 |
16 | 76.97 | 84.6 68.0 16.6 29.8232 | 29.889 29.763 126 6813 73.2 67-7 S.W. 235 0.0 Ij of} 34 rept pee oaaie EO :
SUNDAY .......17 aan 83.4 64.0 T04° eset eee Hebemace 4 . an Sieg aster cian ae S.W. 9.2 rio | ace oo 0.06 as ne) AOUOB I AF) se visacaims Sunpvay
18 | 69.47 | 82 4 640 15 4 29.8862 29.916 29.859 +057 . 6140 85.7 64.5 N. 79 Io.0 | 10] 5} 07 0.30 — 0.30 | 18
19 | 66.05 74.6 62.5 120 29.9350 | 29.987 29.899 088 -6062 94-3 64.5 N. Tes 10.0 | 10 | 10} 00 0.22 PAC 0.22 |) 19
20 | 67.93 | 74.0 62.8 11.2 29.9303 | 29.949 29 918 031 5330 85.5 63.2 5.W. 12.4 79| 10) z4 08 0.04 npebia 0.04 | 20
2u 72.87 | 82.0 64.0 18.0 29.9528 | 30.001 29.854 -147 +6158 77-2 65.0 S.W. 8.8 7-3) 0} O;} 31 Oe Arie eee 21 |
22 75 -23 84.8 | 67.0 17.8 29 9105 29.985 29.831 +154 6228 72.0 64.8 S.W. 21.1 23 8 o} 34 aane aie'a's Selale ae
= 23| 74-50| 85.2 68.5 16.7 29.9210 | 30.018 29 863 155 6427 76.2 66 0 S.W. 17.2 5.7 | ram, 9% 10 0 06 PO Wa ee} \
SUNDAY.......- FON eSanee 82.1 60.8 21.3 cite ape All = sinvelatecs Slates Seon Ie eons Sass sions Sree 12.9 |. 3... 08 Tnap stone Tee. Abo Sunpay
25 | 72.60} 84.8 64.2 20.6 29.8982 | 29.962 29,856 - 106 -6423 81.0 66.0 S.W. 19.7 B.7 | rol] 3} 35 ° 30 alee : 25
26 | 73.70 | 826 70.6 12.0 29.8092 | 29.945 29.687 258 7°33 86.5 69.2 >.W. 13.4 7-3 | x08) 7 | 20 1,00 cota 26
27 70.37 76.2 66.5 9-7 29.7482 | 29.808 29.723 035 -6728 9° 7 67.3 5.W. g.8 10 0 | 10] 10% 900 0 94 | a 27 !
28 | 69 45| 77.8 66.0 11.8 29.9787 | 30-011 29.908 103 -4943 63.8 58.7 N, 9-7 37| 10) of} 65 Inap eee 28 :
29 71.12 Bi. 57.0 24.1 29.9480 | 30 or 29.877 -134 -6327 82.7 65.5 y. 117 Sesuom Of 22 | ae | waee : 29
30 | 75.12] 82.2 67.0 15.1 2y 9225 | 29.933 29.913 020 6455 71-5 64.8 S.W. 17.4 0.3] 8] of Oo os . see | 30 |
5 nets vas ohio sve sf mvaeiay MANE the aie dom Regier aeae vod Leena : seas tees vee . !
——S — —_|— -—- — | ——- —|— —_|——_- —— os —} — —| -——}] —-- —— _—|§ —_ | —_— — |J—_ — ——_ -—- — sd ;
of Reales Mencia Means} 65.83 | 75 27| 58.10] 17.16] 29.8805 eerie “ 113 4991 76.2 57-5 id. 62149 W.) 14.49 5-8] -- | -. § 30-2] 4-02 4.02 |Sums .....6-. 500 sees ;
zo ven Leas ea clo LA ne | lo hess |. |. it | 20 Years means for
for and inching ( 64.80 | 73.60 | 56.26 17-34 | 29.go12 I5t - 4324 69.5 ; ms 5 ales : {152-3 3-47 3.47 | (and Oo sie this
this month s ih [Sap ls Ae oeies ull Po tes Lele = bwons
es *Barometer readings reduced to sea-levelanu | giving a range of (1.835 inches. Maximum relative
: - | aaa _ » = . | f 32° B: : humidity was 99 on the 19th and 22nd. Minimum
Direction......-. WN PNB E. SE. | 5. | s.w.| w. | Nw. CaLM. ae of 32° Fahrenheit. | “seltive: Liceul ares Gtein eke eInEaee
ra rR mre | (ome | |S || ea] — fa. |" a served. | : =
i 5 6 : ee | Rain fell on 17 days.
Miles....-.--+-++| 979 156 2am pe _ 838 Se aemeec/o= oe ee t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary. Thandemteras on 6 days
Duration in hrs gr 18 34 39 45 281 174 33 5 { Humidity relative, saturation being 10vu. ‘ os
Mean velocity...| 10.7 8.7 Ge} 12.0 14.2 t7ieit 15.8 11.6 0.0 1 13 years only.
: The greatest heat was 85°2. onthe 23rd; |
Greatest mileage iu one hour was 36 on the 11th.) jesuitant mileage 6,552. the greatesi cold was 44°.8 on the 7th and Sth, |
Greatest velocity in gusts 40 miles per hour, on RB jl 5 4 = 6210 W pixie Tange of temperatuxs of AU emnneee
the lth. ‘esultant direction, 5. 62° W. Warmest day was the 16th. Coldest day was the |
Total mileage, 10,240- 6th. Highest barometer reading was 30.213 on the |
13th; lowest barometer was 29.377 on the lst, |

addressed to Canines REcoRD OF Spe Natural mie
Society, 32 University Street, Montreal. Meee

_ Rejected articles will be returned if desired, and if stamps are
enclosed for that purpose. The editors will not hold themselves aN Re.

responsible for any views expressed by authors, — | Pe As /
Subscribers who fail to receive the Recorp, or who change a
their residences, are requested to notify the Editors accordingly. — | * te
Back Numbers of the REcorD may be obtained of the Editors, | »
at forty cents per number. ai, (ae
Volumes, unbound, may be had as follows: ir girey
Bi

Vou. I.,4 Nos. - . - - - - $1.50 |
Vous. II. & III.,8 Nos.each, - - = - 3.00 per vol. They

The ReEcorp is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers,
or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage
paid, is as follows :

Canada and the United States, - - $3.00
Great Brita = <4 > = Ove a Shas 0

PUBLISHED 4th JULY, 1894.

- ; vit thy N ots .

i Ne * | af ¥

;
akcah Dea THE PROCEEDINGS OF

THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL
‘ AND REPLACING

THE CANADIAN ho nouacee fp) oe
SY
a ; CONTENTS. . i t

N otes on the Bivalve Shells of the Coal-Formation of Nova Scotia. By Sir Woman! ty Hest
4 TORO. AU. UME: coc diee FR cadesn sina wordeltelgh bevedeuees cs ddnemeicih Reeeineiie
_ The Recent Exploration of the iakvaaee Peninsula. By Ausgrr Low, B.A.Sce.....- 135
- Contributions to Canadian Botany. By Jas. M. MACOUN ....0.--seeeeeseeeseceede. 14
Viscometry. By Antony MoGuit, B.A., B. A TU BAIS ROR Satay Hiei) 153
4 Parasitic Protozoa. By W. E. Drerxs, B.A., M.D....... 6. cc eeeseeee sees seen ceesevees 158

RIEU SIGUE AINE: F Bice Ses higiinils blatodde web sone: cy EhAb a Neale ee Blu hail evsmeshs s Mine gen’ dale ae
_ Appendix to Paper on Bivalve Shellg.....++.....0.seeeeceeneeene een oat ¢ Cael ae el
4 Note to Paper on Viscometry ......--:eeeeee eee Re NES es eh itas ote a ea heein hap eee eae
4
J MONTREAL:

, PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.
( LONDON, ENGLAND : BOSTON, MASS.

Cotuins, 157 Great Portlana 8 A. A. Waterman & Co., 36 Bromfield St.
: 1894,

. BPades: ia
, VEG fra hey

_OFFICERS-SESSION 1894-98.

a rs Patron: BY):
CTS tig EXcmLtENoy THE GovarNnor Ga ead oF - Caan, bike
Rs A Hon. President: aah
ee gi" Sm J, Wrutzam Dawson, LLD., F.RS., FRSC
Ht, 4 i President: Bt Rea
ha Wane Dr. T. Westry Mints. } |
i Si Ast Vice-President. ' 5
Nah i JoHN 8. SHEARER.
AS Oa a pet | Vice-Presidents:
_.- Hon, Smnator Murray. | Rey. Ropprt Campsext, D. D.
Bah ete eo. Re, MOLSON. GBHORGH SUMNER.
- §$rr Donaxp A. Smrra, K.C.M.G. > EpGar JUDGE. :
B. J. Harrinerton, Ph.D., F.R.S.C. J. H. Josppu.
. Hon. Justice WuRTELR. \
| Hon. Recording Secretary : Hon. Corresponding Secretary:
R. W. McLacuuan. | Joun W. Sriauine, M.D., Edin, —
Honorary Curator : Honorary Treasurer : i
E. D. WINTLE. | F. W. Ricwarps. ‘
Members of Council:
i Gro. SuMNER, Chairman. j
Frank D. Apams, M.A., Se., Ph. D. JAMES GZARDNER. )
- ALBERT HOLDEN. JOSHPH FORTIER.
Masor L. A. H. Latour, M.A. Hon. J. K. Warp.
Nevil Norton Evans. A. F. Winn.

J. STEVENSON Brown.
Editing and Exchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, M.A.,8c., Ph. D. Chairman.

G.F.Matruew, St. JoHn, N.B. Ray. R. Campspevy, D.D.
oJ. F. Warreaves, Ottawa. Dr. Westey MILts.
i.) B. J. Harereton, B.A., Ph.D., 4 | Nevil Norton Evans.
Sa F.G.S8.
ne hah 4 Library Committee :

Ke E. T. Coampnrs, Chairman.
BN I by LAs) UO, DRAUDRY, CO. BE: JOSHPH F'oRTInR.
a R. W. McLacauan. A. FE. Win.

ah J. F. Hausun. Ng
| Museum Committee :
Hy) E. D. Wintin, Chairman.

A. F. Winn. . J. B. Wiirams.
J. F. Hausen. N. N. Evans.
RRL E. T. CHAMBErs. J. *. Brown.

Rav. R. Campseiy, D.D.
Lecture Committee :
Dr. Wustny Mitis, Chairman.

Rev. Rost. Campsaxy, D.D. Dr. J. W. Streqine.
Pror. JoHN Cox. Ray. W. J. Smyta.
Vury Rav. Dnan CARMICHABL. Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.

House Committee :
Jno. §. SHHPARER, Chairman.
EpGarR JUDGR. | Gro. SUMNER.
Membership Committee :
J. StHvENSON Brown, Chairman:
EDGAR UDGE, | Joun S. SHEARER.
JOSEPH FORTIRR.
Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN

ae

THE

CANADIAN RECORD

OT a Ia Es

VOL. VI. OCTOBER, 1894. NO. 3.

NOTES ON THE BIVALVE SHELLS OF THE COAL-
FORMATION OF Nova SCOTIA.

By Srr Wixi1am Dawson, LL.D., F.R.S.

The abundant occurrence of shells of bivalve mollusks in
the beds associated with coal has long attracted the atten-
tion of collectors on both sides of the Atlantic, and various
opinions have been entertained as to the affinities of these
animals, the nature of their habitat, whether freshwater or
marine, and the manner in which they became associated
with the coal and its accompanying beds. They occur in
extreme abundance in some of the beds of bituminous and
carbonaceous shale and in bituminous limestones, and more
sparingly in argillaceous and arenaceous shales, throughout
the coal-fields of Nova Scotia and Cape Breton, and natur-
ally excited the interest of the writer in his earliest explor-
ations of these beds. It is to be observed also that they
not infrequently occur plentifully in the roof-shales of
beds of coal.

They were noticed in one of my earliest papers on the
coal formation of Nova Scotia in the Journal of the Geo-

9

118 Canadian Record of Science.

logical Society of London in 1853.! In this article I
figured four species of bivalves from the coal-formation of
the South Joggins, but without descriptions. Twoof them,
one the common NVaiadites and another a narrow Anthracomya,
were referred to Modiola. Two others were referred to
Unio. One of these is an Anthracomya of Unio-like form,
The other appears to be a Carbonicola, perhaps C.
angulata. I remarked at the time on the vast abundance
of these shells and their apparently freshwater habitat.
This was the first publication so far as I know of these
fossils from the Nova Scotia coal region.

Tbese shells were further referred to in the first edition
of “ Acadian Geology” in 1855; and in the supplement to
that work issued in 1860, I proposed for them a new generic
name, WVaiadites, and described them in the following terms,
which I quote here, as indicating conclusions which have
to a large extent been verified by subsequent discoveries.

“The so-called Modiole of the coal-measures are still un-
certain as to their affinities. They do not, come within the
characters of the genera Cardinia, Anthracosia, &c., to
which fossils occurring in similar situations in the British
coal-fields have been referred. They are all thin shells,
marked with growth lines, but destitute of other ornamenta-
tion, and, so far as can be observed, without teeth. In so
far as external form is concerned they may all be referred
to the genera Modiola and Anodon. But mere form may
be a very fallacious guide, and [ shall notice what seem to
me to be the distinct specific forms under the provisional
name Naiadites, intending thereby to express my belief that
they are probably allied to the Unionide. They are cer-
tainly distinct from any of the shells of the marine carboni-
ferous limestones, and are never associated with marine
fossils. It is possible that their nearest living analogue is
the Bysso-anodonta of D’Orbigny, from the River Parana.”

At the same time five species were described, and indica-
tions were given as to their local and stratigraphical
distribution. A sixth species was subsequently discovered,

WioleeAx, be oo.

——————————————— ee ee eee

———————— Ee

.

Bivalve Shells of Nova Scotia. M9

and another referred to the same group has since been
found to belong to the genus Anthracosia or Carbonicola.
Before the publication of the second edition of ‘‘ Acadian
Geology ” in 1868, I had sent specimens to my friend, the
late Mr. Salter, of the Geological Survey of Great Britain,
who was at the time studying the British species, and he
described them with some other fossils from Nova Scotia
which | had placed in his hands, in a paper in the Journal
of the Geological Society! with figures of three of the species,
which he referred to his two new genera Anthracoptera
and Anthracomya, then recently established for the British
species. He thus dropped my genus “ Naiadites” and
substituted two other names of later date. I might have
objected to this, but I have made it a rule never to raise
questions of priority or of mere nomenclature, and I felt
quite sure that Salter was not a man to do any injustice,
while I fully recognized his superiority as an authority on
fossils of this kind. There was, however, a more important
point involved, having relation to the whole question of the
conditions of accumulation of coal. Salter held the shells
to be probably marine, and on this ground my name
Naiadites was objectionable to him, while one of his names,
Anthracomya, implied the idea of burrowing creatures allied
to the Mya or sandclam. Now, throughout the whole
thickness of the coal-formation of Nova Scotia, there is an
entire absence of the species of marine mollusks found in
the underlying marine limestones, while the bivalve shells
in question occur almost exclusively in the coal measures
and are not found in the admittedly marine beds. The
question was an important one with reference to the mode
of accumulation of coal, a subject then engaging my atten-
tion ; for though the occurrence of a few exceptional beds
holding marine shells might be explicable as the result of
occasional invasions of the sea on beds usually beyond its
reach, the association of these shells with the beds of coal
was so constant and intimate that if they could be proved
to be marine, a similar conclusion might’ naturally be

1 Vol. XIX, p. 80, 1863.

120 Canadian Record of Science.

reached respecting the coal itself, and even some of the
plants associated with it. I therefore submitted to Mr.
Salter and published in my new edition the following facts,
tending to show that my so-called Naiadites were fresh-
water or estuarine shells.

1. Under the microscope the thicker shells, even those of
the Anthracoptera type which most resemble marine species,
present an internal lamellar and subnacreous layer and a
thin layer of vertical prismatic fibres, covered with a well
developed epidermis in the manner of the shells of the
Unionide or freshwater mussels. |

2. The ligament uniting the valves was external, and
there seem to have been no hinge teeth. The shells were
closed or very slightly open posteriorly, and in some species
there are indications of a byssus or “beard” for attach-
ment. The general aspect is in some species that of
mussels, in others that of Unios or Anodons.

3. I know of no instance of the occurrence of these shells
in the marine limestones or in association with species
known to be marine.

4. The mode of their occurrence precludes the idea that
they were burrowers, and favors the supposition that they
may have been attached by a byssus to floating timber and
to one another.

5. The attachment of shells of spirorbis to the outer sur-
face of many specimens seems to show that they were free
in clear water when living, while the dense piling together
of these shells in some beds almost unmixed with other
material, and their occasional occurrence in patches asso-
sociated with fossil wood, points to the same conclusion.

6. They are associated with fine sediments, vegetable de-
bris, the crusts of minute crustaceans and remains of fishes
more likely to have been inhabitants of fresh or brackish
water than of the sea.

On these grounds, and being unable from the specimens in
my possession to make out evidence of generic distinction, I
continued to use the name Naiadites; using however, Salter’s
names as subgeneric; so as to keep our species in harmony
with those of England as described by the Geological

eee ee ee eee

Bivalve Shells of Nova Scotia. 121

Survey. The matter was left in this form in my edition
of 1868. It seems, however, that in substituting a figure
not perhaps very accurately drawn from a flattened speci-
men, for the figure which Salter had given from an angular
and compressed example, I caused some misunderstanding
as to one of the species, leading to the supposition that
one of those named by Salter was different from that which
I recognized by the same name. The difference was really
in state of preservation with some inaccuracy in drawing
in both cases. I shall give below copies of these imperfect
figures, which however, represent actual appearances which
may mislead collectors, along with a figure carefully copied
from a young specimen less distorted than usual.
Subsequently to 1868, the pressure of other work pro-
vented me from giving any further attention to these shells,
except in collecting such specimens as occurred to me in
my visits to the coal-fields of Nova Scotia, and placing these
in drawers and collecting-boxes along with the older
material. In the autumn of 1892, however. Dr. Wheelton
Hind, F.G.S., who had undertaken a thorough revision of
the specimens of this kind in English collections, was so

kind as to invite me to place in his hands for study and

comparison specimens of the species I haddescribed. Un-
fortunately his letter arrived at a time when I was in-
capacitated by severe illness from attending to the matter,
and was unable to avail myself of his kindness until after
the publication of his paper on the British species in 1893.
As soon as possible, however, a suite of specimens was sent
to him, along with a note on their mode of occurrence and
distribution, and the result was a joint paper which appears
in the Journal of the Geological Society for August, 1894,
on which the following statements are based.

On examination and comparison with British specimens,
some of which are much better preserved than ours, Hind
concludes that my seven species, excluding one which he
believes belongs to the genus Carbonicola of McCoy, Anthra-
cosia of King, are referable to two genera which may be
named WVaiadites (Anthracoptera of Salter) and Anthracomya
of Salter. The first may be regarded as a member of the

122 Canadian Record of Science.

family Mytilide or mussels, the second as allied to Anodons
in the family of the Unionide or freshwater mussels, as
they are sometimes called.

Mr. Wheelton Hind gives the characters of the genera in
full. For these characters reference may be made to his
paper’; but for the benefit of collectors, the following sum-
mary of the more important external points may be in-
serted here.

Genus, NAIADITES, Dawson.
(Anthracoptera, Salter.)

Shell Modiola-like, somewhat triangular in form, broad
and rounded behind, somewhat pointed in front, beak at
anterior extremity, almost terminal, and extending obliquely
backward in a more or less pronounced ridge, hinge-line
straight, sometimes showing delicate internal striz, teeth
rudimentary ; epidermis somewhat wrinkled, surface with
concentric lamelle and lines of growth. A few specimens
showing the interior indicate thatthe hinge-plate was finely
striated, and that there was a trifid anterior muscular scar
and a larger single posterior one.

1. Naiadites carbonarius, Dawson.

Figures 1 to 3.—Naiadites carbonarius, Middle Coal-formation,
S. Joggins. 1 and 2.—Original figures from imperfect specimens,
3.-—More perfect specimen, enlarged x 2.

1 Journal of Geological Society, May, 1893.

3° a oa =e -ar *.

Bivalve Shells of Nova Scotia. 128

Journal of Geological Society, Vol. X, 1853; Supplement to Acadian
Geology, 1860, p. 43; Salter, Journal of Geological Society
(Anthracoptera), Vol. XIX, 1863, p. 79; Acadian Geology, 2nd
Edition, 1868, p. 204; Wheelton Hind, Journal of Geological
Society, Vol. L, 1894.

This is the most common species of the genus, and is very
abundant in some shales and bituminous limestones of the
coal-formation. So much is this the case, that some thin
beds may be said to be made up of these shells, which
though somewhat strong, are often much compressed and
distorted, so that it is often very difficult to obtain perfect
examples. In‘beds where they are less plentiful they are
usually much flattened, by which the general outline of the
shell is greatly modified. Owing to these circumstances
and also to the fact that the shell is rounder when young
and becomes more angular and elongated with age, it is
difficult to select typical specimens, and hence the pub-
lished figures are very dissimilar, (compare the figures in
my paper of 1853 in ‘Acadian Geology” second edition, in
Salter’s paper of 1863, and in Wheelton Hind’s paper of
1894, or figures 1, 2 and 3 of this paper).

This shell is very near in form to Naiadites modiolaris
(Avicula modiolaris of Sowerby), and also to some forms of
NV. tumida Etheridge, resembling them in some respects so
closely that it is difficult to distinguish some of the Nova
Scotian specimens from these English forms. It is also
near to WV, (Modiola) Wyomingensis Lea, of the Pennsylvania
coal measures. These forms may certainly be regarded as
representative species.

It is not improbable that some of the shells from the
Carboniferous of [llinois and Ohio, which have been referred
to the genus Myalina, belong to this genus, as suggested by
Dr. Hind. Meek and Worthen have also referred a species
from the Keokuk group (Lower Carboniferous) to the genus
Anthracoptera (Naiadites)—A. fragilis M. and W.' White
has described WV. Polita (Anthracoptera polita) from the
coal measures of the West.”

1 Chicago Academy, 1880.
2 U.S. Geological Survey, XII, 1880, p. 166,

124 Canadian Record of Science.

There can be little doubt, from internal markings and
external form as well as from mode of occurrence, that
these shells were anchored by a byssus to floating timber
and to one another, often in great masses, just as the com-
mon mussel is found attached to floating logs in the
estuaries of modern Canadian rivers. Mr. Etheridge has
noticed a group from the coal-formation of Scotland, appar-
ently attached to a stem of a calamite, and Dr. Hind has
noticed the same fact. The specimen is in the collection of
the English Geological Survey.

The specimens in my collections in the Peter Redpath
Museum, are principally from the South Joggins, where
myriads of these shells occur in some of the shales as thickly
packed together as possible. Other specimens are from
Pictou and from Mabou in Cape Breton. They are con-
fined for the most part to the middle portion of the coal-
formation of which they are very characteristic, whereas
the shells of the next genus range in great abundance from
the millstone grit to the newer coal-formation inclusive.

2. Naiadites longus, s. N.

Fig. 4.—Naiadites longus, s. n. Middle Coal-formation, S.
Joggins, enlarged, x 2.

Wheelton Hind, (long variety of N. carbonarius), Journal of Geolo-
gical Society, Vol. L, 1894, p. 440, Pl. XX, Fig. 1.

This shell. which occurs rarely ia beds associated with
those holding the typical VV. carbonarius, is regarded by Dr.
Wheelton Hind as a variety of the preceding. It differs
however, very much in form, and there do not appear to be
intermediate specimens, while it is rare and solitary, and

Bivalve Shells of Nova Scotia. 125

would either seem to have been less gregarious in its habits,
or to be represented by mere stragglers from its proper
locality. It may therefore, be not unreasonably regarded
as a distinct species. Most of the specimens in our collec-
tions are from the South Joggins, but there are some from
Cape Breton. Compare W. triangularis, Sby.

3. Naiadites mytiloides, s. n.

Fig. 5.—Naiadites mytiloides, s. n., Chimney Corner, Cape
Breton, enlarged x 2.

This small and pretty species has more the aspect of
modern mytili than the others, but its internal markings
are unknown. It is narrow in front, with the hinge-line
slightly curved and the shell widening to the rounded
posterior end, where it is regularly curved. The ventral
margin is slightly incurved and flattened in the best pre-
served specimens; but most of the specimens are more or
less crushed. The epidermis is not preserved, and the sur-
face shows only a few concentric growth-lines.

These shells occur abundantly, but for the most part
broken or crushed, in shale from the coal-formation of
Chimney Corner, Cape Breton, collected by a former student
of McGill, Mr. Neighswander. They are nearly uniform in
size, about half an inchinlength. This shell is from one of
the more northern parts of the Cape Breton coal-fields. It
may be compared with Myalina meliniformis, M. & W. from
Illinois, also with WV. Carinata, Sby., England.

Genus ANTHRACOMYA, Salter.

Shell transverse ;_ slightly inequivalve ? inequilateral, the
anterior end being small and rounded, the posterior end
rounded and wider. Umbones usually near the anterior
end. Hinge-line straight without teeth ; ligament external ;
indications of a byssal furrow in front in some species ; sur-
face marked with concentric lamellz and ridges of growth.

126 Canadian Record of Science.

Epidermis thick and sometimes wrinkled, especially in
flattened specimens, shell substance usually very thin.

Shells of this genus are more widely distributed, both
locally and in time, in the coal-formation of Nova Scotia,
than those of the previous genus. Shale surfaces are some-
times crowded with them, though they do not so much
enter into the composition of beds of some thickness,
There are several species, varying a good deal in form,
some being nearly circular, while others are much elongated.
There are also two types, one more attenuated and gibbous
in front and therefore assuming a more mytiloid aspect,
(e.g. A. elongata), the other more regularly oval and Unio-
like in form (e.g. A. arenacea). The first type is in some
degree a passage, so far as form is concerned, to the genus
Naiadites. The internal surface is not known.

It is noteworthy that while several of the species range
from the Lower Carboniferous or the millstone grit to the
upper coal measures, the individuals are usually smaller
and more depauperated in the lower beds.

1. Anthracomya elongata, Dawson.

SS

y SR iW
PEA NY
PES Sif yi)
VE pee
Lip

\

Figs. 6, 7, 8.—Anthracomya elongata, Middle Coal-formation,
S. Jogging and Mabou, C. Breton. Fig. 6.—Small specimen ,natural
size and enlarged. Fig. 7.—Large specimen, natural size. Fig. 8.—
Medium specimen with spirorbis attached and anterior end slightly
crushed in. Enlarged x 13.

Bivalve Shells of Nova Scotia. 127

Supplement to Acadian Geology, 1860, p. 43 (as Naiadites) ; Salter,
Journal of Geological Society, Vol. XTX, 1863, p. 79; Acadian
Geology, second edition, 1868, p. 204; Wheelton Hind, Journal
of Geological Society, Vol. LL, 1894.

This species is characterized by an obliquely ovate form
in typical specimens the length being about double the
breadth. The umbones are somewhat elevated and near the
narrower anterior end. The straight hinge-line is somewhat
oblique and a little more than one-third of the length of the
shell. The front margin is slightly sinuated, the posterior
margin regularly rounded. The surface is: smooth and
shining, with concentric lines of growth.

This is by much the most abundant species, and is very
variable in form and size. When aged, it is more elongated
than when immature, and the hinge-line is relatively
shorter and less elevated. It often has shells of spirorbis
attached, and occurs in patches in beds holding vegetable
fragments, ina manner to suggest that it may have been
attached to these.

The collection in the Peter Redpath Museum contains
specimens from various members of the Carboniferous
system, and from the South Joggins, Pictou, Sydney, Glace
Bay, Mabou, Riversdale, Swan Creek and Parrsboro. The

‘shells from the three latter places are from beds low down
in the system, and are of small size. In general form this
shell resembles 4. Williamsoni, W. Hind, of the English coal
measures, but is less elongate.

2. Anthracomya laevis, Dawson.

Fig. 9.—Anthracomya laevis, Middle Coal-formation, 8. Joggins,
natural size, and enlarged.

128 Canadian Record of Science.

Supplement to Acadian Geology, last edition, (as Naiadites) ;
Salter, Journal of Geological Society, last edition; Acadian
Geology, second edition, p. 205; Wheelton Hind, Journal of
Geological Society, 1. ¢. .

This is small, broad-ovate, the small umbo about one-third
of the distance from the anterior end of the straight hinge-
line. To the naked eye the younger shells seem almost
circular. The shell is very thin and the epidermis smooth
and shining, and much wrinkled in flattenea specimens.
This litlle shell has been found in only one bed, a black
shale in the lower part of the Joggins coal-measures near
the upper part of the millstone grit. It resembles A. Scotica
of Great Britain.

3. Anthracomya arenacea, Dawson.
10

Fig. 10.—Anthracomya arenacea, Upper Coal-formation, Pictou,
enlarged x 2.

Supplement to Acadian Geology, last edition; Salter, Journal] of
Geological Society, second edition, p. 205; Wheelton Hind,
Journal of Geological Society, 1. c. |

Shell elliptical, smooth or with very fine concentric lines.
Epidermis thin, in many specimens absent. More than
twice as long as wide. Anterior margin narrowed in front
of beak. Beaks about one-sixth of the length from the an-
terior end. Posterior end somewhat narrowed at extremity.
This species is usually found in gray arenaceous beds of
the upper coal-formation and the millstone grit. It is com-
paratively rare in the middle coal-formation.
All our museum specimens are from Pictou and Sydney.
The species may be compared with A. lanceolata of Great
Britain.

Bivalve Shells of Nova Scotia. 129

4. Anthracomya ovalis, Dawson.
1k

Fig. 11.—Anthracomya ovalis, Lower Carboniferous, Parrsboro,
enlarged x 2.

Supplement to Acadian Geology, 1860; Salter, Journal of Geo-
logical Society, 1]. c., 1863; Acadian Geology, second edition,
p. 205; Wheelton Hind, Journal of Geological Society, 1. ¢.
This species has the general form of the smaller speci-
mens of elongata, but is broader behind and more tumid in
front, so as to be at once distinguishable by the eye. It
occurs sparingly in beds from the millstone grit and lower
Carboniferous to the middle coal-formation.
Our specimens are from the South Joggins, Riversdale
and Parrsboro. It may be compared with A. dolabrata of
England, but is always much smaller.

5. Anthracomya obtenta, Dawson.

Fig. 12,—Anthracomya obtenta, Middle Coal-formation, Mahou,
Cape Breton, natural size.
Acadian Geology, second edition, p. 205, (as A. obtusa, a name
which I find was pre-occupied for a species now included in
this genus. )

_ Fig. 13.—Anthracomya obtenta, Coal-formation, Pictou, restora-
tion of a flattened and imperfect specimen, enlarged x 2.

130 Cunadian Record of Science.

General form rounded, and probably when not changed by
pressure tumid. Anterior end broad and abruptly rounded ;
hinge line straight. Beaks raised and somewhat near the
front; lower and posterior margins broadly rounded, shell
thin, wrinkled when flattened, strongly marked with
growth-lines. |

This species resembles somewhat A. Adamsii var. expansa,
England. It is rare. Our only specimens are from McLel-
lan’s Brook, Pictou, and Mabou, in Cape Breton, and are
mostly flattened, except some very young examples from
the latter place.

In addition to fragments of plants and comminuted
debris of vegetable matter, the beds holding Naiadites,
contain a number of other animal remains, constituting a
peculiar fauna altogether different from that of the lower
carboniferous marine limestone, and also in many respects
distinct from that of the sandstones of the millstone grit
and upper coal formation. This fauna, though not that
which we would expect in fresh-water lakes or streams
under ordinary conditions, seems of such a nature as to be
appropriate to bodies of shallow, fresh or brackish water
loaded with vegetable matter, or to wide and sluggish
creeks traversing the great swamps of the period, and
occasionally widening into lagoons, receiving much fresh
water from the land, and having but little communication
with the open sea. The beds supposed to be thus deposited
are carbonaceous or bituminous shales and laminated,
impure limestones full of earthy matter, and blackened
with bituminous and carbonaceous debris. In addition to
the bivalve shells in question, they contain vast numbers
of minute bivalve crustaceans. (Bairdia and Carbonia) !
Species of Hurypterus, Diplostylus and Anthropalaemon,
representing crustaceans of higher types. Great numbers
of the little Spirorbis carbonarius are also attached to many
of the plants and other fossils. Numerous scales and teeth
of ganoid fishes of the genera Palewoniscus, Rhizodus, &c.,

1 Rupert Jones, London Geological Magazine, August, 1894, p. 269, and June,
1889, p. 356,

Bivalve Shells of Nova Scotia. 131

also occur, and teeth of dipnoid fishes (Ctenodus), also various
species of sharks (Ctenoptychius, Psammodus, Diplodus, &c),
. Some of these sharks must have attained to a considerable
size, and they no doubt found access to the inland waters
by the outlets communicating with the sea, and were
attracted to visit these comparatively impure lagoons by
the abundance of food which they afforded.’ Very rarely
there have been found in these beds bones of amphibians
and shells of pulmonate snails, ( Pupa vetusta, &c.). Animals
of these kinds no doubt haunted the margins of the lagoons
or creeks; but only occasionally left their remains in
deposits accumulating in these places.

We perhaps obtain a glimpse of purer inland waters,
similar to those of modern Canadian lakes, by means of a
remarkable shell, discovered by Mr. Weston, of the Geo-
logical Survey, at the South Joggins in 1893, and which
has been described by Mr. Whiteaves, F.G.S., under the
name Asthenodcnta Westoni.* It resembles in general form
the large pearl-mussel of our modern lakes. (Margaritana
margaritifera Iu.) and some specimens are no less than nine
inches in length, and of somewhat massive thickness
anteriorly. It was found in a sandstone with drift trunks
of trees, and may have come from some distance inland.
Such a shell could scarcely have been a companion of our
little Naiadites or Anthrocomye, and points to more favor-
able conditions for fresh-water molluscan life in lakes or
large streams in the interior of the continent.

Conditions favourable to such mollusks were probably, as
I have elsewhere suggested, more prevalent in the later
HKrian or Devonian than in the Carboniferous. Hence the
occurrence of such large Anodon-like shells as Amnigenia
Cattskillensis, Hall in New York, and Anodon Jukesii in the
Kiltorcan beds in Ireland. The above discovery however now
gives reason to believe in similar conditions as existing in
higher grounds contemporaneously with the great coal
swamps of the low plains of the carboniferous period.

1 Notices of this fauna will be found in Acadian geology, pp. 202 et seq.,
and supplements.

2 Trans. Royal Society of Canada, Section iv, 1893

182 Canadian Record of Science.

The picture presented by the wide swamps and dark
ponds and sluggish streams of the coal-formation period,
with the creatures of low organization by which they were
inhabited, is not an attractive one; but these conditions,
which spread so widely over our continents in the carbon-
iferous period, were those suitable to the accumulation of
the great deposits of coal so essential to us in the present
condition of the world. The animals which form the sub-
ject of the present paper, though of little value or interest
in themselves, give much information as to the conditions
of accumulation of coal, and it is a source of gratification to
the writer of this paper to find that as interpreted by their
Jatest investigator, Dr. Wheelton Hind, they tend to estab-
lish more firmly the conclusions as to the manner of the
production of coal-beds for which he has contended for so
many years, and which are so well illustrated by the
admirable sections of the coal-bearing rocks seen in the
coast-cliffs of Nova Scotia and Cape Breton.

Throughout the thousands of feet of such rocks, con-
stituting the productive coal-measures as exposed in these
sections, | have shown ' that there is an entire absence of
properly marine or oceanic remains; and the accumulations
of sediment and organic matter, and the animal and vege-
table fossils so nbundantly present, all point to the existence
of wide swampy flats, traversed by ditch-like creeks, and
with shallow lakes or lagoons, supporting an exuberant
plant-life. and from time to time inundated. In this
way the beds of coal, underlaid as they are by underclays
with roots, and overlaid by clays and sands containing pros-
trate and drift plants, and associated with beds holding a
fauna appropriate to such conditions, were accumulated
by growth in situ in the manner of modern bogs The
accumulation of successive beds with intervening shales and
sandstones, is due to the gradual or intermittent subsidence
of the areas of deposition under the weight of the sedi-
ments laid down upon them, as we see at the present day
in the deltas of great rivers.

1 Acadian geology, chap. XI.

\
: ‘
u
;

Bivalve Shells.of Nova Scotia. 133

Such were undoubtedly the conditions of coal accumula-
tion; but we must be prepared to admit many exceptional
cases. Vast areas of bog imply great tracts of water-
soaked and inundated ground, filling up with drifted vege-
table muck. They also necessitate such casualities as
bursting of bogs and the floatage of their semi-fluid contents
over large areas, as we find now occasionally occurring in
Ireland and in Florida. To such causes we may attribute
beds of earthy bitamen and of cannel coal, and possibly the
coal containing fish scales which I have described in the
Joggins section ' or the celebrated Jarrow coal in Ireland,
recently so well described by Mr. Bolton ? in which fossil
fishes and batrachians occur imbedded entire in the coal
itself, as if they had been overwhelmed and buried in a tor-
rent of vegetable mud. The Jarrow coal is also, over a
large part of its area, destitute of an underclay or “seating”
as it is called in Ireland, and it thins out in different direc-
tions, as if it had been formed in a limited depression of the
surface. Such beds constitute the exception which illus-
trates if it does not prove the rule, by showing how different
our ordinary coal beds must have been had they been
formed in such special and peculiar ways.

It is further to be observed that while in many places
the coal-formation swamps have been elevated into uplands
and mountains, in other regions they have been depressed
beneath the sea. The island of Cape Breton affords an
excellent example of this. It consists of two broad ridges
of old Paleozoic and Pre-Cambrian rocks with a carbon-
iferous depression in the middle, and belts and patches of
coal-formation beds around its sides, dipping towards the
sea. The soundings show that these coal-formation areas
are continuous under the sea with those of Nova Scotia
proper on the South and Newfoundland on the North, and
that they extend to great distances under the Atlantic to
the Hast and the Gulf of St. Lawrence to the West. Thus
we can imagine Cape Breton in the coal-formation period

1 Acadian Geology, pp. 164, 199.

2 Manchester Transactions, Vol. XXII, Part 16, 1894.
10

134 Canadian Record of Science.

to have consisted of an elevated nucleus of older rocks,
perhaps with interior lakes, while around it stretched a
great level expanse of bogs and lagoons now in great part
submerged. There might thus be a very marked distinc-
tion between the hills, thinly covered perhaps with Ferns
and Pines, with clear fresh-water lakes, and the vast swamps
densely clothed with Sigillaria, Lepidodendra, Calamites
and Cordaites, and with dark bodies of impure water full of
vegetable matter. The faune of these districts might be
equally different. We know little as yet of the upland
fauna; but may hope for more discoveries in this direction,
especially in countries like Nova Scotia and Cape Breton,
where there were elevated districts in the midst of the
areas of coal accumulation. (See Appendix on p. 167.)

THe Recent EXPLORATION OF THE LABRADOR PENINSULA,
By Mr. Ausert P. Low, B. A. So. or tHE GEOLO-
GICAL SURVEY OF CANADA.

In a most interesting paper entitled—‘On some of the
larger unexplored Regions of Canada,” read before the
Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club four years ago, Dr. G. M.
Dawson made the somewhat startling statement, that while
the entire area of the Dominion is computed at 3,470,257
square miles, at least 954,000 square miles, or between one
quarter and one third of the whole, exclusive of the Arctic
Islands lying to the north of the continent, is for all prac-
tical purposes entirely unknown. While a large portion
of the unexplored area lies to the north of the limit of
profitable agriculture, considerable regions situated to the
south of the limit, still await examination. Large districts
again, in which no farmer will ever voluntarily settle, may
afford timber which the world will be glad to get when the
white pine of our nearer forests shall become more nearly
exhausted, while with respect to mineral resources, it is
probable that in the grand aggregate the value of those
which exist in the unexplored regions will be found, area
for area, to be equal to those of the known regions, com-

Exploration of the Labrador Peninsula. 135

paring each particular geological formation with its nearest
representative. On the grounds alone, therefore, of geo-
logical knowledge, and of the discovery and definition of
the reserves of the country in timber and minerals, the
exploration of all these unknown or little-known regions
may be amply justified.

The exploration of the great unknown districts of the
Northern and Western Canada has in the past been carried
out chiefly by the Dominion Geological Survey, which most
useful Department of the public service, in addition to the
very numerous calls made upon it by the more settled
portions of the country, with their many and fast develop-
ing mining industries, has continued from time to time to
send properly equipped exploratory parties into the north-
ern forests and moors and thus gradually building up an
accurate knowledge of the character and resources of many
of these remoter parts of the Dominion, and these explor-
ations, often very difficult and dangerous, have attached to
the staff of the Survey several of the most intrepid and
successful young explorers on the continent.

Since Dr. Dawson’s paper was read, parties have travers-
ed and carefully examined some of the largest and most
desolated of these unexplored portions of the Dominion.
Thus in the summer of 1893, Mr. J. B. Tyrell, of the Geo-
logical Survey, carried a survey over the Barren Grounds
from Lake Athabaska to the west coast of Hudson Bay,
crossing an unknown region much larger than Great
Britain and Ireland combined, and somewhat larger than
Sweden, while Mr. Albert Low, of the same Department,
has just returned from an exploration extending over nearly
two years, in the largest unknown tract of the Dominion,
the interior of the Labrador Peninsula or North-East Terri-
tory, comprising some 289,000 square miles, an area equal
to twice that of Great Britain and Ireland, with the.
addition of an area equal to that of Newfoundland. Mr.
Low has crossed this area from south to north, and from
east to west, and his detailed report when published will
contain the first trustworthy account of this great region,

136 Canadian Record of Science.

which promises to be of very considerable importance on
account of the immense mineral deposits which he has
discovered there. Mr. Low is a graduate of McGill Uni-
versity, and obtained his geological training under Sir
William Dawson. We are glad to be able to present a
brief account of his most successful expedition and of the
chief scientific results of his survey

Mr, A. P. Low and Mr. T. D. V. Eaton left Ottawa in
June, 1893, with instructions, from Dr. Selwyn of the Geo-
logical Survey Department, to explore the head waters of
the Kast Main River, then to cross to the head of the
Koksoak River and descend it to Ungava Bay, where the
party might winter if the conditions proved suitable. The
season of 1894 was tc be spent in an exploration of the
Hamilton River, which flows eastward from the watershed
into Hamilton Inlet on the Atlantic coast.

Having procured the services of four young Indians for
the whole trip and eight others to assist in transporting
the provisions as far as Lake Mistassini, the party left
Lake St. John on the 17th Jiine and proceeded by way of
the Ashouapmouchouan and Chéf rivers to the height of
land, and thence by the Perch River into the southern end
of Lake Mistassini arriving at the Hudson Bay Post there
on the 2nd July. From here only three canoes were used,
and an old Indian engaged as guide, who subsequently
proved quite useless in that capacity, as he had entirely
forgotten the route to Nichicoon, which place he had not
visited since his boyhood. After passing up Lake Mistis-
sini sixty miles to the Rupert River, the north channel of
this stream was descended some fifty miles, and then a
portage route through a number of small lakes was followed
to the East Main River, fifty miles farther northward.
The East Main was then ascended one hundred and fifty
miles to where the route to the Hudson Bay Post of Nichi-
coon branches off from the main river. The route follows
a small branch called Long Portage Creek, for sixty miles,
to a number of large lakes discharging their waters into
this and other small branches of the river.

Exploration of the Labrador Peninsula. 137

Having passed through five of these lakes, the height of
land was crossed, and a branch of the Big River was
followed northward to Nichicoon Lake. Here fortunately
a guide was found who was willing to take the party
to Lake Caniapiscow, on the Koksoak River. The route
here passes through a number of large irregular lakes, in a
north-east direction, for about eighty miles.

From Caniapiscow, the Koksoak River was descended to
Ungava Bay, and the Hudson Bay Post reached on the 27th
of August, and thus the trip across Labrador from south to
north was completed in seventy days.

The conditions at Ungava were not such that the work
of the following year could be carried on advantageously,
and in consequence the Hudson Bay Company’s steamer
was taken to Rigoulette, calling on the way at George
River, Port Burwell, Nakvack and Davis Inlet. From
Rigoulette canoes were again used to the head of Hamilton
Inlet, where Messrs. Low and Katon resolved to winter at
the Hudson Bay Post.

The four Indians were sent up the Hamilton River, with
instructions to go as far as possible before the river became
covered with ice; they succeeded in reaching a point about
one hundred miles above the river’s mouth. Here they
remained until Christmas, when they descended on the ice
to the Post.

On the 19th of Jannary, Mr. Eaton started up the river
with a party of seventeen men, each hauling two hundred
pounds of provisions on a sleigh. He succeeded in ascend-
ing seventy miles, when owing to the lack of snow on the
rough ice in the heavy rapids, he was obliged to cache the
loads and return, A final start was made on the 6th of
March, when the party assisted by eight men, proceeded
inland with more provisions and outfit sufficient for six
months travel.

Arriving at the cache in five days, they continued on
seventy miles farther, until they were stopped by open
water, extending ten miles below Lake Winokaupow. A
second cache was made here, and the whole party returned

138 Canadian Record of Science.

down stream to the first cache for a second load. When
this load and the canoes had been hauled to the foot of the
open water, the loads were put int o canoes, and they
were tracked and poled up to the lake,—a novel and dis-
agreeable mode of travel, with the thermometer standing
a few degrees below zero. From Lake Winokaupow the
extra men were sent home on the Ist of April, and the
party continued on alone, each person hauling four loads
weighing from 250 to 400 lbs. On this account the ground had
to be covered seven times and progress was consequently
slow, so that the Grand Falls were not reached until the
2nd of May. ‘These Falls are probably the highest and
grandest in America. The river here rivals the Ottawa
in volume, and has a total fall of eight hundred feet in
eight miles, with one sheer drop of three hundred feet
where it descends from the table land into a narrow
canyon, with perpendicular rocky walls, through which
it rushes for five or six miles, until it runs out into the
wider and older valley.

On the 19th of May hauling was abandoned, owing to the
rotten state of the ice, and the next ten days were passed
awaiting open water. At the end of that time the river
opened and the party started up it in their canoes, but
experienced considerable danger and difficulty from the
thick ice coming down from the lakes above. Double
loads were made until June 18th, when part of the pro-
- visions were cached at Sandy Lake, where several canoe
routes meet.

The next twenty-five days were spent exploring the
South-west or Ashounipi branch, which was ascended to
near the large lake of that name at its head, passing on the
way through a bewildering network of lakes. Returning
to Sandy Lake, a trip was made to the north-eastward some
seventy-five miles to Michikamow Lake. This lake was
found to be second only to Mistassini, and is over eighty
miles long and thirty miles wide in the broadest part, it is
free from islands, and like ali the lakes and rivers of this
region, abounds with large fish, lake trout, brook trout,

Exploration of the Labrador Peninsula. 1389

land locked salmon, white fish, carp and pike being the
most abundant and important varieties. A large area of
precious Labradorite was found extending over ten miles
along the north shore.

Sandy Lake was again reached and ‘he journey home-
ward commenced on August Ist. The route followed was
by the south-east branch to its head in Attikonak Lake,
there crossing the height of land, the Romaine River was des-
cended nearly two hundred miles, and was left about sixty
miles from the coast by a difficult portage route, which
passes westward through and over a high range of anortho-
site mountains to the St. John River. This stream was
descended to its mouth, and the Hudson Bay post at
Mingan soon after reached. ‘he party then crossed in the
packet schooner to Gaspe, and so reached home after an
absence of sixteen months, during which time they only
once received letters from the outside world.

The scientific results of the exploration may be briefly
summed up as follows :—

Surveys were made of over two thousand miles of rivers
and lakes, including the greater part of the courses of the
East Main, Koksoak or Ungava, and Hamilton rivers; these
previously were only roughly laid down on the maps of
Labrador, from sketches made by Indians. These surveys
will be mapped during the winter, and will add greatly to
the geographical detail of the interior.

The great archean complex of central Labrador was
passed through in several directions, and interesting facts
were secured bearing on the relations of the intrusive
syenites, diorites and anorthosites, to the bedded rocks of
the complex. A collection of nearly two hundred speci-
mens of typical rocks was brought home, including a num-
ber from an immense area of Cambrian rocks, previously
unknown, and found to consist of conglomerates, sandstones,
limestones and shales, generally all highly charged with
iron, and which often occurs as thick beds of hematite
interstratified with the limestones and sandstones in such
quantities as to rival or surpass: the iron fields of the Lake
Superior region of the United States.

140 Canadian Record of Science

Parts of the southern, eastern and western boundaries of
the area were traced, showing that it is over one hundred
miles wide, and extends from near N. Lat. 53. in a north-
westerly direction for over three hundred miles, and prob-
ably continues in that direction to the westward of Ungava
Bay to Hudson Straits, with a total length of over five
hundred miles.

Considerable attention was given to the glacial geology
of the region, and important points were elucidated in
regard to the continental ice cap, such as the position and
extent of the névé grounds, the direction of the ice flow
from the interior, the formation of interglacial lakes, the
amount of continental subsidence and other important facts
of interest to glacial geologists. The northern limit and
distribution of the forest trees were carefully noted, and a
full collection of the plants of the interior made. This
collection, though not containing many species new to
science, is of economic interest from the extension it affords
to the known range and northern limits of the flora of this
part of Labrador.

Collections of birds, bird’s eggs, butterflies and insects
were also made, along with a careful check list of the birds,
animals and fish met with during the exploration. Meter-
ological observations were regularly taken, as weil as notes
on the thickness of ice, and other points of a climatic
nature.

Of course on a hurried trip over such an extensive
territory, no study in detail could be given to any branch of
science, but sufficient material, observations and notes have.
been collected, to give a general and fairly accurate account
of the geology and natural history of a large portion of this
great area of north-eastern Canada, about which little was
previously known.

EL —_—

a Oe

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 141

CONTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN BOTANY.
By Jas. M. Macoun.
LET:

RANUNCULUS ABORTIVUS, L., var. MICRANTHUS, Gray.

Our only specimens of this species are from Quesnelle,
B.C. (John Macoun.)

RANUNCULUS AQUATILIS, L.., var. TRICHOPHYLLUS, Gray.

Cedar Hill, Alberni, and Comox, V. I. (John Macoun.)
Not recorded before from Vancouver Island.

RaANuNcuLus Acris, Linn.

Foot of Devil’s Lake, Rocky Mts.; Griffin Lake, B. C.;
Revelstoke, B. C, (John Macoun.) Not before recorded
west of Manitoba.

RANUNCULUS BULBosts, L.

Revelstoke, B.C. (John Macoun.) Only record west of
Ontario.!

RANUNCULUS CIRCINATUS, Sibth.

hk. aquatilis, L., var. stagnatilis, DC., Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. I., p. 16, Vol. IL., p. 296.

Patterson’s Creek, Ottawa, Ont. (W. Scott.) Wing-
ham, Ont. (J. Morton.) Sturgeon Lake, Nipigon River,
Ont. . (John Macoun.) Not before recorded east of Mani-
toba. ,

RANUNCULUS CyMBALARIA, Pursh.
Departure Bay, V. I.; Courtney River, Comox, V. I.

(John Macoun.) Not before recorded from Vancouver
Island.

Ranuncutus CyMBALARIA, Pursh., var. ALPINUS, Hood.

Minute specimens of this variety were collected by the
Rev. A. Waghorne, in 1891, at Venison Tickle, Labrador,

and on Prince Edward Island, in 1893, by Mr. W. J. Wilson.

Our only other specimens are from Anticosti.

The Geographical limits given in these papers refer to Canada only.

142 Canadian Record of Science.

RANUNCULUS HEDERACEUS, L.

In wet places, Newfoundland, 1891, 1892. (Rev. A.
Waghorne.) Only Canadian station.

RANUNCULUS HYPERBOREUS, Rottb.

Pack’s Harbour and Venison Tickle, Labrador. (Rev. A.
Waghorne.) Specimens collected by Dr. Robert Bell at
Cape Chudleigh, Hudson Strait, and referred to &. pygmeus
(Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I., p. 480), are of this,
species.

Ranuncutus Macountt, Britt., Trans. N. Y. Acad. of Science,
Vol. XIT.,. Novy., 1892.

R. repens, Linn., var. hispidus, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. I, p. 21 in part.

R. hispidus, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IL., p. 298.

This species includes most of our western specimens that
had been referred to &. hispidus Mx. Our herbarium speci-
mens are from Nipigon, Lake Superior; Pheasant Plain,
Cypress Hills, and Crane Lake, Assin.; Red Deer River,
Alberta; Wigwam River, Rocky Mts.; Donald, Columbia
River, B. C.; Sproat, B. C.; Port Haney, B. C.

RANUNCULUS NATANS, C. A. Meyer.
New Westminster, B.C. (John Macoun.) ‘The western
limit of this species in Canada.

KANUNCULUS PYama&uUS, Wahl.
Summit of Mt. Aylmer, Devil’s Lake, Rocky Mts. Alt.
8,300 ft. (John Macoun.) Rare in Canada.

IsoPYRUM BITERNATUM, T. & G.
Not rare in the vicinity of London, Ont. (J. Dearness.)
New to Canada.

CaLTHA PALUSTRIS, L., var. StprRica, Regel.

C. asarifolia, DC.

Luiu Island, mouth of Fraser River, B. C., 1889; Court-
ney River, Comox, Vancouver Island, 1893. (John Macoun.)
Growing in salt marshes at both stations. Leaves reniform-
cordate, with the sinus very obtuse (some leaves without

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 143

sinus). No form of C. palustris before recorded west of
Rocky Mountains.

CoPpTis TRIFOLIA, Salisb.

Damp woods, Mt. Mark, Vancouver Island. Ait. 3,000
ft. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Rocky
Mts.

Coprtis ASPLENIFOLIA, Salisb.

Port Simpson, B.C. (Jas. McHvoy.) In marshes, near
Union Mines, Comox, V. I. (John Macoun.) Not before
recorded from Vancouver Island.

AQUILEGIA BREVISTYLA, Hook.

The following are new stations for this species: Severn
Lake, Keewatin; Fort McMurray, Athabasca River (Jas.
M. Macoun); Fort Good Hope, Mackenzie River (Miss Z.
Taylor); Francis River, lat. 61° (Dr. G. M. Dawson).

De.pHinium AsAcis, L.

Escaped from cultivation and naturalized at Lake Scugog,
Ont. (W. Scott.)

Actma spicaTA, L., var. AaRGUTA, Torrey.

Prof. Macoun describes this as the ‘ British Columbia
form.” We have it also from the Rocky Mountains and
Vancouver Island—Devil’s Lake, Rocky Mts.; Cameron
Lake and vicinity of Victoria, V. I. (John Macoun.) . Prof.
Macoun gives the range of A. alba as from Nova Scotia
“through the wooded country to the Coast Range in Brit-
ish Columbia.” Our most western station for this species
is Nipigon, Lake Superior. Western specimens that were
referred here prove to be the white-berried variety of A.
spicata, var. arguta.

NicgeLLta Damascena, L.

Escaped from cultivation and naturalized along roadsides,
Wingham, Ont. (J. A. Morton.) =
BERBERIS AQUIFOLIUM, Pursh.

Revelstoke and Deer Park, Columbia River, B. C. (John
Macoun.) Eastern limit in Canada.

144 Canadian Record of Science.

PAPAVER SOMNIFERUM, Linn.

Escaped from cultivation and naturalized at Sicamous,
B.C. (John Macoun.) |

EscuscHoLtTziA CALIFORNICA, Cham.
Naturalized and spreading in the vicinity of Victoria,
Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.)

CoRYDALIS @LAucA, Pursh.

Recent explorations have greatly extended the limits of
this species as given by Prof. Macoun (Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. L, p. 36). New stations are: Summerside, Prince
Edward Island; Beaver Creek, Selkirk Mountains, B. C. ;
Revelstoke, B. C.; Griffin Lake, B. C. (John Macoun) ;
Rupert River, N. E. Ter. (Jas. M. Macoun); Kast Main
River, N. H. Ter. (A. Ross); Fort Good Hope, Mackenzie
River (Miss EL. Taylor); north shore of Lake Athabasca,
N. W. T. (Jas. W. Tyrrell).

CoRYDALIS AUREA, Willd., var. OCCIDENTALIS, Gray,

New stations for this plant are: Okonagan Lake, B. C.
(J. McEvoy) ; Kamloops, B. C. (John Macoun); Telegraph
Creek, B. C., lat. 58° (Dr. G. M: Dawson).

NASTURTIUM PALUSTRE, DC., var. OCCIDENTALE, Wat.

Sproat, B. C.; Courtney Village, near Comox, Vancouver
Island. (John Macoun.) References under JV. palustre,
DC., var., in Macoun’s Cat. Can, Plants, Vol. IL., p. 300, go
here.

NASTURTIUM OFFICINALE, R. Br.

In rivulets and pools, Banff, Rocky Mts.; in springs on
Sea’s farm, near Victoria, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.)
Not before recorded west of Ontario.

Nasturtium Inpicum (L.), DC.

Specimens found growing on ballast heaps at Nanaimo,
Vancouver Island, by Prof. Macoun, in 1893, have been
doubtfully referred here by Dr. N. L. Britton. Whatever
this plant may prove to be, it is a species new to Canada.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 145

BARBAREA VULGARIS, R. Br., var. ARcuaTA, Koch.

Finlayson River, lat. 61°. (Dr. Geo. M. Dawson.)
Revelstoke, B.C. (John Macoun.) Most esi aie) and
easterly stations for this variety.

ARABIS CONFINIS, Wat.

Fort Simpson and Peel’s River, Mackenzie River. (Miss
EF. Taylor.) Our most northerly specimens.
ARABIS HUMIFUSA, Var, PUBESCENS, Wat.

North shore of Lake Athabasca, N. W. T., 1893. (J. W.
Tyrrell.) Our only other specimens are from Hudson Bay.

AraBis Lyauiu, Wat.

Prof. Macoun (Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I., p. 487) places the
western limit of this species at the summit of the Selkirk
Mts. More westerly stations are Toad Mt., Kootanie Lake,
B. C., alt. 5,500 ft., and Mt. Queest, Shuswap Lake, B. C.,
alt. 6,000 ft. (Jas. M. Macoun.)

CARDAMINE BrEwERI, Wat.

C. pratensis, L., var. occidentalis, Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. II., p. 601.

In springs and ditches, Goldstream, Victoria, Comox and
Nanaimo, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.) New to
Canada. Specimens of this plant collected by Prof.
Macoun at Nanaimo, in 1887, were called C. pratensis, var.
occidentalis, by Dr. Watson. <A recent comparison of our
specimens with the type at Harvard, by Prof. Macoun,
shows our plant to be C. Breweri.

CARDAMINE PRATENSIS, Linn., var. ANGUSTIFOLIA, Hook.
North shore of Lake Athabasca, N. W. T. (Jas. W.
Tyrrell.)

DRABA NIVALIS, Jacq., var. ELONGATA, Wat.

First collected on the mountains at Kicking Horse Lake
by Prof. Macoun in 1885, and referred to D. stellata, Jacq.
Other stations are Kicking Horse River, Rocky Mts., alt,
4,000 ft., and Roger’s Pass, Selkirk Mts., alt. 5,500 ft., 1890.
(Jas. M. Macoun.) Mountains near Banff, Rocky Moun-
tains, 1891. (John Macoun.)

146 Canadian Record of Science.

SISYMBRIUM ALLIiaRtA, L.

Naturalized along roadsides in Beechwood Cemetery,
Ottawa, Ont,, 1891. (W. Scott.) Only Canadian station
known to us.

SISYMBRIUM OFFICINALE, Scop.

Prof. Macoun (Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I., p. 46) limits the
distribution of this species to Ontario and the eastern pro-
vinces. It has been since found at Sicamous, B. C.; Nel-
son, Kootanie Lake, B. C.; Esquimault and Nanaimo, Van-
couver Island. (John Macoun.)

SISYMBRIUM SINAPISTRUM, Crantz.

First noted in 1885 along the Canadian Pacific Railway
in the Rocky Mountains. It has since become one of the
most troublesome weeds in Manitoba and Assiniboia. Its
western limit, as shown by our specimens, is Roger’s Pass,
Selkirk Mts.. B.C. It is noteworthy that this plant thrives
equally well on the dry prairies and at the summit of the
Selkirk Mountains, where seldom a day passes without rain.

ERYsIMUM ORIENTALE, R. Br.

Collected at Castle Mt., Rocky Mts., in 1885, by Prof.
Macoun, but not recorded, and, in 1891, at the foot of
Devil’s Lake, Rocky Mts. Probably ‘introduced at the
time the Canadian Pacific Railway was being constructed,
and now thoroughly naturalized. Mr. Jas. Fletcher reports
that this plant has become a troublesome weed in many
parts of the North-West.

ERYISIMUM PARVIFLORUM, Nutt.
Rocky fields, Chaudiére, near Ottawa, Ont. (W. Scott.)

Probably introduced from the west in grain. We have no
other record east of Manitoba.

BRASSICA CAMPESTRIS, Linn.

Ottawa, Ont. (Wm. Macoun.) Waste places, Golden,
B. C., and Revelstoke, B. C. (John Macoun.)
BRASSICA CAMPESTRIS, L., var. OLIEFERA, DC.

Waste places, Ottawa, Ont. (W. Scott.)

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 147

BRASSICA SINAPISTRUM, Boiss.

Prof. Macoun gives Ontario as the western limit of
this species. We have now specimens from Fort Walsh,
Alberta; Kananaskis, Rocky Mts.; Sicamous, B. C.; Cedar
Hill, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.)

Brassica Rapa, L.

Escaped from cultivation and naturalized in many parts
of Canada. Not included in Prof. Macoun’s Catalogue.
* Our specimens are from Yarmouth, N. 8.; Kamloops, B.
C.; waste places, North Arm, Burrard Inlet, B. C.; fields
and meadows, Cedar Hill and Beacon Hill, Vancouver
Island; meadows at Comox and on ballast heaps at Na-
naimo, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.)

Brassica ALBA, Gray.

On ballast heaps at Nanaimo, Vancouver island. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Ontario.

BRASSICA NIGRA, Koch.

On ballast and in waste places, Nanaimo, Vancouver
Island. Well naturalized, as it was found in 1887 and 1893.
(John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Ontario.

CaPSELLA DIVARICATA, Wahl.

Northeast coast of Newfoundland. _ (Rev. A. Waghorne.)
Dead Islands, Labrador, 1882 (J A. Allen.) Dry ground,
Kamloops, B.C. (John Macoun.) Our only other speci-
mens are from Spence’s Bridge, B. C.

Lepipium sativum, L.

In cultivated fields near Victoria and at Sooke, Vancou-
ver [sland. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of
Winnipeg, Man.

THLASPI ARVENSE, L.

This weed grows yearly more troublesome throughout
the Northwest. It has now crossed into British Columbia,
being well distributed along the line of the Canadian Pacific
Railway at the summit of the Selkirk Mountains.

148 Canadian Record of Science.

Rapuanus RapHAnistTrRuM, Linn.

Naturalized in fields at Agassiz, B. C., and in waste places
at Hsquimault and Cedar Hill, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun.)

Spresia Oxytropis BELut, Britton, n. sp.

Acaulescent, tufted, loosely villous, with white hairs.
Stipules membranaceous, ovate or oblong, acute or acumin-
ate, imbricated, villous or glabrate, 5-7’ long; leaves
3’-6’ long; leaflets oblong or oblong-lanceolate, subacute
at the apex, rounded at the base, 3’-£” long, 1-2” wide;
in verticils of three or four; peduncles about eq ualling the
leaves; inflorescence capitate; pods oblong, erect-spreading,
densely pubescent, with black hairs or some longer whitish
ones intermixed, about 9” long and 3” in diameter, about
three times as long as the black-pubescent calyx, very
nearly or quite two-celled by the intrusion of the ventral
suture, their tips erect; corolla not seen.

Digges’ Island, Hudson Bay (A. Bell, 1884); Chester-
field Inlet, Hudson Bay (J. W. Tyrrell, 1893). Types in
the herbarium of the Geological Survey of Canada.

The only other North American species thus far described
with verticillate leaflets is S. splendens, with which the one
here proposed has but little affinity. There are, however,
a number of northern Asiatic species sharing this charac-
ter, but Iam unable to refer the Hudson Bay plant to any
of them. (WN. L. Britton.)

Crercis CANADENSIS, L.

Pelee Island, Lake Hrie. (John Macoun.) One tree of
this species was pointed out to Prof. Macoun in 1892. An
old resident remembered having seen this tree in his boy-
hood, but knew of no other on the island. It grows close
beside the lake, and is doubtless indigenous.

MyYRI0OPHYLLUM ALTERNIFOLIUM, DC,

Brigham’s Creek, near Hull, Que., 1891. (W. Scott.)
The only other Canadian station is Lake Memphramagog,
Que.

_ a ai a i i tl

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 149

PEUCEDANUM BICOLOR, Wat.
Hillsides at Sproat, Columbia River, B. C., 1890. (John

_ Macoun.) New to Canada.

PEUCEDANUM AMBIGUUM, Nutt.

Hillsides at Deer Park, Columbia River, B. C. (John
Macoun.) Eastern limit in Canada.

LINN#ZA BOREALIS, Gronov., var. LONGIFLORA, Torr.

In woods on both sides of Lower Arrow Lake, Columbia
River, B. C., 1890. (John Macoun.) First record from
interior of British Columbia.

LoNICERA C#RULEA, Linn.
Vicinity of Wingham, Ont. (J. A. Morton.) Our only

record for Ontario east of Lake Superior.

ASTER PTARMICOIDES, Torr. & Gray, var. LUTESCENS, Gr.

Dry prairies, Indian Head, Assiniboia, 1893. (CF. G.
Marwood.) Not collected since 1872, when it was found by
Prof. Macoun in the Touchwood Hills, N. W. T.

ANTENNARIA LUZULOIDES, Torr. & Gray.

Common on the hills behind Deer Park, Columbia River,
B. C., 1890. (John Macoun.) Rare in Canada.

LEpAcHYsS COLUMNARIS, Pursh,

Skead’s Mills, near Ottawa, Ont. (W. Scott.) A com-
mon prairie plant introduced from the west by the Canadian
Pacific Railway.

ARNICA CORDIFOLIA, Hook., var. ERADIATA, Gray.
In woods, Little Shuswap Lake, B. C., 1889; Deer Park,

Columbia River, B. C., 1890. (John Macoun.) New to
Canada.

Lactuca scarioua, L.

Naturalized along the bank of the Niagara River and in
waste places at Niagara, Ont. (&. Cameron.) Abundant
around Windsor and Chatham, Ont., and as far east as
Smith’s Falls, Ont., 1894. (John Macoun.)

11

150 Canadian Record of Sciencé.

VACCINIUM CoRYMBOsUM, Linn., var. PALLIDUM, Gray.

At Stamford and “The Whirlpool,” Niagara River, Ont.,
1891. (John Macoun.) First record west of Nova Scutia.

LINARIA CYMBALARIA, Mill.

Naturalized at Wingham, Ont. (J. A. Morton.) Our
only other station in Canada is St. John, N. B.

LiinariA CANADENSIS, Dumont.

Collected at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, in 1893, by Mr.
Wm. Scott. Not elsewhere known in Canada west of New
Brunswick.

CoNOBEA MULTIFIDA, Benth.

Growing in wet gravel at South Point, Pelee Island, Lake .
Erie, 1892. Not uncommon. (John Macoun.) New to
Canada.

VERONICA CHAM2DRYsS, Linn.

Naturalized at Niagara Falls, Ont. (&.Cameron.) First
record west. of Quebec.

Micromeria Doverasti, Benth.

Along the edge of rocky woods at Hot Springs, Kootanie
Lake, B.C., 1890. (Jas. M. Macoun.) Between Shuswap
Lake and Enderby, B.C., 1891. (Jas. McHvoy. Herb.
No. 1234.)! Not rare on Vancouver Island, but not before
recorded from interior of British Columbia.

PoDOSTEMON CERATOPHYLLUS, Michx.

Very abundant on flat limestone rocks in Brigham’s
Creek, Hull, Que. Collected by Prof. Macoun, Aug. 29th,
1894. Not before collected in Canada.

UrtricA URENS, Linn.

Along the Dallas Road, Beacon Hill, Victoria, Vancouver
Island, 1893. (John Macoun.) First record west of New
Brunswick.

1 Whenever herbarium numbers are given, they are the numbers under which

specimens have been distributed from the herbarium of the Geological Survey
of Canada.

a

*

Contributions to Canadian Botany. P51

SALIX ARBUSCULOIDES, Andr.

Specimens of this rare and little known willow were col-
lected in 1393 by Mr. J. W. Tyrrell on the barren grounds
between Lake Athabasca and Chesterfield Inlet. (Herb.

‘No 1716.) Our only other specimens of this species were

collected by Dr. Richardson.

SALIX BALSAMIFERA, Barratt.

Barren grounds between Lake Athabasca and Chester-
field Inlet, 1893. (J. W. Tyrrell. Herb. No. 1715.) Not
before recorded north of the Saskatchewan.

SaLtix RrcHarpsonti, Hook.

One specimen of this rare willow was collected by Mr.
J. W. Tyrrell at Chesterfield Inlet Hudson Bay, in 1893.
Not before recorded from vicinity of Hudson Bay.

SALIX PHYLLICIFOLIA, Linn.

We have specimens of this willow from several stations
between Lake Athabasca and Chesterfield Inlet, collected
in 1893 by Mr. J. W. Tyrrell, so that it is probably com-
mon throughout that region. Specimens collected in the
vicinity of Hudson Strait by Dr. Robert Bell, and referred
to S. chlorophylla, Andrs., by Prof. Macoun (Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. I., p. 446), are of this species.

LisTERA BOREALIS, Morong, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, Vol.
mee, Ps eels

Stems very delicate, 3’—5’ high, glabrous below, glandular-
pubescent, and with long, silky, scattered hairs among the
inflorescence, sheathed by two obtuse, membranous scales
at the base; roots thickened, somewhat fleshy; leaves
oval, slightly sheathing, obtuse at the apex, 4’-8’” long,
2”_4" broad, entire, bearing on the surface a few silky
hairs, otherwise very glabrous. Raceme two- or three-
flowered. Bracts scarcely 1’ long, much shorter than the
pedicels. Sepals and petals nearly equal, linear, obtuse,
about 2” long, lip 4’’-5” long, 2’ broad at the obtuse apex,
ciliolate above; apical lobes very obtuse, 1” long, the inter-
mediate teoth obsolete; basal lobes }” long, very obtuse.

152 Canadian Record of Science.

Column slightly incurved, 1$" long. Flowers greenish-
yellow, the lip with a purplish middle, and purplish nerves
radiating into the apical lobes. The flowers and column, as
well as the leaves and upper stem, bear the silky hairs
mentioned, some of which are 2” long.

Collected by Miss K. Taylor at Fort Smith, Great si.
River, in 1892.

PHALARIS MINOR, Retz.
On ballast heaps at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun. Herb. No. 323.) New to Canada.

AGROSTIS INFLATA, Scribner, n. sp.

Culms rather stout, 3-5 inches high, branched below.
Sheaths smooth, striate-veined, much exceeding the inter-
nodes, inflated, especially the uppermost, which partially
enelones the short (1-2in.), densely flowered panicle.
Ligule prominent. Leaf-blade flat, 4-2in. long. Spikelet
1% lines long. Empty glumes lanceolate, awn-pointed,
especially the second one, scabrous on the keel. Flowering
glume about half the length of the, empty ones, slender-
awned on the back near the middle, awn exceeding the
glumes, callus minutely hairy on the anterior side.

Described from specimens collected on rocks at Hsqui-
mault, Vancouver Island, by Prof. John Macoun, June 9th,
1893. (Herb. No. 258.) More mature, rather shorter and
stouter specimens, with slightly broader, more striate-
veined sheaths, were collected on rocks at Beacon Hili,
Vancouver Island, August 7th, 1893. (Herb. No. 259.)

Prof. Scribner further writes: “The spikelets in this
grass are very nearly those of Agrostis microphylla, Steud.,
and it may prove to be only a much depressed form of that
species.” But this does not seem to me probable. An
examination of our specimens of A. microphylla from Ore-
gon, Washington, and British Columbia shows nothing like
these plants, with the exception of specimens collected by
Dr. G. M. Dawson on Texada Island, Gulf of Georgia, which
answer well to the description of A. inflata, though a litile
taller.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 153

A VENA STRIGOSA, Schreb.

A weed in cultivated fields near Sooke, Vancouver Island,
1893. (John Macoun. Herb. No. 48.) New to Canada.

Poa TRIVIALIS, L., var. FILICULMIS, Scribner, new var.

Culms smooth, very slender from a creeping rhizome,
radical leaves short, those of the culm 1-2 inches long, a
line wide or less, acute, scabrous; ligule 2 lines long, acute.
Panicle 1-2 inches long, pyramidal. Spikelets two-flowered,
14 lines long, much longer than the pedicels. Empty
glumes very acute, narrow-lanceolate, the first one-nerved
a little shorter than the three-nerved second glume, both
scabrous on the sharp keel. Flowering glume 1} lines
long, acute, distinctly five-nerved, pubescent on the sharp
keel for one-half its length, and with a cobwebby tuft at
base.

In wet meadows at Comox, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macoun. Herb. No. 282.)

VISCOMETRY.
AntHony McGi.t, B.A., B. Sc.,
Assistant Analyst, Inland Revenue Laboratory, Ottawa.

In making determinations of the viscosity of cylinder
oils, I have been in the habit of using an improvised instru-
ment made by jacketing an ordinary 50 cc. pipette. The
pipette is conveniently filled by connecting its upper end
to a suction pump (Bunsen’s), and a series of readings can
be very rapidly made at about 208° F. to 210° F., using
free steam. In order to obtain concordant results, it is
necessary to cut off the lower tube of the pipette very
short, and to allow it to protrude beyond the cork in the
lower end of the steam jacket but a very little way. I
have found it practicable to run a cylinder oil at 208° to
210° Fah., averaging 49 sec. for 25 cc. in ten successive
experiments, the greatest deviation from this average being
less than 2 seconds.

This is a better result than I have been able to get with

154 Canadian Record of Science.

Dr. Lepenau’s Leptometer (described in Schcedler’s ‘‘ Unter-
suchungen der Fette, u.s.w.”, Leipzig, 1890, pp. 68-69),
using the same oil in both of the cups. In spite of very
careful workmanship, this instrument is so complicated
that exact results are all but impossible with it; and the
interchangeable nozzles, even if made strictly alike, will
give different rates of delivery unless, in adjusting them,
they be placed so that the planes in which they are bent
are made absolutely parallel; a condition very difficult to
fulfil in working with the instrument. |

At the best, the Leptometer has no advantage over the
simple apparatus first described, since it desiderates the
employment of a standard sample of oil.

The only instrument claiming to do away with the
necessity of a standard sample, with which I am acquainted,
is Redwood’s Viscometer, and my experience with it has
been unsatisfactory and disappointing. A full description
of the instrument will be found in Allen’s ‘Commercial
Organic Analysis,” vol. IT., pp. 198, 199.

In a series of nine experiments, I got results at 200° F.,
varying from 114 sec. to 155 sec., and no two alike, (50 ce.
of oil used.) At 250° F., the readings varied from 87 sec.
to 99 sec., and in all these trials the utmost care was taken
to secure uniform conditions. On considering the construc-
tion of the instrument, one finds many things which serve
to explain these very discrepant results. The inner cup
only contains 85 cc. of oil at the beginning of the test.
This oil is in contact below with a thick plate of copper,
the oil on one side of this plate being at a temperature of
200° F. or 250° F., while the air of the laboratory, on the
other side of the plate, is at 60° or 70°. Of course a very
rapid lowering of the temperature of the oil results. Fur-
ther, the upper surface of the oil is in contact with the air
directly, and is losing heat rapidly throughout the time of
the experiment, and this in a varying degree, since every
current of air in the laboratory affects it. The agate
tubulure is imbedded in the copper bottom of the cup, and
its temperature can never be that of the oil in the middle

Viscometry. 155

of the cup. Since all but 35 ce. of the oil is run out at each
experiment, the rate of flow is constantly changing from
the decreasing effect of gravity, and this change is com-
plicated by the thickening due to cooling, a varying and a
very important function of the rate of flow. Finally, the
tubulure being placed at the lowest point of the cup, is
sure to be obstructed by any particles of dust present in the
oil. Unless the oil in the cup be constantly agitated during
the time of the experiment—a condition inconsistent with
trustworthy work—it will be found that a sensitive ther-
mometer slowly raised and lowered in the oil cup will
indicate strata of varying temperatures at the bottom,
middle, and top of the cup, and my own observations have
assured me that while the main mass of oil in the cup may
be at 250° F., that which is passing through the tubulure
is, at least, ten degrees lower than this.

A is a cylindrical vessel of brass, 5 inches in each dimen-
sion; Bis a ae-entering cone, 14 inches high, 1 inch diam.
below and 4 inch at top. Into this are fitted (by ground

156 Canadian Record of Science.

joints) the nozzles C, as sbewn enlarged jin the lower
figure. D is a strip of bent copper to serve asa gauge.
The vertical distance between the points E and F is 24
inches.

In the instrument diagramed in the figure, I have tried to
overcome the objectionable features of the Redwood con-
struction. The copper vessel first used by me is re-
placed by a brass vessel cast in one piece and shaped on
the lathe; its walls are one-quarter of an inch thick, and
its other dimensions as formerly. The large size of the
cup enables it to contain 1,200 cc. of oil at the beginning
of each test, ‘I'he small portion (50 cc.) withdrawn flows
at a practically uniform rate throughout the time that
the experiment lasts, since the large horizontal area of
the vessel makes the variation of rate due to gravity to be
insignificant. The oil is withdrawn from the middle of
the whole quantity contained in the vessel, and although
the outer layers of oil may slightly change their tempera-
ture, the middle portion is sensibly constant during the
time of the test. The tubulure (1 used at first the agate
tube from the Redwood instrument, but now it. is replaced
by nozzles of phosphor-bronze bored to 4, § and # inch
respectively) is not placed at the bottom of the vessel ;
consequently particles of dust, sand, etc., which may be acci-
dentally present, do not interfere with the working.
Finally, the shape of the conical tube carrying the agate
makes it very convenient to insert the necessary flask,
whose neck fitting somewhat closely into the hollow cone
prevents the cooling effect of air currents upon the mouth-
piece, a very important consideration, since they constitute
an unascertainable and, no doubt, a varying factor in the
results obtained with other instruments. I employ a ring
burner in heating the oil, and a wooden spatula for stir-
ring it. It is convenient to use two flasks, so that one
may be draining while the other is in use. In this way a
very large number of experiments may be made, even at
high temperatures, in a short time. The inexpensive char-
acter of the apparatus is in contrast with the complicated

ee a a 2

Viscometry. 157

apparatus of Redwood. I have found the following results
using a cylinder oil :—

Temp. No.of Tests. Max. Min. Mean.
250° F. 11 34.0 sec. 33.0 sec. 33.5 sec.
200° F. 16 45.3 44.5 “ 44.8 ‘

In order to determine the change in the rate of flow due
to lowering of the level, I made series of tests taking, in
each case, three successive portions of 50 ce. The initial
level is always 2} inches above the upper surface of the
nozzle :

1. Temp. 250° F. (means)—

Ist, 50 ce. 2nd, 50 ce. 3rd, 50 ce.
33.5 sec. 34.7 sec. 36.0 sec.
At 200° F.—
44.8 sec. 47.2 sec. 50.6 sec,

The withdrawal of 150 cc. causes the level to fall about
three-eighths of an inch, corresponding to an increase in
time of about 24 seconds at 250° F., and about 55 seconds
at 200° F., a guarantee that any slight error in the adjust-
ment of original level can have but a very trifling effect on
the rate of flow. The following experiments were made
with a sample of glycerine diluted to the density of Red-
wood’s standard rape oil, viz. :—1.226 at 15.5° C.

Redwood’s Viscometer.—The temperature of the laboratory
during these experiments was 68° IF. I attempted to keep
that of the dilute glycerine at 60°, but found this to be
impossible. The following series of seven tests were made
at 59.5° to 61.5° :—

Mazx., 483 sec. Min., 460 sec. Mean., 469.5 see.
With the form of instrument which I have described above,
I found it quite easy to keep the temperature constant to
within 0.5 degree during the time of the experiment :—

No. Expts. Temp. Max. Min. Mean.
5 60.0° F. 313.5 310 311.7 sec.
5 60.5° F. 308 . 4 306 S07 0
7 GE0°. ¥, 305.0 300 30201.
6 70.0° F. 209.0 205 20 Das
4 75 .0° F. 166.0 164 165.0

The above represent consecutive series of tests, and illus-
trate the extremes of experimental error, (See note p. 168.)

158 Canadian Record of Science.

PARASITIC PROTOZOA.
W. E. Denxs, B.A., M.D,

It is not the purpose of the writer to bring forward any
new data in regard to the organisms considered, but merely
to givea somewhat popular summary of three types of Pro-
tozoa which are capable of entailing grave disturbances in
man when they gain access to his tissues. The various
branches of science have multiplied so rapidly in recent
years and the results achieved by the small army of inves-
tigators are so numerous, that it is very difficult to keep
pace even in one department.

When the morbid processes present in man began to
be studied microscopically for their aetiological factors, it
was scarcely anticipated that living organisms were the
prime cause in a great many instances. Such, however, is
the case, and in consequence pathologists unintentionally
became biologists. The fact that the majority of the
results published by the former class of men are to be
found only in Medical and Pathological journals, and the
thought that probably a summary of some of the results
connected with certain forms of Protozoa and their relation
to disease might not be uninteresting to the readers of the
Record, have prompted this paper.

For a long time it has been known that the alimentary
tract of different animals is subject to the presence of para-
sites, some of the stages of which may penetrate the deeper
tissue and there remain until death, in an encysted con-
dition, or in some cases may even cause death by their de-
predations as in Trichinosis. Familiar examples of these
are the Nematoda or round worms of a great many dif-
ferent speeies; the Z’rematoda or flukes, which pass some of
their stages in the intestinal canal and livers of the host
causing the fatal condition in sheep known as the liver rot;
and the Cestoda or tape worms, which require to pass
through two hosts generally before the different phases of
its life cycle are completed. The no less familiar instances
of the different members of Gstridw@ whose larve are found
in the stomach as the botfly, or beneath the epidermal tis-

Parasitic Protozoa. 159

sues as the Hypoderma bovis of the ox might be mentioned,
but the pathological bearing of these is practically insigni-

-ficant when compared to the effects which some of the Pro-

tozoa are capable of producing. The great impetus given
to investigators in morbid processes by Pasteur in his clas-
sical fermentatoin experiments and bacteria discoveries as
causes of diseases, has also resulted in the discovery that
some of the diseases so fatal to the human race are due, not
to bacteria but to Protozoa. Among those more definitely
ascribed to these organisms may be mentioned Dysentery,

’ Malaria and Cancer.

Tropical Dysentery often occurs epidemically and is an
extremely fatal disease. It is usually confined to the Trop-
ics but cases are often met with in temperate regions.
Most of these have contracted the disease in the coun-
tries where it is more or less endemic. The organism caus-
ing it has been termed by Lésch, Ameba Coli; by Council-
man and Lafleur, Amewba Dysenterie. 1t has been described
as ‘A unicellular, protoplasmic, motile organism from ten
to twenty micromillimetres in diameter, consisting of a clear
outer zone ectosarc and a granular inner zone endosare,
containing a nucleus and one or more vacuoles.” It appears
to be taken in drinking water and in the alimentary tract
sets up more or less definite lesions. ‘These consist of cede-
matous and infiltrated areas which soon become necrotic and
slough leaving undermined ulcers which may perforate the
intestinal wall. The amceba has been found constantly
present in the invading wall of the ulcer, of the surround-
ing lymph spaces, or blood vessels. The result of these
lesions is a prolonged and frequently bloody fiux which
may terminate fatally. Sometimes the organism, probably
through the blood or lymph channels gains access to the
liver with the result that necrotic areas and abscesses
form. These may discharge their contents either in the
abdominal or thoracic cavity and are very fatal in their
termination. The abscesses invariably contain large num-
bers of the organisms. What the life history of this crea-
ture is outside of the host is unknown. Its presence in

160 Canadian Record of Science.

the host may be merely one phase of its existence and it is
difficult to state where the other phases are passed. Be-
ing an amoeba it is only reasonable to suppose that it
undergoes conjugation, encystment and sporulation, as do
the other members of the genus whose life histories are
better known, and these may take place in the cells near
the necrotic areas and if so it would ally them closely to
the next two forms to be considered.

Another dicease from which the human race has long
suffered is Malaria. It was not, however, until 1880, that
Laveran, a Frenchman, announced the discovery of a pa-
rasite in the blood of paitents suffering from malarial fever.
A few years later well-known Italian pathologists certified
to the correctness of Laveran’s observations and more re-
cently these have been confirmed the world over.

The red blood cell of man is about the 1-2500th of an
inch in diameter and it is within it that the life phases of
the organism appear to be passed. The different forms
observed may be thus summarized.

1. Inside the red blood cell irregular clear bodies showing
amoeboid movements, occupying a small part or nearly
the whole of the cell. |

2. Colorless bodies containing pigments which appear to
have taken up the whole blood cell or have even become
larger than the original blood cell was.

3. Bodies having a segmented appearance.

4. Bodies broken up into spores. )

5. Crescentric bodies with pigment masses.

6, Actively moving flagellate bodies smaller than the red
blood cell.

Whether all these forms are merely different phases in
the life history of one form or whether they represent two or
more varieties is as vet unknown. It is probable, however,
that there are at least two varieties judging from the clin-
ical history of the disease, which is characterized by de-
finitely recurring chills, at the end of twenty four, forty-
eight, or seventy-two hours. The chills seem to be syn-
cronous with the segmenting stage of the organism as these

Parasitic Protozoa. 161

are invariably present when the chills occur and are found
only at this time.

There may, however, be but one variety and the irregular
recurring chills or their frequency be due to the invasion
of the system at the same time of the organisms in different
stages of development and which in consequence segmented
on successive days. This remains, however, to be proven:
That this organism belongs to the Protozoa and that it will
and does account for all the morbid processes present seems
now to he undoubted. It produces a more or less rapid
destruction of the red cells with a consequent anemia and
abnormal discharge of pigment resulting from their des
truction. This pigment isin part eliminated by the kid-
neys, and in part by the liver in the cells of which large
quantities are invariably present. But what is its form, or
how does it develop apart from the human body ?

Malaria is found in low ,marshy regions characterized by
a luxuriant vegetation,, along low sea coasts, estuaries or
the banks of sluggish streams, in temperate as well as
tropical climes. Moisture seems to be particularly favorable
to its development as it seems more active in spring and
autumn. In those districts where at one time malaria
was very common, but whicl have since been drained and
cultivated it has almost disappeared. It has not, however,
been discovered in the water or soil of these districts and
its mode of life there is as yet a mere matter of speculation.

The other condition referred to as probably due to a
species of Protozoa is cancer. There is no condition more
universal, more fatal, and more dreaded than this, and for
ages some of the greatest thinkers have attempted to give
a rational explanation for its etiology and its treatment.
Unfortunately as yet surgery is the only effective remedy
known and then only in its primary stages. Theory after
theory has been advanced to explain its cause, heredity,
irritation, embryological cell disturbances, etc., but it is
only very recently that a plausible explanation has been
given, and tl is seems to be the result of the labor of several
pathologists who have all reached the same conclusion,

162 Canadian Record of Science.

The question, however, cannot as yet be considered as set-
tled and it will take years of confirmatory observations
before the circumstances and conditions favorable to its
development and destruction are known. The results so far
achieved may be thus summarized :—

All Epitheliomas (the most frequent variety of cancer)
have certain microscopical organisms associated with them
which are more numerous in actively growing malignant
types ; that they pass through amoeboid, resting and sporu-
lation stages ; that they undoubtedly belong to the Protozoa ;
that the irritation, in some way set up by their presence,
causes proliferation in the surrounding cells, which make
up the cancerous mass. The organism is extremely minute,
and makes its appearance first in the nucleus of the grow-
ing cancer cell. It then enlarges and may subdivide several
times. The nueleus is destroyed by it, the nuclear capsule
or caryotheca ruptures and the organism escapes into the
body of the cell. Here it undergoes further development,
encysts and sporulates, and these escaping, invade other
cells and the process is repeated. These are briefly the
results so far obtained and the various observers seem to be
very uniform in their conclusions.

Here then we have three organisms which are parasitic
on man, are similar to each other morphologically and in
the stages which they undergo, but which produce far dif-
ferent effects upon their host and this is because of the dif-
ferent parts invaded. As to the allied nature of the Plas-
modium malarie and the cancer organism there can be little
doubt. As to their relation to Amewba Coli we cannot say,
because we only know the latter as yet in the amcba
stage; the sporulation and encysting condition may yet be
discovered in the cells which are destroyed.

Now the question arises to what group of the Protozoa do
they belong, and to what forms are they most nearly allied.
The Protozoa have been subdivided into two branches,
the Gynomyxa and the Corticata. These are distinguished
by the absence in the former, and the presence in the latter
of a distinct membrane which gives in their dominant phase

Parasitic Protozoa. 163

a more or less uniform shape while in the Gynomyxa the
amceboid phase predominates and the protoplasm of the
cell is naked. Belonging to this Gynomyxa is a form known
as the Protomyxa Aurantiaca discovered by Haeckei on some
Spirula shells off the Canary Islands. In this form the dif-
ferent life phases can be observed. They are the large
amceboid plasmodium, voracious and active which in a
short time surrounds itself with a cell wall. This then be-
comes segmented and spores result which are covered by a
sort of chitinous coat, and are in consequence called chla-
mydospores. The coat of these soon ruptures and a flagellula
escapes that is an organism possessing a protoplasmic ex-
tension in the form ofa flageJum. This gradually being
converted into an amceba, several of which run together
to form the original plasmodium. So here five stages can be
recognized, a plasmodium, cyst, chlamydospore, flagellula,
and Amoeba. This gives the series of life phases through
which a simple form passes and they can be watched with
comparative ease under the microscope. Belonging to the
corticata is a large group the members of which pass through
a similar series ef stages and which are parasitic. The group
is known as the Sporozoa. They infest the cells of the
alimentary tract principally, of nearly every form of animal,
insects, lobsters, frogs, rabbits, etc. The life history of
them is as follows: A chlamydospore gives rise to one or
more flagellule which in the stage invade the cell of the
host. Here it gradually increases in size and becomes
amoeboid or Englenoid in form having a differentiated
cell wall and nucleus and of a more or less definite shape.
This seems to be the mature condition, soon two of these
fuse together and this is followed by encystment and then
sporulation. The spores, after receiving their chitin-like
coat, are Known as chlamydospores, thus completing the
life cycle. Several forms of these Gregarinidae or Sporozoa
are now known and their analogy to the stages of the Pro- »
teomyxa aurantiaca is obvious. One of this group, tbe
Drepanidium ranarum is parasitic on the frog, and the fla-
gellula or falciform stage is passed in the red blood cor-

164 Canadian Record of Science.

puscle; so here is a perfect analogy. Now compare these
stages with those of the Plasmodium malariz or the Pro-
tozoa of the cancer cell, and it is quite evident that a close
relationship exists. |

It may also be shown yet that the Amba Coli also is a
related form the sporulation and encystment stages of which
have been overlooked. So that here are three forms of Pro-
tozoa, all of which pass through similar life phases, all pro-
duce similar lesions. ‘T'..ese consist of cedema, infiltration,
and followed by necrosis of the cells attacked, but which
produce entirely different symptoms clinically owing to
the different parts invaded. They are closely related to the-
gymnomyxa and the corticata, but more closely to the latter
where they are grouped along with the sporozoa, all of
which are parasitic forms passing through similar life
phases. The Ameba Coli is probably more nearly allied
to Protomyxa aurantiaca because of the predominating ame
buid phase.

THE ANNUAL FIELD Day.

The Annual Field Day of the Society was held this year
on Saturday, June 2nd, and was the largest and most suce-
. cessful outing ever taken by the Society. The place selected
by the committee was Chute aux Lroquois on the River
Rouge, since the arrival of the railway named Labelle, in
honour of the late Cure Labelle of St. Jerome, to whose
untiring efforts directed towards the opening up of this
section of the “ North Country,” its recent advancement is
largely due.

Despite the threatening weather, some five hundred ladies
and gentlemen, including professional men -of science, cler
gymen, men of business—all lovers of nature,—assembled
at the Windsor Street Station of the Canadian Pacific. Rail-
way, where a special train awaited them, and after a short
delay, owing to the necessity of securing extra cars to ac-
commodate the unexpectedly large number of excursionists,
the train left the station shortly after eight o'clock, reach-
ing Labelle, a distance of one hundred and one miles about
12.30 p. m.

Annual Field Day. 165

The scenery along the route was varied and beautiful.
Passing over the great plain of central Canada which ex-
tends as far as St. Jerome, the party at this point entered
the Laurentian highlands, ascending the valley of the
North River. This is at first wide and fertile, but the country
rapidly rises, and at Ste. Adele and St.e Agathe becomes very
hilly and rugged, the latter point being a little over thirteen
hundred feet above sea level. This portion of the country
and on to a point a short distance past St. Faustin is under-
lain by a great mass of intrusive rock which is known as the
Morin Anorthosite, and is, geologically, of the highest in-
terest. From this point the line of the Great Western Rail-
way continues to ascend until the height of land is reached
near St. Haustin ; this is 1520 feet above the St. Lawrence
at Montreal. The North River was here left behind, and
the train descended into the valley of the River Rouge,
which, fiowing south, falls into the Ottawa, opposite the
village of L’Orignal. Running up the valley, Labelle was
soon reached, being situated on the river at a point where
the Rouge having cut its way through the sandy drift which
mantles the country, precipitates itself overa series of high
ledges of the underlying Laurentian gneiss, forming the pic-
turesque Chute aux Iroquois. This is at present the ter-
minus of the railroad. Tracks have, however, been laid
three miles beyond this station, and the promoters of the
railway look to the day when it will reach Lake Nomin-
ingue, and even the upper waters of river Lievre, thus
opening up aregion said to be of great fertility and one
offering great inducement to the sportsman and tourist.

The village of Labelle consists of a saw and grist mill,
a church, two stores, and two hotels, besides a dozen other
houses, and as has becn mentioned is situated on the banks
of the Rouge. The volume of the river here is compara-
ively large and the falls could supply water-power for
several mills. In the centre of the channel, at the head of
the falls, the water is parted by a large rock, which has
been utilized as a pier, for the erection of a bridge. From
this bridge an excellent view of the chute may be had as

12

166 Canadian Record of Science.

the river rvshes in a boiling torrent below. All through
this section of the country are innumerab’e lakes and
streams, and a few miles to the east, from the waters of
Trembling Lake there arises a long ridge known as Trem-
bling Mountain, whose summit is the highest point in the
Laurentians of this part of Canada, rising 2505 feet above
the St. Lawrence at Montreal.

Lunch had been served in the train, and upon the arrival
at Labelle, Botanical, Geslogical and Entomological parties
were organized under their several leaders, Dr. Campbell
and Mr. Cushing having been elected to take charge of the
Botanical party, Dr. Adams, of the geological, while Mr.
Winn acted as leader to the students of Entomology. The
majority of the excursionists, however, preferred to wander
over the beautiful country or climb the neighbouring hills
sketching or photographing.

A very pleasant stay of about four hours was thus made
at Labelle and the party again gathered at the train for the
homeward journey. Before leaving a short address was
made by Mr. J. D. Rolland, President of the Great Western
Railway who had several stories to tell of the settlers and
their success, and concluded by moving a vote of thanks to
My. Blanchard, the Mayor of Labelle, for the preparations
which he had made for the society's reception. Mr. Blan-
chard in responding referred with pride to the produc-
tive character of the country, instancing the neighbouring
parish of Saint Jovite, which has a population of 235 families
in which there are 608 children under four years of age,
while two settlers are the happy fathers of twenty-one
children each !

Short speeches were also made by Dr. Wesley Mills, Mr.
John 8. Shearer, Dr. Bigonnesse of St. Jerome and others.
The society then left for Montreal, tea being served on the
train. Prizes had been offered for the best collections in
Natural History, and were awarded as follows: Geological
collections—named specimens—1st prize, Mr. Arthur Cole,
B.A.; 2nd prize, Mr. J. Gwillim. Unnamed specimens,
Miss Isabel Brittain, B.A. Botanical collection—1st prize,
Miss MacLaughlan.

ee Pe

Appendix. 167

On arriving at Montreal the excursionists paused for a
moment in the Windsor Station, at the request of Dr.
Wesley Mills, to vote their thanks to the authorities of the
Canadian Pacific Railway for the excellent arrangements
which had been made for the convenience of the party, thus
bringing to a close a most delightful excursion.

APPENDIX TO PAPER ON BIVALVE SHELLS OF THE
CoaL FORMATION.
Note on Genus Carbonicola, McCoy. (Anthracosia, King.)

This genus, which occurs abundantly in the Coal Forma-
tion of Great Britain, is represented, so far as known, in
Nova Scotia by only two small species, both from the
lower part of the Coal Formation, or possibly from the
Lower Carboniferous. One of these is C. angulata (Naia-
dites angulata, Acadian Geology, p. 204, fig. 46.) It is
from Parrsboro, from beds holding fossil plants and, so far
as known, no marine shells. The other, C. Bradorica
(Anthracosia Bradorica, Ac. Geol., p. 314, fig. 133 b) is from
a shale supposed to be Lower Carboniferous, at Baddeck,
Cape Breton. The affinities of these shells are at present
uncertain, but will probably be discussed by Dr. Wheelton
Hind in a forthcoming paper. Its associations would seem
to indicate that the habitat of some of the species was simi-
lar to that of the genus Anthracomya, which at Parrsboro
are found in neighboring beds. The figure of ©. Bradorica
is reproduced here to show the characteristic form.

Carbonicola Bradorica.

Note.

The deepest bore-hole in the world is at Paruschowitz,
in Upper Silesia, Germany On May 17, 1893, a depth of
2,000 meters (6,552 feet) was attained, when drilling was
interrupted pending a series of thermometrical observa-

168 Canadian Record of Sctence.

tions, for the carrying out of which the hole is being sunk.
When these observations are completed, drilling will be
resumed and continued as far as possible. The diameter of
the hole at the bottom is 7 cm. (about 2.8 inches). The
rod of the drill is composed of Mannesman tubes, without
which it is doubtful if the present great depth (through
hard rock) could have been reached.

Note To Paprer on VISCOMETRY.
It should be mentioned that the above experiments were
made with my viscometer in its original form, employing
the Redwood nozzle.

ERRATUM.

In Vol. VI., No. 2, p. 91, on top line, for the word
anticlinal read synclinal.

—
a
———__

ABSTRACT FORBBPZHE MONTH OF JULES 189 4.

C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

af pate E
2on| 8 a e.
=25/ 33 ait) | ees
Dae Bc eo a>
Sam) wo =a = D
saa] g? | Ee | 28 as
BY =x tn ‘a
a ee
DH - cos | Ud a nocten woe SURDAT
4 Ooms 0.15 2 |
47 0.89 . | 2-89
Br 0.08 ©.08 :
44 0.01 O,01 5
80 Inap Inap | 6
4t 0,23 va 0.23 7
22 Inap ... |Inap] 8 ..........SUNDA¥
34 0,03 3 ere TENS
3r Inap 4 Inap | 10
5° Inap a Inap | a1
08 0.09 f 0.0) | 12
53 | 0.34 ane) || Oese |ae
49 ace “ eee 14
56 i . 15) accasde sss SUNDAY
83 see | 16
go : 555 oo | 17
76 eee eee | 18
74 < see | IQ
76 ° 13 0.13 | 20
o7 0.34 . 0-34 | 21
98 0 or aSci6 0.08 | a2 ..eeeeee SUNDAY
96 ae 5 secu TE i}
oe) 0.4 0.41 | 23
42 Inap Inap | 25
56 BS Pee)
75 awe 27
35 FP 3
48 0.01 we | 0-02 | 29) weeee. +e. SUNDAY
69 OQ) 1Om | neste 0.10 | 30
Too ae = ar 31
55-7 2.82 ae 2.82 |Sums svaeihe =
20 Years means for
[59-0 vam ee «| and including this
month,

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet
A) 5 Z =
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. in TENTHS
a ne Cl iF Mean oes D a =| ae
pres- relative ew
DAY. sureof fhumid-| point. | General coteae = | eae.
Mean.| Max Min. | Range.| Mean. Max. Min Range. | V?Pour. Le direction. |in miles 3 s 3
perhour} = ain
SUNDAY... at 84.2 67.1 17.1 ei ra : pl yh ee a S.W 15.4 ag
4250 S,W. 5-4 + vale aie
2] 78.28} 89.8 66.4 23-4 29.9267 | 30.000 29.827 -173 6583 63.8 66.5 5.W. 16.0 7.8] 10) ©
3] 68.80] 802 65.0 15.2 29 7513 | 29.811 2) 706 105, +5585 79-7 62.8 S.W. 12.4 7 31 70))en
4] 65-58) 74.2 59-8 14.4 29-7403 | 29.756 29.713 +043 4397 73 0 58.3 S.W. 17.8 25] 7] 0
5 | 62.42] 68.0 55 8 12.2 29.8157 | 29 837 29.770 .o61 4147 74.0 any Ww. Rau 4.3 | 10] o
6] 66.58 | 77.0 52.1 24.9 29.7170 | 29.843 29.611 | 232 - 4643 72.2 57-0 Ww. 12.2 23/10] o
71 60.68 | 674 58.5 8.9 29.7547 | 29.879 29.658 -221 4105 73.7 53-8 Ww. 15.1 9.5 | toy
SuNDAY.........8 see 63.2 52.0 obe2 Srafetal eielsiele Be cioiets aGD we 6 W 15.2 :
9] 63.32] 70.1 55-4 14.7 30,0402 | 30.064 30.022 +042 4203 73.0 54-0 S.W. 13.7 6.2] 10; 0
tof 64.57] 74-5 58.6 15.9 30.0257 | 30.067 29.986 -o81 4403 W2ia 555 WwW 12.7 6.5 | 10] 2
tr] 67.12 | 76.0 56.0 20.0 29.9110 | 29.991 29 835 | 15 5072 Thee 59.2 S.-W. 13.3 6.2 | 10; ©
12] 6857] 74-5 63.1 Il.4 29.7355 | 29.899 29.691 ~208 .6062 87 2 64 5 S.W. 17.0 10.0 | 10 | 10
13] 69.00 799 62.0 17-9 29.6877 29.81 29.587 224 5733 81.0 62.8 S.W. 17-5 8 o | xOu|ieB
14] 67.13 | 75-8 54 4 21.4 29.8373 29 836 29.810 -086 - 4827 73-3 58.0 W.., 60 7-7 || LOMO
SUNDAY ... ... 15 mae 744 59.6 14.8 Resa Hoa alsjac. lee Se cake ADDS S.E, 75 Pe cic!
16} 68.12 78.1 58.< 20.0 30 0957 30.117 30.079 -038 +4318 64.2 55-5 S.W. 4.8 To7, 7\| 0
7] 7257) 83.2 59-5 23-7 30.1282 | 30.166 30.103 | -063 4805 62.8 53.5 S.W. 6.5 3-3 | 8] ©
18] 74 82{ 85.0 620 230 30.0812 30.147 30.013 -I3t -5557 65.5 61.8 S.W. 6.5 3.0. |) Oateo
19 78.83 88 4 69.1 19.3 29.9282 30.000 29.870 +136 -6955 7o 0 63.2 S.W. 12.8 I2 4 °
20 f 77.48} 89-5 67.8 21.7 29.8083 | 29.863 29 738 .125 6402 69.0 65.8 s.W. Pohl 3.8 | 10 | ©
2U 62.40 | 705 57-1 13.4 29.9538 30.093 29.994 -099 438° 7707) 55\ 7 N,E. 14.8 8.3 | 10 | ©
SUNDAY. 2.<-.0% 22 ae 78 1 55-9 22.2 oS oan oty |! teen eae aan “5 F NE 5-2 : |
23] 72.48 | 827 60.6 22.1 30 0517 | 30.094 30.014 .080 +5310 67.8 60.5 S.E. 7-0 0.8 5 | °
24] 61.90| 72.8 58.6 14.2 29.9322 30.039 29.852 187 - 4905 88. 58.3 S.H. 98 10.9 | 10 | 10
25] 68.38) 79.0 59 9 19-1 29-9477 | 32.046 29.894 152 +5297 77-3 60.5 S.W. 13.3 7-7 \ Xone
265 60.47| 68.6 53-6 15.0 30.2322 39.292 30.109 .183 3672 JO 5 50.4 N, 8.6 4 3 | Toute
27] 73.32 | 84.5 56.4 28.1 30 0665 | 30.1F9 29-954 +215 5785 7o 2 62.2 S.W. 12.9 42) Filo
28] 80.18 | 89.0 74-1 14-9 29.8785 29.950 29.802 -143 6468 63.0 66.3 >.W. 225 6.2 | 10] 0
SUNDAY (2. «05 84.3 68 5 15 8 states EO shan mee 3.W 207 a
82.5 62 5 200 29.8573 | 30 010 29 .806 204 “8912 3 sae s. ‘o
ci : .5712 : 62. S.W. 19.0 .o} 10] ©
69.6 M 53-0 16.6 3° 0520 30.100 30.008 -092 - 3562 ae ae S.W, a ; 5 4 °
ace . TEA | Sock gitioe® 29-9214 Sade -134 5136 73.2 59.25 |3. 5314° W.| 12.96 J 5.3 :
zo Years means 7 a= eee leas teu. 2 im
for and includi 63.8: 60. 6.6 :
aoe Ba u ing 2 77-3¢ 0.70 2 “ 29.8923 140 5002 70. Sra “ae 54
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. *Barometer readings reduced to sea-level anu
ee | s = 4 a temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.
Direction........ fon. | NE | & | SE] 8 | Sw. | w. | N.Wy Cam. § Observed.
MEIGS Ty ine - -/atei-1 =O 246 85 526 420 pee | 1967 | 635i t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.
Taranonmnn | Ta Tica | | — — —-- t Humidity relative, saturation being l0u.
Di nimhrs.| 47 | 3 13) | 53 50 353 | 139 52 5 1 13 years only.
Mean velocity...| 10 7 7-7 6.5 9.9 8.4 14.9 | 14.2 Oe a The greatest heat was 89.8° onthe 2nd;

Greatest mileage in one hour was 29 on the 13th. |

and 29th.
Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour, on
the 30th. 2

Resultant mileage, 6465.
Resultant direction, S. 583° W,
Total mileage, 9640.

the greatest cold was 52°.0 on the 8th, giving a
range of temperature of 37°3 degrees.

Warmest day wasthe 28th. Coldest day was the
26th. Highest barometer reading was 30.292 on the

Maximum relative

giving a range of (0.681 inches. rel
Miniwum

humidity was 97.0 on the 3rd and 24th.
relative humidity was 42 on the 16th.
Rain fell on 19 days-
Auroras were observed on 1 night.
Fog on 2 days.
Thunderstorms on 4 days.

26th: lowest barometer was 29.611 on the 6th,

Meteorological Observations,

McGill College Observatory, Montreal,

Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet.

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF AUGUST, 1894.

C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
—_—$ —— — —_—_— —-- —_ | ——- — — —— + Mean
J pres-
DAY. sure of
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.}| Mean. Max. Min. Range. | V2P0Ur-
rf 64.75 | 71.2 57-6 13.6 30.0352 | 30.073 30 002 .O71 - 3633
2] 65.33] 72-5 60.0 22.5 29.8608 | 29.977 29.788 .189 5055
3] 69-43 | 79.3 | 6r.0 | 18.3 | 29-7462 | 29.840 29 666 “174 5197
4! 60.28 | 65.7 56.3 9-4 29.9227 | 30.015 29.839 -176 - 3647
SUNDAV....00.0065 mai 76.7 55-3 21.4 Gots 4 led ae ni swe mee (ita
6] 69.77] 79-4 61.3 18.1 30.0412 | 30.122 29.907 -215 - 4675
7 68.33 78 2 64.1 14.1 29.9479 30.001 29.884 .1t7 4922
8] 67.52 80.6 56.6 24.0 29.8623 | 29.903 29.813 .0go +4807
91 59-07 | 63.6 51.8 16.8 29,9650 | 30.019 29.896 +123 3668
10 60.00 | 68.0 52.4 15.6 30.0720 30.104 30.037 .067 3258
1 60.33 | 68.5 50.5 18.0 30.1497 | 30.213 30. 094 -119 3257
Sunpay........12 a iotetel 69.1 54-2 of |S 5 SOnARG aterale oateie
13] 63.08 | 70.0 58.0 12.0 29.9443 | 30.005 29.912 .093 5148
14] 68.25 | 79-5 59-2 20.3 29.9710 | 30 049 29.888 -161 +5572
15] 64-77| 7o1 59.0 11.1 29.8133 | 29.885 29 744 -141 5335
16 61.80 69.5 53-8 E57, 29.9415 29.982 29 906 .076 3243
17 60 47 69.5 52.2 17.3 30.0270 30.074 30.003 -O71 3040
18] 61.32 69-5 52.0 175 29.9492 29.998 29.906 .092 4348
SUNDAY. 460.019, aides 70.8 52.2 18.6 Bra cteate’e aia ol Micralite Sem (acca
20] 61.30} 71-5 53-0 18.5 29.9272 30.026 29.866 .160 3667
21 §2.15 60.5 49.0 11.5 30.0385 30.082 29.907
a2] =9.68] 73.1 45-0 28.1 29.9940 | 30.068 29.939
23} 66.65] 75-5 58.3 17.2 29 9973 | 30-053 29.953
24 70.73 80.5 63-1 17.4 29.9315 29 989 29 876
25] 68.77 | 77-2 640 13.2 29.8945 29.990 29.851
SunDAY........ 26 64.8 44.8 POvG Ie | Mecare . oan JDOL an Eee | (emacs
27 60.2 45-6 14.6 30.0548 | 30.153 29.928
28 65.8 Band 13.4 29.9992 30.084 29.882
29 64.2 45+9 18.3 30.0540 | 39.115 29.995
30 66 2 53.6 12 6 29.8643 | 29.923 29.827
31 72.6 53-0 29.6 29.8910 | 30.047 29.811

ses fs + eee MCANS) 71-55 | 54-69 16.86 | 29.9591 cael “fe

zo Years means ae,
for and including 75.07] 58.68 56-430) 20.9420 | . .. SMI
this month .....

ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD.

. . | |
Direction....---- N. N.E. E. S.E. 5. 5.W.. we | N.W. CaLm.
Miles.......--.- +] 1139 453 294 592 897 4612 657 1516 a
Duration in hrs. . 99 44 44 63 81 250 | 58 104 mre
Mean velocity...| 11 5 10.3 6.7 9.4 11.1 18.4 | 11.3 14.6 ¥

Greatest mileage in one hour was 35 on the 3rd.

Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour, on
the 24th.

Resultant mileage, 4454.
Resultant direction, S. 623° W.
Total mileage, 10160.

Sky CLoupDk

= e
WIND. In Trntus. |? , > °
Monts i —— — = 228 Be 5.1 a3
relative ew i = 33 a)
humid-| point. | g Mean} . | .| .[822| 46 | 28 | 88 ae
ity. teneral velocity} & a) ede is a Be ES Sa ;
direction. jin miles} © | 5 = |2 3 g- |-5
perhour} = a D a
59.8 50.2 N. 7+7 6. 10} of SI Ina Inap.| 1
79.8 58.8 S.E, 9-7 ae to | of 02 ° e ees 2
71.8 59-5 S.W. 18.6 78|10] 1f 5! Inap Inap.} 3
70.3 50.3 S.W. 20.0 6.7|}10| of 48 hes BEG Vay
meters tits Sows 18 2 ay Roast 79 Sat seus Keegs ors SUR
64.7 57-0 S.W. 19.0 5.0| 10} of 78 ene site é Barty
72-5 58.3 S.W. 15.3 8.0} 10| of 12 Inap ceoe | Mnap:| -F
71.8 | 57.3 S.W,. 13.0 5.5 | 10] of 53 0.02 . | 0.02] 8
74-5 50.3 N. 17.0 6.8 | 10| 34 6° 0.59 0.59] 9
63.3 47-2 N.W. 11.7 Pe | Fil) ae 80 0.01 0,01 | Io
63-3 47-3 S.E, 5.7 65 4| 0 80 naa rc io
sees aletaly S.E. 10.0 - HS 10 0.40 C40) 1 ARG cece wn ..SUNDAY
89.5 60 0 Ss. 6.7 7.2} 10| of oo O,11 0.11 | 13
81.8 62.0 5 8.4 4.3| 10] © 63 + eh ie
86 2 60 7 N.W. 15 5 8.3 | 10| of 12 o 36 0.36 | 15
60.3 47-2 N.W. 12.5 1.8 | 10| of 85 ange mead C4
58.8 45-2 N, 7-4 0o.7| 3] Of 72 =e a a lee)
79-7 54.8 S.W. 10.7 5.8 | 10 | of 06 0,02 0.02 | 18
: |
oe Se N, 8.2 xe ae 44 Inap Inap }ix9 <asveawnes Sunpay
49.8 N.W, 16 4 4.8 | 10 | of 4° 0,01 0.01 | 20
397 N.W. 20.2 3.0} 7| of 85 ae Pe
48.0 S.W. 24.6 52]|10| of 38 ee eoee . | 22
55-2 S.W. 22.5 3-3 | 10 | of 53 ee fs . 23
59.0 S.W. 212 5 8|10) of 44 = on |
60.0 S.W. 20.4 6.5 | 10] of 89 0.05 0.05 | 25
aerate N, 12.4 vas se go tes | 3 26) 52:08 lorena Sunpay
47-3 ».E, 8.4 7.2| 10} of 22 0.06 | 0,06 | 27
53-7 N.W. 130% 10.9 | 10 | 10 1X stay arr |e
47-5 N. 6.7 75|10| of 38 was a 29
52 7 N.E. 5-7 6.7|10| of 03 ake: ana . 30
53.0 Save 16.1 5.0] 10| of 60 0 05 ne 0.05 | 31
53 24 |S. 6234° W.| 13.7 5-7 «. 47eD 1.80 ey: 2.80 [Sams .6.scens secnnn -
20 Years means for
5 | alee 54 154-5 ween and including this
month,

*Barometer readings reduced to sea-level anu
temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.

§ Observed.

t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.
t Humidity relative, saturation being 10v.
1 13 years only.

The greatest heat was 80.6° on the Sth; the
greatest cold was 44.8° on the 26th, giving a
range of temperature of 35°3 degrees.

Warmest day wasthe 24th. Coldest day was the
2ist. Highest barometer reading was 30.213 on the

llth; lowest barometer was 29.666 on the 3rd»
giving a range of 0.517 inches. Maximum relative
humidity was 99 onthe ldth. Minimum relative
humidity was 38 on the 17th.
Rain fell on 16 days.
Auroras were observed on
Fog on 5 days.
Earthquake on the 27th.

lnight

f 9 +
on ae ‘ 7 -
r re as re
i rhe] pis: ie
Jy Baatl :
ee ae a
wes ah -~ #2 erm a #: vot

an RE

™“«

regan
Pg

3 or Te Re rte, *

2

-

g
3

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF SEPTEMBER, 1894. :
Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.
Fi Z SKY CLoupkDj_ a es ———
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In Textus. [5 ,¢| maa
|_——$$<<——_— — ———_—— ——--— | — —- —_ —_ —_ —_—— —J] +t Mean |[f Mean — —_ —_ — |—_-—_ saA| = aes
‘ pres- relative] Dew “ue cae a8 53 28
a u : . 1S coed
DAY , r SUIS of pee pints General |velocity} £ | #| ¢ Los = 2 E's zo DAY.
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.}| Mean. Max. Min. Range. i = direction. lin miles} 5 | 2 |= | S42) ‘a7 of | 9a
Ss =e Im <x s
perhour D S
=
1] 59.87] 71.7 44-5 | 27.2 30.0082 | 30.103 29.912 191 +3345 | 64.7 47-3 S.W. 16.4 6.3} 10) of 46 | Inap. ce hap ry oa
SUNMIANs cdarernce2 Nh nia 66.5 52.8 13-7 os atocyl|, AGceeeEe Anag "ee ae a eat ve Siw. 17.4 ofl Ae i) arty, ay wae
© 34 55.02] 63.8 47-9 15.9 30.1868 | 30 253 30.102 151 3268 75.2 47.2 N. E. 12.1 10.0|10}10§ 24 a > , 3 “+1 pee Re
4] 64-40 | 74.2 51.0 23.2 29.9993 | 30.097 9.910 187 -4837 79 5 57-7 S. 14-3 Bi | 10| of oo 0 15 0.15] 4
5] 68.75] 745 61.2 33.3 29.9808 | 30.069 29.917 +152 5825 er1.8 62.8 S.W, 175 55/10] of 99 010 : o.10] 5
6} 67.10 | 73.6 | 64.0 9 © } 30.0935 | 30.214 30.040 174 -4307 | 64-7 | 54.7 S.W. 12.8 58/10] of 42 Re aa : °
7} 60.70} 648 | 55.2 y-6 | 30.0467 | 30.079 29.948 +131 4135 78.0 53-8 INE, Be 10.5 0.3|10| of 5° mh nae se] 7
8] 58.67] 65.8 477 18.1 29.8913 | 30 070 29.762 308 +4498 83.2 55.2 NSE: 16.8 8.3| 10] of oo 0.29 eee | O-29F 8
SUNDAY sae: OVP = <lclee. || 7807, 61.8 13.9 SAS aod | coe osagge nate eae : ater Ww, 140 . eee 61 0.01 0.01 cae
to} 63.75 | 75.4 54-3 21 x 29,6583 | 29.816 29.532 -284 4935 81.0 57-7 SW. 20.2 6.7| 10] of 62 0.22 Sova [Oram Bs cabin.
11} 54.15 | 61.1 49.0 Troy 29.9617 | 30.139 29.821 +318 -2968 7L.5 447 W. 15.0 2.3| 8| of 06 Inap Inap.} a
12] 55-52] 63.8 45-2 18.6 30.3582 | 30.436 30. 237 199 3118 70.0 45-5 SW. 9.3 0.0] o/] of 96 A Sri et
13] 60.32] 695 47 0 22.5 30.4943 | 30.626 3° 397 229 «4168 79.2 53-3 S.E, 9-7 6.3] 10} of 52 ‘ PE ici]
14] 58.95 | 62.3 57 0 5.3 30.2672 30 357 30.171 -186 - 4087 93-7 57-2 S.. 11.6 109/10] gf 0 O,11 oir] 14
15] 62.85 | 704 56.9 13.5 30.0783 | 30.106 29 967 -199 -5302 92 3 60 5 S.E, 61 8.5| 10) 3] 29 we 15
Sunpay........16 509 74.3 63.4 TOLQ) \Miwartne - dodge jooeeg AS octue Saad S.W. 13.0 oa ‘ °7 507; eae CLO7 NXOc aos oe Sunpay
271) 632271) 7x23 Bane 18.2 30.0895 | 30.145 30.058 -087 +3997 90.5 52.7 S.W. 7-5 0.8/ 3| of 73 OMY ests os 17
18] 63 72 71-5 559 15.6 30.0618 30.107 30.028 +079 «4412 76.0 55-7 N.E, 62 2.3| 10] o 55 one 3 eooe | 18
1g | 60.92] 67.5 53-6 13.9 30.0063 30.061 29.923 -138 . 4265 79-7 54-2 N, E, 117 Q.2|10/ 5 08 0.04 0.04 | 19
20 60,22 64.9 56.2 8.7 29.7015 29.828 29 560 -268 5000 95.8 59.0 N, E. Ir 2 10.0 | 10 | 10 ep) 1.65 : 1.65 | 20
2rf 64.23 | 91.3 56.1 CRE 29.8810 | 29.933 29.769 -164 +5110 t5.8 59 3 S.W. 15.8 5-8} 10; of 28 0.04 os 0.01 | 21
aa)f| 07.07"), 78.5 57-6 20.9 29.9238 | 29.976 29.860 116 -5273 19.7 60.0 S.W. 15.2 my | 10 | oO 34 se sees os 22
SUNDAY.,....... 2 Pass 74.5 58.9 Oy Ola nner wintaae ~ ee ates 6 once Soe wee Haine S 18.1 - /eeo 42 0.04 lege a O04 SF susuewbes Sunpay
241 54,03.|| O45 48.6 15-5 29.9142 | 30.025 29.746 +279 +3455 82.5 48.8 S.W. 16 4 8.3| 10] of 12 aan SC fee:
25] 45.57 | 51-7 40 0 11.7 30.2878 | 30.449 30.110 339 2473 80.8 39-7 GAs 7.8 67] 10| of oo ioe 25
269 45.38 | 53-2 35-0 18.2 30.4122 | 30.559 30.242 +317 2597 84.5 40.8 S.E, 8.4 0o.8|/ 5| of 12 si 26
27] 54.30] 63.8 40.8 23.0 30.1305 50-213 30.073 140 3147 74-7 40.0 5; PED | 5-8 | 10] o 7° 0,04 27
28} 58.60| 69.2 47-2 22.2 30.0593 | 30.108 30.020 088 3940 81.2 52.2 S. W. 7+4 0.8] 5| of 68 ae 28
29} 63.82 73-4 54.3 19.1 Be ateaece 39.051 29.983 068 . 4667 79-9 56.7 Ss. W. mie 7, O60] oo] o 69 cr 29
SUNDAY....... BON) citeen||| 200.0 48.6 21.0 30.0265 | ...... | Mamas 5296) 1B, Boe wae 5.E, 15.3 Ft of 62 na as Si a Ear SuNDAY
seeeee .eeee+Means}| 59.65 | 68.40] 52.17! 16.22 | 30.0608 Pes nouogs 192 4141 79.6 52 or IS. 314° W.| 12.7 mm | -. |». § 33:6 2.93 Peet 4:43 [SUnI8s.c.cceee nae é
zo Years means Ta ar i> oe es a a, 20 Years means for
for and including 58.52 || 66.64 | 50,81} 15.83 f! 30.0187} ..... | Bimmer -179 3811 75 4 So8 | eee 5.6 } 153-3 “ ves | eeee P$ and including this
this month...... | month,
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. *Barometer readings reduced to sea-levelana | 13th; lowest barometer was 29.532 on the 10th,
| temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. | giving a range of 1.094 inches. Maximum relative
Difection.......| N. | NE. | &. | 8. | 3s. | s.w.| WR Nw.| cam. § Observed. Sremn relative: antl tr Waser Gey Min daca coe
Mil elias | nae, | Loi t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercury. Rain fell) on if days
IVLULES . we tar eeeee 290 1105 152 1017 1462 3914 52 339 <3: ve A = } Ss. ‘
pects Dace! bt Oe Ee |? of { Humidity relative, saturation being 10v. | Auroras were observed on laight
Duration in brs. . 29 95 20 85 124 251 72 38 6 1 13 years only | Fog on 4 days.
Sa) SS SS | SS = | SS |) ——_——----—|_ The greatest heat_was 78.5° on the 22nd; the | Tashinionip dave
Mean velocity...| 10.0 11.6 7-6 12.0 11.8 15.6 11.8 8.9 greatest cold was 35.0° on the 26th, giving a | ‘!82tning on o days,
= range of temperature of 43.5 degrees. Severe thunderstorms on the 8th and 20th,
Greatest mileage in one hour was 32 0n the 2nd. | Resultant mileage, 4254. Warmest day wasthe 5th. Coldest day was the Heavy thunder on 3 days.
Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour, on Resultant direction, §. 313° W. 26th. Highest barometer reading was 30.626 on the Extremely smoky atmosphere on the 2nd.
the 23rd. Total mileage, 9131,

ees = Me

ABSTRACT FORTHE MONTH OF OCTOBER, 894.

Meorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet.

C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

SKY CLuupkKD

THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In TentTHs [5°] = s é
_——_$$ <——$ — ———$ — —-- —_ |] — —_ —_ —_ —_—_ ——_ — -— ] t Mean | fF Mean —_—— — —— ss =) et ee eg
a pret relative! Dew Mace Eire 33 33 |zs
fe i : : D225) + | = .
AY, pure of he avia point. | General |velocity] ¢ | #| ¢]}255| 32 Se eis DAY
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.J Mean. Max. Min. Range. Mv direction. |in miles} © = = sua 3 ee A
perhour} = x = D =
1] 51.90] 55.8 | 49-4 6.4 | 29.8695 | 29.960 | 29.842 148 3023 | 73.0 | 46.2 S.W. 14.6 |} 10.9| 10] 10] 07 | 010 a ie oh ae ee
2} 49-10 | 54.2 44-1 10.1 29.9060 | 29.989 29.817 172 .2283 65.8 38.0 N.W. 9-7 8.7); 10] 3] 46 | Inap. Inap.| 2
3] 53-63 | 62.5 47-8 14-7 29.7818 | 29.946 29.658 -288 +3493 82.8 48.3 E. 14.9 10.0 | 10] 10] 02 ° 36 Bo Ws (ee
4) 58-12] 65.5 52-5 13.9 29.7102 | 29.736 49.673 063 4153 86.3 53-8 S.W, 14.5 7-8 | 10) 29 11 0.04 dé 0.04 | 4
5 | 51-78] 56.5 49-7 6.8 29.5707 | 29.639 29.532 107 3438 89.0 48.5 S.W, 14 2 7-7 | 10 | off oo 0.08 +. | c-08 | 5
6 48.42 56.5 402 0 16.5 29.8920 | 30.085 29 699 - 386 .2428 qXe3 39.0 Ww. 13.9 6.5 | 10] 0 14 ane ma Saree 6
SUNDAY. 2.000007 | -++:+ | 5E-5 39-1 16.0 seees wnaeeie a ace ee cone we Ww. 63 oaee | eam 32 be . re Wn ean ere a3 SuNDAY
8 | 54.57] 62.3 42.6 19.7 || 29.8432 | 30.043 29.685 +358 +3193 75-7 46.7 Ss. 9-5 6.8] 10} of 25 | 0.44 0.44{ 8
9 46.62 55-7 42.0 13.7 29.8255 29 904 29.761 +143 +2393 76.2 39.0 S.W, 11.5 7.3 | 10| Of oo 0.01 0.01 9
to | 44.5 48.3 40.7 76 29.5893 | 29-863 29.353 510 .2760 92.2 42.8 N. 16.2 8.3 | 10] of oo 0.98 ., | 0.98 | 10
Ir 45.32 50 3 43.1 5 Be 29.7099 30.043 29 460 -583 .2498 82.3 40.2 WwW. 15.0 87|10] 6] oo 0.18 5 o 18} ox
12 45 75 52.2 38-1 14.1 30.1505 30.195 30.093 -10z -2247 74.0 37-5 WwW, 66 4 5 | rom) 0 17 Inap. Inap | 12
13 | 47-65 51.6 42.1 9-5 29.7915 | 29-951 29.63% 320 +3083 92.7 45-7 Ss. 3-1 to.0 | 190 | 19 J 09 0.56 0.56 | 13
SUNDAY.... ...14 ieten ia 35-0 16.5 Seaver ieee or - Sed ms fee F Seile Ww. 12.5 -o 00 0.10 Inap. | 9-10 | 14 ..... + SUNDAY
15 | 37-15 | 47-5 34-1 13-4 29.8525 | 29.947 29.664 -283 +1340 60.8 24.8 WwW 290 7-7 20H Xf 00 | oo Inap, | Inap | 15
16 | 43.52 | 47.0 36.2 10.8 29.5242 | 29.827 29. 183 -644 2570 90.5 41.0 SW, 19 7 10 0 | 10/10] 00 | 0.30 -. 030 a6
17 | 46.60] 52.7 40.2 12.5 29.3972 | 29 640 29.174 - 466 - 2268 75-2 37-7 S.W. 25.3 7-2 on, t] x6 | 0.03 seve | 903 | 27
18 | 43 78! 51.3 38.0 13-3 29.9107 | 30.052 29.745 307 1958 70.0 33-5 Ww. 18.3 3.8 | 10] of 6) ae; ome | es
19 | 48.03] 56.9 41.1 15.8 30.0150 | 30.102 29 928 -174 .2605 78.8 41.8 S.W. go 5*7 | 10] OF 54 <5 see | tg
ao | 47-20} 52.3 42.1 10.2 30.0915 | 30.179 29.986 -193 .2827 85.8 43-7 N. EB. 8.3 to.0 | 10 | 10 J 00 0,01 0.01 | 20
SUNDAE. sete c2E il" Sy see 55.5 49.7 14.8 Mires ste SE000 — - re. oe aot, INS E 97 “er te 12 | Inap. Inap)\ oar ec cecasiceen SuNDAY
22 48.50 58.1 40.5 17.6 30.2430 30.270 39 193 -077 -2833 82.2 43-3 ING BE: 6.5 3.0] 10] of 83 | vite see | 22
23) 53-15 | 57-9 48.2 9-7 30-2187 | 30.264 30.176 088 .3400 84.5 48.2 3 o7 10.0] 10| 10] 00 | 0.06 0.06 | 23
24| 50.20] 54 3 48.1 6.2 30.1387 |. 30.261 30.023 238 3268 89.8 47°2 me 2.5 10.0) 10} 19! oo | Inap Iaap | 24
25| 43.90] 56.5 470 9-5 30.2185 | 30.299 30 106 -193 3000 86.7 45 2 N, 733 7-5 | ia) Of x9 | Inap, Inap | 25
20} 48.37 | 55-7 38.2 15-5 29.9858 | 30.091 29.919 172 .2893 85.8 44.0 N. 11.8 4.3 | 10} of 12 | oor 0.01 | 26
27) 5%.12| 58.5 42.6 15-9 29.9,80 | 39.048 29.931 117 .3050 82.2 45 5 N. 7.0 1.7 | 10] of 36 Shaye «| a7
SUNDAY ....... BS Ulb ctecoae 60.3 42.0 KBo3, Ul ie cisteratece, ||| | oeniaiele .. ae toi Ran ms Wak S.W. 41 PA. i 69 | _ «ee WE SB ech im .. SUNDAY
29 | 49-85 | 60.7 41.0 19.7 30.0687 | 30.103 30.036 -067 .2962 83 3 41.2 N. 12.2 1.7| 10] of 72 | Inap, .. | Inap | 29
30 49 43 61.7 38.0 23-7 30. 1002 30-154. 39.050 104 . 2588 715-3 40.8 N. 12.5 aa = 63 | tab es Sereda
3r | 49-77] 53-6 | 47-2 6.4 29.6915 | 29.995 29.375 620 3077 86.0 45-7 Ss. 20.3 8.3] 10] 5] 09 | 077 +s | 0-74 | 31
Means| 48.62] 55.37| 42.30] 1307] 29.8942 ae a 256 2801 80.7 42.57 |S. 6214° W,| 11.8 7.0 ham - 21-4 | 4.03 Inap, | 4-03 |Sums ae
20 Years means a lee = poo: i : | 20 Years means for
for and including 45.56 | 52.57] 38.87] 13.70] 29-9958 211 2455 76 6 wan 65) = -. [40.2] 3.22 1 34 | 3.34 | and including this
this month ..... 8 month,
AN : 25th: lowest barometer was 29.174 on the 17th,
2 ALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. : *Barometer readings cee to sea-level and | J vine a range of 1.125 inches. Maximum relative
ae: l eS a ao ae eee Balizenhelt. humidity was 99 on the Sth, 10th 27th & 20th
Direction........; N. N-E. K. S.E. | 5s. SW. | WwW. | N.W. CALM. | $ Observed. Minimum relative humidity was 47 on the 15th.
Miles ccs 6 we SEG EE Fal |—_-——_——_—_|_ ¢ Pressure of vapour in inches of mereary. Rain fell on 22 days.
c “eee dar eee Ee. eke) hes iee — ve met |__™57 ne a t Humidity relative, saturation being 10u. Snow fell on 2 days.
Duration in hrs..| 108 64 45 5° 89 213 133 13 29 1 13 years only Lunar halos on the 9th and 12th.
a, he = ral wali ae ——— | ——— | —— © ; : the Fog on 3 days.
Vie ee c , 8 The greatest heat was 65.5° on the 4th; th g fj
ma saad ay me ON o ie Bs | “oid ao greates: cold was 34.1° on the J5th, giving a Rainbow on the 16th.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 43 on the 3ist.

Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour, on
the 3let.

range of tewperature of 31.4 degrees.

Resultant mileage, 3575,
Resultant direction, S. 624° W.
Total mileage, 8801.

| Warmest day wasthe 4th. Coldest day was the
15th. Highest barometer reading was 30.299 on the |

iy Pe

es aes
eS at =

ae

, Nee PGs Aa ‘i ;
q A 1. A

gy OS SAN

aR as Re

Ta),
ta, ae Ry,

ire

All communications and . exchanges should be ‘carefully

; addressed to CANADIAN Recorp oF Screncg, Natural Faasegi

‘ Society, 32 University Street, Montreal.

We

Rejected articles will be returned if desired, and if stamps are a

enclosed for that purpose. The editors will not hold themselves |
responsible for any views expressed by authors.

Subscribers who fail to receive the Recorp, or who change

their Ae pacar. are requested to notify the Editors accordingly. —

Back Numbers of the Recorp may be obtained of the Editors,
at forty cents per number. ne
Volumes, unbound, may be had as follows:

Meats TipA Oa ii Mart 2) a) 65) ral $09, 8 BOA e
Vors. I. & IIL.,8 Nos.each, - - + © 3.00 per vol.

The Recorp is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers, i
or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage

paid, is as follows:

Canada and the United States, - - $3.00
Great Britan - - - - - £0130

ISSUED 27th NOVEMBER, 1894.

NOTICES a Be ac

phi §
, tee
r

ss Ch ne aN

¥ , : .

Cae

ey teu a) ‘ WE Nae

Kavu a "NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY 0

ni ii y 7 a [Incorporated 1832.] i! elk)

i aap OFFICERS—SESSION 1894-95,
‘COs aa Patron : Z bi
oe a His EXomutmwoy THE GOVERNOR GENERAL OF CANADA, ey: |
BES hs Hon. President: om

tay A Sm J. Witt1am Dawson, LL.D., F.R.S., F.B.S.C..
i President:

he 1h Dr. T. Westry Mitts.

Heat | [st Vice-President.
pare JoHN §. SHEARER.

Shey Sen ee j Vice-Presidents :
es 3 Hon. Smnator Murpay. . | Rev. Ropprr CAMPBELL, D, D. (\
Lal J. H. R. Motson. GEORGH SUMNER. 4
TO Sm Donaxp A. Smrrs, K.C.M.G. EpGar JUDGE. . q .
i B. J. Harrineton, Ph.D., F.R.S.C. J. H. Josppx. a
Hon. J USTICE WURTELE. }

i, Hon. Recording Secretary : Hon. Corresponding Secretar R

WPL ae R. W. McLacatan. | Jonn W. Sreuine, M.D., Ke a

teal Honorary Curator: — Honorary Treasurer: —
E. D. WINTLE. | F. W. Ricwarps. ty

Members of Council:
Gxo. SumnzEr, Chairman.
Frank D. Apams, M.A., Se., Ph. D. JAMES GARDNER.

ALBERT HoLpEN. JOSHPH FoRTIER. »
Masor L. A. H. Latour, M.A. Hon. J. K. Warp.
Nevil Norton Evans. : A. F. Winn.

J. STEVENSON Brown.
Editing and Exchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, M.A.,8c., Ph. D. Chairman.

G.F.Marrupw, Sr. Joun, N.B. Ray. R. Campseryt, D.D.
J. F. Wurreavss, Ottawa. Dr. Wastey Mitts.
B. J. Harrineron, B.A., Ph.D., ae | Nevil Norton Evans.
Library Committee :
E. T. Coampmrs, Chairman.
J. A. U. Braupry, C.E. JospPH FoRTIER.
R. W. McLacauan. A. F. Winn.

J. F. Havspn.
Museum Committee :
E. D. Wintip, Chairman.
J. B. WILirAMs.
N. N. Evans.
J. S. Brown.
Ray. R. Camppaty, D.D.
Lecture Committee :
Dr. Westny Mitts, Chairman.
Rev. Rost. Campsegt, D.D. Dr. J. W. Streine.
Pror. JoHN Cox. Ray. W. J. Smyra.
Very Rav. Dpan CARMICHAEL. Dr. B. J. HarRIneTon.
House Committee :
Jno. S. SHpARER, Chairman.
EDGAR JUDGE. | Gxo. SUMNER.
Membership Committee :
J. Stpvenson Brown, Chairman:
EpGAR JUDGE. | Joun S. SHEARER.
JOSEPH FORTIER.
Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN

Fe a ST SS ep IS $
a ere Se ees a ee See ee Me a ae See ee eta ee eee eS os: a Ba ea nae ee ee _
———————————— SSS ee SaaS aos ees SSS SSS SSS eee St —— NS SS oe SR mA ees Snel a a ar a es Me
==> == 5s SS SSS SSS ee Saat Seats Son are oes aaa oa oS ae mame eap soso ea Sone SoS eae ee ee ena eee eee
SSS ==:

ree ‘

Zé
5
a

@AP

WW) Laurencian.
YW: Muromian .

of part of the

Sele of Stabe Mller

Shewing Distribution of Anorthosite.

62
vo

” CA
GEO
2

k]
s
i
GULF
OF
x
Pad
é
Nort!
l
Ue
v
ve
%
NX
‘Ge
Pie
ay,

<
\
cS

]

‘
&
“ay

7

BAK 4

@,
ye? oe
aN
-
&,
cf
ha
y)
“
WS
NN
ib:
,
)
NS
If
SS
< \& “
\
< SS
\
\
\
es
ys
\S
CF
7
4
S
\ oe

SEs5

/

e 4, SW h

\F
R
\

54
by
SLAW
N
ISS
WS
S
NY
fy
+
34
2
o
<

f
lf
i

tar Sie teasteat ese ee

THE

i CANADIAN RECORD

OFPCSOLHEN OE.

VOL. VI. OCTOBER, 1894. NO. 4.

On THE NORIAN oR ‘ UPPER LAURENTIAN” ForR-
MATION OF CANADA.!
By Frank D. Apams, M.A.S8c., Pa.D.

(Translated from the German by N. J. Giroux, Esq., C. E., of the
Geological Survey of Canada.)

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

1. General statement concerning the geology of the Laurentian.
2. The Morin anorthosite area.
(a) Stratigraphical relations.
(6) Mineralogical character.
(c) Structure as compared with that of other similar areas.
(d) The anorthosite bands in gneiss.
- (e) Summary of the results obtained in the Morin district.

1 This paper appeared in the Neues Jahrbuch fur Mineralogie in 1893 (Beilage-
band VIII). Asit presents a somewhat exhaustive treatment of a celebrated
series of Canadian rocks, it has been thought advisable to present a translation of
it to Canadian readers. Since the publication of the paper further investigation
has brought to light some few additional facts concerning these rocks, but it has
been thought best to present the paper exactly as it originally appeared, making
any necessary additions to it in the form of occasional foot notes. The editors
of the Record of Science are indebted to Mr. N. J. Giroux, C.E., of the Dominion
Geological Survey, for a literal translation of the paper.

The original paper in German was accompanied by two excellent maps printed
in colours, from which the maps accompanying the present translation are taken.
Those particularly interested in the distribution of these Norian rocks are re-
ferred to the original maps, as in these the relative position of the several areas is
shown with greater clearness.

Correction in Large Map.—Owing to a mistake on the part of the lith-
ographer, the Adirondack Archean area has been represented as Huronian. It

- should have been represented as of Laurentian age, since, with the exception of
the Anorthosite, it consists of rocks of the Grenville series. 12

170 Canadian Record of Science.

3. The Saguenay anorthosite area.
4. Various other anorthosite areas.
(a) In Labrador.
(6) In Newfoundland.
(c) On the north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
(d) On the north shore of the River St. Lawrence.
(e) In the State of New York, U.S. A.
(f) On the east coast of Lake Huron.
(g) Elsewhere in Canada.
. Age of the anorthosite intrusions and their relation to the margin
of the archaean protaxis.
. Occurrence of similar anorthosites in other countries.
. General summary of the results.
. Tables of analyses.
. Literature relating to the anorthosites of Canada.

OL

oo] &

The present paper is based upon a study of the Canadian
anorthosites in the field, a work which was carried out for
the. Geological Survey of Canada and. occupied five sum-
mers, as well as upon the examination of a large number of
thin sections of these rocks and a careful study of all the
literature relating to them.

The petrographical part of the work was done for the
most part in the Mineralogical Institute of the University
of Heidelberg, and I take the liberty of expressing my
hearty thanks to my teacher, Professor Rosenbusch, for his
assistance and advice during the progress of the work.

I am furthermore under special obligations to Dr. A. R.C.
Selwyn, Director of the Geological Survey of Canada, for
permission to make use of material hitherto anpablabed
and which is the property of the Geological Survey Depart-
ment.

I.—GENERAL STATEMENT CONCERNING THE
GEOLOGY OF THE LAURENTIAN,

The nucleus of the North American continent consists, as
is well known, of a large area of Archaean rocks which lie,
for the most part, in the Dominion of Canada, and occupy
an area of not less than 2,031,000 square miles. They form
what Suess’ calls ‘the Canadian shield” as well as the
more mountainous district along the coast of Labrador.

1 Suess, Das Antlitz der Erde, Bd. IL., p. 42.

On the Norian or ‘ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 171

Speaking generally we may say that the southern limit
of this arca extends from Lake Superior in a north-easterly
direction along the Lower St. Lawrence as far as Labrador,
and north-westerly to the mouth of the Mackenzie River on
the Arctic Ocean. North of these limits, as far as the coast
of the Arctic Ocean, almost the whole area is composed of
the old crystalline rocks, and although subordinate areas of
Huronian rocks are found in these enormous tracts of land
by far the greater part belongs to the lower Archaean or
the Laurentian system,

This great rock complex consists principally of orthoclase
gneiss, of nearly every variety, both as regards structure
and composition. In many places these gneisses show only
the most obscure foliation and resemble granite, in other
areas, of great extent, they appear as perfectly stratified as
any Palaeozoic formation and they then lie over great areas
quite flat or in low indulations. A great part of the obscurely

- laminated gneiss is probably eruptive, and in some instances

this has been established beyond doubt. On the other hand,
we have good reason to believe that many of the stratified
portions of the system are,of sedimentary origin.

In certain areas, where the stratified gneiss occurs, we
find in it bedded layers of crystalline limestone, quartzite,
amphibolite and other rocks often of considerable extent.
In such cases, the gneiss itself is usually richer in varieties,
and certain of these varieties almost invariably accompany
the limestone beds. These are chiefly garnetiferons gneiss
and a peculiarsillimanite gneiss which weathers in a re-
markably rusty manner. These gneisses, together with
the accompanying granular limestones, quartzites, &c.,
Logan regarded as a higher division of the Laurentian,
resting conformably upon a lower gneiss, which holds no
limestone or quartzite, and possesses a more uniform char-
acter.! |

He called this upper division ‘The Grenville Series”
after Grenville,” in the Province of Quebec, where it was

1 Logan, Report of the Geol. Survey of Canada 1863, p. 45, and earlier reports of
the Geol. Survey of Canada from 1845-48.
2 Lozan, Rep. of the Geol. Survey of Canada 1863, page 839.

172 Canadian Record of Science.

well developed, while the supposed lower gneiss, on account
of its great development about the head waters of the Ot-
tawa River was known afterwards by the name of “ Ottawa
gneiss.” Asa result of later investigations, in other parts
_of Canada, Vennor came to the conclusion that the higher
division rested unconformably upon the lower gneiss.
Whether therefore we have two distinct and unconformable
series or not is a point which is not as yet conclusively
determined. The facts hitherto collected, however, would
rather indicate that the two are distinct. In the present
essay these two names (Grenville series and Ottawa
gneiss) will be employed to designate these two de-
velopments of the Laurentain respectively, and it
may be here remarked that whether they be con-
formable or* unconformable, considered from the eco-
nomical standpoint, there is a very marked difference
between them. The Grenville division with its crystalline
limestones, quartzite, &c., carries apatite, graphite, iron
ores, mica and in general all the important mineral deposits
of the Laurentian, while the Ottawa gneiss, as far as we at
present know, carries but little in the way of valuable
minerals.

In the Grenville series we find also the earliest traces of
life on our planet, since the undoubted occurrence of larger
as well as smaller limestone beds which so frequently al-
ternate with the gneiss of this series can only be explained —
by organic agencies. The presence of a considerable ad-
mixture of graphite, which in many of these limestones
occurs in a finely dissiminated condition, and is also found
in many cases in the associated gneisses, is a further im-
portant testimony in the same direction. Many of these ~
limestones resemble precisely some of younger age where
these have been metamorphosed by contact with eruptive
rocks. The carbon of the limestone crystallizes as graphite
in these cases, and the clayey substances, take the form of
small scales of mica or grains of other minerals. Veins of
graphite appear likewise, though sparingly, in these Lau-
rentian limestones and correspond to the veins and strings

.

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 173

-of bituminous and carbonaceous substances which we find

filling cracks and fissures in bituminous and carbonaceous

beds in more recent formations. But the chief bulk of the

graphite occurs finely dissiminated through the rocks as
above mentioned.’

It was, however, observed by the geologists who first
worked on these Laurentian rocks that there occur, in many
places together’ with the above mentioned orthoclase
gneisses, &c., great areas of a rock that is principally and
sometimes almost exclusively composed of a triclinic or
plagioclase feldspar. They found that in many places the
structure and the appearance of this rock varied consider-
ably from place to place; it being sometimes massive,
sometimes schistose, sometimes coarse grained, sometimes
fine grained. But all these structural varieties agree in
having the same composition.

For this reason they were all placed tegether in one class
and called “ Anorthosite Rock” or ‘ Anorthosite,” a name
derived from ‘“ Anorthose,” a term proposed by Delesse to
designate the triclinic feldspars, and which is thus synony-
mous with the term “Plagioclase” now more commonly
employed. This designation therefore serves to emphasize
the difference between these and the predominating ortho-
clase feldspar rocks of the rest of the Laurentian.

The term “ anorthosite” which has been often misunder-
stood? on account of its presumed derivation from anorthite,
a feldspar which rarely occurs in these rocks, has hitherto
found no place in the systems most generally used in the
classification of eruptive rocks. But in Canada, it has been
used for many years, and will here be employed to designate
a certain well defined class of rocks which belong to the
family of gabbros and which stand at one end of the series,
being distinguished by the marked predominance of plagio-
clase and the marked subordination or entire absence of all
coloured constituents. Their place in the family of gab-
bros, corresponds in a certain way to that of the pyroxenites

1 For further evidence see Sterry Hunt, Chemical and Geological Hssays, p. 272,

and Sir William Dawson : ‘‘ The Dawn of Life”’ and many other writings.
2 Wichman, Zeit. der Deutsch. Geol. Ges., 1884 p. 496.

174. © ~~» Canadian Record of Science.

at the other end of the series, in which the pyroxene largely —
predominates and the plagioclase occurs only in very small |
quantity, or that of troctolite in which the plagioclase and
olivine greatly predominate and the pyroxene is absent as
an essential constituent. :

They constitute a well defined type which both on account —
of its widespread occurrence and its constant character oc-
cupies an independent position in the classification and can-
not suitably be included anywhere else.

These anorthosites were found by the older geologists of
Canada in parts of the Laurentian widely separatad from
one another, sometimes occurring in small areas and again
occupying large districts. Later investigations have made
known the existence of many additional areas, great and
small. The literature of the subject is extensive, the biblio-
graphy comprises about a hundred tities, but these com- |
munications, are for the most part short and do not enter
into descriptive details,

This anorthosite has been recognized at the following
localities : To begin at the Atlantic coast (see large map),
one area is known (and as far as can be ascertained from
observations by travellers several probably occur) on the
east coast of Labrador. From this the original labradorite
was obtained, as well as the specimens of hypersthene
which have found their way into mineralogical collec-
tions the world over. Another locality is on the south-
west end of the island of Newfoundland. Farther to
the west, on the north shore of the St. Lawrence, Bay-
field mentions the occurrence of labradorite and hypers-
thene on a point 15 miles east of the island of Ste.
Geneviévre, or about 50 miles east of the Mingan Islands.!
Selwyn? found the rock on the same coast at Sheldrake,
between the Mingan Islands and the Moisie River, and
mentions the occurrence at this place of beautiful opal-

1 Bayfield, Notes on the geology of the north coast of the St. Lawrence. Trans.
Geol. Soe. London, 2 Ser. Vol. V. 1833.

2Selwyn, Summary Report of the operations of the Geological and Natural
History Survey of Canada 1889, p. 4. .

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 175

escent labradorite. A very large area of anorthosite was
found by Hind! on the river Moisie and on its branch,
the Clearwater. This area must be very large, although its
eastern and western limits are not yet well determined.
The Clearwater flows through a valley estimated by Hind to
be 2000 ft, deep which is cut in these rocks.” They likewise
occur in a number of places on the north shore of the St.
Lawrence between the Moisie River and the mouth of the
Pentecost River.

Next in order comes what is probably most extensive of
all the areas, that north of Lake St. John and the upper
waters of the Saguenay, which river has its source in this
lake, and runs into the St. Lawrence about 125 miles below
Quebec. This mass has an irregular oblong shape and its
larger diameter runs parallel to the shore of the St. Law-
rence, at a distance of about 80 miles. Other areas are
found in the neighborhood of Bay St. Paui on the St. Law-
rence River,‘ at Chateau Richer ° below Quebec, and in the
district between the latter place and Lake St. John.2 In
the Laurentian region which lies to to the north of the St.
Lawrence between Three Rivers and Montreal there are no
less than 11 areas, most of which are of very limited extent,
but one of these which we may eall the Morin area and
which lies about 25 miles north of the island of Montreal
has an area of 990 square miles. Still another occurrence
was discovered and described long ago by Bigsby, ’ on the
north shore of Lake Huron, and many other smaller unim-
portant areas are recorded elsewhere in the Laurentian of
Canada, but deserve no further mention. ‘There is also an

1 Hind, Exploration in the interior of the Labrador Peninsula, London, 1863,
also Hd. Cayley : ‘‘ Up the Moisie.”” Trans. Lit. and Hist. Soc. of Quebec. New
Series Vol. V. 1862.

2 Hind, Observations on the supposed Glacial Drift in the Labrador Peninsula,
etc., Quart. Jour. of the Geol Soce., Jan. 1864, and Canadian Naturalist, 1854, p.
¢ etardgon, Rep. Geol. Survey of Canada, 1866-1869.

4 Geology of Canada 1863, p. 46.

| Sis hee cope ae:

6 Low, Summary Rep. Geol. Survey of Canada 1890, p. 35.

7 Bigsby, A list of minerals and organic remains occurring inCanada. Am.
Journ. of Science, 1 Ser., 1824, p. 66.

176 | Cunadian Record of Science.

area of considerable extent occurring to the south in the
Laurentian of the State of New York. !

The stratigraphical relation of the anorthosites to the
Grenville and Ottawa series are as yet somewhat doubtful.
In most cases these are difficult to determine because the
localities where these rocks are found are generally diffi-
eult of access and the surface is often heavily drifted or
covered by a dense forest growth.

Sir William Logan? whose views were chiefly based on
an investigation of parts of the Morin area thought that

they probably belonged to a newer sedimentary formation —

which lay unconformably upon the Grenvilie series, and
which although consisting principally of anorthosite, yet
included interstratified beds of orthoclase gneiss, quartzite
and limestone.

This opinion was apparently supported by the observa-
tions which Richardson made on these rocks along the
lower St. Lawrence, and in the atlas which accompanied
the report of the Geological Survey of 1863, Logau assign-
ed these anorthosites together with the accompanying
gneisses to a distinct and higher series which he called the
Upper Laurentian.

Sterry Hunt believed that these rocks were identical
with the norites of Esmark and called them in consequence
of this the Norian Series.*

No detailed study of the stratigraphical relations of
these rocks has hitherto been made in the case of any of
the areas, but writers other than the above have made
definite statements without exact knowledge to the effect
that they form a series of strata which rest unconformably
upon the Grenville series.

The sequence of these rocks is, according to Logan, as

follows:
Norian series =Upper Laurentian.

? j "1e8—= r division :
Grenville series Uppe ivisi i ME ot le dee:
Ottawa series =lLower division

1 Emmons; Rep. of the geology in the second district of New York, 1842,

2 Logan, Rep, Geol. Survey of Canada 1863, p. 839.

3 Sterry Hunt, Chemical and Geological essays, p. 279. Also Special Rep. on
the Trap Dykes and Azoic Rocks of S. EH. Pennsylvania. 2nd Geol. Survey of

Pennsylvania 1878, p. 160.

ae

*

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 177

Other observers believed, however, that the anorthosites
were eruptive, among whom were: Emmons,' Selwyn? and
Packard.’

None of the investigations on which these views rest were
either sufficieutly extended or sufficiently detailed to deter-
mine definitely the true relations of the two rock series, and
the question consequently remained undecided. On this
account I began in the summer 1883, at the request of Dr.
A. R. C. Selwyn, Director of the Geological Survey of
Canada, a detailed study of the anorthosite area, discovered
many years before by Richardson,’ about Lake St. John, and
the head waters of the Saguenay, and devoted the greater
part of two summers to investigating and mapping this
area. It proved, however, to be of much greater extent than
Richardson supposed, extending back into the northern
forests through a tract of country unsurveyed and almost
unexplored, and which was for the most part only accessible
by rivers difficultly navigable and hard to ascend, so that a
very detailed investigation proved to be impossible. The
southern, eastern, and western limits of the area were,
however, mapped, and a good general knowledge of the
character and the stratigraphical relations of the area
obtained.

It was therefore thought best to select a smaller area
more conveniently situated, in which to determine in de-
tail the stratigraphical relations of these rocks. For this
purpose the choice fell on that above mentioned as the
Morin area, which had the advantage of being generally
easy of access and which further commended itself as being
the area which Sir William Logan had formerly examined,
and on the study of which his opinion concerning the so-
called Upper Laurentian rocks were chiefly based. A care-.
ful study of this area extending over four summers was
consequently made.

1 Emmons, loc., cit.

2 Selwyn, Rep. Geol. Survey Canada 1879-1880, 1877-1878.

3 Packard, On the Glacial Phenomena of Labrador and Maine. Mem. Boston
Acad. Nat. Hist. Vol. 1., part 2, p. 214.

4 Richardson, Rep. Geol. Surv. Canada 1857, p. 71.

178 Canadian Record of Science.

The present essay is based on ‘the investigation of both
these large areas, and of a dozen of smaller ones, which are
found in the neighborhood of the Morin area, as well as on
a careful study of the literature on the whole subject.

Il.—THE MORIN ANORTHOSITE AREA.
STRATIGRAPHICAL RELATIONS.

As will be seen from a study of the accompanying map’
the Morin area consists of a mass of anorthosite nearly
circular in form, from the south-east side of which a long
arm-like extension projects. This mass is 37 miles in
diameter and with the arm-like extension just mentioned
has an area of 990 square miles. It is bounded on all sides
by rocks of the Grenville series with the exception of the
extremity of the arm-like extension, which stretching much
farther south than the main portion of the mass, is overlaid
and concealed by more recent strata of Cambrian age (Pots-
dam and Calciferous).?

The Grenville series consists, as has already been point-
ed out, of orthoclase gneiss, of many different varieties,
with interstratified beds of quartzite, amphibolite and crys-
talline limestone. The gneiss is generally well foliated and
in many places is distinctly banded. Its strata lie almost
flat in the eastern part of the area, but to the west they are
thrown up into a series of folds, which in the extreme west
are very sharp. The rocks bane a gencral northerly strike.
The crystalline limestones, with the associated garnetifer-
ous and rusty weathering gneiss, occur in many places.
They are found in thin bands interstratified with the flat-
lying gneisess of the eastern part of the area in the cliffs
along the shores of numerous lakes in the district. In the
western part of the area they often come to the surface in
consequence of the folded attitude of the beds already refer-
red to.

1Since the appearance of the paper the railroad has been continued past St.
Agathe to St. Faustin and thence to Chitte aux Iroquois, beyond the limits of the
map. Another line also extends from St. Jer6éme to New Glasgow and thence
north-eastward to St. Juilenne.

2 It is probable that some of the rocks bounding it on the north-western portion
of its extension should rather be referred to the Fundamental Gneiss.

—
a
OH | :
~
S
s N
3
: ‘
g \
S RRR. ss aa | N
SS Be ER Oe : 3
BS : 2 " 1 | QX
> =
S .
3
N
me ;
gq &
ng:
5 <
Js S
. Sy
: <
8S , :
= <
o ; ¢
“ 8
. =) Fa
= Oe S

4

Map of the Anorthos

ea of Morin,

ite Ag

180 Canadian Record of Science...

The distribution of thsse limestones is represented on the
accompanying map. Since they are much softer than the
accompanying gneiss, they nearly always occur in depres-
sions and are consequently often so concealed by glacial
deposits or dense forest that it is hard tc trace them out.
The limestones, however, continue just as persistently as
the other members of the stratified series. Single beds
may be traced for many miles, while certain horizons in
the gneiss at which the limestone bands occur, sometimes
quite pure, and again rendered more or less impure by the
presence of various disseminated minerals or thin layers of
gneiss, can be traced as far as the limits of the map. It
must here be remarked that many irregularities in form
presented by these limestones, must be attributed to the
fact that the limestones (as every observer may perceive)
under the great pressure to which these rocks have been
subjected are much more plastic than the associated rocks.
Thin layers of gneiss interstratified with them are often by
the folding of the rocks torn asunder into extraordinarily
bent and twisted ribbonlike pieces which lie isolated
in the limestone so that there results a pseudo con-
glomerate. The fact that these limestones are now
and then squeezed into cracks in the associated gneisses,
led Emmons in his description of the geology of the
State of New York, to express the opinion that they were
of eruptive origin. The greater plasticity of the limestone
as compared with other rocks has also been established, as
is well known, by many direct experiments. Since, there-
fore, they alternate with the gneiss and follow its strike,
and because they are more easily distinguishable than any
other of the countless varieties of gneiss, Logan recognized
that a careful study of their distribution would furnish a
clew for the unravelling of the structure of this or any
other Laurentian area in which they occur, and. moreover
that by the determination of their relations to the anor-
thosite rocks, very important data might be obtained
concerning the stratigraphical position of the lattc.. In
investigating that portion of the area which lies to the

Ae

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 181

west of the anorthosite (for he investigated only this
region) Logan found that two of the limestone bands,
one on the southwest and one farther north on the west
side of the area, were cut off by the Morin anorthosite,
and he therefore considered the latter as a newer forma-
tion which overlay them, observing that in case it should

-be proved (by an extension of the observations farther

to the north than it was possible for him to carry them)
that two other limestone bands which he had followed up
nearly to the limit of the anorthosite were likewise~cut
off by it, this fact might be considered as conclusive evi-
dence of the existence of an Upper Laurentian series
reposing uncomformably on the Grenville series. A care-
ful investigation of this northwest corner of the area which
was undertaken last summer, in company with Dr. Ells of
the Geologival Survey, showed, however, that one of the sup-

_ posed interruptions really does not exist and that the drift

is sO heavy in this region that even if the other limestone
stone bands do come against the anorthosite, the contact
could not be observed. A careful examination of the con-
tact on the southwest corner of the area in the neighbor-
hood of the village of St. Sauveur, however, leaves little
doubt that the limestone is really cut off by the anortho-
site at this point. The limestone underlies a plain and
protruding here and there in large exposures through the
drift, whilst the anorthosite rises from this plain as a steep
wall or cliff. The limestone is expo-ed 200 yards from the
foot of the anorthosite wall, but the drift covering then
becomes so thick that the character of the contact itself
cannot be determined. Both to the east and to the west,
the associated gneiss is cut off in a similar manner.

On the northeast side of the anorthosite area there was
found, moreover, another limestone band which runs
through Lake Ouareau aud forms in it a series of small
islands. It is also well exposed on the south shore of this
sheet of water. This bed disappears at the edge of the
anorthosite a short distance from the south end of the lake,
and no further traces of it are seen until it appears again

182 Cunadian Record of Science. |
interstratified in the gneiss at the southeast corner of the
anorthosite area. |
These facis together with the whole shape and shoe
ter of this anorthosite area now that the mapping is com-
pleted, show that as Logan supposed, it is unconformable
to the Grenville series, that is to say to the true Laurentian.
But it may also be demonstrated that this unconformity 1s
not due to superposition but to intrusion, The anorthosite
does not belong, as was supposed, to a great overlying sedi-
mentary formation, but is a great intrusive mass which cuts
through gneisses with their associated limestone bands but
does not overlie them | |

In order to understand why Logan and other able ob- |
servers who agreed with him, regarded these anorthosites as
an overlying sedimentary formation, we must remember
that they show here and there a more or less foliated
structure. This is especially true of some places near their
contact with the gneiss, and is best seen in the long arm-
like extension at the south-east corner which following the
line of least resistance penetrates the gneiss parallel to its
foliation, and together with it is covered up by the over-
lying Cambrian. Moreover we find at St. Jérome a small
isolated occurrence of a more or less clearly foliated anor-
thosite, which is included in the gneiss, and Logan, who
through the lack of time could not examine the whole area,
supposed this to belong to the great Morin mass, the southern
boundary of which was as a matter of fact many miles
farther to the north. In going from St. Jérome, therefore,
at right angles to the strike of the rocks, to New Glasgow,
which lies about nine miles further to the east, he passed
from the gneiss over an interstratified anorthosite, then over
gneiss with layers of quartzite and a limestone bed into
the above mentioned arm-like extension of anorthosite,
which shows a sort of schistosity parallel to the strike of the
gneiss, and over this to gneiss again. Misled by this sec-
tion which here is very deceptive, he decided that the whole
was a great sedimentary formation of gneiss with interstra-
tified beds of quartzite, limestones and anorthosites identical

ee

we Sl

te

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 183

with that which to the north cut off the limestone and lay
unconformably upon the Grenville series.

~ Instead of this, we have in reality the Grenville series
throughout the entire area broken through in places by anor-
thosite masses which often follow the strike of the gneiss
and appear to be interstratified with it.

Although at many points on the boundary between the
anorthosite of the Morin area and the surrounding gneiss,
both rocks come in contact without any alteration of the
gneiss being visible, yet at a few places, especially between
Shawbridge and Chertsey, a dark heavy and somewhat
massive rock rich in bisilicates and often containing a
little quartz and:some unstriated feldspar appears at the
contact of the anorthosite, and may possibly be a contact
product. The boundary of the typical anorthosite against
this rock is generally quite distinct, whereas the latter
passes gradually into the gneiss of the district, so that
it is difficult to decide whether it represents a distinct
and abnormal variety of the gneiss, or a contact pro-
duct of the gabbro. The same rock, or at least a very
similar one occurs largely developed, at the northwest
corner of the area, between the typical anorthosite and
the gneiss, and appears here to be a peculiar variety of gab-
bro since it is nearly or quite massive and often shows a
distinct “schlieren” structure. It cuts through the gneiss
but seems to be continuous with the anorthosite. Continuous
outcrops of the two rocks which would make it possible to
determine their relationship have as yet nowhere been
found, but there is evidence to prove that it is a part of the
anorthosite mass, and not a separate intrusion, although the
transition is a rather sudden one.

The anorthosite-mass is cut through in many places by
coarse pegmatite veins. These are especially abundant
about the edge of the area where they break through the
gneiss as well as the anorthosite. In mapping the anor-
thosite, it was frequently possible to surmise an approach
to the limits of the area from the appearance of numerous
pegmatite veins, They are, of course, by no means exclu-

184 Canadian Record of Science.

. sively confined to the edge of the area, but also occur
abundantly in certain places towards the centre. They
consist of quartz, orthoclase, and often some iron ore, and
are quite different in composition, and apparently indepen-
dent of the anorthosite through which they cut. A number
of pegmatite veins in the township of Wexford, contain the
same bisilicates as the anorthosite but with quartz and pot-
ash feldspar. None of the rare minerals which frequently
occur in such veins were observed with the exception of a
substance resembling allanite in thin section of a single
hana specimen.

About the line of contact, in the Township of Wexford,
in the prolongation of the strike of the large band of gneiss
which comes in between the main mass of the anorthosite
ard the arm-like extension of the same, are many large
masses of orthoclase gneiss enclosed in the anorthosite, an
additional proof of the eruptive character of the anorthosite,
if such be needed.

The anorthosite as well as the gneiss which it breaks
through are also cut by numerous dykes of diabase and
augite porphyry.

To sum up, we have in this area a large intrusive mass
of anorthosite which cuts through the Grenville series, en-
closes large blocks of gneiss, sends out arms into the sur-
rounding gneisses, and in manyplaces is bounded te what
appears to be a peculiar contact product.

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTER OF THE MorIN ANORTHOSITE.

The anorthosite of this area exhibits a great variation in
structure and colour and in certain places even a consider.
able variation in composition, but is in mineralogical com-
position a gabbro, or norite, free from, olivine and very
rich in plagioclase. Hand-specimens from about fifty dif-
ferent places in this anorthosite area have been sliced and
microscopically examined and the following description of
these rocks is based on the results thus obtained. The
number of minerals which the rock contains is not large,
the variations in composition resulting principally from

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 185

their irregular distribution. The following minerals have
been observed in the rock:

Plagioclase Muscovite and Paragonite Epidote
Augite Bastite Zoisite
Hypersthene Chlorite Garnet
Ilmenite Quartz Zircon
Orthoclase Magnetite | Spinel
Hornblende Apatite

Biotite Calcite

Of these, plagioclase, augite, hypersthene and ilmenite are
by far the more important and may be considered as the
essential constituents of the rock, while the others are in
most cases either accessory constituents or decomposition
products.

Plagioclase—As above mentioned, Hunt gave the name
anorthosite to these rocks on account of the great pre-
valence in many varieties of plagioclase or anorthose. He
considered the type which contains only feldspar as the
true anorthosite and estimated that three fourths of the
anorthosites in the Dominion did not contain over 5 /e of
other minerals.!

Like the other constituents of the rock, the plagioclase is
quite fresh, showing but very rarely any traces of decompo:
sition, and when it is not granulated (that is ‘ cataclastic ”
in structure) presents in hand-specimens, almost without ex-
ception, a dark violet but more rarely a reddish colour.
This colour is still more plainly visible in thin sections, al-
though naturally much fainter, and is seen to be caused by
the presence of an immense quantity of minute opaque
black rods and extremely small opaque dark points, which
give the mineral in thin sections a pecular hazy appear-
ance. The latter probably represent in part cross sections
of the rods, but are for the most part round or slightly
elongated individuals of the same substance as the rods and
occurring with them. Vogelsang? estimated, in connection
with his studies of the anorthosite of Labrador, that these

17. Sterry Hunt, On Norite or Labradorite Rock. Am. Journ. Sc., Nov. 1869.
2 Vogelsang, Archives Néerlandaise T, III. 1868. 14

186 Canadian Record of Science.

inclusions amount to from 1 to 3 per cent of the volume
of the mineral and goes on to say: “Le nombre des
microlites contenus dans un volume déterminé est sus-
ceptible d’étre apprécié avec plus de précision ; les ré-
sultats toutefois s’écarteront beaucoup entre eux, suivant
P’échantillon qu’on aura choisi et le point dans lequel on
aura examiné. Dans le labradorite violet figuré le nombre
de microlites s’éléve au minimum a 10,000 par millimétre
cube; mais pour autres variétés jaunes et gris foncées le
calcul m’a donné un nombre au moins dix fois plus con-
sidérable de sorte qu’il y avait ici, dans l’espace borné d’un
centimétre cube plus de cent millions de petits cristaux
étrangers.” The larger rods are surrounded by a zone of
clear feldspar. Some inclusions are transparent and have
a reddish brown colour resembling hematite; these appear
in small scales which often show a somewhat distorted
hexagonal outline. Objects which closely resemble the
above mentioned rods, are often seen when very highly
magnified to be cavities, partly filled up by the dark
material of the rods. These inclusions are pretty uniform-
ly scattered through the feldspar individuals, and not con:
fined to certain places, nor present more abundantly in
some places than in others as is the case with the gabbros
described by G. H. Williams! or by Judd.? Minute fluid
inclusions may often be observed arranged in rows; in these
there appears now and then a moving bubble. In one or
two cases small cubes were perceived in them, and in one
case it was thought that a double bubble could be recog-
nized. In two or three localities the otherwise normal
foldspar contained but few of these inclusions and conse-
quently was almost white in colour. The nature and
origin of these dark inclusions, which occur so frequently
in the feldspar and other constituents of the gabbro, in the
most widely separated localities of the globe, have been
frequently discussed.

1G. H. Williams, Gabbro and associated Hornblende Rocks in the neighbor-
hood of Baltimore, Md. Bull, U. S. Geol. Survey 28, p. 21.

2 Judd, On the Gabbros, Dolerites and Basalts of Tertiary age in Scotland and
Treland, Q. J. G. S, 1886, p. 82,

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurention” Formation. 187

The inclusions are so minute that they cannot be isolated
and chemically examined. Their form is not defined with
sufficient sharpness and constancy to enable their crystallo-
graphic character to be determined. Some _investi-
gators have endeavored to gain some notion of the nature
of these small bodies by observing their deportment when
treated with concentrated acids, but the results obtained
are contradictory. Judd (l.c.) found that they resist con-
centrated hydrochloric acid. Vogelsang (l.c.) treated a
small piece of feldspar from Paul’s Island, Labrador, which
contained them, with hot hydrochloric acid for four days.
He found that the acid had strongly attacked the feldspar
but could perceive no alteration in the needles, except that
they had become slightly paler. Hagge' however found
that in the same rock from Labrador, all the brown scales
were dissolved when treated with the acid for a time too
short to effect a decomposition of the feldspar. He con-
sidered that they were probably géthite.

They are evidently some iron compound, and the
peculiar color of the transparent individuals taken in con- .
nection with the fact, that, as will be shown, under
certain conditions, they unite to form small masses of
titanic iron, leads to the belief that the view of Professor
Rosenbusch, is correct, namely that they consist princi-
pally of titanic iron ore or ilmenite. The transparent ores
have the form of the mineral known as micaceous titanic
iron ore, which Lattermann! found intergrown with
magnetite in the nephelinite of the Katzenbuckel. The
peculiar color of this mineral moreover resembles perfect-
ly that of these inclusions. The diverse results which the
several investigators have obtained in the matter of the solu-
bility of these inclusions may perhaps be explained by the
fact that the titaniferous iron ore in some hand-specimens
might be richer in titanic acid than in others.

In this connection it must be mentioned that titanic iron
ore is a mineral which is constantly found in these anor-

1 Hagge, Microskopiche Untersuchung iiber Gabbro and verwandte Gesteine,

Kiel, 1871. S. 46.
Lattermann in Rosenbusch Mass, Gest., p- 786,

188 Canadian Record of Science.

thosites in Canada, often in enormous quantities, so that it |
is considered as particularly characteristic of them, while
in the Laurentian proper, the iron ores in the greater num-
ber of cases, contain no titanic acid. Lacroix,’ who has
investigated somewhat similar inclusion,s which, however,
are double refracting, in certain Norwegian gabbros, thinks
that they are pyroxenes, especially as they frequently
appear to be grouped together, torming larger grains which
may be determined as belonging to this species. He says:
“Les grains en question semblent avoir attiré a eux les par-
ticules pyroxéniques en suspension dans le feldspath et les
avoir incorporées 4 leur masse.’ It is quite possible that
these inclusions so often found in gabbros and allied rocks
consist of the heavier minerals of the rock, in some cases
pyroxene and in others iron ore, which were finely dis-
seminated through the magma while the rock was ersytal-
lizing, or which, perhaps, separated out as the several con-
stituents crystallized. My best thanks are due to Professor
Judd for a small collection of thin sections of typical gab-
- bros and peridotites from the north of Scotland which he
has described and on which he has principally established
his theory of “schillerization.” An examination of these
shows that nowhere in them are the inclusions in ques-
tion so numerous and well defined as in the Canadian
anorthosites. The peculiar arrangement of these inclu-
sions in the Scotch rocks along cracks, fissures, etc.,
which Professor Judd has described and which especially
supports his theory of their secondary origin, is not ob-
served in these Canadian rocks. Their inclusions are on the
contrary distributed thickly and pretty uniformly through
the whole feldspar individual, generally indeed through-
out the feldspar of the whole rock. They disappear as above
mentioned only when it has the peculiar granulated char-
acter. This remarkable fact will be referred to again.

The uniform distribution of these inclusions does not
prove that they are not schillerization products, for even

1 Lacroix, Contributions 4 l’étude des gneiss 4 Pyroxené, p. 141. Bull. Soc,
Min. Fr. Avril 1889,

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 189

if the rock were completely schillerized these products
might be quite evenly distributed in it. It may be here
mentioned that only in a few places in this Morin area does
the plagioclase exhibit that play of colours which is pro-
duced by these inclusions in the feldspar from Labrador
and elsewhere.

The plagioclase is almost invarably excellently twinned,
according to both the Albite and Pericline laws, the two sets
of twin lamelle crossing one another at right angles in
the thin sections. This twinning is apparently sometimes
secondary and produced by pressure, as for instance when
the lamelle appear along a certain line or crack, or when
they appear in places where the plagioclase individual is
twisted.

In most cases, however, they are of prmary origin.
Frequently in the sections there are a few untwinned
individuals of plagioclase which are probably cut parallel
to oP (010.) But in certain hand-specimens there
is a considerable percentage of untwinned feldspar, resem-
bling in all other respects the plagioclase which shows
a well defined twin structure. In order to determine
whether in these cases two feldspars were really pre-
sent, separations by means of heavy solutions were made
on material from three hand-specimens from different
localities in the thin sections of which these untwinned
feldspars occurred, in considerable quantity. Since, how-
ever, in a solution having a specific gravity of 2.67 all
the constituents sank, these untwinned individuals can-
not be more acid than labradorite, to which variety the
remaining feldspars likewise belong. Similar occurrences
of untwinned plagioclase have been often observed.
Hawes! who investigated some of them, gives an analysis”
of an ordinary specimen of typical labradorite of St.
Paul’s Island and adds: ‘‘Some of the anorthosites de-
scribed by 'T. Sterry Hunt in the Geology of Canada, 1863,
were proved by his analysis to be composed of pure labra-

1 Hawes, On the determination of feldspar in thin sections of Rocks, Proc.
Nat. Mus.. Washington, 1881, p. 134.
2 See table of analyses at conclusion of paper.

190 Canadian Record of Science.

dorite and some sections of the same which he submitted to
me for examination were found to be composed of a mul-
titude of small grains, none of which were twinned.”

An examination was likewise made of well twinned pla-
gioclase from two other localities. The first was from a
hand-specimen of a typical anorthosite which occurs five |
miles north-west of Ste. Adéle in the Morin district. ~ Its
specific gravity was between 2.65 and 2.67, and it had
therefore, also, the composition of an acid labradorite, a
fact confirmed by the values of the extinction angles
measured on a small fragment separated by means of
Thoulet’s solution. The second was from the village of Ste.
Adéle itself, which lies near the southern edge of the
Morin area. Here the anorthosite has porphyritically dis-
tributed through it large plagioclase crystals which some-
times are not less than four inches long, These had the
following extinction angles: on o P 00 (010) 244° to
26°, on O P (001) = 6°. An analysis ofthe bluish opal-
escent plagioclase from the Morin district will be found in
the table of analyses given at the end of this paper; here
again the feldspar is a labradorite.

The plagioclase of the anorthosite from these six different
localities is therefore in all cases labradorite, and there is
every reason to believe that the feldspar throughout the
whole area belongs to this variety. Although it was gen-
erally quite fresh, a partial decomposition was observed in
one or two cases where it was changed into a mixture of
calcite, epidote and zoisite as mentioned in the description
of these minerals.

This occurrence was found in the village of New Glas-
gow, where a peculiar variety of rock having a saussuritic
habitus was also observed. This latter was quite a local
occurrence connected with the small zones of disturbance
which here run through the anorthosite. We see in thin
slices that this plagioclase (the rock is composed almost
entirely of this mineral mixed with a few small grains of
iron ore) has suffered a peculiar alteration. The product of
decomposition is a mineral mostly of fibrous structure which

On the Norian or ‘‘ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 191

appears in the plagioclase in little spots. It has the optical

character of a bastite or pseudophite and the decomposed
feidspar resembles therefore to a certain extent that of
Waldheim in Saxony described as pyknotrope by Breit-
haupt. In another handspecimen of the same rock from
New Glasgow the feldspar is changed into a colourless
mineral which forms small feather-like clusters. It shows
magnificent polarisation colours and has a distinct cleavage
to which the extinction is parallel. So far as this rock
could be investigated in thin sections, the mineral showed
all the optical properties of muscovite. It may possibly be
paragonite which cannot be distinguished from muscovite
under the microscope, for one would expect a soda mica
rather than a muscovite as a product of the alteration of
plagioclase.

Avaite.—This constituent is with a few exceptions, gen-
erally present in much smaller quantity than the plagio-
clase, but is next to it the most abundant constituent.
The rhombic pyroxeneis present however in nearly if: not
quite equal amount. It occurs in irregularly shaped
grains of a light green color which are either non-
pleochroic or exhibit a scarcely perceptible pleochroism
in greenish tints. In sections which are nearly parallel
to the base, we see typical cleavages which cut each
other almost at right angles and are characteristic of
pyroxene. They are often intersected by a third more
perfect cleavage which is parallel to oP & (100) as
shown by its position relative to the plane of the optical
axis. In the prismatic zone the mineral shows an extinc-
tion angle from 0° to 45°.

In many sections of the pyroxene there are brownish
black tables or small black rods which resemble very much
the inclusions of the plagioclase above described. Where
these occur they are frequently parallel to «o Po (100);
in other cases instead of being scattered throughout the
whole individual they are confined to certain spots. The
augite can often be observed to have grown around grains
of iron ore. Itis generally quite fresh, but in many hand-

192 Canadian Record of Science.

specimens is decomposed. The product of decomposition
consists sometimes of a finely granular mixture of chlorite,
and a rhombohedral carbonate with occasional quartz
grains between them, the whole constituting a grey almost
opaque mass. In other specimens the augite is changed
into a yellowish bastite which then fills up not only the
space originally occupied by the augite but also penetrates
into the small fissures of the rock and forms thread-like
veins and scales even in the feldspar grains. In other
specimens it is converted into a mineral resembling serpen-
tine. When both pyroxenes occur near one another in the
_ rock, the angite is generally intimately intermingled with
the rhombic pyroxene.

Ruompic Pyroxene (Hypersthene ).—This mineral,
which occurs so often with augite, does not essentially
differ from the latter as far as can be ascertained from its
thin sections either in index of refraction, in double refrac-
tion or in color. It is however strongly pleochroic with
the following colors :

w=red, t=yellowish green, c=green.

The absorption is ¥ > ly > ¢, the difference between a
and % being very small.

Its rhombic character was determined by the following
observations in the case of a hand-specimen from the
Township of Chilton in which the mineral occurred in fresh
condition and in larger quantity than usual. Sections
parallel to the base showed the two cleavages of the prism
which intersect almost at right angles, as well as a third
more perfect set of cleavages to which small black rods are
often parallel. Since the direction of the extinction is aiso
parallel to this latter cleavage it must be in the direction of
a pinacoid. In convergent light there is seen on the
basal section a bisectrix but not an optic axis as in the
case of a monoclinic pyroxene. When a section in which
an optic axis appears is examined, the above mentioned
pinacoidal cleavage is found to be parallel to the plane of
the optic axes. The pinacoid in question is therefore

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 193

co P o, that is to say it cuts off the acute prismatic angle
as oo P o does in the case of diallage, In sections which
show an optic axis and only one set of cleavages to
which the small rods lie parallel, the cleavage is seen to
be parallel to the plane of the optic axis.

In all sections which contain the mineral, we find many
grains which show only one good cleavage to which the
extinction is parallel.

In general it is like the augite quite fresh, in a few sec-
tions it appears however changed into bastite, and in a few
others into a serpentine like mineral. It sometimes con-
tains the dark scales and rods so often found in hyper-
sthene, but very often these are entirely absent. It is in-
deed a remarkable fact that in these Canadian rocks, the
iron-magnesia minerals contain only a few of these inclus-
ions while the associated feldspar is filled with them. We
have here a state of affairs the exact opposite to that in
the gabbros and associated rocks of the Scotch Highlands
which have been described by Prof. Judd.

HoRNBLENDE.—This mineral does not occur in the
anorthosite of Morin except in a few places near the con-
tact with the gneiss. Then we always find it in intimate
association with the pyroxenes in the form of irregularly
defined grains generally about the border of the granulated
masses of pyroxene. It occurs asa general rule only in
very small quantity. It is usually green in color but is
often brown. It shows the cleavages, the small extinction
angle and the characteristic pleochroism of the species. In
a hand specimen from the neighborhood of the contact on
Lake lAchigan, the maximum extinction angle was found
to be 15° and the following pleochroism observed:

w=greenish yellow, b=yellowish green, C=green.

The absorption was ¢ > > w.

In another hand-specimen, quite close to the contact,
about six miles north of New Glasgow, a brown hornblende
was likewise found in small amount. The extinction angle
was 18° with the following pleochroism :
x=light brownish yellow, H=deep brown, ¢c=deep brown.

194 Canadian Record of Science.

The absorption is ¢ > UO > w.

It also occurs in the peculiar rock which was referred to
above as a gabbro and was found in a number of places be-
tween the true anorthosite and the gneiss.

BrotitE.—Biotite never occurs in large amount but is
present rather frequently in very small amount as an acces-
sory constituent of the normal gabbro. It is usually found
with iron ores or with the hypersthene and shows the
characteristic brown color, strong pleochroism and parallel
extinction.

MuscoviTE on Paraconite.—(See under “ Plagioclase.”)

CHLoRITE.—Occasionally in small quantity as a decom-
position product of pyroxene or biotite.

QuartTz.—It is doubtful whether this mineral ever occurs
as a primary constitutent of the anorthosite. In a hand-spe-
cimen from the west side of the Achigan River, near New
Glasgow, it was noticed in the form of rather small round
grains disseminated through the rock and looking like a
primary constituent. But the rock is much decomposed
and doubtless some secondary quartz is present as a pro-
duct of decomposition of pyroxene, so that the quartz which
appears to be primary at first sight may be in reality of
secondary origin.

In the gabbro which occurs as above stated in many
places between the typical anorthosite and the gneiss,
quartz is quite frequent. But in this rock many facts point
to the secondary origin of the quartz. It occurs often for
example in more or less sharply defined veins made up of
large individuals. When it occurs in the form of separate
irregular grains these extinguish uniformly, although they
are often more or less fissured, but they are by no means so
much broken as one would expect, if they were primary
ingredients, in view of the extremely broken condition of
the feldspar and the other constituents of the rock.

ILMENITE AND Maanetite.—In nearly every section of
anorthosite some irregularly shaped grains of an opaque
black iron ore are seen. These are usually few in number. The

oe a eT,

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 195

quantity of iron ore is considerable only in a few places, and
a as in these cases the percentage of pyroxene increases in
. the same proportion, the rock here assumes a very dark
colour so that it is often taken for an ironore. These por-
tions of the anorthosite rich in iron ores are only few and
local, and they pass over into the normal gabbro of the area
which as above mentioned is very poor in iron ore.

If these iron ore grains are examined by reflected light,
they are seen to be black and in a few cases they can be
seen to be partly changed into a grey decomposition pro-
duct, evidently a variety of leucoxene. This circumstance
proves that the mineral contains titanic acid in consider-
able amount.

In three hand-specimens from widely separated parts of
the area an intermingling of two iron ores was distinctly
seen. In one of the hand-specimens which comes from
Wexford, range I. lot 7, one of the above mentioned locali-
ties where the anorthosite is rich in iron ore, careful obser-
vation in reflected light showed the iron ore to occur partly
as a bluish black coarse grained variety, and partly as a
brownish black finely granular variety both being irregu-
larly intermingled and distinguishable only by reflected
light.

When the section was treated for about half an hour on
a water-bath with warm concentrated hydrochloric acid,
the coarsely granular variety was entirely dissolved and
the acid became strongly coloured with iron, while the
finely granular variety was apparently not at all affected. We
have evidently here an intergrowth of magnetite with
ilmenite or at least with a titaniferous iron ore.

In another hand-specimen (from the neighbourhood of
Lake Ouareau) a similar intergrowth was observed ; the
grains had a banded appearance in reflected light, one
variety crossing the other in a single or double set of inter-
rupted bands. When the section was treated with cold
concentrated hydrochloric acid for 48 hours, no effect was
produced ; but when treated with warm concentrated acid

, ina water-bath, one variety of iron was dissolved as before

196 Canadian Record of Science.

while the other again remained undissolved. We have here
probably an intergrowth parallel to the face of an octa-
hedron or rhombohedron. A similar intergrowth has been
described in the iron ore in the nephelinite of the Katzen-
buckel, except that here the titanic iron ore occurs in the
form of micaceous titanic iron ore, not as the coarse and
opaque variety found in the above mentioned rocks.

It has been the invariable experience in Canada that the
large iron ore deposits in these anorthosite rocks contain so
much titanic acid that they cannot be profitably worked.
In order to determine whether the iron ore which is dis-
seminated in small grains throughout the whole rock was
also rich in this constituent, the iron ore of three hand-
specimens of the anorthosite from different parts of the
area was separated and tested for titanic acid. In every case
the mineral was but faintly magnetic and gave a strong
titanic acid reaction.

Two specimens of iron ore from the pegmatite veins
wlich cut through the anorthosite and the gneiss at the
contact of the two formations, west of St. Faustin, and
therefore do not belong to the anorthosite, showed strong
magnetism and gave only a faint reaction for titanic acid.
The iron ore bed, a short distance west of St. Jérome, in the
orthoclase gneiss also consists of magnetite and contains no
titanic acid. We therefore find that these investigations
confirm the conclusion that the iron ore of the anorthosite
is very rich in titanic acid while the iron ore of the Lau-
rentian gneiss generally contains no notable qiieen thy of
this substance.

Pyrite.—A few small grains of pyrite often occur in the
thin sections of the anorthosite. They are generally found
associated with the iron ore.

ApatiITE.—This mineral is seldom observed in the anor-
thosite. When it does occur it is in the form of more or
less rounded grains. It is more frequently found in the
varieties rich in iron ore in the Township of Wexford and
other localities, than in the normal anorthosite.

Latterman in Rosenbusch, Physiographie der Massigen Gesteine, p- 786.

«~ geen

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian’’ Formation. 197

_ Caxcite.—This was found only in two hand-specimens.
One of these was fresh and contained a little calcite, which
might possibly be a primary constituent. The other was
from New Glasgow, and in this the calcite, together with
zoisite, epidote, &c., appears as a decomposition product of

_ the plagioclase in the form ofa dull finely granular mixture.

Eripotr.—The only locality where epidote occurs is also
near the village of New Glasgow. It is found in several
sections of the anorthosite from this place along with
chlorite and quartz as a product of decomposition of ‘the
pyroxene, and as above mentioned with calcite and zoisite
as a product of decomposition of the plagioclase. In one or
two places it also occurs in small bands, cutting diagonally
across the anorthosite following the line of small faults.

_The epidote is everywhere secondary.

GARNET.—This does not occur as a constituent of the
normal anorthosite, but is often found near its contact with
the surrounding gneiss. It has a pinkish color, and is seen
under the microscope in small irregular masses which are
often mixed with or which completely surround the grains
of iron ore. In the sections of the variety of anorthosite
rich in iron ore from the Township of Wexford, range I,
lot 7, (and from other places above mentioned), we find a
pale pink garnet which forms a small zone of uniform
breadth around every grain of iron ore or pyroxene where
these otherwise would come in contact with the plagioclase.
Between the pyroxene and the iron ore there is however
no garnet. It is quite isotropic and has grown out from
the iron ore or pyroxene into the feldspar, against which it
is bounded by sharp crystalline outlines. These zones of
garnet are analogous to the zones of actinolite and hyper-
sthene around the olivine of the anorthosite from the
Saguenay River which will be referred to later on and
which have also been described in olivine gabbros of many
other localities.

Zircon.—This mineral is not found in the normal
anorthosite but it occasionally occurs in this rock near its
contact with the gneiss. It is seen only in small quantity,

\

198 Canadian Record of Science.

and especially in the peculiar contact variety which
occurs, as above mentioned, in some places between the
anorthosite and the gneiss. It was observed in this in
many localities. It has the form of smail stout prisms al-
ways with more or less rounded edges, which are charac-
terised by a parallel extinction, high refractive index and
strong double refraction.

SprnEL —Observed only in one hand-specimen, in the
form of small rounded isotropic grains deep green in color
occurring as inclusions in plagioclase and pyroxene.

(To be Continued.)

CONTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN Botany.
By Jas. M. Macoun.

be i

VIOLA BLANDA, Willd., var. AM@NA (Le C.) Bee:

Seldom separated from the species by Canadian col-
lectors. North Bay, Ont. (Dr. and Mrs. Britton and Miss
Millie Timmerman.) Ottawa, Ont. (James Fletcher.) Wing-
ham, Ont. (J. A. Morton.) The var. palustriformis, Gray,
we consider but a larger form of the species under which
we include our large stoloniferous specimens that are not
certainly referable to var. amena. They are from Ed-
monton, Ont. (Jas. White.) Wingham, Ont. (J. A.
Morton.) Ottawa, Ont. (J. M. Macoun.)

VIoLA CANADENSIS, Linn.
Our most northern specimens of this species are from
the Athabasca River. (Viss H. Taylor.)

VIOLA PALUSTRIS, Linn.

Between Lake Athabasca and Chesterfield Inlet in Lat.
61° 35, Long. 103° 30. (Jas. W, Tyrrell), Northern limit
in Canada as shown by our specimens.

VioLaA SELKIRKI, Pursh.
Battle Harbor, Fox Cove, Labrador, 1892, (Rev, A.
Waghorne,) Northern limit in Canada.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 199

PoLYGALA VERTICILLATA, Linn.

Sandy soil at Griswold, Man. (W. A. Burman.) Only
station west of Ontario.’

DiantHus ARMEBIA, Linn.

On rocks, Victoria Arm, Vancouver Island, Naturalized
and spreading. In fruit July 21st, 1893. (John Macoun.)
Not before recorded west of Ontario in Canada or Michigan
in US.

DIANTHUS BARBATUS, Linn.

Escaped from cultivation and naturalized at Hot Springs,
Kootanie Lake, B,C., 1890. (Jas. M, Macoun.)

SAPONARIA VaAccaRiA, Linn.

A weed in gardens at Kamloops, B.C: Roadsides, Nelson,
Kootanie Lake, B,C.; Cameron Lake, Vancouver Island.
(John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of the Columbia
River.

S(tENnE ARMERIA, Linn.

Spontaneous in gardens at Rupert House, James Bay.
(Jas. M. Macoun.) Our most northern record,

SILENE CucuBALuS, Wibel,

Naturalized near Spray Falls, Banff, Rocky Mountains,
(John Macoun). Not before recorded west of Ontario.

SireNnNE Dovetasiu, Hook., var, MAcouni, Robinson, Proc.
Amer, Acad. xxviii, 144.

Lychnis elata, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 69,

Silene multicaulis, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p, 494.

S. Macounti, Wats., Proc. Amer. Acad. xxvi., 124.

Our herbarium specimens of this variety are from Mt.
Aylmer, Rocky Mts., alt. 6,800 ft.; Lake Louise, Rocky
Mts.; Silver City, Rocky Mts.; Kicking Horse Lake,
Rocky Mts., alt. 7,000 ft.; mountains north of Griffin
Lake, B.C., alt. 6,500 ft. (John Macoun.) Mt, Queest, Shus-

1 The Geographical limits given in these papers refer to Canada only,

200 Canadian Record of Science.

wap Lake, B.C., alt. 6,000 ft. ; Avalanche Mt., Selkirk Mts.,
B.C., alt. 7,00 ft. (Jas. M. Macoun.) Western Summit of
North Kootanie Pass, Rocky Mts.; South of Tulameen
River, B.C., alt. 6,000 ft.. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) A part
of the specimens referred to this variety are perhaps inter-
mediate between it and the next. :

SineNE Dovetasi, Hook, var. visctpa, Robinson, Proc.
Amer. Acad. xxvii, 145.

On slopes of high mountains at Kicking Horse Lake,
Rocky Mts. (John Macoun.)

S1LENE Dovetasi1, Hook., var. MuLTICAULIS, Robinson.
S. multicaulis, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IT., p. 309.

Stump Lake, South of Kamloops, B.C. (John Macoun.)

SILENE GALLIcA, Linn.

Common at Oak Bay, Goldstream and Victoria Arm,
Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.) Introduced.

SILENE NOCTIFLORA, Linn.

A weed in gardens at Rupert’s House, James Bay. (Jas.
M. Macoun.) In waste places at Revelstoke, B.C., and
Cedar Hill, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.) Not be-
fore recorded from west of Winnipeg.

Lycunis AFFINIS, Vahl.

Between Lake Athabasca and Chesterfield Inlet. Lat.
63° 27’, Long. 102°, 18938. (Jas. W. Tyrrell.) Cape Prince
of Wales, Hudson Strait. (Dr. R. Bell.)

LycHNIs ELATA, Wats.

Our only specimens of this species are from Avalanche
Mt., Selkirk Mts., B.C., alt. 7,000 ft.. (Jas. M. Macoun.)

Lycunis TayLor#, Robinson, Proc. Amer. Acad. xxviii, 150.

Very slender 1 to 13 feet high, puberulent, nearly smooth
below, glandular above; stem erect, bearing 3 to 4 pairs of
leaves and two or three long, slender, almost filiform 1 to 3
flowered branches; leaves thin, lance-linear, acute or

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 201

attenuate both ways, finely ciliate, and pubescent upon
the single nerve beneath, ,otherwise glabrate, 2 to 24
inches in length; flowers terminal or subterminal on the
branches; calyx ovate, not much inflated, about 4 lines
long, in anthesis but two lines in diameter with green
nerves interlacing above ; the teeth obtuse, with broad green
membraneous ciliate margins; petals 1} times the length
of the calyx ; the blade obcordate, 14 lines long, consider-
ably broader than the slender auricled claw, appendages
lance-oblong.

Peel’s River, Mackenzie River Delta, 1892. (Miss E.
Taylor.)

LyYcHNIS TRIFLORA, R. Br. var. Dawson1, Robinson, Proc.
Amer. Acad. xxviii, 149.

Calyx with principal nerves double or triple, joined by
interlacing veinlets ; the intermediate nerves beneath the
sinuses inconspicuous or wanting; petals very narrow;
the blade oblong, bifid, hardly to be distinguished from the
narrow Claw.

Gravel banks, Dease River, 100 miles north-east of Dease
Lake. Lat, 59°, B.C., 1887. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.)

CLAYTONIA CHAMISSONIS, Esch.

Growing at high-water mark at Comox, Vancouver
Island, 1893. (John Macoun, Herb. No. 29.)' These are
our first authentic specimens of this species,

CLAYTONIA PARVIFOLIA, Moc.

Damp rocks, Sproat, Columbia River, B.C.; Griffin Lake,
B.C,; Agassiz, B.C. (John Macoun.). Not before recorded
between Selkirk Mts. and Vancouver Island.

OPUNTIA FRAGILIS, Haw.

This plant, of which specimens were collected by Mr. A.
C. Lawson in 18840n islands in the Lake of the Woods, was
found again in 1894 by Prof. A. P. Coleman on Red Pine

1 Whenever herbarium numbers are given, they are the numbers under which

specimens have been distributed from the hebarium of the Geological Survey of
Canada.
15

202 Canadian Record of Science.

Island, Rainy Lake, just within Canadian territory. It
covered about a square rod ofgthe eastern end of the island
and grew half-buried in lichens. The Indians with Prof.
Coleman did not know of its occurrence elsewhere in that
region.

GALIUM PALUSTRE, L., var. Minus, Lge.

A comparison of specimens collected by the Rev. A. Wag-
horne at Long Point, Labrador, with Greenland plants
shows that what was at first considered a form of G. trifi-
dum is in fact G. palustre, var. minus. New to Canada.

VERNONIA NOVEBORACENSIS, Willd.

The plant from Essex Centre, Ont., referred to this species,
Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I., p. 206, proves to be V.
altissima, Nutt. Specimens collected by Prof. Macoun in
thickets at Pelee Island, Lake Erie, 1892, are V. Novebora-
censis. We have seen no other Canadian specimens of this
species.

SERIOCARPUS RIGIDUS, Lindl.

In open thickets Mount Finlayson and Cedar Hill, near
Victoria, V. I. and Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1887. Oak
Bay, near Victoria, V. I., Herb. No. 451. (John Macoun.)
Collected in 1887 but not recorded.

HELIOPsis ScABRA, Dunal.

In thickets, Kicking Horse River, Rocky Mts., alt. 4,000
ft., 1890. (Jas. M. Macoun.) Woods, Revelstoke, Columbia
River, B.C. (John Macoun.) Probably introduced from
Manitoba by the C. P. Ry. Not before recorded west of
Manitoba.

MApIA GLOMERATA, Hook.

Dry ground at Revelstoke, Columbia River, B.C., 1890.
(John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Alberta.

Manta sATIvaA, Molina, var. RAcEMosA, Gray.

On dry banks, two miles from mouth of Kootanie River,
B.C., 1890. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded from
interior of British Columbia,

:
,

Contributions io Canadian Botany. | 203

Mania sativa, Mol., var. conaEsta, Gray.

Specimens (Herb. No. 466) collected by Prof. Macoun at
Beacon Hill, Victoria, Vancouver Island, Aug. 7th, 1893,
and referred by him to this variety have coe An tt sec to
Dr. Robinson, who says, “a form showing characters of
var. congesta es to ner eeornee) and var. racemosa (as to
leaves and pubescence. Ve

HemizoneiLa Duranpt, Gray. , )
Hillsides at Sproat, Columbia River, B.C., 1890. (John
Macoun.) New to Canada,

CoruLA AUSTRALIS, Hook., f.
Ballast heaps at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macoun, Herb. No. 476.) New to Canada.

ARTEMISIA RICHARDSONIANA, Bess.

Mount Rapho, Lat. 56° 13’, Long. 131° 36’, alt. 3,800 ft.,
July, 1894. (Otto Klotz and H.-W. EF. Canavan, Herb. No.
4,191.)

ARNICA LATIFOLIA, Bong. var, VISCIDULA, Gray.
Woods at Roger’s Pass, Selkirk Mts., B.C., alt. 4,500 ft.,
1890. (John Macoun.) New to Canada.

CENTAUREA PANICULATA, L.
Dry waysides, Victoria, Vancouver Island, 1893, (John
Macoun, Herb, No. 552). New toCanada.

CassiopE STELLERIANA, DC.

Mt. Rapho, Lat. 56° 13’, Long. 131° 36’. Alt, 3,800 ft.
In flower July 10th, 1894. (Otto Klotz and H. W. E.
Canavan, Herb. No. 4,195.) First Canadian record.

PRIMULA CUNEIFOLIA, Ledeb.

Mt. Rapho, Lat. 56° 13’, Long. 131° 36’. Alt. 3,800 ft.
In tlower July 10th, 1894. (Otto Klotz and H. W. FE. Cana-
van, Herb. 4,192.) New to Canada.

CoLLINsIA VERNA, Nutt.
In woods near Plover Mills, Ont. In great abundance in

204 Canadian Record of Science.

one locality but not found elsewhere. Collected by R.
Elliott, May 22nd, 1894. New to Canada.

PEDICULARIS PEDICELLATA, Bunge.

Mt. Head, Lat. 56° 05’, Long. 131° 08’. Alt. 4,200 ft.
(Otto Klotz and H. W EH. Canavan, Herb. No. 4,196.) Only
authentic Canadian station.

UrRIcuULARIA RESUPINATA, B, D. Green.

Abundant on sand and‘ mud both in shallow and gently
flowing water, Phipps Lake, Long Reach, Kings Co., N.B.,
July 13th-20th, 1386.5 G0: Taos Only. peed
dian station, though a plant believed to be this species was
found by Prof Macoun in Victoria Co., Ont., in 1868..

AMARANTUS, Linn.

Our herbarium specimens of this genus have been ex-
amined by Messrs. Uline and Bray who have either con-
firmed our determinations or made necessary corrections
that are included in the following notes.

A. RETROFLEXUS, LINN.

Specimens collected by Prof. Macoun at Agassiz, B.C.,
and referred here are intermediate between A. Powellii and
A. retroflexus.

A. HYBRIDUsS, Linn.

References under A. paniculatus and A. hypochondriacus,
Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 396, are, so far as our
hebarium specimens are concerned, A. hybridus.

A. PANICULATUS, Linn.
Waste places, Sicamous, B.C., 1889. (John Macoun,) Our
only specimens or this species.

A. GR&cIZANS, Linn.
A. albus, L.; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 397.
This i is well distributed throughout British North
America, Specimens collected by the borders of saline
ponds near Kamloops, B.C., by Jas. M. Macoun are near
A. carneus, Greene.

= oe at hae he Ee AOI

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 205

A. BLITOIDES, Wat.

London, Ont. (Millman.) Port Colborne, Ont. (John
Macoun.) Point Edward, St. Clair River, Ont. (Jas. M.
Macoun.)

POLYGONUM.

All our herbarium specimens of this genus have been ex-
amined by Prof. John K. Small, who has made several im-
portant changes in our determinations. He had not our
herbarium sheets at the time his revision of the Poly-
gonacee was published so that the distribution of the Can-
adian species of Polygonum as given below will greatly ex-
tend the range of many North American species. I follow
Prof. Small’s arrangement of the species throughout.

(1.) P. viviparum, Linn. -

Throughout Canada. . Our most northern specimens are
from Lat. 64° 26’, Long. 100° 45’, 1893. (Jas. W. Tyrreil.)
and Great Bear Lake River. Lat. 65°, 1892. (Miss E.
Taylor.)

(2.) P. PersicariA, Linn.

From Prince Edward Island to Vancouver Island.
Abundant throughout the settled parts of Canada.

(3.) P. Cargyt, Olney.
Wet sandy banks, Moon River, Muskoka, Ont., 1878.
(Burgess.) The only Canadian station.

(4.) P. hydropiperoides, Michx.

We have this species from but one locality, Belleville,
Ont. Many of the references given by Prof. Macoun (Cat,
Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 411), probably refer to other species,
This plant is certainly not of.as general distribution in
Canada as is supposed, or our herbarium would contain
specimens from more stations than one.

Of this species and var. strigosum Prof. Small writes, “ P.
hydropiperoides, as well as the var. strigosum, has an almost
invariable character which it seems, has never been re-
corded. The stem or branches always produce, at the dis-

206 Canadian Record of Science.

tance of three-fourths of an inch or less above the angle of .
branching, a node with a leaf and ocrea, thus making an
internode several times shorter than normal length.”

Var. sTRIGOSUM, Small.
In ditches at Gatineau Point near Hull, Que. (John
Macoun.) In water near St. Patrick’s Bridge, OLE Ont.
(Jas. M. Macoun, Herb. No. 1,503.)

(5.) P. Hyproprpgr, L.
From New Brunswick to Pacific Coast.

(6.) P. punctatum, Ell.
' P. acre, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L., p. 411.

Not rare in Hastern Canada. Agassiz, B.C., and Kam-
loops, B.C. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of
Ontario.

(7.) P. PennsyLvanicum, L.
Common from Nova Scotia to Western Ontario.

(8.) P. LAPATHIFOLUIM, L.

Common from the Atlantic to the Pacific. Prof. Small
thinks this species has been introduced wherever found.
While this may be so in most cases, we have specimens
from remote regions that are without doubt indigenous.

Var. INCANUM, Koch.
- Hrom Ontario to the Pacific.

(9.) P. ampursioum, L.

Tadousac, Que. (Northrop.) Wingham, Ont. (J. A.
Morton.) Hastings Co., Ont.; Long Portage, Nipigon
River, Ont. ; Tail Creek, N.W.T.; near Victoria, Vancouver
ec (John Macoun.) Near Pincher Creek, Alberta.
(Dr. G. M. Dawson.)

(10.) P. emersum, (Michx.) Britt.

Most of the references under P. Muhlenbergii, Macoun,
Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 410, and Vol. IL, p. 353, go
here. Our herbarium specimens are from Wingham, Ont.

/

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 207

(J. A. Morton.) Leamy’s Lake, Hull, Que.; Tail Creek,
N.W.T. (John Macoun.) Indian Head, Assa. (W. Spread-
borough.) Short Creek, Souris River, Man.; Belly River,
Alberta. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) “ Arctic North America,”
no locality. (Dr. Richardson.)

(11.) P. Harrwriautti, Gray,

Salt Lake, Anticosti, Que.; Hlziver, Hastings Co., Ont. ;
Vermillion Lakes, near Banff, Rocky Mts. (Herb. No.
1,481.) ; Revelstoke, B.C.; Kamloops, B.C. (John Macoun.)
Near York Factory, Hudson Bay. (Dr. R. Bell.) London,
Ont. (Burgess.) Muskeg Island, Lake Winnipeg. (Jas.
M. Macoun. )

(12.) P. Orientale, L.

Ottawa, Ont. (Dr. A. BR. C. Selwyn.) London, Ont.
(Burgess. )

(13.) P. auprnum, All. 7

Peel River, Mackenzie River Delta, 1892, (Miss H. Tay-
lor). The references under P. polymorphum, Macoun, Cat.
Can. Plants, Vol. I., p. 412, probably all go with this species
or its var. lapathifolium.

(14.) P. aviouLARE, L.

From Ontario to Vancouver Island.

VAR. BOREALIS, Lange.
Specimens collected on the Hast Main River, Hudson
Bay, by A. H. D. Ross, in 1892, when compared with speci-
mens from Greenland seem certainly referable here.

(15.) P. tirrorate, Link.

P. erectum, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. 1., p. 407 in
part.

Thunder Bay, Lake Superior. (NV. L. Britton.) Castle
Mountain, Rocky Mts. ; Banff, Rocky Mts., Herb. No.
1,487; near Devil’s Lake, Rocky Mts., Herb. No. 1,486.
(John Macoun.) Walsh, Assa. (J. M. Macoun.)

208 Canadian Record of Science.

(16) P. Rayt, Bab.

P. maritimum, Macoun, Cat. Can, Plants, Vol. L., p. 408.

Turner’s Head, Labrador. (Rev. A. Waghorne.) Brack-
ley Point, P.E.I.; Jupiter River, Anticosti, Que.; Qualicum
and Point Holmes, Comox, Vancouver Island. Herb. No.
1505. (John Macoun.) Bass River, N.B. (fowler.) We
do not believe, that this plant, “‘ wherever found,” in Canada,
has been introduced. Prof. Small found among our speci-
mens no representatives of P. maritimum, and as our speci-
mens of P. Ray are from widely separated and remote
localities on the Atlantic and Pacific coasts, it seems prob-
able that we have but one species in Canada, and that it is,

at least in part, indigenous. .

(17.) P. Parnonycuta, C. & S.

Beacon Hill, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun. C. F.
Newcombe.)

(18.) P. rectum, L.
Our only specimens of this species are from Winnipeg,
Man.; Banff, Rocky Mts. Herb. No. 1,485. (John Macoun.)
Other specimens referred here by Prof. Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. I., p. 407, are now included under other species.

(19.) P. RAmosrssimum, Michx.

Petitcodiac, N,B. (J. Britain.) Rat Creek, Man.; Hand
Hills, N.W.T.; South of Battleford, N.W.T. (John
Macoun.)

(20.) P. Doveiasu, Greene.

P. tenue, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 408.

Not rare from Ontario to British Columbia. We have
apparently no P. tenue in Canada.

Prof. Small says of this species, “ P. Douglasii can be
distinguished from its relative P. tenue at a glance, and is
beautifully distinct, as Prof. Greene has pointed out, by its
one-ribbed leaf in place of the three-ribbed of P. tenue, and
the much longer, narrower and pedicelled, drooping fruit,
instead of the short, thick, sessile, erect fruit of that plant.”

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 209

(21.) P. austinm, Greene.

South Kootanie Pass, Rocky Mts., 1883. (Dr. G. M.
Dawson.) Near the glacier at the head of Lake Louise,
Rocky Mts. Alt. 7,500 ft. (John Macoun.) Dr. Dawson’s
specimens were collected a year before Mrs. Austin’s, and
were named P. tenue, Michx., var. latifolium, Eng., by Prof.
Macoun.

(22.) P. SPERGULARI &FORME, Meisn.

P. coarctatum, Dougl.
From the Columbia River at Sproat, B.C., to Vancouver
Island.

(23). P. mintmum, Wats.

South Kootanie Pass, Rocky Mts. (Dr, G. M. Dawson.)
Roger’s Pass, Selkirk Mts., B.C.; Griffin’s Lake, B.C.
(John Macoun. )

(24.) P. InteRMEDIUM, Nutt.
Summit of Mt. Mark, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.)

(25.) P. impricatum, Nutt.
Hand Hills and Cypress Hills, Alberta. (John Macoun.)

(26.) P. ConvoLvo.us, L. |
Common in fields and waste places from the Atlantic to
the Pacific.

(27.) P. scanDENS, L.
P. dumetorum, L., var. scandens, Gray.
From Nova Scotia to the Cypress Hills, Alberta.

(28.) P. cittnopE, Michx.
In pine woods and thickets from Nova Scotia to the Peace
River, Athabasca.

(29.) P. sacrrratoum, L.
From Prince Edward Island to the Saskatchewan.

(30.) P. ARIFOLIUM.
From Nova Scotia to Ontario.

210 Canadian Record of Science.

(31.) P. Virarnranoum, Linn.
All our specimens of this species were collected in
Ontario. Reported from Nova Scotia and Quebec.

POLYGONELLA ARTICULATA, Meisn.

Polygonum articulatum, Willd; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants
Vol. I., p. 409.

Sand dunes, Point Aux Pins, Lake Superior, 1869.
(John Macoun.) Specimens collected by Dr. Richardson,
and labelled “‘ Arctic North America,” are probably from
the same locality.

A SATISFACTORY SULPHURETTED HYDROGEN
GENERATOR.
Nevit Norton Evans, M. A. So.

To those who have much to do with general qualitative
analysis or with the quantitative determination of metals, a
sulphuretted hydrogen generator which is self-regulating,
economical, and always ready for use is a desideratum. Of
late years there have appeared in various chemical publica-
tions suggestions for the construction or improvement of
such generators, but most if not all of these still possess
one serious defect: when the generator is out of action, the
separation of acid and sulphide is effected wholly or in part
by the pressure of the gas; the gas, however, being soluble
to a considerable extent in the dilute acid employed, slowly
goes into solution and, by the diffusion of this solution
through the mass of liquid, the gas finds its way to the air.
Thus, there is a continuous though slow disappearance of
sulphuretted hydrogen and a corresponding action of the
acid on the sulphide. To prevent this, and have a gener-
ator which absolutely stops working when not in use, the
separation of acid and sulphide must be effected in some
other way than by the pressure of the sulphuretted
hydrogen. .

Many years ago an excellent apparatus was devised for
this purpose by Prof. Clemens Winkler of the Royal Saxon

Sulphuretted Hydrogen Generator. 211

School of Mines, Freiberg, Saxony, and is still in use in the
chemical laboratory of that institution. While working
there I was much struck with the thorough effectiveness of
the generator and, as the pattern does not seem to be wide-
ly known, the following description of a generator, which I
constructed myself, working upon the same _ principles,
though much smaller in size, is given.

The frame of the apparatus is made of 2}x{ in. pine, and
is 3 feet high. Pieces seen in end section at A, serve as
feet; cross pieces nailed on
front and back at B and C,
and a piece flat on the top,
complete the frame. LE is
a Winchester bottle, 3 to 4
litres, with the bottom cut
off, and with its neck be-
tween the cross pieces at B,
which are cut away a little
on the inside to allow the
bottle to rest firmly; at D,
on either side, a small block
cut out to fit the convex of
the bottle holds the latter
firmly in place. Over the
bottle is placed a piece of
sheet lead bent down at the
edges so as to fit outside the
bottle and pierced centrally
with a 22 in. hole through
which the cylinder F' passes.
Into the neck of EH is fitted a
cork through which passes a
SCALE | glass tube carrying a short
1 Foor, rubber tube closed by a little

piece of glass rod. Fis apiece of 2 in. lead pipe 10 in.
long passing snugly through a circular piece of wood H, 14
in. thick, over the top of which it is flanged out to prevent
its slipping through. In cutting off the bottom of F, 4 pro-

\
\

912 Canadian Record of Science.

jecting tongues of lead are left each 1 in, long and } in.
wide; these are turned up inside the pipe and upon their
ends rests loosely a perforated circular piece of lead repre-
sented in the figure by the dotted line, Into the top of F
is fitted a rubber cork through which a glass tube carry-
ing a glass tap passes. (A well-greased wooden plug carry-
ing a glass tube provided with a rubber tube and screw
pinch-cock will answer.) This is connected by a rubber
tube with a wash-bottle as represented, and the.wash-bottle
with adelivery-tube. Into H are screwed two screw-eyes to
which is fastened a loop of cord which in turn passes
through a loop on the end of a cord passing over the two
pulleys and down to the cleat.

To set the apparatus in action, about 2 litres of dilute
sulphuric acid, 1 in 10, is placed in the Winchester, and
100 grms. of iron sulphide in pieces about the size of a bean
in the lead cylinder. ‘The latter is lowered into the acid
and the glass tap slowly opened until a current of gas of
the rapidity desired is obtained. To put the apparatus out
of action, the tap is closed and the lead cylinder raised
until its bottom edge just touches the surface of the acid.
If acid stronger than 1 in 10 is used ferrous sulphate
crystallizes out in such quantity as to render the cleaning
of the generator difficult. There are several brands of iron
sulphide on the market, some of which are quite unsuitable
for this generator as they are very dense and require
stronger acid for their decomposition than that recom-
mended above; a clean porous variety (sold in large
lumps) is to be preferred.

The apparatus described above was employed for three
months in the Chemical Laboratory of McGill College and
gave the greatest satisfaction; the reason that its use was
then discontinued being its replacement by a much larger
“machine” working upon the same principle; and which
for more than two years has given entire satisfaction.
That the “machine” works economically may be seen
from the fact that during the session of 1893-94, with about
ninety students working in the laboratories, only about

Apatite Bearing Rocks. 2138

three litres of sulphuric acid were used in the production of
sulphuretted hydrogen. A charge of acid and sulphide
placed in the “machine” last April and used a few times
remained in the apparatus during the holidays and in Sep-
tember, without any addition, produced a copious and
steady stream of sulphuretted hydrogen. The smaller ap-
paratus has been employed with equally satisfying results
for the production of hydrogen gas.

THE APATITE BEARING Rocks OF THE OTTAWA
DISTRICT.
R. W. Exits. LL.D., F.R.S.C.

The present depressed condition of the foreign market
for phosphate has naturally tended to lessen the interest
which for some years pertained to the subject of Canadian
Apatite. But while this has been true to some extent, the
great amount of capital invested in this direction, and the
fact that the Canadian deposits are presumably among the
richest of their kind in the world, so far as yet known at
least, as well as the most convenient of access, will always
make the question of the availability of Canadian phosphate
one of very considerable importance both to the mining
and commercial communities, For while the immense de-
posits found in Carolina and Florida have, through their
cheapness of extraction and other causes, been largely re-
sponsible for the present unsatisfactory condition of this
industry, it is very doubtful if these southern sources of
supply will prove to be permanent or even remunerative
for any great length of time; and unless other deposits,
equally extensive or accessible be found, attention must re-
vert to the Laurentian apatites as a source of supply for
this mineral fertilizer.

Much has been written from time to time on the subject
of Canadian apatites and their associated rocks by experts
from Canada, the United States and Hngland, and the
literature in this direction, if collected, would form a fair
sized volume. Much of this has been reviewed and pub-

214 Canadian Record of Science.

lished in condensed form by the writer in his report on the
‘Mineral Resources of Quebec.”' From these papers it is
evident that a very considerable diversity of opinion has
prevailed as to the origin, mode of occurrence and geological
relations of this mineral. Thus while some have main-
tained that it is the result of organic agencies and urge in
support of this view, the presence in the Laurentian of the
peculiar form Eozoon, regarded by Sir Wm. Dawson, Drs.
Hunt, Carpenter and others, as representing the earliest
known traces of life, as well as in the presence of great beds
of iron ore and graphite, others have supposed that the
mineral was the result of the action of a solution, bear-
ing fluorine and phosphorus in some unknown combina-
tion upon a bed of limestone, and that this solution was
distributed by means of side fissures through the main
mass of the rock in such a way that a portion of the lime-
stone of the bed was converted into a fluor-apatite. By
others again the opinion has been expressed that apatite
has been derived principally from the pyroxenite in which
it is generally found, presumably by a process of segrega-
tion ; that the pyroxenite is of igneous origin, and formed

either as submarine injections while the Laurentian rocks.

‘were being laid down or as subsequent intrusions, even
though it now presents certain aspects of a bedded rock.

The eruptive vrigin of the apatite found in Norway has
long been maintained by the Norwegian geologists
Brogger and Reusch. The associated rocks in that country
apparently possess many of the same characters as those
in Canada, and occur under very similar conditions.
Among Canadian geologists the same view as regards the
Canadian mineral was strongly put forward by Mr. Eugene
Coste, formerly of the Geol. Survey, in his report for
1887-88, and subsequently by Dr. Selwyn in the report for
the ensuing year, who says: “There is absolutely no evi-
dence whatever of the organic origin of apatite, or that the
deposits have resulted from ordinary mechanical sedimenta-
tion processes. They are clearly connected, for the most
part, with the basic eruptions of Archean date.”

. Rep. Geol. Sur., 1888-89, Vol, iv, Dp. 88-110 K.

3 Apatite Bearing Rocks. 215

The apparent conflict of opinions on this subject is
doubtless to some extent due~to the diverse views which
have been held regarding the composition and structure of
the Laurentian rocks themselves. These, in the early days
of their study, were supposed by Sir Wm. Logan and his
co-workers to be very largely sedimentary in their nature,
and formed just as are the sandstones and fossiliferous
limestones of more recent formations. In the stratified
sedimentary complex, was included not only the crystalline
limestone, gneiss and quartzite, but also the anorthosites, the
pyroxenes, feldspars and many of the syenitic rocks which
subsequent careful study in the field and laboratory have
shown to have originated in a very different manner. That
the greater part of the latter group is intrusive in the strati-
fied gneiss and limestones is now very clearly established,
while the present highly altered condition of the gneiss
and associated limestone is doubtless due, in part at least,
to the great processes of metamorphism which have taken
place during the ages subsequent to their deposition as
also, to some extent, to the action of the subsequent in-
trusive masses.

It is impossible here to go into any elaborate discussion
as to the origin of the Laurentian rocks, further than may
be absolutely necessary for a clear understanding of the
subject under discussion. It may however be said from the
evidence at present at our disposal that they have been pro-
duced in two ways; for while it is clear that a very large
proportion, by far the largest in certain areas, possesses the
characters of igneous rocks, certain well stratified areas
of limestones with associated quartzite and gneiss, present
very many’ of the features of sedimentary rocks, especially
in their present arrangements, and have presumably been
deposited through aqueous agencies. The evidence from
organic remains usually found in sedimentary rocks, is,
however, wanting, but this may be due to the absence of
life on the globe in those early periods of the world’s his-
tory, for, if such existed, their traces have entirely disap-
peared from some cause not yet definitely known.

\

216 Canadian Record of Science.

Bearing in mind, therefore, the fact that the Laurentian
rocks must be regarded as divisible into two distinct
groups, we find from their study in the field, certain
features in regard to the occurrence of apatite which serve
to throw much light upon its early history. It may be
very conclusively stated, that for the most part at least it
is confined to pyroxenic rocks, although certain writers
have asserted that it is found equally in the stratified gneiss
and limestone formations. It may, however, be said that
after a careful study of all available openings in the Ottawa
district, no locality has yet been seen where apatite occurs
in workable quantity, or in fact in any way except as
occasional scattered crystals in either the limestone or
gneiss. The conflicting statement as to its presence in the
limestone seems to have arisen largely from the occurrence
in many of the pyroxene dykes of masses of calcite, gen-
erally of a pinkish color, some of which are of large ex-
tent but all strictly integral portions of the pyroxene,
through which scattered crystals of mica and apatite are
distributed, and it is from this calcite that the most perfect
crystals of both these minerals are obtained.

The confusion as to the mode of occurrence has there-
fore in this case presumably arisen from a lack of care on
the part of the earlier observers in separating the mineral
calcite from the limestone formation proper, which is en-
tirely different in character and has evidently been formed
in an entirely different manner. The reputed occurrence
in gneiss can also be traced to the opinion formerly held
regarding the nature of the pyroxene bands, which re-
garded these as of purely sedimentary origin and as consti-
tuting aregularly interstratified portion of the gneiss forma-
tion, where it was known under the name of pyroxenic
gneiss. In the limestone formation proper occasional
small crystals of apatite are found where small dykes of
pyroxene penetrate the rock, and still more rarely crystals
occur in that portion of the gneiss in close proximity to the
intrusive mass.

As regards the mode of occurrence of the pyroxene itself

Apatite Bearing Rocks. 217

we are forced to conclude, that, like the great
-masses of syenite and the numerous intrusions of dole-
‘rite, it is also of igneous origin. That it is clearly
intrusive in its character is evidenced by its occur-
rence in dyke-like masses and bands which sometimes
cut directly across the regular stratification of the banded
gneiss and limestone, and at others traverse these along the
bedding planes for some distance and then abruptly change
their course after the manner of other instrusions. In some
places a gneissic structure is perceived in the pyroxene,
but this, as in the case of the syenites, is doubtless a foliation
due to great pressure. The pyroxene dykes are of very
varying proportions, sometimes extending for long distances
as narrow belts of from one to fifty or more feet in thick-
ness, at other times presenting the form of great hills, where
they are mixed with syenitic and dioritic rocks. The apatite
bearing dykes are frequently cut by later dykes of syenite,
diorite, feldspar or trap, beautiful examples of this interlacing
being furnished at many of the openings throughout the
mining districts on the Lievre and Gatineau rivers.
Various opinions have also been expressed as to the form
in which the apatite deposits occur, By some they are
stated to be in beds, others assert that they present rather
the features peculiar to vein structure, while yet others
maintain that they partake of the nature of both beds and
veins. By far the greater part of these opinions is based
upon the assumption that the containing rocks are sedi-
mentary gneiss and limestone, the intrusive character of the
pyroxene being for the most part ignored. Thus Dr. Har-
rington in his very exhaustive report on the subject which
is found in the report of the Geological Survey for 1877-78
thinks that the views of the Norwegian geologists as to the
eruptive origin of apatite deposits, cannot apply to those
found in Canada, and supports rather the view put forth by
Sir Wm. Dawson that the mineral has been produced prob-
ably through organic agencies. In its present condition he
thinks that while confined almost entirely to pyroxenic
rocks, the structure of the deposits partakes more of the
16

218 Canadian Record of Science.

nature of true veins than of beds. Dr. Penrose’ also shows
that the mineral occurs almost without exception in associ-
ation with pyroxenic or hornblendic rock, especially in the
Quebec district, where he says ‘the phosphate has never
yet been found without being associated with pyroxene rock
and possibly often of vein origin.” He alsostates that ‘‘the
pyroxene is never found distinctly bedded, though occasion-
ally a series of parallel lines can be traced through it, which
while possibly the remains of stratification are probably
often joint planes ; and sometimes when the pyroxene has
been weathered, apparent signs of bedding are brought out,
which are often parallel with the bedding of the country
rock.” |

Sufficient has probably been said to warrant the opinion
that the pyroxenes are as truly intrusive in their character
as many of the other rock masses such as syenites, diorites,
&e., which are found so abundantly throughout the great
Laurentian area. So strongly impressed was the writer by
the study of the relations of the several rock formations as
presented in the mining districts of Buckingham, Temple-
ton, &c., that in 1892, a number of the most interesting oc-
currences were carefully photographed under the direction
of Mr. H. N. Topley, and subsequently colored to clearly
represent the different rock masses.

In this way the contrast between the generally pinkish
or greyish banded gneiss, and the green massive pyroxene
was beautifully shown and the abrupt contact of the two
well brought out. It may be said that these colored views
were exhibited by the Geol. Survey Dept. at the World’s
Fair, in Chicago, where they were greatly admired by those
interested in this branch of geological work ; the evidence
thus presented being heid to be most conclusive as to the
intrusive character of the apatite bearing rock.

Among places in the Lievre district where these contacts
can be especially well studied may be mentioned the mines
of the Philadelphia Company, the North Star, the Lon-
don and the Little Rapids mines on the eastern side of the

1 See Bulletin of the U. S. Geol. Survey, 1888.

Apatite Bearing Rocks. 219

river, and the Crown Hill and High Rock mines on the west
side. At the Little Rapid mine the dyke carrying the apatite
cuts the surrounding well banded gneiss at an angle of thirty
degrees, while on the ridge to the south another largedyke
of fifty feet or more in breadth cuts the stratified rock at
an even greater angle. At the North Star mine, the strike
of the principal dyke is nearly with that of the gneiss, but
in the most southerly pit, the gneiss has been heaved up
and bent round a portion of the dyke, the contact of the two
kinds of rock being very sharply defined. At the London
and Philadelphia mines the intersections of the pyroxene
across the strike are well shown, as also at the High Rock
workings, where there is sometimes a perfect net work of
dykes of different kinds, small masses of the stratified
gneiss being enclosed in the intrusions. It may be re-
marked that at all these mines the country rock is banded
gneiss of the greyish quartzose variety, or what we regard
as the sedimentary portion which underlies the crystalline
limestone formation.

At the Crown Hill, in the pit on the west side of the
main ridge, the capping of the gneiss upon a portion of the
pyroxene is well seen, the mass of the dyke being exposed
at the surface of the hill, a short distance further east.

As regards the manner in which the apatite occurs in the
pyroxene, it may be said that in nearly every case through-
out the entire mining district the phosphate is found in
that portion of the dyke contiguous to the surrounding
gneiss. In certain large dykes as at the North Star it was
found along both margins of the intrusion. Ja some cases
a certain amount of regularity in its distribution was ob-
served for a short distance, but this was not long main-
tained. Frequent branches or spurs are given off into the
surrounding pyroxene, and the deposits as a whole are ex-
ceedingly irregular, sometimes opening out into great
masses of several hundreds of tons, while at others they
dwindle down to mere strings, which cannot be profitably
extracted. The central portion of the dykes are for the
most part barren. No defined foot-wall can be observed,

220 Canadian Record of Science.

the apatite having a very irregular outline, while in cases
where a foot-wall was supposed to exist this was found to
be due to the presence of a cross-dyke. The hanging-wall
where reported consisted in most cases of the edges of the
gneiss, the planes of stratification in some cases meeting
the apatite bearing portion of the dyke at very consider-
able angle.

An important feature was observed at several of the
mines, tending to show that subsequent intrusions of dior-
itic or doloritic rock have apparently exercised a marked
influence upon the occurrence of apatite in workable
quantity. Thus at the Ktna mine a large dyke of pyroxene,
which extends in a southwest direction towards the Emerald
mine and on the prolongation of which the latter is pos-
sibly situated, is intersected nearly at right angles by a
heavy dyke of dolerite. Along the line of contact con-
siderable quantities of iron pyrites have been developed,
and the apatite which has been mined at this place toa
depth of not far from 200 feet is found in that portion of
the pyroxene adjacent to the dolerite intrusion, along which
the workable deposit of phosphate apparently extends. A
somewhat similar occurrence in the case of mica was ob-
served at the Clemow & Powell mine in the Township of
Hincks, where the main mass of pyroxene which intersects
crystalline limestone is in turn cut across by a dyke of
syenitic rock, principally composed of feldspar and quartz,
alongside of which great masses of mica crystals, often of
very large size, have developed in the pyroxene. This
feature of mica and apatite occurring as the apparent result
of a second intrusion, has been also noticed at other points,
both in the Gatineau and Lievre districts.

With regard to the age of the different intrusions, the
apatite bearing pyroxene appears to be the oldest. In-
stances, as already noted, are frequent where this is
clearly broken across by dykes of feldspar and syenite,
which have been in turn cut by trappean rock. Other
syenite masses are apparently of more recent date than
the trap dykes, as these are in several cases observed to be

Apatite Bearing Rocks. 221

| Viti, seeecwarns
cut through by the former. The syenite in places changes
color and character to some extent when passing from the
main mass into smaller dykes or spurs, especially where
these latter traverse the crystalline limestone, in which
case it often becomes a groyish white. This aspect can be
well studied at Papineauville among other places.

These intrusions do not, however, carry apatite, at least
in any observed case, though they often contain fine crys-
tals of mica. When penetrating gneiss the feldspar dyke,
if mica bearing, carries muscovite, while the pyroxene dyke
carries phlogopite, which is often associated with apatite.
This joint occurrence of mica and apatite is quite frequent
at certain mines, more especially in the northern Templeton
area.

The origin of the apatite itself has not yet been conclu-
sively settled. From its manner of occurrence and associ-
ations it would appear to be due to chemical agency rather
than to organic. In some of the smaller crystals which
occur with mica in the'pinkish calcite, the interior is fre-
quently found to be composed of pink calcite, itself un-
changed to apatite. These frequently penetrate crys-
tals of mica, and cracks or fissures in the mica crystal
also cortain small quantities of the calcite. All pyroxene
contains calcite in proportions varying from twenty to nearly
thirty per cent., and since its intrusion into the gneiss
must have occurred along lines of fracture or least resist-
ance, it would appear reasonable to suppose that vapors,
charged with some form of phosphoric and fluoric acids, as-
cended along such lines. Thus in certain portions of the
mass in proximity to the margin of the dykes these vapors
would tend to impregnate the softened rock, and in this
way through chemical processes, the phosphate of lime
might be produced. That the origin of the mineral is
deep seated is clearly shown by its presence in the pyroxene
at great depths. Thus it has been clearly shown in the
working of the North Star mine that the quantity found in
the lowest level at a depth of 600 feet from the surface
was quite equal to that obtainable from the upper . levels,

222 Canadian Record of Science.

while the same mode of occurrence near the margin of the
dyke was found. So also at the High Rock mine appar-
ently the most productive ground is that recently worked
near the base of the hill, some 400 feet below the workings
at the summit. There does not appear therefore to be any
diminution of the mineral as we descend so long as the con-
ditions for its occurrence continue favorable, and it might
upon this theory be generally stated that the only limit in
depth at which the mineral may be profitably mined will
be fixed by the cost of its extraction.

Notes ON CANADIAN Fossit, BRYOZOA !
By H, M. Amt.

Tq.

Prof. Ulrich is well known to all students of North
American palseozoic paleontology as being an eminent
authority on Bryozoa. LHver since the year 1881 his re-
searches and publications on the interesting material which
occurs in such abundance in the Cincinnati and allied groups
have been received and read with interest, inasmuch as
they threw a mass of new light on a humble yet important
and but little known class of fossils in America. This
last contribution from the pen of Mr. Ulrich is a hand-
some and beautiful memoir on the Lower Silurian Bryozoa
of the State of Minnesota. Whilst the 237 pages of text
and the 28 excellent plates accompanying the same are
devoted especially to Minnesota, Bryozoa, Prof. Ulrich
has not deemed it out of place to introduce here and there,
for purposes of comparison and observation, certain marked
forms coming from other localities. Among the latter may
be mentioned a goodly number from Canadian rocks. The
purpose of the present notice is to point these out for refer-
ence sake as work bearing on the palsontology of Canada.

1 The Bryozoa of the Lower Silurian in Minnesota. By E. O. Uirich. From

Vol. III. of the Final Report of the Geological and Natural History Survey of
Minnesota. 237 pp. Minneapolis 1893.

ee Eh i

i

athe Sy

a

Sr,

¥

Canadian Fossil Bryozoa. 223

In Prof Ulrich’s memoir and in this notice the various
forms mentioned are classified under the following sub-
orders and genera of Bryozoa:

(1.) Crenostomata, Busk.
To which Ascodictyon of our Devonian rocks of Western
Ontario belongs.

(2.) Cyctosromata, Busk.
Including the genera Stomatopora, Proboscina, Hederella,
ete., from various horizons.

(3.) TReposromata, Ulrich.

Including the Monticuliporoid genera, Monticulipora,
Prasopora, Dekayia, Callopora, Stellipora, Stenopora,
Amplexotrypa, Batostoma, Spatiopora, Fistulipora, Botryl-
lopora and allied forms from various horizons ranging from
the Ordovician to the Carboniferous of Canada.

(4.) CryprostomatTa, Vine.

Including twelve families and eighty genera of which the
following are represented in species from Canada: Ptilo-
dictya, Clathropora, Phenopora, Graptodictya, Arthropora,
Dicranopora, Pachydictya, Stictopora, Coscinium, Teenio-
pora, Rhinopora, Helopora, Sceptropora, Arthroclema,
Thamnotrypa, Fenestella, Archimedes, Phylloporina.

(5.) Cartostomata, Busk.

Including only three genera, as yet, of which the first
Paleschara, Hall, is the only Canadian form known to the
writer.

Taking the forms obtained from various places in

Canada which are described or figured by Prof. Ulrich in
this volume we find the following :—

Lower Silurian Bryozoa from Canadian rocks.
A.—CyctostomatTa, Busk.
I. Genus StoMATOPORA, Brown.

1. Stomatopora inflata, Hall, occurs in the Trenton lime-
stone of Ottawa, Canada.

224 - Canadian Record of Science.

II. Genus Proposorna, Audouin.

2. Proboscina frondosa, Ulrich. Recorded from the
Ordovician strata of Stony Mountain, Manitoba, and pre-
viously recorded in Contrib. to the Micro-Pal. of Canada,
Part I1., p. 28.

B.—CryprostomMata, Vine.
III. Genus Pacuypiotya, Ulrich.

3. Pachydictya acuta, Hall, p. 155.

4, Pachydictya triserialis, Ulrich, p. 159. This form is
described “as yet known only from the Trenton limestone
of Montreal, Canada.” It is figured on Plate X., figs..11 to
14.

IV. Genus Prinopictrya, Lonsdale.

Here, Prof. Ulrich classifies the known forms of Ptilo-
dictya and gives the following Canadian species :

Section a.—NSpecies without monticules.

5. P. gigantea, Nicholson, Corniferous, Canada.

6. P. Canadensis. Billings, Hudson R. group, Canada.

7. P. gladiola, Billings, H. R. and Anticosti groups,
Canada.

&. P. (?) sulcata, Billings, Anticosti group, Canada.

Section b.—Species with monticules.

9. P. Whiteavesii, Ulrich, H. R. group, Manitoba.

V. Genus Escuaropora, Hall.

10. #. recta, Hall, Trenton limestone, Canada.
VI. Genus Poanopora, Hall.

11. P. incipiens, Ulrich, from the Trenton limestone of
Montreal, Canada, where it was collected by the late Mr. T.
C. Curry, of the Peter Redpath Museum.

VII. Genus Arruropora. Ulrich.

12. Arthropora bifurcata, Ulrich. A species slédely re-
lated to if not identical with this is said to have been found
in the Trenton limestone of Canada, the precise locality not
being indicated.

VIII. Genus SticroporeLia, Ulrich.
13. Stictoporella exigua. Ulrich. Trenton and Canadian

Canadian Fossil Bryozoa. 225

are the horizon and locality respectively to which. Prof.
Ulrich has ascribed this species.

14, Stictoporella proavia (Coscinium, Biheoete as of
Billings) from the “Trenton” of. ‘“ Canada.”

IX. Genus ArTHRocLEMA, Billings.

15. Arthroclema pulchellum, Billings. ‘Trenton limestone,
Hull, Que.

16. Arthroclema Billingsi, Ulich. This is recorded from
the Trenton limestone of Ottawa, Canada.

X. Genus Nemaropora, Ulrich.

17. Nematopora ovalis, Ulrich. Trenton limestone, Mont-
real, Canada.

XI. Genus PHytuoporina, Ulrich.

18. Phylloporina Trentonensis, Nicholson. No Canadian
locality is indicated in this volume, but the writer has seen
several specimens of P. T’rentonensis, Nich., from the Tren-
ton limestone of Montreal in the Peter Redpath Museum of
McGill College, and these were named by Prof. EH. O.
Ulrich.

C.—Trepostomata, Ulrich.

XII. Genus Monticuipora, d’Orbigny.

19. Monticulipora Wetherbyi, Ulrich, This species is re-
corded by Prof. Ulrich as coming from the limestone beds
St. Andrews, Manitoba.

XIII. Genus Homoraypa, Ulrich.

20. Homotrypa similis, Foord. ‘The types are from the
Trenton at Ottawa, Canada.” ‘The species was described
by Mr. A. H. Foord, F. G.S., on p. 10, “Contr. to Micro-
Pal. of the Cambro-Silurian Rocks of Canada,” Ottawa, 1883.

XIV. Genus Prasopora, Nicholson and Etheridge, Jr.

21. Prasopora simulatrix, Ulrich; var. orientalis, Ulrich,
Canada. This new var. of P. simulatriz, Ulrich, has been
created to receive such Canadian and New York forms as
showed a number of distinctive microscopic characters and

\

226 Canadian Record of Science.

was founded on a form referred to Monticulipora (Diplotrypa)
Whiteavesti, Nicholson. It is interesting to note that Mr.
Ulrich thinks that ‘this species (P. simulatrix var. orient-
alis, Ulrich) may really be the one referred to by Vanuxem |
in 1842 (Geol. 3d Distr., N. Y., p. 46), when he speaks of
“The puff-ball favosites (avosites lycopodites) as being
highly characteristic and in great numbers in the Trenton
limestone of New York.” Mr. Ulrich further states that
“the variety orientalis is common in the Trenton limestone
at Ottawa, Peterboro and other localities in Canada,” and
in the figures on p. 248 he quotes from Canadian localities
a number of characteristic species which he there (loc. cit.)
figures as follows : :

21. Prasopora Selwyni, Nicholson (fig. 15a and b). This
species is restricted, in this volume, to a particular type,
such as was originally described by Nicholson from the
Trenton limestone of Peterboro, Ontario, Canada, and
Prof. Ulrich adds that “ Foord says the species is abundant
throughout the Trenton formation at Ottawa, Canada.
Also that it has been found in the upper beds of the Chazy
at Nepean (Hog’s Back, teste H. M. A.) near Ottawa.

22. Prasopora oculata, Foord (figs. 15¢c and d). This in-
teresting form, which was originally described by Foord in
his “Contr. Micro-Pal. Cambro.-Silur. Rocks, Canada, p.
11,” as coming from the Trenton formation at Ottawa and
Hull, Canada, has been recorded by Ulrich from several
localities in Minnesota.

In connection with this species another Canadian Praso-
pora is referred to as being closely related, viz.:

23. Prasopora affinis, Foord, also from the Trenton forma-
tion of Canada.

Prasopora affinis, Foord, is here mentioned as being
closely related to P. Selwyni, Nicholson, the characteristic
difference separating P. oculata, P. affinis and P. Selwyni
being briefly and clearly outlined. All three species have
been discovered in the Trenton and Galena shales of Minne-
sota.

Canadian Fossil Bryozoa. — 22

-I

XV. Genus Mrsorrypa, Ulrich.

This genus was been founded to receive a number of forms
usually referred to the genus Diplotrypa by Foord, Nichol-
son, Ami and Ulrich himself. The following species of
Mesotrypa from Canada are recorded:

24. Mesotrypa Quebeoensis, Ami (fig. 15e and f, p. 248.)
The type of this species described by the writer! from the
hard compact and indurated limestone bands of Cote
d’Abraham, Quebec City, Canada, is here recorded (p. 259)
from the Galena shales at Decorah, Iowa, also from “shales
of the Trenton group at Burgin and Danville, Kentucky,”
and also from ‘‘the Trenton limestone at Trenton Falls,
New York.”

25. Mesotrypa Whiteavesi, Nicholson, sp. (fig. 15g and h),
This species was originally described from the Trenton
limestone of Peterboro, Ont., Canada, and is here referred
by Prof. Ulrich for the first time to his new genus Meso-
trypa. Since this species was described by Nicholson, Foord
and others have discovered it in other localities in Canada,
including Ottawa, Ont., and Hull, Que., in the Trenton
limestone of both localities.

Besides the above species of Mesotrypa Ulrich mentions
casually, but does not describe elaborately, as in other cases,
the following species from Canada :

26. Mesotrypa regularis, Foord. This species was de-
scribed in Contrib. Micro-Pal. Cambro-Silur. Rocks, Can.,
pp. 18 and 14, and obtained by Mr. Thomas C. Weston in
the “ Trenton formation at Ottawa.”

XVI. Genus Ertporrypa, Ulrich.

27. Hridotrypa mutabilis, Ulrich. Recorded by Ulrich
from the Trenton limestone of Ottawa, Canada, and from a
large number of localities in Wisconsin, lowa, Tennessee,
Kentucky and Minnesota.

XVII. Genus Cattopora, Hall.

28. Callopora multitabulata, Ulrich. Of this species,

which Mr. Ulrich first described in the “ Fourteenth Ann.

1 Can. Record of Science, Montreal, April, 1892, p. 101.

228 Canadian Record of Science.

Rep. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn., Minneapolis, 1886,. p.
100,” the following remark is made: “The same species
apparently occurs at Ottawa, Canada.”’ From this state-
ment I would conclude that Prof. Ulrich has amongst his
material from Ottawa a form which he refers with a cer-
tain amount of uncertainty to the above species.

XVIII. Genus Hemrppracma, Ulrich.

29. Hemiphragma Ottawaense, Foord. This species was
first described by Foord' as Batostoma Ottawaense from

the Black River and Trenton formations of Canada in the*

Ottawa River Valley.

XIX. Genus Monorrypa, Nicholson.

30. Monotrypa undulata, Nicholson. This species is the
_ type of the genus Monotrypa (pars), Nicholson, as restricted
by Prof. Ulrich. In has been recorded from Canada, from
the Lorraine (= Hudson River) rocks of Toronto and other
localities in Canada.

31. Monotrypa (? Chetetes) cumulata, Ulrich. This
species is for the first time described by Prof. Ulrich in
this interesting memoir on pp. 307 and 308, and is recorded
from the ‘Trenton limestone of Canada,”

XX. Genus BytHorrypa, Ulrich.

32. Bythotrypa laxata, Ulrich. This species was first

described and recorded from the Trenton formation of St.
Andrews, Manitoba, Canada, in “Contrib. Micro-Pal.
Cambr.-Sil. Rocks Can., 1889, part II, p. 37.” It was there
doubtfully referred to the genus Fistulipora, but on examin-
ing large collections of the species Ulrich was led to regard
this a new genus, which he founded upon this species as the
type, a prototype of Histulipora and gave it a new generic
designation.

XXIT. Genus Dramesopora, Hall.
33. Diamesopora Trentonensis, Ulrich. From the Trenton

limestone at Ottawa, Canada,
The text is accompanied by twenty-eight full page. guarto

1 Contrib. Micro-Pal. Cambro-Silur. Rocks Canada, Cttawa, 1883, p, 18.

~~ i si ee at

“~

Canadian Fossil Bryozoa. 229

plates of illustrations drawn on stone from nature and from
sections by Prof. E. O. Ulrich himself. They are excellent
and give, as a rule, all the necessary views required where-
with to determine the generic as well as specific characters
described in the text or observed in related species described
elsewhere.

It follows then from the above digest made of Prof.
Ulrich’s work on the Lower Silurian Bryozoa of Minnesota
that thirty-three references to Canadian species are found
belonging to twenty-one generic forms.

i

In his previous elaborate work entitled : -‘ PAL ZoNTOLOGY
or Ixurnors, Part II., Section VI., PALaozioc Bryozoa, by
K. O. Ulrich, pp. 283 to 688, the following is a list of species
of fossil bryozoa therein recorded from Canadian localities :

1. Protocrisina exigua, Ulrich, Trenton, Montreal, Que.
(= Gorgonia |? | perantiqna, Hall, 1847.)

2. Leioclema minutum, Rominger [?] Western Ontario.
(= Callopora minutissima, Nicholson, 1875.) Devonian.

3. Batostomella Trentonensis, Nicholson, Trenton lime-
stone of Ontario.

4 Botryllopora socialis, Nicholson, Hamilton formation,
Arkona, Ontario, Canada.

5. Arthroclema pulchellum, Billings, Trenton of Canada.

6. Helopora fragilis, Hall, Clinton formation, Hamilton,
Ont., Canada. (Fig. d, p. 643.)

These make in all twenty-seven genera and thirty-nine
species from Canada.

Orrawa, June 18th, 1894.

930 Canadian Record of Science.

THE RIDEAU LAKES.
By A. T. DrumMmonp.

The term Rideau Canal is rather a misnomer. If we ex-
cept the five miles of actual canal between the Dufferin
Bridge at Ottawa and Hogsback, and. again, the one mile or
more each of excavation at Poonamalie and Newboro, the
whole one hundred and twenty six miles of water route
between Ottawa. and Kingston now comprise merely two
rivers and a chain of lakes—the Rideau River, which, flow-
ing for sixty five miles on the one side of the watershed,
falls at Ottawa into the Ottawa River; the Cataraqui River,
which, descending for eighteen miles on the other side, falls
at Kingston into Lake Ontario; and, connecting the head-
waters of these two rivers, a continuous group of nine
beautiful lakes, each lying close to the next and all more or
less studded with islands.

Canal journeys are slow and often monotonous. The
tourist, whose memories of the beautiful in Canadian river
scenery are associated with the Thousand Islands, and who
when speeding down the rapids of the St. Lawrence has
observed, in striking contrast, the tedious progress through
the St. Lawrence canals of the returning steamers as they
wend their way back again to the upper lakes, is hardly
prepared for the information that, inland, on what is,
officially, but, by a misnomer, known as the Rideau Canal,
there is for fifty miles a succession of lake scenery more
beautiful and more varied than that of the Thousand
Islands. And yet it is so. These Rideau Lakes were
better known fifty years ago than now. With the opening
of the St. Lawrence canals and the construction of rail-
ways, the Rideau route ceased to be a main thoroughfare,
and is now only locally known.

The character of the scenery here is largely due to the
geological features of the country. The cafion at Kings_
ton Mills which forms the bed of the Cataraqui River, is
walled by low Laurentian hills of 150 to 200 feet in height,
and shows in the bevelled edges of the gneiss near the

The Rideau Lakes. 231

water’s edge, as well as in the worn crests of these hills,
that it has been at one time the track of an ice flow. The
softer sandstone cliffs skirting the same river on its
southern side in Pittsburg, have had their general S 36° W
direction made for them by the same great force. The
islands are generally the lower peaks and crests of the
Laurentian ridges which the waters of the lakes on finding
an outlet have left unsubmerged. And everywhere in the
immediate vicinity of the lakes these same Laurentian
ridges, green with trees and shrubs to the water’s edge,
add attractiveness to the scenery and especially beautify
the narrow passes and gorges which connect the different
lakes.

The Rideau lakes are, in part, artificial. Sand, Opinicon
and Indian Lakes and probably also Mud and Clear Lakes,
were no doubt somewhat enlarged by the dams at the out-
lets of the first three lakes, whilst Cranberry Marsh which
was one of the sources of the Cataraqui River, became by
the construction of the Brewer’s Mills dam, the long, nar-
row but picturesque Cranberry Lake, with every trace of a
marsh effaced, and the Whitefish River became, by the
erection of a dam near Morton, the equally long and nar-
row Whitefish Lake.

The effect of these last named dams being on the same
level has been to unite Cranberry and Whitefish Lakes
sufficiently for navigation purposes. How far they were
originally connected has been an open question. Lieut. H.
C. Frome, R.E., describing in the Royal Engineers’ Reports
in 1837, the original line of communication before the
canal was constructed, alludes to the route being through
Whitefish Lake and by a channel through a quantity of
marshy land which had been flooded by dams erected at
Whitefish Falls and at the Round Tail, the source of the
Cataraqui River. Mr. Andrew Drummond whose personal
experiences here date back to 1832 is of opinion that there
was a connection between them, and he writes as follows
in regard to the sources of the Cataraqui and Gananoque
Rivers and to the route of the Rideau Canal here!as origin-

332 Canadian Record of Science.

ally projected: “I think, originally, there was a flow from
Lougborough Lake into the Cataraqui through what was
then known by the name, not of Cranberry Lake, but of
Cranberry Marsh, which became a lake when the waters
‘were raised by the artificial dams at Brewer’s upper mill
and at Whitefish Lake. The latter, as far as my recollec-
tion serves, was considered the source of the Gananoque
River.”

“From a mere commercial point of view, the first en-
gineering report recommended the construction of the
Rideau navigation route by the way of the Whitefish or
Gananoque River, but the British Government decided that
it must be built by the Cataraqui River to Lake Ontario
direct, and not by an outlet on the St. Lawrence River,
where vessels would be more or less subject to annoyance
from the United States in time of war.”

The great importance of maintaining as far as possible
the level of Upper Rideau Lake, by conserving the waters
of its tributary lakes, has been forcibly illustrated during
the past summer. The long continued drought during
August led to the waters falling so low that steamboats
and barges drawing five feet constantly grounded in the
long, narrow cut at Newboro, and it became a question
whether navigation for the larger vessels would not have
in consequence to cease over the entire system. Thisisa
difficulty likely to occur more frequently in the future in
the Rideau Lakes on account of the gradual removal of
large sections of the surrounding forests by fire, and the
uncontrolled cutting down of even the smaller sizes of tim-
ber there by lumbermen.

A Ripeau LaKkes REsERvE.

What is needed here is a forest reserve around the sys-
tems of lakes which form the feeders of the Rideau Lakes.
By protecting the reserve from bush fires and absolutely
withdrawing it from settlement, the trees will be allowed
to grow again, and the accumulations from the melted
snows and from the summer rains which presently are
quickly drained off, will be held back within the forests and

The Rideau Lakes. 233

only gradually find their way to the lakes. As in other
sections of both Ontario and Quebec, the country here is
now reaping the results of a past unwise Government
policy under which no practical effort was made to protect
the forests from fires or to punish those who car elessly or
wantonly were the causes of these fires, and under which
the right of cutting timber on the Crown lands has been
freely sold with the object of securing for the Government
a present cash return, and without the slightest effort at
conserving the forests in order to make them a continuous
source of revenue in coming years. Though somewhat
late and only after so many of its townships had been
largely burned over, an effort has been made during recent
years by the Ontario Government in conjunction with the
lumbermen, to limit forest fires, but more or less apathy
still prevails in Quebec, and the general criminal law of the
Dominion still fails to grapple practically with the subject.
Nearly all forest fires are the result of criminal careless-
ness or of wanton destructiveness, and are therefore pre-
ventable. When will our Governments learn that by year
after year showing apathy over the burning of the coun-
try’s forests, they are wasting not only the country’s pre-
sent revenues but the revenues which would continue to be
derived from timber for scores of years to come.

Hereuts of THE Lake LEVELS.

Assuming the waters of Lake Ontario to be 237 feet
above the sea—some authorities mention 232 feet—the
heights above tide water of the different Rideau lakes and
of some of the upper lakes which supply them are, as de-
termined by the Government surveys, as follows:

Feet
MO Or Tiree eats Wacnnitcesessceovecsoeees 402
AJONVET ARICA S00 bs eso ccidensessdensse Mec waded: Sneek 398
ME ters UL ETV a eign gem esecnnceescveones 398
Opinicon oe dS er 386
STG Wiis Sas 6a ae A A re fit
RY Witeneii OT AMDOPEy 5c 525.is 0c. wc cccscesnee 31%
yer ae ok odin wid ve cksuintccwcussewdne 621
eR Mae tee ew ows wh clk odemiaens cnscccgdacccus 454.
a A at cas wves chan acne ss cacoeesosons 403
CanOG weary. cenesi deck seces se chaavhee Rr ek a tieneee 466

234 Canadian Record of Science.

DISTRIBUTION OF PoTsDAM SANDSTONE.

The recent surveys made by the railway engineers be-
tween Rideau and Elgin emphasize the suggestion I have
elsewhere made that the Potsdam sandstone has probably
had a wider distribution throughout this Laurentian
isthmus than was at first supposed. After leaving Rideau
Station on the Grand Trunk Railway, the sandstone is
met with on lot 9 in the 4th concession of Pittsburg
whence it continues to lot 11 in the 5th concession. The
beds furnish an excellent building stone. It appears again
in the middle of lot 12 in the 5th concession and continues
to lot 15 in the same concession when the gneiss again
takes its place, Further on, at Brewer's Mills, a few feet
of sandstone cap the low Laurentian ridge to the north of
the locks, and at the outlet of and at places around, Lough-
borough Lake a few miles farther north, and also around
Knowlton Lake, it is also found. Immediately beyond
Morton, on lots 4 and 5 in the 5th concessiou of South
Crosby, and at Jones Falls it reappears, at the latter place
forming cliffs of about 70 feet in height. The splendid
locks and dam at Jones Falls are built of sandstone. Hast
of Morton it probably underlies the broad stretch of flat
country lying between that village and Lyndhurst and
thence towards Seeley’s Bay. Beyond Lyndhurst about
Bass Lake and on the north side of Charleston Lake, it is
also met with. On the north western side of Lower
Rideau Lake and continuing to Perth aud thence north to
about the Mississippi River within a short distance of
Lanark, there is a broad display of the Potsdam sandstone
It appears also in South Elmsley, and at Portland in
Bastard has been used as a building material, though the
upper rocks in this vicinity may be of calciferous sand rock.
Among and in the neighborhood of the Thousand Islands,
the Potsdam sandstone occurs at one or two points on the
St. Lawrence side of the Township of Pittsburg, at and
around Gananoque, on the lower end of Howe Island, and
on Hay, Tidds, and parts of Round and Wellesley Islands,
whilst farther down the river, it appears near Alexandria

The Rideau Lakes. 935

Bay and continues at intervals to Brockville. There is
thus a widespread distribution of it in patches or small
areas nearly across the Laurentian isthmus which connects
the Adirondacks with the Laurentian country to the north-
ward, And in this locality where glacial action has been
so marked, we can imagine that these softer rocks may at
one time have had a greater development than now ap-
pears.
LAURENTIAN Rocks.

Writing generally of the Laurentian rocks in the Coun-
ties of Lanark, Leeds and Frontenac, the late Mr. H. G.
Vennor in the Geological Survey Report for 1870, charac-
terizes them as made up of granitoid gneisses, composed of
flesh colored feldspar, with grey quartz, greenish horn-
blende, and some mica, and much cut up by granitic veins.
They have, in places, great crystalline limestone bands
which can be traced continuously through two or three
townships, and sometimes they include broad areas of
granitic rocks containing red orthoclase and white quartz.

The economic minerals met with in the neighborhood of
the Rideau lakes are iron ore in large quantity at several
points, lead and yellow sulphuret of copper but not, thus
far, in paying quantities, phosphate of lime at numerous
points, mica, marble, granite for paving blocks, and thick
bedded sandstone for building material, The iron ore
generally, has assayed from 52 per cent. to 60 per cent. of
metallic iron, but is occasionally associated with 6 per
cent. to 12 per cent. of titanic acid and some sulphur.

The leading physical features of the country—the lakes,
the islands, the low overlooking hills—are all due to the
Laurentian rocks, and to the line of direction which these
hills or great ridges have taken. At Brewer’s Mills on the
Cataraqui River the direction is about N. 20° KE. From
this point to Seeley’s Bay their course is about N. 34° E.,
whilst south-east of Seeley’s Bay there are ridges lying N.
30° KE. A long, conspicuous gully here which has afforded
a probable opening to the engineers for location, takes,
- however, a course, for a considerable distance, of N. 82° KH.

236 Canadian Record of Science.

The general dip is towards the St. Lawrence River and the
small streams south of Seeley’s Bay are tributary to the
Gananoque River and not to Cranberry and Whitefish
Lakes.

FLORA.

The flora of the country surrounding the lakes is essen-
tially that common to Central and Eastern Ontario and to
the vicinity of Montreal. Hven the Western Ontario
peninsula would differ from it rather by the prevalence
there of western and southern forms than by the absence
of species found around the Rideau lakes. © Hastern
Ontario is, however, the meeting ground of some outliers
from floras whose centres of development are elsewhere.
Among trees, Pinus Banksiana, the Northern Scrub Pine,
has made its way from higher latitudes to the southern
townships of the County of Renfrew, Pinus rigida, the
Pitch Pine, a denizen of the Atlantic Middle States, has
found a congenial home near Mallorytown and Gananoque
and in the township of Torbolton, Juglans nigra, the Wal-
nut, has wandered from its native wilds in the west to
Ottawa and Montreal, and Quercus Castanea, the chestnut
oak, has ventured from the Middle and Western States, as
far east as Kingston. Among shrubs, Rhus copallina, al-
though somewhat common in the United States, is thus far
known in Canada only among the Thousand Islands, near
Gananoque, where its congener &. typhina attains a won-
derfnl development in numbers, whilst Pyrus sambucifolia
found along the more northerly portions of the United
States, occurs at Ottawa and Montreal and ranges thence
northwestward to the Rocky Mountains and northeastward
to Labrador. Among herbaceous plants there are also a
few outliers from other floras, and one or two species like
Podostemon ceratophyllum found at Ottawa, which have pro-
bably been overlooked elsewhere in Ontario.

Are these outliers the advanced guard of their respec-
tive species paving the way for a more extended range by
becoming acclimatized, or do they constitute a stationary
force which physical and climatic influences have pre-

’

The Rideau Lakes. 237

cluded from going farther, or are they a rear guard repre-
senting what remains of a retreating force whose maximum
' stage of activity has been passed, whose area of distribu-
tion has been diminishing, and the individuals of whose
species are being gradually reduced in numbers. The
questions involved are interesting. The suggestion is
intelligible that each species has its place and _ pur-
pose to fulfil in life, just as the lower animals and
man have, and has its development and ultimate de-
cline in strength and activity in each individual as
well as in the numbers of its species, until, in long
course of time, that place is either left void or is taken by
some other form or variety more suited to the changes of
circumstances which time is gradually but continuously
bringing about. Many plants, at the present time, are
thus at their maximum stages of activity in individual
growth and reproduction, and have now their maximum
breadth of distribiition; some are merely in the early or
initial stages of this activity and at the initial points of
their ultimate area of range; whilst others must be on the
decline when activity in reproducing the species is lessen-
ing, and the area of distribution is being circumscribed.
When the stage of decline has been reached, climatal and
other causes which would in the ordinary course limit the
range, would have greater effects on the species than upon
others which were in the progressive stage of activity or
had reached the maximum.

LAKE SALMON.

One of the finest of our fresh water fishes—the lake
salmon—occurs in the Lower Rideau Lake, and is the at-
traction every summer to many American as well as Cana-
dian sportsmen. It is a deep water fish confined here to
this lake more probably because it is the largest lake of
the Rideau system and the only one which has a general
depth exceeding 100 feet, than because its waters are
clearer than those of others of the system. The lake
salmon is caught by trolling with the live minnow at
depths of 100 to 150 feet, and, like its nobler friend from

238 Canadian Record of Science.

-

the salt water, it affords to the sportsman exciting play for
considerable time before it permits itself to be taken.

Care will have to be observed that this valuable fish is
not exterminated in this lake. As railways render the
locality more accessible, the beautiful scenery must attract
tourists and sportsmen in increasing numbers and lead to
extinction of the fish unless the lake continues to be
periodically restocked with the fry, and fishing is permit-
ted under stringent regulations which are not only made
but are also properly enforced.

OBITUARY.
GEORGE HUNTINGDON WILLIAMS.

George Huntingdon Williams died at Utica, N.Y., on the
12th of July, at the age of 38. He was born at Utica, and
_ graduated from the Utica Free Academy, entered Amherst
College in 1874 and took his first degree with the class of
1878. While in college he caught his enthusiasm for
geology from his teacher, Professor B. K. Emerson, and
spent a year in graduate studies at Amherst.

He then went to Gottingen where he perfected his knowl-
edge of German and studied for several semesters under
Professor Klein. Leaving Gottingen he proceeded to
Heidelberg where he continued his studies in minerology
and petrography with Professor Rosenbusch, taking his
Ph.D, degree—summa cum Laude—in 1882.

The following year he became a Fellow in the Johns Hop-
kins University, where he was subsequently appointed
Associate, and in 1885 Professor of Inorganic Geology,
which position he held at the time of his death.

Petrography and crystallography were the special de-
partments of geology which he cultivated, and his text-
book on crystallography is a lucid exposition of the methods
of research in this line. At the time of bis death he was
at work on a treatise on the microscopic structure of Ame-
rican crystalline rocks. He was one of the best authorities
on these subjects in America, and served as oneof the judges

_ Proceedinys of the Society. — 239

of award in the department of minerology at the Columbian
Exposition. His untiring devotion last summer at Chicago
to the duties thus put on him, it is feared may have laid the
foundation of the disease which overcame his otherwise
vigourous constitution.

Professor Williams was an attractive teacher and had a
peculiarly charming manner in both private conversation
and public address, and the animated and clear descriptions
he gave of even the most technical subjects went far to in-
terest his hearers in any topic he chose to speak upon. His
broad education, attractive personal qualities and thorough
acquaintance with the facts of his science gave him a promin-
ent place among his fellows, and although still a young man
he was rapidly rising to honour and fame. His loss will
be keenly felt by all who knew him, especially by those who
had the rare privilege of belonging to the circle of his in-
timate friends.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.
MontrEAL, Oct. 29th, 1894.

The first monthly meeting of the Society was held this
evening, Dr. Wesley Mills, President, in the chair.

The minutes of the annual meeting were read and
approved. ‘- .

Minutes of Council meetings of May 2&th, Oct. 15th and
Oct. 22nd were read.

The following donations were reported :—Birch bark
war canoe, donor, C.P.R., per J. Stevenson Brown; speci-
mens of iron ores and pig iron from G. J. Drummond, also
fossils from Radnor Forges, Quebec, from the Canada Iron
Furnace Company; fossils from Low Bay, N.S., from J. G.
Grenfell, of the Deep Sea Mission; two living snakes, the
red-bellied (Stoveria occipitamaculata) and the garter
(Entaenia sirtalis) from J. B. Williams ; six specimens of
snakes in alcohol, from Trinidad, from G; H. Fisher, per
Alfred Griffin; fossil bone and geological specimens from
R. Felch; Gar Pike (Lepidostens osseus) from James Wilson,

240 Canadian Record of Science.

Beauharnois, per W. Henderson; Pine Grosbeak (Pinibola
Canadensis,) shot at the Back River, from Alfred Griffin ;
Barred Owl (Syninum melulosume) and short eared owl,
(Brachyolus lassinii) from David Denne; sandstone from
Barbadoes and infusorial earth, Fahleigh Lake, U.S., from
D. Bryce Scott, per J. B. Williams; large section of elm
175 years old, containing an iron gate staple imbedded
therein, from R. Elliott; a piece of the first cotton made in
Garay from the Hon. zf K. Ward.

On motion of E. T. Chambers, seconded by the Rev. Dr.
Campbell, the hearty thanks of the Society were tendered
to the several donors.

The Librarian reported the receipt of a large number of the
usual exchanges, among them the report of the Smithsonian
Institution and the Bulletins of the United States Geological
Survey, also “ Amphioxus and the Ancestry of the Verte-
brates,” and ‘‘From the Greeks to Darwin,” from Messrs,
MacMillan & Co., and “ Bird Nesting,” from KE. D. Wintle.

On motion by J. S. Shearer, seconded by James Gardner,
the rules were suspended, and the secretary empowered to
cast one ballot for the election of the following members.
Carried.

F, A. Scroggie proposed by N. C. McLachlan, and
George Kearley proposed H. T. Chambers, seconded by Dr.
F. D. Adams.

It was moved by J. 8S. Shearer, seconded by Walter
Drake, that the Society accept the recommendation of the
Council to hold a Conversazione. Carried.

Moved by George Sumner, seconded by the Rev. Dr.
Campbell, that Dr. Mills, Justice Wurtele and Dr. Stirling
be appointed a committee to wait upon His Excellency the
Governor-General with the view of ascertainlng whether he
can be present.

Sir William Dawson then read his paper on “ Bivalve

Shells found in the Coal Formation, and what they tell us of ©

the Origin of Coal.”

On motion of Dr. Smyth, seconded by George Kearley,
the thanks of the society were tendered to Sir William
Dawson for his interesting paper,

Proceedings of the Society. 241

Dr. F. D. Adams then read a paper on “The Effects of
Great Pressure on Certain Rocks.”

It was moved by Dr. Campbell, seconded by E. T. Cham-
bers, that the thanks of the society be also extended to Dr.
Adams for his valuable communication.

MontrREAL, Nov. 26th, 1894.

The second monthly meeting of the Society was held
this evening, Dr. Wesley Mills, President, in the chair.

The minutes of last meeting were read and appr oved.

Minutes of Council of Nov. 19th, were read.

The librarian reported that “The Canadian Ice Age” and
‘Life of Peter Redpath, Hsq.,’ by Sir William Dawson,
had been presented by the author to the library. It was
moved by Mr. Chambers, seconded by Mr. Edgar Judge,
that the thanks of the Society be tendered to Sir William
Dawson.

Mr. G. Dunlop, proposed as an associate member Mr. E.
Wintle, seconded by G. Sumner, was elected by acclama-
tion, the rules regarding ballot having been suspended.

The president reported progress with reference to the
Conversazione.

Prof. D. McEachran then presented a paper on “The
Mechanism of the Horse’s Foot and its Management from a
Humane Standpoint.” It was moved by P. S. Ross, seconded
by J. A. W. Beaudry, that the thanks of the Society be given
to Dr. McKachran for hig interesting paper. Carried.

Dr. Wesley Mills then read a paper on the “Psychic De-
velopment of Young Animals and its Physical Correlation.”

Moved by R. W. Mclachian, seconded by H. J. Cham-
bers, that the thanks of the Society be tendered to Dr.
Mills for his highly instructive communication.

18

242 Canadian Record of Science.

Book REVIEW.

ON THE CAMBRIAN FORMATION OF THE EASTERN SALT RANGB GF
Inp1a.—By Dr. Fritz Noetling, of the Geological Survey of India.
Records of the Geol. Surv. India, vol. xxvii., Part 3, pp. 71-86,
August, 1894.

From researches made in the paleeozoic rocks of the Eastern
Salt Range of India by the Geological Survey of that country, Dr.
R. D. Oldham has gathered ' together most of the evidence obtain-
able regarding the succession of Cambrian strata in this region.
Lists of fossils accompany the description of these lower palzeozoic
rocks, and include such genera as Olenellus, Hyolithes, Conoceph-
alites, and Neobolus. Yet, the natural succession or proper interpre-
tation of the relations of the older palecozoic zones had not been
determined. In this paper, Dr. Nectling gives a resumé of the
result of his recent expiorations.and researches in the Salt Range.
He separates the upper and middle portion of the paleozoic from
the lower and Cambrian proper.

An historical sketch of the work done by Mr. Wynne, by the
late Dr. Stoliczka, by Dr. Waagen of Vienna, Dr. Wartte, Mr.
Middlemiss and Mr. Datta, he states that the Cambrian of the
Salt Range of India is divisible into four groups, in descending
order, as follows :— ‘

4. Bhaganwalla group, or Salt Range pseudomorph zone.

3. Jutana group, or magnesian sandstone.

2. Khussak group, or Neobolus beds.

1. Khewra group, or Purple sandstone.

We note here that Dr. Netling has found “that at the top of
the Khussak formation a fauna occurs, which is most likely the
equivalent of the Olenellus of other countries, while for those fauna
below it, no representative can be found in the Cambrian of other
countries.”? The Khussak group is itself sub-divided as follows in
descending order :—

V. Olenellus zone.
IV. Neobolus Warthet zone.
III. Upper Annelid sandstone.
II. Zone of Hyolithes Wynnet.
J. Lower Annelid sandstone.
In the next higher group, the “Jutana group,’ Dr. Neetling has
found the following succession in descending order :—
X. Upper magnesian sandstone.
IX. Upper passage beds.
VIII. Middle magnesian sandstone.

1 Manual of the Geology of India, Calcutta, 1898, Chap. V.) p. 118 et seq.
2 Loc, cit. p. 79.

Book Review. 243

VII. Lower passage beds.
VI. Lower magnesian sandstone.

In the lower magnesian sandstone Dr. Neetling obtained a species-
of Stenotheca, which he correlates with but little doubt with Bill-
ings’ species ; Stenotheca rugosa, var. aspera—and an obscure Lingu-
lella. The fossil remains collected during the exploration have
been sent to Dr. Waagen for determination, and we are all anxious
to hear what forms occur in the pre-Olenellus zones of India. One
thing is evident, viz.: that there seems to be no new division or
system to be created below the Cambrian in which to include the
primordial or oldest fossiliferous strata.

H. M. Amt.

= 4 P ¥ “i
- 4 ' pf §
J + ‘ y hah YW re ee oe ne f
cg, tie
ia
se \*, .
: iA x

412) . ri perce MOL SAE : :
' feet Ea a

an a wa) oe ny
eae "i ee ‘ale

i. mu i OE: Tatty i j ‘ ry ; ee Ne Oe? ; oe yee net
-.) 77 ‘ J ’ et ' yea ¥ sara

oY

rad u's Py yi rH * al Sikh

‘ Oe Oe ae
ey ; a th hg Hata

y She

Yas toe ie Lt t ‘ ; h My c lee te Se a 't.
vs tee of ene. o- ; , . } mm
¥ ” 5 ~ 7 4
- c “a 4 * : 4 rae ie?
‘ pal 3 . ‘ ¥ i
4 ~ J > a a
.') it j AP ‘ arf
~ ~ a at ‘
, { | rE - 5 ; gtnte
A ; is .
9 , , a
mf by ¥ ‘ i , ¢ n
fy < ? f
Lv E -
J ; ~
] '
r és
7 :
4 \ ic "
i
C Be Ls re ' ’
ik ? =
; ¢
‘ ' ~ fh,
~ = ’ »
. + % *
i 4 ' ; '
2 > é t 4 oe
t
\ ‘ i x a
“ ¢ "
- 4 ”

tay 1)

’
a)
j ,
\
- \
‘
" “
i é *
'
3 ‘
t
\
‘
/
~
2)
'
,
yt
{
* \
f 1
j
“ s
‘
3
—
a
é

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF NOVEMBER, 1894.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 teet. C. H. McLEOD,

Superintendent.

THERMOMETER.
DAY,
Mean.|} Max. | Min. | Range.
1 | 46.87 | 50.5 43-2 7:3
2 44.65 51.2 38.5 12.7
3| 47-08 | -53.6 qo I 13-5
ISUNDAY......--+4 50000 43-5 37-0 6.5
5 | 33-80) 39.7 32.2 7-5
6] 32.53 | 35-4 28.0 7-4
7 | 28.88 31-7 25.2 6.5
8 | 28.63) 31.6 25.6 6.0
9 27.37 32.6 22 6 10.0
to | 31.87 | 33-8 28.5 53
Sunpay....-.- UY} |Patey ares 337 24.3 9.4
12 21.73 27-5 17-5 19 0
13| 29.65 | 34.5 17.7 16.8
14 | 34:47 | 37-4 32.0 5-4
15 33.62 39.8 270 12.8
16 | 43.05 49.8 34.8 15.0
17,| 34.47] 36.2 29.1 7-1
SUNDAY. . Me geod 34.5 22.5 12.0
19 | 20.45 | 36.1 6.6 29.5
20 16.38 24.8 6.4 18.4
21 38.18 | 44.1 19.1 25.0
22] 32.53 | 39-0 25.6 13.4
23 36.98 |} 45-7 25-1 20.6
245593237, 36 4 28.2 8.2
SUNDAY........ 25 31.6 19 7 Ir.9
26 | 20.5 | 12.2 8.1
27 37-4 13.0 | 24.4
28 31.0 14.0 17.0
29 £404. | “723 7-1
30 | Dense til) SSR 13.4
31
Sse | =ootd Means| 30.23] 35 98] 23.70] 12 27
es S| ee
zo Years means |
for and including 32.32 | 33.76 | 26.39} 12.38
this month .... - i

ANALYSIS OFWIND RECORD.

BAROMETER.
Mean Max. Min
29.8460 30.037 29.651
30.1358 30.269 29.884
29.4968 | 29.752 29.387
29-8443 | 29.875 | +9 814
29.7708 29.814 29.699
29.9647 30.046 29 912
30.1405 | 30.170 30.099
30.0617 30.144 29.934
29.7350 | 29.860 29.651
30,1895 | 30 263 | 30 71
30.0977 | 30.256 | 29.963
29.7549 | 29.873 29.660
29.7645 | 29.885 29.633
29-7105 | 29.768 | 29 659
29.9745 30° 129 | 29.822
|
sedasod lt: cepdau wll i eaa6dD |
30.0210 | 30.310 29.720
30.4125 | 30.525 | 30.214
29.9987\| 30.094 | 29.920
30.2277 30.288 | 30 125
29.9567 | 30 999 29 755
29.9537 | 30.074 | 29.786
Bane Sls dnaen eset at
30.1563 | 50.350 | 29 771 |
29-4783 | 29.611 | 29.387
30.1250 | 39.481 | 29.826
30.7160 ye 82 763 | 30.615
30.4882 | 3° 658 30-359
——} —-
30.0008 | | akiaobne
ee Oe | eee | ee
|
| |
30.0074

t+ Mean |f Meau

pres-
sure of
vapour.

+2413
2155
+2735

1615
-1657
+1365
1353
.1262

-1673

.0963
.1388
-1765
+1592
12173
+1403

0977
.0697
-1817
.1343

1847
+1477

0765
+1312
0662

0472
0712

Direction........ . E. | S.E
Nii orig ace 150 31r | 515
Duration in hrs | 96 20 Sa 42

Mean velocity... 3 3 265 8.4 | 12.3

as ————E
Greatest mileage in one hour was 42 on the 3rd.

Greatest velocity in gusts 6() miles per hour, on |

the 3rd.

Resultant mileage, 6U88.
Resultant direction, S. 674° W.

Total mileage, 11422.

Sky CLoupKED i =
WIND. In Tentas. [5,2] = 5 €
——= S| Ste = ae shan
relative| Dew Riare|| a8 36 | 33 7
humid-| point. Mean : :| .|325] eo 26 | 55 eo
it General |yelocity}] § | =| ¢]2o5| 85 Bs
vy. . . : . a Ca eee of a8
direction. jin miles} © a s S =
perhour| = ie a D a
75-5 39-5 S.W. 27-7 6.7| 10] of 20 0.07 0.07} 1
74-5 36.2 S.W. Igar 3-7) 10 ° fol) dad aot 2
82 8 42.0 S.W. 27.9 8.3 | 10] of 07 o 87 0.87! 3
hte ron S.W, 16.4 SoueE oda 1,00 cin me 4 +s. ... «SUNDAY
83 2 29.0 N. 20 1 10.0 | 10 | 10 J 00 0.5 | 90-05] 5
93-2 29.8 N.W. 22.6 95|10] 6] 23 5 Oo auc |) ©
85.7 25.2 Ww, 16 5 6.7| 10) of 2© ae sane 7
857 24.8 N. 5.2 7.7|10| 3] 08 sae spcd dh
83.7 23.0 E. 6.0 6.8 | 10] off oo 0.2 | 0.02] 9g
93 2 30.2 S.E, 6.6 10.0 | 10] tof oo 7-1 c 64 | 10
ar joed Ww. 15.7 Beiia| toe 00 CEE CLO 62 eaodocs . SUNDAY
83.3 17.5 Ww. 82 83] 10] of o9 O.r | Oot] 12
84.2 25-7 Ss. 9-6 go|10} 4 16 : oO 0.02 | 13
88.8 31.3 Ss. 15.6 10.0 | 10 | 10 J 00 0.05 0.05 | 14
82.3 28.7 Ss. 20.2 98] 10} gf oo in 0.4 | 0.04] 15
78.2 36.2 S.W, 20 5 40]10}] of 50 daoS SOO rere XO
70.0 25.7 Ww. 18.7 4.8 | 10 | of 16 Inap. Inap.| 17
sae WwW. IL. do [roc 79 ais XB metetstateyetsteis SuNDAY
77-7 14.8 Ww. 22 4 4.8 | 19] of 60 0.7 | 0.07 | 19
75-0 | 09.8 S.W, 14.6 5-3 | 10} of 85 | Brel fee)
77-5 31.5 SS 17.8 10.0 | 10 } Jo ID | oe. | 20
73-2 24.8 Sew, 10.3 g.o | 10 ° 24 ee ade Wiey
82.0 320 Ss 19.5 9-7| 10] o 13 0.48 Sean 4] aces Pee}
to.7. | 27.0 Ww. 6.2 8.7 ]10] 2] 3 ae Inap- | Iaap | 24
Seralegenl| anette N. 19.5 op6 pell oe 26 O52 [PORE AF cuocosdan SuNnDay
80.8 12.5 Ss. 10.6 7-5] 10] of 67 0.4 | 0.04 | 26
75-8 24.0 S.W. 21.5 7.8| 10] of 19 Lan 0.11 | 27
70-5 | 093 Ww. 29 3 5-3| 10} of 46 Sa¢ 28
68 2 | 01.7 WwW. 14.7 Te7)| 2ON|) ous) QO Ny ae aes oo|| Ete)
78.2 10.5 N.E. 7-4 10.0] 10| 10} oo | ... ae spew |) ee)
31
£0.15 | 24-72 S. 6734° W.| 15.89 75 6 27.0| 1 47 LUG) || 2220} SUMS ee sete eerie
20 Years means for
79 39 7-4 [29.3 | 2.27 12 8 | 3.60 | ¢and including this
| month,

temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.

$ Observed.

+ Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary

t Humidity relative, saturation being l0u.

1 13 years only.

The greatest heat was 53.6° on the 3rd; the
creates! cold was 6.4° on the 20th, giving a
range of temperature of 47.2 degrees.

Warmest day wasthe 3rd. Coldest day was the

*Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and
29th Highest barometer reading was 30.763 on the

25th; lowest barometer was 29.387 on the 3rd and
26th giving a range of 1.576 inches. Maximum re-
lative humidity was 99 on the 2nd. Minimum
relative humidity was 53 on the 29th.

Rain fell on 5 days.

Snow fell on 12 days.
Rain or snow fell on 17 days.
Auroras were vbserved on 17th and 25th nights.
Hoar frost on 2 days.

Lunar halos on the 6th, 8th and lith.

PP SPE PE a, ET Pe A EY ERE Pe

%
3
;
.
} *

a i

~
. “.; ¥ Sa
. 7 . Sal
eer

Ee

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF DECEMBER, 1894.

Meteorological Observations McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

THERMOMETER.

— | — — —— - —— — —] t Mean If Mean

relative

Mean. Min. | Range.

w
-
»

Cow co CO CCID
Ob DROOA

SuNDAY

OWN ONUHA

COBB OHD BNW DAD

DAnHROWO
DOK HO OW

SUNDAY... sss

CNH NOOO DO

woth 00 OW OH
Om DOD DH

w
°
on

zo Years means

for and including 25.99 14.49

BAROMETER.

Mean. Max.

30.0269

pres-
sure of

Range. vapour.

ANALYSIS OF

this month

Durationin hrs .

Mean velocity... 5.23

Greatest mileage in one hour was 4) on the 27th,
Greatest velocity in gusts 72 miles per hour on
the 27th.

WIND RECORD.

5. 5. W. W. |

3791 2880
204 152

18.58 18 95

N.W. |

|
Cam.

47 |

30 36

15.70

Resultant mileage, 5488,

Total mileage, 12283.

Resultant direction, S. 788° W.

WIND. In T

ENTHS

Mean
velocity
direction. |in miles
perhour

humid-
ity.

2 On

epuysey 2eere

Zz

n
Ax =e
©20000:

ORWNHAFIOW
WUWAWN:

we

a
un

fos}
w

F
|
|

x
°

*Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and
temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.

§ Observed.

t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary
t Humidity relative, saturation being 10u.
1 13 years only

The greatest heat was 48.3° on the 17th; the
greatest cold was —14.1° on the 29th, giving a
range of temperature of 62.4 degrees.

Sky CLoupkD

Possible

Sunshine.
Rainfall in

inches

Per ceul. ou!
Rain and snow
melted.

Snowfall in

=
5
i}

bo]

Oe
> 000
= SN

. ++... SUNDAY

SuNpay

.. SUNDAY

20 Years means for
and including this
month,

[29.3 3.64

Warmest day was the 15th. Coldest day was
the 28th Highest barometer reading was 30.535
on the 26th; lowest barometer was 29.406 on the
13th, giving a range of 1.129 inches. Maximum
relative humidity was 97.0 on the 24th. Mini-
mum relative humidity was 54 on the 5th.

Rain fell on 5 days.

Snow fell on 16 days.

Rain or snow fell on 21 days.
Auroras were observed on J night.
Lunar halo on the 10th.

—_—=

Observations made at McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. — Height above sea level 187 ft.

Meteorological Abstract for the Year 1894.

Latitude N. 45° 30' 17”.

Longitude 4" 54™ 18-55° W.
C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

|

* BAROMETER.

Monva.

January .....++es!
February - ;

March ...
April......
IN Biy? Settee
June......-
JING s Shona se :
(ADS ET conee 08658

September ..... | 54.65

October.........
November ......
December ......

Sums for 1894 .
Means for 1894 .

7 Devia-
tion from
20 years
means.

| 65.83

+ U+t | lttt+ 1+

Means for 20

years ending? | 41.79

Dee. 31, 1894. } |

‘* Barometer readings reduced to 22° Fah. and to sea level. + Inc'.es of mercury. {Saturation 100, § Fer 13 years only. ‘+’ indicates that the temperature has been higher:
The monthly meavs are derived from readings taken every 4th hour beginning with 3h. 0m. Hastern Standard time,

for 20 years inclusive of 1894.
a For8 years only.

above the ground and 810 feet above the sea level

tMean pressure

Min.

Max.

Mean.

THERMOMETER.

& I

=| =
1.21 | 41.2 |; —12
2.78 | 38.7 |—19.
7.20 | 57.0 | 5
4.95 | 69 5 | 15
1.62 | 79.0 37
1.03} 85.2| 44
0.09 | 89.8 5!
3.93 | 80.6 44
1.13 | 78.5 By
3.06 | 65.5 | 3!
2.09 | 58.6 | 6.
3.94 | 48.3 | 14.1}

of vapour.

0766
0740
1585
. 1840

3030

499]

5135

446
4141
- 2801
1446

114

2630

- 2507

Resultant
direction.

Mean relative

humidity.

Mean dew
point.

fe

Ss 782eWic

Bowe
MERE O

an

on

SOP wndneen

S

BRKKAAAABN TH H

J &-soO4iD

a
or
o

isT)

Win.

possible
sunshine

rain fell.

Number of
days on which

Sky clouded

per cent.
Percent.

bright

Inches of rain.

Abo PbO
=
Temes

— ee
=)

ht
SS

we~I~a
S

ht

b

on

Inches of snow.

an
+ IOS
rome bo

In Dp.
11.0

23.0
{

nand

ys on
Ss on
1M v7

on which snow
Inches of
rain and snow
melted.

Number of days
fell.
which rai
snow fell.
No. of da;
which ra:
snow fell,

No. of da;

70 9

120 0

Monta.

January -....-++
February.......-
Miarghtsares one
April. nents

November
December. .. ..

Sums for 1894 ...
Means for 1894

Means for 20
years ending
Dec. 31, 1894.

} “—" that it has been Jower than the average
The anemometer und wind vane jare on the summit of Mount Royal, 57 feet

The greatest heat was 89.8 on July 2: the greatest cold was 19.4 below zero on February 1). The extreme range of temperature was therefore 109.3. Greatest range of the thermometer in one day was 39 5 on Januuary 25; least
The warmest day was July 28, when the men temperature was 80.18 The coldest day was February 24, when the mean temperature was 12.58 below zero. The highe-t barometer reading was 30.833

range was 5 2 on March 22.
on February 24, Lowest barometer reading was 29.174 on October 17, giving a range of ).659 for the year. The lowest re/ative humidity was 17 on April 14.
30, and the greatest velocity in gusts was at the rate of 84m.p. h. on January 3!)
Auroras were observed on I9nights. Fogs on 14 days, Thunder storms on 20 days.
first appreciable snowfall of the autumn was on November 5.

The total mileage of wind was 131,482.
r Lightning without thunder on 7 days-
The first permanent sleighing of the winter was on December 27.

Nortr.—The yearly means of the above, are the averages of the monthly means, except for the velocity of the wind.

Lunar halos or coron4s on 14 nights.

The greatest mileage of wind recorded in one hour was 69 on January
The resultant direction of the wind forthe year is S.62°W., and the resultant mileage was 50,570.
The sleighing of the winter closed in the city on March 25. The

Aas

= a
7? , . Ar
2 Bo > ; ; : ‘ -
‘d : : : ~ -
9 pee
, ea ke : i ‘3 é x -
Vim ts oY we i.
" aS. Xiof +
“ y : ena x ; ‘ “ ‘
. ; d 1
% - {
4, - os sd
4 at . E s * F + - ; ae E ay —
i tot 9 = 2
a ;
2 Pea m z * f
Se sre eink ie a Se se = <-S
vines Sd : : F
bet :
as "4 be
2" —z 4 z ,
We ie ~ ph: ; &
3 F ‘ -
7 1 ‘ ‘ « ad
- i en tae,
re at, i. " ., ss
4 ~ 4 ey r)
‘ . al 7 F ; = .
Pa ’ |
y - a 4 a =
m eS ees yi ‘
3 ‘ Fs
: ehist t i ; .
‘ Pe, z 7 =
, +: ‘. } ? i
“ — pL = < . . . =
” ‘ i
< ae $ < x
7 <n } ~
E “~ Qe « = % we e “we ‘ 1 f
Sp = : : :
F. . 4 ie oy we o = .
’ C3 eee = of - kant
nS, ’ { .
a a I Sn Se 2 $ ‘ 3
Fans . bie es ee 2
& y yy: “= eon bo
Fh: e 4 sens ; ; f
e ;
. : - = _ F
” (he - i - ~ is
« ~ cv _ ‘ v :
: : e
S, .
X -
a“
<
= ’
: z oe}
Pes ‘ e u ;
-’ i
* J 2
os eS a ad Saas CF Se a er

u ications ae ee craries should” be careft Fully
ee, Canapran Recorp oF Screncs, N, atural Histor -

a rt

ey articles will be returned if desired, and if eae!
‘outage for that purpose. The editors will not hold thomsaves fy
_ responsible for ay, views expressed by authors,

- Subseribers who fail to receive the Recorp, or who ogee ;
their residences, are requested to notify the Editors accordingly.

Back Rober of the Recorp may be obtained of the Editors,

at forty cents per number. ie
gs

is" - |

“Volumes. unbound, may be had as follows: a: hae

7 pe ; . ; ‘ 4 Waa
Vou. 1,4 Nos. - = Se ah pao nn tee eee ORE gone Ps

ee Mone Ee IE 8 Noseach,, - = = 8.00 perveliy ee

~The Recorp is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers, ite
or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage
paid, is as follows: 7
Canada and the United States, - - $3.00

Great Britain - ac ye Sesh) = £04870

ISSUED 3ist JANUARY, 1895.

Se

*

—S ai

pos, - —s

INCLUDING THE PROCEEDINGS OF ae |
THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL, | 1 1 Ee

7
4

AND REPLACING 1

THE CANADIAN NATURALIST. \!))

aa 8
iw

i
yy) CONTENTS.
Remarkable Flight of Certain Birds from the Atlantic Coast up the St. Terps oe
} rence to the Great Lakes. By E. D. WINTLE .........-..000 wecec- secs 245
Unusual Occurrence of Razor-Billed Auk at Montreal. By E. D. WInti2 . . 247
Notes on Special Migrations. By J. B. WILLIAMS.......,...220ceeeeeeseess 248
Notes on Recent Canadian Unionide. By J. F. Wiirayes. Ro Satd fate 5 eae 250
Contributions to Canadian Botany. By Jas. M. Macoun ..............0¢ -- 264
A Caddis-Fly from the Leda Clays of the Vicinity of Ottawa, Canada. By
Ph ARMM NE DS SAM MIBPERSNED aI CU SSG aaa i, Voces as of eye icecie ease evetlccieelsie es 276
On the Norian or ‘‘Upper Laurentian” Formation of Canada. By Frank D.
SCM RE METER ee es Uy kw ag c's C4 bed ad acaalpeav cele .Micetene 277
Where to find (Pk ae in Winter. By W. E. eee BAC ODED ceo eak tees 305
The New Director of the Geological Survey.. WY ady Aiden idasd o hacen bine
Proceedings of the Natural History Society.............s00 2000 9 sWbladteaan 308
Book Notices :
From the Greeks to Darwin, an Outline of the Development of the Evolu-
tion Idea. By Henry Fairriz_p Ossorn, Sc.D., Da Costa Professor
of Biology in Columbia College, Curator of the American Museum of
Natural History..... VASE ARATE Son RMN gh 2 toner Py Bea 24 3 310
Amphioxus and the Ancestry of the Vertebrates. By ARTHUR WILLEY,
MSM a MMS Ped kia Sloe’ olsisi ve rncle oe'a sj essen odes gots clos Lawns pare 311
}
? . MONTREAL:
| PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.
LONDON, ENGLAND : BOSTON, MASS. :
Co.uins, 157 Great Portland St. A, A. WATERMAN & Co,, 36 Bromfield St,
1895.
i VEC 26
fi

Rete

Phan , i SHAT AED OA Ee
His EXcELLENCY THE p GovERNOR-GnwERAD or Caan, EY
- Hon. President : iy aN i iy
Sin J. Wintiam Dawson, LL.D., F.B.S., F. R. s. C. es
President:
Dr. T. WestEy MILs.
Ist Vice-President :
Joun S. SHEARER.
Vice-Presidents ;

Hon. SENATOR Murpuy. | Rev. RoBert CAMPBELL, D.D.
J. H. R. Motson. | GxorcE SUMNER.
Srr Donatp A. Smita, K. C, M.G. EpGAR JUDGE.

B. J. Raserapeah iy Ph. D., F.R.S.C. J. H. JOSEPH.
Hon. JUSTICE WURTELE.

Hon. Reswrding Secretary ; Hon. Corresponding Secretary :
R. W. McLacuian. . | Joun W. Streuine, M.D., Edin.
Honorary Curator : Honorary Treasurer :
K. D. WINTLE. | EF. W. Ricwarps.
Members of Council : .

GEO. SUMNER, Chairman. )
Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc.. Ph.D. JAMES GARDNER.
ALBERT HOLDEN. JOSEPH FORTIER. .
Masor L. A. H. Latour, M.A. Hon. J. K. Warp, ;
Nevit Norton Evans. A. F. WINN.

J. STEVENSON Brown. a

Editing and Exchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sce., Ph: D., Chairman.

G. F. MatrHew, St. John, N.B. Rev. R. Campsety, D.D. :
Pi ist be WUHITEAVES, Ottawa. Dr. WESLEY MILLs.
B. J. Harrineton, B.A., Ph.D.,F.G.S. | Nevin Norton Evans.
Library Committee : i
E. T. Coampers, Chairman.
J. A. U. Baupry, C.E. JOSEPH FORTIER,
R. W. McLAcHian. — A. F. Winn.
J. F. Hausen.
_ Museum Committee :
E. D. WINTLE. Chairman.
A. F. Winn. J. B. WILLIAMS.
J. F. Hausen. N. N. Evans.
K. T. CHAMBERS. . J. S. Brown.
Rev. R. CAmpsBett, D.D.
- Lecture Committee :
Dr. WESLEY MILts, Chairman.
Rev. Rost. CAMPBELL, D.D. Dr. J. W. STIRLING.
Pror. JoHN Cox. Rev. W. J. SMYTH.
Very Rev. Dran CARMICHAEL. Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.

House Committee :
JNO. S. SHEARER, Chairman.
EDGAR JUDGE. | Gro. SUMNER.

Membership Committee :
J. STEVENSON Brown, Chairman.
EDGAR JUDGE. | JoHN S. SHEARER.
JOSEPH FORTIER.

Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN.

ARUAG\ C0 haae
Hak RTE 1

z PY)
= fo —2- = St f
_ = eu

Brunnicr’s Murre. Youne)

1 Be ,
Razor-sBitreo Avk. (Apurr )

FIGURES OF TWO SPECIMENS IN THE MUSEUM OF THE
NATURAL HisToRY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL.

THE

CANADIAN RECORD

OF SCIENCE.

VOL; V1 JANUARY, 1895. No. 5.

a
REMARKABLE FLIGHT OF CERTAIN BIRDS FROM THE
ATLANTIC COAST UP THE St. LAWRENCE TO THE

GREAT LAKES.
By E. D. WINTLE.

Two most remarkable flights of Briinnich’s Murres* up
the St. Lawrence River to the Great Lakes oceurred in
November, 1893, and in November, 1894, which are
unprecedented with this species as far as we have any
record of such occurrences. It is not uncommon for
solitary individuals of various species of sea birds to
wander up the St. Lawrence to the Great Lakes, but
when large numbers are found so far inland, as in the
case of the Murres, there must be some cause for such an
unusual visitation, But it is a difficult matter to assign
the true cause, although, as a rule, scarcity of food is
thought to be by ornithologists the cause of unusual
visitations of birds from their natural habitats. If
scarcity of food was the cause of the Murres spreading so
far inland, the unfortunate birds which survived the
fusillade of guns must have died of starvation before the
following spring, as the stomachs of several which were

shot and examined did not contain any food, so that we
19

246 _ Canadian Record of Science.

must presume their natural food was not discovered by
them in the fresh waters which they visited so foolishly,
and they do not appear to have sufficient instinct to
return to salt. water, as numbers of them were caught
alive on the ice when the water began to freeze over for
the winter. They appeared to be very tame, keeping near
the shores of the rivers and lakes. Some of them went
up the St. Francis River as far as Sherbrooke, and the
Richeheu to Lake Champlain, also up the Ottawa to the
City of Ottawa; but the bulk of them appeared to have
followed up the north shore of the St. Lawrence to Lake
~ Ontario, as far as Toronto and Hamilton. Many of them
were shot on the lake near Toronto. It seems strange
that these birds should remain inland during the winter,
to be frozen and starved to death, when we consider that
it would have been an easy matter for them to return by
the rivers to the sea to their natural waters; but they
appear to have totally lost themselves on our inland
waters, and the only reason I can assign for their unusual
lack of natural instinct is, that they were all young birds,
for the bills of those that were shot were not as long as
those of adult birds. The fact of these birds apparently
being all young birds would suggest an interesting habit
in the life history of this species, and one which, I believe,
has not been noticed heretofore, namely, the adult birds
separating themselves from their fledged young, or, on the
other hand, the latter flocking together in the fall of the
year without the former’s company. Another cause for
the remarkable inland flight of these young Murres during
the past two years in succession, might have been two
unusually prolific breeding seasons, during which the young
birds, seeking for food, followed the high tides up to
Three Rivers, where, having followed the course of the St.
Lawrence so far up it is possible, they were actuated
thereby to continue further inland up to the Great Lakes,
when, if they had sufficient imstinct to return down the

*

Unusual Occurrence of Razor-Billed Auk at Montreal. 247

St. Lawrence to their natural habitat, they would have
become confused by finding the river frozen over, and
therefore would remain on any open water they could
find—lost, and finally starved to death for lack of their
natural salt-water food. The food of the Murres, according
to Audubon, consists of small fish, shrimps and other
marine animals, and’ they swallow some gravel also. The
specimen of Briinnich’s Murre now in the possession of
the Natural History Society of Montreal, is a young bird,
beimg one of those which took the remarkable flight
inland mentioned in this article. Briimnich’s Murre, Uria
lomvia (Linn), belongs to the Order Pygopodes—the
Diving Birds—(Sub-order Cepphi), Family Alcidee—the
Auks, Murres, etc. (Sub-family Alcine), Genus Uria
(Brisson). There are two species and two sub-species of
Murres recognized as North American Birds, the first two
inhabiting the North Atlantic coasts, and of the two sub-
species, one is found on the Pacific coast of North
America, and the other one on the coasts and islands of
Behring’s Sea. In general appearance the Murres closely
resemble one another, both in size and plumage. Habitat
of Briimnich’s Murre is the Arctic Ocean and coasts of the
North Atlantic, south, in winter, to New Jersey ; breeding
from Gulf of St. Lawrence northward. (See Lidgway’s
Manual of North American birds.)

}
UnvusuaAL OCCURRENCE OF Razor-BILLED AUK AT
MONTREAL. .

By E. D. WINTLE.

David Denne, Esq., has been kind onough to draw my
attention to the taking of the Razor-Billed Auk in the
vicinity of Montreal, and on further enquiry I learn that
four were observed, on the 10th of November (1893),
swimming about on the river at St. Lambert, one of which

248 Canadian Record of Science.

was shot by a man named Leclaire. I saw this specimen
after it was mounted, and, judging by its bill, which is
not fully developed, it is a young bird, as the bill of the
adult, as seen in the specimen in the collection of this
Society, has grooves, crossed about the middle by a white
bar, whereas, the bill of the young is smaller, without
grooves, and lacks the white bar. I believe this is the
first record of the Razor-Billed Auk occurring in the
district about Montreal. This species is the only one of
its genus found in North America. It is common in the
Gulf of St. Lawrence, and breeds there on the Bird
Rocks in company with the Murres, a closely allied
species, and as the latter bird, in November, 1893, passed up
the St. Lawrence river in remarkable numbers, it is very
likely that a few of the former species were induced to
follow them far inland, out of their natural habitat. The
Razor-Billed Auk, Alea torda (Linn), belongs to the Order
Pygopodes—the Diving Birds (Sub-order, Cepphi), Family
Alecidee—the Auks, Murres, ete, Genus Alea Linnceus.
Their habitat stretches along the coasts of the North
Atlantic, south, in winter, to southern New England,
breeding from Eastern Maine northward. (See Ridgway’s
Manual of North American Birds.)

NOTES ON SPECIAL MIGRATIONS.
By J. B. WILwIAMs.

There are several instances of irregular migrations on
record, which are worthy of notice in connection with the
two described in Mr. Wintle’s paper.

Their cause has been usually ascribed either to a great
increase in numbers, or to a sudden scarcity of food.

The migrations of the Leming (dZws lemmus) in Lapland,
which occur every ten or twelve years, are probably
examples of the first, while the descent of Antelopes from

“

Special Migrations. 249

the interior of Africa to the cultivated districts around
~ Cape Colony, which, before the country was explored, used
to take place every three or four years, was, perhaps, an
example of the second of these causes, though neither of
them seem sufficient to explain some of the special bird
migrations.

Pallas’ Sand Grouse (Syrrhaptes paradoxus) visited
Europe in great numbers in the summer of 1863, and
again, twenty-five years later, in 1888. On both occasions
many of them reached the British Isles, and a few of
those that came in 1888 remained and reared young in
the summer of 1889. A climate, however, so different
from their native one in the deserts of Tartary, was not
likely to suit them, and I believe none of them survived
the change for very long.

An immense flock, numbering thousands, of the Rose-
Colored Pastor (Pastor roseus), a bird allied to the starling,
eame from the bird’s native haunts in Armenia, and
visited Bulgaria in the summers of 1877 and 1889. They
were very tame and could easily be caught, but as they
fed mainly on grasshoppers, they were regarded rather as
a blessing, and were thus saved from much persecution.

The Evening Grosbeak (Coccothraustes vespertina), a bird
which usually resides in the North-West and Rocky
Mountain district, came east in numerous flocks during
the winter of 1890. They reached Toronto about the
middle of January and Montreal about the end of that
month. Some flocks went south of the Great Lakes and
visited Pennsylvania and New York States. Others went
on to the New England districts, where they had never
before been seen. Nearly all of them returned to the
North-West in March or April, though it was said that a
few lingered until the middle of May, but there has been,
as yet, no repetition of the visit.

The Pine Grosbeaks (Pinicola enucleator), some of which
visit Montreal nearly every winter, accompanied the

250 Canadian Record of Scienee.

Evening Grosbeaks in unusual numbers in this migration
of 1890, though they probably came from the North
rather than the West. Flocks of both birds were seen in
many places feeding together on the berries of the same
mountain ash tree, and all of them were remarkably tame
and unsuspicious.

Notes oN RECENT CANADIAN UNIONIDA.
By J. F. WuitTEAVEs.!

The present paper is intended as a contribution to
our knowledge of the geographical distribution of the
Unionide in North America. It consists of a list of all
the species from Canadian localities that are now repre-
sented in the museum of the Geological Survey at Ottawa,
and is based almost exclusively upon specimens that were
either collected by members of the Survey staff or pre-
sented by friends interested in its museum. So far as
the writer is aware, however, the Unio tenwissimus of Lea,
which was collected by Dr. G. M. Dawson in 1873, in the
Souris River, Manitoba, is the only species of Unionide
known to occur in Canada that is not represented in the
Survey museum. Specimens of most of the nominal species
of Anodonta and of a few of the more difficult species of
Unio enumerated in this list have been kindly compared
by Mr. Charles T. Simpson, of the United States National
Museum, with Dr. Lea’s types of North American Union-
ide now preserved in that institution, and identified as
correctly as the small number of shells sent from each
locality and the incompleteness of his studies of the family
would permit. The nomenclature employed throughout
this list is that which is now in general use among
students of this group in North America, as it is still
quite uncertain which of the earlier names of Rafinesque,

1 Communicated by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey Depart-
ment.

Recent Canadian Unionide. 251

Lamarck and others, will ultimately have to be retained
for some of these shells.

ANODONTA, Lamarck, 1879.

ANODONTA BENEDICTH, Lea.

Specimens which appear to have been idehtitied with
this species by Dr. Lea have already been recorded by
Dr. R. Bell’ as having been collected by himself, in 1860,
at Batch-ah-wah-nah Bay, Lake Superior ; in the St. Mary
River, near Sugar Island, and on the north shore of Lake
Huron, at Lacloche Island. Professor Macoun has
recently (1894) collected it at Rondeau, near Point aux
Pins, on the Ontario side of Lake Erie, and a few speci-
mens, which Mr. Simpson thinks are probably referable
to A. Benedictit, were collected by Dr. R. Bell, in 1883, at
Lake Winnipeg, between Fort Alexander and Elk Island.
Mr. Simpson is inclined to beleve that A. Benedictit may
be only a variety of A. ovata, Lea.

ANODONTA DECORA, Lea.

Eight full grown specimens and one immature shell of
a very large Anodonta, which Mr. Simpson refers to A.
decora, were collected: by Mr. Law, of Chatham, at Ron-
deau, Ontario, and presented by him to the Museum
of the Survey, through Professor Macoun, in 1884. One
of the adult shells from this locality, a fairly average

specimen, measures 6.6 inches in length, 4 inches in:

height and 3.1 inches in breadth or thickness. The
umbones of each are remarkably ventricose and _pro-
minent. The test is rather thick, the hinge line short,
and the cardinal angles are rounded in front and obtusely
angular behind. The writer has long been under the
impression that these shells could be identified with the
typical form of A. grandis, Say, as they do not correspond
at all well with Lea’s figures or measurements of A. decora,

1 In Canad. Nat, and Geol., Vol. VI., p. 269.

252 Canadian Record of Science.

the “breadth” or, as it would now be called, the length
of which is stated to be 3.9 inches. The recent receipt
from Mr. Simpson of outline drawings of specimens from
Dr. Lea’s collections, labelled “A. decora, from the canal
at Cincinnati, Ohio,” has, however, convinced the writer
of the correctness of Mr. Simpson’s determination, though
it is very generally believed that A. decora is not more
than a mere variety of A. grandis.

ANODONTA EDENTULA, Say. (A. wndulata, Lea, et auct., but
possibly not of Say; A. Pennsylvanica, Lamark, and
A. areolata, Swainson.)

Dy. R. Ellsworth Call has expressed the opinion that A. .
edentula, Say, is peculiar to the Mississippi drainage sys-
tem, and A. wndulata, Say., to those waters that drain
into the Atlantic, but the writer has never been able to
see any tangible difference between these two shells. In
a recent letter to the writer, Mr. Simpson says, “ Anodonta
undulata is no doubt the small form which we have here
in the Potomae. Though Say gives no locality, he speaks
of it as ‘thin and fragile, length near half an inch; breadth
seven-tenths.’ The figure fairly well represents our shell.
This may run into A. edentula, but I have never yet been
able to connect it with that. The material in Lea’s collec-
tion, under the name of A. wndulata, Say, is merely a
form or forms of A. edentula.”

Under one or the other of these names this shell has
previously been recorded as having been collected in Lake
Matapedia, P.Q., by Dr. R. Bell in 1857; in a small lake
in the valley of the Riviere Rouge, P.Q., by W.8S. M.
D’Urban, in 1858; in the St. Charles River, near Quebec
city, by the writer, in 1861, and at Brome Lake, P.Q., by
Mr. R. J. Fowler; in 1862.

More recently, it has been collected by Dr. R. Bell in
1883, at Lake Winnipeg, between Forts Alexander and
Simpson, and by Professor Macoun, in 1894, in Ontario,

-

Recent Canadian Unionide. 253

at Rondeau, on Lake Erie, and in the east and west
branches of the Grand River at Galt and Ayr.

In another letter to the writer, Mr. Simpson makes the
following remarks upon this species, “The so-called
Anodontas of which this is the ‘type, have more or less
perfect cardinals and occasional vestiges of laterals. They
group with Margaritana Elliotti, M. Spillinani, M. Ravene-
liana, ete. The genus Margaritana is a medley of forms,
which, for the most part, are more nearly related to
various groups of Unio than to each other. I believe that

_ Margaritana should be merged into Unio, and with it the

Anodontas of the edentula group.”

ANODONTA FERUSSACIANA, Lea.

L’Orignal Creek, Ottawa River, Dr. R. Bell, 1855 (as
A, pavonia, Lea). Ponds at the Mile End, Montreal, Dr.
R. Bell, 1858, and J. F. Whiteaves, 1862.

ANODONTA FLUVIATILIS, Dillwyn. Sp. (4. cataracta, Say.)
Several specimens of this common eastern species,
which has previously been recorded as occurring at many
localities in the Province of Quebec and neighbourhood of
Ottawa, were collected by Dr. R. Bell, in 1883, at Flying
Post Route, 100 miles north-east of Michipicoten, and, in
1889, from a small lake near Proudfoot’s north and south
line, in the Sudbury district of Ontario. A single speci-

men, which may be referable to this species, was collected

by Professor Macoun, in 1884, at White Fish River, north
of Lake Superior.

ANODONTA FOOTIANA, Lea.

Specimens which are said to have been identified with
this species by Dr. Lea were collected by Mr. W. M. 8.
D’Urban, in 1858, from three small lakes tributary to the
tiviere Rouge, P.Q. Since then, specimens, which Mr.
Simpson refers to A. Footiana, have been collected in

254 Canadian Record of Science.

Ontario, by Professor Macoun, in 1884, ‘at White Fish
River, north of Lake Superior, and at Lake Hannah, on
the Nepigon River; by Dr. A. C. Lawson, in 1886, at
Rainy Lake ; by Mr. W. Spreadborough, in 1894, from
the Muskoka River, near Georgian Bay; and in Mani-
toba, by Dr. R. Bell, in 1883, at Shoal Lake, Red River.
Mr. Simpson also is of opinion that specimens collected
by Mr. R. J. Fowler in the Lachine Canal at Montreal, in
1863, and referred by the writer to A. Lewis, Lea, are
young shells of A. Footiana.

ANODONTA FRAGILIS, Lamark. (A. lacustris, Lea.)

This shell was apparently first collected in Canada by
Mr. D’Urban in 1858, associated with A. Footiana, in
three small lakes in the valley of the Riviere Rouge, and
identitied shortly afterwards by the late Dr. Isaac Lea
with the A. fragilis of Lamarck. Specimens collected by
Professor Macoun in 1885, from a lake six miles up the
Beescie River, Anticosti, were identified with A. fragilis
by Mr. F. R. Latchford, of Ottawa, and similar shells
have long been known to occur at Meach’s Lake, near
Ottawa. Some of these Anticosti specimens were sent to
Mr. Simpson, who thinks that they are essentially similar
to shells labelled A. fragilis in Dr. Lea’s collection, but
cannot see how these latter are to be distinguished from
A, lucustris, Lea, and does not pretend to be always able
to separate A. fragilis from A. fluviatilis.

ANODONTA IMPLICATA, Say.

Lake Winnipeg, between Fort Alexander and Elk
Island, Dr. R. Bell, 1883; and Souris River, near Roche
Percée, Dr. A. R. C. Selwyn, 1890; a few specimens from
each of these localities, which have been identified with
this species by Mr. Simpson. It had previously been
recorded as occurring in the St. Charles River, near
Quebec, where it was collected by the writer in 1861.

aa ee
A ie - ¥.

eS

Recent Canadian Unionidae. . 25a:

ANODONTA MARRYATTANA, Lea.

Lake Hannah, Nipigon River, and east side of Lake
Nipigon, Ontario, Professor Macoun, 1884; and Fairford
River, Manitoba, J. F. Whiteaves, 1888; as identified by
Mr. Simpson.

~ ANODONTA NUTTALLIANA, Lea. (4. Oregonensis, Lea.)

Okanagan Lake, B.C., A. J. Hill, 1882; two specimens
of the variety Oregonensis. Near Victoria, V. I., James
Fletcher, 1885, and Rev. G. W. Taylor, 1889. Nicola
Lake, B.C., Dr. G. M. Dawson, 1889; three specimens of
the typical form and one of the variety Ovregonensis.
Salmon Arm, Shuswap Lake, B.C., Dr. Dawson, 1894;
several examples of both forms of the species. Stream
entering Clayoquot Sound, V.I., at Stubbs Island, W.
Spreadborough, 1894.

ANODONTA OVATA, Lea.

Coulee No. 5, Vermilion River, Alberta, J. B. Tyrrell,
1886. ,

ANODONTA PEPINIANA, Lea.

Specimens which Mr. Simpson refers to this species
were collected by Dr. R. Bell, in 1883, from the Winnipeg
River, Manitoba, and in 1886, from the Attawapishkat
River, in the Severn district, which now forms the eastern
part of Keewatin. Two left valves of a shell which may
be referable to this species were collected by Mr. J. B.
Tyrrell, in 1884, at the Lake of the Woods. Mr. Simpson
is of the opinion that A. Pepiniana may be merely a
variety of A. Simpsoniana, Lea.

ANODONTA SIMPSONIANA, Lea.

In Ontario this species was collected by Dr. A. R. C.
Selwyn in 1883, at Black Bay, Lake Superior; by Prof.
Macoun, in 1884, at the north end of Lake Nipigon, in

256 Canadian Record of Science.

1885, at Port Dover, Lake Erie, and in 1890, at Port Col-
borne, on the same lake. _

In Manitoba it was collected by Dr. R. Bell in 1878, at
the outlet of Lake Winnipeg and from Lake Winnipeg
between Fort Alexander and Elk Island. It occurs, asso-
ciated with A. Warryattana, Lea, in the Fairford River,
and is the only species of Anodonta that the writer was
able to find in Lake Manitoba (in 1888).

In the district of Saskatchewan one perfect specimen
was collected by Dr. R. Bell, in 1882, at Buffalo Lake,
near Methy Portage.

Mr. Simpson, to whom the writer is indebted for the
identification of specimens from most of these localities, is
convinced that A. Dallasiana and A. Kennicotti, of Lea,
are both synonyms of A. Simpsoniana.

ANODONTA SUBCYLINDRACEA, Lea.

Widely distributed in the provinces of Quebec and
Ontario, from Lakes Metapedia and St. John to the east-
ward, to creeks, rivers and bays at the east end of Lake
Superior and north side of Lake Erie to the westward.
Mr. Simpson, however, regards A. swbcylindracea-as a mere
synonym of A. Herussaciana, Lea.

MARGARITANA, Schumacher, 1819.

MARGARITANA CALCEOLA, Lea. (JZ. deltordea, Lea.)

Lake Erie, at Fort Dover, Professor Macoun, 1890.
Grand River, at Belwood, Ontario, J. Townsend, 1892.
East and west branches of the Grand River at Galt and
Ayr, Professor Macoun, 1894.

MARGARITANA COMPLANATA, Barnes.

Manitoba. Upper Assiniboine River, Dr. R. Bell, 1874;
Souris River, Dr. A. R. C. Selwyn, 1882 and 1884; Shoal
tiver and near Elk Island, Lake Winnipeg, Dr. R. Bell,

Recent Canadian Unionide. AGHA

1883; Swan River, J. B. Tyrrell, 1887, and Assiniboine
River, J. B. Tyrrell, 1884.

Keewatin. Nelson River, Dr. R. Bell, 1878.
_ Saskatchewan. Shell River (township 50, range 2 and
3, west of third Initial Meridian) north of the north Sas-
katchewan, O. J. Klotz, 1890.

Alberta. Battle River, three miles above Grattan Lake,
J. B. Tyrrell, 1885.

MARGARITANA MARGARITIFERA, L.

From the Province of Quebec this species has already
been recorded as having been collected by Dr. R. Bell Gin
1857) in the Green and Rimouski rivers, at Lake St. John
and both the Metapedia Lakes, and by the writer, (in
1861) in the River St. Charles, near Quebec City. More
recently it has been collected in that province by Dr.
H. M. Ami, in 1883, in the Assumption River, near Raw-
don; by N. J. Giroux, in 1892, at the Lac de la Ferme,
Riviere du Loup, en haut, and in that river; also by
A. P. Low, in 1894, in the Romaine River.

In British Columbia, small and thin but characteristic
specimens were found by Dr. G. M. Dawson, in 1885, in
small streams entering Malaspina Strait, on the mainland
side; also, in 1890, in Kakwous Lake, the source of the
Bonaparte River, at an altitude of about 4,000 feet.

MARGARITANA MARGINATA, Say.

The small and typical eastern form of this’ shell is
common in the province of Quebec and in eastern Ontario.
A few specimens of the large western variety known to
students of the Unionide as MW. truncata, Say (M.S%.)
were collected by Professor Macoun, in 1894, at Galt and
Ayr, from the east and west branches of the Grand River

MARGARITANA RUGOSA, Barnes. (?= J. costata, Rafin-
esque, sp.)
This species is widely distributed in the provinces of

258 Canadian Record of Science.

Quebee and Ontario. In the latter province unusually
large and thick specimens, measuring five inches and a
half in length by three inches in height, were collected by
Prof. Macoun, in 1894, in the east and west branches of
the Grand River, at Galt and Ayr. The species has been
recorded by Dr. G. M. Dawson as occurring, though
rarely, in the Roseau River, Manitoba.

MARGARITANA UNDULATA, Say.

St. Lawrence River, at Montreal and Quebec, J. F.
Whiteaves, 1861. Near Ottawa City, G. C. Heron, 1879.

UNIO, Philipsson, 1788. —

UNIO. ALATUS, Say.

Widely distributed throughout Ontario. The most
easterly ‘locality at which it has been collected is the
Ottawa River at L’Orignal, as recorded by Dr. R. Bell, in
the Canadian Naturalist and Geologist for June, 1859
(Vol. IV., p. 219). In Manitoba it has been collected in
the Red River by Dr. G. M. Dawson, in 1873, and by
T. C. Weston, in 1884:

Unio BOREALIS, A. F. Gray.
A pair of specimens of this species, from the Ottawa
river, at Duck Island, the typical locality, was presented

to the museum of the Survey by Mr. F. R. Latchford, of
Ottawa, in 1886. .

UnIo CANADENSIS, Lea.

Two specimens, from the Ottawa River, near Ottawa,
which are believed by the donor to be referable to this
enigmatical species, were presented to the Museum of the
Survey by Mr. Latchford, in 1893.

Unto circuus, Lea. (?=U. subrotundus, Rafinesque.)
Lake Erie, at Kingsville, Ontario, J, McQueen, 1880,

Recent Canadian Unionde. 259

two specimens. Thames River, at Chatham (several spe-
cimens) and Detroit River, below Sandwich, One (one
specimen), Professor Macoun, 1894.

UNIO COCCINEUS, Lea.

Grand River, Cayuga, Ontario, Professor Macoun; one
“fairly typical specimen,’ (C. T. Simpson).

UNIO COMPLANATUS (Solander ?) Lea. (U. purpuwreus, Say.)

Abundant in Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Quebec
and Kastern Ontario. Collected by Dr. Rh. Bell, in 1859, in
ereeks, rivers and bays on the north shore at the east end of
Lake Superior, along the entire north shore of Lake Huron,
also in the St. Mary River. Lake Nipissing, Dr. A. R. C.
Selwyn, 1884 (whence it had previously been recorded by
Dr. Bell, in 1859). Montreal River, Lake Temiscaming,
Ontario, Dr. R. Bell, 1887.

Unto cornutus, Barnes. (?= U. reflexus, Rafinesque.)

Grand River, Cayuga, Ontario, Professor Macoun, 1890;
a perfect and fresh left valve.

UNIO ELEGANS, Lea. (U. truncatus, as of Rafinesque.)

Thames River, at Chatham (Ontario), Professor Macoun,
1894; one dead but perfect specimen.

UNIO ELLIPSIS, Lea. (?= UV. olwvarius, Rafinesque.)

Ottawa River, opposite L’Orignal, R. Bell, 1854, and
near Ottawa, G. C. Heron, 1879 (as JU. olivarius, Rafin-
esque). St. Lawrence River,’ at Montreal, R. Bell, 1858,
and near Quebec, J. F. Whiteaves, 1861. Missisaugi
River, on the north shore of Lake Huron, Dr. R. Bell,
1860. Lake Erie, at Port Colborne, and Detroit River,
near Windsor, Professor Macoun, 1885.

Unio aipposus, Barnes. (?= U. dilatatus,Rafinesque.)

This species, which has long been known to be abundant

\

260 Canadian Record of Science.

in the St. Lawrence and Ottawa rivers, has recently been
collected by Professor Macoun in Lake Erie, at Port
Colborne, in the Grand River at Cayuga, and its two
branches at Galt and Ayr, also in the Detroit River, at
Windsor.

UNIo GRACILIS, Barnes. (?= U. fragilis, Rafinesque.)

Collected by Professor Macoun, in 1885, from Lake
Erie, at Port Colborne, and the Grand River, at Cayuga;
in 1890, at Port Dover, Ontario, and in 1894, in the River
Thames, at Chatham.

Unio LacHrymosus, Lea.~ (Probably = U. quadrulus, Ra-—
finesque. )

In Ontario, Professor Macoun collected specimens of
this species in the Grand River at Cayuga, in 1885, and in
the Thames River, at Chatham, in 1894.

In Manitoba it was found to be abundant in the Red
River, by Dr. G. M. Dawson, in 1873, and Professor J.
Fowler has presented to the museum of the Survey a
specimen, which he collected at Emerson in 1887.

UNIO LIGAMENTINUS, Lamarck.

Grand River, at Caledonia, Ontario, J. Townsend, 1885,
and at Cayuga, Professor Macoun, 1890. Thames River,
at Chatham, Professor Macoun, 1894. Roseau River,
Manitoba, Dr. G. M. Dawson, 1873, and Assiniboine
River, at Millwood, J. B. Tyrrell, 1888.

Unio LuTEOLUS, Lamarck.

Common almost everywhere in Canada east of the
Rocky Mountains, though its exact range east of Ontario
is a little uncertain, owing to its close resemblance to
U. radiatus. Dr. Lea, in 1862, records it as occurring in
Great Slave Lake, Lake Athabasea, and near the mouth
of Moose River, Hudson’s Bay. In Manitoba it was col-
lected by Mr. J. B. Tyrrell, in 1887, from the Swan River ;

Recent Canadian Unionide. 261

in 1888, from the Assiniboine, and in 1889, from the Red
Deer River. It appears to be the only Unio in Lake
Manitoba, where it was collected by the writer in 1888,
and from the Fairford River. In Alberta, Mr. Tyrrell
collected it, in 1885, in the Blind Man, Battle and
Medicine Rivers.

UNIO NASUTUS, Say.

Two fine specimens of this species, from Toronto Bay,
were presented to the museum of the Survey, by Mr.
Latchford, in 1886, and since then numerous specimens of
it were obtained by Professor Macoun (in 1894) at Ron-
deau, on Lake Erie.

Unio Novi-Exporact, Lea. (Perhaps= U. iris, Lea.)

Grand River, at Cayuga, Professor Macoun, 1890; one
perfect specimen. Thames River, at Chatham (two speci-
mens) and Detroit River, below Sandwich (one specimen),
Professor Macoun, 1894.

UNIO PHASEOLUS, Hildreth. (?= VU. fasciolaris, Rafinesque.)

Detroit River, at Windsor (one specimen) and Lake
Erie, at Port Colborne (two specimens), Professor Macoun,
1885. Lake Erie, at Kingsville, Ontario (one specimen),
J. T. McQueen, 1890, and Thames River, at Chatham (one
specimen), Professor Macoun, 1894.

‘UNIO PRESSUS, Lea.

Boulder River, one of the upper branches of the Atta-
wapishkat River, west of James Bay (in lat. 52° 30° and
long. 87° 30’), Dr. R. Bell, 1886; a perfect and fresh right
valve. West branch of the Grand River, at Ayr, Ontario,
Professor Macoun, 1894,a slightly distorted but living shell.
This species has long been known to be common in the
Rideau Canal and river, near Ottawa, where it was first
noticed by the late E. Billings, about the year 1856 or 1857.

20

262 Canadian Record of Science.

e ;
Unio pustuLosus, Lea. (?= U. bullatus, Rafinesque.)
|

Grand River, Caledonia, Ontario, J. Townsend, 1885;
one specimen. Thames River, at Chatham, Professor
Macoun, 1894; two specimens.

UnIo RADIATUS (Gmelin), Lamarck.

No new localities are to be recorded for this common
eastern species, which has long been known to range from
Nova Scotia to at least: as far to the westward as Ottawa.

Unio RANGIANUS, Lea. (Perhaps a var. of U. perpleaus, Lea.)

Lake Erie, at Kingsville, Ontario, J. T. McQueen, 1890 ;
one perfect specimen of the shell of the female.

Unio REcTus, Lamarck.

Common in the St. Lawrence and Ottawa rivers, and
in western Ontario. In Manitoba, it was collected by
Dr. G. M. Dawson, in 1873, from the Roseau River, and
by Mr. J. B. Tyrrell, in 1888, in the Assiniboine River at.
Millwood.

/

UNIO RUBIGINOSUS, Lea. (?7= U. flavus, Rafinesque.)

In Ontario this shell has been collected by Professor
Macoun, in 1890, in the Grand River at Cayuga, and in
1894, in the Thames River, at Chatham. In Manitoba, 1t
was found by Dr. G. M. Dawson, in 1875, in the Red and
Roseau Rivers, and by Dr. R. Bell, in 1883, in Lake Win-
nipeg, between Fort Alexander and Elk Island.

JNIO SUBROTUNDUS, Lea.

Grand River, Caledonia, J. Townsend, 1885, one speci-
men, which “approaches U. ebenus” (C. T. Simpson). Port
Dover, Lake Erie, a specimen “which approaches JU.
solidus, Lea,” (C. T. Simpson), and Rondeau, Lake Erie,
one specimen, Professor Macoun, 1894.

~

Recent Canadian Unionide. 263

UNIO TRIANGULARIS, Barnes. (?= U. triqueter, Rafinesque.)

Collected by Professor Macoun, in 1885, at Port Col-
borne, Ontario, and in 1894, at Rondeau and in the
Thames River at Chatham.

UNIO TRIGONUS, Lea. (?= U. undatus, Barnes.)

Port Dover, Lake Erie, Professor Macoun, 1890, two
perfect but worn specimens, which were identified with
this species by Mr. Simpson.

UNIO UNDULATUS, Barnes. ' (?= U. costatus, Rafinesque.)

Ontario. Sable River, at Thedford, Mr. Bissell, 1883,
per Dr. H. Ami. Grand River, Caledonia, J. Townsend,
1885. Lake Erie, at Port Colborne, and. Detroit River,
at Windsor, Professor Macoun, 1885. Grand River, at

Cayuga, Professor Macoun, 1890, and Thames River, at
Chatham, Professor Macoun, 1894.

Manitoba. Black River, Lake Winnipeg, Dr. R. Bell,
1883, two specimens, with the umbonal regions much
eroded. Emerson, Professor J. Fowler, one specimen of a
small form which approaches U. plicatus (Le Sueur, MS.S.)
Say.

UNIO VENTRICOSUS, Barnes. (U. occidens, Lea, female, and
U. subovatus, Lea, male: ?= U. cardiwm, Rafinesque.)

Common in the St. Lawrence and Ottawa rivers and
throughout Ontario. In Manitoba it has been collected
in the Red and Roseau Rivers by Dr. G. M. Dawson, in
1873, and at Lake Winnipeg, between Fort Alexander and
Elk Island, by Dr. R. Bell, in 1883.

Orrawa, November 30th, 1894.

4

264 Canadian Record of Science.

CoNTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN Botany.
‘ By James M. Macoun.
V.

THALICTRUM VENULOSUM, Trelease.

In thickets, Seven Persons’ Coulee, Medicine Hat, Assa.;
Crane Lake, Assa.; Cypress Hills, Assa., 1894. (John
Macoun, Herb Nos. 2952, 2953, 2954.°) Our only records
between Lake Manitoba and the Rocky Mountains.’

RANUNCULUS ABORTIVUS, Linn. :

_ Lake Petitsikapau, Hamilton River, Labrador, 1894.
(A. P. Low, Herb No. 4331.) Most northern record for

Eastern Canada. |

RANUNCULUS HISPIDUS, Michx.

Our only specimens of this plant are from Wesley Park,
Niagara, Ont. (John Macoun.)

RANUNCULUS COOLEY, V. & R.

Mount Rapho, Lat. 56° 13’, Long. 131° 46’ Alt.
3,800 ft. July, 1894. (Otto Klotz and H. W. E. Cana-
van.) Only Canadian record. First collected near Juneau,
Alaska, by Miss Grace Cooley, in 1891.

ACTA SPICATA, Linn, var. RUBRA, Ait.

Lake Michikamau, Labrador, 1894. (4. P. Low. Herb.
No. 4331.) Northern limit in Eastern Canada. :

NYMPHAA PYGMAA, Ait.

New stations for this rare plant are Loon Lake,
C. P. Ry. east of Port Arthur, Ont., and Petobi Brook,
Gull Bay, Lake Nepigon, Ont., 1894. (Wm. McLnnis.)

1 Whenever herbarium numbers are given, they are the numbers under which speci-

mens have been distributed from the herbarium of the Geological Survey of Canada,
2 The geographical limits given in these papers refer to Canada only.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 265

BARBAREA VULGARIS, R. Br.

Lake Petitsikapau, Hamilton River, Labrador, 1894.
(A. P. Low. Herb No. 4340.) Not scape recorded from
Labrador.

VIOLA PALUSTRIS, Linn.

Ashuanipi branch~ of Hamilton River, Labrador.
(A. P. Low. Herb. No. 4343.) Not before recorded from
Labrador.

CERASTIUM VISCosuM, Linn.

C. glomeratum, Thuill.

Burrard Inlet, B.C., and many places in vicinity of
Victoria, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.) Not found
anywhere in Eastern Canada, all references but one, under
C. viscosum, in Prof. Macoun’s Catalogue of Canadian
Plants going with C. vulgatum.

CERASTUM VULGATUM, Linn.

C. viscosum, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. 1., page 77,
in part.

Widely distributed throughout Eastern Canada. Revel-
stoke, B.C. (John Macoun.) North of Finlayson Lake,
BC. Laned. “CDG. M“Dawson.)

CERASTIUM NUTANS, Raf.
Sproat, Columbia River, B.C., 1890. (John Macoun.)

| Cherry Creek, east of Lake Okanagan, B.C. (Jas.

McHvoy.) Only British Culumbia stations.

CERASTIUM ARVENSE, Linn., var. OBLONGIFOLIUM, H. & B.
C’. oblongifolvwm, Torrey; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. Bape’:
A narrow-leaved form of this variety was caiteerd at
Truro, N.S., by Prof. Macoun, July, 1883. Only station
east of Ontario.

266 Canadian Record of Serence,

CERASTIUM ALPINUM, Linn.

Arctic America, from Labrador to Alaska. References
under var. Fischerianwm, Macoun Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I.,
p. 498, go here. This variety is confined to the Pacific
Coast.

CERASTIUM ALPINUM, Linn., var. BEERINGIANUM, Regel.

Arctic America, and on many of the higher Rocky
Mountains.

STELLARIA AQUATICA, Scopoli.

The only stations for this species in Canada are Strat-
ford, Ont. (Burgess). Roadsides and _ ballast heaps,
Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1893. (John Macoun.)

STELLARIA NITENS, Nutt.

Dry slopes, Agassiz, B£.; Kamloops, B.C., 1889. (John
Macoun.) Not before collected on mainland of British
Columbia.

STELLARIA LONGIPES, Goldie, var. L&2TA, Wats.

S. longipes, Goldie, var. Edwardsii, T. & G.; Macoun,
Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L, pp. 76 and 498, in part.

From New Brunswick and Labrador to British Columbia
and throughout Arctic America. Our herbarium speci-
mens are from Petitcodiac, N.B. (Srittain.) Pack’s
Harbor, Labrador. (Rev. A. Waghorne.) Ford’s Harbor,
Labrador; Digge’s Island, Mansfield Island and Nottingham
Island, Hudson Bay. (Dr. &. Bell.) Lat. 62° 03’, Long.
103° 15. (J. W. Tyrrell.) Summit of South Kootanie
Pass, Rocky Mts. (Dr. G. WM. Dawson.) Saddle Mountain,
Banff, Rocky Mts.; Kicking Horse Lake, Rocky Mts., alt.
8,000 feet ; Stewart’s Lake Mountain, B.C. (John Macoun.)
Mountains at Roger’s Pass, Selkirk Mts., alt. 7,500 ft. ;
Mount Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C., alt. 6,500 ft.
(Jas. M. Macoun.)

Contributiont to Canadian Botany. 267

STELLARIA LONGIPES, Goldie, var. EDWARDSII, Wats.

From Labrador to British Columbia and northward to
the Arctic regions. Our only specimens of this variety
are from Quesnelle, B.C. (John Macoun.)

STELLARIA GRAMINEA, Linn.

In sandy woods, Fort George, Hudson Bay. (Jas. M.
Macown.) Probably indigenous. Only record north of
Nova Scotia.

STELLARIA ULIGINOSA, Murr.

This species is confined to the Atlantic slope and is not
of as wide distribution as is given it by Prof. Macoun,
Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L, pp. 75 and 497. .Our specimens
are from Hunter’s River, Prince Edward Island, and
Point Pleasant, near Halifax, N.S. (John Macoun.)

STELLARIA BOREALIS, Bigel. var. COROLLINA, Fenzl.

S. borealis, Bigel. var. alpestris, Gray; Macoun Cat.
Can. Plants, Vol. L., p. 74.

Dr. Robinson places the eastern ‘limit of this variety at
Lake Superior. We have, however, specimens from
Brackley Point, Prince Edward Island. (John Macown.)
Lake Mistassini, N.E.Ter. (Jas. Ml. Macoun.) The only
western reference for this variety given by Prof. Macoun

js Yale, B.C. Later collections show it to be a common

plant in many parts of the Northwest and _ British
Columbia, and especially abundant wherever collections
have been made on Vancouver Island.

STELLARIA CRASSIFOLIA, Ehrh.

S. gracilis, Rich., Macoun Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 75.

Pelly Banks, Lat. 61°, Yukon District. (Dr. G.. I.
Dawson.) Not before recorded west of the prairie region.

~

268 . Canadian Record of Science.

STELLARIA HUMIFUSA, Rottb., var. OBLONGIFOLIA, Fenzl.
Blinkinsop Bay, B.C., 1885. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) Not

before recorded from Canada. Referred to S. uliginosa,
by Prof. Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 497.

STELLARIA OBTUSA, Engelm.

Near MacLeod’s Lake, B.C. (John Macoun.) South
Kootanie Pass, Rocky Mts. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) The
only Canadian stations.

ARENARIA CILIATA, Linn. var. HUMIFUSA, Hornem.

Cerastium trigynum, Macoun Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L,
p- 498 in part. |

Stellaria humifusa, Macoun Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L,
p. 498 in part. |

Mount Albert, Gaspé, Que. (Allen. Porter.) Lake
Mistassini, N.E.Ter. (Jas. MZ. Macown.) Specimens col-
lected at Kicking Horse Lake, Rocky Mts., and on the
summit of Mount Aylmer, Banff, Rocky Mts., alt. 8,300
feet, have been doubtfully referred here by Dr. Robinson.

ARENARIA CONGESTA, Nutt., var. SUBCONGESTA, Wats.

Gravelly banks, Lewis River, Lat. 62°, Yukon District.
(Dr. G. M. Dawson.) Not before recorded west of Alberta.

ARENARIA SAJANENSIS, Willd.

A. arctica, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I., p. 71.

A, liflora, Wats., var. obtusa, Wats.; Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. I, pp. 71 and 496.

A, verna, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L, p. 496
in part. |

A. verna, var. rubella, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I.
p. 72 in part.

Mount Albert, Gaspé, Que. (Porter. Macoun.) These
specimens were referred to A. arctica and A. verna, var.
rubella, by Prof. Macoun. Cape Chudleigh, Hudson

d

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 269

Strait. (Dr. R. Bell.) Referred to A. verna by Prof.
Macoun. Common on mountains throughout British
~ Columbia. —

According to Dr. Robinson A. arctica, Stev., is not
found in British America.

ARENARIA STRICTA, Fenzl.

A. Michawaiii, Hook., Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants., Vol. L.,
pp. 72 and 496. |

Dr. Robinson makes Minnesota the western limit of
this species. It is not uncommon in the Rocky Mts.
near the line of the Canadian Pacific Railway, our speci-

mens being from several stations in and near the National
Park at Banff.

SAGINA OCCIDENTALIS, Wats.

Gordon Head and Cedar Hill, Vancouver Island. (John
Macown.) ;

SAGINA Linn, Presl.

Mount Aylmer, Rocky Mts., alt. 8,500 ft.; Kicking
Horse Lake, Rocky Mts., alt. 8,000 ft.; Roger’s Pass,
B.C.; between Sproat and Nelson, B.C.; Burrard Inlet,
B.C.; Nanaimo, Vancouver Island. Herb No. 19. (John
Macoun.) Summit of South Kootanie Pass, Rocky Mts. ;
Queen Charlotte Islands. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) Mountains
north of Gritfn Lake, B.C.; Mount Queest, Shuswap
Lake, B.C. (Jas. M. Macoun.)

S. CRASSICAULIS, Wats.

Gordon Head, Esquimault, and Goldstream, near Victoria,
Vancouver Island; Comox and Nanaimo, Vancouver
Island. (John Macown.)

Note.—The references under these three species are in
part in addition to those given by Prof. Macoun under
S. occidentalis and S. Linnea, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IL,

270 Canadian Record of Science.

pp. 79 and 499, and the arrangement now given is
intended to take the place of that in the catalogue.

HYPERICUM CANADENSE, Linn.

In sandy soil at Kamloops, B.C.; wet ground, Sproat
Lake, Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.) Not before
recorded west of Alberta. 7

MALVA PARVIFLORA, Linn.

M. borealis, Macoun, Cat. Vol. IL., p. 313.

Specimens of this plant were collected on ballast heaps
at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island in 1887, by Prof. Macoun,
and called M. borealis. It was again found by him at the
same place in 1893 (Herb. No. 46) and correctly deter-
mined by Prof. Greene.

MALVA ROTUNDIFOLIA, Linn.

Waste places at Beacon Hill, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macoun, Herb. No. 47.) .

SIDALCEA MALVAFLORA, Gray.

Common at Revelstoke. (John Macown.) Not before
recorded from interior of British Columbia.

MALVASTRUM COCCINEUM, Nutt.

On dry soil, 7 miles from the mouth of Deadman River,
near Kamloops Lake, B.C. (Jas. McEvoy.) Not. before
recorded west of the prairie region.

Linum LEwisil, Pursh.

A white-flowered procumbent form of this plant was
collected in Lat. 56° on the west side of Hudson Bay, by
Jas. M. Macoun, in 1886. No plants with blue flowers
were seen.

GERANIUM ERIANTHUM, DC.

Alice Arm, Observatory Inlet, B.C, July 7th, 1893.
(Jas. McEvoy. Herb. No. 60.) Southern limit.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 271

GERANIUM PUSILLUM, Linn.

Agassiz, B.C. (Macoun.) We have no other record of
this plant between Ontario and the Pacific Coast.

GERANIUM RICHARDSONI, Fisch. & Mey.

In open woods at Botanie, near Spence’s Bridge, B.C.,
Alt. 3,500 ft. (Jas. M. Macoun.) Not before recorded
west of the Rocky Mountains.

LIMNATHES Macounn, Trelease.

First collected by Prof. Macoun at Victoria, Vancouver
Island, in 1875. Found again by him in May, 1893, in
abundance in ditches and swampy places near Victoria.
No other stations for this species are known.

FLG@RKEA PROSERPINACOIDES, Willd.

Wet places near springs, Casselman, Ont., in flower,
May 14th, 1891. (John Macown.) Only record from

| Eastern Ontario.

OXALIS CORNICULATA, Linn.

On ballast heaps, Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(Macoun, Herb. No. 54.) Only record from British
Columbia.

OXALIS CORNICULATA, L., var. STRICTA, Sav.

In dampish spots near Indian Head, Assa., 1892.
(W. Spreadborough.) Not before recorded west of the
Red River.

IMPATIENS PALLIDA, Nutt.

Anstey Creek, Shuswap Lake, B.C., 1889. (Jas. M.
Macoun.) Agassiz, B.C. (John Macoun.)

CEANOTHUS SANGUINEUS, Pursh.

Sicamous and Revelstoke, B.C., 1889. (John Macoun.)
Eastern limit.

272 Canadian Record of Science.

tHAMNUS PuURSHIANA, DC. |
In woods at Revelstoke, Columbia River, B.C. (John

Macoun.) Eastern limit.

ACER SACCHARUM, Marshall. |

A. saccharinum, Wang., Macoun Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I,
p. 99 im part.

A. saccharinum, Wang., var. nigrum, T. & G.; Macoun
Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I., p. 99.

Bark gray ; internodes mostly slender and elongated,
commonly glossy and reddish.; buds gray, conical, slender
and acute; petioles, little dilated at base, not concealing
the mature buds, without stipules; leaves, thin, typically
large (usually 4 to 7 inches broad), flat, dull, usually hight
green above, the lower surface grayish, glabrous to pubes-
cent, or exceptionally quite hirsute when young, isodiame-
tric, truncate at base to shghtly cordate with an open
sinus, or broadly cuneate, rather deeply 5-lobed, except for.
some smaller 3-lobed leaves near the ends of the branches,
with typically narrow sinuses, the three larger lobes with
parallel sides or dilated upwardly and each with a
slender apical acumination often sinuously bidentate on
the sides, and two similar lateral acuminations, or the
lateral lobes merely sinuate on the upper margin, the
smaller outermost lobes mostly sinuously 1 to 2 toothed
on the lower margin ; fruit, large (6 to 10 mm.), the outer
lines of the large wings (8 to 12 x 16 to 28 mm.), nearly
parallel or spreading to something less than a right angle.

From Nova Scotia to Lake Superior. —

ACER SACCHARUM, var. BARBATUM (Michx.), Trelease.

A. saccharinum, Wang.; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol.
L, p. 99, in part.

Bark, gray to almost black; internodes often shorter
and stouter, commonly dull but reddish; buds gray,
pubescent or dark, conical ovoid, often obtuse; petioles as

‘kg |
Contributions to Canadian Botany. 273

-

in the last and without stipules; leaves firm, of medium
size (usually about 4 in. broad), flat, somewhat glossy and
of various shades of green above, pale or glaucous and
downy to glabrous beneath, mostly broader than long,
cordate with shallow open basal sinus to truncate, 3-lobed,
with very open round sinuses (the upper margin of the
lateral lobes often spreading nearly in a straight line), the
lobes sinuously narrowed from the base to a single acum-
ination, or the median line sometimes dilated®by a pair
of blunt shoulders, one or two similar dilations also on
the lower margin of each lateral lobe, and exceptionally
developed into short complementary lobes; fruit as in the
last.

This tree ranges in the United States from Connecticut
to Missouri and Michigan, and probably grows in many
parts of Eastern Canada. Specimens intermediate between
this variety and A. saccharuwm from Belleville, Ont. (John
Macoun), and Niagara Falls, Ont. (Jos. Schrenk) have been
referred here by Dr. Trelease. These are the only
Canadian specimens of this variety in our herbarium.

ACER SACCHARUM, var. NIGRUM (Michx. f.), Britton.

Bark, nearly black; internodes, stout, sometimes short,
dull, buff; buds, dark, ovoid, often obtuse; petioles dilated _
at base so as, usually, to cover the buds, with adnate
triangular or oblong foliaceous stipules; leaves soft but of
heavy texture, large (usually 5 to 6 in. broad), with
drooping sides, dull and dark green above, clear green and
usually persistently downy below, isodiametric, the larger
deeply cordate with often closed sinus, 3 to 5-lobed, with
shallow broad sinuses from which the lobes are undulately
narrowed to an acute or acuminate point, rarely with
short lateral acuminations; fruit, as in the last.

Ranges in the United States from New York to
Missouri and Michigan, but not known certainly to occur
in Canada, though frequently reported.

274 Canadian Record of Science.

Note.—These descriptions of the several forms of Sugar
Maples have been reprinted from Dr. Trelease’s Monograph
in 5th Annual Report of Missouri: Botanical Garden, and
space is given to them as they change very materially our
knowledge of these trees, and by printing the descriptions _
in full it is hoped that Canadian botanists will be led to
carefully observe the sugar maples in their vicinity.

Rus GLapa, Linn. |

R. glabra, L., var. occidentalis, Torrey; Macoun, Cat.
Can. Plants, Vol. L, p. 505.

Deer Park, Lower Arrow Lake, B.C.; Kamloops, B.C.,
and Spence’s Bridge, B.C. (John Macown.) Only refer-
ences west of Ontario.

2HUS COPALLINA, Linn.

Rocky hillsides at Lansdowne, Ont. (Rev. Chas. Young.)
Very rare in Canada.

LUPINUS ARCTICUS, Wats.

Additional stations for this species are Upper Liard
River, Lat. 60°, Yukon District; forks of Stikine River,
B.C. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) Fifty miles below Lower
Ramparts, Mackenzie River. (#. S. McConnel.) Fort
Good Hope, Mackenzie River. (Miss 2. Taylor.) Speci-
mens collected at Medicine ‘Hat in flower, May 31st, 1894,
have been referred here by Dr. Robinson. (John Macown,
Herb. No. 4190.) ;

SAXIFRAGA TOLMAI, Torr. & Gray.

On Mount Head, alt. 4,200 ft. Lat. 56° 05’, Long.
131° 09’, 1894. (Otto Klotz and H. W. E. Canavan, Herb.
No. 4197.) First authentic record for Canada.

TILLZA SIMPLEX, NUTT.

In mud in a mill pond at Mount Stewart, Prmce Edward
Island, 1888. (John Macown.) New to Canada.

>

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 275

(ENOTHERA MICRANTHA, Horn.

On ballast heaps at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macown, Herb. No. 249.) Introduced from the
south. New to Canada.

PHACELIA HISPIDA, Gray.

On ballast heaps, Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macoun, Herb. No. 654.) Introduced from the
south. New to Canada.

KRYNITZIA AMBIGUA, Gray.

On ballast heaps at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macoun, Herb. No. 672.) Introduced from Cali-
fornia. New to Canada.

AMSINCKIA BARBATA, Greene, Erythrza, Vol. II, No. 12.
p.. 192. )

Stout and coarse, erect or decumbent, the branches
loosely floriferous throughout, all excepting the uppermost
pedicels subtended each by a broad ovate-lanceolate
amplexicaul foliaceous bract; sepals 4 or 5 lines long,
nearly hnear, without rufous or fulvous pubescence, but
densely white-hirsute along the margins, sparsely hispid
with whitish bristles an the back; corolla small; nutlets
ovate-acuminate, closely muricate-tuberculate, without
transverse rugosities, but with an elevated and toothed
dorsal ridge.

Collected at Cameron Lake, Vancouver Island, 15th

July, 1887, by John Macoun. Type specimen in the

herbarium of the British Museum. Distributed by Prof.
Macoun as Amsinckia lycopsoides.

ZANNICHELIA PALUSTRIS, Linn.

In the Spullamacheen River at Enderby, B.C., 1889.
(Jas. M. Macoun.) Not before recorded west of the Sas-
katchewan.

276 Canadian Record of Science. .

NAIAS FLEXILIS, Rostk. & Schmidt.

Enderby, B.C., 1889. (Jas. M. Macown.) Kamloops, B.C.
(Jas. .McHvoy.) Revelstoke, B.C. (John Macoun.) Not ~
before recorded from interior of British Columbia.

ZOSTERA LATIFOLIA, Morong. |
_ Z. marina, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IL, p. 90,
in part.

Burrard Inlet, B.C.; Esquimalt, Vancouver Island,
(John Macown.)
PHYLLOSPADIX TORREYI, Wats.

Amongst rocks below half-tide, Stubb’s Island, west
coast of Vancouver Island, 1893. (W. Spreadborough,
Herb. No. 4502.) |New to Canada.

BECKMANNIA ERUCA:FORMIS, Host., var. UNIFLORA, Scrib.

Sea’s Farm, near Victoria, Vancouver Island, 1893.
(John Macoun.) Not betore recorded west of the Rocky
Mountains. Perhaps introduced.

‘

A CADDIS-FLY FROM THE LEDA CLAYS OF THE
VICINITY OF OTTAWA, CANADA.

By Samueu H. Scupper.

The few insects that have been hitherto found in the
Leda clays or in similar horizons in America have all
been Coleoptera. The present specimen, of which a figure
is here given, enlarged six diameters, is a caddis-fly, one
of the Neuroptera. It was found by Dr. Henry M. Ami,
of the Geological Survey of Canada, in the nodules of
Green’s Creek, near Ottawa, and sent me for examination.
It is of a glistening, dark, smoky brown color, with black
veins which are followed with some difficulty, especially
where two wings overlap. The clearest and most import-
ant part of the neuration is in the upper portion of the

/
On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 277

fore-wing ; but unfortunately it exhibits in full only the
principal cells. These are enough to show that it is a
‘ a caddis-fly, and that it falls
Pen near, if not in the genus
Phryganea proper, but it
differs in important points
from all the species I have
examined in the Museum
of Comparative Zoology at
Cambridge, containing the
large collection of the late
Dr. Hagen. The differences
consist principally in the
great length of the thyri-
dial area and of the median
cellule, so that the distal
Phryganea ejecta, n. sp. termination of the lower
cellules is much farther removed from the base of the
wing than is that of the upper. It represents a tolerably
large species, the preserved fragment being 10 mm. long,
and the probable original length of the forewing at least
15 mm. It may be called Phryganea ejecta.

On tHE NorRIAN orn “ Upper LAURENTIAN” For-
MATION OF CANADA.

By Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc., Pu.D.

(Translated from the German by N. J. Grrovux, Esq., C.E., of the
Geological Survey of Canada. )—Continued.

THE STRUCTURE OF THE Morin ANORTHOSITE AND A Com-
PARISON OF THE SAME WITH THE STRUCTURE OF CERTAIN
Rocks IN OTHER PLACES.

Ifa large smooth weathered surface of anorthosite, as
it is found in the “ Roches Montonnées” throughout the
Morin area, be examined, leaving out of consideration for

21

278 Canadian Record of Science.

the present the arm-like extension and that part of the
main area adjacent to it, it will be noticed that the rock
which is coarsely granular and of a deep violet colour,
has not the regular structure which we find in a typical
granite, but exhibits:a more or less irregular -structure.
At times this is scarcely noticeable, but at other times it
is very distinct, and is due to the fact that the bisilicates
and iron ores are much more abundant in some parts of
the rock than in others. The portions richer in bisilicates
form either very large irregularly-bounded spots, which
appear here and there, or a large number of small spots.
In some cases they occur abundantly in the rock, while in
others they are entirely wanting. The coloured portions
are sometimes so arranged that instead of irregular spots
they form undulating stripes, whose direction 1s sometimes
sufficiently continuous to give a kind of strike to the rock.
In other cases, however, they are irregular. Between
these spots or stripes, which are comparatively rich in
bisilicates, and badly defined against them lies the chief
mass of the rock. It contains only very little and some-
times even no bisilicates, and in it there le large broken
crystals of plagioclase, often heaped up in certain places
or especially numerous in certain directions. In intimate
connection with this irregular distribution of the constitu-
. ents of the rock, and

sometimes also quite
independent. of it,
there occur local vari-
ations in the size of
erain which are lke-
wise exhibited in spots
or stripes. The accom-
Fig. 1. panying drawing (see

Fig. 1), made from a photograph, represents a weathered
surface of a variety which is unusually rich in coloured
ingredients. An irregular structure produced by one or

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 279

.

other of the above-mentioned causes is exhibited more or
less distinetly by the rocks of all the anorthosite areas
that have been investigated; but it is not confined to
these, since it has been observed in many gabbros and
basic plutonic rocks allied to them in districts widely
separated from one another.

Dr. Geo. H. Willams, for example, says, in his treatise
on “The Gabbros and Associated Hornblende Rocks
occurring in the neighbourhood of Baltimore, Md.,”! on p.
25: “The most striking feature in the texture of the
unaltered Gabbro is the repeated and abrupt change in
the coarseness of the grain which is seen at some localities.
It was undoubtedly caused by some irregularity in the
cooling of the original magma from a molten state, for
which it is now difficult to find a satisfactory explanation.
The coarsest grained varieties of the Baltimore Gabbro
oceur in the neighbourhood of Wetherville, and there
these sudden changes in texture are most apparent.
Irregular patches of the coarsest kinds le imbedded in
those of the finest grained without any regard to order.
In other cases a more or less pronounced banded structure
is produced by an alternation of layers of different grains
or by such as have one constituent developed more
abundantly than the others. Such bands are not, how-
ever, parallel, but vary considerably in direction and show
a tendency to merge into one another as though they had
been produced by a motion in a liquid or plastic mass.”

Similar and very coarse-grained portions are also found
in the gabbro-diorite which is quarried at Kthlengrund,
near Eberstadt, in Hessen, a rock which is otherwise quite
massive and of an even texture. Other occurrences might
easily be adduced.

The most remarkable example which I have observed,
and especially notable for the reason that it shows the
transition from a perfectly normal massive rock through

1G. H. Williams, Bulletin 28, U.S. Geol. Survey.

280 Canadian Record of Science.

one showing those irregular coarse-grained patches to one
with an imperfect banding lke that observed in the
Morin area, is found in the Saguenay anorthosite area
along River Shipshaw, which, coming from the north,
empties into the Saguenay about seven miles above
Chicoutimi.

Along this stream many large smooth surfaces or
“Roches Montonnées” of anorthosite are exposed which
has been superficially etched by the atmospheric agencies
and whose vegetable growth has completely been removed
by forest fires, so that the structure of the rock is excel-
lently displayed. This series of exposures is limited on
the north by a colossal dyke of gabbro, nearly half-a-mile
wide, and whichfcuts the anorthosite, enclosing fragments
of it. The exposures can be studied for a distance of eight
miles in a straight line down the Shipshaw River to a
point which is three miles distant from its mouth in the
Saguenay.

At first the rock is coarsely granular, and over the
whole extent of the large exposures is quite massive and
of uniform composition. It is exposed thus for about
half-a-mile, and then spots or patches, which must be
designated as very coarse-grained, commence to appear.
In these coarse-grained portions the individual grains are
an inch or more in size, while they are much smaller in
the rest of the rock. Both show a very distinct ophitic
or diabase structure, that is to say, the plagioclase occur
in lath-shaped forms whose interstices are filled up with
augite. The structure continues for four miles, with, in
places, an additional irregularity caused by local variations
in the relative proportion of certain of the constituents.
There are, for example, considerable exposures where the
rock consists entirely of plagioclase, while in other places
much diallage is present in masses as much as 1} foot in
diameter. Large masses of almost pure plagioclase or
diallage also occur in places in the normal rock.

ni _ 4] al ag, . a
SF

ee: gs of one mile, where o are

: wanting, we come to another set of exposures extending

over one mile, with well-developed ophitic structure, as
before, except that the rock is irregularly striped or
banded. This results from the fact that the above-
described irregularities in grain and composition are no
longer exhibited in spots, but in long undulating stripes,
into which the former are drawn out, as described by
G. H. Williams, in the passage quoted on page :
Farther down stream these stripes assume by degrees an
almost parallel position, so that the rock exhibits a
distinct strike, while at the same time the ophitic structure
gradually disappears. Here then is a case where a rock
of undoubted eruptive origin perfectly massive and with a
well-developed ophitic structure gradually changes into a
striped rock, the banded structure being produced by
variations, not only in size of the grains, but im the
relative proportion of the constituents.

This coarse banding, which is a common structure in
many parts of certain anorthosite areas, was formerly
considered as an indication of imperiect bedding.» But
from the above-mentioned facts, it is evident that it was
probably produced by movements in a granular, eruptive
rock. : }

The next question which presents itself is, whether this
structure originated nm a movement before the rock was
completely crystallized, or whether it was developed after
consolidation. In the exposure above described, facts
were found, by repeated and careful study in the field,
which point to a movement while the rock was in a
molten state. The irregularity in the size of the grains is
of primary origin, and was certainly not produced by
pressure. The stripes or irregular bands do not assume
a definite direction from the start, but wind about at first
as if the mass had moved when im a pasty condition, and
only became more evenly arranged when, for some reason,
the movement was determined in a definite direction.

282 Canadian Record of Science.

This is the most probable explanation of the facts, and
is furthermore supported by the absence of lines of motion
or fracture, and as far as can be ascertained by a careful
microscopic investigation, also by the absence of those
minerals which are generally found along such lines in
rocks that have been squeezed. No clear proof of any
dynamic action is observable. )

We find, moreover, elsewhere, similar striped and banded
structures in certain basic intrusive masses which cer-
tainly have not been affected by pressure. The theralite
from Mount Royal, at the foot of which hes the city of
Montreal, is an example of this. This theralite breaks
here through the flat-lying silurian limestone of the
Trenton age, and probably forms the nucleus of an old
palaeozoic volcano.

Although it cannot be maintained that the striped and
irregular banded structure which is so often found in
various basic rocks is never produced by dynamic action,
it may yet be shown that it often results from movements
in the mass before consolidation. It 1s probable that the
structure usually originates in this way; but cases are
rare where the conclusion that the structure results from
dynamic action is quite excluded. It may be here also
remarked that no satisfactory reason can be assigned for
the sudden alterations in the size of grain which we so often
observe in gabbros and alhed rocks. This can hardly
be accounted for by irregular cooling, as the tempera-
ture must have been practically the same in adjacent
parts of the magma. The cause may perhaps be looked
for in the great abundance of moisture in certain places.
If such be the case, however, we must reject the theory so
frequently held that the presence of “agents mineralisa-
teurs” exerts a slighter influence ‘in the crystalline
development of basic magmas than on that of the acid
ones in which such an alteration in the size of the grain
does not usually occur to such an extent.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 283

In carefully examining the anorthosite rocks of the
Morin area we usually, if not invariably, observe in con-

Fig. 2.

nection with the striped and irregularly banded structure
a peculiar fracturing or granulation in the constituents of
the rock. This structure is frequently very well exhibited
on large weathered surfaces. The accompanying sketch
(Fig 2) of an exposure near the village of St. Marguerite
shows this phenomenon. The banding 1s still distinct, but
in nearly every part
of the area the rock
itself, even where no
striping is_ visible,
presents this peculi-
ar brecciated struc-
ture. Fragments of
plagioclase and ot
her constituents he
in a kind of ground
mass, which consists
of smaller grains.
The apparently por-
Fig. 3. phyritic elements

are only in a few cases idiomosphic plagioclases, but are, on
the contrary, almost invariably allotriomorphic fragments

284 Canadian Record of Sevence.

of this mineral. In some places these fragments of crystals
make up the greater part of the rock, while elsewhere they
are very rare. The
larger individuals
can often be obsery-
ed in the very act
of breaking up, in
which case the frag-
ments are but very
little separated from
one another. In a
microscopical inves-
tigation we hardly
find a hand-speci-

men of a coarse gran-
Fig. 4 ular variety which
does not show to a certain degree the clastic structure, and in
studying a large number of hand-specimens, we can follow
step by step the transition from a rock which exhibits no
Seats cataclastic structure
to one which con-
sists almost entirely
of broken grains in
which there remain
scarcely any traces
of the original indi-
viduals.
Figures 3, 4 and
5 are made from
microscopical pho-
tographs of sections
which were taken
Fig. 3. from three different
places in the area; they show the progress of the granula-
tion as seen under the microscope.
A very remarkable fact which was mentioned in speak-

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 285

ing of the composition of these anorthosites is that the
large fragments of crystals have a deep violet colour,
while the broken material is white. The contrast is
observed with especial distinctness on a weathered sur-
face or ina thin section under the microscope. The differ-
ence of the colour is due to the fact that the small
inclusions which abound in the large plagioclase indivi-
duals are wanting in the granulated portion of the rock.
They have evidently gathered themselves together into
small masses of titanic iron ore, which are enclosed in
the broken plagioclase, but are not found in the large
individuals. The contrast of these colours is so marked
that in a section contaiming plagioclase in both condi-
tions, we can predict at once under the microscope, from
the colour exhibited, how much of it is in a granulated
condition and how much is not, even before the structure
has been actually brought out by means of polarized hght.

This seems at first sight to pomt to a complete recrys-
tallfzation of the granulated parts, but there are no facts
which make this probable. The feldspar does not change
its composition. In many sections we can actually
observe the origin of the fine grained material from the
outer portion of the larger individuals. This process
begins in an irregular extinction of a part of the periphery,
which is followed by the breaking off of the fragments.
It is also observed that so soon as a fragment is separated
from the larger mass it becomes colourless. It would
seem then, that the granulation in some way or another
gives free scope to the agent by which the accumulation
of the material of the small inclusions into the larger
masses is brought about. This question we shall consider
again in considering the anorthosites of the Saguenay
River.

Wherever we find an anorthosite, as in a portion of the
Morin area, which is composed entirely of finely granular
material, it can hardly be distinguished by its appearance

286 Canadian Record of Science.

from white granular limestone, if, as is generally the case,
it is almost pure plagioclase.

The peculiar white granular variety of the anorthosite
with comparatively few large individuals, forms in the
Morin area, the greater part of the above mentioned arm-
like extension at its south-east corner. In this the anor-
thosite protrudes from the drift in every direction in
hundreds of smooth white bosses, which give a very
peculiar appearance to the country. It is also met with
and largely developed in the Saguenay area and other
anorthosite areas in the Province of Quebec. It was
furthermore described by Dr. Albert Leeds! as occurring in
the county of Essex, New York; by Vogelsang? in
Labrador, as well as by other observers, and may therefore
be considered as being present to a certain extent mm most
of the areas of this kind of rock. In the Morin anor-
thosite area (and the same applies to the Saguenay area),
we find the most granular varieties near the sides and
especially on the east side, as if the pressure had been
exerted from that direction. In the arm-lke extension of
the Morin area, this fine granular variety is quite clearly
seen. and since the district is easily accessible by roads and
pathways, its structure and other characters may be
studied with comparative ease. This arm has an average
breadth of nearly six miles, and is of a nearly equal width
throughout. At the southern end, before it is covered by
the uneconformable Cambrian beds, it becomes a little
broader, owing to the fact that it has been split longi-
tudinally by a wedge of gneiss. As has been already
mentioned, it runs into the gneiss parallel to the stratifi-
cation or fohation of the latter, so that it appears here as
if it formed an instratified layer.

The white granular anorthosite, moreover, is in this off-

1 A. Leeds, Notes upon the Lithology of the Adirondacks. 13th Annual Report of
the New York State Museum of Nat. Hist., 1876.

2 Vogelsang, Sur la Labradorite coloriée de la Coté du Labrador, Archives Néerlan-
daises IIT, 1868.

ord

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 287 |

shoot everywhere more or less distinctly foliated, as the
bisilicates and the iron ores are arranged in more or less
distinct parallel streaks or strings (Figs. 6 and 7). The
latter are evidently
nothing else than the
rounded spots rich in
bisilicates which are
shown 1n fig. 1, which,
however, are drawn
out by a movement
in the. rock:: >The

Fig. 6. fragments of plagio-
clase and the portions of the rock, distinguished by the
difference in their size of grain, are likewise arranged in
the same direction. We most clearly see this foliation
where the bisilicate and iron ores are comparatively abun-
dant. In places where these ingredients are wanting, as
is often the case, and where the rock presents an almost
even size of grain, it
resembles a white
marble and no- traces
of fohature can be
seen even in a Wea-
thered surface. In
general, however, the
foliation is quite dis-

tinct, and runs paral-

Fig 7 lel to the longer di-
rection of the arm, that is to say, to the strike of the
oneiss. Like the gneiss itself, the apophysis dips towards
the west and is therefore overlain on the west side by the
eneiss, but the angle of the dip is very different in
different places. In some places it is almost horizontal,
in others it dips at high angle. Along the western limit
of the arm the strike is very regular and uncommonly
well developed. It is well seen near New Glasgow, but it

288 Canadian Record of Science.

is especially distinct at the same contact a little further to
the north on the road between the villages of Chertsey and
Rawdon. The rock here shows in an exposure of considerable
size, a very fine foliated structure due to an alternation of
thin bands of pure plagioclase with others of pyroxene. The
pyroxene layers might better be denominated leaves, since
they are very thin and appear in cross sections often as
mere parallel lines. The latter, as well as the plagioclase
layers, frequently show in thin sections under the micro-
scope, grains or fragments of large individuals, with tails
of small broken granules, which extend in both directions
from them, producing the fohated structure. This pro-
gress of granulation can be seen with astonishing distinct-
ness ; for, as just mentioned, the large crystals can be
observed in the very act of breaking up. In doing s0,
they often break along certain hnes, in which the broken
material is arranged. It can furthermore be observed
quite frequently that these grains are the remnants of
very large fragments which were broken apart almost
exactly in the direction of the fohation. They are thus
often very narrow but of considerable length. It even
happens sometimes that such fragments are twelve times
as long as they are wide. -

At the upper end of the arm, where it passes into the
main area, the foliation becomes much less distinct, and
the rock gradually assumes the finely brecciated, irregular
streaked structure whose character and origin have been
already referred to. When the main area is finally reached,
definite strike ceases, except in a few places quite near the
limits.

A cataclastic structure which is similar in many
respects to that which we have described, and in which
the grains of plagioclase are twisted and broken, and
likewise exhibit the granulation on their periphery, is
found in some of the distinctly striped hand-specimens of
the theralite of Mount Royal as above mentioned. We

a

/

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 289

must here consider them as the result of a movement
which took place before complete consolidation, and as an_
example of what Brdgger’ designates as “ protoclastic
structure.” It is here, however, found only locally, and is
not noticeable in many sections of the rock. Yet its
occurrence is of interest for the reason that it proves that
its mere existence 1s not always an infallible sign that the
rock has been exposed to great pressure, and has been’
crushed. ;

Although in the anorthosite this granulation, with its
accompanying phenomena, are without doubt caused by
the pressure to which the rock had been subjected; the
effects of this pressure are quite different from those
generally observed.

In a foliated structure caused by shearing, as Lehmamm
and others have so excellently shown, in many instances
the breaking takes place along certain lines. Along these
lines or stripes, which sometimes are quite wide, and at
others quite microscopical in size, the rock is finely broken
up, so that it forms what Heim calls “Rutschmehl” in
cases where it has not again become thoroughly compacted.
Between these shearing planes we often find comparatively
few indications of pressure. specially along the lnes of
movement, and when these are absent, through the whole
rock, in places where extensive dynamic effects have
occurred, certain peculiar alterations in the constituents
of the rock are observed. .

Of these the following deserve special mention :—The
alteration of the pyroxene into hornblende and of the
plagioclase into a mixture of zoisite, albite, and other
minerals, which is known under the name of saussurite. As
far as could be ascertained no undoubted case has as yet
been observed among the crushed gabbros and associated
rocks where uralite and saussurite have not been found.

1 Brégger, die Mineralien der Syenitpegmatitgange der stidnorwigischen Augit und
Hephelin--Syenite. Zeitschr, fiir Kr. Bd., 16, 1890, p. 105.

290 Canadian Record of Science.

These Canadian anorthosites, on the contrary, show with
the cataclastic structure the following peculiarities :—

1. This structure occurs not along definite lines, but
throughout the rock. ,

2. Where it occurs there is neither saussurite nor
uralite. However granular the plagioclase may be, no
trace of saussurite can be seen. In like manner, no uralite
is detected, even though the granulation of the pyroxene
is so far advanced that only the smallest remnants of the
original individuals remain. Now and then some small
grains of compact hornblende occur with the pyroxene in
the neighbourhood of the contact with the gneiss, exactly
as in many normal gabbros. But even these are by no
means invariably present; the finely fohated rock, con-
sisting of alternate layers of unaltered pyroxene and
plagioclase, while remnants of the large individuals of
both are constituents, from which the granulated portion
has originated are still seen. The only place in which
saussurite occurs 1s, as above mentioned, near New Glasgow.
It forms here, like epidote, strings and veins, which have
no relation with the foliation of the rocks, but represent
small crushed zones, which have originated at another
much later period. These very occurrences show most
distinctly how different the products of the normal
dynamic agencies are from the structure now under
consideration.

3. In the main portion of the area, the granulation is
not accompanied by fohation, and we can observe in the
large weathered surfaces, plagioclase individuals which are
in the act of breaking in every possible direction. It is
evident, therefore, that they were not acted upon by
forces, such as would result from movements in a mass of
a more or less pasty consistency. In the arm-like exten-
sion from the south-east part of the area where the rock,
as already mentioned, is often distinctly foliated, this
fohated structure originated, as shown by a careful study,

~ i by }
4
4 a

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 291

from the movement in one direction of a mass, whose
colored ingredients are irregularly distributed, and espe-
cially concentrated in some places (see fig. 1). The more
or less rounded spots where the colored ingredients are
abundant, became pulled out into irregular, ill-defined
streaks, and parallel to these run portions of the rock,
which still contain large numbers of the fragments of
plagioclase crystals.

The most probable explanation of these phenomena is
that the movements were caused by pressure.

1. When the rock was still so far beneath the surface
of the earth, and so weighted down by the overlying beds.
that breaking and shearing with the movement of the
resulting masses was impossible. The alterations in the
character of the mass were probably induced very slowly,
the constituents were granulated, and the small broken parts
moved one over another. This granulation progressed
with the duration and intensity of this movement to a
certain point. Such a motion would present certain
resemblances to that of a very tough pasty mass.

2. While the rock was still very hot and perhaps even
near its melting point. This would explain why pyroxene,
which, according to the experiments of Fouqué and
Michel-Lévy, represents the stable form of the molecule at
a high temperature, is not easily changed into amphibole,
which represents the more stable form at a low tempera-
ture, as is usually the case in crushed and_ pulverized
rocks. It is perhaps owing to the same cause that no
saussurite is formed; still, the conditions necessary to the
formation of these minerals are so little known that

opinions on this point cannot be ventured upon as yet.

THe ANORTHOSITE BEDS INTERSTRATIFIED WITH THE GNEISS

AND ALTERNATING WITH IT.

We find in many places in the neighbourhood of the
Morin area, as was already mentioned, anorthosite bands

‘

292 Canadian Record of Science.

alternating with the gneiss. Their width varies from one
to several hundred yards, and their length from one-half
to eight English miles. Some of the larger bands are
represented on the accompanying map. The character of
the anorthosite varies somewhat in the different bands,
but on the whole it resembles that of the Morin area. In
general these bands are sharply defined against the gneiss,
with the exception of that near St. Jérdme, where the
surrounding anorthosite appears to gradually pass into
the gneiss. _ As distinguished from that of the main mass,
the anorthosite of these bands often contains more or less
hornblende, biotite and garnet. In one place scapolite
also appears in considerable quantity, probably as a pro-
duct of the alteration of plagioclase, as in the case of the
well known spotted gabbros of Norway. These anorthosite
bands, moreover, present a more or less distinct arrange-
ment of the constituents in the direction of their long axis.

Under the microscope the above described granulation
of the constituents is seen excellently developed. Together
with these anorthosite bands which have the character
and the appearance of eruptive rocks, we find in many
places in the Laurentian gneiss, particularly on the east
side of the Morin mass, interstratified layers of a dark
pyroxene gneiss which gradually passes into the ordinary
eneisses. These have quite a different appearance from
anorthosite, being much richer in coloured constituents.
They contain augite, hypersthene and plagioclase in quan-
tity, very often biotite, hornblende, a little quartz, and
considerable quantities of an untwinned feldspar which
probably consists mostly of orthoclase. We also meet
these so-called “basic gneisses” in many other widely
separated districts of the Laurentian, but neither these
nor the anorthosite bands have been as yet thoroughly
examined from a mineralogical standpoint. In a report
on the district to be published before long by the Geolo-
gical Survey of Canada they will be more fully discussed.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 293
RESUME OF THE RESULTS OBTAINED FROM A STUDY OF THE
Morin AREA.

The Morin area is a large eruptive mass of anorthosite,
that is to say, of a gabbro very rich in plagioclase. This
breaks through Laurentian rocks, and cutting off the differ-
ent members of the formation. It contains inclusions of
oneiss, sends out off-shoots into the gneiss, and is sur-
rounded in many places by a zone, which exhibits many
characteristics of a contact zone. The mass shows in
many places an irregular arrangement of the ingredients
and often variations in the size of grain, a peculiarity
often noticed in allied plutonic rocks. It exhibits,
moreover, a peculiar and unusual kind of cataclastic struc-
ture, which, where it occurs in a very marked manner,
induces a schistosity in the rocks. This structure is
caused by pressure, acting under peculiar conditions.
This schistosity is by no means a proof of an original sede-
mentary origin, and it is lkewise evident that all
other arguments for the existence of a large independent
sedementary complex of which the anorthosite is supposed
to form part, are inconclusive. The gneisses and the lime-
stone with which it is said to alternate really belong to
the Grenville series. and the apparent interstratification
of the anorthosite is the result of intrusion. The anortho-
site, moreover, is unconformably overlaid by flat lying
unaltered beds of Cambrian age (Potsdam and Calciferous)
and, like the Laurentian rocks through which it cuts, must
have already possessed the characters which it now
exhibits in Cambrian times.

Ill.—THE SAGUENAY AREA.

As far as we now know, the largest area of anorthosite
rocks is the one situated about the region of Lake St.
John, where the Saguenay river has its source. This river,
which is famous for the remarkable character of . its

scenery, flows throughout its whole course in a deep gorge
22

294 Canadian Record of Scrence.

in Laurentian rocks, and empties into the St. Lawrence
River about 120 miles below the city of Quebec. The
southern limit of the anorthosite in question is about 100
miles north of that city. It embraces an area of not less
than 5,800 square miles, and is almost completely covered
with forest, being one of the wildest districts of the
Dominian of Canada. The southern corner of the area is
level and inhabited. Here the rocks have there been
carefully investigated, whilst towards the north explora-
tions were made only on the three rivers Peribonka,
Little Peribonka, and Shipshaw, which run parallel to
the longitudinal direction of the area, one on each
side of it, and one through the centre. The rocks
have been traced along these rivers considerably more
than 100 miles north of the southern limits of the
area. The Peribonka was explored to its forks, while
the Shipshaw and Little Peribonka were followed up
through the rough mountainous country to their sources
without reaching the northern limit of the anorthosite
area. Mr. Low, however, found no more anorthosite on
his exploratory trip to Lake Mistassini, during which he
crossed’ the head waters of the Peribonka and examined
the district directly to the north of the one investigated
by myself. But he did find some on the Betsiamites and
afterwards on Rat River, a tributary of the Mistassini.
We therefore know within narrow limits the course of
its northern boundary. The Shipshaw and the Little
Peribonka, which flow respectively on the east and west
side of the area, are several times crossed by the contact
of the anorthosite with the gneiss; they consequently
mark the breadth of the former. We thus possess a good
general knowledge of the extension of the area. The only
previous geological examination of the district was that
made by Richardson, which was cursory and confined to

| Low, on the Mistassini Expedition, Report of the Geological Survey of Canada,
1885, ID.

Bis

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 295

the southern part of the area. The results were published
in the Report of the Geological Survey of Canada for the
year 1857. Abbé Laflamme lkewise gives a brief descrip-
tion of a few exposures in the Geological Survey Report
for 1884. Richardson gives a general description of the
anorthosite of the southern part of the area, but his
statements concerning the western limit as well as his
estimate concerning its extension towards the north are
erroneous. He, however, pointed out in his work the
resemblance of the character of these rocks to those of
other parts of Canada, and thus increased by one the
number of such areas already known in other parts of the
Laurentian. |

The anorthorsite of this “Saguenay area,” as we shall
eall it, consists, like that of the Morin area, of a basic
plagioclase. The latter is sometimes labradorite, some-
times bytonite. Augite, hypersthene, and at times also
hornblende and biotite are other constituents; they are
in every respect identical with the corresponding minerals
of the Morin area, and therefore require no special descrip-
tion. The rock is of medium grain, but the coarseness of
grain varies considerably and often quite abruptly from
place to place. The crystals of the coarse granular
varieties frequently increase in size till the plagioclase
individuals reach a foot or more in diameter.

A difference between this anorthosite and that from
the Morin area consists in the fact that the former often
contains olivine. This mineral occurs often in considerable
quantity, so that there results a plagioclase-olivine rock
or Troctolite, in which all other iron-magnesia compounds
are wanting, with the exception of those forming the
zones of corrosion at the contact of the olivine with the
plagioclase. These zones, which occur so frequently in
the gabbro, have nowhere else been observed in a more
perfect development. Even in the field, an orange
weathering constituent invariably surrounded by a narrow

296 Canadian Record of Science.

ereen rim was frequently observed. Having prepared
thin sections and examined more carefully the nature of
these zones, attention was drawn to them in a short
paper.| They have also been studied by a number of
other investigators.” The examination of a large number
of additional hand-specimens from this area has, how-
ever, brought to light many additional facts concerning
this remarkable phenomenon.

The most massive variety of anorthosite in the whole
area is found on the east shore of Lake St. John, one to

two miles south of the head of the Saguenay River, where
it forms large exposures.

Although the same irregularity in the size of grain
as well as in the proportion of the constituents, which
so often presents itself in gabbros and _ other basic
rocks, appears in many places, yet nothing like banding
in the rocks could be discovered. Distinct sets of cracks
cutting the anorthosite cause it to split up into small

cubic blocks, as in the case with granite and other
plutonic rocks.

On the examination of thin sections under the micro-
scope, olivine and feldspar are seen with the above-men-
tioned zones around the former. Some small grains of
horneblende, ilmenite and pyrite are likewise generally
present. Like the olivine, the plagioclase is quite fresh
and contains no products of decomposition. It has a
specific gravity of 2.70 to 2.71. The maximum extinction
was determined in many thin sections and showed 323°
on either side of the twinning line. The mineral is, there-
fore, bytonite. It is almost black, being filled with the

1 Adams, Notes on zones of certain silicates occurring about the olivine in anortho-

site from the Saguenay District—Ain, Nat., Nov., 1885.

2 J. G. Bonney, Troktolite in Aberdeenshire—Geol. Mag., Oct., 1885. J. H.
Hatch, Notes on the Petrographical characters of some rocks collected in Madagascar,
Q.J.G.8., May, 1889. J. W. Judd, Chemical Changes in Rocks under Mechanical
Stresses.—Journ. Chem. Soc., London, May, 1890. A. E. Térnebohin, Uber die wich-
tigeren Gabbro—und Diabas-Gesteine Sechwedens. Neues Jahrb. fiir Min , etc., 1877,
383. GH. Williams, Peridotites of the Cortlandt Series.—Am. Jour. of Sc., Jan, 1886.

paca
4
a :

\

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 297

minute inclusions above described. While one can observe
the cataclastic structure in the anorthosite in other parts
of the area, here there is scarcely a sign of pressure.
Broken individuals were never observed, and the feldspar
showed only in a few sections an occasional irregular
extinction. In most of the sections no trace of pressure
is discoverable. It is, moreover, 12 miles from the nearest
contact with the surrounding gneiss. The zones around the
olivine are very wide and perfectly developed. The olivine
seldom shows approximate crystal forms; it either occurs
in single individuals or in aggregates, which in that case,
form larger grains. A single individual forms at times a
very irregular elongated strip. The olivine crystallized
before the plagioclase and became enclosed in the latter.
Notwithstanding that a considerable number of thin sec-
tions were examined, the two minerals were never found
directly in contact, every grain of olivine being invariably
completely surrounded by a double zone of other silicates
and thereby separated from the plagioclase.

The first zone around the olivine is colourless, or nearly
so, but often shows a weak pleochroism in green and red
colours. It is formed of many small individuals which
are closely grown together, and are elongated in a direc-
tion at right angle to the surface of the olivine. It often
shows the two sets of cleavages crossing at right angles,
which are characteristic of pyroxene, and in sections, per-
pendicular to an optic axis, the revolving bar of a biaxial
crystal is seen.

The individuals being so small and the cleavage is very
imperfect, it 1s very dificult to determine accurately the
character of this pyroxene. Similar zones, however, are
found in hand-specimens from other parts of the area in
which the erystals of the inner zone are developed on a
larger scale. In these the parallel extinction, trichroism
of red, green and yellowish colours, and also the other
optical properties point to a rhombic pyroxene, which

298 Canadian Record of Science.

mineral oceurs in the anorthosites of this as well as in
those of other areas.

The outer zone, that is to say, the one bordering on the
plagioclase, consists of a bright green actinolite in very
thin needle-shaped crystals, which form a rim around the
pyroxene, from which they project in a radiating manner
‘into the feldspar. This zone is considerably wider than
the pyroxene zone, and the actinolite individuals always
stand perpendicular to the surface of the latter. The
mineral is frequently more massive near the pyroxene
than it is farther away from it.

In a hand specimen from the north shore of Lake
Kenogami the hornblende of the outer zone is full of
small inclusions of spinel. These have a dark green colour,
are isotropic, have a high index of refraction and no cleav-
age. They occur mostly in portions of the horneblende
zone nearest the pyroxene. We find them at times in the
form of grains, but generally in peculiarly bent sheaf-like
forms, resembling the quartz in fine-grained pegmatites
or granophyres. These are arranged within the horne-
blende crystals or between them in a direction perpen-
dicular to the surface of the inner pyroxene zone. This
spinel often occurs in the horneblende in lines parallel to
the surfaces of the prisms, while some small individuals
fork in such a manner that they run parallel to the two
prismatic cleavages. A quite similar case was described
by Lacroix as occurring in the olivine-norite of the Heias
mine near Tredestrande, in Norway.! In this rock the
olivine is surrounded by a double zone, the inner one
consisting of hypersthene and the outer one of amphibole,
in which occur scattered grains of green spinel, which
frequently give rise to a kind of pegmatitic (granophyric)
structure. According to Becke* the kelyphite which

1 iiverate Contributions a l'étude des Gneiss a Pyroxene et des Roches 4 Wernerite.

Bull. soc. min. Fr., Avril, 1880, p. 149.
2 F. Becke, Min. u. Pet. Mitth., VII., p. 250.

tt te

\

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 299

forms similar zones around the garnet of some peridotites

consists likewise of a mixture of spinel and amphibole.

The olivine and the minerals which form the zones
around it are quite differently orientated; the width of the
zones, aS we observe them in the thin sections, has no
definite relation to the size of the grains of olivine, espe-
cially as it varies greatly with the direction in which the
crystal is cut. The zones have apparently originated from
the interaction of the molecules of silicate of lime of the
plagioclase and of the basic silicate of magnesia and iron
of the olivine, giving rise to silicates of intermediate
composition, that next to the olivine being a more acid
silicate of magnesia and iron, which is followed, nearer to
the plagioclase, by an acid silicate of lime and magnesia.
The edges of the original grains of olivine are’ evidently
the sharp lhnes which separate the rhombic pyroxene from
the hornblende, and the latter undoubtedly penetrates
the plagioclase. On the other hand one can often observe
the augite starting from this line and growing into the
olivine, especially where the olivine remaining has the
form of a narrow wedge-like grain which runs out into a
line, on either side of which can be found the pyroxene
individuals.

The opinion has been expressed that these zones were
produced by dynamic forces which have acted upon the
rock. This may be so elsewhere, but here there are no
facts which favor this view.

They are well developed, even in places where the rock,
as above mentioned, is quite massive, and there are no
facts observed which point to dynamic action. They are
found just as well developed in other parts of the anortho-
site area, which likewise show no trace of dynamic action.
They certainly occur in some localities in the district
under consideration accompanied by a cataclastic struc-
ture, but this must necessarily be the case if the zones
existed before the development of the structure. A single

”

}

300 Canadian Record of Science.

case of their occurrence unaccompanied by phenomena of
pressure has more weight than a hundred where distinct
signs of pressure are found, since the latter may have
been developed subsequently ; nor can they be considered
as contact phenomena, since they are found everywhere
about the olivine wherever the latter occurs in the rock.
The occurrence above described is, for example, as already
mentioned, 12 miles distant from the nearest contact with
the gneiss.. Lacroix has also pointed out this phenomenon
in some French olivine gabbros which he investigated.
It would seem therefore, that their origin is to be referred
to the influence of the plagioclase magma upon the olivine
before complete solidification. The so-called opacite rims
which occur about the horneblende and biotite in so many
eruptive rocks are evidently phenomena of a somewhat
analagous nature.

In many places in this anorthosite area ilmenite
deposits were found, some of them of considerable extent.
The largest of these is on the north shore of the Saguenay
and about 15 miles in a straight line from Lake St. John,
where it forms a series of low hills. The ore contains
also olivine and plagioclase irregularly distributed through
it, and forms three irregular bands, which are intimately
associated with a rock resembling diabase. The most
easterly of these three iron ore bands has a width of not
less than 80 paces. Judging from its mode of occurrence
and composition this iron ore is in all probability of
igneous origin, as in the case of the iron ore of the Morin
area, which has been already described, the well known
ores of Taberg in Sweden, as well as those of Cumberland,
Rhode Island."

We here find again all the structural varieties that
were ‘described in the discussion of the Morin area,
namely: The massive rocks with a uniform size of grain,
the massive rocks with variations in the size of grain

1 M. E. Wadsworth, Bull., Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, May, 1881.

a ;

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 301

from place to place, the brecciated variety with a white
granular ground mass in which are enclosed irregularly
shaped fragments of dark blue plagioclase with some
streaks of pyroxene,but without distinct banding, and more
rarely, the streaked and distinctly banded varieties. All
these occur and pass into one another. The perfectly banded
and schistose varieties occur, indeed, only exceptionally,
yet one can observe indications of banded structure in
most places if large exposures are examined. The more
granular varieties occur principally on the east side,
exactly as in the Morin area. On Lake Kenogami, at the
south-east corner of the area, cliffs of the granular white
anorthosite occur which attain a height of 400 feet or
more, and which, through the entire absence of pyroxene
and iron ore, appear like great chffs of marble. ,

It must here be observed that during the process of
granulation by which the large plagioclase individuals
were crushed into the granular ground mass, no alteration
took place in the chemical composition of the mineral.
The material acquired a much lhehter colour through the
loss of the inclusions, but the composition of the feldspar
was not changed. This is evident from the fact that the
difference in the specific gravity of the two feldspars,
which was determined in the anorthosite of Mount
Williams, on the Shipshaw River, near the eastern limit of
the area, amounted only to 0.015. The large dark-coloured
fragments of crystals were naturally a little heavier on
account of the numerous dark inclusions which they con-
tain. Both feldspars were labradorites.

The same fact was established still more clearly by
analyses made by Sterry Hunt of both crystals and the
ground mass of another anorthosite from the Chateau
Ricner area. These will be given in the table at the con-
clusion of this paper, under Nos. L, Il. and III. It will
be observed that the composition and the specific gravity
of the two are identical. Leeds showed the same to be

302 Canadian Record of Science.

true in an anorthosite of Essex county, New York, and
Sachsse! in a “Flaser-gabbro” from Rosswein, in Saxony,
but the material analysed in these two cases was not
quite pure.

The gneiss which immediately surrounds the area has
a uniform character, and contains no crystalline limestone
as in the Morin area. It has, in fact, an older appear-
ance, and Logan would probably have classed it with the
the lower or fundamental gneiss of the Ottawa division.
This gneiss has, irrespective of local deviations, a strike of
N. 20° to 60° E. Along the southern limit of the area it
strikes directly towards the anorthosite and is cut through
or overlaid by the latter. The line of contact of the
anorthosite with the gneiss forms a series of large curves,
which are interrupted at times by straight lines. The latter
most probably indicate faults. On the east and west sides
of the area the line of contact crosses several times the
Little Peribonka and the Shipshaw respectively, so that it
repeatedly cuts the direction of the strike of the gneiss.
What deserves notice is the fact that when the anortho-
site (which is mostly massive and has for that reason no
strike) shows any indication of streaked or foliated struc-
ture (and examples of this structure are clearly exhibited
on the east side of the area where the granular anortho-
site is principally found with broken fragments of plagio-
clase) this is identical in direction with the strike of the
gneiss, and is not affected by the intersecting line of
contact. This is no longer true, however, in the central
portion of the area, through which the Peribonka flows,
in the northern portion of its course, often between cliffs
1,000 feet high. Wherever the anorthosite exhibits a
strike in this part of the area, a thing which only excep-
tionally occurs, this differs from that of the gneiss as well
as from that of the anorthosite on either side, being N.

1 R. Sachsse, Uber den Feldspathgemengtheil des Flasergabbros von Rosswein. —
Ber. d. naturf., Ges. in Leipzig, 1883.

tI

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 303

40° to 80° W., and on the upper part of the Peribonka,
N. 10° to 20° W. The fact that the strike of the gneiss
and that of the anorthosite near the limit of the area
coincide, notwithstanding that it 1s crossed several times
by the line of contact, can easily be explained as caused
on the east and the west side by a series of cross faults,
if it be assumed that the foliation of the anorthosite here
originally coincided with the direction of the boundary.
It is almost certain that such faults exist. The condition
of things, however, at the southern boundary where the
contact may be more accurately investigated, but where,
unfortunately, the foliation of the anorthosite and of the
' gneiss is mostly very indistinct, rather points to the fact
that this conformity is the result of a pressure, which was
exerted upon the anorthosite in a direction almost at
right angles to the ordinary strike of the gneiss. The
greater predominance of the granulation on the east side
of the area suggests that the pressure came from that
direction. The less definite indications of foliation or
streaked structure which were observed here and there in
the usually massive anorthosite of the interior of the
area, and which do not coincide in direction with that of
the gneiss and anorthosite about the edge of the area,
probably belong to the original structure, due to move-
ments in the magma before con-
sohdation. This view is supported
by a series of larger exposures of
anorthosite at the east end of Lake
Tschitogama. The rock there is
distinctly striped, bands of plagio-
clase almost free from bisilicates
alternating with others in which
the latter are quite abundant. The

Fig 6 bisilicates are disposed in elongated
masses or in short dashes which are parallel to one
another, but have a different direction from that of the

304 Canadian Record of Science.

bands, generally forming with the latter an angle of about
60° (see fig. 8). In another place nearly a quarter of a
mile distant, the banding was horizontal and the foliation
of the bisilicates perpendicular. In these cases both the
original rude banding, the result of movements in a
heterogeneous magma, as well as the subsequent foliation
of the bisilicate masses, resulting from pressure, are to be
observed in the same exposures.

In a large area covered by forest, such as this, the |
actual line of contact cannot usually be seen, but where
they can be observed, both rocks are cut through by peg-
matite dykes; indeed, the gneiss itself often appears to
send out an arm-like extension into the anorthosite as if
it were an intensive rock and had not been broken
through by the anorthosite. As it has been shown that
the granulation of the anorthosite in all probability
originated when the rock was still very hot, it is quite
possible that these arm-like offshoots are portions of the
gneiss which were pressed into cracks in the anorthosite
while the latter was in a more or less plastic condition.
This explanation is supported by:the remarkable fact
which is observed in hundreds of cases in different parts
of the Laurentian, that wherever orthoclase gneiss and
amphibolite alternate with one another, and the whole
mass is squeezed, the bands of amphibolite without excep-
tion break apart into fragments, between which the
gneiss is pressed. A species of breccia is thus formed,
which may be followed in the direction of the strike into
a regular series of alternating and undisturbed bands.
Under the influence of pressure, probably accompanied by
intense heat, the basic rock is always more, brittle than
the acid one.

The gneiss may indeed, often result from a later erup-
tion, since it is almost massive, as already mentioned, and
belongs in all probability to the lower or Ottawa gneiss,
in which much intrusive material undoubtedly exists.

Be’ / :
x

Where to find “Amebae” in Winter. 305

In some places on the south and west contact and between

‘the typical anorthosite and the gneiss there occurs a

dark basic gneiss similar in appearance to the supposed

_ contact product of the Morin area.

In this great Saguenay area, therefore, the supposed
“Upper Laurentian” consists of an enormous mass of
gabbro, norite and troctolite with plagioclase preponderat-
ing, presenting the same structural varieties as those
found in the Morin area. Like the latter it probably
owes its unconformity to its igneous origin, and finally, as
in the Morin area, the anorthosite is overlaid by hori-
zontal unaltered beds of Cambrian age, so we find also
in mariy places upon the anorthosite of the Saguenay area
small areas of horizontal unaltered Cambro-Silurian lime-
stone and shales of Trenton and Utica age. The fact that
these are in no wise altered by the anorthosite proves
clearly that the latter is much older.

WHERE TO FIND “ AMG:BAE” IN WINTER.
By W. E. Derexs, B.A., M.D.

Nothing will try the patience of a person more than to
be compelled to search over a great many slides, and then
often in vain, in the attempt to find a single Amwba for
demonstration purposes.

Circumstances such as these induced the writer to try
and find the conditions under which they flourished, and
might without difficulty be found.

During the summer season they can be readily obtained
by scraping the under surface of a floating weed or in the
superficial ooze along the bottom of any fresh water pond.
During the winter this climate necessitates aquaria, and
of these a certain amount of care 1s necessary to keep
them ina living condition, whence they can be quickly

306 Canadian Record of Science.

obtained. The conditions necessary are: First, a proper
temperature. That most suitable for them is between
45° and 70° F. Along with them are usually found the
Heliozoa, the stalked Ciliata and some of the Flagellata.
If the temperature is raised to about 80° F., the Amabae
quickly disappear and in their place countless numbers of
the free-swimming Ciliata make their appearance. The
water also becomes putrid. The method at present
adopted of securing and keeping them during the winter
months is the following :—In the Autumn the superficial
ooze from some fresh water pond is skimmed and placed
in a dish, the mouth of which is covered almost completely
to prevent» too rapid evaporation. Along with the ooze
some decaying vegetable matter and also some living
water plants. Of these I prefer Anacharis, although
Chara and some other common forms will do. A con-
siderable quantity of this is necessary to keep the water
fresh.

The aquarium is then placed in a bright place where
there is plenty of hght (though preferably not direct sun-
hght), and in a cool place, best about 60° F. This then
can be left any length of time, and when they are
required, by squeezing a httle of the decaying vegetable
matter on a glass shde, I have never failed to find one or —
more of these interesting creatures.

The conditions then, required, may be thus summarized :

1. Some decaying vegetable matter. |

2. A sufficient amount of plant life to keep the water
from becoming putrid.

3. A sufficiently low temperature which will also pre-
vent the bacteria of putrefaction from. developing too
rapidly.

By observing the above conditions one will seldom fail
to find Amebae.

New Director of the Geological Survey. 307

THE NEw DIRECTOR OF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

The recent appointment of Dr. G. M. Dawson as director
of the Geological Survey of Canada, as successor to Dr.
A. R. C. Selwyn, will give universal satisfaction, and the
Government of Canada are to be congratulated on having
secured one of the ablest geologists as well as administra-
tors to conduct this most important branch of the public
service. His long connection with the department, both
as assistant director, and, in the absence of Dr. Selwyn, as
acting director, will enable him to understand perfectly
the requirements of the office. The scientific staff of the
department regard the appointment as a well-deserved
and fitting promotion, and feel sure that under his able
and energetic management the Survey’s sphere of useful-
ness will be enlarged, and, at the same time, its already
eminent scientific standing fully maintained. The mining
community in general may rest assured that the practical
part of the Survey’s work will not be neglected, as Dr.
Dawson has ever evinced a deep interest in economic
geology.

Dr. George Mercer Dawson, C.M.G., F.R.S., A.R.S.M.,
F.GS. (L. & A.), ete., ete., was born at Pictou, N.S., August
Ist, 1849, and is the eldest son of Sir J. William Dawson,
late principal and vice-chancellor of McGill University.
He was educated at McGill College and the Royal School
of Mines, London, where he was admitted as an Associate
in 1872. He obtained the Duke of Cornwall’s Scholar-
ship, given by the Prince of Wales; also the Edward
Forbes Medal in Paleontology and the Murchison Medal
in Geology. His marked scientific zeal and ability early
attracted the attention of European geologists, and in
1873 he was appointed as geologist and naturalist to Her
Majesty's North American Boundary Commission. As
such he investigated the geology and natural resources of
the country between the Lake of the Woods and the
Rocky Mountains in the vicinity of the 49th parallel.

308 Canadian Record of Science.

The report in connection with this work appeared in _
1875, and at once attracted world-wide attention. In
July, 1875, he accepted a proffered appointment to the
Geological Survey of Canada. His field work has been
mainly confined to the North-West Territories and British
Columbia, in which district his name has become a house-
hold word. The many valuable reports on these regions
are to be found mainly scattered through the reports of
the Geological Survey or in the various Scientific Journals
of Canada, Great Britain and the United States. In 1892
he was awarded the Bigsby Medal by the Geological
Society of London, “as an acknowledgment of eminent
services in the department of geology, irrespective of the
receiver's country.” His more recent work in connection
with the Behring Sea matter is so fresh in the mind as
to need only a passing mention. Suffice it to say that for
these eminent services the Imperial Government rewarded
him with a C.M.G. 7

The latest honour, his appointment to the directorship
of the Geological Survey, is but a fitting tribute to a man
who has devoted his whole life and talents to the cause of
science. His whole heart is in the work, and his scientific
co-laborers feel that Canada has given a just reward to
one of her most eminent sons.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE NATURAL History SOCIETY.

MONTREAL, Jan. 28, 1895.

The third monthly meeting was held this evening, Dr.
Wesley Mills, President, in the chair.

The minutes of meeting of November 26th were read
and approved.

The minutes of special meeting of Council of December
22nd and of the regular meeting of January 21st were
read.

Proceedings of Natural History Society. 309

_ The Librarian reported that a large number of ex-
changes had been received and that nearly all the volumes
of Proceedings of Scientific Societies had been completed
‘ready for binding.

J. Gentles, L.D.S., was proposed as an ordinary member
by F. W. Richards, seconded by E. T. Chambers. On
motion of George Sumner, seconded by the Rev. Dr.
Campbell, the rules were suspended, and Mr. Gentles was
elected by acclamation.

Moved by the Rev. Dr. Campbell, seconded by George
Sumner, and resolved: That the Natural History Society
has heard with great regret of the death of the son of Dr.
B. J. Harrington, one of its most valued members, and a
Past President of the Society, and does hereby extend to
Dr. Harrington and his family its sympathy in their sad
bereavement.

A paper by Mr. E. D. Wintle, on an unusual occur-
rence of the Razor-Billed Auk at Montreal, and a
second on a remarkable flight of certain birds from the
Atlantic Coast up the St. Lawrence to the Great Lakes,
was read by Mr. Williams.

Mr. Williams communicated some remarks on Special
Migrations of animals.

The Rev. Dr. Campbell moved, seconded by Mr. E. T.
Chambers, a vote of thanks to Mr. E. D. Wintle for his
interesting paper and to Myr. Williams for his communi-
cation.

Dr. Mills then read a communication on The Scientific
Societies of America and the work they are doing.

MontrEAt, Feb. 25th, 1895.

The fourth monthly meeting of the Society was held
this evening, Dr. Wesley Mills, President, in the chair.

The minutes of last meeting were read and approved.

The minutes of meeting of Council of February 18th

were read,
23

310 Canadian Record of Science.

Prof. John Craig was proposed by the Rev. Dr. Camp-
bell, seconded by Dr. Wesley Mills, as an ordinary member.
On motion of Rev. Dr. Campbell, seconded by George
Sumner, the Secretary was instructed to cast one ballot
for the election of this member.

A fine eagle from Agassiz, B.C., was presented by
Herbert W. Sheam, of the same place. On motion of the
Rev. Dr. Campbell, seconded by Mr. Williams, the thanks
of the Society were tendered to the donor.

Mr. E. T. Chambers, the Librarian, reported the usual
number of exchanges, among which were a number from
La Plata.

A paper on Dimorphism and Polymorphism in Butter-
flies was then read by Mr. H. H. Lyman. It was moved
by Mr. Kearley, seconded by J.S. Shearer, that the thanks
of the Society be accorded to Mr. Lyman for his valuable
paper.

A paper entitled “Additional Remarks on the Flora of
the Island of Montreal,’ was then read by the Rev. Dr.
Campbell. Moved by Edgar Judge, seconded by J. M.
M. Duff, that the hearty thanks of the Society be given
to the Rev. Dr. Campbell for the communication. Carried.

Book NOTICES.

FRoM THE GREEKS TO Dares AN OUTLINE OF THE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE EvouuTion IpEaA.—By Henry Fairfield Osborn, Sc. D., Da Costa
Professor of Biology in Columbia College, Curator of the American
Museum of Natural History. MacMillan & Co., New York and
London, 1894. Price $2.00.

The present work is the outcome of studies which Professor Osborn
has been carrying on for a few years past, and should be welcomed as
an attempt to select the men who have been potent factors in the
development of the’ evolution idea and to define the part played by.
them. The work is divided into six chapters: The Anticipation and.
Interpretation of Nature; Among the Greeks ; The Theologians and
Natural Philosophers; the Evolution of the Eighteenth Century ;
from Lamarck to St. Hilaire ; and Darwin. 4

Boks Notvees. ey a)

_ To choose rightly was no éasy task, and a few names have been
omitted that might well have been added to the illustrious list.

_ Throughout, the author has treated his subject with that conspicuous
impartiality which has characterized all his writing on Evolution, and
has attempted to correct many prevalent misconceptions.

Dr. Osborn seems to think that the idea of evolution has not only
run through the ages, but that the idea of each age has some genetic
connection with that which preceded and succeeded it. While this
may be in a measure true, and in certain instances undoubtedly is, yet
we doubt if it be so to the extent the author of this work seems to
believe. There are many passages, however, in which a view somewhat
at variance with this is set forth ; but he speaks of a ‘‘chain,” and of
such ideas constituting a chain. That certain ideas of evolution did
constitute a short chain there seems no doubt ; but what influence, we
would like to ask, had Greek notions of evolution on Darwin? It is
well known that Darwin never did drink deep of Greek literature.
We should say that the evolution idea was a purely independent and
‘spontaneous growth in Darwin’s own mind, and to connect his ideas
in a relation of effect and cause with those-of the Greeks or any others
except in the most indirect way, seems to us an error.

It is undoubtedly most interesting to follow the varying phases and
fortunes of the evolution idea, but to attempt to bind these ideas
together into a chain and say that each link is genetically related to
the other is more than is warrantable. But, as before noted, there are
passages which would seem to indicate that this is not Dr. Osborn’s
intention, but we think that this might have been more clearly stated,
as certainly the general impression left by the book is as we have
indicated.

The work is scholarly, yet readable, and is rendered attractive by
the manner in which the printer and publishers have done their work.

It deserves and will not fail to be widely known.
WesSLEY MILLs.

AMPHIOXUS AND THE ANCESTRY OF THE VERTEBRATES. — By
Arthur Willey, B.Sc.

This volume makes one of a beautiful and valuable series of works
known as the Columbia University Biological Series, and is an
indication of the activity, tendencies and scope of the new biology.
Amphioxus, on account of its peculiar position in the animal scale has
long been of extraordinary interest.

The author’s work is divided into five main parts as follows :

I. Anatomy of Amphioxus, which is preceded by an introduction
from the pen of Professor Osborn.

II. Anatomy of Amphioxus (continued).

III. Development of Amphioxus, which is further sub-divided into

312 Canadian Record of Science.

embryonic development, larval development, generel considerations,.
Amphioxus and Ammoceetes.
IV. The Ascidians, including structure of a simple Ascidian,,
development of Ascidians, metamorphosis of Ciona intestinalis,
V. The protochordata in their relation to the problem of vertebrate

/

descent.
This outline of the ground covered will show how complete the
work has been made. |
The book is well printed and admirably illustrated by a large
number of cuts. The outcome of the entire series of studies on this.
subject, of absorbing interest to the biologist who believes in evolution,
is stated in the final paragraph of the book, which we quote entire :
‘‘For the present we may conclude that the proximate ancestor of the
vertebrates was a free-swimming animal intermediate in organization.
between an Ascidian tadpole and Amphioxus, possessing the dorsal
mouth, hypophysis and restricted notochord of the former, and the
myotomes, ccelomic epethelium, and straight alimentary canal of the
latter. The ultimate or primordial ancestor of the vertebrates would,
on the contrary, be a worm-like animal whose organization was.
approximately on a level with that of the bilateral ancestors of the:

Echinoderms.”
WESLEY MILLs.,

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF JANUARY, 1895.

Meteorological Observations McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

THERMOMETER.

Min.

TI
YnOonnN

|
co

Sunpay.

Lal
Fee CeO
or OUMN AO sNooOo0°o

NH

N
ONOCNNUD UANWNY

Sunpay

el

AGDAHKO DN

Sunpay.......

iS}
mnodonodn

4
RWONDOAY

SUNDAY, ...0n.

HNOW © HID HOH

....»Means

21 Years means
for and including
this month......

20 46

Range.J| Mean.

30.0735

CmboOn

© eH OUAD

OhHaBHAA BWOROKO

29.9846

16.46 | 30.0533

BAROMETER.

- +Mean
pressure
of vapor.
Range.

-092
.092
-236
“544
.127

-145
+240
«117

Direction........

Mirlesitoee seston.

Duration in hrs

Mean velocity...| 12.30 | 16.89

15.33

ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD.

s.W. | W.

4110
226

11.99 18.19

3156

15.31 13 78

| N.W.

WIND.
t Meau a
relative
humid-
ity.

Mean
velocity
in miles
perhour

|
as Mean.

woo an

AOROK OR EROWK BDOCOUNH OwMWOKWRO AOHKHAG

o
Nv OWN

Me

p> CoOnod.

.

22522
COwWWNO-

.

vn
x=

n
i z
sere

Ssh

we y
242%,

un

ees 5

.

13.
as

10.6 JS, 70%° W.

*Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and

temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.
§ Observed.
+ Pressure of vapour in inches of mereary.
{ Humidity relative, saturation being 10v.

1 14 years only.

Sky CLoupeD|
In TENTHS

Per cent. o!
Possible
Sunshine.

Rainfall in
inches

nowfall in

Rain and snow

SuNDAY

Sunpay

3-76

3.61

and including this
month,

21 Years means for

Warmest day was the 22nd. Coldest day was
the 5th. Highest barometer reading was 30.637
on the 10th. Lowest barometer was 29.200.0n the
26th, giving a range of 1.437 inches. Maximum
relative humidity was 99 on the llth and 26th.
Minimum relative humidity was 62 on the 24th.

Rain fell on 4 days.
Snow fell on 18 days.

Rain or snow fell on 20 days.
Lunar halos 2, on 8th and 9th.
Solar halos, 4, on 15th, 2lst, 24th and 29th.

The greatest heat was 37.2° on the 13th; the
greates| cold was —12.7° on the Sth, giving a
range of temperature of 49.9 degrees.

Resultant mileage, 5398.
Resultant direction, S. 703° W.
Total mileage, 10853. Lightning on 22nd.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 39 on the 27th. |
Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour on
the 4th, 13th and 27th.

Bee ad a ee eke

oe nine aeatnen

. oa |
Sn ew ww geen ~ - , — z,
REAR ERLE ISS PAGE Sig otra ee nce :
“eee : £ eae eS Se ae ea < = Se, i a =s
4 : ‘ 5 " 25 -— ot: = i +

ay y. a eA ee pi ee a

\

ABSTRACT

FOR THE MONTH OF FEBRUARY, 18985.

Meteorologica] Observations McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

BAROMETER.

THERMOMETER.
ves ms Bs kor ccry = ae tMean
pressure
DAY. i J of vapor.
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range} Mean. Max. Min. Range.
- r| 16.48 | 27.2 1.2 26.0 30.1768 | 30.227 30.142 -085 0797
2 16.92 | 23.3 8.0 15.3 30.1812 | 30.305 30.128 -177 -0778
DUNDAY 2 fore. cect fetes 9.2 |—1.9 pyar wl |e ode, | | ena ae nae mate
4 5-05 | 14.2 |— 1-7 15.9 29.9:30 | 30.087 29.803 284. 0437
5 |—12.38 1.5 |—16.3 17.8 29 9733 | 30-002 +9 934 .068 0197
6 |\—13 33 |— 6.8 |—19.8 reve) 29.9187 | 30.003 30.853 -150 0200
7 |— 8-95 |— 5.8 |-13 1 7-3 29.8163 | 29.914 20.557 +357 0255
8 |— 0.23 6.5 -\— 7,6 14.1 29.0143 | 29.375 28.832 -543 0422
9 6.90 | 12.8 |— 3.0 15.8 29.2785 | 29.424 29.165 +259 0585
SuNvay.... .. 10 nial 9.0 rq 17.7 Heo Becca . a oh or ey:
11} 18.60 | 25.8 8.8 17.0 29.9;67 | 30 040 29.801 -149 -0947
12 | 22.77 | 26.1 19.3 6.8 29.7752 | 29.808 29.630 «178 1018
¥4\( 24547), 27-2 20.8 6.4 29 6272 | 29.725 29.572 +153 1110
14| 19.28] 25.2 15.8 9.4 29.8695 | 30 050 29.085 +365 ~ 0927
15 19.35 22.5 15.0 irl 30.1653 30.258 30.045 213 0922
16 | 2402] 29.5 16.9 12.6 29 8008 | 30.047 | 29 637 410 1178
SuNDaAY.. ....-17 | sees 30.6 20 2 Ole) | apncankeel|, aagee - Ar cs ooeee
18 | 28.32 | 34-3 Zt$5 12.8 29.7363 | 29.840 29.658 182 .1450
19 | 28.93 | 32.8 24.5 8.3 29.7022 | 29.730 29.671 059 +1413
20] 19.50} 23.4 15.2 8.2 29.6477 | 29.710 29.528 182 -0893
21 | 27.70 | 34.9 17.2 17.7 29.2908 | 29.456 29.158 -298 -1390
22 8.72 | 26.5 3x 23.4 29.8073 | 29.992 29.556 -436 0547
23 3.22 9-4 |— 2.7 12.1 30.1757 30.347 30.056 +29 +0415
\
SUNDAY...... oeBQ')|) © sloivies 24.8 3-0 PS" | Stu doles Ihe On ORO .- are ata ly Rctiel ee
25 | 26.27] 37.2 18 2 19.0 29.7716 |. 29.920 29 617 -303 - 1340
26 10.33 20.1 40 16.1 30.2073 30.295 | 30050 +245 +0557
27| 20.13] 28.8 Wed 21.5 29.9062 | 30.150 29.707 -443 .0998
28| 29.68 | 37 2 23.0 14.2 29.4747 | 29.674 29.372 -299 - 1607
Sedutey who ke, Means| 14.20] 21.34 | 7 08 14 26} 29.8003 | 29.935 29.680 -255 0853
21 Years means
for and including 15.84 | 23 69] 6.79 16.g0 i So.egGg sat - >. am 303 -0880
this month ..... 1 3 Bass F| (ae ;
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD.
a « 4 = |
Direction..... scare ee N.E. E. S.E. So S.W. | W. N.W. CaLM.
Miles... -<> y+) - 906 -a 12 273 907 6722 | 4764 276 |
Durationin hrs . 45 2 29 62 275 225 19 | 15
Mean velocity... 20.1 6.0 9-4 14.6 24.4 21.3 | 14.5 |
Greatest mileage in one hour was 56 on the 8th. Resultant mileage, 9971),
Grentectvelaoity in SuRtaeeo anil h Resultant direction, S. 633° W.
ere ae Y miles per hour on | Total mileage, 1860.
the 8th. Average mileage per hour 2062.

SKY CLouDED

WIND. In Tentus.
saps D ee —
relative ew
: : Mean A "
ahend DOU General |yelocity] § | %| 8
: direction. jin miles} 2 | 5 | 5
perbour}] =
82.3 12.0 S.-W. 16.4 51 . 10 °
80.90 12.0 Ww. 14.2 6.8 | lo °
73.3 |j—0 8 120 6.7| 10] oO
81.3 |—16.8 37-9 0.9|00} 0
85.0 |—16.5 290 4.€} 10] 0
89.8 |—11.2 11.9 5.3 | 10 | o
96.2 |— 1.0 430 10,0 | 10 | to
96.2 6.3 38.8 10.0 | 10 | 10
Satwa ee Ww. 24.8 sate iilic.sta eles
92.5 16.7 Ww. 220 5-7 | 10] ©
83.5 18.8 Ww. 15-2 Fn9), || 10) | 2
88.0 20.7 WwW. 12.4 9.7 |10] 8
88.2 16.7 Ww. 32 5 32 |\1lo| o
87 7 16.7 Saws 17.3 6.3] 10| 0
go.7 21.5 S.W. 26.4 6.2] 10| o
motets Sas 15.3 FTO kaeaete| bE
91.7 26.3 Si 14.1 g-5 | 10 | oO
88.7 26.0 S.W, 17.6 687, |) 10,;|7.0
84.7 15.8 s.W, 20.7 0.8 | 3] 0
90.5 25.3 SH 21 4 8.8 | 10 3
84.2 407 WwW. 25.1 4-0 | Io °
835 |— 1-3 Saw 17.8 0.0] of o
ae stare S.W. 20.1 Sct eee
93.2) )Y 25 S.W. 23.5 g.8| 10] 9
29 7 5-3 S.W, 22.0 0.2 I °
87.2 17.2 s.W, 9-9 6.3] 10] ©
96.8 23.8 Se 7-3 10.0 | 10 | 10
€7.50 | 115 [|5. 6334° W.] 20.62 6.9 |8.soj2 17
79539. |) Ade sas hl oo aewa e 59 |

*Karometer readings reduced to sea-level and
temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.

§ Observed.

t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.

t Humidity relative, saturation being lu.

1 14 years only.

The greatest heat was 37.2° on the 2th and
28th; the greatest cold was —19.8° on the 6th,
giving a range of temperature of 57.0 degrees.

Warmest day was the 19th. Coldest day was
the 6th. Highest barometer reading was 30.347
on the 23rd. Lowest barometer was 25,832 on the

|

— . 1 rT -4
SSeS | Soa
ae] 38 | sé | sd
a 2 = N
S25] gs | 22 | 8s oe
ora)! a= of 54
> ES = ‘Ss
i-=]
| | es -_——_
52} Sse 0.3 0.03 1
3° 0.38 0.03 2
59 : on sane Bi dy aiden, ak SuNDAY
00 | z o.2 | 0.02] 4
100 | & Pe oA sere | 5
7°O Z 0.3 ° 03 6
87 : 3 7
09 16.0 | 1-58 | 8
00 2.0 | 0.20] 9g
94 ° bye rala see | 10 + eerg ss SUNDAY
36 | ue 0,2 | 0.02} x
72 - wees a 12
oo | Sa 0.4 | 0.04 | 13
100 | os °3 0.03 | 14
58 Inap. | Inap,| 15
57 . Inap, | Inap.| 16
|
74 ry bajo; (OU ear erclere SuNnvay
21 A are see | 1S
rele) 0.2 0.02 | 1g
84 Inap, | Inap.| 20
90 0.5 0.05 21
68 oe eee | 22
99 ; . 23
|
53 eee ewe ell 2gy «on ene .. SUNDAY
oo | Inap. 3-5 | 0-35 | 25
100 ewes seee vee | 20
ro) } aA : 27
oo | Inap. AS Inap.| 28
—- ——} -— — SS
49.9 0.00 24.7 2RS) OMNES vie werltinie cine «Mil
2t Years means for
{f4t-7 | 0.78 22 5 | 2.94] 4and including this
| month,

8th, giving a range of 1.515 inches. > Maximum
relative humidity was 100 on the 8th,

Minimum relative humidity was 51 on the 5th.
Rain fell on 2 days.

Snow fell on 15 days.

Rain or snow fell on 16 days.

Auroras were observed on 1 night on Lith.
Lunar halos 4, on 3rd, 4th, 7th and 8th.

Lunar coron 1, on the 6th.

Fog on 1 day, 28th. ‘
. Solar halos, 6 days, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 17th, 18th and
22nd

VRS

i PW aluiies cee may ve had as follows: Beli ay
ee Vor. tA Moa he oie OS Ni Se ge 5G Oy Rae
a! ‘ : ig 2) Sea
a ~~‘ Vous. IT. & IIT., 8 Nos. each, BS 3.00 per vol. — h ap) &
The Rucorp is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers, a
wf “or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage — Me i b,
" BF nic is as follows: , | | i aa
Be A Ae Na
rh - Canada and the United States, - oil poe OO 3 aA bi i
| Great Britain, Ct Mand UEP a mal: 1 Yad bo Lt a a:
4,
ISSUED S8OTH APRIL, 1895.
Woe vas

>

2 =

,

oe

RD OF SCIENCE

a,

i,

baa INCLUDING THE PROCEEDINGS OF rn fe av \FC
eh ny rary “ so task wt , Mar 9

‘ ee |‘ THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL, hy, Od. ely
ii aia _ AND REPLACING MEE)
iat? Femmes Fey
Bat THE CANADIAN NATURALIST, eee)
ms TD pd Na
ee . | Meg ce OE AD
as | CONTENTS. | Distnrt ens
PAGE }) 3") 0 i

Notes on some Fossils from the Cretaceous Rocks of British Columbia, with hd
descriptions of two species that appear tobe new. By J. F. Wuireaves 313 fit,

Contributions to Canadian Botany. By Jas. M. Macoun ...... a Reallele oto Aaah eam ioe
The Gold Deposit of Mount Morgan, Queensland. By Frank D. Apams, Ph.D. 329. Lie
Some of the Rarer Summer Flowers of Canada. By Robert CAMPBELL, h M,
OR FA sm te oe EN ONL ae CREA iM Wiel a” in 4 edith a ghrvalard pie n'y 9 © a om FLEE DN RS 342 ay
Notes on a Specimen of Beluga Catodon, from the ede Clay, Montreal. By
ee SH VY REEL AM CO AWSON gs H). Equpoy 5 HUG 8005 io ae» bieo Goes < a's nv: o'os dis slp a bere haan) One
a eles, pxmberof Canada) By Hon Si WARD sis is vee ek pe as eeins be gies 354
_ Additional Notes on Recent Canadian Unionide. By J. F. WHITEAVES..... 365
Gaston, Marquis de Saporta. By Sir Wittiam Dawson, F.R.S., Etc........ 367
_ Annual Presidential Address. By Prop. Westey Mitts, M.A., M.D., Erc. 369
BEL MEY) DERE AUTO Cet a s/o ator (iC ale £41 6 Wo’ ai'n'a\0\c' es! dles'v Aaislo 6 a via'n sl eimiatnudeesable 372,
Report of Chairman of Council of the Natural History Society of Montreal,
fl for the year ending 27th May, 1895 ..... Viaisigle Wis'aihce\d ei disc let a Ke MO Mac a a 377
' __ Report of the Hon. Curator........... NMS die rae lad 9, WR stalin wht? <B AEN RO eS ate 378
’ Report of the Hon. Treasurer........... ..2.--- 0 he A Se a is 380
mi senor, of the Labrary Committees v.05... 0c. ect eclncss caceseoueriavievia b owe TOU
Report of the Natural History Society of Montreal for 1895, to the Royal
NOt? OT MANIAC VE se LUD ph, We Wate. A Seials! wll" shim a, oilblt aie ol ale/ala Shit Biptereia ate 382
Report of Editing and Exchange Committee...............2-5- 06 Sul bo bite 385
MONTREAL;
PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.
4 LONDON, ENGLAND : BOSTON, MASS. :
_ Co..tns, 157 Great Portland St. A. A. WATERMAN & Co., 36 Bromfield St.
1895.

His Excuntexor THE etek cGesieay or C |
| Hon. President : eae}
Sm J. Wruram Dawson, LL.D., F.R. Se R. S. CL

President:
Rev. Rogert CamMpBELL, D.D., M.A.

Ist Vice-President :
JoHN S. SHEARER.

' Vice- Presidents +

+h

Dr. WESLEY MILLs. ee HARRINGTON, Ph. D., F. R. 8. c.
Hon. SENATOR MURPHY. J. STEVENSON Brown.
J. H. R. Monson. ~ | GxrorcE SUMNER.
Srr Donan A. SmitH, K.C.M.G. J: Hy Josper: 0%
wy Hon. Justice WURTELE.

Hon. Recording Secretary ; _ _ Hon. Corresponding Secretary :

Cuas. S. J. PHILLIPs. | Joun W. Srrruine, M.D., Edin.
Honorary Curator : Honorary Treasurer :
J. B. WILLIAMS. | F. W.: Ricuarps,
5 Members of Council :
Gro. SUMNER, Chairman.

FRANK D, Apams, M.A.Sc.. Ph.D. JAMES GARDNER.
ALBERT HOLDEN. JOSEPH FORTIER.
Nevit Norton Evans. Hon. J. K. Warp.

C. T. WILLIAMS. Pror. JoHN Cox.
oe EDGAR JUDGE.

Editing and Exchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc., Ph. D., Chairman.

G. F. Marruew, St. John, N.B. | Rev. R. CampsBety, D.D.
J. T. WHITEAVES, Ottawa, Ont. Dr. WESLEY MILLs.
B.J. Harrineton, B.A.,Ph.D.,F.G.S8. | Nevin Norton Evans.

Pror. JOHN Cox. °

Library Committee :
E. T. CHAMBERS, Chairman.

J. A. U. Braupry, C.E. JOsEPH FORTIER,
R. W. McLAcHLAN. A. F. WINN.
G. KEARLEY. W. DRAKE.
J. F. Hausen.
Museum Committee :
J. B. WtuiaMs, Chairman.
A. F. WINN. N. N. Evans.
J. F. HAvSsEN. J. S. Brown.
E. D. WINTLE. G. KEARLEY.
Lecture Committee :
Rev. Rost. CAMPBELL, D.D., Chairman.
Pror. JoHN Cox. Cuas. S. J. PHILLIPS.
Dr. WESLEY MILLs. Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.
N. N. Evans. EpGArR JUDGE.
House Committee :
JNO. S. SHEARER, Chairman.
EDGAR JUDGE. e | Gro. SUMNER.
W. DRAKE.
Membership Committee :
J. STEVENSON Brown, Chairman.
JOHN S. SHEARER. | JosEPH FORTIER.

W. DRAKE.

Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN.

RECORD OF SCIENCE.

L.M.LAMBE, OEL.

ANISOCERAS VANCOUVERENSE (Gabb).

THE

CANADIAN RECORD

OF SCIENCE.

VOL. V1. APRIL, 1895. No. 6.

NOTES ON SOME FOSSILS FROM THE CRETACEOUS ROCKS OF
BRITISH COLUMBIA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO SPECIES
THAT APPEAR TO BE NEW.!

By J. F. WuHITEAVES.

ANISOCERAS VANCOUVERENSE.

Hamites Vancouverensis, Gabb. 1864. Geol. Surv. Cali-
fornia, Palont., vol. L, p. 70, pl. 13, fig. 18.

EHeteroceras Cooperi, Meek. 1876. U.S. Geol. and Geog.
Surv. Terr., vol. II, No. 4, p. 367, pl. 3, figs. 7 and 7a.
Perhaps also “?= Ammonites Cooper,’ Gabb. 1864,
Geol. Surv. California, Paleont., vol. L, p. 69, pl. 14,
figs. 23 and 23a.

The original description of Hamites Vancowverensis is as
follows: “Shell large, section elliptical, longest diameter
from dorsal to ventral side. Inner width of the curve less
than the diameter of the smaller arm. Surface marked
by numerous sharp ribs crossing the shell, inclined
obliquely forwards; well marked but diminished in size
on the ventral side ; largest laterally; each rib carrying a
small flattened tubercle on the latero-dorsal angle; some
1. Communicated by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey of Canada.

24

514 Canadian Record of Science.

ribs in the curve, on the ventral side, exhibit a tendency
to tuberculation, but the shell being broken off at that
point, their presence cannot be satisfactorily determined.
Interspaces between the ribs broadly concave. Septum
unknown. Figure, one-half natural size. Locality, Van-
couver Island, associated with Ammonites Newberryanus
and another Ammonite, species undetermined, and a
Baculite, figured on pl. 17, figs. 28 and 28a, and pl. 14,
fig 29. Closely alhed, in form and ornamentation, to H.
Fremontu, Marcou, Geol. N. America, p. 36, pl. 1, fig. 3.
It differs in the ribs continuing completely across the
ventral face, and in each rib carrying a node, instead of
every third rib, as in Marcou’s species.” The specimen
figured by Mr. Gabb, it may be added, has a httle more
than four inches of the prolonged portion of the shell pre-
served, and a very small piece of the reflected anterior
portion.

Until quite recently, the writer had never seen a speci-

men of this species. In the fall of 1883, Mr. Walter -

Harvey, of Comox, V.I., made a remarkable collection of
fossils (which has since been acquired for the provincial
museum at Victoria) from the Cretaceous rocks at Denman
and Hornby islands, in the Strait of Georgia. This
collection was kindly loaned to the writer for examination
and study, by Mr.. John Fannin, the Curator of the
museum at Victoria, in the spring of 1894. Besides other
specimens of much scientific terest, which have been or
which will be reported upon elsewhere, it contains a fine
example of Hamites Vancowverensis or, as it should now be
called, Anisoceras Vancouverense, from Hornby Island. The
still more perfect specimen of that species represented in
outline, of one-fifth less than the natural size, on the
plate which accompanies this paper, was collected by Mr.
Harvey at Hornby Island this year (1895) and kindly
forwarded to the writer for examination. .
The specimen belonging to the Museum at Victoria is a

ee a

a) >:

:

Cretaceous Fossils from British Columbia. 315

well preserved cast of the interior of nearly the whole of
the prolonged and reflected portions of the shell, with
small pieces of the test remaining. Its maximum length
is a little more than five inches and its marginal outline
is regularly but rather broadly elliptical, as the shell is
curved obliquely outward before becoming straight and
prolonged. The distance between the prolonged and
reflected portions is much less than the dorso-ventral
diameter of the reflected portion. The surface is strongly
ribbed, and many of the ribs bear a large conical
tubercle on each side of the periphery, but there is much
irregularity in the disposition of the ribs and tubercles.
On the sides of the shell the ribs are usually simple and
disposed with comparative regularity, but they occasionally
bifureate, or a short rib is intercalated between two longer
ones, and two ribs frequently coalesce on both sides, at
one of the tubercles on the outer margin of the periphery.
In some places a single continuous rib devoid of tubercles
alternates with a single tuberculated rib or with two ribs
that bear a tubercle between them on each side of the peri-
phery, but the pairs of tubercles are placed at varying dis-
tances apart longitudinally, aud not rarely a little to one
side of a rib rather than immediately upon it. The sutural
line is nowhere visible.

The specimen figured, which is slightly distorted, is
nearly eight inches in its maximum length. Although

_ imperfect posteriorly, enough of the earlier portion of the

shell is preserved to show that it is narrowly elongated,
sinuous, spirally twisted and curved obliquely outward
before becoming straight and prolonged, and that it does
not consist of a straight shelly tube bent twice or more
upon itself, as in Hamites proper. The spiral twist pos-
teriorly is especially marked by the lateral position of the
two rows of tubercles which ultimately border the peri-
phery. The ribs, which sometimes trifurcate, are much
narrower than the broad concave grooves between them,

316 Canadian Record of Science.

and at least one of the tubercles, in the earlier portion of
the shell, is prominent and acutely conical, thus giving
the impression that the whole of the tubercles upon the
ribs of both specimens may be the bases of spines. This ;
specimen has convinced the writer that Hamites Vancou- |
verensis is a true Anisoceras, allied to A. armatum, —
Sowerby, but devoid of lateral tubercles, also that the
fragment from Comox described and figured by Meek as
Heteroceras Coopert, is probably a small piece of the abruptly

bent part of Anisoceras Vancouverense. A similar frag-

ment, now in the writer’s possession, was collected quite
recently by Mr. Harvey at Hornby Island. It is most

likely also that the fragments of the shell of a cephalopod

from the Chico Group of California, for which Gabb pro-

posed the name “? Ammonites Cooperi,’ are distorted

pieces of A. Vancouverense, and if that be the case the

laws of priority may require that the species shall be

called Anisoceras Cooperi, Gabb. (sp.), as the description of

Gabb’s Ammonites Coopert immediately precedes that of

his Hamites Vancowverensis.

HETEROCERAS HORNBYENSE. (Noin. prov.)

Shell dextral, depressed turbinate, much broader than
high, and composed, so far as is known, of five or six
rounded, ventricose volutions, which are in close contact
but without embracing ; spire moderately elevated ; umbi-
licus broad and deep, exposing the whole of the inner |
volutions.

Surface marked with simple and not very fiexuous
transverse ribs. Upon the last volution one or two con-
tinuous ribs without tubereles alternate with a rib or pair
of ribs which bears or bear a small but rather prominent
tubercle on each side of the periphery. Usually two ribs
coalesce, both above and below, at each tubercle, but oeca-
sionally a single thickened rib bears a pair of tubercles.
In places, also, where the test is preserved, the surface is

“

.

| Cretaceous Fossils from British Columbia. 317

seen to be marked with fine raised lines, parallel to the
ribs. Sutural line unknown.

Maximum breadth of the outer volution of the largest
specimen collected, nearly two inches and three-quarters.

Hornby Island, W. Harvey, 1894; two specimens, one
with most of three volutions, and the other with the whole
of four volutions and a part of the fifth preserved.

It is, perhaps, doubtful whether the distinctions
between Heteroceras and Anisoceras can be maintained.
In the one the earlier volutions are said to be always in
contact, while those of the other are described as separate
and as forming an irregular open spiral. The two speci-
mens from Hornby Island for which the foregoing
provisional name is suggested, are coiled in precisely the
same way as the Heteroceras Conradi of the Mesozoic
Fossils,’ and differ therefrom only in their much finer ribs
and more particularly in the circumstance that some of

‘these ribs bear a tubercle on each side of the periphery.

On the other hand, the surface ornamentation of the only
known specimens of H. Hornbyense is so lke that of
Amisoceras Vancouverense, that it is just possible that they
may prove to be specimens of the early stage of large
individuals of that species.

HETEROCERAS PERVERSUM. (Nom. prov.)

Shell sinistral, but in other respects essentially similar
to that of the preceding species.

Hornby Island, W. Harvey, 1894; a single specimen
about an inch and three quarters in its maximum diameter,
with nearly the whole of one volution remarkably well
preserved.

It is not at all unlikely that the early volutions of H.
Hornbyense may be coiled indifferently to the right or lett,
and if so, that this may be a mere sinistral variety of that

1. Geological Survey of Canada, Mesozoic Fossils, vol, I., part 2 (1879), p. 100, pl.

12, figs. 1-3.

318 Canadian Record of Science.

shell. Or, if H. Hornbyense should prove to be the apical
portion of Anisoceras Vancowverense, it may be that the
apex of that species is coiled to the right in some speci-
mens and to the left in others.

Illustrations of each of the specimens referred to in this
paper will probably be published in the fourth and con-
eluding part of the first volume of Canadian Mesozoic
Fossils.

Ottawa, March 23rd, 1895.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE II.
ANISOCERAS VANCOUVERENSE.

Side view of the most perfect specimen known to the writer. Four-
fifths of the natural size.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN BorTAny.
By James M. Macovun.

VI.
CALTHA: LEPTOSEPALA, DC.

Mount Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C. (Jas. MW. Macoun.)
Mountains at Roger’s Pass, B.C.; mountains north of
Griffin Lake, B.C. ; Mount Arrowsmith, Vancouver
Island, alt. 5,500 feet. (John Macoun.) Not before
recorded from Vancouver Island.

DRABA ALPINA, L., var. GLACIALIS, Dickie.

Cornwall Hills, west of Ashcroft, Thompson River, B.C.,
alt. 6,600 feet. (Jas. McEvoy, Herb. No. 5098.*) Not
recorded west of Rocky Mountains.**

LUPINUS LAXIFLORUS, Douel.
‘Deer Park, Lower Arrow Lake, B.C.; Sproat, Columbia
River, B.C., 1890. (John Macown.)

* Whenever herbarium numbers are given, they are the numbers under which speci-
mens have been distributed from the herbarium of the Geological Survey of Canada.
*2 The geographical limits given in this paper refer to Canada only.

;

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 3819

Lupinus NOOTKATENSIS, Don.

Revelstoke and Sproat, Columbia River, B.C.; mountains
north of Griffin Lake, B.C. (John Macouwn.) Mountains ©
south of Tulaineen River, B.C. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) North
Thompson River B.C.; Mt. Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C. ;
Toad Mountain, Kootaine Lake, B.C. (Jas. M. Macown.)
East of Stump Lake, B.C. (Jas. McHvoy.) Cariboo
Mountains, B.C. (Amos Bowman.) Not before recorded
from interior of British Columbia. The above references
include forms which may be ultimately separated into
varieties.

MELILOTUS OFFICINALIS, Willd.

Along the streets of Banff, Rocky Mountains, and in
gardens at Spence’s Bridge, B.C. (John Macown.) Not
before recorded west of Ontario, though probably of gen-
_ eral distribution throughout the settled parts of Canada.

MEDICAGO DENTICULATA, Willd.

On ballast at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun, Herb. No. 125.) The var. apiculata, Willd, was
collected by Prof. Macoun at the same place in 1887.

MEDICAGO SATIVA, L.

Ballast heaps at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island. (John
Macown.) Not before recorded west of Ontario.

TRIFOLIUM HYBRIDUM, L.

Medicine Hat, Assa.; Banff, Rocky Mountains;
Roger’s Pass, Selkirk Mountains; Nanaimo, Vancouver
Island. (John Macoun.)

TRIFOLIUM PAUCIFLORUM, Nutt.

On gravel, Penticton, Lake Okonagan, B.C., 1889.
(John Macoun.) Only record from interior of British
Columbia.

320 Canadian Record of Science.

OXYTROPIS CAMPESTRIS, DC.

Dry banks of the Upper Liard River, Lat. 60°, Yukon
District, 1887. (Dr. GM. Dawson.) Fort Severn,
Hudson Bay, 1886. (Jas. MZ. Macown.)

OXYTROPIS VISCIDA, Nutt.
Dry banks, Dease Lake, Lat. 58° 30’, B.C., 1887. — (Dr.
G. M. Dawson.) 7

ViciA AMERICANA, Muhl., var. LINEARIS, Wat.

In thickets at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1887.
(John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Rocky ,
Mountains.

Vicra “CRacea, i:

Meadows at Spence’s Bridge, B.C., 1889. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Ontario.

LATHYRUS OCHROLEUCUS, Hook.

Thickets at Agassiz, B.C., 75 miles from coast. (John
Macoun.) Western limit in Canada.

LATHYRUS PALUSTER, L.

Thickets at Barclay Sound, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded from Vancouver Island.

PRUNUS SPINOSA, L., var. INSTITIA, Gray.

In thickets, Pelee Island, Lake Erie, 1892. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded from Canada. Naturalized.

PRUNUS PENNSYLVANICA, L.

Forming thickets throughout Labrador north to Lat.
54°. (A. P. Low.)

SPIRZA BETULIFOLIA, Pallas.

Peel’s River, Mackenzie River Delta, 1892. (Miss £.
Taylor.) Northern limit in Canada.

ig

eae
pee

>
:
Ds.

a) ar
on e- iM, 3 ‘ iY Wee F
eg Re Ta Gk eae Ba ¢

Contributiont to Canadian Botany. 321

ef
.

- SPIRAA DISCOLOR, Pursh., var. ARLEFOLIA, Wat.

Woods at Sicamous, B.C., and Sproat, Columbia River, -
B.C. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded from interior
of British Columbia.

Sprr#a DovuGuasil, Hook, var. NOBLEANA, Wat.
/

Thickets at Revelstoke, B.C., 1890. (John Macoun.).
Not before recorded from Canada.

SPIRAEA PECTINATA, T. & G.

Peel’s River, Mackenzie River, 1889. (4. McConnell.)
Northern limit in Canada.

Rupsvus stTricosus, Michx.

In river valleys north to Lat. 57°, Labrador. (A. P.
Low.) Lat. 60° 17’, Long. 103° 07". (Jas. W. Tyrrell.)
Peel’s River, Mackenzie River Delta. (Miss E. Taylor.)

RUBUS LEUCODERMIS, Dougl.

In thickets, Deer Park, Lower Arrow Lake, B.C., 1890.
(John Macown.) Eastern limit.

GEUM CALTHIFOLIUM, Menzies.

Lincoln Mt., Observatory Inlet, B.C., 1893. (Jas.
McEvoy.) Not found in Canada since Menzies’ time.

GEUM MACROPHYLLUM, Willd.

Cedar Hill and Comox, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded from Vancouver Island.

GEUM STRICTUM, Ait.

Fort Simpson, Lat. 62°, Mackenzie River. (Miss £.
Taylor.) Common in the vicinity of Victoria, Vancouver
Island. (John Macoun.)

322 Canadian Record of Science.

POTENTILLA GLANDULOSA, Lindl.

Eagle Pass, B.C.; Nanaimo and Mount Benson, Van-
couver Island. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded
from Vancouver Island.

POTENTILLA RIVALIS, Nutt., var. MILLEGRANA, Wat.

Borders of irrigation ditches, Spence’s Bridge, B.C.,
1889. (John Macoun.) Perhaps introduced. Not before
recorded west of Rocky Mountains.

SIBBALDIA PROCUMBENS, Linn.

Mount Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C. (Jas. If Macoun.)
Mountains at Griffin Lake, B.C., alt. 6,000 feet; Mount
Arrowsmith, Vancouver Island, alt. 5,600 feet. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded from Vancouver Island.

AGRIMONIA EUPATORIA, Linn.

Moist thickets, mouth of Kootaine River, B.C. (D».
Geo. M. Dawson.) Revelstoke and Agassiz, B.C. (‘ohn
Macoun.) Not before recorded west of the Rocky Moun-
tains.

POTERIUM CANADENSE, Benth & Hook.

Common in river valleys in Labrador, north to Lat. 58°.

(A. Py Low.)

POTERIUM SANGUISORBA, Linn.
In fields at Spence’s Bridge, B.C. (John Macoun.)
Not recorded west of Ontario. This reference was placed

by mistake under P. annuum by Prof. Macoun. (Cat.
Can. Plants, vol. II, p. 319.)

Pirus AMERICANA, DC.

Not rare in interior of Labrador north to Lat. 54°.
(Aw S00.)

f
*
4
Bs

¥ sca NIVALIS, Linn. :

Borders of coulees, Cypress Hills, Assa., 1894. (John
_ Macoun, Herb. No. 4921.) Not before recorded between.
Hudson Bay and the Rocky Mountains.

HEUCHERA CYLINDRICA, Dougl., var. GLABELLA, Wheelock.
H. Hailii, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I. , p. 158, in
part.
Summit of South Kootanie Pass, Rocky Mountains.

(Dr. G. M. Davwson.)

HEUCHERA CYLINDRICA, Dougl., var. OVALIFOLIA, Wheelock.
A. Haillii, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. I, p. 158, in
part.

Hi. cylindrica, Dougl., var. alpina, Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. L., p. 526. :

Crow Nest Pass, Rocky Mountains; South of Kam-
loops, B.C. (Dr. G. M. Dawson.) Morley and Kananaskis,
foot-hills of Rocky Mountains; Eagle Pass, B.C.; Spence’s -
Bridge, B.C. (John Macown.)

DROSERA INTERMEDIA, Drev. & Hayne, var. AMERICANA, DC.
Upper West Branch, Hamilton River, Labrador, 1894.

(A. P. Low, Herb. No. +998.) Not before recorded from
Labrador.

LYTHRUM ALATUM, Pursh.

Damp ground, Griffin Lake, B.C., 1889. (John Macoun.)
Not before recorded in Canada west of Ontario, though
found in Colorado. It is possible that. the seeds of the
Griffin Lake plants were in some way introduced, though
this is not probable.

ASTER PUNICEUS, L.

Lake Michikamow, reid 1894. (A. P. Low.) Not
before recorded from Labrador.

324 Canadian Record of Science.

ANTENNARIA DIMORPHA,. “Torr & Gray.

Clay banks near: the Police Barracks, Medicine Hat,
Assiniboia, 1894. (John Macown, Herb. No. 5052.) Not
before recorded east of British Columbia.

HELIANTHUS TUBEROSUS, L.

H. doronicoides, Lam; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, vol.
L., p. 246.

Along the Thames River at Chatham, Ont., 1894.
(John Macoun, Herb. No. 5064.) Indigenous.

TUSSILAGO FARFARA, L.

Roadsides near Sutton Junction, Que. (Jas. Fletcher.)
Near Toronto, Ont. (Mrs. White.) Along the shore of
Cedar Island, Niagara River, Ont., 1894. (&. Cameron,
Herb. No. 4941.) Not before recorded west of New
Brunswick.

THELOSPERMA AMBIGUUM, Gray.

On the banks of the Saskatchewan River at Police
Point, Medicine Hat, Assiniboia, May 51st, 1894. (John
Macoun, Herb. No. 5073.) New to Canada.

GILIA MINIMA, Gr.

All references under @. intertexta, Steud. ; Macoun, Cat.
Can. Plants, Vol. L., p. 330, go here.

GILIA INTERTEXTA, Steud.

Along an old road near Victoria, Vancouver Island,
1895. (John Macown, Herb. No. 658.) First Canadian
record.

ECHINOSPERMUM REDOWSKII, Lehm., var. CUPULATUM, Gr.

Abundant in the vicinity of Medicine Hat, Assiniboia,
1894. (John Macown, Herb. No. 5806.) .Not before
recorded east of British Columbia.

— Contributions to Canadian Botany. S20

KRYNITKIA CRASSISEPALA, Gray.

Dry prairies near Medicine Hat, Assa., 1894. (John
Macoun, Herb. No. 5803.) Our only Canadian specimens,
though recorded from the Saskatchewan in Gray’s Flora
of North America.

MYOSOTIS ARVENSIS, Hoffm.

In a brook (No. 693) and on ballast (No. 694), at
Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, 1895. (John Macoun.) Not
before recorded west of Ontario.

ASPERGO PROCUMBENS, L.

Along garden fences, Whitby, Ont., 1894. (Chas.
Mclilwray, Herb. No. 4954.) New to Canada.

CONVOLVULUS ARVENSIS Linn.

Ashcroft, B.C. (Jas. McEvoy.) Cedar Hill, near
Victoria, and on ballast heaps at Nanaimo, Vancouver
Island. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of
Ontario.

SALSOLA KALI, L.; var. TRAGUS, DC.

Reported from several localities in Ontario. Abundant
and spreading in Manitoba.

EUPHORBIA PRESLII, Guss.

In cultivated fields near Chatham, Ont., 1894. (John
Macoun, Herb. No. 5898.) The only specimens in our
herbarium, though reported from Hamilton, Ont., by
Buchan.

SAGITTARIA, Linn.

The publication of Mr. Smith’s revision of the North
American species of Sagittaria and Lophotocarpus in the
Sixth Report of the Missouri Botanic Garden has so
altered the nomenclature and has in a few instances so
materially affected our knowledge of the distribution of

326 Canadian Record of Science.

the species known to occur in Canada, that a complete
revision of the references given by Prof. Macoun in Parts
IV. and V. of his catalogue is necessary. Many additional
references are also given, and the descriptions of two easily
confounded species are copied from Mr. Smith’s revision,
as it is in the hands of very few Canadian botanists. All

our herbarium specimens have been examined by Mr.

Smith.

S. ARIFOLIA, Nutt. in herb.

S. variablis, var. hastata, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol.
Ii., p. 77, forms 0 and ¢ in part.

Terrestrial, or emergent aquatic, weak, ascending, 2 to
4 dm. high; petioles rather stout, usually curving outward ;
blade of leaf 6 to 12 or 18 em. long, arrow-shaped, acute,
the margin mostly straight or arcuate, basal lobes diverg-
ent, acute or acuminate ; scape weak, ascending, simple or
rarely branched ; bracts lanceolate, acute, 8 to 20 mm. long,
scarious margined and obscurely veined, often reflexed ;
1 to 3 lower verticils pistillate ; fertile pedicels ascending,
15 to mostly 25 mm. long, or sometimes almost wanting ;
fruiting head round, 8 to 15 mm. in diameter; achenium
2 mm. long, tumid winged on both margins, the sides
smooth, or often with a vertical subepidermal resin passage.
PhyHlodia of two forms, either long, slender, petiole-like,
or flattened, linear-lanceolate, 2 to 5 dm. long and 10 to
15 mm. wide.

Grande Vallée, Gaspé, Que. ; Nipigon River, Ont. ; Hand
Hills and Eagle Hills, Alberta ; Sicamous, B.C. ; Kamloops,
B.C. (John Macoun.) Manitoba. (Bouwrgeau.) Moose
Mountain Creek, Assa. (Jas. MZ. Macoun.)*

S. CUNEATA, Sheldon.
S. variabilis, var. diversifolia, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. IL, p. 78, in part.

* No localities are given in this paper except those from which there are specimens
in the herbarium of the Geol. Survey, or which are included in Mr. Smith’s revision.

*
. «la

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 327

S. variabilis, var. gracilis, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. IL., p..78, in part.

Eagle Hills, Alberta; Sicamous, B.C. (John Macown.)
South Thompson River, B.C. (Dr. G. ML. Dawson.)

S. LATIFOLIA, Willd.

Moneecious, with the lower verticils fertile, or dicecious;
scape 1 to 12 dm. high, angled, simple or branched:
flowers large, 2 to 4 cm. wide, the petals white; stamens
numerous, 25 to 35; fertile pedicels shorter than the
sterile ; bracts sometimes connate in the upper verticils,
acute, acuminate, or obtuse, not scarious ; achenium broadly
winged on both margins, 2.5 to 3.5. or rarely 4 mm. long,
with a lateral horizontal or curving beak + to 4 its length,
sides usually smooth or with a costate angle curving
downward from the base of the beak, rarely with a sub-
epidermal resin passage on each face.

Mr. Smith recognizes five forms of this species, two of
which with the species proper are found in Canada.

S. latifolia, proper.

S. variabilis, var. hastata, form a, Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. II., p. 77, in part.

North Pond, and Mt. Stewart, Prince Edward Island ;
Nation River, near Casselman, Ont. (John Macouwn.)
Ottawa, Ont. (Wm. Macouwn.) Little Buffalo Lake,
Sask. (Jas. M. Mdcoun.)

Form a.

S. variabilis, var. obtusa, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol.
Pr, Dp. (, in part.

S. variabilis, var. angustifolia, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. II., p. 78, in part.

Campbellton, N.B. (2. Chalmers.) Nation River at
Casselman, Ont.; Belleville, Ont. (John Macoun.)

328 Canadian Record of Science.

Form ec.

S. variabilis, var. hastata, forms 6 and c, Macoun, Cat.
Can. Plants, Vol. IL, pp. 77 and 78, in part.

Prince Edward Island; Bay of Quinte, Ont.; Lulu
Island, mouth of Fraser River. (John Macown.) New
Brunswick. (Chadborne.) Lake ‘Temiscouata, Que.
(Northrwp.) Missinaiba River, Ont. (Dr. &. Bell.) Mani-
toba. (Bourgeau.) Muskeg Island, Lake Winnipeg, Man.
(Jas. M. Macoun.) .

S. LATIFOLIA, Willd., var. PUBESCENS, (Muhl:) J. G. Smith.

S. variabilis, var. pubescens, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol Il. pers:

Specimens collected in the Bay of Quinte, Ont., by
Prof. Macoun, with pubescent bracts that are transition —
forms between this variety and the dicecious form «a of the
species have been referred here by Mr. Smith.

S. RIGIDA, Pursh.

S. heterophylla, and var. rigida, Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. IL, pages 78 and 79.

Abundant in many places about Ottawa, Ont. (letcher,
Fl. Ott.) In several places in the vicinity of Belleville,
Ont., and Weller’s Bay, Lake Ontario. (John Macown.)

S. GRAMINEA, Michx, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IL,
p. 79.

Newfoundland. (Miss Brenton). North Sydney, Cape
Breton, N.S.; Gull River, Victoria Co, Ont. (John
Macoun.) Several stations’ in New Brunswick. (Fowler's
Cat.). Little Tobique River, N.B. (G. U. Hay.) Lake
Muskoka, Ont. (Dr. Burgess, Dr. Britton and Miss

Timmerman.)

e aes CALYCINUS, (Engelm.) J. G. Smith.

Sagittaria calyeina, var. spongiosa, Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. I1., p. 78.
Several stations in New Brunswick. (Fowler, Cat.)

LISTERA AUSTRALIS, Lindl.

Poplar Ridge, Mer Bleue, near Ottawa, Ont., June 21st,
1893. (Jas. Fletcher.) New to Canada. Recorded in
Ottawa Naturalist.

ScIRPUS SUBTERMINALIS, Torr.

In the Columbia River at Revelstoke, B.C., 1890.
(John Macoun, Herb. No. 7372.)

ELEOCHARIS ROSTELLATA, Torr., var. OCCIDENTALIS, Wats.

Near Ainsworth, Kootaine Lake, B.C., 1890. (John
Macoun, Herb. No. 7386.) Not before recorded from
B.C. mainland.

AGROPYRUM VIOLACEUM, Hornm.

East Main River, near James Bay. (4. H. D. Ross.)
Attikanak Branch, Hamilton River, Labrador. (4.P. Low.)
Not before recorded from Labrador.

THE Gop Deposits oF Mount MorGAN, )UEENSLAND.*
By Frank D. ApaAms, Ph.D., McGill University.

Mount Morgan is situated just within the tropics, about

twenty-six miles south-west of Rockhampton, in central

Queensland, and its gold deposits are among the most
remarkable ever discovered, not only on account of their
extraordinary richness, but also on account of the purity
of the gold. Numerous and varied tales are told of the

* Jack, Robert L.—Report on the Mount Morgan Gold Deposits, reprinted from an
official report of 21st November, 1884.

Rickard, T. A.—‘‘The Mount Morgan Mine, Queensland.”—Trans. Am. Inst.
Mining, Eug., Vol. XX., p. 133, 1892.
25

330 Canadian Record of Science.

first recognition of their value, but the best authenticated
facts are as follows: The property forms part of a block
of 640 acres originally taken up in 1873 for grazing pur-
poses by one Donald Gordon. The Brothers Morgan held
land in the same district, and were one day shown by
Gordon a fragment of gold-bearing quartz which he had
picked up in Mundic Creek. For a consideration, said to
have been £20 and as much whiskey as he could drink,
Gordon agreed to show them the locality where the
specimens had been found. On the hill overlooking the
ereek he showed them the silicious ironstone that carried
visible gold, and they found by sending samples to
Sydney that it was even richer than they had imagined,
so they purchased Gordon’s holding at £1 per acre.

The three Morgans subsequently sold, first a part, and
eventually the whole of their interest in the mine. In
1886 a company was formed with a capital of one million
shares of £1 each. These shares rose, toward the end of
1888 to £17 5s. (about $86.25) giving the mine a market
value of seventeen and a quarter millions sterling, or over
eighty-six million dollars.

In one year, ending November 350th, 1889, the Mount
Morgan mine produced 75,415 tons of ore, yielding a
little over 323,542 ounces of gold, worth $6,657,424, and
permitting the payment of $5,500,000 in dividends. The
yield per ton was 4 oz., 6 dwts., 4 grs., while the working
cost was, as is seen, only 17 per cent. of the value of the
product. The yield has now fallen off somewhat, though
the mine is still very productive, affording last year
119,900 ounces of gold, and paying dividends to the
value of nearly $1,500,000.

The mine does not, as the name would imply, crown the
summit of a mountain properly so called, but forms a
quarry at the top of a hill only 500 feet above the
village at its base, and 1,225 feet above sea level, sur-
rounded by very broken, hilly country and almost encir-

* ,

2 The Gold Deposits of Mount Morgan, Queensland. 331

cled by a small stream (Mundic Creek) and is in many
respects distinct in position and geological structure from
the hillocks about it. The crest of the hill is being
rapidly broken away in the quarrying operations, from
1200 to 1700 tons per week being removed.

In a report published in 1884, Mr. Robert “L. Jack, the
Government Geologist of Queensland, described this
remarkable deposit and put forward an explanation of its
origin. This report has, after a lapse of some ten years,
been reprinted with a few notes and corrections, and the
following extract from it presents Mr. Jack’s views as to
the mode of occurrence and genesis of the deposit :—* In
the immediate neighbourhood of Mount Morgan the
eountry rock consists mainly of bluish-grey quartzite—
a fine-grained siliceous sandstone, now more or _ less
vitrified—tull of minute crystals of iron pyrites and
specks of magnetic iron-ore, greywackes of the ordinary
type; hard, fine-grained sandstones or mingled siliceous
and feldspathic materials, now somewhat indurated ; and
lastly, occasional masses of shale hardened to a flinty
consistency,—and a few belts of serpentine. ‘The strata are
of cretaceous age, and the sandstones above mentioned are
sometimes charged with auriferous pyrites to a remark-
able extent, and although large tracts of these pyritiferous
quartzites are too poor to be worked, recent explorations
have disclosed a large body assaying from half an ounce up
to 174 ounces of gold to the ton. ‘As the stratified rocks
in this locality appear to have been in thick beds, and as
their metamorphism has gone to a considerable length, it
is not easy to be certain of either dip or strike. The
stratified rocks are, moreover, interrupted and intersected
in every direction by dykes and other intrusive masses of
dolerite (itself altered by the substitution of viridite for
augite or olivine), trachyte and other igneous rocks, the
intrusive masses apparently occupying as much space as
the remnant of the original stratified formation itself.

332 Canadian Record of Science.

The work is carried on in two quarries or faces. No. 1
cuts into the hill from a level of about 25 feet below the
summit, and is designed simply to remove the top of the
mountain for the purpose of passing it through the
stampers. No. 2, or Magazine Quarry, presents the aspect
of a “sidling” road cut out of a steep hill, and attacks
the auriferous deposit at a level of about 100 feet below
No. 1. “The central portion of the upper cutting is a
large mass of brown haematite ironstone, generally in
great blocks (up to some tons in weight), with a stalactitic
structure, as if the iron oxide had gradually filled up
cavities left in the original deposit. The ironstone con-
tains gold of extraordinary fineness, which, however, after
a little practice, can be detected in almost every fresh
fracture. The ironstone is more or less mixed with
fine siliceous granules. Gradually to the right and left of
the central mass the silica more and more replaces the
ironstone. It is a frothy, spongy, or cellular sinter, some-
times so light, from the entanglement of air in its pores,
that it floats in water like pumice. Fine gold is dissemi-
nated throughout this siliceous deposit as well as in the
ironstone. Near the west of the cutting is a vertical
dyke of kaolin mixed with fine siliceous granules, passing
into pure kaolin with some silicates of magnesia, including
a fine variety of French chalk.

I selected a number of specimens as characteristic of
the various deposits of the upper cutting. These, when
assayed by Mr. Karl Staiger, City Analyist, Brisbane,
gave the following results :—

No. 5.—Stalactitic brown haematite from middle of
cutting, 6 oz., 11 dwt., gold per ton.

No. 6.—Siliceous sinter, veined with quartz, 4 oz.
5 dwt., gold per ton.

No. 7—A mixed mass of ironstone and silica from
level of the road, east of the dyke, 5 oz, 3 dwt., gold
per ton.

OE ree ep aa aii eine Oe ae ea

The Gold Deposits of Mount Morgan, Queensland. 333

No. 8.—Iron stained siliceous sinter from west side of
dyke, 10 oz., 14 dwt. of gold per ton.
" Down the hillsides to the north,
8 west and south, similar deposit is
s everywhere met with, a frothy,

s spongy matrix, sometimes alumi-

R A= nous and sometimes siliceous,
J generally ironstained, and occa-
SS sionally associated with large
masses of red and brown haema-
= a tite, but gold has as yet only
See been obtained from a few places

away from the hill-top, although
naturally there has been vigorous
prospecting wherever the “forma-
tion” resembles that of Mount

Pook St ach
aes BES VN XS

3% {: “e Morgan.

8% | i Aft ful study of th
8 |, er a careful study of the
=~ \ whole formation I have come to

the conclusion that nothing but a
thermal spring in the open air
could have deposited the material
under consideration. The frothy’
siliceous sinter agrees in every
respect with the deposits of the
New Zealand and Iceland geysers

Figure I.—Section across Mount Morgan.

yy,
| NZ and of the still more wonderful
‘\ a hot springs of the Yellowstone
, ey" National Park, so graphically and
SS scientifically described by Dr. A.
S C. Peale (12th Annual Report of
~ the United States Geological and

Geographical Survey of the Terri-
tories, Part II., Section 2, “ On the
Thermal Springs of the Yellow-
stone National Park,” Washington,

A, pipe of geyser (theoretical); b, deposit cup of geyser; ¢c, overflow deposit of geyser; s, metamorphic rocks ; d, dolerite dykes.

Mundte Cx

100 Fel obs

:

Jot Canadian Record of Science.

\
1883.) The frothy and cavernous condition of the sili-
ceous sinter of Mount Morgan may be accounted for by
the escape of steam while the silica was yet (after depo-
sition on the evaporation of the water) in the gelatinous
condition so frequently observed in the deposits of hot
springs. The aluminous silicates represent the familiar
outbursts and flows of mud. ‘The iron oxide appears to
have been deposited in some cases along with the silica
and alumina, and in others to have been developed later
—its solvent fluid having been, as it were, injected into
the interstices and caverns of the silica and alumina. In
some cases it may have been originally pyrites, as it now
and then occurs in cubical hollows. Calcareous sinter is
very common in siliceous springs, and its absence from
Mount Morgan must needs imply the local absence of
limestones among the rocks from which the spring is fed.
The silica would be found abundantly in the quartzites
and the alumina in the shale and greywackes of the
country rock in the neighbourhood, and possibly both silica
and alumina may have come in part from a deep seated
underlying granite. The gold, and to some extent the
iron, may have been dissolved out of iron pyrites of such
reefs as the “ Mundic Reef” seen in Mundic Creek.

In such active geysers as are accessible to observation,
we find a narrow pipe or fissure, terminating upwards in
a crater-like cup or basin. The Great Iceland Geyser, for
example, has a pipe 12 feet in diameter, which has been
sounded to a depth of 70 feet. I have seen no satisfactory
explanation of the necessity for a cup, nor can suggest
one, but all the same the repeated ocurrence of the cup
evidently takes place in obedience to some natural law.
It may be taken for granted that the Mount Morgan
geyser was no exception to the rule, and I believe that
that upper portion of the Mount where ironstone pre-
dominates, and to which gold is almost confined, repre-
Sents a basin occasionally filled with a fluid in which iron,

ee

7
Patithing: manganese and pol were held in solution, to

be deposited when the bulk of the water from time to
- time withdrew into the pipe or the subterranean reservoirs
with which the pipe communicated. The overflow of the
; ejected fluid left a siliceous, aluminous
and ferruginous deposit on the slope
of the hillside, but the gold does not
appear to have been deposited to any
extent beyond the limit of the basin.
It may be remarked that “ prospects ”
of gold have been obtained in a few
localities in the overflow deposit. In
such cases it may be a question
whether the gold was carried down
the overflow or whether it emanated
from some subsidiary springs, which,
in such cases as our experience of
active geysers has shown, are pretty
sure to break out in the vicinity of the
main overflow. “Callan’s Knob,” for
instance, is suggestive of one of these
smaller springs.

The accompanying diagramatic sec-
tion (Figure II.) represents my idea of
what would take place in the case
of a geyser remaining in activity for
a, geologically speaking, lengthened
period. The original form of the
eround may be taken to have been the
line (a a). At the end of an out-
burst the sides of the hill would be
covered with a deposit of precipitated
material (b b), while on the recession
of the water from the cup, a film
or layer of solid material (c c) would be deposited on its
sides and bottom. If we suppose the cup to be a necessity

His

+n a y
CUAL

Figure II.—Diagrammatical section showing the building up of geyser deposits and ya seen denudation.

oF t ; ; a: A a i < : int i waeic by ok 2, :
if. Page) ms, se ¥ +%2 ¢ ¢ 4 .) 5 . oe iid

“The Gold Deposit of 1 Sout Morgan, Quensland. 335

‘a.

336 Canadian Record of Science.

arising .from the operation of a natural law, as it seems to
be, the continued action of the geyser must result in the
building up of a cylindrical- cup-deposit, surrounded by
an overflow-deposit resembling a series of cased saucers
placed upside down with the bottom knocked out.
Whether the different physical and chemical conditions
_ under which the solvent in the cup and that which over-
flowed precipitated their solid materials, is sufficient to
account for the presence of gold in one deposit and its
absence (or scarcity) in the other, is a question which I
leave to chemists. As a matter of fact, this appears to
have been the case in Mount Morgan.”

“ After the cessation of thermal activity, the powers of
sub-aerial denudation would come into play and might
carve down the hill till the line d. d. should represent the
surface contour of to-day. Such, I believe, is the history
of Mount Morgan as we now see it. Denudation would
obliterate the lateral terraces which are so familiar a
feature of the scenery of every important geyser district
in New Zealand and the Yellowstone, and which were
probably not absent from the slopes of Meunt Morgan:
Mud pipes and other evidences of the outbreak of hot
water and gases from minor vents would be removed by
the same process.”

Since the report from which the above quotations were
taken, was written, some ten years have elapsed, and con-
tinuous work on a large scale has opened up and revealed
many additional details concerning this most interesting
ore body.

The supposed “ over-flow deposit” is now recognised by
My. Jacks as consisting merely of altered and weathered
portions of the country rock.

So that Figure II. and also Figure I. so far as the
overflow deposit is concerned, although they have found
their way into scientific publications the world over, are
quite erroneous. The pipe also which Mr. Jack states to

4 Me, “The Gold Deposits of Mount Morgan, Queensland. 337

be “theoretical,” has not been discovered, although the
mountain has been traversed by a number of adits and
_cross-cuts, in addition to extensive surface excavations.

In asecond report, however, dated December 12,1888, Mr.
Jack says,“The evidence nowon hand goes far to confirm my
original view that isk auriferous material was deposited
by a thermal spring.” But it seems clear that if the
supposed evidences of deposition in the open air are found
to be fallacious, and we have merely an instance of the
deposition of auriferous material in a mass of shattered
rock by the agency of heated waters, these deposits, which
have been considered a remarkable instance of a most
unusual mode of occurrence of the precious metals, must
be relegated to the large class of ore deposits known to
have originated in the way just referred to, and of which
the Comstock Lode and other similar deposits are
examples. Recent developments, although showing the
supposed overflow deposit to be non-existent, and failing
to reveal any geyser pipe, have shown the ore body to be
confined to the upper portion of the mountain.

Mr. Rickard believes the history of the deposit to be as
follows :—

“ A period of iienic disturbance is indicated by the
intrusion of dolerite, which, by extreme metamorphism
night have changed a dolomite into the serpentine we
now see; would have indurated the shales so that they
are scarcely to be distinguished from the crystalline rocks,
and would also, accompanied by. chemical alteration,
change a ferruginous red sandstone into bluish-grey,
highly pyritiferous quartzite. Approaching the surface
the same energy would be expended in fracturing the
quartzite and greywacke, the intrusive dolerite would rise
through the fissures in the shattered rock, forming dykes,
which, meeting a silico feldspathic granular rock (the

greywacke) would give it a semi-crystalline character.
The sandstone would similarly be vitrified. Later move-

es : *

ae ; . “~
338 Canadian Record of Science.

ments would result in the further intersection of this part
of the district by the numerous dykes, the decomposed
remains of which are now to be seen ramifying through
the deposit. Those gradual chemical interchanges would
take place which resulted in the alteration of the shattered
country rock, and its becoming a portion of the gangue
enclosing the auriferous material, which was then or at a
later time, deposited. In process of time, sub-aerial
denudation removed the sandstone which now is only to
be seen on the further summits of the neighboring hills.
Atmospheric agency continued to carve away the less
siliceous and less porous portions of the country surround-
ing the deposit, until Mount Morgan, owing to the
pervious quartzose nature of its crest, remained as a low hill
in an undulating country.”

Which of these views is correct, further developments
of the property will probably decide.

The character of the Mount Morgan gold itself 1s also
highly interesting. Loch, in his work on gold, published
in 1882, says, “no gold has yet been found in nature
unalloyed with silver,’ but the gold which occurs so
abundantly in this great deposit is almost free from
silver, assaying about 99.7 per cent. of gold, the rest
consisting of copper with a trace of iron; the gold being,
it is believed, the purest native gold hitherto found.

ARGON.

The announcement of the probable existence of a new element in the
atmosphere, made by Lord Rayleigh and Professor Ramsay at the
meeting of the British Association last summer, aroused the profound
attention of the scientific world. A large number of elements have
been discovered in the last quarter of a century, but all of them are
metallic substances which occur in minute quantities in rare minerals.
The latest addition to the list of non-metallic elements was bromin,
discovered nearly seventy years ago, and the existence of an undis-
covered element belonging to this group did not appear probable.
Still less likely did it seem that such an element could be present in
the atmosphere. Our knowledge of the air was satisfactory and
complete. Innumerable analyses had established the facts in regard

ne ce es

Pa
ca

The Gold we of Eh sit sic ia Queensland 339

to its ice ee Hence the Pi Aairiesstinon t- tb referred to was
met with much scepticism, in spite of the eminent character and skill
of the:men who made it; and the whole chemical world has waited
anxiously and impatiently for a full account of the work. This has
now been given in a paper by Lord Rayleigh and Professor Ramsay,

which was read before the Royal Society at a special meeting on
January 31. The long delay between the preliminary announcement
and the presentation of the paper is fully accounted for by this state-

“ment of Lord Rayleigh’s :

‘* The research has been in many respects a very difficult one. Jam
not without experience in experimental difficulties, but certainly I
have never encountered them in anything like so severe and aggravat-

ing a form as in this investigation. Every experiment that one

attempts takes about ten days or a fortnight to carry out to any
definite conclusion, and the result has been of necessity much less
progress than we could have hoped for, and many of the questions
have been left open that we could have wished to settle.”

The history of the discovery is in brief as follows: In the course of
a series of determinations of the densities of some of the more perma-
nent gases, Lord Rayleigh found in the case of nitrogen that if
obtained from chemical compounds it was about one-half per cent.
lighter than if extracted from the atmosphere. This discrepancy was
naturally thought at first to be due to contamination with impurities
consisting of known substances. When experiment had demonstrated
that this was not the case, the dissociation of the molecules of the
nitrogen derived from chemical sources into detached atoms suggested
itself as a possible explanation of its greater lightness. But both gases
subjected to the action of the silent electric discharge retained their
densities unchanged. This was discouraging, and a further experiment
of a different kind disposed of this explanation in a still more decisive
manner. It was exceedingly improbable that the nitrogen of chemical
origin could be a mixture, as that would necessitate the existence of
two kinds of nitric acid. The simplest remaining explanation was to
admit the existence of a second ingredient in the nitrogen obtained
from the atmosphere. If the supposed gas had a density half as much
again as that of nitrogen, the presence of one per cent would suffice to
explain the observed differencesin density. This explanation brought the
investigators face to face with the great improbability that a gas
all about us and present in such enormous quantity could have
remained so long unsuspected. Its demonstration demanded the
isolation and identification of the new gas, and to the solution of this
problem the research was now directed.

It is interesting to note here that Cavendish, more than a hundred
years ago, in his careful and exact study of atmospheric nitrogen, had
really raised this same question of possible admixture with another gas,

340 Canadian Record of Science.

Describing his ‘attempts to cause a complete union of atmospheric
nitrogen with oxygen by means of the electric spark, he says: “If
there is any part of the phlogisticated air (nitrogen) of our atmosphere
which differs from the rest and cannot be reduced to nitrous acid, we
may safely conclude that it is not more than 1-120th part of the
whole.”’ Cavendish, however, laid no emphasis on this residual 1-120th,
except as indicating by its minuteness the great purity of the nitrogen
from air. But in these days science no longer neglects ‘‘ residual
phenomena,” and has found, in many cases before this, abundant
evidence of the valuable results to be obtained by a study of them.

In the first attempts to isolate the suspected gas, Cavendish’s
method was employed. Electric sparks were passed through air
confined over weak alkali, and oxygen gradually added till in excess.
The products of the union of nitrogen and oxygen caused by the spark
were absorbed by the alkali, and finally, when no further absorption
took place, the excess of oxygen was removed by alkaline pyrogallate.
A residue was obtained which was in all instances proportional to the
amount of air operated upon.

Another method of isolating argon, and which also serves for
preparing it in considerable quantities, is as follows: Air from which
moisture and carbon dioxide have been removed is freed from oxygen
by passing it over red-hot copper, and from nitrogen by magnesium
turnings heated to a bright redness. The removal of the last portions
of nitrogen is a tedious operation, requiring some two days, when the
residual gas is found to be pure argon.

The gas obtained by either of these methods has a density one-fourth
greater than oxygen (16.20), and dissolves in water about two and
a-half times as freely as nitrogen. On account of its solubility, it is
present in larger proportion in the gases dissolved in rain-water than
in the air, as is indicated by the fact that ‘‘ nitrogen” prepared from
the gases expelled from water has a higher density than that from air,

The spectrum of argon has been examined by Professor Crookes.
who finds that ‘‘ No other spectrum-giving gas or vapor yields spectra
at all like those of argon,” and says further, ‘‘ As far, therefore, as
spectrum work can decide, the verdict must be that Lord Rayleigh and
Professor Ramsay have added one if not two members to the family of
elementary bodies.”’

Professor Olszewski of the University of Cracow, well known for his
researches on the liquefaction of air and other gases, was furnished
with 300 cc. of argon for the determination of its behaviour at low
temperatures and high pressures. He reports that it can be liquefied
only when its temperature is reduced (by liquid ethylene) to —121° C.,
and that the necessary pressure at that temperature is 50.6 atmos-
pheres; or, in other words, that its ‘‘ critical temperature and
pressure ” are —121° and 50.6 at. respectively. Its boiling-point is

|

a a? - - =
,uirs " 4 N7 . ‘ By, ‘
. ' be we : ‘ t
- u 4 ‘
, ‘ _. ; vom . ° hel

V'

The Gold Deposits of Mount Morgan, Queensland. 341

—186.9° C. ; it freezes to an ice-like mass at —191°, and melts at

--189.6°. In its behaviour at low temperatures it stands between
oxygen and nitrogen, whose critical temperatures are —118° and —146°
respectively, and whose boiling points are —182.7° and —194.4°,

Chemically, argon appears to be more inert than nitrogen, all
attempts to induce chemical action with even the most active sub-
stances having proved abortive.

The facts so far obtainable do not warrant a final decision in regard
to its simplicity. If not an element, it is a mixture. There is evidence
on both sides, but the balance seems to be in favor of simplicity. Not
only does argon appear to be a single elementary substance, but its
molecules are apparently of simplest possible structure. A determina-
tion of thé ratio of its specific heats at constant volume and constant
pressure points to the conclusion that its molecules are monatomic,
i. e., composed of a single atom each, instead of two atoms, as is the
case in almost all elementary gases and vapors.

Certain very interesting and important theoretical issues are raised
by this conclusion. In connection with the density which the gas has,
it indicates an atomic weight of 40. But in this case there is no place
for the new element in the tables of Mendeleieff, which express the
periodic law, and which have been so generally accepted. If argon
should turn out to be a mixture, the difficulty may dissappear, but if
its simple character is finally demonstrated, an awkward dilemma is _
offered between the validity of the periodic law and that of the con-
clusions drawn from the determinations of specific heat ratios. The
periodic law of Mendeleieff is, after all, as Professor Riicker has said,
*‘an empirical law, which rests on no dynamical foundation.” The
present situation will strengthen many chemists in their feeling that,
although the law is a generalization which has in it many elements of
truth, and has hence proved of much value to chemistry, it is by no
means a complete or final expression of the relations of the elements.

The discovery of argon is a brilliant achievement. As Professor
Crookes said before reading his paper on the spectra of argon, ‘‘ Here
we have a new chemical element, the principal properties of which
seem to be the negation of all chemical properties. Chemists will
understand how difficult it is to deal with anything which forms no -
compounds and unites with nothing. The discovery commenced by a

prediction, followed after an interval by realization. . . . The
prediction and discovery of argon are only equalled by the few
discoveries . . . made .. . by the carefulstudy of the periodic

law, and to surpass it we must go back to the predicted existence and
subsequent discovery of an unknown planet by Adams and Leverrier.”’
—TueE NATION.

342 Canadian Record of Science.

SoME OF THE RARER SUMMER FLOWERS OF CANADA.

By RopBert CAMPBELL, M.A., D.D., Montreal.

It may help to a knowledge of the distribution of plant
life in the Dominion, to give a list of the rarer plants
picked up in different parts of the country, which
have been visited in the summer season, either in the way
of duty or pleasure. It was the writer’s privilege lately
to spend a couple of weeks in South Western® Ontario.
During that time it was his good fortune to meet with the
botanical section of the Natural History Society of
London, Ontario, and to spend a few hours with them in
field work on and near the banks of the Thames. This
expedition was fruitful in the acquisition of not a few
specimens, found in Canada only in that district. Anyone
familiar with Professor Macoun’s Catalogue of Canadian
Plants is aware how largely he drew, in compiling it,
from the collection made by Dr. Burgess, in the London
district. The county of Lambton was also visited lately;
—the town of Forest, and the shores of Lake Huron at
Kettle and Stony Points, and several captures were made
in that region of specimens not often found further east.
Galt, Brantford, the County of Lanark, Sherbrooke,
Cacouna, Cap-a-L’Aigle and St. John, New Brunswick, all
have yielded their quota of the following, now embraced
im my collection :—

ANEMONE NEMOROSA, L.
Toronto.

tANUNCULUS MULTIFIDUS, Var. TERRESTRIS, Gray.—Town-
ship of Drummond, Ont.

Sherbrooke and Hyde Park,

RANUNCULUS REPENS, L.—Banks of the Thames, London.

RANUNCULUS PENNSYLVATICUS, L.— Woods near Brant-
ford.

DELPHINIUM AJACIS, L.—Township of Dundee, Quebec.

LB a

‘ . vs Sanit Ero vo
‘a eels tO 7 wit vl! r Ci
‘he Be

¢ f th he . Rarer Summer Pieters of Gneoi 343

oy fines ee

eS i eee L.—Kettle Point, Lake ion
Huron. ny
, MENISPERMUM Cage unin. L.—London, Forest, St. Rose,
Island of Jesus, Montreal Island. ,
- PopOPHYLLUM PELTATUM, L.—London, Forest, Brant-
ford, Galt.
SARRACENIA PURPUREA, L.—St. Martin, Island of Jesus.
ADLUMIA CIRRHOSA, Raf.—Brantford, Beauharnois. a
DICENTRA CANADENSIS, DC.—Montreal Island, Smith’s .
Falls. |
DICENTRA CUCULLARIA, DC.—Montreal Island.
CARDAMINE ROTUNDIFOLIA, Michx.—Montreal Island.
ARABIS DRUMMONDIL, Gray.—Rocks above wharf at
Point-a-Pic, Murray Bay. (Arabis confinis, Watson.)
ARABIS CANADENSIS, L.—Montreal Mountain.
SISYMBRIUM SOPHIA, L.—Lachine.
NASTURTIUM PALUSTRE, var. HISPIDUM, DC.—Hunting-
don.
NASTURTIUM
des Neiges.
CAKILE AMERICANA, Nutt.—Cacouna, Cap-a- L’Aigle.
* VIOLA RENIFOLIA, Gray.—Lachine.
- SoLEA CONCOLOR, Ging—-Near London, Ont. (Jonidium
concolor, Barth & Hook.)
SILENE ARMERIA, L.—Field above Hochelaga.
LYCHNIS VESPERTINA, Sibth—Dundee, Q., London,
Forest. :
Lycunis, FLos-cucutt, L.—Banks of Grand River, Galt.
ARENARIA CAROLINIANA, Watt.— Brantford.
ARENARIA GRENLANDICA, Spreng.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
ARENARIA Micnauxu, Hook.—Stony Point, Lake Huron.
STELLARIA PUBERA, Michx.—Port-a-Persil, Q.
CERASTIUM ARVENSE, var. OBLONGIFOLIUM, Holl & Brit.—
Near St. John, N.B., Cacouna.
HOLOSTEUM UMBELLATUM, L.— Kettle Point, Lake Huron.
BUDA MARINA, Dumort.—Cacouna Island.

Cote

344 Canadian Record of Science.

Hypericum Ascyron, L.—Fergus,Ont., St. Scholastique, Q.
HYPERICUM ELLIPTICUM, Hook.—Bathurst, Ont.
Hipiscus Syriacus, Niles.—Ilhnois. |
Linum stTriatuM, Walter.—Township of Drummond,
Ont.
GERANIUM MACULATUM, L.—Brantford, London.
ILEX VERTICILLATA, Gray.—Eastern Townships, Q., St.
John, N.B.
NEMOPANTHES FASCICULARIS, ad —Cap-a-L’Aigle, La-
belle, St. John, N.B.
EUONYMUS ATROPURPUREUS, Jacq.—London, Ont.
_ Huonymus AMERICANUS, var. OBOVATUS, Torr & Gray.—
Galt.
RHAMNUS ALNIFOLIA, L’ Her.—Forest, Ont.
STAPHYLEA TRIFOLIA, L.—London, Ont.
NEGUNDO ACEROIDES, Moench.—Galt, Calumet, Montreal.
VITIS RIPARIA, Michx.—sSt. Rose, Kettle Point, Lake
Huron.
RHUS COPALLINA, L.—-Cap-a-L’Aigle.
tHUS CANADENSIS, var. TRILOBATA, Gray.—Kettle
Point, Lake Huron.
POLYGALA POLYGAMA, Watt.—London, Ont. :
PoLYGALA SENEGA, L.—Brantford.
TRIFOLIUM ARVENSE, L.—Rabbit-foot clover—Cap-a-
L’Aigle.
ASTRAGALUS COOPERI, Gray.—Near London, Ont.
Victa HIRSUTA, Koch.—Cap-a-L’ Aigle.
VICIA TETRASPERMA, Loisel—Mount Royal Park.
VictIA CAROLINIANA, Watt.—Murray Bay.
APIOS TUBEROSA, Boer.—Huntingdon, Island of Mont-
real.
SPIRHA LOBATA, Jacq.—Queen of the Prairie—St.
Lambert’s.
PHYSOCARPUS OPULIFOLIUS, Maxim.—Beaconsfield, Is-
land of Montreal.
RuBus CHAMZMORUS, L.—Saguenay, Port-a-Persil.

oxen

, x ore
’ Ln a

~
= ah ye

Some ¢ of t ‘the Herw pulniner pale of Canada. 345, ee as

s?
=
147

2 SResus Gimipanes L—Near St. John, N.B.
Geum MACROPHYLLUM, Willd.—St. John, NB.
4 _ Geum Virernranum, L.—Island of Montreal.
: WALDSTEINIA = FRAGARIOIDES, Tratt.—Hyde Park,
Toronto. |
POTENTILLA RIVALIS, Natt.—Cacouna, Cap-a-L’Aigle. ;
POTENTILLA FRUTICOSA, L.—Island of Montreal.
POTENTILLA TRIDENTATA, Ait.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
POTENTILLA CANADENSIS, L.—Island of Montreal.
POTERIUM CANADENSE, Benth & Hook.—Cacouna, Is-
land of Montreal. .
PYRUS CORONARIA, L.—Galt.
PyRUS ARBUTIFOLIA, L.—Near St. John, N.B.
CRATAEGUS COCCINEA, var. MACRACANTHA, Dudley—
Mount Royal Park.
CRATAEGUS TOMENTOSA, var. PYRIFOLIA, Gray.—Mount
Royal Park.
CRATAEGUS PUNCTATA, Jacq.—Mount Royal Park.
CRATAEGUS COCCINEA, var. MOLLIS, Torr & Gray.—Mount
Royal Park. Par
SAXIFRAGA AIZOIDES, L.—Point-a-Pic, Murray Bay.
SAXIFRAGA STELLARIS, var. COMOSA, Willd.—Point-a-Pic.
PARNASSIA CAROLINIANA, Michx.—Galt, Island of
Montreal, Cacouna.
SEDUM ACRE, L.—Galt, London, Ont.
HAMAMELIS VIRGINIANA, L.—Galt.
DECODON VERTICILLATUS, Ell—Beauharnois, Montreal.
EPILOBIUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM, var. CANESCENS, Wood.— :
Kettle Point, Lake Huron, Salmon River.
LiausticuM scoticum, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
THASPIUM AUREUM, Nutt.—Sherbrooke.
CCELOPLEURUM GMELINI,
PIMPINELLA INTIGERRIMA, Benth & Hook.—Montreal
Mountain, Kettle Point, Lake Huron.
CONIUM MACULATUM, L.—Huntingdon.

BERULA ANGUSTIFOLIA, Hook.—Huntingdon.
26

346 Canadian Record of Science.

CICUTA BULBIFERA, L.—Orangeville.

VIBURNUM OBOVATUM, Watt.—Kettle Point, Lake Huron-

TRIOSTEUM PERFOLIATUM, L.—Galt.

CEPHALANTHUS OCCIDENTALIS, L.—Kettle Point, Mont-
real Island. ;

HOUSTONIA ANGUSTIFOLIA, Michx.—Brantford.

HoustoniaA CaRULEA, L.—In great abundance in the
fields near Sherbrooke, Que.

GALIUM PILOSUM, Ait.—Forest, Ont., and Montreal
Island.

GALIUM LANCEOLATUM, Torr.—Galt.

GALIUM ASPRELLUM, Michx.—Orangeville.

DIPSACUS SYLVESTRIS, Mill —Bathurst, Ont., Lachine.
ASTER LINDLEYANUS, Torr & Gray.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
ASTER TarpIFOLIUS, L.—Bank of Murray River.

InvuLA HELENIUM, L.~—-Drummond, Ont., Bath, Mont-
real Island.

GALINSOGA PARVIFLORA, Cav.—MeGill College grounds.
eae tc)

RUDBECKIAs LACINIATA, L:-—Galt.

TUSSILAGO FARFARA, L.—Near St. John, N.B.

CNICUS ALTISSIMUS, var. DISCOLOR, Gray.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

ONOPORDON ACANTHIUM, L.—Galt. ©

LAMPSANA COMMUNIS, L.—Cacouna Point, Quebec.

HIERACIUM MURORUM, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

SONCHUS ARVENSIS, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle, Montreal Island.

TRAGOPOGON PORRIFOLIUS, L.—Lucan’s Crossing.

TRAGOPOGON PRATENSIS, L.—Montreal Island.

LOBELIA SYPHILITICA, L.—Galt.

LOBELIA PUBERULA, Michx.—Montreal Island.

LOBELIA SPICATA, Lam.—Galt.

GAYLUSSACIA DuUMOSA, Torr & Gray.—St. John, N.B.

(FAYLUSSACIA RESINOSA, Torr & Gray.—St. John, N.B.

Vaccinium. Vitis-Ipaa, L.—St. John, N.B.

VACCINIUM oxycoccus, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle, St. John,
N.B.

4 - ~ ~~ * “" Ne 3
ae i is aS - ts ty >. ei cs. ;
de f os ee a. P > evar eee, ee 775 + “4
44 ' 4 ' * > 7.2 A aa ~~ r
Peeerte ce ee. Pema it
; ‘an : .

Pak eo — \ Ni,
bh wat Y, - a 7

Fé
.

Pes Oe eam cys erie t ol
eg Some of the Rarer Summer Flowers of Canada.
i \
_ CHIOGENES HISPIDULA, Torr & Gray.—Cacouna Island,
~ Port-a-Persil. ~
, ARCTOSTAPHYLOS UVA-URSI, Spreng.—Cacouna Island,
- Port-a-Persil. )
EpIG#A REPENS, L.—Lachute, The Trou, Murray Bay.
GAULTHERIA PROCUMBENS, L.—The Trou, Montreal
Island.
ANDROMEDA POLIFOLIA, L.—Near St. John, N.B.
CASSANDRA CALYCULATA.—Port-a-Persil, St. John, N.B.
LOISELEURIA PROCUMBENS, Desv.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
KALMIA ANGUSTIFOLIA, L.—Near St. John, N.B.
KALMIA GLAUCA, Ait.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
RHODODENDRON RuHopoRA, Don.—Near St. John, N.B.
LeDUM LATIFOLIUM, Ait.—Port-a-Persil, Island of
Montreal. )
CHIMAPHILA MUBELLATA, Nutt.—Cap-a-L’Aigle, Mont-
real Island.
MONESES UNIFLORA, Gray.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
PLANTAGO LANCEOLATA, L.—Galt, London, Ont.
PLANTAGO DECIPIENS, Barneoud.—Cap-a-L’ Aigle, Port-
a-Persil.
PLANTAGO CORDATA,. Lam.—Beauharnois.
STEIRONEMA CILIATUM, Raf.—Isle Heron.
LYSIMACHIA NUMMULARIA, L.—Beauharnois.
GLAUX MARITIMA, L.—Murray Bay.
LIGUSTRUM VULGARE, L.—Forest.
APOCYNUM CANNABINUM, L.—London, Ont., Beaconsfield.
ASCLEPIAS TUBEROSA, L.—Galt,. Stony Point, Lake
Huron.
ASCLEPIAS PHYTOLACCOIDES, Pursh.—Galt, London.
ASCLEPIAS MeApmI, Torr.—Brantford.
ASCLEPIAS TUBEROSA, var. DECUMBENS, Pursh.—Sand-
hill, Stony Point.
GENTIANA CRINITA, Froel.—Galt.
GENTIANA SERRATA, Gunner.—Galt.
GENTIANA QUINQUEFLORA, Lam.—Cacouna Point.

347

348 Canadian Record of Science.

GENTIANA ANDREWSII, Griseb.—Montreal Island.

PHLOX DIVARICATA, L.—Galt.

MENYANTHES TRIFOLIATA, L.—Murray Bay.

HYDROPHYLLUM APPENDICULATUM, Michx.—Near Lon-
don.

CYNOGLOSSUM VIRGINICUM, L.—Island of Montreal.

MERTENSIA MARITIMA, Don.—Cacouna, Murray Bay.

LITHOSPERMUM LATIFOLIUM, Michx:—Montreal Island.

ONOSMODIUM CAROLINIANUM, DC.—Sandhill, Stony
Point. |

ECHIUM VULGARE, L.—Bathurst, Ont., Galt.

CuscuTa Gronovil, Willd.—Oliver’s Ferry, Ont.

HYOSCYAMUS NIGER, L.—Fletcher’s field, Montreal.

PHYSALIS GRANDIFLORA, Hook.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

VERBASCUM BLATTARIA, L.—Galt.

LINARIA CYMBALARIA, Mill.—Near Toronto.

PENTSTEMON PUBESCENS, Solander.—Galt.

‘LIMOSELLA AQUATICA, var. TENUIFOLIA, Hoffm.—Murray
Bay.

GERARDIA PURPUREA, var. PAUPERCULA, Gray.—Mont-
real Island.

EUPHRASIA OFFICINALIS, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle, Quebec.

PEDICULARIS PALUSTRIS, var. WLASSOVIANA, Bunge.—
Murray Bay. )

COLLINSONIA CANADENSIS, L.—Galt. |

Lycopus SINUATUS, Ell—Huntingdon, Montreal Moun-
tain,

CaTALPA BIGNONIOIDES, Watt.—McGuill College grounds,
flowered in 1893. |

TEUCRIUM CANADENSE, L.—Beauharnois, Huntingdon.

CALAMINTHA Nepeta, Link.—Mount Royal Park.

CALAMINTHA CLINOPODIUM, Benth.—Huntingdon.

HEDEOMA PULEGIOIDES, Pers.—St. Lambert’s.

MoNARDA DIDYMA, L.—Montréal Island.

LOPHANTHUS NEPETOIDES, Benth.—Mount Royal Park,
London.

. ca
ae, ey ae ; - >»
Rie * 1 " '

nl : *. ‘

oo | Some of the Rarer Summer Flowers of Canada. 349

NEPETA GLECHOMA, Benth.—Montreal Mountain, Brant-
ford, Stony Point, Lake Huron.

CYCLOLOMA PLATYPHYLLUM, Moquin.—London, Ont.

CHENOPODIUM URBICUM, L.—Montreal suburbs.

ATRIPLEX PATULA, var. HASTATA, Gray.—Cap-a-L’Aigle,
Cacouna.

SALSOLA KALI, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle, Cacouna.

PHYTOLACCA DECANDRA, L.—London, Ont.

RuMEX Britannica, L.—London, Ont., Forest.

RUMEX SALICIFOLIUS, Weinmann.—Cap-a-L’ Aigle.

RUMEX VERTICILLATUS, L.—Mount Royal Park.

RUMEX SANGUINEUS, L.—Near St. John, N.B.

RUMEX ACETOSA, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

POLYGONUM CILINODE, Michx.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

ARISTOLOCHIA SIPHO, L’Her.—Brantford.

SASSAFRAS OFFICINALE, Nees.—Glenmorris, near Galt.

DAPHNE MEZEREUM, L.—Montreal Mountain.

DIRCA PALUSTRIS, L.-—Sharbot Lake, Drummond, Mont-
real Island.

SHEPHERDIA CANADENSIS, Nutt.—Murray Bay, London,
Ont.

EvupHorsia Pepuus, L.—Streets of Montreal.

EUPHORBIA HUMISTRATA, Engelm.—Mount Royal Park.

EUPHORBIA OBTUSATA, Pursh.—Montreal Island.

CELTIS OCCIDENTALIS, L.—St. Helen’s Island, London,
Montreal Island. :

BG@HMERIA CYLINDRICA, Willd.—Suburbs of Montreal.

PLATANUS OCCIDENTALIS, L.—London, Forest.

Myrica GALE, L.—Cacouna Island.

CARPINUS CAROLINIANA, Walter.—Drummond, Galt.

POPULUS HETEROPHYLLA, L.—Labelle.

EMPETRUM NIGRUM, L.—Cacouna Island, Cap-a-L’Aigle.
Pinus BANKSIANA, Lambert.—Cap-a-L Aigle.
: PIcEA NiGRA, Link.—Cap-a-L Aigle.
TAXUS CANADENSIS, Willd.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
MICROSTYLIS OPHIOGLOSSOIDES, Nutt.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

re ee er TL oe he ee 2 rar,
2S pokes ha CS as Se ai, CaS

350 Canadian Record of Science.

LoBpeLIA AM@NA, Michx.—Stony Point, Lake Huron.

CORALLORHIZA ODONTORHIZA, Nutt.—Galt.

CORALLORHIZA MULTIFLORA, Nutt.—Galt.

SPIRANTHES ROMANZOFFIANA, Cham.—Cap-a-L’ Aigle.

SPIRANTHES CERNUA, Richard.—Montreal Island.

SPIRANTHES GRACILIS, Bigelow.—Near London, Ont.

GOODYERA ‘REPENS, R. Br.—Cap-a-L Aigle.

EpIPACTIS HELLEBORINE, Crantz.—Montreal Mountain.

CALOPOGON PULCHELLUS, R. Br.—Stony Point, Lake
Huron.

ORCHIS SPECTABILIS, L.—Drummond, Bathurst, Ont.,
Mount Royal Park.

HABENARIA HYPERBOREA, R. Br.—Cap-a-L’Aigle, Mille
Isles.

HABENARIA HooKeErt, Torr.—Calumet.

HABENARIA ORBICULATA, Torr.—Mount Royal, London.

HABENARIA PSYCODES, Grey.—Stony Point, Lake Huron.

HABENARIA FIMBRIATA, R. Br.—Stony Point, Lake
Huron.

CYPRIPEDIUM SPECTABILE, Swartz.—Lanark, Stony Point.

CYPRIPEDIUM ACAULE, Ait.—Hochelaga Banks.

DIOSCOREA VILLOSA, L.—Near London, Ont.

ALLIUM CANADENSE, Kalm.—Kettle Point, Lake Huron.

DISPORUM LANUGINOSUM, Barth & _Hook.—Banks of
Thames, near London, Ont.

LiniuM PHILADELPHICUM, L.—Sandhill, Stony Point,
Lake Huron.

Litium CANADENSE, L.—Dundee, Que., Montreal Island.

VERATRUM VIRIDE, Ait.—Sherbrooke.

ARIS&MA DRACONTIUM, Schott.—Near London, Ont.

SYMPLOCARPUS F@TIDUS, Salisb.—Sherbrooke, Nuns’
Island, near London, Ont.

TRIGLOCHIN PALUSTRIS, L.—Stony Point, Lake Huron.
CHARA FRAGILIS, L.—Galt.

q
4
‘
d
;
Ty

rs a ap: ? - + J

« . oy
« ye
~"

spree se ae Ae
Note on a Sadie of Beluga Catodon. je > OE

jee
; i + * 4 ‘
A

;
s PELLEA GRACILIS, -Hook.—Banks of Grand River, |
Fergus.

ASPLENUIM TRICHOMANES, L.—Point-a-Pic, Murray
Bay. | !
_ CYSTOPTERIS BuLBIFERA, Bernh, —Orangeville, Cap-a-
L’Aigle. 3

OSMUNDA CINNAMOMEA, var. FRONDOSA, L.—Cap-a-
L’Aigle. '

CAMPTOSORUS RHIZOPHYLLUS, Link.—Philipsburgh, Que.

LycopopIuM SELAGO, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

LYCOPODIUM LUCIDULUM, Michx.—Cap-a-L Aigle.

LYCOPODIUM ANNOTINUM, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.

a LycopopiuM CLAVATUM, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
LycopopIUM CAROLINIANUM, L.—Cap-a-L’Aigle.
LYCOPODIUM COMPLANATUM, var. CHAMACYPARISSUS.—

Cap-a-L’Aigle.

NoTE ON A SPECIMEN OF BELUGA CATODON, FROM THE
LEDA CLAY, MONTREAL.

By Sir Witi1am Dawson, F.R.S., Etc. .

This animal, the White Whale or Beluga, once very
abundant and still not uncommon in the Lower St.
Lawrence, is widely distributed throughout the northern
seas. It occurs in Greenland, and the same or a similar
species is found on the coasts and in the rivers of
Alaska and Siberia. It is only a rare and_ occasional
visitor on the coasts of northern Europe. It is one of the
smaller of the toothed whales, and subsists on fish,
especially cod, haddock, loche and flounders. Its creamy
white colour distinguishes it very markedly from all our
other cetaceans. Its favourite abode seems to be the
tideways and estuaries of large rivers, which it sometimes
ascends for great distances in search of food. A stuffed

—_— -

/

352 Canadian Record of Science.

specimen now in the collection of this Society is said to
have been taken in the St. Lawrence, near Montreal.

In the Pleistocene Period, and especially in that part of
it marked by the deposit of the marine Leda clay, when
all the lower lands of the St. Lawrence valley were sub-
merged, the Beluga must have had a much wider range
than at present, and was probably very abundant. Hence
its remains have been more than once found in the Leda
clay, sometimes as entire skeletons, in other cases as
detached bones. Its first recorded occurrence was the
discovery of the greater part of a skeleton by Thompson,
the geologist of Vermont, in 1849, in a railway cutting
near Lake Champlain, at an elevation of 60 feet above
the lake, or about 150 feet above the sea. It occurred in
clay, the equivalent of our Leda clay, the Champlain clay
of Dana, associated with marine shells of northern types.
It was regarded by Thompson as a new species, and named
Beluga Vermontana ; but a comparison with the Canadian
specimens found later, and with recent bones in the
Museum of McGill College, enabled the late Mr. Billings
to refer it to the modern species usually known as eluga
Catodon, Lin., though the specific name, albicans, Miller,
perhaps has priority. It is the Delphinus albicans of
Fabricuus in his Fauna Groenlandica (1780). The best
specimens heretofore found in Canada are one discovered
in Peel’s Brickyard, Montreal, one found near Cornwall,
and another discovered at Bathurst, N.B., and described
by Gilpin and Honeyman. The two former specimens, of
which the first is nearly perfect, are now in the museum
of the Geological Survey in Ottawa, and were noticed by
the late Mr. Billings in the Proceedings of this Society.

The present specimen was found in the brick-clay near
Papineau Road, by the workmen of Messrs. Smith, brick-
makers, when excavating the clay in the present winter.
By the care of these gentlemen the bones were collected

1 Thompson’s Verinont, Appendix.

'
:
y

*

and were handed to Dr. McEachran, Dean of the Faculty
of Veterinary Science, and by him presented to the Peter
Redpath Museum, where they are now being mounted by
Bailly for the collection of Pleistocene fossils, and may be
compared with a fine recent specimen from Little Metis.
The skeleton is nearly complete, and possibly some of the
missing bones may be secured when the snow has dis-
appeared. The locality is approximately about 100 feet
above the River St. Lawrence, and the specimen occurred
at the depth of 22 feet in the clay, associated with shells
ot Leda (Yaldia) glacialis, Tellina (Macoma) Grenlandica
and minute tests of Foraminifera. With the bones was
also found a fragment of Coniferous wood, which is deter-
mined by Prof. Penhallow as that of the Black Spruce—
Picea Nigra.

The Leda Clay was probably deposited at a depth of 50
to 80 fathoms, which corresponds approximately with one
of the most marked shore lines on the Montreal Mountain
at a height of about 470 feet above the sea, and with the
old sea beach at Smith’s Falls, Ont., which afforded some
years ago the bones of a whale, described in the Proceed-
ings of this Society in the Record of Science, Montreal,
1883. At the time, therefore. when this animal perished,
and was imbedded in the Leda clay, the Montreal Moun-
tain was a small rocky island in a wide inland sea,
extending from the Laurentian Hills on the north to the
high ground of the Eastern Townships on the south, com-
municating with the Atlantic, not only by the Gulf of St.
Lawrence, but also by a strait between the hills of New
England and the Adirondacks, and extending westward
at least as far as the Thousand Islands. This arm of the
sea was inhabited by a rich boreal fauna, consisting of
species now found in the colder waters of the Gulf and
tiver St. Lawrence, and in the Greenland Seas. Complete
collections of these animals may be seen in our Museums,
and have been catalogued in publications on the Pleisto-

Note on a Specimen of Beluga Catodon. 353 -

/
354 Canadian Record of Science.

cene of Canada. There would thus be wide scope and
probably abundant food on what is now the fertile plain
of the Province of Quebec, for the Beluga and the Green-
land seal, whose bones are found associated with it in the
Leda clay.

NoTEeE BY Pror. PENHALLOW ON THE SPECIMEN OF Woop
REFERRED TO IN PAPER ON BELUGA.

The specimen of wood found in association with the
whale skeleton obtained from the Leda clay, Montreal,
consisted of a small branch about three-fourths of an inch
in diameter and five inches in length. It proved not to
be impregnated by mineral matter, and readily yielded to
the softening influence of water, increasing considerably
in volume. Upon microscopical examination 1t was found
that the structure was in an advanced stage of decay, and
was penetrated in all directions by the mycelium of a
fungus. The structure was so far broken down that
nearly all the secondary growth of the cell walls had dis-
appeared, and together with this, the markings upon
which a distinction of the species must rest. The generic
characters, however, were sufficiently preserved to satis-
factorily ascertain that the wood is a Picea, and among
existing species it approaches most nearly to P. Nigra,
which it, in all probability, is.

TIMBER OF CANADA.

Paper Read Before the Society by Hon. J. K. Warp.

There are about 6,000 sawmills in the Dominion, em-
ploying during the season of, say, 150 days, not less than
15,000 men in and around the mills, sawing, piling,
shipping, ete. In the woods during winter, getting out
the logs and timber, and river driving, there are about the
same number. Six thousand mills, averaging each 400,000

es ee

ge 7 aes ' .
ng ' ht he hal >
The Timber of Canada. 355

ft. per season, makes up the apparent output of all the
mills. This quantity is sawed in a single day by some of
the larger mills, while many of the smaller mills do not
turn out 200,000 in the season. The difference in the
apparent output of the mills—that is, 2,500 million—and
that returned as cut on public lands is made up as taken
off private lands and the Crown Lands of Nova Scotia, of
which we have no returns.

The area under license in the different provinces is |
about 100,000 square miles, yielding annually (1895)
about 2,500 million feet b. m. of sawed lumber, pine and
spruce principally, and hewn timber divided as follows
among the different provinces:

Ontario—7,140,000 logs, producing 728,000,000 feet b.
m., principally pine; 40,000 pieces white and red pine,
42,000,000 feet b. m.; 133,000 pes. boom timber, 2,000,000
feet b. m.; average size of pine and spruce logs, 90 feet ;
ordinary. revenue, $939,000; ex bonus, $958,000; area
under license, 21,500 miles; area unoccupied, 17,000
miles. |
(Juebec—Area under license, 48,000 miles, producing
spruce and pine logs, 6,170,000, equalling 683,000,000
feet b.m.; producing pine, spruce and birch timber,
18,500,000 feet b.m.; railroad ties and other wood,
22,500 pieces, 12,000,000 feet b.m.; pulp cedar, etc.,
10,000 cords; revenue, $892,000.

New Brunswick—Area under license, 6,000 miles,
producing pine and spruce logs, 87,000,000 b.m.; hem-
lock logs, 7,000,000 b.m.; cedar, 14,000,000 b. m.; tama-
rac, 1,400,000 b.m.; 14,700 cubic feet pine and hard-
wood timber, 176,400 b. m.; 12,000 boom sticks, 240,000
b.m.; revenue and bonus, $102,000.

British Columbia—Area under lease, 1,200 miles, pro-
duding 80,000,000 b. m. fir and cedar; 10,000,000 cedar
shingles. The timber produced in British Columbia
being so much larger than is found in the east requires a

356 Canadian Record of Science.

very different equipment to handle it from what is used in
this part of the country.

Manitoba and Territories—Area under license, 2,200
miles, producing pine and spruce logs, 24,000,000 feet
b.m.; 10,000 railroad ties, 320,000 feet b. m.; 2,000,000
shingles; 5,000,000 laths ; revenue, $70,000.

Large as the foregoing is, it only forms one-quarter of
the sawn lumber received in Great Britain, and one-
sixteenth of the timber, the great proportion being the
product of the north of Europe and Southern States.
While not an alarmist as to our supply of pine timber, I
cannot but consider the wanton waste of it a sin, when
so much good lumber has been and is being thrown
away. A mistake is made by our mill men in not having
more sawing capacity than the fast mulls now in use
possess, sawing, as they do, in 12 hours 40,000 or 50,000
feet with one circular saw. Too much haste is required
to do this, when more money might be got out of the
same logs, by employing two sets of saws, with the
necessary trimming machinery, and doing the work with
less speed. It does seem as if the lumbermen of the past,
as well as many of the present day, entertained the idea
that the supply of pine in Canada was inexhaustible and
were anxious to get rid of it as quickly as possible.

With our vast amount of hardwood, which is fast
coming into use, with the facilities of getting it to market,
as well as the modern machinery for manipulating it,
along with the great quantity of wood supply, said to be
in British Columbia, all this, with the natural increase, if
fire can be kept at bay, we can reasonably conclude that
the end of our forest supply 1s a good way off. When
that time comes, I hope a substitute will be found.

The carrying trade and commerce is largely indebted

to the forest. There is more tonnage employed on the
St. Lawrence and canals in conveying lumber and timber
to market than on any other commodity. Quebec was

- ~

The Timber of Canada. 357

once the greatest timber and ship building port in the
world. Forty years ago as many as forty to fifty ships
were built in a single year. Now there is not one. In
years gone by as many as 600 sailing ships visited the
port in the spring and fall, taking away 300,000,000 feet
b. m. of timber and lumber: as much as 18,000,000 cubic
feet of square timber were shipped in a season; last
season about 3,000,000. Its once famous coves and
wharves are deserted and falling to pieces, most of the
pine deal business being done at Montreal that was
formerly transacted at Quebec.

Mr. Ward emphasized the necessity of preserving the
forests from fire, quoting at length from Hon. Peter
White on the question. Continuing he said: “ In selling
lands to settlers, I would make it a condition of sale that
20 acres in every 100 should be given free and that it
should be forever kept as woodland. The uninitiated,
travelling through the woods after the shantymen have
taken all they think worth taking, would hardly notice
that the chopper had been there, except for seeing an
occasional stump, a few chips, or a top of a tree, the great
bulk of the timber remaining to hold back the water in
its natural beds, and to prevent sudden rises and falls in
the rivers, which oftentimes cause serious damage by
overflowing the banks or becoming so low that they refuse
to do the work they once performed with ease. To avoid
these troubles and have our country remain well wooded
for many years, it is but necessary to give the trees
indigenous to it, leave to grow, and there will be no
necessity to plant. I have no doubt but that much of the
land that has been denuded of its timber would in a very
few years be covered with a spontaneous growth of wood,
and so prevent our country from becoming an arid waste,
by utilizing only that portion of it which can be profitably
worked. |

To an inexperienced eye there may be hardly an evi-

358 Canadian. Record of Science.

dence at first glance of the disappearance of the pine.
The hardwoods with which the pine is interspersed are
usually left standing to a considerable extent, and so are
the smaller pine, so that even a well cut country will still
look splendidly wooded. No doubt the time will come
when it will be carefully re-cropped. But the commer-
cial value is largely gone, and with it the natural desir-
ability, for the cutting of the pine greatly lessens the
value of the woods as vast: reservoirs, holding the snows
in spring and the rains of summer, so as to feed steadily
the innumerable streams of the water sheds. Conse-
quently, spring floods and summer droughts for the cleared
lands in the valleys follow close on the lumberman’s axe.
A certain amount of attention has been aroused by the
rapid retirement of the pine. Bad as the axe is, fire is
worse. The Ontario Government has recently attempted
to enforce strict precautions against fire, and it has also
appropriated as a provincial park an enormous reserve
near Lake Nipissing, thirteen hundred square miles, of
which nine hundred are pine timber, situated on one of
the chief natural watersheds of the province. But a great
deal more than this is necessary if the Canadian pine
forests are not soon to disappear like the tracts of Maine.
We cannot urge too strongly on the government to set
apart all lands not suitable for making a decent home for
the settler. Much of the land that they are tempted to
¢o on is not worth the trouble of clearing; it is only the
presence of the lumberman, in many cases, that enables
him to exist. The question of revenue is of importance,
as well as other considerations in not destroying the
forests and the country of its principal source of wealth.

The product of the forest is disposed of about as
follows :

Exported sawn lumber and timber.......... $24,000,000
260 million feet b. m. sawlogs.............. 208,000
Railroad ties, pulpwood, bark.............. 27,000,000

Be RE ee
- os ye, ae . aay itt Oks :
— The Timber of Canada. Soe os PS
‘The first. timber shipped to Europe from Canada: was
sent from Quebec to Larochelle by Talon in 1667. Lieut.
~ Hoequart shipped timber and boards to Rochefort in 1735.
In 1823, 300 cargoes were shipped from Quebec.

In the early part of the present century, the Mont-
morency mills were established by a Mr. Usboirne. Mr.
Peter Patterson, a ship carpenter by trade, who had
spent some time in Russia, became an employee of Mr.
Usboirne’s, and finally proprietor of the property, and :
became one of the largest manufacturers of lumber in
Canada. Sir John Caldwell established mills at Riviere-
du-Loup en Bas and at Etchemin. The late William P

- Price, father of the Hon. J. Price, of Quebec, established
large mills at Chicoutimi, St. Alexis, L’Anse-St. Jean,
St. Etienne, Batiscan, Matane and many other places,
leaving an immense business to his sons, which is now
conducted by the son before named. The late Allan
Gilmour, and relations of the same name, carried on for /
many years a large business on the North Nation, the
Gatineau and Mississippi (Canada), and at Trenton, Ont.,
the younger branches of the family continuing the
business.

Philomene Wright, one of the first lumbermen on the
Ottawa river, came from Woburn, Mass., in the United
States, arriving at the Chandiere Falls—or the Asticou,
as called by the Indians—as early as the year 1796. It |
was not till 1797 that he finally decided to make his
home in Canada, and on the 20th of October, 1799, he
and two companions pitched upon the site of the future
city of Hull. He finally quitted Woburn for Canada on
the 2nd of February, 1800. He was accompanied by
five families, and had in his train fourteen horses, eight
oxen and seven sleighs. The first tree was felled on the
site of the homestead on the 7th of March, of the same
year. He brought the first square timber from the
Ottawa to (Quebec in the year 1807. He built the first

rh ¢ Sie, OCT ae tale Baa

\ vi ‘ is ES et Re,’
360 Canadian Record of Science.

slide on the Hull side of the river in 1829. He was
elected the first member to represent the County of
Ottawa in’ 1830. He died in 1839, and sleeps, an honored
memory, in the little cemetery on the Aylmer road.
Philomene Wright built his first saw and grist mills in
1808; they were, unfortunately, burned down, but were
rebuilt m 60 days.

About eighteen years prior to this the first saw mill on
the Ottawa had been built at Point Fortune, by a Mr.
Story. It boasted one upright saw, and it is recorded
that when the man in charge gigged back the carriage
for a fresh cut, he would sit down on the log to take his
dinner, and was about through by the time the cut was
finished. With our present saws the same can be done
in four seconds.

Among our successful lumbermen have been the late
James McLaren, of Buckingham; Peter McLaren, of
Perth; Bronson, Weston & Co., Perley & Patee, J. R.
Booth, Alex. Fraser, of Westmeath ; W. Mackey, and the
late firm of Hamilton Bros., whose father was one of the
first in the trade at Hawkesbury, Ont. Many others
have taken an active part in the business, with more or
less success.

West of the Rocky Mountains, Canada, contains vast
quantities of valuable timber, the manufacture of which
is rapidly increasing, to meet the wants of the Pacific
coast and islands. Much of this lumber will find its way
east to the treeless prairies.

As to the Canadian method of lumbering, when cireum-
stances will permit, we pile or skid before the snow
becomes too deep. When the snow is deep we draw
direct from the stump to the lake or river. Our style of
living in the shanty, and, in fact, the building itself differs
in the various parts of the country. Until very recently,
particularly in the Lower St. Lawrence, the fare of the
shantyman was very primitive, the commonest tea being

, Pe ee ae eee

‘ > 3

au oS

he oP | rant "

oe |
The 2 Timber of Canada.
ry Aes
4 q esis a fixe? AN the only variety in the bill of fare
ef vas that it consisted of pea soup, bread, pork and beans
for dinner, the same, with the addition of tea for supper,
Prac either, less the pea soup, for breakfast. On the St.
- Maurice, for many years, the living has been good and
substantial, with comfortable shanties provided with stove,
tables, and bunks, the cooking being usually done in an
- outside compartment. The shantyman’s condition, how-

+?

ever, is improving with the times. : ae 4
Our shantymen, whether English or French, as a rule, a
are as good axemen, and expert drivers and canoemen, as Mt
_ can be found in any country. Our people are well up in he
dam building, as well as in making slides and clearing x
away the rivers to facilitate driving. Our rivers, as a
general thing, being very precipitous and rapid, require ~
extensive improvements, especially for the running of a

square timber.

I can hardly let the occasion pass without a reference
to two of our woods, the first because of its usefulness to
the poor aborigine, whose heritage we possess; it served
to cover his wigwam, and was the material for his canoe,
to aid locomotion ; the latter, the great wood of commerce.

The white birch, or boleau, has within a few years be-
come of some value when,found within easy reach, having
been turned to account for the manufacture of spools and
spool wood for thread makers, the white part of the wood
only being used. It is made into squares, varying from
one inch, in eighths, to say, two inches, and three or four
feet long. Many shiploads have been shipped to England
and Scotland the past few years, principally from the
Lower St. Lawrence. The red, or heart, being worthless
to the spoolmakers, is either used as firewood or left to
rot. There are vast quantities of this wood in the
interior, too far from navigation or rail to be of any
value. It is mostly found on poor soil, mixed with bal-
sam, small spruce and cedar. It makes good firewood

27

362 Canadian Record of Science.

when dry. The bark is useful to the Indian for the
making of his canoe; the vessel for retaining the sap oi
the maple; his drinking cup and the cover of his wigwam.
The yellow birch provides a cough remedy by boiling the
sap down to a syrup; and, lastly, though not least, it
furnishes the proverbial birch-rod, which, though almost
obsolete, sometimes does good service, even in these days
of advanced ideas. Vast quantities of the dwarf or black
birch have been used as withes in rafting logs, some
concerns using as many as thirty or forty thousand in a
season, each of them representing a young tree; but little
of this is done at present.

We now come to what every lumberman considers the
king of the forest, in grandeur, usefulness and value, the
white or cork pine, or pinus strobus of the scientists, the
tree of all others that serves more purposes than we can
enumerate. Among them the tiny match, the mast for
the great ship, the frame of the sweet sounding piano, and
wherever a soft, easy-working wood is wanted, either in
the arts, the workshop, or the factory, there it is to be
found. As an article of commerce, it far surpasses in
value and quantity any other wood, if not all sorts put
together. It supplies more freight for vessels coming into
the St. Lawrence than any other commodity; it gives
more employment to wage-earning men than any industry
in our country, except agriculture. It employs more
capital in manipulating it from the time the men leave
for the woods in the fall, to make, haul and drive the logs
and timber to the mills—the building of mills for sawing,
the construction of barges and steamboats to convey it to
market, as well as the large amount of freight furnished
to railroads, the erection of factories to convert it to the
various uses to which it is put. It is safe to say, that the
value of the output of pine lumber alone, produced in
Canada, is at least $25,000,000, or two and a half times as
much as that of any other manufacturing industry ; and,

Site gl ee

: e: ; : LB * ~ i iy The Timber of Oantde | 363
Be |

~ when we consider that 60 per cent. is paid for labor, and
that nearly all to men, representing a large population, it
is readily seen how important it is, either by legislation or
otherwise, to protect and conserve the source of this great
factor in our prosperity. How can we extol sufficiently
this monarch of the forest that we are so much indebted
to? The tree when growing in the open country is of
little or no value, except as a shade tree, its lateral
branches reaching almost to the ground. It is in the
dense forest we have to look for the great tree of com-
merce, where nature acts the pruner. There the branches
decay and drop off, the trunk shoots upward high above
its neighbors, seeking that which it was deprived of below
—light and air. By this action of nature we get our
clear pine, so much prized by mechanics. As the branches
drop off, the wood grows over them, and we get the stately
tree carrying its size well up, and often attaining 60 or 70
feet to the branches. I once saw a tree that measured 40
inches in diameter 70 feet from the ground, without a
knot or defect visible in this space. Naturally, however,
it is very rare to get a log or the best of timber without
finding knots or defects as you get near the heart, the
remains of the dead branches that fell off during the
tree’s youth. My experience teaches me that white pine
is of slow growth.:° The smallest trees that ought to be
taken for saw logs or timber should be at least fourteen
inches at the butt. This would take not less than fifty
years to produce, and such a tree as I have before
described as much as one hundred and fifty; more than
three inches in twenty years. Large groves of pine are
usually found on poor light soil, I think, consequently,
that the bulk of the pine found under such circumstances
is apt to be punky or defective for the want—so to speak
—of nourishment. The best pine is usually found on
stronger soil mixed with hardwood. It is unpleasant to
contemplate the want of this valuable timber. Once gone

364 — Canadian Record of Science.

it is gone forever, and cannot be reproduced in our or our
children’s time, as unlike mineral or the other products of
the soil, the quantity produced from these are limited by
the amount of labor employed in producing them. Per-
haps, however, time will find a substitute in some artificial
wood, or employ metal to take its place.

Hardwoods, to which I will briefly refer, that were once
almost discarded, except for burning, are coming largely
into use in consequence of the improved wood-working
machinery that has been devised of late years, making the
work of preparing and completing joiner work much more
simple and easy than it was to do the same thing in pine
when I served my time over 50 years ago, and when
flooring, mortising, tenoning, sticking mouldings out of
dry spruce with hard knots, was done by hand. The
facilities also for reaching hardwoods and getting them to
market will help to make up for the loss of this favorite
material, which, I hope, is yet a long way off. I might
say before closing this part of my subject that the magni-
ficent cedar of British Columbia will, no doubt, largely
take the place of white pine for joiner-work. The Douglas
fir will be a valuable substitute for our coarser woods,

when they become scarce and high in price. <A lumber- -

man’s life is not passed on a bed of roses, yet there is a
~ charm about it to those who have the stamina to endure
its hardships, and enjoy its excitements, that is not easily
forgotten. Who, that has followed it. can forget the log
drive from early morn to sun-down, kedging across the
lake to the tune of the chanteur, or breaking the jam in
the roaring cascade, whose noise is drowned by the yells
and shouts of the crew on seeing the great mass move off,
each great log as it were, trying to get ahead of its
neighbor, until they reach still water. What excitement
after the risk run and efforts made! Old lumbermen can
and do look back to such scenes with much pride. What
other business has so many contingencies connected with

ee ee

y Soe 1
ae Ts *

ae: iss rie on
aes Recent Cainidion Unionide, 365

Bis, apart ror the ordinary mishaps in trade 2 -aeind bee

too much snow, other times too little. On other occasions
the ice or the floods carry away his booms and scatter the

— logs, to be often stolen by land pirates, who will secrete his

property, and annoy him in trying to find it.

As to the utility of the forest, though it may not attract
the rain or influence its downfall, there can be no doubt
as to its regulating the flowing of the waters by holding
them back in the glades and swamps, sheltering the land
from the fierce rays of the sun, preventing rapid evapora-
tion to a great extent, and thus preventing oftentimes
damaging floods and dried up streams. For the reasons
advanced, does it not behoove us to use our influence to
bring about such legislation as will have the effect of
preserving and protecting our forests, on which so much
depends ?

ADDITIONAL NOTES ON RECENT CANADIAN
UNIONID &.
By J. F. WHITEAVEs.

Unto CANADENSIS, Lea.

In a letter to the writer, dated June 18th, 1895, Mr.
Simpson says, “I think there can be little doubt, from
examining the type of U. Canadensis, that it 1s a some-
what injured specimen of the oe of U. ventricosus,
Barnes.

Mr. Bryant Walker, of Detroit, informs the writer that
he has, in his cabinet, specimens of each of the following
species, from the Detroit River :

MARGARITANA HILDRETHIANA, Lea.
Main channel of the Detroit River off Belle Isle,
collected by the Michigan Fish Commission in 1895.

366 Canadian Record of Science.

Unio Lereu, Lea.

Detroit River, at the upper end of Fighting Teta
collected by Mr. Walker in 1873 or 1874, and identified .
by the late Dr. James Lewis.

UNIO MULTIRADIATUS, Lea.

Same locality, collector and date as for the preceding
species ; also, Thames River, Ontario, from the collection
of the late Dr. George A. Lathrop.

Unio sutcatus, Lea. (=U. perplexus, var. perobliquus,
Conrad. Types from Detroit River, and Wabash R.,
Indiana. )

Collected by Mr. Wallen a in the Detroit River at the
upper end of Fighting Island, in 1873 or 1874; at the
upper end of Belle Isle in 1894; and in the same river,
at the locality first mentioned, by the Michigan Fish
Commission, in 1895.

UNIO VERRUCOSUs, Barnes.

Main channel of the Detroit River off Belle Isle,
collected by the Michigan Fish Commission in 1895, and
Detroit River opposite Grassy Island, collected by Mr.
Walker in 1895.

Mr. Walker also states that he has, in his collection,
twenty-six species of Unionide from the Detroit River
and Lake St. Clair, viz., Anodonta Benedict, A. Footiana,
A. fragilis and A. subcylindracea ; Margaritana deltoidea,
M. Hildrethiana, M. marginata, and M. rugosa; Unio
alatus, U. circulus, U. coccin-us, U. ellipsis, U. gibbosus, U.
gracilis, U. Leibiit, U. luteolus. U. multiradiatus, U. nasutus,
U. Novi-Eboraci, U. phaseolus, U. pressus, U. Rangtanus,
U. rectus, U. trianqularis, U. ventricosus and U. verrucosus.

Ottawa, July 9th, 1895.

a ee a

“a

tev a. fis) ob
ee Sais g
(0

: im of ke sa hy Pe. ee ia te.
ee * Geaton, Morgs Us Sabot
ie x a (ee

% . \ ’ he
ao 7 \ . ; 4 om ay

7 ’

OBITUARY. bs fis
4 a ~ GasTon, MARQUIS DE SAPoRTA. Ca nS

‘ tr ele
fe ~ The Marquis de Saporta was born J uly 28th, 1823, and “y A
died, at the ‘age of 72 years, on January 26th of the
present year, at his residence in Aix-en-Provence. ott
Since the appearance of his first paper on the Fossil Za
Plants of Provence, in 1860, he has been a prominent _ | im
— _ paleeobotanist, and yields to few cultivators of that science te
in the number, variety and importance of his memoirs and 3
larger works. His largest and most important work is | ‘
P. that on the Mesozoic Flora of France, to which he added uf
only last year a valuable report on the Mesozoic Plants of Tes

Portugal. A summary of this last work, in connection aa
more particularly with its bearing on the paleobotany of
North America, from the pen of Prof. Lester F. Ward, a
fellow laborer in the United States, has lately appeared in
Science, and perhaps with the exception of those of his
great rival, Heer of Zurich, who passed away before him,
no European works on the botany of the Mesozoic Period
are more frequently referred to than those of Saporta.
Though a specialist on the floras of the later geological
periods, he could enter with enthusiasm into the whole
history of the vegetable kingdom, in a manner at once
elaborate, careful and attractive to general readers, and
with an enlightened grasp of the succession of plants in
time, and of their relations to the various changes of cs?
: climate and geography in the different periods. This is
remarkable in his popular work, “ Le Monde des Plantes,”
which goes over the whole field of geological botany, is
written in a clear and vivid style, and illustrated with
geological maps and very clever restorations of the forests
of different periods,
His memoirs also cover a wide geographical range, as
specimens from many regions were submitted to him, and

368 Canadian Record of Science.

he was always ready, in the kindest and most genial
spirit, to give the benefit of his advice and information to
his fellow laborers in every part of the world. His work
was characterized by much discrimination and care, and
by a judicious attention to the geological horizons; but,
like many other paleobotanists, he was occasionally
carried away by his enthusiasm so as to recognize as
plants mere imitative markings. This was especially the
case in the controversies in which he took part respecting
the nature of certain markings on rocks whose algal nature
had been maintained by Delgado and others, while to
Northorst and to paleontologists generally who were
familiar with the tracks of animals and the imitative
tracings on the surfaces of aqueous deposits, they were of
animal or of inorganic origin.

In conjunction with Professor Marion, Saporta published
a work on the Evolution of Plants, which forms three
volumes of the French International Library of Science.
It abounds with curious information of a very suggestive
character, but was perhaps too ambitious in the present
state of knowledge. This the authors frankly admit,
stating in conclusion that they can but poimt out some
landmarks to their successors, “who may decipher the
inscriptions of which we can but spell out some letters.”

But though an evolutionist, Saporta was by no means
an agnostic. He saw in the grand succession of vegetable
forms a great and profound design, related to the organic
world and its mutations on the one hand and to the
animal kingdom on the other. He sums up this conclu-
sion in his “Monde de Plantes” in the following words,
which may serve as an example of his style and of his
habit of thought in the wider problems of his science :—

“Mais, si l’on remonte de phénomene en phénomene
plus haut que les apparances mobiles et contingentes, il
semble que l’on aboutisse forcément a quelque chose
d’entier, dimmuable et de supérieur, qui serait l’expression

has x J
wa ink

ws Sims | Arnal na ial ene ity 369

a. ~ prenire et la raison e’étre absolu de toute existence, en
qui se résumerait la diversité dans l’unit¢, eternel probleme |
que le science ne saurait resoudre, mais qui se pose de
lu-méme devant la conscience humaine. La serait la
vraie source de lidéal religieux ; de cette pensée se déga-
gerait d'une fagon lumineuse, cette conception de notre |
Ame a laquelle nous appliquons instinctivement le nom
de Dieu.

Saporta was correspondent de l'Institut de France, a
Foreign Member of the Geological society of London, an
Associate Fellow of the American Academy of Sciences,
and an Honorary or Corresponding Member of many other

societies on both sides of the Atlantic.
J. W. Dawson

ANNUAL PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.
NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL.

By Pror. WrEsLEY Mitts, M.A., M.D., Erc.

When, owing to your kindness and continued confidence,
you placed me in office for a second term, with all the
duties and responsibilities which are associated with this
honorable position, I trust you did not expect another
presidential address from me on resigning as I now do
in favor of some other member who may be thought
worthy to occupy this place of greatest responsibility, it
not of highest honor in the Society. . It is not my,inten-
tion to do more than make a few remarks on this occasion,
and after merely referring to the salient features of the
Society’s work this year, I shall confine what I have to
say pretty much to one thought: The spirit of the
naturalist.

You will gather from the various reports presented this
evening the state of our affairs, and the lines along which
progress, obvious to everyone, has been made, such as the

\

70 Canadian Record of Scrence.

ew)

Improvement in the large hall, the additions to the library,
and the desirable advance made in binding and arranging
many valuable publications.

We have, like other societies and individuals, suffered
from the financial depression so prevalent, but I cannot
allow. the occasion to pass without referring to the suc-
cesstul efforts of one of our members, Myr. J. 8S. Shearer, to
collect money from friends to support the RECORD OF
SCIENCE, which continues to be the vehicle of much
valuable original publication, and in this way still main-
tains, at home and abroad, the reputation which it long
ago acquired, of being a reliable and valuable source of
reference for Canadian Science.

It will require strenuous exertion to preserve the
reputation it has acquired ; but if the Society can do this
it will accomplish much.

The course of Somerville lectures, based on the Re-
sources of Canada, as viewed by the Naturalist, was in able
hands, and we are deeply indebted to all those who took
part, and particularly to those specialists who came from
a distance and gave their services gratuitously.

If it were possible for the Society to publish these
lectures from year to year in a collective form, both the
public and the Society itself would be the gainers.

The regular meetings of the Society have been better
attended, perhaps, than in any previous year.

The affihation brought about between various societies
with kindred aims last year and in operation this year, has
so far worked well, though there is room for a more vital
cennection than as yet seems to exist.

Turning from these details allow me a few moments to
develop a thought which does not concern our Association
alone, but human beings everywhere.

What is the spirit of the naturalist ? Wherein does he
differ from other men? Do these differences elevate him
or the reverse ?

¢

the truth for truth’s sake. To all this is the one—the —

‘ = oy ot o¥ ites
. . , i ts as Pat 3
vices a A ona

Peony tan ' Presi tential Aided

., <i"

ie ‘Between all ‘scientists there is a close bond. All seek

~ only finality. Everything else is subordinate at the best.

J
a

But the naturalist, in the sense that has attached to

the word for centuries, is more closely allied to the poet

_ and the artist than is commonly supposed. A poet or an

artist who finds no delight in nature is not genuine—

he does not deserve the name.

Those poets who have most readily found access to the
hearts of men in all ages have been naturalists—not, it
may be, technically, but really. Those who have delighted

in mountain, wood, river, sky, insect, bird, the workings of.

the wondrous soul of man—these are the real naturalists.
Now, may a man not work on all these in a dry and
formal way, getting results of a certain value, but without
the spirit of the naturalist ? And may not a man _ of
limited opportunities observe with the acuteness of ken
and the glow of feeling that is the very soul of the soul of
the poet or the painter ?

Landseer portrayed animals well because with the tech-
nical skill and the talent for form and color he united the
sympathetic love of his fellows lower in the scale of being.

The naturalist is a man of truth through and through.
He is equally a being of simplicity of nature. Questions
of rank and precedence and power among his fellows
trouble him not. The “boss” is as. far from the
naturalist in spirit as can well be conceived. Men of the
latter type cannot be made into naturalists by the bestow-
ment of ordinary or honorary memberships in societies, or
by any offices they may attempt to fill. It is not given to
them to see the beauties in nature that fascinate or to feel
the pulses that thrill. He who would be a naturalist in
spirit must, like he who would enter into the Kingdom of
Heaven, become as a little child.

Indeed, between the qualities of the true Christian, the
real gentleman in heart and the naturalist there is much

372 Canadian Record of Sevence.

in common as well as with the poet and the artist. But
I must not dwell further on these thoughts.

Last year I expressed my belief that our greatest need
was the addition to our ranks of young and enthusiastic
workers. That and a more abounding spirit of the kind
I have been referring to seem to me still our greatest
needs. |

Why do not more candidates of this type come knocking
at our doors? Why do not our schools and colleges pro-
duce such people? Is our education the great success
many would have us beheve? If education generates
little or none of this spirit but simply produces a type of
men and women better able to succeed in the commercial
and social race—that and nothing more—is it a success ?
I leave these questions with you to answer. My own
reply you will readily divine.

During the past two years I have not found my office
a sinecure, but your kind co-operation, with our valued
Superintendent’s knowledge, energy, tact and courtesy,
have made the duties that have fallen to me as lght as
possible. Mr. Griffin has on all occasions assisted me in
the most efficient, cheerful and courteous way. To him
and to all who have smoothed my path I am grateful.

Fretp Day to PHILIPSBURG.

The annual field day of the Natural History Society is
looked upon as being the picnic of the year and, with fine
weather, it was little wonder that some 300 or so of
Montreal’s representative people boarded the cars at
Windsor station en route for Philipsburg. Among those
noticed were the following: Mr. and Mrs. 8. Finley and
family, Mr. and Mrs. Walter Drake, Mr. and Mrs. R. A.
E. Greenshields, Mr. and Mrs. John §S. Shuter, Mr. and
Mrs. J. H. R. Molson, Mr. and Mrs. 8. H. Ewing, Mr. and

a i —s

sti in, eae
: : cet ae

; ae "7, es i ie

oe ~~ ; ‘ I
Dak y(t : We ‘4 ba, ; L | 15 tes
oe Mr: My. | Field Day to Pigs 373 . oe :
Mrs. Albert and Miss Holden, the Misses Radford, Master ‘

' si or’

and Miss Holden, J. Donald Morrison, Mr. Matthew

Hutchison and party, J. F. Whiteaves, F.R.G.S., Ottawa ;
Z Mr. Malcolm Morison, Mr. C. F. Williams, Mr. and Mrs.
FE. W. Richards, Mr. and Mrs. David Robertson, Dr. Da-
vidson, A. F. C. Ross, Mrs. P. S. Ross, Mr. $8. Campbell,
Mr. and Mrs. Jos. Fortier, Mr. Robert Law, Miss Law,
Miss Ella Law, Mr. EK. T. Chambers, Mr. and Mrs. George
Boulter, Rev. Dr. Warden, Mrs. Warden, Miss Ida Sumner,
Miss Grace Sumner, Master Arthur Sumner, Mr. A. E.
Holden, Miss Hill, Mr. Perey Molson, Miss Mabel Molson,
the Misses Harrington, Dr. Ker, Mr. and Mrs. John §.
Shearer, Miss Marion Shearer, Miss Murray, Rev. Dr. and
Mrs. Campbell, Mr. and Mrs. James Slessor, Dr. Stirling,
Dr. Deeks, Dr. A. A. Robertson, Mr, W. F. Egg, ase
Master George Egg, Mr. and Mrs. Vennor, Dr. and Mrs.
Lovejoy, Mrs. Edgar Judge, Mr. Geo. Sumner and family,
Mr. 8. W. Ewing, My. and Mrs. F. H. Hart, Mr. J. Steven-
son Brown, Miss Louise Brown, Miss Emily Brown, Master
F. C. Brown, Mrs. Saxe, Mr. Percy C. Ryan, Mrs. J. C.
McArthur, Mrs. Pennington, Mr. and Mrs. R. Harvey,
Mrs. J. B. Goode, Mr. and Mrs. 8. C. Stevenson, Dr. Baker
Edwards, Miss Edwards, Mr. Brissette, Mrs. C. 8. J.
Phillips, Mr. C. E. H. Phillips, Miss Phillips, Master Allan
Phillips, Mr. and Mrs. Albert Ross, Mr. William Reid,
Howard T. Barnes, Lachlan Gibb, Master Charles Waterous,
Mrs. John Scott, and daughters, Prof. J. B. Williams, Miss
Dora Warrington, Miss Lilian Gault, Mr. Arnold Finley,
Mr. Wait, Miss Lovejoy, Dr. Burgess, Mr. H. H. Lyman,
Dr. Stirling, Miss Ida Boulter, Master George Ewing, Mr.
and Mrs. Farquhar Robertson, Mrs. John Gibb, the Misses
Hodge, Mrs. Pennington, Mr. W. A. Oswald. The officials
of the Philipsburg Junction Railway present were: Messrs.
Wells, Manager, and Henry Timmis, Secretary. A large
contingent from the Montreal Camera Club and the
Montreal Agassiz Society were also present.

>

374 Canadian Record of Scrence.

"After a most enjoyable train ride through the prettiest
part of the eastern townships the destination of the party,
Philipsburg, was reached about 11.50.

Here the party were met by Major E. L. Bond, who has
his handsome summer residence on the shores of the bay.

In a brief but explicit and interesting address Major
Bond welcomed the visitors, this pleasant duty devolving
upon him in the absence of the Mayor, by virtue of his
position as President of the Philipsburg Junction Railway
Co. The principal spots of historic interest were described,
including the old Methodist Church, the first built in the
Eastern Townships, and directions were given to the
various sections of the Society as to the most suitable
places for the pursuit of the particular hobbies. After
the various competition conditions had been announced
by the Rey. Dr. Campbell, the party dispersed, to amuse
themselves, each in their own particular way.

The botanical section went off in charge of Mr. H. B.
Cushing, while Dr. Deeks took charge of the geologists.

All too soon came the end of the day’s pleasure and
scientific research, and the hoarse whistle of the locomo-
tive was heard summoning the wanderers back to the
train. Assembled here, a most imteresting address was
given by Mr. J. F. Whiteaves, a member of the Royal
Geological Society, descriptive of the formation, strata,
ete., of Philipsburg and the adjacent country. At the
conclusion of this, three cheers for Major Bond were
called for and heartily rendered, after which the train was
boarded for the return journey.

The collections made during the day were adjudicated
upon by the following judges :—

Geological section—Mr. J. F. Whiteaves, F.R.G.S., and
Dr. Deeks.

Botanical section—Dr. Burgess, of Verdun, and Mr. H.
B. Cushing, of MeGull. ,

Entomological section—Mr. H. H. Lyman.

v
7

' The results were Peaonnead as iellowe —

- Botanical section—First prize, Mr. John Saxe, aa 76 z:
Di Pravicd varieties. In the unnamed class, Miss M. E. Baylis eh

es awarded first prize for a collection of 94 specimens, ei 2
while Miss F. E. Cushing with 73 specimens received a Y.
honorable mention. a ce

Geological section—In this section Miss Ethel Radford, . ae

_ B.A, was awarded the prize, with a collection of some 40 Ra

specimens. i
| Entomological section—In this section there were no t
collections, consequently no prize was awarded, speaking | ie
well for the comparative immunity of Philipsburg from eed
beetles and “ other creeping things.” zi
a Mr. H. B. Cushing has furnished a memorandum of the x
plants collected during the day, and Dr. Deeks has kindly Se
__ subjoined a list of the fossils for which the prize was re
4 awarded.

LIST OF PLANTS COLLECTED AT PHILIPSBURG, QUE.

June 1st, 1895.

Anemone Virginiana, L.; Hepatica acutiloba, DC. (past
flowering); Ranunculus abortivus, L.; Ranunculus recur-
vatus, Poir; Caltha palustris, L.; Aquilegia Canadensis,
L.; Actzea alba, Bigel; Chelidonium mayjus, L.; Dicentra '
Canadensis, DC. (past flowering) ; Capsella bursa-pastoris,
| Meench.; Viola palmata, L. var. cucullata, Gray ; Viola
4 blanda, Willd; Viola Canadensis, L.; Stellaria media,
| Smith; Malva rotundifolia, L.; Tilia Americana, L. ;
Geranium Robertianum, L.; Oxalis corniculata, L. var.
stricta, Sav.; Vitis cordifoha, Michx; Acer spicatum,
Lam.; Acer saccharinum, Wang (in fruit); Trifolium
pratense, L.; Trifolium hybridum, L. ; Medicago lupulina,
L.; Robinia Pseudacacia, L.; Rubus strigosus, Mix. ;
Fragaria vesca, L.; Rosa Blanda, Ait.; Rosa rubiginosa,
L. (not in flower); Tiarella cordifolia, L.; Mitella diphylla,

376 Canadian Record of Science. |

L.; hibes Cynosbati, L. (in fruit); Osmorrhiza brevistylis,
DC.; Osmorrhiza longistylis, DC.; Viburnum Lentago,
L.; Antennaria plantaginifoha, Hook.; Chrysanthemum
leucanthemum, L.; Taraxacum officinale, Weber ; Hydro-
phyllum Virginicum, L.; Cynoglossum officinale, L. ;
Lithospermum officinale, L.; Veronica serpyllfolia, L. ;
Nepeta Glechoma, Benth. ; Rumex acetosella, L.; Asarum
Canadense, L.; Thuya occidentalis, L. ; Orchis spectabilis,
L.; Ins versicolor, L.; Sisyrinchium angustifolium, Mill;
ne ee Cavadenaet Desf. ; Trilhum grandiflorum,
Salish, (past flowering) ; Arisaema triphyllum, Torr. ;
Eleocharis tenuis, Schultes; Carex intumescens, Rudge ;
Carex hystricina, Muhl.; Carex arctata, Boott; Carex
eracilima, Schwein ; Carex .pallescens, L.; Carex Hitch-
cockiana, Dewey ;* Carex laxiflora, Lam.; Carex aurea,
Nutt.; Carex varia, Muhl; Carex stipata, Muhl; Carex
rosea, Schkuhr; Carex cephalophora, Muhl; Carex
Deweyana, Schwein; Poa annua, L.; Poa pratensis, L. ;
Equisetum arvense, L.; Equisetum sylvaticum, L. ; Poly-
podium vulgare, L.; Adiantum pedatum, L. ; Camptosorus
rhizophyllus, Link; Aspidium marginale, Swartz; Cys-
topteris bulbifera, Bernh ; Onoclea sensibilis, L. ; Onoclea
struthiopteris, Hoffmann; Osmunda_ regalis; Osmunda
cinnamomea ; Botrychium Virginianum, Swartz.

FOSSILS.

The species collected belonged to the following genera :
Bathyurus, Bathymellus, [laenus, all fragmentary ; Or-
thoceras, Cystoceras, Lituites Pleurotomaria, Murchisonia,
Maclurea, Eccuhomphalus, Ophileta, Orthis, Strophomena
and Camerella.

%

$ a
" 2 * oor .

REPORT OF CHAIRMAN OF COUNCIL OF THE NATURAL
History SocrETY OF MONTREAL, FOR THE YEAR
' ENDING 27TH May, 1895.

To the President and Officers of the Society :

The meeting this evening makes the seventh regular
monthly meeting of the Society for the present session, at
all of which very interesting papers have been contributed.

The Council has held nine ordinary and two special
meetings, all of which have been well attended.

The Annual Field Day was held at Labelle last year,
and although the weather was none too promising, the
attendance was larger than usual and the result satisfac-
tory to all concerned.

The Somerville Course of Lectures for the past winter
were upon “The Resources of Canada, as viewed by a
Naturalist,’ and proved of such great interest to those
able to attend, that a wish has been expressed that the
lectures should be published in pamphlet form; a most
desirable thing to do if we only had the funds at our dis-
posal. We hope the idea will not be lost sight of.

The conversazione which was in contemplation for last
winter had to be postponed.

The Government Grant which the Society formerly
received and spent in the publication of the Rkecorp or

SCIENCE, has not been forthcoming again this year,—never- '

theless, the RecorD OF SCIENCE is still being issued ; the
Society’s being able to continue this work is entirely due
to the efforts of Mr. John S. Shearer, who collected the
needed funds from the friends of the Society.

A number of repairs and improvements have been
made to the building and museum, including, the renovat-
ing and re-seating of the large lecture hall. This the
Society could not have done but for the efforts of Mr.
John §S. Shearer, who collected the required amount.

The attendance of visitors at the museum shows, on
28

378 Canadian Record of Science.

Saturdays 2,600, on evenings of Somerville course, 350,
and ordinary, 209, the Saturday attendance being double
that of previous years, but the ordinary visitors were
only half of other years, due largely to restricted American
travel.

Our President, Dr. Wesley Mills, has given much time
and labour to the work of the Society, and through his
efforts papers have never been wanting at the Society’s
meetings.

The whole respectfully submitted,

GEO. SUMNER,

! Chairman of Cowneil.
Montreal, May 21st, 1895.

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL.

REPORT OF THE Hon. CURATOR.

Gentlemen,—During the past season a number of
valuable donations have been made to the Society, duly
reported at the monthly meetings. and acknowledged.

Considerable work has been done at the Museum by
Mr. Winn, Mr. Williams and Mr. Dunlop, and the Super-
intendent, Mr. Griffin, has overhauled all the mammals,
clearing them of moths, but I would suggest that they be
re-arranged to show off to better advantage.

~The monkeys and marsupials have been cleaned and
renamed and placed in a case on the landing. The British
birds have been properly named and placed in two cases
on the landing. All the birds have been carefully
inspected, properly arranged and a large number renamed
on fresh labels. The reptiles have been sorted out,
cleaned and named on fresh labels, and placed in two
cases on the lower flat. This work was creditably done
by Mr. Wilhams.

ee ee ee
x

. ; ee wat
io 2 ars eats
OA hee > #,
ae 4 % 1 ‘
; Me PST

The Birds’ Eggs have been overhauled, and the collec-
tion was found to be in a dilapidated condition, but

Mr. Dunlop has endeavoured to clean them, and for the
present placed them in a cabinet in the Curator’s room,
I hope to have shortly a very large and valuable collection
of Birds’ Eggs donated to the Society.

The Insect Cabinet is being attended to by Mr. Winn,
and good progress has been made in arranging the collec-
tion of Insects.

Among the Birds, a number of specimens are badly
attacked by moths, requiring immediate attention, and
making it necessary to have a bath made, with proper
chemicals, to rid them of moths. Otherwise the whole
collection of mammals and birds -in the Museum will
gradually be destroyed. I have given a description of the
bath and chemicals required to the superintendent, and
they can be procured at a cost of about fifteen dollars.

No meetings of the Museum Committee have been
called, but I think it would be well to have such in the
future.

The number of visitors to the Museum on “free days ”
has more than doubled that of last year, showing a
gratifying and more lively interest taken in the Museum
by the public.

I regret that I could not give more time to the Museum,
although I have kept a general supervision over the work
done the past year; but there is a great deal of work yet
to be done in the preservation of the valuable specimens
in the Museum, and I would suggest that a proper
Museum catalogue should be made and printed for the
use of the Society, and to be sold to the public. I would
also suggest that somebody should be appointed Curator
who could give the greater part of his time in the interest
of the Museum.

Respectfully submitted,
Ernest D. WINTLE,
Montreal, May 27, 1895. Hon. Curator.

“Report of the Hon. Curator. 379.

4,

Py RS Oe UR ee ae Pe ee eee
wie x4 i bP A A

r
Or al

380 Canadian Record of Science,

NATURAL HISTORY SOcIETY oF MONTREAL,

IN ACCOUNT WITH 7
F. W. Ricnarps, Hon. Treas.
Dr.
To 145 Ordinary Members, Sub........ . $580 00
‘¢ "5 Associate i Me Pease tek 5 00
$585 00
Bet EWELNUBi A sant ehtin hore eee ee ee hee «5 Le 985 50
‘¢ Collected by Mr. Shearer for R. & S.......... 300 00
* Wield: Day heceipien sc: 3,1. are $454 50
GR Ee DIS DURSEMAGMDE: ce occ oho 356 15
CDE DEE VANES FS Suna ease et Sethe Rhy eects 97 35
‘¢ Tenants’ proportion of Renovations........... 72 62
«< Batrance Mees teeMunseum . 235.052... os. eee 12 95
“interest Merchants: bank. .us...0-fen.s >. apy: 6 87
c“'"Casnwor Gold Dencnes! 2S. 0 Sect ec. 6 Be ees 6 00
Se Donation xis Dougall s.-kee cuss a les. ie i ae 3 00
“One sub. to RECORD OF SCIENCE... .4°.0f0...%).+ 3 00
—— $2,072 29
Cr:
By Superintendent’s Salary............- $456 00
% 3 Commniission. ... ..":; 48 50
$504 50
ST ROORD Gh SORENORK! = ond Anutalyued soe foes a 2 ate 375 84
‘« Repairs, Reseating and Renovations.......... 333 64
ESOP WO of) a Seacrest tes Po ETD, aC DS 191 90
POM US Ir te cos Shot eat. Cte csi ye Ge, ete 128 332
BNC. Ne emake eee MUA Abo p tS 8 SMe Meee Bt 33 95 ;
‘¢ Sundry Expenses...... . Sailsy eae ee ed ibaa 180 07
£9 ee tinred, 2 0te seta +... Walt enh ee ete ce ota 58 70 |
et MMB TIM he Heiatr a Ab yin A kas RE, Romain ahaa 87 80 |
POLO AS TH CmVeMUL tas tie hoa s Coen oR biped 1 Wh ea
$2,072 29

F. W. RicHARDSs,
Treasurer.

Audited and found correct,

A. HOLDEN os
JouHNn S. SHEARER. } Auditors.

May 21st, 1895.

Oe Be ——— —l er

<e
<i

‘7

ii Bs ll

RepoRT OF THE LIBRARY COMMITTEE.

-. The Library Committee have little to report at the

present meeting. Much time has been taken up in
collecting together the parts of the various volumes of
exchanges which have for some time been accumulating
in the library. These have been arranged and put into

the hands of the binder to the number of 248 volumes,

the Council having voted $150 for binding. These books,
it is expected, will be placed on the Library shelves before
the next meeting of the Society. Many valuable works
which were lying about in the closets under the library
eases will be found among them, as also useful works in
the French and German languages. Your Committee
have also obtained in exchange for duplicates, by permis-
sion of the Council, twelve volumes of Popular Science
Monthly, of recent date. The exchanges for the REcorpD
OF SCIENCE have been duly acknowledged and recorded.

The donations to the Library received during the year
are as follows :—

Donors.
Sir J. W. Dawson: “The Canadian Ice Age,”
“Life of Peter Redpath,”
— “Notes on Genus Naiadites.”
Dr. G. Dawson : “Presidential Address to the Royal
Society of Canada.”
MeMillan & Co.,N.Y. “ Ampleoxus and the Ancestry of the
Vertebrates.” ;
“From the Greeks to Darwin.”
E. D. Wintle : “ Birdnesting.”

tespectfully submitted,

E. T. CHAMBERS,
Hon. Librarian.

382 Cananian Record of Science..

VEPORT OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SocrETY OF MONTREAL,
FOR 1895, TO THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA.

The Natural History Society of Montreal has, this year
again, availed itself of the privilege of sending a delegate
to represent it at the annual meeting of the Royal Society
of Canada.

The work of the Society has been carried on during the
present year in an efficient manner, and it is a eause of
satisfaction to be able to state that there has been an
increased attendance at the monthly and other meetings
of the Society, showing that the members appreciate the
importance of its work.

The Museum is now being thoroughly overhauled and
all the specimens are being renamed. During the present
year a larger number than usual of donations from friends
of the Society have been made, including one from the
Council of Arts, through the Secretary, Mr. 8S. C. Steven-
son, Showing that the public as well as the members have an
interest in the work of the Society. It is also pleasing to
note that the attendance, during the present year, of out-
siders at the Museum on Saturdays, on which days the
Museum is free to the public, has been nearly double that
of previous years.

The Society is fully impressed with the desirability of con-
tinuing the publication of the CANADIAN RECORD OF SCIENCE,
and has made arrangements to do so. It has appropriated
from its funds an annual sum of $200, and it hopes in the
future, as it has done this year, to replace the annual
grant of $400, which the Government has discontinued,
by the subscriptions of the generous patrons of science to
be found in Montreal. It may be mentioned that the
circulation of the REcorpD has increased, and that in view
of this fact and of the value of the work, the Society is
firmly determined, even at the cost of a heavy inroad on
its finances, to continue its quarterly publication.

——_—— =

ee ee ee ee

— a ae

Report of Natural History Society to Royal Society. 383

The project of the affiliation with it of other kindred
associations is still engaging the attention of the Society.
Besides the increase to its membership from the members
of the affiliated societies who have become associate
members, there has also been an increase this year on the
roll of ordinary members.

The Annual Field Day last year took place on the 2nd
June, and was largely attended. The excursion was on
the Montreal and Western Railway to the village of Sault
aux Iroquois, now called Labelle in honor of the great
colonizing priest of that name, where the excursionists
were most cordially received, and while the excursion
afforded both enjoyment and an opportunity for research
to the members and their friends, it also realized a profit
which was an acceptable addition to the funds of the
Society. This year, the excursion on the annual field day
will be to Phillipsburg, on Missisquoi Bay.

Re ye aR re Nes ern eS
Ps ' 7 se x 3 - . »' M * . 4 ‘ . “

“Se
4 4

The following papers were read and discussed at the

Monthly Meetings of the Society :—

Oct. 29th.—* Bivalve Shells in the Coal Formation, and
what they teach,’ by Sir Wm. Dawson, LL.D., F.RS. ;

“The Effects of Great Pressure on Rock Structure,” by
Prof. F. D. Adams, M.A., Se., Ph.D.

Noy. 26th.—* The Mechanism of the Horse’s Foot and
its management, from a Humane Standpoint,” by Prof.
D. McEachran, F.R.C.V.S., Eng. ; “The Psychic Develop-
ment of Young Animals, and its Physical Correlation,”
by Prof. Wesley Mills, M.A., M.D.

Jan. 28th.—* Meteorites and what they Signify,” by
Prof. B. J. Harrington, B.A., Ph.D.; “ Unusual occurrence
ofthe Razor-Billed Auk at Montreal, Remarkable Flight
of Certain Birds from the Atlantic Coast up the St.
Lawrence to the Great Lakes,” by EK. D. Wintle, Esq.

Feb. 25.—* Dimorphism and Polymorphism in Butter-

flies,” by H. H. Lyman, M.A.; “ Additional. Remarks on

384 Canadian Record of Science.

the Flora of the Island of Montreal,” by Rev. R. Camp-
bell, D.D.

March 25th.—* Ancient Engineering,’ by Prof. J. T.
Nicholson, B.Sc.

April 29th.—* Canada’s Timber Resources and Lumber
Industry, with some Reminiscences of those Connected
with the Trade,” by the Hon. J. K, Ward.

On the last mentioned date, Mr. J. B. Williams was to
have read a paper on “ Birds: What are they ? Where
are they ? and whence are they ?” but time did not allow
it to be done; he will, however, favor the Society by
reading it at the next Monthly Meeting.

The course of the Somerville lectures this year was on
“The Resources of Canada, as viewed by a Naturalist.”
The lectures were delivered on the Thursdays from the
7th February to the 21st March, inclusively; they were
free to the public and were well attended. The Museum
was open to the public for one hour previously to each
lecture.

The lectures were as follows :

1.—*“ The General Geographical Relations of Canada,”
by Sir J. W. Dawson, LL.D., F.B-S.

2.—<The Useful Minerals of Canada,” by Captain R. C.
Adams.

3.— ‘Some of the Agricultural Products of Canada,” by
Prof. Wm. Saunders, Director of Dominion Experimental
Farms.

4.—* Wheat, and Canada’s Relation to the Wheat Supply
of the World,” by Edgar Judge, Esq.

5.—< The Remedy for the Searcity of Wood in the Old
Settlements, and the Care of Growing Trees,” by the Hon.
H. G. Joly de Lotbiniere.

6.—“ Our Native Mammals of Economic Value,” by Dr.
tobert Bell, of the Geological Survey.

7.—< Canada’s Fish and Fisheries,” by Prof. HE. E.
Prince, of the Department of Fisheries, ete. |

ee ee ee eee

Report of ming and Kachange Committee. 385

The gentlemen whose names now follow are the present
officers and members of the Council of the Society :—

Patron: His Excellency Lord Aberdeen.

Honorary President: Sir J. William Dawson, C.H.G.,
LiD., FR.S. AFR.

President : Dr. T. Wesley Mills.

First Vice-President : John S. Shearer.

Vice-Presidents: Hon. Edward Murphy, J. H. R.
Molson, Sir Donald A. Smith, Dr. B. J. Harrington, Rev.
Dr. R. Campbell, George Suniner, Kdgar Judge, J. H.
Joseph, Mr. Justice Wurtele.

Recording Secretary : R. W. McLachlan.

Corresponding Secretary: Dr. J. W. Stirling.

Treasurer: F, W. Richards.

Curator: E. D. Wintle.

Members of Council: Frank D. Adams, Albert Holden,
L. A. H. Latour, N. N. Evans, James Gardner, Joseph
Fortier, Hon. J. K. Ward, A. F. Winn, J. Stevenson
Brown.

Chairman of Couneil : George Sumner.

Superintendent : Alfred Griffin.

Before concluding, the Society offers its thanks to the
Royal Society for the volumes containing its proceedings
and papers.

(Signed) J. WuRTELE, D.C.L.,

| Delegate.
Montreal, 13th May, 1895.

REPORT OF EDITING AND EXCHANGE COMMITTEE.

The four issues of the “ Record of Science” for the
year were got out in good time, and were of a fair average
as to the quality of their contents. The ““ Record” con-
tinues to command the attention of scientists in all parts

386 Canadian Record of Scrence.

of the world, as the exchanges received for it indicate.
These exchanges are of great value, and constitute in
themselves a very important addition annually to our
Library. The Committee feel much indebted to Mr.
Shearer for his successful efforts in raising the funds
necessary for carrying on the publication, since the
Legislative grant was withdrawn. Of course, if larger
means were at their disposal, they could add greatly to
the value of the “ Record,’ by more numerous and costly -
illustrations, than the funds at present at command admit
of; but they are striving to do the best they can under
the circumstances, and they hope to continue to justify,
by the variety and excellence of the contents of the
“Record,” the liberality of the members of the Society in
furnishing the extra amount required for its maintenance.

Respectfully submitted, on behalf of the Committee, in
the absence of the Editor, Dr. F. D. Adams, by

ROBERT CAMPBELL,
Acting Editor.

BAROMETER.

Sky CLouDKD

WIND In Tentus.
Dew
point. Mean = :
General jyelocity] = | %
direction. jin mile} © | 5
perhour} = | ~
33-0 S.W: 12.5 10.0 | 10
4-7 S.W. 14-5 5-8 | 10
eooe Reis S.W. 19.7 Amie! =.
93-7 22 N, 20 3 8.3 | 10] oO
85.3 5 0 S.W. 23.8 2.3 | 9) @
89.3 14:5 S.W. 14.4 2.2]10}) o
83.0 22.3 Ss. 10.8 5.8 | 10| 0
88.7 30.2 S.W, 40 2.3 ral)
84.3 21.2 S.W. 17.4 5.7 | 10s) ae
Preis sivas S.W. 16.6 Sed ts sett a
73-7 4.2 S.W. 6.0 0.0 | of] oO
82.5 10.7 N.E, 2.4 32|10| o
84.8 25.5 S.E, 8.3 9-8] 10] 9
82.8 Tz Ww, 26.5 5.7 | 10 °
78.3 5-0 Ww. 14.3 [| 3°5 | 10] ©
79.8 12.7 Ww. 14.3 4-7 | x0'|
79-3 11.0 Ww, 35-2 8.3 10 | ©
80.2 19.5 We 25-5 2.0} 10] 0
76.3 14.5 N.W. 6.5 0.7| 2] 0
82.0 18.3 Ww. 10 8 6.3 | 10 |e
86.2 28.5 N. 7-4 4-7 | 10} oO
81.7 28 0 S.W. L.3 0.0 | 9} oO
38g ar Se 19.0 Stet, |lpesees a
92.7 33 7 S.W. 21.0 7.8] 10] ©
90.2 28.5 S.W. 21.0 7-7 | 10] ©
85.5 23.8 S.W. 18.1 6.7 | 10] ©
87 3 27.0 N.W. 17.9 88}]10}] 3
83.7 22.0 N.W. 16.4 8.5 | 10} ©
74:7 16.5 N._W. 18.2 0.0 | fo! oO
ee ena Siw. 16.8 (BC. en | Ol ae
84.0 13.2 |S. 674° W.| 16.1 | 5.1 | 8.31.0
75.9 Cie ba weer ee 6.0

= =
ores ee
n= = aS a=]
gf¢2| af | ae | es DAY.
Hoe 5S = Ee aD
ete a of sf
Fe = Ba |S
oe =
xs G.04 O.r 0.05 I
54 erates Inap, | Inap 2
le) Inap, | Imap.| 3... .....-. SUNDAY
i) 4.2 | 0-42 4
96 OVI 0.01 5
95 ease o.1 0.04 6
40 a P oc Shoo 7
Bg Bec Inap, | Inap.| 8
69 : Inap, | Inap.| 9
84
steia oAe KO\ cn Mean .~+- SUNDAY
89 “% CD II
78 mare ei se oe
09 0.0) 0.09 13
63 0.11 o1 | 14
73 ee : 15
73 ada ano wieleis 16
74 Lae WOON, | Lie. eretis saya Sunva\s
090 ° 4 0.04 | 15
gt ae wee 19
96 20
87 . 21
5° 22
97 ; 23
es ate 0.2 | 0.02 | 24 ..-.---.. SUNDAY
2r oO 21 Say 0.21 25
10 Inap, | Inap, | 26
56 0.2 0.02 27
26 0.2 0.02 28
83../ Es 29
98 ren ete 30
94 meaty a BX lessens iat SUNDAY
59-9 | 0.45 5.6 t.or {Sums .....
21 Years means for
147-2 | 0.94 22.8 | 3.2% }and including this
month,

THERMOMETER.
DAY.
Mean.| Max. | Min. |,Range.}| Mean. Max. Min. Range
t | 34.78 | 39.9 | 23.0 | 16.9 | 29.4457] 29-544 29. 401 .143 | .21903
2 8.38 | 23.1 60 17.1 29.8573 | 29-9t1 29.783 128 0537
SUNDAV iets ated waist |let29.0 5.0 24.0) fl Bewax rn Be se weeeee sane seeee
4 0.42 9-9 |-— 6.0 15.9 29.9115 | 30.194 29.611 583 0.
5 8.52 r5i.3 1.7 13.6 30.0783 | 30 236 29.858 +378 .0543
6 17.23 | 26.5 9.0 17.5 30.2952 30.362 30.251 «III 0858
7) 26.5641) ‘a5.2 12 6 22.6 30.0245 | 30.244 29 .809 -435 | .1230
8 33-17] 39.0 27.0 12.0 29.6312 | 29.799 29.477 +313 11683
9 25.02 | 33-7 19.5 14.2 29.5447 | 29.636 29.462 -174 _ 1138
SUNDAY.... .. Io spredl Sky 11.5 1552" |] eee oes (ies oo. | Bee
tr 11.12 17.6 |—o0.2 17.8 30.3672 30.314 30 211 103 | .0533
12 14.87 | 24.8 5-0 19.8 30.1653 | 30 230 30 O91 +139 0738
13 | 29-37! 38.6 18.0 20.6 29.9632 30 107 29.803 -304 +1443
14 | 15.52 36.5 4.8 31-7 30 0985 | 30.266 29.807 -459 0845
15 10.33 16.2 2.0 14.2 30.0045 | 30.184 29 799 +385 .0550
16 17.58 | 25 8 11.8 14.0 29.6942 | 29.773 29.611 162 0775
SUNDAY ec. cu 17 eeeee 30.2 11,2 Paewrewe | | aescoon Soeo0 oat) WROAnG 5 “i Bins
18 16.30 | 25.1 4-2 20.9 29.5702 ; 29.627 20-474 153 .0763
19 | 24.35 30.3 16.8 135 29.8547 | 30.018 29 702 316 1065
20] 20.78] 25.9 I5 2 10.7 30.0795 30.110 30.062 048 0853
2%, |= 22583) ||\"229.3 14.2 15.1 30.1305 | 30.191 30.082 - 109 ~1027
22 32.18 36.5 260 10.5 30. 3332 30.410 30 243 -167 «1562
23} 33-07} 38.9 25 4 13-5 30.4195 | 30.496 30 .292 204 +1553
NOIDA fee set0/6 cin/247)| (cists os 38.2 28.8 Oey Wan! Wieriopel Me ||) aancco
25] 35-92] 40.7 | 33.5 7-2 | 29.6725 | 29.941
26 31.02 35-3 29 4 59 29.6668 29.717
27 27-45 30.8 23.0 7-8 29.7030 | 29.820
28 30.07 35 3 24.0 11.3 29.6233 | 29 892
29 26.25 3.90 21.0 10.9 29.9972 30.036
go) 23.23, 3x.8 ts .g |) aes 30.2018 | 30.300
SuNDAY........ 3r pee 1 ego. rie! 14.9 0 E-Daes sulle sate
--Means| 22.16 | 29 94 | 14.65 15 29 | 29.9327 | 30.052
21 Years means 7 bis i
for and including 24 28] 31 63 | 16.64 £4.75 | . 29.9688
this month .....
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD.
5
Direction........ | N. N.E. E. S.E. Ss. 5.W. Ww. | N.W. | CALM.
MII Fa eae oelete 898 95 19 616 677 5077 3009 1578
Duration in hrs i 58 13 3 52 53 275 161 96 33
So ee ee Eee EE ee, | SS EEE E——_ EEE EEE rt
Mean velocity....| 155 7.3 6.3 11.8 12.8 18.4 18 7 16.4

Greatest mileage in one hour was 52 on the 18th.

Greatest velocity in gusts 60 miles per hour on
the 18th.

Lightning on Ist.

Resultant mileage, 7810.
Resultant direction, S. 674° W.
Total mileage, 11969.

*Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and
emperature of 32° Fahrenheit.

§ Observed.

t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.

t Humidity relative, saturation being 10v.

T 14 years only.

The greatest heat was 40.7° on the 25th; the
greatest cold was —6.0° on the 4th, giving a
range of temperature of 43.7 degrees.

Warmest day was the “5th. Coldest day was
the 4th Highest barometer reading was 30.495

on the 23rd. Lowest barometer 39,381 on the 28th,
giving a range of J.115 inches. Maximum
relative humidity was 98 on the 4th and 25th.

Minimum relative humidity was 64 on the 30th

Rain fell on 4 days.

Snow fell on 15 days.

Rain or snow fell on 17 days.

Auroras were observed on 1 night on 22nd.

Lunar halos 2, on 8th and 3lst.

Solar halos, 9 on 7th, 12th, 15th, 16th, 18th, 2Ist,
27th, 29th, 3l1st.

LIES IE SESE OES EE EERE SR SE ge er eee ee

i

ABotinveaet TOR T

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory,

am MONTH OF APRIL,| 1895.

treal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. |C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

13-7 | 14.9

Greatest mileage in one hour was 38 on the 15th.

Greatest velocity in gusts 48 miles per hour on
the 15th.

Resultant mileage, 1320.

Resultant direction, N. 333° W.

Total mileage, 9845.

Average mileage per hour, 13
Slight earthquake shock on

lasting about 10 seconds,
direction.

i7th at 1.15 a.m.,
travelling in a S.E.

greatest cold was 16.0° on the llth, giving a

range of temperature of 5’.6 degrees.

Warmest day was the 29th. Coldest day was
Highest barometer reading was 30.696
on the 27th. Lowest barometer was 29.236 on the
9th, giving a range of 1.420 inches.

the 11th

Maximum

i SKY CLUUDED js. e
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In Trnras. Se | s =
2 Se ee ee | ee EEE Ee ———— Sees) (eee Sia-8| om A= | a.
+Mean |} Meau Sao| 39 | =e ie
DAY, pressure pee Pat Mean ‘ : S z 5 aa a2 | as DAY.
; ‘ of vapor.| 2um1 General jyelocityl! 3 | ¥| ¢]5%Q 25 Es | 2a
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.J Mean. Max. Min. Rang ity. direction. jin miles} © | S | & fa 3 SL
| perhour! = a D 2
1 | 30.05 | 34.8 25.0 9.8 29.7998 | 29-99 29.640 +350 1202 ee 22.0 S.W. 5.2 8.3 | 10} of oo ase Tnap, cs ae
2 33-95 {| 38.5 29.1 9-4 29.6278 | 29.649 29.608 O4t +1533 78.7 28.0 S.W. 7.0 g2]|10} 5] 00 ata ets Bone lees
Bill 32 .Q2n ll 30.0 28.9 8.0 29.6107 | 29.653 29.550 103” 1463 80.0 27.0 Ww, Tein g.0} 10] 49 19 Inap, ... |Inap.] 3
4 30.57 35.8 25.3 10.5 29.8325 29.939 29.728 21t -1458 84.8 26.7 S.W. 18.7 7-3} 10] of 40 ae ae BADE 4
5 35-90 | 41-4 29.8 11.6 30-1305 | 30.214 30.030 .184 «1382 65.8 25.5 S.W. 16.9 2.2| 10] of 56 eee eens 5
6| 37-48] 46.0 30.0 16.0 30.5285 | 30.357 30.276 o8t .1605 71-7 29.0 N.E, 60 0.8 | 5] Of go Se nD : 6
SUNDAY. ..cc-0007 | oes 50.0 28.2 Py etsyee| | Gesoron aéectce | eeeooee ns meyers {oe an S.E, 12,2 atele’|tevavere {eee 50 G.02 =e 0.02 Jove veces ee SUNDAY
41.32 | 46.0 38.2 7.8 29.8958 | 30.098 29.631 467 2565 98.2 41.0 S.E. 11.3 J 10.0 | 10 | tof 40 0.61 sae EO-OXeHS
9 45-03.| 47.6 39 © 8.6 29.3613 | 29.544 29.236 - 308 .2888 95-3 43-7 S.E, 15.2 10.0 | 10 | 10 00 1.05 ae 1.05 | 9
10 29-15 39.5 24.0 15-5 29.8948 | 30.252 29.575 677, 1152 71 3 212 N.W. 24.8 2.3 |10|] Of 95 oie asi XO.
Ir 25.92 33 4 16.0 17.4 30.5690 | 30.656 30.431 | 225 -0952 663 | 16-5 S,W. 11.8 r.0| 4] Of 93 ove coos | I
12 | 37-57 | 46.6 25.9 20.7 30.3698 | 30.555 30.135 420 1497 66.3 | 27-0 S.E. 13 4 7-0] 10] of 93 0 OL seine) | O-OXi axa
13 42.03 47.2 38.7 85 29.8927 30.016 29.826 190, +2548 95.0 407 SEB 93 10.0 | lo | 10 oo 0.49 Peete 0.49 | 13
| |
SUNDAY....... 14 terete 45.0 36.5 Beg J) Ramee SMA Seige |) saws 6 An ono of see N, ran2) esa, ||lavormret ee 09 | 0.87 0.87) | Tienes ctdec ee SUNDA’
r5 || 38.73 | 43.5 36.2 7-3 29.8730 | 30.088 29.732 +350 +2125 9° 3 36.0 N.E. 33-0 9-7 | 10 | 8§ 00 0.32 coos | O-32'| 15
16 | 39.22 | 48.3 34.0 433 30.2247 | 30.269 30.168 IOI 1737 72.3) 30-8 N. 24.6 6.3] 10| of 28 see Borie) aks eke)
17| 44-83 | 57.2 32.8 24.4 30 1505 | 30.242 30.077 165 «1642 56.2 29.5 N.E, 9-2 0.0} o}] off 96 wares aner seee | 17
18 49.37 59.8 38.0 21.8 30.0885 30.149 30.014 139 .1760 49.8 gr.2 N, 9-5 0.0} o| off 94 aeisie S0G0 a ejeieru| exe
19 54.03 67.4 40.2 27.2 29.9755 30.050 29.910 140 2222 55.0 37:3 N.W. 13.4 1.2 7 cs} 85 tees tee see | 19
zo} 48.87] 586 38.2 20.4 30.0518 | 30.091 30.015 .076 -2465 710 39-7 { N. 10 5 1.3] 5 | Off 95 sees seee «es | 20
SUNDAY........21 eeeee 64,0 40.0 PYigtolea) (eadoe, |e onde, ieee oe see Bb ysisi2 AggE oisi8is Ss. 13.2 osipie0|leaet ta 95 seee eee eoee | 2I.eeccee sees UNDAV
22 | 44.82] 50.9 38.0 12.9 29.7993 | 29.893 29.715 -178 +2532 85.3 40.5 Ss. 15.6 50/10} off 23 0.37 Ae, | Ou are as
23} 39-32, 42.8 36.0 68 29.7333 | 29.875 29.621 254 -2160 89.3 36.3 S.E, 21.5 8.3 | 10 | off] oo 0.02 tele prouag) pezq
24 45-33 | 60.3 31.2 29.1 29.8162 | 29.960 29.671 .289 2143 70.2 35-5 s.W. Tne 6.7 | 10 | off 20 Inap, cane auapslie4
35 50-27 | 59-2 40.0 19.2 29.9267 | 30.098 29.864 2345 +2827 70.2 49-5 S.W, 15 3 7-7} 10] Off 28 eee on SO Cal Ie]
261 43.47| 51.6 34-2 17-4 30.2517 | 30.283 30 214 .069, 21885 66.5 330 N. 7.6 4.3 | 10] Off 67 Ponte Pit 26
27 | 44.22 53.7 34.0 19.7 30.3265 30. 389 30.281 108 1717 59-3 30.7 We 15 0 1.7 | 10/ 0 8r sees . 27
SUNDAY........ 28 | ..... | -60.0 38.0 220° eh eee eres Se eereia Beige N, 5-3 Riel eer F g2 onan ; dsine ||| BSc ee.cenn SUNDAYS
29 | 57-13] 68.6 42.0 26.6 30.1713 | 30.256 59-3 42.0 9-7 4.2] 10| off] 94 iat Ae wee | 29
30 | 49.60; 58.3 43-5 14.8 30.2562 | 30.387 68.0 39-2 N. 15.4 6.3| 10] off 3x | Inap, ... | Inap.| 30
3: -eee winsle see BGO 2 . Beak wo einen aaipe see [reese .- tees tee vee | OE
ee _——— | __ eee eS Se este a — ee
seve seees+Means) 41.17] 49-76 | 33.70 | 16068 29.9984 | 30.113 29.890 222 1934 73-4 32 7 IN. 33%° W.| 13-7 5.4 | 8.51.8 ff 45.8 | 3.76 0-0/0 || 3270) |SOMS i. onesie sa): elias
21 Years means % re an Gaol aie. =a arcs Gee 21 Years means for
for and including 49.00'{ 48.49 | 32.29 | 16.19 | 29.95231] <...- || «.- Roe .206 .1699 66.5 maclate eriataty G 6.2 {st.2 | 1.64 6.1 | 2.26 }and including this
this month ..... | | month,
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | relative humidity was 100 on the 8th, 9th and
‘ Fi l emperature of 32° Fahrenheit. 14th.
Direction........| N. N.-E. E. S.E. Ss. S.Ww. W. | N.W. CaLM. § Observed. Minimum relative humidity was 32 on the 29th.
A a | ge bere an peer eoe ee | || —— — = ws Rain or snow fell on 12 days.
MGS ielste Marisela's 6 ; | Q t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary. i
: wierd igeA, ol 1383 patios xB67 848 | pe are e Piumidity walative. saturation being 100 Auroras were observed on 4 nights, 10th, 11th,
Duration in hrs. . 158 97 2 113 42 120 62 | 75 | 24 aes Ay, r aoe ae 20th and 26th.
(Ne es — ———e | | ee | S| —————|——— --——| 1 14 years only. Lunar corona on the 2nd
Mean velocity...| 14. 2 6.8 i 6 : “ alae Seba Bes
2 eet || ORE ar od ae 15-6 The greatest heat was 68.6° on the 29th; the Fog on 2 days, 8th and 9th.

va
w,

]
rises

gee eo oye

ra
at

f
;

0a Pow xeps
as

ety, | ry
da Bed Se aia oa ia returned if desired, and if stamps a are Ne Ay
A losed es that purpose. The editors will not hold themselves va

Ps 2 Batecriers who fail to receive the RECORD, or who change

their residences, are requested to notify the Editors accordingly. .
" 2p Back Numbers of the REcorD may be obtained of the Editors: hi
al : forty cents per number.

Volumes, unbound, may be had as follows:

MOL I.,4 Nos. - oh hte : - $1.50
Vors. Il. & III., 8 Nos. each, . - 3.00 per vol.

7 Me _ The RecorpD is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers,
“or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage
- paid, is as follows: | |

Canada and the United States, : $3.00
Great Britain, - - : - £013 0

fa ISSUED 27TH AUGUST, 1895. earn

Fe on
——- Fete ae

“INCLUDING THE PROCEEDINGS OF
THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF mT eae
, AND REPLACING x

THE CANADIAN NATURA IST.

CONTENTS.

___Desoriptions of Bight New Species of Fossils from the (Galena) Trenton

___» Limestones of Lake Winnipeg and the Red River Valley. By J. F. Toy, mi i
ie . WHITEAVES «20. .-..00esee seers ees at wee ak A ca 8 via Lids cudihdnich!: OR BoA OSI ht aa
_ The Flora of Montreal Island. By Rosert Ai? eR D.D. jb 3s 5 1897 . an ;
| Contributions to Canadian Botany. By Jas. M. MACOUN........++++++++ 405 ity Aes
t a a the Norian or ‘‘Upper Laurentian” Formation of Canada. By FRANK pean fee
D. Anam, MASc, Ph.D:............ waeae #\l. vein age cub det nek pale) SkO hi iN aana aan
Sag Notices : . i ae
William Samia Wilismeon, LL D., BP RB. bin cies ye diese caie Watnehed Bs stot enee yee | ee ie
% Professor James Dwight Dana.... .... d deWin dalnae ieltin eee . 448 , ee
i The Right Hon. T. H. Huxley, D.C.L., ¥. Be Bis CGC h ekiets aac eee ey ABE): oF a4
i .
>
ne
Q
~
cid
yo |
ae MONTREAL:
PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY. |
LONDON, ENGLAND : BOSTON, MASS.:
Co..ins, 157 Great Portland St. A. A. WATERMAN & Co., 36 Bromfield St.

1895.

a
3

DEEMED es

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF ‘MONTREAL,

[Incorporated 1832.]
OFFICERS—SESSION 1895-96.

Patron:
His EXcELLENCY THE GOVERNOR-GENERAL OF CANADA,
Hon. President: —
Str J. Witi1aAm Dawson, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.S.C.
President:
Rev. Ropert CAMPBELL, D.D., M.A.

Ist Vice-President :

Joun S. SHEARER,
Vice- Presidents -

Dr. WESLEY MILLs. Ese HaRrineoton, Ph.D., F.R.S.C.
Hon. SENATOR MURPHY. J. STEVENSON Brown. a
J. H. R. Motson. GEORGE SUMNER. =
Sir DonaLp A. Situ, K.C.M.G. J. H. JosEpu.

_Hon, Justice WuRTELE. ‘

Hon. Recording Secretary : Hon. Corresponding Secretary :
Cuas. S. J. PHILLIPS. | Joun W. Sriruine, M.D., Edin,
Honorary Curator : Honorary esol :
J. B. WILLIAMS. | F. W. RicHarps,
Members of Council :

Gro. SUMNER, Chairman.
Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc.. Ph.D. JAMES GARDNER.
ALBERT HOLDEN. JOSEPH FORTIER.
Nevit Norton EvVANs. Hon. J. K. Warv.
C. T. WILLIAMS. Pror. JOHN Cox.

. EpGark JUDGE.

Editing and Exchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc., Ph. D., Chairman..
G. F. MatrHew, St. John, N.B. Rev. R. Campsetz, D.D.
aay WHITEAVES, Ottawa, Ont. Dr. WESLEY MILLs.
B. J. Harrineton, B.A., Ph.D. ,F.G.S. | Nevin Norton Evans.
Pror. JOHN Cox.

Library Committee :
E. T. CHAMBERS, Chairman.

J. A. U. Breaupry, C.E. JOSEPH FORTIER,
R. W. McLacHian. A. F. WINN.
G. KEARLEY. W. Drake.
J. F. Hausen.
Museum Committee :

J. B. WiuiiaMs, Chairman.
A. F. WINN. N. N. Evans.
J. F. Hausen. J. S. Brown.
E. D. WINTLE. G. KEARLEY.

Lecture Committee :
Rev. Rost. CAMPBELL, D.D., Chairman.
Cuas. 8. J. PHILLIPS.
Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.
EpGAR JUDGE.

House Committee :
JNO. S. SHEARER, Chairman.
EpGAR JUDGE. | GEO. SUMNER.
W. DRAKE.

Membership Committee :
J. STEVENSON Brown, Chairman.
JOHN S. SHEARER. | JOSEPH FORTIER.
W. DRAKE.

Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN.

Pror. JOHN Cox.
Dr. WESLEY MILLS.
N. N. Evans.

THE

CANADIAN RECORD

OPS Ori NOK.

VOL. V1. JULY, 1895. No. 7.

DESCRIPTIONS OF EIGHT NEW SPECIES OF FOSSILS FROM
THE (GALENA) TRENTON LIMESTONES OF LAKE WINNIPEG
AND THE Rep RIVER VALLEY.

By J. F. WaItTEAVEs.

The following descriptions are communicated, by per-
mission of the Director of the Geological Survey of
Canada, for publication in advance of an official Report on
the fossils of the Cambro-Silurian rocks of Lake Winnipeg
and its vicinity, now in course of preparation by the
writer, in which it is hoped that these and many other
species will be fully illustrated. This Report is intended
to form the third part of the third volume of the
“ Palaozoic Fossils” of Canada.

ALG.
CHONDRITES PATULUS. (Sp. nov.)

Thallus frondose, continuous, spreading widely in the
same plane, and consisting of a thin, uniformly flat
expansion, devoid of midrib or veins, which is doubly,
deeply and widely trifurcate at a short distance from the

laterally expanded base of attachment, with the secondary
29

088 Canadian Record of Science.

divisions again once or twice cleft at their summits; the
undivided and partially divided portions narrowest below,
widening above and widest at the commencement of each
division, averaging from three to four millimetres in
breadth in the narrowest places, and from fourteen to
fifteen mm. in the widest.

Inmost or Birch Island, Kinwow Bay, Lake Winnipeg,
T. C. Weston, 1884: four nearly perfect and well-defined
specimens, and seven similar but imperfect ones.

CHONDRITES CUPRESSINUS. (Sp. nov.)

Thallus frondose, continuous and consisting of a long,
slender and extremely narrow rhachis, with numerous
short, crowded and variously divided lateral ramifications:
base of attachment unknown. ‘The rhachis is flat, erect,
nearly straight and scarcely more than half a millimetre
in its maximum breadth. The lateral ramifications are
linear, pinnately partite, or possibly verticillate, opposite,
divergent and spreading outward and a little upward.
They decrease very gradually in length from below
upward, and are either doubly bifurcate, bifurcate with
both of the ultimate ramifications trifureate, or bifureate
with one of the ultimate branchlets trifurcate and the
other single.

Cat Head, Lake Winnipeg, D. B. Dowlng and. L. M.
Lambe, 1890: one specimen, which has been spht longitu-
dinally down the centre into. two pieces of nearly equal
size.

To the naked eye this specimen has much the appear-
ance of the polypary of a recent hydroid, and especially
of that of the well-known Sertularia cupressina, L., which
Professor Allman now refers to Thwiaria. When viewed
under an ordinary simple lens, however, it has obviously
more the aspect of a plant, although its minute tissues
are not preserved. ‘There are no indications of any

New Fossils from the Winnipeg Limestones. 389

eorneous or chitinous structures, of articulations,—of a
eentral virgula, as in the Graptolitide, or of marginal
hydrotheca, as in the hydroids and graptolites. The
species may form the type of a new genus of paleozoic
marine alge, for which the name Z7vrichochondrites might
not be mappropriate, and characterised by a continuous
frondose thallus, an extremely slender rhachis, and crowded
linear lateral ramifications.

CHONDRITES GRACILLIMUS. (Sp. nov.)

Thallus frondose, continuous, pinnately partite, with a
slender rhachis, which is nearly a millimetre in breadth
about the mid-height, but narrower at and near the base
and apex, and apparently flattened, with no indications of
a central axis or virgula. Lateral ramifications simple,
unbranched, narrower than the rhachis, averaging about
one millimetre apart, the longest about fifteen mm. in
length, divergent in the same plane outward and a little
upward, but shewing no traces of hydrothecz or cell open-
ings on their margins: basal attachment unknown.

Inmost Island, Kinwow Bay, Lake Winnipeg, T. C.
Weston, 1884: one well defined and nearly perfect speci-
men, though its minute structure is not preserved.

This specimen. is so similar in general shape to some of
the Devonian and Carboniferous species of Plwmalina that
the writer has long been under the impression that it could
be referred to that genus. It is also equally similar in
general shape to the Buthograptus laxus of Hall, from the
Trenton shales of Wisconsin. According to 8. A. Miller,}
Ptilophyton, Dawson, 1s a synonym of Plumalina, and the
writer is informed by Sir J. W. Dawson that he has
recently ascertained that Buthograptus laxus 1s exactly
congeneric with Ptilophyton. In Hall’s original deserip-
tion of Plumalina,? the specimens described are said to

1 North American. Geology and Paleontology,. 1889,. p. 136.
2. Canadian Naturalist and Geologist, Vol,. ILL,,.p. 175.

390 Canadian Record of Science.

have a “ well-preserved corneous structure ;” and Whitfield
has shown that the lateral branches of Buthograptus laxus
are articulated. Under a lens, the specimen from Inmost
Island shows no indication of corneous structure, and its
lateral ramifications are apparently continuous with the
rhachis. It would, therefore, seem to be the most prudent
course to refer it provisionally to the genus Chondrites.
Whether viewed with or without a lens, it has so many
characters in common with C. cwpressinus that practically
the only difference between them is, that the one has long
and undivided pinne or lateral ramifications, and the other
short and much divided ones.

CCQELENTERATA.

ANTHOZOA.
STREPTELASMA ROBUSTUM. (Sp. nov.)

Corallum simple, elongate conical, usually rather strongly
curved, though some specimens are not so much curved as
others, very large for the genus, attaining to a length of
seven inches as measured along the curve of the convex
side, to a height of nearly five inches, and to a breadth or
width of nearly two inches and a quarter at the summit.
In some adult or nearly adult specimens the sides are so
much compressed (perhaps abnorinally so), that the con-
vexly arched region is obtusely angulated in the centre,
longitudinally; in some young specimens this region is
distinetly flattened; but others are circular in outline in
transverse section, or as seen from above. Septa alter-
nately long and short, varymg in number in large
specimens from 160 to 170 in all, the longer ones
extending to the centre at the bottom of the calyx.
Surface marked with transverse wrinkles and numerous
fine strize of growth in well-preserved specimens, but often
so much worn, apparently prior to fossilization, as to be
almost smooth.

New Fossils from the Winnipeg Limestones. O91

Longitudinal sections through the centre of large speci-
mens shew that the calyx is not very deep, and that its
cavity occupies but a small proportion of the entire
length. Below the calyx the corallum is filled with
strongly developed and apparently thickened septa, with
well-marked dissepiments between them, and these septa, |
with their dissepiments, unite in the centre in such a way
as to form a large irregularly reticulated pseudo-columella,
which projects slightly above the centre of the base of
the calyx, as a boss of irregular shape, but with a narrowly
rounded summit.

This fine coral is especially abundant, and attains to a
large size in the Red River valley, at St. Andrews, Lower
Fort Garry and East Selkirk, Manitoba, where it was
collected by Dr. R. Bell in 1880, by T. C. Weston and
A. McCharles in 1884, by L. M. Lambe in 1890, and by
D. B. Dowling in 1891. On the western side of Lake
Winnipeg a few rather smaller and much less perfect
specimens of this coral were collected at Jack Head
Island, Manitoba, by D. B. Dowling and L. M. Lambe in
1890, at Dog Head, Manitoba, Selkirk Island, Keewatin,
and on the main shore off the north end of Selkirk
Island, Saskatchewan, by D. B. Dowling in 1891. A
small specimen, which is apparently referable to this
species, was collected at the junction of the Little and
Great Churchill rivers by Dr. R. Ball in 1879.

Streptelasma robustum appears to be readily distinguish-
able, by its very much larger size and much more robust
habit of growth, from the well-known S. cornieulwm of
Hall. It seems to bear somewhat the same kind of
relationship to S. corniculwm that the Receptaculites Owenr
of the Cambro-Silurian rocks of the west does to the
eastern fossil known by the rather appropriate name of
Ff. occidentalis, and that Murchisonia teretiformis (or M.
major) of the same rocks does to the eastern JZ. bellicincta.

392 Canadian Reeord of Science.
MOLLUSCOIDEA.

BRACHIOPODA.
RAFINESQUINA LATA. (Sp. nov.)

Shell large, adult specimens measuring as much as
three inches along the hinge line, deeply concavo-convex,
much broader than long, and broadest at the hinge line:
cardinal angles produced. Ventral or pedicle valve
strongly convex exteriorly, usually regularly arched from
back to front, most prominent and in some specimens
gibbous and even obtusely subangular about the mid-
length, with the visceral disc flattened obliquely, in others
most tumid in the umbonal region posterior to the mid-
length, its beak moderately prominent, its cardinal area
wide and about four millimetres and a quarter in height.
with a broadly triangular deltidium in the centre. Dorsal
or brachial valve deeply concave, closely following the
curvature of the ventral. its cardinal area about one mm.
and a quarter in height, and its beak apparently small.

Surface of both valves marked with very numerous and
closely disposed, threadlike radiating raised lines or
minute ridges. In the only well-preserved dorsal valve
known to the writer these radu are very nearly equal in
size, but upon the ventral valves of several specimens they
are unequal in size and irregular in their disposition. In
some places the larger radu alternate with the smaller
ones, but in others there are from two to four, or even
more, of the smaller radii between two of the larger ones.
In addition to these radi, the visceral dise of the ventral
valve of some specimens 1s marked with comparatively
coarse, undulating, concentric but somewhat interrupted
corrugations.

Hinge dentition and characters of the interior of both
valves unknown, but an imperfectly preserved cast of
the interior of the shell of a ventral valve shews that the

New Fossils from the Winnipeg Limestones. 393

flabellate diductors of that valve are very similar in shape
to those of &#. alternata, as figured by Hall on Plate 8,
figure 4, of the eighth volume of the “ Paleeontology of the
State of New York,” though their external margins are
very much less distinctly defined.

Apparently not uncommon in the Red River valley at
Lower Fort Garry,—where it was collected by Donald
Gunn in 1858, by Dr. R. Bell in 1880, by T. C. Weston in
1884, and D. B. Dowling in 1891,—and at East Selkirk,—
where specimens were obtained by T. C. Weston and
A. McCharles in 1884. From the limestones of Lake
Winnipeg it has so far been collected only at Cat Head
(by T. C. Weston in 1884 and D. B. Dowling in 1891),
and at Jack Head Island (by D. B. Dowhng and L. M.
Lambe in 1890).

Altogether, the writer has seen fourteen specimens of
this shell, three of which shew the characters of the hinge
area of both valves fairly well, though the beak of the
dorsal valve cannot be seen in either, as 1t 1s either broken
off or buried under the matrix. The ventral aspect of
these specimens is remarkably sinular to that of the
fossil figured by Professors Winchell and Schuchert on
Plate xxxi., figures 35 and 36, of the “ Lower Silurian
Brachiopoda of Minnesota,” as Rafinesquina alternata, var.
loxorhytis, but which, Mr. Schuchert has recently informed
the writer, he now regards as a form of &. Aingi, the
Strophomena Kingw of Whitfield. Mr. Schuchert, how-
ever, who has seen all the specimens from Manitoba upon
which the preceding description is based, states that their
hinge areas are always nearly three and even four times
as high as those of the Minnesota specimens of &. Kingit
which he has studied, and regards this as a valid distinc-
tion between them. Professor Whitfield, also, who has
seen some of the most perfect Manitoba specimens of
f. lata, regards them as specifically distinct from his

394 Canadian Record of Science.

Strophomena Kingvi, on the ground that the umbones of
ventral valves of the former are more full, and the valves
themselves - proportionally more convex, than those of
S. Kingit.

MOLLUSCA.

CEPHALOPODA.

ASCOCERAS COSTULATUM. (Sp. nov.)

Shell large, elliptic-subovate, longer than broad and
broadest in advance of the mid-leneth, the neck or
anterior prolongation of the body chamber being broken
off in the only specimen known to the writer: outline of
transverse section in the broadest part apparently ellipti-
cal, the dorsum and venter being compressed and the
sides slightly expanded. |

Surface transversely but rather finely ribbed, the ribs
averaging from seven to nine in the length of one centi-
metre, and rather closer together near the aperture than
in the more expanded portion.

Sigmoidal septa apparently three in number, though
their distances apart, on the dorsum, cannot be ascer-
tained. The suture, however, which forms the line of
demarcation between the decurrent extremity of the body
chamber and the septate portion, on both sides, is clearly
defined. It shows that the body chamber extends as far
backward as to within about half an inch from the
blunted pointed posterior end, that it is dilated or pro-
duced laterally, towards the dorsum, for a short distance
posteriorly, and concavely constricted for a much longer
distance anteriorly.

Black Island,’ Swampy Harbour, Lake Winnipeg, D. B.
Dowhng and L. M. Lambe, 1890: a badly preserved cast
of the interior of the shell, with one side much worn, but
with portions of the test preserved on both the venter
and dorsum.

1 A small island close to, but a little to the west of, Beren’s or Swampy Island.

od

New Fossils from the Winnipeg Limestones. 395

This species bear some resemblance to A. Bohemicuwm of
Barrande, particularly in size and in the general style of
its surface markings. The ribs or riblets of this Bohemian
species, however, are represented as finer and very much
more numerous. Thus, according to Lindstrém, in A.
Bohemicum there are as many as twenty-two riblets in a
length of five millimetres, and hence, presumably, forty-
four to a centimetre, but in the present species there are
only from seven to nine ribs to a centimetre. Among
Canadian species, A. costulatwm would seem to be nearest to
A. Canadense, Billings, the type of Hyatt’s genus Billingsites,
and hence may be referable to that genus. The surface
markings of A. Canadense, however, are still unknown,
or at least not preserved in any of the specimens in the
Museum of the Geological Survey.

CYRTOCERAS LATICURVATUM. (Nov. sp.)

Shell large (attaining to a length of about twelve
inches, as measured along the convex and presumably
ventral curve), narrowly fusiform and broadest at a short
distance from the body chamber, elongated, slender, and
so much curved as to form a broad semi-cireular arch,
which is straighter anteriorly than posteriorly: sides
compressed, the outline of a transverse section of the
broadest part being elliptical: body chamber compressed
cylindrical, more than twice as long as broad, and occupy-
ing about one-third of the entire length.

Surface markings unknown, though there are indications
of faint longitudinal ribs on one of the casts.

Longitudinal sections show that the septa (thirty-five
of which can be counted in one specimen) are strongly
concave and about seven or eight millimetres apart near the
body chamber, but much closer together at the posterior
end, also that the siphuncle is almost cylindrical, but
slightly contracted at the septa, exogastric and placed at

“396 Canadian Record of Svidnee,

a distance about equal to its own breadth from the margin
of the convex (ventral) side.

Black Island, Swampy Harbour, Lake Winnipeg, J. B.
Tyrrell, 1889 (four specimens), and D. B. Dowling and
L. M. Lambe, 1890 (three specimens). Jack Head Island,
Lake Winnipeg, ‘Messrs. Dowling and Lambe, 1890 (one
specimen), Commissioners or Cranberry Island (one
specimen), and Point off Moose Creek, eight miles south-
west of Whiteway Point (one specimen), D. B. Dowling,
1890. All the specimens from these, localities are mere
casts of the interior of the shell, but the septa and
siphuncle are usually well preserved.

This large, elongated, slender and sickle-shaped Cyrto-
ceras is so unlike any other species of that genus known
to the writer, as to call for no special comparisons.

KURYSTOMITES PLICATUS. (Sp. nov.)

Shell involute, volutions apparently one and a_ halt,
coiled closely on the same plane but without embracing,
strongly compressed on the venter and dorsum and
increasing very slowly in the ventro-dorsal diameter, but
expanding and widening rapidly at the sides, which are
rounded and gibbous, the outline of a transverse section
of the chamber of habitation near the aperture being
broadly reniform, with the lateral diameter about three
times greater than the dorso-ventral, and the dorsum
impressed by a shallow and rather narrow furrow of
contact: umbilical perforation large and deep.

Surface marked with rather broad, low, rounded,
flexuous, transverse plications, and crowded striz parallel
to the plications, both between and upon them.

A longitudinal section through the centre of one of the
specimens shews that the cut edges of the concave septa
are about two millimetres apart on the dorsum, and seven
mm. on the venter, near the body chamber, that the

~The Flora of Montreal Island. 397

siphuncle is placed about half-way between the centre and
the venter, and that it is almost cylindrical, but slightly
constricted at or near each of the septa.

Black Island, Swampy Harbour, Lake Winnipeg, J. B.
Tyrrell, 1889, two specimens, and D. B. Dowling and
L. M. Lambe, 1890, two specimens.

These are referred to the genus Hurystomites, Schroder,
on the authority of Professor Hyatt, to whom one of the
most perfect specimens was sent for examination. In a
letter recently received, Professor Hyatt says of this
specimen: “The suture has a decided broad ventral lobe
and lateral lobes, and internally there is an impressed
zone shewing a true close coiled nautilian form. The
siphuncle is ventrad of the centre, small and with delicate
walls.” Nautilus Hercules of Billings, from the Hudson
River formation of the island of Anticosti, which Hyatt
doubtfully refers to the genus Lztoceras, has a_ broad
flattened venter and a similar kind of coiling to that of
E. plicatus, but both sides of the outer volution of Nauti-
lus Hercules are distinctly angular.

THE FLORA OF MONTREAL ISLAND.
By Ropert CAMPBELL, D.D., M.A.

I have continued collecting as I have had opportunity,
and since the list was made of specimens of the plants to
be found in the two counties of Hochelaga and Jacques
Cartier, published in Vol. V., pp. 208 to 254, gathered
up to 1893, the following have been added :—

ANEMONE NEMOROSA, L.—Windflower—St. Michel—
May.

RANUNCULUS MULTIFIDUS, Pursh.—Yellow Water Crow-
foot—Lachine, ditch near Convent Station—( Ranunculus
delphinifolius, Holmes.) July.

398 Canadian Record of Science.

RANUNCULUS PENNSYLVANICUS, me ige Crowfoot—
Lachine—September.

DELPHINIUM EXALTATUM, Ait.-—Tall Tianna
off Pine Avenue.

MENISPERMUM CANADENSE, L.—Moonseed—Bagge’s
Wood, near Back River—(Holmes at St. Martin.) July.

NYMPH#A ODORATA, Ait.—Sweetscented Water Lily—
Pointe-aux-Trembles—J uly.

NYMPH#A RENIFORMIS, DC.—Tuber-bearing Water Lily
—St. Lawrence River at Verdun—August.

DICENTRA CANADENSIS, DC.—Squirrel Corn—Mount
Royal Cemetery, near gate. (Holmes, Corydalis Cana-
densis)—May.

CARDAMINE ROTUNDIFOLIA, Michx.—Mountain Water
Cress—Ditch, Elmwood Grove, Longue Pomte—reported
for the first time in this district—June.

ARABIS HIRSUTA.—Hairy Rock Cress—Bage’s Woodtlt
July.

ARABIS CANADENSIS.—Sickle-Pod—Smaller Mountain
—July.

HESPERIS MATRONALIS, L.—Dame’s Violet, Sweet
Rocket—Mountain, west of McGuibbon’s—escaped from
cultivation—ZJuly.

SISYMBRIUM SopuHta, L.—Flax Weed—Lachine—July.

VIOLA BLANDA, var. RENIFOLIA, Gray.—Sweet White
Violet—Lachine, Cedar swamp, west from Convent Station.

CERASTIUM VIScosuM, L.—(in former catalogue viscosum
should have read vulgatum)—Mouse-ear Chickweed—
Cote des Neiges Road—June.

Matva crispa, L.—Curled Mallow—Vacant lot, Mont-
real—Septem ber.

Vitis RIPARIA, Michx.—Frost or Chicken Grape—
Western spur of Mountain Park—June. (Holmes.)

NEGUNDO ACEROIDES, Moench.—Ashleaved Maple—
introduced from the west, and making rapid headway
round the city—April.

The Flora of Montreal Island. 399

TRIFOLIUM HYBRIDUM, L.—Alsike Clover—getting
common—J une.

VICIA TETRASPERMA, L.—Fourseeded Veteh—Mountain
Park—July.

APIOS TUBEROSA, Moench.—Ground Nut, Wild Bean—
Vacant field off St. Antoine street west—August. (Holmes,
Glycine apios.)

PHYSOCARPUS OPULIFOLIUS, Maxim.—Nine-Bark—
(Holmes, Spirea opulifolia)—Bage’s Wood—July.

GEUM VIRGINIANUM, L.—Hairy Avens—Low part of
Park beyond McGibbon’s—(Holmes, Geum Canadensc)
July.

CRATEGUS COCCINEA, var. macracantha, Dudley—
Searlet Haw—Mountain Park—May.

CRATHGUS PUNCTATA, Jacq.—Yellow Haw—head of
Metcalfe Avenue, Westmount—-(Holmes, tomentosa var.
punctata)——May.

CRATEHEGUS FLAVA, Ait—Summer Haw—Mountain
Park, south of McGibbon’s—May.

DECODON VERTICILLATUS, Ell—Swamp Loose Strife—-
Lachine—(Holmes, Lythrum verticillatum)—Aueust.

OENOTHERA LINIFOLIA, Nutt—Evening Primrose—
Hochelaga Bank—June.

CALLITRICHE VERNA, L.—Water Starwort—Pointe-aux-
Trembles and Verdun—J une.

EPILOBIUM ADENOCAULON, Haussk.—Willow Herb—(in
former catalogue, Hpilobium coloratum ; but recent deter-
mination has made it distinct)—Common—August.

THASPIUM AUREUM, Nutt.—Meadow Parsnip—Smaller
Mountain—(Holmes’ Smyrnium aureum)——June.

PIMPINELLA INTIGERRIMA, Benth. & Hook.—Burnet
saxifrage—(Holmes, Smyrnium intigerrimum)—rare on
smaller Mountain—Common, shore of Lake Huron—2June-

SIUM cCICUT#FOLIUM, Gmellin.—Water Parsnip—
(Holmes, Siam dineare)—Lachine—August.

400 Canadian Record of Science.

BERULA ANGUSTIFOLIA, Koch.—Gaelic Cress—(Holmes’
Sium latifolium)—Cote St. Paul—August.

CICUTA MACULATA, L.—Spotted Cowbane—Mountain
Marsh—(Holmes)—July.

CoNIUM MACULATUM, L.—Poison Hemlock—Bagg’s
Woods—July.

GALIUM TRIFIDUM, L.—Small pclae ae common
—June—( Holmes.)

GALIUM ASPRELLUM, Michx.—Rough bedstraw—common
—July—(Holmes.)

GALIUM TRIFLORUM, Michx.—Sweet scented bedstraw—
all over the island, in the woods—June—( Holmes. )

GALIUM APARINE, L.—Cleavers, goose-grass—common
—(Holnes)—July.

GALIUM PILOSUM, Ait.—Hairy bedstraw—Bage’s Woods

GALIUM BOREALE, L.—Northern bedstraw—common—
July—( Holmes. )

CEPHALANTHUS OCCIDENTALIS, L.—Button bush—St.
Michel—August—(Holmes. )

“‘SOLIDAGO PETIOLARIS, Ait.—Golden rod—St. Michel—
August.

SOLIDAGO SEROTINA, Torr & Gray.—Golden rod—
Mountain Park—Aueust.

SoLrmpAGo RUGOSA, Mill.—Golden rod—Mountain Park
—August.

SOLIDAGO CANADENSIS, var. PROCERA, L.—Golden rod—
Mountain Park—August-—(Holmes.)

SOLIDAGO MACROPHYLLA, Pursh.—Golden rod—Moun-
tain Park—August—(Holmes.) |

SOLIDAGO NEMORALIS, Ait.—Golden rod—Mountain
Park—August—(Holmes. )

SOLIDAGO SEROTINA, var. GIGANTEA, Frank. —Golden
rod—Marsh in Mountain Park—August.

CNICUS HORRIDULUS, Pursh.—Yellow Thistle—St. Michel
—Septem ber.

The Flora of Montreal Island. 401

ARALIA spinosa, L.—Angelica tree—McGill College
grounds, but extending itself rapidly, as it has done on the
banks of the Grand River, near Galt—July.

CORNUS SERICEA, L.—Silky Cornel, Kinnikinnik—Park
_ south of MceGibbon’s—J une—( Holmes. )

CORNUS PANICULATA, L’Her.—Panicled Cornel—Moun-
tain Park—June.

CORNUS ALTERNIFOLIA, L.—Alternate leaved dogwood—
back river, Bage’s Woods—June—( Holmes.)

SAMBUCUS EBULUS, L.—Dwartf elder, Danewort—Up
and down Metcalfe Avenue, extending itself rapidly—not
reported in Macoun’s catalogue—J uly—( Holmes. )

VIBURNUM LANTANOIDES, Michx.-—Hobble bush—St.
Michel woods—May—( Holmes.)

LONICERA SEMPERVIRENS, Ait.—Trumpet Honeysuckle
—Mountain Park, south of MeGibbon’s—J une.

ASTER CORYMBOSUS, Ait.—Starwort—Mountain Park—
August.

ASTER Nova@-ANGLIZ, L.—Aster—Mountain Park—
September.

ASTER UMBELLATUS, Wiulld—Aster—Mount Royal
Park—August.

ASTER VIMINEUS, Law.—Starwort—Mount Royal Park
—August.

ASTER TRADESCANTI, L.—Aster—Mount Royal Park—
August. |

ASTER PANICULATUS, Lam.—Aster—Mount Royal Park
—August. :

ASTER PTARMICOIDES, Torr & Gray.—Aster—Mount
Royal Park—August.

ANAPHALIS MARGARITACEA, Benth. & Hook—Pearly Ever-
lasting—August—(Holmes’ Gnaphalium margaritaceum.)

InuLA HELENIUM, L.—Elecampane—East side Cote St.
Antoine Road, spreading rapidly, as it is a strong grower,
and in the struggle for life it beats off every competitor.

402 Canadian Record of Science.

This has been its history mm several localities in Ontario—
August.

HELIANTHUS sTRUMOsUS, L.—Sunflower—Mount Royal
Park—August. )

GALINSOGA PARVIFLORA, Cav.—For the last three years
I have observed a numerous colony of this plant on the
MeGill College grounds, in front of the new Workman
buildings, on a piece of recently made-up ground. This is
the first time the plant is reported from Canada, although
in the 6th edition of Gray, p. 286, it is said to occupy
“waste places, especially eastward.” It is a modest plant,
about nine inches high, its rays mconspicuous, so that it is
not likely to attract the attention of any but a practised
eye. There isa risk that the plant will disappear, however,
as several feet more of earth has been filled in over where
it grew, unless it has managed to extend itself beyond the
sidewalk, into the grass, among which it maintained a
successful struggle. I secured several specimens of it in
successive years.—August.

ERECHTHITES HIERACIFOLIA, Raf——Fireweed—Mount
Royal Cemetery—(Holmes’ Senecio hieracifolia)—August.

PRENANTHES CREPIDINEA, Michx.—Rattlesnake root—
Mount Royal Park-—August.

PRENANTHES SERPENTARIA, Pursh.—Luion’s foot, Gall of the
earth—Mount Royal Park, west of MeGibbon’s——August.

Lopenia Puseruna, Michx.—Silky Lobelia—Bage’s
Woods—J uly—(Holnes’ Lobelia Kalmii.)

CYNOGLOSSUM ViIRGINICUM, L.—Wild comfrey—Bagge’s
Woods—J une—(Holhnes’ Cynoglossum amplificaule.)

LITHOSPERMUM LATIFOLIUM, Michx.—Broadleaved
Groundsel— Bage’s Woods—J uly.

SOLANUM DULCAMARA, L.—Bittersweet—over the island
——June.

SOLANUM NIGRUM, L.—Common_ nightshade—Bage’s
clearing—J uly —( Holmes. )

a

The Flora of Montreal Island. 405

VERONICA AGRESTIS, L.—Field Speedwell—Lachine, west
of Convent Station—August.

VERONICA AMERICANA, Schweinitz.—American Brook-
lime—Ditch at Lachine—July.

GERARDIA PURPUREA, var. PAUPERCULA, Gray.—Lachine
swamp, west of Convent Station—August—( Holmes. )

‘MELAMPYRUM AMERICANUM, Michx.—Cow wheat—
Bage’s Woods—July—(Holmes’ Melampyrum arvense.)

CATALPA BIGNONIOIDES, Watt.—Indian Bean—MceGuill
College grounds—flowered in 1893—June.

CALAMINTHA NEPETA, Link.—Basil Thyme—Mountain
Park—July—vrare.

MonarpDA DipyMA, L.—Oswego Tea, Bee-Balm—River
side, below the Convalescent Hospital, Longte Pointe—
July.

PEANTAGO kucnmul, Decaisne.—Taller “Plantain-—st,
Famille street and on Mountain—July.

APOCYNUM CANNABINUM, L.—Indian Hemp— River bank,
Verdun—J une.

AMARANTUS PANICULATUS, L.—Red Amaranth—Lachine
—September.

AMARANTUS ALBUS, L.—Tumble weed—common—
August.

_ RUMEX VERTICILLATUS, L.—Swamp Dock—Mount Royal.
Park—-J uly—( Holmes.)

POLYGONUM LAPATHIFOLIUM, var. INCANUM, Koch.—La-
chine-—September (Holmes.)

POLYGONUM VIRGINIANUM, L.-~—Boutdel’Isle—September.

POLYGONUM ARIFOLIUM, L.—Halbard-leaved Tear-thumb
—August—Mountaim Park.

POLYGONUM CILINODE, Michx.—Downy bindweed—
Mount Royal Park—July.

DircA PALUSTRIS, L.—Léatherwood, moosewood—
Bage’s Woods—rare now though formerly plentiful—
April—( Holmes. )

30

404 Canadian Record of Science.

DAPHNE MEzEREUM, L.—Daphne—Several places in
Mountain Park—May.

EUPHORBIA COMMUTATA, Engelm.—Spurge—Field near
Bage’s Woods—rare—July.

CELTIS OCCIDENTALIS, L.—Sugarberry, Hackberry—
Lower Lachine Road—a great colony of large trees on
north end.of St. Helen’s Island—May—(Holmes.)

URTICA URENS, L.—Nettle—common—wrongly des-
cribed as urtica gracilis, in former catalogue, though urtica
gracilis is occasionally found—August.

BC@:HMERIA CYLINDRICA, Willd.—False nettle—vacant
field off St. Antoine street, St. Henri, Verdun—July. :

CaRYA porcINA, Nutt.—Pig nut Hickory—McGill
College grounds—June.

BETULA LUTEA, Michx.— Yellow birch—Mountain Park,
McGill College grounds—May.,

SALIX NIGRA, Marsh.—Black willow—very common—
May.

SALIx LucipA, Muhl—Shining willow—very common
—May. |

SALIX FRAGILIS, L.—Crack willow—introduced into
Mountain Park—May.

SALIX ROSTRATA, Richardson.—in former catalogue,
saliz livida var. occidentalis—very common—May.

PINUS RESINOSA, Ait.—Red Pine—an oceasional tree on
the island—August.

SPARGANIUM EURYCARPUM, Engelm.—Large Bur-reed—
Pointe-aux-Trembles—September.

SPIRANTHES CERNUA, Richard.—Ladies’ tresses—Bagg’s
Woods-—July. |

EprpacTiIs HELLEBORINE, Crantz.—This European
orchid was discovered on Mount Royal Park in 1894 by
Mr. H. B. Cushing—previously reported in Gray’s 6th
edition as near Syracuse and Buffalo, N.Y., the only
known stations—July.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 405

ORCHIS SPECTABILIS, L.—Showy orchis—several places
in Mount Royal Park—July—( Holmes.) =

HABENARIA HYPERBOREA, R. Br.—Rein Orchis—Moun-
tain Marsh—August—(Holmes’ Habenaria dilatata.)

CYPRIPEDIUM PARVIFLORUM, Salis.—Smaller yellow Lady’s
Shpper—Bage’s Woods—June.

SMILAX ROTUNDIFOLIA, L.—Common greenbrier—Bagg’s
Wood and Mountain Park—June. |

TRILLIUM CERNUUM, L.— Wakerobin—common— May.

LILIUM CANADENSE, L.—Wild Yellow Lily—Mountain
swamp—J uly.

ACORUS CALAMUS, L.—Sweet Flag—Pointe-aux-Trem-
bles—J une.

ZIZANIA AQUATICA, L.—Indian Rice—Mouth St. Pierre
River, Verdun—August—(Holmes’ Zzania clambosa.)

PHEGOPTERIS POLYPODIOIDES, Fee.—Beech fern—Mount
Royal Park—July. |

PHEGOPTERIS DRYOPTERIS, Fee.—Beech fern—Mount
Royal Park—July.

CYSTOPTERIS BULBIFERA, Bernhardi.i—Bladder fern—
shaded ravines on Mount Royal Park—July.

ONOCLEA STRUTHIOPTERIS—Hoffman.—Ostrich Fern—

August—Mountain swamp—( Holmes’ Struthiopteris Penn-
sylvanica.)

LYCOPODIUM COMPLANATUM, L.—Ground Pine—common
—August—(Holmes.)

CoNTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN Botany.
By James M. Macovun.
VILE.

ANEMONE NARCISSIFLORA, L.

Mount Head, Burrough Bay, B.C., 1894. (A. W. £.
Canavan.) Not before recorded from Canada.

406 Canadian Record of Science.

RANUNCULUS AQUATILIS, L., var. CONFERVOIDES, Wat.

In pools,” Cape Chudleigh, Hudson Strait, 1884. (Dr.
Robt. Bell.) Only Canadian record.

CIMICIFUGA ELATA, Nutt.

Mount Chean, Chilliwhack, Fraser Valley, B.C., Aug.
Ist, 1895, alt. 7,000 feet, (Rev. Herbert H. Gowen.) New
to Canada.

LATHYRUS PRATENSIS, Linn.

Well established in old fields at The Ledge, Dufferin, a
few miles from St. Stephen, "N.B. 1895. Collected by
F. A. Pickett; communicated by Mr. J. Vroom. Only
other record, Hamilton, Ont.

LEPTARRHENA PYROLIFOLIA, R. Br.

Additional stations for this species are: mountains in
the vicinity of West Kootanie Lake, B.C.; mountains of
the Selkirk Range, above 4,000 feet; and mountains of
the Gold Range, B.C., above 5,000 feet. Not found east
of the Columbia River along the line of the Can. Pace. Ry.,
though collected by Dr. Dawson in the Rocky Mountaius
in Lat. 49° 30’, and by Drummond in Lat. 52°.

SAXIFRAGA AIZOON, Jacq.

In moist gravel, Charlton Island, James Bay, 1887.
(Jas. M. Macown.) Not recorded before from Hudson Bay.

SAXIFRAGA BRONCHIALIS, L.

Mountains north of Griffin Lake, B.C.; Eagle Pass, B.C.
(John Macoun.) Harry Creek, Lake Okanagan, B.C. (Jas.
McEvoy.) Not before recorded between the Coast Range
and the Rocky Mountains. ~

1 The Geographical limits given in these papers refer to Canada only,

ee ee es a

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 407

SAXIFRAGA HETERANTHA, Hook.

Toad Mountain, Kootanie Lake, B.C. (Jas. M. Macoun.)
Protection Island, Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, and Mount
Arrowsinith, V.I. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded
from Vancouver Island. |

SAXIFRAGA INTEGRIFOLIA, Hook.

Hillsides at Sproat, Columbia River, B.C., 1890. (John
Macouwn.) Not before recorded from interior of British
Columbia.

SAXIFRAGA LYALLII, Engler.

By alpine rivulets, Queest Creek, Shuswap Lake, B.C.;
mountains at Griffin Lake, B.C., 1890. (Jas. M1. Macown.)
Western limit.

SAXIFRAGA NIVALIS, L.

Borders of coulees, Cypress Hills, Assa., 1894. (John
Macoun, Herb. No. 4921.) Cornwall Hills, west of Ash-
eroft, B.C. (Jas. McEvoy.) Francis River, Lat. 61°, Yukon
District. (Dr. Geo. M. Dawson.)

SAXIFRAGA OCCIDENTALIS, Wat.

Eagle Pass, west of Revelstoke, B.C., 1890. (John
Macoun.) All western references under S. Virginiensis,
in Prof. Maeoun’s Catalogue, go here.

SAXIFRAGA OPPOSITIFOLIA, Linn.

Mount Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C., alt. 6,500 feet.
(Jas. M. Macoun.) Not known to occur elsewhere near
the line of the Can. Pac. Ry. between the Rocky Mountains
and the Pacific.

SAXIFRAGA PUNCTATA, L.
Lat. 63°, Long. 102°, 1893. (Jas. W. Fyrrell.). Wirst

1 Whenever herbarium numbers are given, they are the numbers under which speci-
mens have been distributed from the herbarium of the Geological Survey of Canada.

408 Canadian Record of Science.

record east of Rocky Mountains. Mountain slopes south
of Tulameen River, B.C., alt. 5,000. (Dr. Geo. M. Dawson.)
Mount Chean, Fraser Valley, B.C. (Rev. H. H. Gowen.)
On rocks: in a torrent, Mount Arrowsmith, Vancouver
Island, alt. 2,000 feet. (John Macoun.) Mount Rapho,
Bradfield Inlet, B.C. (4H. W. £. Canavan.) Not before
recorded in Canada west of Selkirk Mountains.

SAXIFRAGA RANUNCULIFOLIA, Hook.

Crevices of damp rocks at Sproat, Columbia River, B.C.,
alt. 4,000 feet. (John Macoun.)

SAXIFRAGA RIVULARIS, L.

On lateral moraines at Roger’s Pass, Selkirk Mountains,
B.C., alt. 7,500 feet; crevices of rocks, Mount Queest,
Shuswap Lake, B.C., alt. 6,000 feet. (Jas. M. Macoun.)
Not before,recorded west of Rocky Mountains.

BOYKINIA NUTTALL,

Saxifraga elata, Nutt.; Torr. & Gray, FL, Vol. I., p. 575.

Grassy thickets, Cowichan River, Vancouver Island,
1887. (John Macoun.) Near Victoria, Vancouver Island.
(J. K. Anderson.) American botanists, since the publi-
cation of Torrey and Gray’s Flora, have, with few excep-
tions, made Saxifraga elata, Nutt., a synonym of Boykinia
occidentalis, Torr. & Gray. Prof. Greene in Flora Fran-
ciscana (Pts. I—II., p. 190) adopts Nuttall’s specific name,
but describes Boykinia occidentalis. Nuttall says “more
or less hirsute with long brownish hairs ;’ Greene says
“glabrous or glandular pubescent ;’ Nuttall says “a very
remarkable, robust species ;’ Greene says “ slender.” The
leaves of Boykinia occidentalis are “thin—membranaceous,”
in our specimens referred here they are thick—coriaceous.
The stem and petioles in our specimens are densely clothed
with long brown or brownish hairs, and this character with

:
:

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 409

the thick leaves makes it impossible to include them with

_ Boykinia occidentalis. Nuttall’s description of Sazxifraga

elata answers so well for these plants that they must be
referred. to that species. We have many sheets of Boy-
kinia occidentalis as described by Prof. Greene. .

_ There seems no good reason why Sazxifraga elata should
ever have been made a synonym of Boykinia occidentalis,
but since this has been done and the name Boykinia elata
used it seems necessary to re-name Nuttall’s plant.

TELLIMA TENELLA, Walp.

Eagle Pass, west of Revelstoke, B.C.; Lytton, B.C.;
Yale, B.C.; Cedar Hill and Burnside Road, near Victoria,
Vancouver Island. (John Macoun.) Telegraph Creek,
Lat. 58°, B.C. (Dr. Geo. M. Dawson.) Recorded before
only from Cypress Hills, Assa.

TIARELLA LACINIATA, Hook.

Additional stations for this plant are Union Village,
Comox, Vancouver Island, Herb. No. 227, and Goldstream,
Vancouver Island, Herb. No. 228. (John Macoun.) Dr.
Robinson considers this merely a form of T. trifoliata, but
the characters separating it from that species are so well
marked in all our specimens that Hooker’s 7. laciniata
seems certainly to be at least a good variety. The con-
spicuous characters are terminal leaflet deeply 3-cleft,
the lateral ones 2-cleft, the segments laciniate-pinnatifid.
We have no intermediate forms between this and 7. ¢ri-
Joliata.

MITELLA BREWERI, Gray.

New stations for this species are Queest Creek, Shuswap
Lake, B.C., alt. 5,000 feet. (Jas M. Macoun.) Mountains
at Griffin Lake, B.C., alt. 6,000 feet; mountains near Ains-
worth, Kootanie Lake, B.C., alt. 5,500 feet; Asoulcan

410 Canadian Record of Science.

Glacier, Selkirk Mountains, B.C., alt. 5,500 feet. (John
Macown.)

CHRYSOSPLENIUM ALTERNIFOLIUM, L.

New stations for this species are Kicking Horse Lake,
Rocky Mountains. (John Macoun.) Between the North
Thompson and Bonaparte Rivers, B.C. (Jas. M. Macoun.)
Lat. 62° 40’, Long. 103°. (Jas. W. Tyrrell.) Dease River,
Lat. 59°, B.C. (Dr. Geo. M. Dawson.)

PARNASSIA FIMBRIATA, Koenig.

Mount Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C., alt. 6,000 feet.
(Jas. M. Macown.) Mountains north of Griffin Lake, B.C. ;
Barclay Sound, Vancouver Island. (Join Macoun.) Not
before recorded west of Selkirk Mountains.

PARNASSIA KOTZEBUEI, Cham. & Schl.

Damp banks, North Twin Island, James Bay, Hudson
Bay; Mount Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C.; Avalanche
Mt., Selkirk Mts., B.C., alt. 7,500 feet. (Jas. M. Macoun.)
Not before recorded from Hudson Bay or west of Rocky
Mountains in Canada.

PARNASSIA PARVIFLORA, DC.

Grassy banks, Severn River, Keewatin ; head of Dead-
man River, B.C. (Jas. M. Macown.) Western limit.
RIBES AUREUM, Pursh.

Seven Persons’ Coulee, Medicine Hat, Assa. (John
Macouwn, Herb. No. 4929.)

RIBES BRACTEOSUM, Douel.

Low grounds, New Westminster Junction, B.C.; Burrard
Inlet, B.C. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded from
mainland of British Columbia.

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 411

Rises HupsonIANuM, Rich.

In swamps at Madoc, Hastings Co., Ont. (W. Scott.)
Eastern limit.

RIBES LAXIFLORUM, Pursh.

In damp woods near the summit of the Selkirk Range,
B.C. (John Macoun.) Eastern limit.

RIBES VISCOSISSIMUM, Pursh.

New stations for this species are Sicamous, B.C., and
Deer Park, Lower Arrow Lake, B.C. (John Macoun.)
SEDuM DovuaG.Lasu, Hook.

Deer Park and Sproat, Columbia River, B.C.; Sicamous,
B.C.; Mount Finlayson and Victoria Arm, Vancouver
Island. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of
Rocky Mountains.

DrosERA ANGLICA, Hudson.

Revelstoke, B.C.; Horne Lake, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun). Not before recorded from interior of British.
Columbia nor from Vancouver Island.

MYRIOPHYLLUM SPICATUM, L.

In pools on the Indian Reservation at Kamloops, B.C. ;
Somas River, near Sproat Lake, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded west of Selkirk Mountains.

MYRIOPHYLLUM VERTICILLATUM, L.

Riviere des Aulnais, Hebertville, Que. (Sé. Cyr.) Not
before recorded from Quebec.
HIPPURIS MONTANA, Ledeb.

Peaty places on all the higher mountains of the Selkirk

412 Canadian Record of Scvence.

Range, B.C., near the Can. Pac. Ry.; mountains north of
Griffin Lake, B.C. (John Macouwn.) |

CENOTHERA PUMILA, L.

On a barren, uncultivated slope at New Westminster,
B.C., 1895. (A. J. Hill.) Not before recorded west of
Ontario. Perhaps introduced, but thought to be iidige-
nous by Mr. Hill.

CENOTHERA ANDINA, Nutt.

In a depression on the prairie near Police Point, Medi-
cine Hat, Assa., 1894, Herb. No. 7531. On prairies near
Pend d’Orielle Post, Milk River, Assa., 1895. Herb. No.
A1001. (John Macown.) New to Canada.

LYTHRUM SALICARIA, L.

Near the old rifle range, Ottawa, Ont., 1895. (4. Z.
Tourchat.) Not recorded from Eastern Ontario. Mr.
Tourchat’s specimens are of the glabrous form with long
style and medium stamens. All our other specimens are
pubescent or hoary and have medium styles and long
stamens. |

SOLIDAGO LANCEOLATA, L.

Okanagan Lake, B.C. (Jas. McEvoy.) Not recorded
west of Rocky Mountains. *

ADENOCAULON BICOLOR, Hook.

Indian Reserve, Cape Croker, North Bruce, Ont., 1895.
(A. Y. Massey.) Eastern limit. Not before collected in
Canada east of the Rocky Mountains.

AMBROSIA TRIFIDA, L.

Along the Can. Pace. Ry., at Revelstoke, B.C.; barn-yards
near Victoria, Vancouver Island, Herb. No. 437. (John
Macoun.) Probably introduced in both cases. Not re-

Contributions to Canadian Botany. ~~ 413

corded west of Manitoba. The Cypress Hills specimens
referred here in Prof. Macoun’s Catalogue of Can. Plants
are var. integrifolia.

RUDBECKIA PINNATA, Vent.

Vicinity of Sandwich,Ont. (John Macoun. Alex. Wherry.)
New to Canada.

MICROSERIS NUTANS, Gray.

Amongst grass on hillsides at Deer Park ‘and Sproat,
Columbia River, B.C.,1890. (John Macoun.) Credited to
British Columbia by Gray, but not before collected by
Canadian botanists.

CREPIS RUNCINATA, Torr. & Gray.

Dampish spots at Revelstoke, B.C.,1890. (John Macoun.)
Not recorded west of Rocky Mountains.

CREPIS INTERMEDIA, Gray, var. GRACILIS, Gray.

Dry slopes at Spence’s Bridge, B,C. ,1889. (John Macoun.)
New to Canada.

LoBELIA KaALmil, L.

Rocky shores of Kootanie Lake at Ainsworth, B.C.
(John Macoun.) Western limit.

SPECULARIA PERFOLIATA, A. DC.

Sproat, Columbia River, B.C. (Dr. Geo. M. Dawson.)
Ainsworth, Kootanie Lake, B.C., and Agassiz, B.C. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded from interior of British
Columbia.

HETEROCODON RARIFLORUM, Nutt.

Grassy slopes at Sproat, Columbia River, B.C. (John
Macoun.) Not before recorded from mainland of British
Columbia.

414 © Canadian Record of Science.

PTEROSPORA ANDROMEDA, Nutt.

Wooded mountain slopes west of Lake Okanagan, B.C.,
1890. (Jas. McEvoy.) Not before recorded from main-
land of British Columbia.

GENTIANA DOUGLASIANA, Bong.

Mount Head, Burrough Bay, B.C., 1894. (. W. £.
Canavan.) Yakoun Lake, Queen Charlotte Islands, 1895.
(Dr. C. F. Newcombe.)

GENTIANA HUMILIS, Stev.

On the north side of an old creek bed on the south
bank of the Bow River at Langevin Bridge, Alberta, 1894.
(J. J. Morgan.) New to Canada. |

GENTIANA LINEARIS, Freel. Miiiem. et:
Wt pooh
Not rare in the interior of Labrador from the East Main
River on the west to the Hamilton River on the east.

(A. P. Low.)
PHLOX MACULATA, L.

Ravine at Granby, Que., 1892. (Wm. Scott.) High Falls,
Lievre River, Que., 1895. (&. B. Whyte.) New to Canada.
BARTSIA ALPINA, L.

Lake Petitsikapau, Hamilton River, Labrador, 300 miles
from the coast. (A. P. Low.) Not before recorded from
interior of Labrador.

BRUNELLA VULGARIS, L.
Attikonak Branch, Hamilton River, Labrador, 1894. ~
(A. P. Low.) Not before recorded from Labrador.

(JUERCUS PRINUS, L.

A few trees grow near the St. Lawrence River at Lans-
downe, Ont. Noted by the Rev. C. J: Young in 1894,

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 415

fruiting specimens collected in 1895. This is the only
authentic record for this species east of Niagara. The
undulately-crenate leaves of this species, pale and minutely
downy beneath, make it very easy of determination. Speci-
mens from the Bay of Quinte are Quercus Muhlenbergii,
(Q. prinoides of Macoun’s Cat. of Can. Plants.)

TOFIELDIA GLUTINOSA, Willd.

Attikonak Branch, Hamilton River, Labrador, 1894.
(A. P. Low.) Not before recorded from Labrador.

DULICHIUM SPATHACEUM, Pers. °®

Craigellachie, Eagle Pass, B.C.; Stanley Park, Van-
couver, B.C. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded between
the Saskatchewan and Vancouver Island. 7

CAREX SCIRPOIDEA, Michx.

On the route between Sandy Lake and Lake Michi-
kamau, Labrador, 1894. (4. P. Low.) Not before recorded
from Labrador.

CAREX CAPILLARIS, Linn.

On the route between Sandy Lake and Lake Michi-
kamau, Labrador, 1894. (A. P. Low.) Not before recorded
from Labrador.

ALOPECURUS GENICULATUS, Linn., var. ARISTULATUS, Munro.

On the route between Sandy Lake and Lake Michi-
kamau, Labrador, 1894. (A. P. Low.) Not before recorded
from Labrador.

MUNROA SQUARROSA, Torr.

Near the police barracks, Medicine Hat, Assa., 1894.
(John Macown, Herb. No. 7452.)

416 Canadian Record of Seience.

On THE NoriaAn or “ Upper LAURENTIAN” For-
MATION OF CANADA,
By Frank D. Apvams, M.A.Sc., Pu. D.

(Translated from the German by N. J. Giroux, Esq., C.E., of the
Geological Survey of Canada. )—Concluded.

IV. VARIOUS OTHER ANORTHOSITE AREAS.
(a) IN LABRADOR.

Although the first specimens both of labradorite and
hypersthene, so characteristic of the anorthosite, were
brought from the coast %f Labrador, their distribution
and mode of occurrence in this distant region is as yet
but comparatively little known. That they really come
from anorthosite areas which are similar to those above
described, and which belong to the same great system of
intrusions, is, however, evidenced by what has been re-
ported of them by several travellers.

The opalescent labradorite and the hypersthene of
Labrador were mostly found in loose blocks and frag-
ments which belong to the drift formation, and lie
abundantly scattered about on St. Paul’s Island and in.
the neighbourhood of Nain. But, according to Reichel,’
Steinhauer,? and Bindschedler,? a rock which contains
them is found «i seéw in the neighbourhood of the
latter place. The main mass, however, according to the
statements of Lieber,’ Steinhauer, and Bindschedler, must
be situated farther inland; the latter gives the most
accurate information about it in stating that it occurs at
the north-west end of a large lake about 30 or 35 nautical
miles north-west of Nain. He was there himself in the

1 Reichel, Labrador, Bemerkungun uber Land und Leute. Petermann’s Mitth.
1863, p. 121.

2 Steinhauer, Note relative to the Geology of the Coast of Labrador. Trans. Geol.
Soce., Vol. 1L., 1814.

3 Bindschedler, quoted by Wichmann, Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. geol. Ges. 1884, p. 486.

4 Lieber, Die amerikanische astronomische Expedition nach Labrador im Juli 1860.
Petermann’s Mitth. 1861, p. 213.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 417

year 1882 and found the rock only in one place, where.
however, it formed a high cliff. The extent of this mass
is therefore not known, and for that reason its position
only is indicated on the accompanying map.

It is to Packard that we are mostly indebted for our
present knowledge of the geology of the coast of Labra-
dor. In his memoir entitled “ Observations on the Drift
Phenomena of Labrador and Maine,” published in 1865,
he gives a general review of the geology of the southern
half of the east shore of the peninsula, which is repeated,
with a few trifling alterations, in his book entitled “The
Labrador Coast,’ published in 1891. In the latter he
gives a small geological sketch map. Speaking generally,
the peninsula of Labrador consists, as far as we know, of
Laurentian gneiss, with certain occurrences of eruptive
rocks. The gneiss has, generally, a rather granite-like
character, and probably belongs to the Lower Laurentian
or Ottawa gneiss. On the latter, however, there lies, in
a trough (almost 125 miles long by 25 miles wide, which
follows the coast all along from Domino harbour to Cape
Webuc), a series of beds of a light-coloured gneiss, rich
in quartz, better foliated, and often containing much
hornblende. Lieber called this rock the “Domino-gneiss.”
A peculiar variety of trap is constantly found in con-
nection with this. Packard says that it represents a
higher, and probably an unconformable, group of Lauren-
tian rocks which correspond with the Grenville division
of the interior of Canada. |

Near Square Island, toward the southern end of the
coast, in the neighbourhood of the strait of Belle-Isle,
there occurs, along with the lower gneiss, a rock concern-
ing which Packard says: “There occurs in large conical
hills what I judge to be the great anorthosite formation
of Logan and Hunt, composed of large crystalline masses
of labradorite, with a little quartz, and coarse crystalline

418 Canadian Record of Science.

masses of hornblende. The labradorite is of a smoky
colour, very lustrous, translucent, and opalescent, with
cleavage surfaces often two inches in diameter, and on
some of the faces presents a greenish reflection. This is.
but a shght approach to the green-blue reflections of the
precious labradorite, which I have seen only at Hopedale,
where we obtained specimens brought from the interior
by the Eskimos. As the rock weathers, the greenish
hornblende crystals project in masses, sometimes two.
inches in diameter. The gneiss rests on the south side
of the hills. From the top of the hills here can be seen
huge gneiss mountains at least two thousand feet high,
rising in vast swells at a distance of fifteen to twenty
miles in the interior, while the bay is filled with innumer-.
able skiers and islets of gneiss.”

This quotation is taken from the book. In the above-
mentioned essay he calls the mineral which accom-.
panies plagioclase, hypersthene and not hornblende. We
probably have here, as Packard says, a large area of
anorthosite in the southern part of Labrador. As already
mentioned, the “Domino” or upper gneiss is invariably
accompanied by what Packard designates as “overflows.
of a peculiar trap rock evidently of the age of the Domino
gneiss, which it has somewhat disturbed.” The trap is
said to have a coarse porphyritic structure, and to consist
of coarsely foliated masses of hypersthene and smoke-
grey labradorite, and to resemble exactly that which has
been described from Square Island, and which, according
to Packard, has originated from the remelting and ex
trusion of the other anorthosite.

This goes, therefore, to prove that in Labrador the
anorthosite occurs in two entirely different and widely
different regions: First to the north, in the interior, and
in the neighbourhood of Nain, where the precious anor-
thosite occurs; and secondly, in the southern part of the:
peninsula, in the neighbourhood of Square Island.

a

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 419

The mineralogical composition of the rock which con-
tains the precious labradorite has been the subject of
investigation ever since this mineral has been known.
Occasional hand specimens of the rock. which have come
to Europe with shipments of labradorite have been there
examined by many petrographers, and it has been found
to vary considerably. It has been called a gabbro} a
norite,” an olivine-norite*> a labradorite rock, etc.; and
whilst considered a voleanic rock by some, it has been
considered by others, on account of its irregular granula-
tion, to be rather referable to the crystalline schists.‘

Wichmann also described, from the same region, a
diallage-magnetite rock, with olivine, plagioclase and
biotite as accessories. |

The anorthosite masses of this northern area have
evidently the same character as those described above
from the Morin and Saguenay districts, where hand speci-
mens of all the varieties may sometimes be collected in
one and the same locality. Wichmann has analysed the
labradorite rock, which consists of plagioclase and only a
little augite (see table of analyses, p. 436, No. XIX.) He
says that this is the prevailing rock about Nain. Bell,’ on
the contrary, in his geological description of this part of
the coast of Labrador, does not mention any such rock as
occurring in the neighbourhood of Nain; he mentions that
the mountains in the immediate vicinity consist of a
“pale grey gneiss.” Cohen also mentions quartz as an
ingredient of the hand specimens he examined. This
mineral was also found in small quantity in the anortho-

1 M. Cohen, Das Labradorit-fuhrende Gestein an der Kuste von Labrador. Neues
Jahrb. 1885, I., p, 188.—H. Vogelsang, Sur le Labradorite coloré de la Cété du Labrador.
Arch. Néerland, T, III., 1868.

2 J. Roth, Uber die Verkommen von Labrador. Sitz. Berlin. Akad. 1883, p. 697.

3 Van Werveke, Eigenthumliche Zwillingsbildungen, etc. Neues Jahrb. 1883, II.,
p. 9%.

4 A.Wichmann, Uber Gesteine von Labrador. Zeitschr. d, Deutsch. Geol. Gesellsch.
1884, p. 485.

5 Bell, Report of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1882-84, D. D., p. 11. 3]

420 Canadian Record of Scvence.

site of Chateau Richer, as well as in that of St. Pauls Bay
and of New York. It is, however, probably of secondary
origin.

(0) IN NEWFOUNDLAND.

This occurrence was first mentioned by Jukes,’ and was
later briefly described by Murray in his “ Report of the
Geological Survey of Newfoundland, 1873,” p. 335. The
anorthosite occurs, along with Laurentian gneisses, in the
region of the Indian Head, Cairn Mountain, and of the
Little Barachois River at the south-west extremity of
the Island of Newfoundland. Its exact composition is
not yet known. On Murray’s geological map of New-
foundland, the indicated area has a length of 60 miles;
it is comparatively narrow, and is divided into two parts
by a tongue of Carboniferous rocks which partly cover it.

The only hand-specimen of this rock which could be
obtained came from Cairn Mountain. It is rather coarsely
eranular and exactly resembles many of the anorthosites
of Morin and the Saguenay, except that it is reddish in
colour while those from the latter places are dark blue
or grey. It consists almost exclusively of plagioclase;
under the microscope, as in the case of so many anortho-
sites, cataclastic structure in all stages is to be observed.
Some individuals have curved twinning lamelle others
are already bent and broken; granular plagioclase is found
between them. This finely granulated material forms the
prineipal part of the rock, and in the hand-specimens the
larger cystal fragments are imbedded in it. The ordinary
inclusions in the plagioclase are very numerous but very
tine, and resemble a fog or mist, giving, as already men-
tioned, a reddish and not a dark blue colour to the rock.
Of other ingredients only a few grains of pale green
augite were found, often altered into a mixture of chlorite,
epidote, and pale green hornblende, with a few small
grains of iron ore.

1 Jukes, A General Report on the Geological Survey of Newfoundland, 1839-1840.
London, 1843.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 421

(ce) ON THE NORTH SHORE OF THE GULF OF St. LAWRENCE.

We know that anorthosites occur, associated with
Laurentian gneisses, at many points of this coast, but we
possess little information concerning the extent and strati-
graphical relations of the several occurrences.

Hind’ and Cayley,* who ascended the Moisie River and
its arm, the Clearwater. met with a mass of this rock
which extends from the mouth of the North East River
to a point four miles up the Clearwater. This is a dis-
tance of nearly twenty miles, after which the gneiss occurs
again. We do not yet know how wide this area is, but
Hind ascertained that the Clearwater flows through a

-gorge, 2,000 feet deep, cut in the anorthosite. Details of

the structure and composition of the rock have not yet
been ascertained.

Westward of the Moisie, anorthosite was found in large
exposures at different places along the whole Coast as far
as Pentecost River. Richardson undertook a geological
survey of this region in the year 1869° The anorthosite,
which here again presents many varieties in character
and appearance, was described by him as coloured bluish
or greenish and nearly identical with that of the Morin
area. Gneiss occurs, likewise, on the coast, and we have
no knowledge as to how far the anorthosite may extend
to the north. These occurrences are, however, of par-
ticular interest, because the anorthosite is here often
“bedded,” or foliated. The parallel structure is indicated
by grains of mica, garnet, iron ore, hypersthene, ete.; and
the apparent strike is on an average east by west, gener-
ally with a northerly dip varying from 10° to 80°. The
general strike of the gneiss in this region is nearly north
and south, according to Richardson, who concludes from

1 Hind, Explorations in the Interior of the Labrador Peninsula. London, 188
Observations on the Supposed Glacial Drift in the Labrador Peninsula, ete.—Quart.
Jour. Geol. Soc., Jan. 1564.

2 Cayley, Up the River Moisie.—Tr. Lit. & Hist. Soc. of Quebec, 188, p. 73.

3 Richardson, Report of the Geological Survey of Canada, 1866-1869.

422 Canadian Record of Science.

this that the anorthosite is a sedimentary formation which
lies unconformably on the gneiss.

This occurrence became frequently cited as a proof that
the anorthosite forms a series of beds which overlie the
gneiss unconformably.

Richardson’s examination of the district was, however,
very general, and no one has visited the district to cor-
roborate his observations. It may therefore be advisable
not to draw from the evidences adduced by him the hasty
conclusion that these rocks here exhibit stratigraphical
relations differing widely from those in other places.

The gneiss often shows, according to him, “little or no
evidence of stratification ;” and in the only place where
the anorthosite was found in contact with the gneiss, the
latter was a “reddish quartzose granitoid rock offering no
evidence of stratification.” He does not adduce any exam-
ple of gneiss and anorthosite being found in close proximity
with different strikes. A careful investigation of the
geognostical relations would probably show that here, as
in the Morin area and elsewhere, the alleged proof of the
unconformity is only apparent, and that in reality the
schistose varieties of the rock are really only portions of
eruptive masses which acquired their schistose structure
through pressure. The only hand-specimen of anorthosite
of this part of the coast which I have seen came from the
“Bay of Seven Islands,” and exhibited throughout the
properties of a massive eruptive rock.

At Sheldrake, about 60 miles east of the mouth of the
Moisie, the coast, according to Selwyn,' likewise consists
of “massive labradorite rocks,” with beautiful opalescent
labradorite. The rock extended to a considerable distance
inland, but it is not known how far. It is possible, as
Selwyn conjectures, that it is continuous with the area
above described on the Moisie River, and that the latter

1 Selwyn, Summary Report of the Geological Survey of Canada, 1889, p. 4.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 423

is in turn continuous with the area described by Richard-
son further west along the coast.

As early as the year 1833, Bayfield! mentioned labra-
dorite and hypersthene as occurring farther eastward on
the coast of the St. Lawrence, at a place about five leagues
east of Ste. Genevievre, or about north of the middle of
the Island of Anticosti.

(d) ON THE NORTH SHORE OF THE RIveEr St. LAWRENCE:

Anorthosite occurs in extended areas on the north
shore of the River St. Lawrence, east of the City of Que-
bee, at two localities. The first, near Chateau Richer,
below Quebec, and the second in the neighbourhood of
St. Urbain and St. Paul’s Bay, further east. Both ocecur-
rences are quite extensive and probably parts of the same
great mass, which may possibly have an extension of
about 70 miles along the river. These areas have not
yet been carefully investigated; a short description of
them is found in the Report of the Geological Survey of
Canada for 1863. They are now being mapped by Mr.
A. P. Low, of the Geological Survey of Canada, whose
report on them will appear shortly.

Particular attention has been directed to the St. Urbain
area, because considerable beds of ilmenite were found
in it. This mineral is very rich in titanic acid, and is
here and there associated with rutile. Many years ago
au attempt was made on a large scale to smelt this bed
for iron ; blast furnaces were erected and plans made for
the establishment of a whole settlement. The work, how-
ever, was abandoned, as the ore was too refractory owing
to its high percentage of titanic acid.

I am indebted to Mr. Low for a series of small hand-
specimens of the rocks of both these localities, from which
thin sections were prepared. Their study shows that

1 Bayfield, Notes on the Geology of the North Coast of the St. Lawrence.—Trans.
Geol. Soc. of London, Vol. V., 1883.

424 Canadian Record of Science.

the rock consists almost entirely of plagioclase. Nearly
all the sections show a distinct cataclastie structure; and
the remnants of the larger individuals of plagioclase’ are
sometimes still to be observed. Moreover, a few grains
of iron ore are always present, and in many other thin
sections a few grains of pyroxene, hornblende, or biotite
were likewise observed. A little quartz is also present
at times, and may be of secondary origin.

The rock of Chateau Richer occupies a peculiar position
in as far as its plagioclase, at least in one case, was more
acidic than in any of the anorthosite occurrences hereto-
fore investigated. Analyses made by Sterry Hunt are
noted on page 436, No. I, If, III. These analyses also
furnish the proof that the large individuals of plagioclase
and the crushed plagioclase, which forms the ground mass
or paste, have, as above mentioned, the same chemical
composition.

(¢) IN THE STATE OF NEW York, U.S. A.

As early as 1842, Emmons mentioned in his “ Report
on the Geology of the Second District of the State of
New York,” the presence of a large mass of this rock in
the County of Essex, New York. It occurs at the eastern
point of the large peninsula, or, properly speaking, island,
of Laurentian rocks, which, as above mentioned, here ex-
tend from Canada into the United States. The extent
of the area is such that its boundaries approximately
coincide with those of Essex County. Emmons gives an
excellent general description of the rocks in the area;
but since his report was written long before the beginning
of modern petrography it refers only to their macroscopical
character. In the year 1876, Leeds, in his paper entitled
“Notes upon the Lithology of the Adirondacks,”! gives

the results of a further examination of several hand- -

specimens of these rocks, treating, however exclusively,
1 Thirtieth Annual Report of the New York State Museum of Natural History, 1576.

————

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 425

of their chemical composition. Four analyses made by
him are noted on page 436.

If we add to these works a short essay by Hall,’ we
have all that has been published up to date on this area,
which certainly deserves a more careful study.2. The pre-
cise relations of these anorthosites to the surrounding
gneiss are not yet known. Emmons says they gradually
pass into one another, whereas Hall maintains that the
anorthosites le unconformable on the gneiss. He goes
even so far as to pronounce the crystalline limestone
which occurs with the gneiss to be a distinct series uncon-
formably overlying the gneiss and the anorthosite. All
the other geologists have considered these here as in Canada
to be members of the Laurentian. These conclusions
were, moreover, drawn by him without making an accu-
rate geological investigation of the whole district, which-
alone, in such a series of folded rocks, would render it
possible to form an accurate opinion. Such an investi-
gation would in all probability show that the anorthosite
here cuts through the gneiss as it does in Canada.

The rock is sometimes massive, sometimes indistinctly
streaked or fohated, showing sometimes very clearly the
peculiar brecciated structure which was described in the
rocks of Morin and of the Saguenay, where fragments,
often of considerable size, of the dark coloured and fre-
quently opalescent plagioclase are imbedded in a lighter
coloured mass of the same mineral. Here likewise the
plagioclase predominates, the rock consisting often entirely
of this mineral. Hypersthene, diallage, hornblende, biotite,
garnet and iron ore sometimes occur along with the pla-
gioclase. Epidote and prehnite were found as secondary

1 Hall, Note on the Geological Position of the Serpentine Limestone of Northern
New York, etce.—Am. Jour. Sc., July, 1876.

2 NotTe.—Since the publication of the present,paper, in 1893, several important con-

tributions to our knowledge of this district have appeared by J. F. Kemp, C. H. Smyth,
Jr., and C. R. Van Hise. See list of papers on page 442.

426 | Canadian Record of Science.

constituents. According to Emmons, quartz is not found
in the rock itself, but occurs only in small infiltrated °
veins and fissures.

A hand-specimen of this anorthosite from the neigh-
bourhood of the Poke o’ Moonshine Pass, in Essex’ County,
for which I am indebted to Professor G. H. Williams, did
not differ at all from the more highly granular varieties
of the Morin and Saguenay areas. It is rather coarse,
granular, grey in colour, and composed almost exclusively
of plagioclase. This mineral has a white or grey colour,
but a few dark blue fragments of larger grains indicate
that the rock has undergone a thorough granulation. We
find, furthermore, a lttle pyroxene, which is almost com-
pletely changed into zoisite, epidote and chlorite, and a
few small red, isotropic garnets, whose presence indicates
that the hand-specimens probably came from near the
limit of the area, and a few grains of rutile. A little
quartz is also present, the grains of which are at times
intermixed with the feldspar, producing a kind of grano-
phyric structure. It might be inferred from this that
the quartz 1s an original constituent, but this cannot be
definitely demonstrated.

The relation existing between these rocks, and the cha-
racter of the iron ores which accompany them, which has
already been discussed above, is also discernible in this
area. Whenever iron ores are found in the anorthosite,
they without exception contain titanic acid, while the
large deposits in the Laurentian gneisses, in the neigh-
bonrhood of Port Henry and elsewhere, consist of mag-
netite free from titanic acid. As far as can be ascertained
from existing descriptions, these New York anorthosites
resemble in all respects those found in the Canadian
Laurentian.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 427

(f) ON.THE EAST COAST OF THE GEORGIAN Bay,
ON LAKE Huron.

Bigsby' described, long ago, an occurrence of anorthosite
on the north-east coast of Lake Huron, which, according
to him, has a breadth of five miles. He also mentions
that the rock is well exposed and has a massive character,
but gradually merges into gneiss. The feldspar is greenish-
blue and grey in colour; it forms erystals of an average
diameter of about one inch, and sometimes much larger.
Unfortunately, the locality is not indicated exactly, but
according to his description it must be in the neighbour-
hood of Parry Sound, and I have therefore on the map
indicated the occurrence in that vicinity. According to
Bell,” Long Inlet, ten and a half miles long and situated
farther south on the same coast, is likewise cut in a band
of white granular plagioclase, mixed with a little quartz
and black mica. |

(g) ELSEWHERE IN CANADA.

The occurrences of anorthosite above described are the
only large and important ones that are known. Elsewhere
in the Laurentian, small bands and bosses of the rock are
found, but they are too small and unimportant to deserve
further mention. They occur, for the most part, in the
neighbourhood of the masses above described. Other
occurrences have been referred to this group of rocks,
but it is not known as yet whether they really belong
to it. Vennor, for example, mentions. one in the Lauren-
tian, north of the east end of Lake Ontario. There is
also an occurrence in the vicinity of Dolin’s Lake, near
the City of St. John, New Brunswick. An examination
of a specimen from. the last mentioned locality shows it
to be an olivine-gabbro.?

I Bigsby, A List of Minerals and Organic Remains occurring in the Canadas.—Am.

Jour. of Sc., §, 1824.
2 Bell, Rep. of the Geological Survey of Canada, 1876-77, p. 198,

3 NoTE.—See also a paper by Dr. A. C. Lawson, which has appeared since the pub-
lication of the present paper, entitled ‘‘The Anorthosytes of the Minnesota Coast of
Lake Superior.’”’—Geol. and Nat..Hist. Surv. of- Minn. - Bull. No. 8, 1893.

428 Canadian Record of Science.

V. AGE OF THE ANORTHOSITE INTRUSIONS AND
THEIR RELATION TO THE MARGIN OF THE
ARCHAAN PROTAXIS.

The North American Continent, as is well known, is
built up around a skeleton or nucleus of crystalline rocks,
called by Dana the protaxis of the continent, and by
which the general outline of the continent is defined.

The most important portion of this protaxis is the large
area of Laurentian, together with the Huronian, which hes.
almost entirely within the boundaries of the Dominion,
forming the “ Canadian shield,” with the bordering ranges.
of the coast of Labrador. It is a large triangular area,
whose sides, towards the south-east and the south-west,
form tangents to the arctic circle, and which, towards the -
north, extends up into the polar regions far beyond the
limits of exploration, where, however, it is overlaid to a
considerable extent by more recent rocks, - A range of
these Archean rocks extends likewise along the Atlantic
coast, where it appears, with certain interruptions, in the
Appalachian chain, extending from Georgia, in the United
States, to the Gaspé peninsula in Canada. It is succeeded
to the east by a second range, partly under water, and
portions of which are seen in Nova Scotia and elsewhere
along the Atlantic coast. Corresponding to these two
areas, there occur also, on the western side of the conti-
nent, nuclei of these old crystalline rocks, which appear
in the line of the Rocky Mountains and in the coast
Ranges.

The greater portion of the main protaxis, as well as the
distribution of the Laurentian and Huronian rocks, with
that of the paleeozoic beds overlying them, are represented
on Map No.1. The southern limit of the protaxis extends
westward beyond the map, and runs in a north-westerly
direction nearly as far as the Arctic Ocean, which it

i

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 429

almost reaches in the region of Franklin’s Bay, east of
the mouth of the Mackenzie River. - )

It is not necessary here to discuss at greater length the
origin of this great complex of gneisses and other crystal-
line rocks which make up the protaxis. Let it suffice
to remark that sedimentary deposits doubtless partici-
pate in the composition, at least of the Upper Laurentian
(Grenville division) and the Huronian.

The Appalachian protaxis, especially that part which
lies in Canada, has probably been uplifted through more
recent foldings, but it had attained the main features of
its present form as early as the Cambrian period. It is
probable, however, that at that time, just as later, in the
Lower Silurian period, a large area in the interior of the
chief protaxis around the Hudson Bay was covered by
the sea. Round about this already folded protaxis the
sediments were deposited during the Cambrian, Silurian,

- Devonian and later periods, while the intrusions of anor-

thosite took place along-the edge of the main protaxis—
that is, of the old continent—and formed a belt around
the oceanic basin, in which the Cambrian rocks were
afterwards deposited. These sediments were, first in
Upper Silurian times but repeatedly during subsequent
ages, subjected to great lateral pressure, exerted from the
direction of the Atlantic basin. These sedimentary rocks,
together with the crystalline rocks of the Apalachian
protaxis, were.in this manner thrown up in a series of
great folds which form the Apalachian chain.

These foldings were naturally accompanied by deep-
seated. alteration and metamorphism, and resulted in the
development of a great fault along the west side of the
chain, which extends in a southerly direction into the
United States. To the west of this fault lie the horizontal
and unaltered Cambrian and Silurian strata which form
the great plains of Central Canada.

430 Canadian Record of Science.

These horizontal and unaltered beds of Cambrian (Pots-
dam and Calciferous) and Silurian age, lie directly on the
tilted edges of the folded Laurentian rocks of the chief
protaxis as well as upon the accompanying anorthosites,
both of which had been deeply eroded before their depo-
sition. ;

The intrusions of anorthosite are therefore undoubtedly
of pre-Cambrian age.

Furthermore, although somewhat younger than the
Laurentian, which they cut, the eruptions must have
taken place before the pre-Cambrian dynamic movements,
by which the Laurentian was folded, had ceased, for the
anorthosites were in part at least crushed with the Lau-
rentian, and then, with them, eroded in pre-Cambrian
times.

Their relation to the Huronian is not known, since they
have not yet been found in contact with it... But they are
probably not of Huronian age, since enormous eruptions
of voleanic rocks took place also during the Huronian
time, and these have quite a different character, being
diorites.

The anorthosite intrusions, therefore, took place toward
the close of, or soon after, the Laurentian period.

A noteworthy fact in connection with these anortho-
sites is their distribution along the southerly and easterly
limits of the protaxis, bordering the great ocean basin in
which the Cambrian rocks were deposited later on. In
those ancient times the eruptive rocks apparently followed
the same law as now obtains in the distribution of vol-
canoes, namely, that they occur along the borders of the
continents as belts around great oceanic depressions. It
might be objected that this regular distribution is perhaps
more apparent than real, the protaxis having been more
thoroughly explored along its borders than elsewhere ;
but this objection is not valid. A few more small areas

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 451

may perhaps occur elsewhere in the Laurentian, but Dr.
Bell, Mr. Low,’ and Mr. Tyrrell. who have been chiefly
engaged in its exploration, consider it to be very impro-
bable that any other considerable undiscovered area should
still exist in the interior of the great Laurentian continent.
The courses of the large rivers which flow from the east
and from the west into the southern half of the Hudson
Bay, have been explored, but no trace of these rocks have
been found. Dr. G. M. Dawson also informs me; that in
earefully going over the whole literature concerning the
arctic regions of Canada, when constructing his geological
map of the northern part of the Dominion of Canada, he
could find no mention of rocks of this character. We
may, however, expect that similar occurrences will be
found on the south-west lmit of the protaxis between
Lake Superior and-the Arctic Sea; but up to the present
time none have been discovered. It is, however, quite
possible that they may exist, covered by the paleeozoic
strata; for strata of Silurian and Devonian age extend
along the side of the protaxis, and the underlying Cam-
brian rocks which would indicate more exactly the border
of the old continent are here, if they exist at all, overlaid
and concealed by these more recent deposits. |

VI. THE OCCURRENCE OF SIMILAR ANORTHOSITES
IN OTHER COUNTRIES.

The largest developments of anorthosite with which we
are acquainted outside of Canada is probably found in
- Norway. : The rock called by the Norwegian geologists
Labrador rock, as well as some of Esmark’s norites and
many of the so-called gabbros, are anorthosites.

These rocks have been described by Kjerulf,? Reusch,’
and others. They form enormous mountain masses, and

1 Report of tne Geological Survey of Canada, Part R., 1886.
2 Kjernulf, Die Geologie des sud]. und mittleren Norwegen, p. 261, ff.
3 Reusch, Die fossilien fuhrenden krystall. Schiefer von Bergen, p. 84 ff.

432 Canadian Record of Science.

are, as in Canada, sometimes of a violet, sometimes of a
brown colour, and again, sometimes, as white as limestone.
They are sometimes massive and sometimes banded or
foliated. Many of these hand-specimens can not be dis-
tinguished at all from the corresponding varieties of
Canadian anorthosites.

They are intrusive rocks, and generally break through
the gneiss. But in Laerdal and Vos-Kirchspiel, according
to Kjerulf, these cut through beds of the primordial age,
and are therefore probably somewhat more recent than
the Canadian anorthosites; which are overlaid by strata
of Upper Cambrian age. An accurate comparison of the
rocks cannot yet. be made since the Norwegian occurrences
have not yet been investigated in detail. But so far as
we know at present, the rocks of the two‘countries are
identical.

In southern Russia, near Kamenoi-Brod, in the govern-
ment of Kiew, and in many other places in the governments
of Volhynia, Podolien and Cherson, large areas of anortho-
site also occur. In these the labradorite predominates to
such an extent that all the other constituents almost dis-
appear. The rock occurs in some places in a coarsely
granular form, which is dark violet or almost black in
colour, and elsewhere as a porphyritic variety with large
dark-coloured individuals of plagioclase in a light grey
eround mass. These varieties are said to pass into one
another. Where the coarsely granular variety contains
pyroxene, it shows ophitic structure lke that observed in
some parts of the Saguenay area. According to the .
description of thesé rocks by several authors,’ they must
resemble in a remarkable manner the anorthosites de-
scribed in this paper, and also exhibit the same varieties.

1 Schrauf, Studien an der Mineralspecies Labradorit. Sitzungsber Wiener Akad.
1869, p. 996.—W. Tarrasenko, Uber den Labradorfels von Kamenoi Brod. Abhandl. d,
Naturw. Ges. in Kiew. 1886, p. 1-28.—M.K. De. Chroustchoff, Notes pour servir a l'étude
lithologique de la Volhynia. Bull. Soc. Min.. France, IX., p. 251 (weitere Literatur-
angaben enthaltend). \ ;

On the Norian or “ Upper Laurentian” Formation. 433

They are found in the great district of granitic rocks
which occupy this portion of the Russian Empire. The
portion which hes in the government of Volhynia is
classified by Ossowski as Laurentian. The magnificent
pillars of labradorite in the Church of Our Saviour in
Moscow, are from the quarries in these rocks.

Another occurrence of anorthosite of particular interest
is found in Egypt. Sir William Dawson, while on a visit
to that country in the year 1883, observed a rock that
resembles exactly the bedded variety of the Morin anor-
thosite, and which had been used for the magnificent
statue of Kephren, the builder of‘ the second pyramid.
This statue now stands in the Gizeh Museum, with a few
other fragments of statues of the same material. Through
the kindness of the curator of the Museum, Sir William
obtained a few small pieces of the rock for examination.
In the hand-specimen the rock cannot be distinguished
from the granular anorthosite which is found in the
neighbourhood of New Glasgow in the Morin area. It
is fresh,’ bright grey in colour, and almost entirely com-
posed of plagioclase, with a little hornblende, which
mineral is occasionally intergrown with pyroxene. It is
the foliated variety of the anorthosite, and the dark lines
which are caused by the presence of hornblende can
plainly be distinguished in’ the statue, especially on the
right side. Sir William did not find the rock in place,
but Newbold appears to have found it among the very
ancient rocks which form the mountain chain stretching
along the coast of the Nile. It probably has there the
same geognostical relations as in Canada. It was probably
prized by the Egyptian sculptors for the reason that it
possesses a pleasing colour, similar to marble, and that it
takes a better polish, being considerably harder.

These anorthosites, therefore, are found in four of the
countries where the Archean has an extensive develop-

1 Dawson, Notes on Useful and Ornamental Stones of Ancient Egypt.—Trans. of
the Victoria Institute, London, 1891.

434 Canadian Record of Science.

ment: in Canada, in Norway, in Russia, and in Egypt.
They are found in enormous masses in the first three
countries, and their extent is not yet known in the last
mentioned. To these occurrences others will probably
be added as the Archean of other parts of the world is
carefully studied.

VIL SUMMARY OF RESULTS.

1. The “ Upper Laurentian,” or the “Anorthosite group”
of Sir Wilham Logan, does not exist as an independent
geological formation. |

2. The anorthosite, which was considered to be its
principal constituent, is an intrusive rock of the gabbro
family, and is characterized by a great preponderance of
plagioclase, of which mineral the rock is, in fact, often
entirely composed.

3. The rock is in places perfectly massive, but it
generally exhibits the irregular structure which is so
often observed in the gabbros, and which is brought about
by a variation in the size of the grain or of the propor-
tion of the ingredients from place to place. In addition
to this original structure, the rock almost always shows a
peculiar cataclastic structure which is especially well
developed in the foliated varieties. This differs from the
structures characteristic of dynamic metamorphism in the
great mountainous districts of the: world, being produced
by movements in the rock mass while this was still deeply
buried in the crust of the earth, and probably very hot—
perhaps near its melting point.

4. In all the cases of supposed unconformable super-
position of the anorthosite upon the Laurentian gneisses,
which have been carefully investigated, the unconforma-
bility is found to be due to intrusion.

5. The rock occurs in a series of isolated areas, some ef
which are of enormous extent.

6. These areas are without exception at or near the

——

.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 435

_—

margin of the main Archean protaxis of the North
American continent, exactly as the volcanoes of the pre-
sent time le along the edges of continents.

7. They are undoubtedly of pre-Cambrian age, and
have probably originated toward the close of the Lau-
rentian.

8. The Laurentian system in the eastern part of Cen-
tral Canada consist of two sub-divisions, which were by
Logan classed as Lower Laurentian :

(1) Upper, or Grenville division ;
(2) Lower, Ottawa or Fundamental gneiss.

The Grenville division contains crystalline lhmestones,
quartzites, and various kinds of gneiss, which are mostly
distinctly foliated, banded, or stratified, dipping very
often at a low angle and extending over large areas, the
rocks being in many places rich in finely disseminated
graphite, beds of iron ores, etc.

The Lower, or Ottawa, gneiss alone is present in the
western part of Central Canada, where Lawson made his
well-known investigations on the relations of the Huronian
to the Laurentian gneiss.

The lower and the upper divisions are so closely related
to one another that it is generally difficult to determine
accurately their geographical limits. It is possible that
they may form a continuous series laid down under con-
ditions which approached more and more closely to those
of modern times, or that the Grenville division lies uncon-
formably on the older gneisses and represents quite another
set of conditions from those under which the lower series
originated.

The latter view is probably the correct one.

9. The Canadian anorthosites resemble exactly certain
other anorthosites which are found associated with Archzean
rocks in Norway, Russia, and in Egypt. The Norwegian
occurrences are probably more recent in age than those

found in Canada.
32

Canadian Record of Science.

436

€19'% L69'%. -98E"E = 6SF'E
FS'OOL SE‘OOL 99°00T 00001 F0‘0OL 48°66 _8a‘OOL_ SOOT Sa‘00T_ —866* 900012 ‘00T
0 GB‘0 ae = ee idg a = ee ees od come 4 Ga
€9‘0 SF‘0 9F‘O £20 eF‘0 960 89‘T 7 oS ‘0 *‘0 a aes
IS‘t L8‘F 6S €2‘e OL‘F. CSF OlF 1°G eS‘F 0G = =
amdg ands ~me Selah. 900s = §9'0 indg and =e HOG ete ee — Oe 1S
Peer ese tt GL 011. Goer OS Tt -F2T1 . “10ST ¥6 OF‘ II POR ee Sl ibd o
indg aindg indg andg andg — — —— — — a IL‘0
= = Go ‘0 86‘T Oc‘ = = aa a: — OS‘FL OF‘6I
as = e Ey a ee a sige Ba'G LEO = N66.” S01
9666 66-64 ; 96°66 96°93 8°L3 10°83 site 51 THee cuz. sen gee
= == aes me = mae =e a ae =F 650 L0‘0
9E°7S 97S PEG Esso 60S EF'ec — 9G‘gec I'sg¢ 6g¢‘eG 09S «=ga‘or = Se‘0S
Pee kee N TTX OX (EXXON Det Ke eX ee A. TeX Ng eA PTT
69°3— 696— ies =k e— LOG 2 LOG
BEG. neOLG 89°% 69% 89% G0r e*- GORE ~ 19'S 99% 99°%
OL'66 02‘00T 60°00 GFOOL SL1°66 99°66 F8‘ZOI 8s‘66- 99°66 LEOOL Z‘66 ST‘OOI
0-20. “OPO: ~—cc'0.- Oz'0 c9‘0 FL Oo = 060. —0%'0 ven CPO
€3‘1 260 pee SOOT GLO". "F820 oF ei ee | 00°T 960
0S ‘F dey - l0s‘e] —es'9 Sg‘¢G Es‘G a = = cr‘ FI‘G 60°C
v0 = 690. =. STO = re orl; Go ec> 161s 06:0 - 110 andg
S86 OS‘OI GZ‘II 896 Ee," FES Sas S9‘T 091 90S phe ell
— oe SS — — — ——- — Fi 1) Q S ——, == =
9c‘O 19°0 = = — = F9'9G 9G°0% 0204 Se me et
G2 O.9- ORT OL: ee'0 or‘zg | OF.0 = <3 ee OO L Se SO
03°94 36 S93 —SC*OT‘6SSs«éGO'82 22 (OR 0g a= OLS 06‘E 08S 6E°SS 79'CZ
ae = — = <3 = 9868 a rae a - P
cO'VS «=—oLAPG SOG ES «~ COGHFG «=o sg‘Le =~ ow ‘LG = ce‘Ig ggg os‘sc og‘6¢ gc‘6¢
“1hxX a4 zs ET TEATS eRe TA "A "AT gai acy |

aad ‘aadg

OCH
0°™M

O °e8N
O51
ome)

O UN

ee ef
“oem
. *O hd
= OLL
“01S

“awis ‘oadg

‘SHSAIVNVY JO WIAVL

ee

eS

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 437

i eecapha

TE:

IV.&V.

Vek:

VII.

Vili

Large fragments of reddish plagioclase from the
anorthosite of Chateau Richer. (T. 8. Hunt, Geo-
logy of Canada, 1863).

Fine-grained plagioclase ground mass, in. which
the former are imbedded. (JZbidem).

Hypersthene from the same rock. (Lbidem).
ilmenite from the same rock, with 49 p.c. of
insoluble matter, quartz, ete. (lbidem).

Bluish plagioclase in large fragments from another
hand-specimen of the Chateau Richer anorthosite
occurring imbedded in a fine granular ground mass
of plagioclase. (/bidem).

Similar plagioclase from an anorthosite boulder
from the neighbouring parish of St. Joachim.
(Lhidenv).

. Very fine grained, almost white anorthosite, from

Rawdon (Morin area). (/bidem).

. Blue opalescent plagioclase from the Morin anor-

thosite. (Lbidem).

. Bluish opalescent plagioclase from the summit of

Monnt Marcy in the State of New York, U.S.A.
(A. R. Leeds, 13th Ann. Rep. New York State
Museum of Natural History, 1876).

. Very fine-grained yellowish anorthosite from the

State of New York, U.S.A. (Lbidem).
Hypersthene from the anorthosite of Mount Marey
in the State of New York, U.S.A. (/bidem).

. Diallage from anorthosite, New York State, U.S.A.

(Lbidem).

. Labrador feldspar, Pauls Island, Labrador. (G.

Tschermak, in Rammelsberg’s Mineralchemie).

_ Labrador feldspar, Pauls Island, Labrador. (Lbidem).
. Plagioclase from a fine-grained whitish anortho-

site from Labrador (granular ground mass). (H.

Vogelsang, Archives N ierlandaises, T. IIL., 1868).

438 ‘ Canadian Record of Science.

XVIII. Bluish-grey untwinned labradorite, Paul’s Island,
Labrador. (G. Hawes, Proc. Nat. Mus., Washing-
ton, 1881).
XIX. Labrador-rock. The chief rock of the vicinity of
Nain, Labrador. (A. Wichmann, Z. d. D. g. G.,,
1884).
XX. Labradorite, Paul’s Island. With traces of Li,O
and SrO; v. 19 lost on ignition, (Jannasch,
Neues, Jahrb. fiir Min. 1884, IL. 43). |
XXI. Labradorite, Paul’s Island. The part soluble in
HCl. With traces of Li,0 and SrO. (Lbidem,
p. 49).
XXII. Labradorite, Paul’s Island. The part insoluble in
HCl. (Lbidem, p. 43).
XXIII. Labradorite, Paul’s Island. With traces of Li,O.
(Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 1891, XXIV. 277).
XXIV. Labradorite, Paul’s Island. With traces of Li,O.
. (Lhtdem).

Literature Relating to the Anorthosites of Canada.

Adams, Frank D.: The Anorthosite Rocks of Canada.
Proc. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc. 1886.
— On the Presence of Zones of Certain Silicates about
the Olivine occurring in the Anorthosite Rocks from
the River Saguenay. Am. Naturalist, Nov. 1885.
— Preliminary Reports to Director of the Geological
Survey of Canada on Anorthosite of Saguenay and
Morin areas. Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada,
1884, 1885, 1887.
Baddeley : Geology of a portion of the Labrador Coast.
Trans. of the Lit. and Hist. Soc. of Quebec, 1829.
— Geology of a portion of the Saguenay District.
Ihidem, 1829.
Bailey and Matthew: Geology of New Brunswick. Rep.
of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1870-71.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation, 439

Bayfield: Notes on the Geology of the North Coast of the
St. Lawrence. Trans. Geol. Soc. London, Vol. V.
1833.

Bell, Robert: Report on the Geology of Lake Huron.
Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1876-77, p. 198.

— Observations on the Geology, Mineralogy, Zoology,
and Botany of the Labrador Coast, Hudson’s Bay
and Strait. Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada,
1882-84.

Bigsby, John: A List of Minerals and Organic Remains
occurring in the Canadas. Am. Jour. Se. I. Vol.
VILL. 1824.

Cayley, Ed.: Up the River Moisie. Trans. Lit. and Hist.
Soe. of Quebec, Vol. V. 1862.

Cohen, E.: Das Labradorit-fiihrende Gestein der Kiiste
von Labrador. Neues Jahrb. fiir Mineralogie, 1885,
I. p. 183.

Davies, W. H. A.: Notes on Esquimaux Bay and the sur-
rounding Country. Trans. Lit. and Hist. Soc. of
Quebee, Vol. LV. 1843.

Emmons, Eb.: Report on the Geology of the Second Dis-
trict of the State of New York. Albany, 1842.

Hall, James: Notes on the Geological Position of the Ser-
pentine Limestone of Northern New York, ete.
Am. Jour. Se. Vol. XII. 1876.

Hawes, G. W.: On the Determination of Feldspar im thin
sections of Rocks. Proc. National Museum, Wash-
ington, 1881.

Hind, H. Y.: Observations on Saspaied Glacial Drift in
the Labrador Peninsula, ete. Q.J. G.S. Jan. 1864.

— Explorations in the Interior of the Labrador Penin-
sula. London, 1863.

Hunt, T. Sterry : Examinations of some Feldspathic Rocks.
London, Edinb. and Dublin Phil. Mag. May, 1855.

— On Norite or Labradorite Rock. Am. Jour.Se. 1870.

440 Canadian Record of Science.

-— The Geology of Port Henry, New York. Canadian
Naturalist, March, 1883.

— Comparison of Canadian Anorthosites with Gabbros
from Skye. Dubhn Quart. Jour. July, 1863.

— Azoic Rocks. Parts 1,2. Report of Geol. Survey
of Pennsylvania. :
Jannasch, P.: Uber die Léslichkeit des Labradors von der
Paulsinsel in Salzsaure. Neues Jahrb. fiir Min.

1884, IIL. 42.

— Uber eine neue Methode zur Aufschilessung der
Silicate. Ber. deutsch. chem. Ges. Berlin, 1891,
XALY. 273.

Jukes, J. B.: A General Report on the Geological Survey
of Newfoundland, 1839-40. London, 1843.
Laflamme : Anorthosite at Chateau Richer. Report of the

) Director of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1885.

— Report on Geological Observations in the Saguenay
Region. Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1884.

Leeds, Albert R.: Notes upon the Lithology of the Adiron-
dacks. 13th Ann. Rep. of the New York State
Museum of Nat. Hist. 1876; also American Chemist,
March, 1877.

Lieber, O. M.: Die amerikanische astronomische Expedi-
tion nach Labrador im Juli, 1860. Peterm. Mitth.
1861. |

Logan, W. E., and Hunt, T. 8.: Reports of the Geol. Surv.
of Canada, 1852-58, 1863, 1869.

— On the Occurrence of Organic Remains in the
Laurentian Rocks of Canada. Q.J.G.S. Nov. 1864.

Low, A. P.: On the Mistassini Expedition. Rep. of the
Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1885, D.

— Notes on Anorthosite of St. Urbain, Rat River, etc.
Summary Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1890.
McConnell, R. G.: Notes on the Anorthosite of the Town-
ship of Brandon. Summary Rep. of the Geol. Sury.
of Canada, 1879-80.

On the Norian or “Upper Laurentian” Formation. 441

Obalski, J.: Notes on the Occurrence of Anorthosite on
the River Saguenay. Report of the Commissioner
of Crown Lands for the Province of Quebec, 1883.
Packard, A. S.: The Labrador Coast. London, 1861.
— Observations on the Glacial Phenomenon of Labra-
dor and Maine, ete. Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.
Vol. L. 1868.
— Observations on the Drift Phenomenon of Labra-
dor. Canadian Naturalist, New Series, Vol. IT.
Puyjalon, H. de: Notes on Occurrence of Anorthosite on
Gulf of St. Lawrence. Report of the Commissioner
of Crown Lands, Province of Quebec, 1883-84.
Reichel, L. J.: Labrador, Bemerkungen itiber Land und
Leute. Peterm. Mitth., 1863.
Richardson, J.: The Geology of the Vicinity of Lake St.
John. Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1857.
— The. Geology of the Lower St. Lawrence. Rep. of
the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1866-69.
Rosenbusch, H.: Mikroskopische Physiographie der massi-
gen Gesteine, 1886, p. 151.
Roth, J.: Allgemeine und chemische Geolegie, Bd. II.
pAl8a: |
— Uber das Vorkommen von Labrador. Sitz. Berlin.
Akad. XXVIII. p. 697. 1883.
Selwyn, A. R. C.: Report on the Quebee Group and the
Older Crystalline Rocks of Canada. Rep. of the
Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1877-78.
— Summary Reports of the Geol. Surv. of Canada,
1879-80. 1889.
Selwyn, A. R. C., and Dawson, G. M.: Descriptive Sketch
of the Dominion of Canada. Published by Geol.
Surv. of Canada, 1882.
Steinhauer, M.: Note relative to the Geology of the Coast
of Labrador. Trans. of the Geol. Soc. London,
Vol. IL. 1814.

442 Canadian Record of Science.

Vennor, H. G.: Notes on the Occurrence of Anorthosite.
Summary Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1879-
80; also Rep. of the Geol. Surv. of Canada, 1876-77,
pp. 256-268.

Vogelsang, H.: Sur le Labradorite Coloré de la Cote du
Labrador. Archives Néerlandaises, T. III. 1868.

Van Werveke, L.: Eigenthiimliche Zwillingsbildungen am
Feldspath und Diallag. Neues Jahrb. fiir Min.
1883, T[Lep. 97.

Wichmann, A.: Uber Gesteine von Labrador, Zeitschr.
d. d. Geol. Ges. 1884.

Wilkins, D. J.: Notes on the Geology of the Labrador
Coast. Canadian Naturalist, 1878.

Notr.—Since the appearance of the original of the pre-
sent paper in German, in 1893, a number of additional
papers treating of these rocks have appeared. The follow-
ing is a list of them :— |

Ferrier, W. F.: Notes on the Microscopic Character of
some Rocks from the Counties of Quebee and Mont-
morency, collected by Mr. A. P. Low, 1889-91.
Rep. of the Geol. Survey of Canada, 1890-91, L.

Kemp, J. F.: Crystalline Limestones, Ophicalcites, and
associated Schists of the Eastern Adirondacks.
Bull. of the Geol. Soc. of America, Vol. VI. 18995.

— Gabbros of the Western Shore of Lake Champlain.
Bull. of the Geol. Soc. of America, Vol: V. 1894.

Lawson, A. C.: The Anorthosytes of the Minnesota Coast
of Lake Superior. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of
Minnesota, Bull. No. 8, 1893.

— The Norian Rocks of Canada. Science, May 26th,
1893.

Low, A. P.: The Recent Exploration of the Labrador
Peninsula. Canadian Record of Science, Vol. VI.
No. 3.

Wilham Crawford Williamson, LL.D., F RS. 443

— Report on the Geology and Economic Minerals of
the Southern Part of Portneuf, Quebec and Mont-
morency Counties, P.Q. Rep. of the Geol. Survey
of Canada, 1890-91, L.

Smyth, C. H., Jr.: On Gabbros in the South-western Adi-
rondack Region. Am. Jour. of Science, July, 1894.

—— Crystalline Limestones and Associated Rocks of
North-western Adirondack Region. Bull. of the
Geol. Soe. of America, Vol. VI. 1895.

Van Hise, C. R.: Correlation Papers, Archean and Algon-
kian. Bull. N.S. Geol. Survey, No. 86, 398.

OBITUARY NOTICE.
WILLIAM CRAWFORD WILLIAMSON, LL.D., F.R.S.

The most eminent structural palzeo-botanist of our time
has passed away—ripe in age, in accumulated work, and
honour ; though the field to which in his later years he
devoted himself is not one that courts notoriety or attracts
much of the attention even of that part of the novelty-
seeking crowd which addicts itself to new things in science.
Nevertheless, the work done by Williamson must live,
and can never cease to be regarded as marking a new
departure in regard to our knowledge of the real structure
and affinities of that old vegetation to which we owe our
most important beds of coal.

Williamson was a naturalist from his youth. Born at
Scarborough in 1816, and the son of a man noted in his
day as an amateur geologist and collector, before he was
of age he had written papers on local zoology and geology,
and had contributed to Lindley and Hutton’s Fossil Botany
drawings and descriptions of Mesozoic fossils from York-
shire, among which was the remarkable cycadaceous plant
that bears his name, the Wialliamsonia gigas. He was
educated for the medical profession, but from the first
devoted himself rather to scientific than professional

444 Canadian Record of Science.

work ; and while still in practice he had attained so great

a reputation that in 1851 he was appointed to the chair

of geology and natural history in Owen’s College, Man-

chester. As the college developed, he parted with the

less congenial portion of the complex duties of this chair,

but retained the professorship of botany till 1892, when
he retired, and established himself in the neighbourhood
of London, where; with his devoted and amiable wife—
a lady intellectually a fit companion for any scientific

man—and his youngest son, a promising student of art,

he enjoyed the leisure necessary to pursue his favourite
studies and the companionship of the many scientific men
of that great centre.

Like most of the greater men of his time, he was less a
specialist than is usual with the younger men of science.
His earlier papers relate to a variety of zoological and

geological subjects, as well as to fossil botany ; and one of

his larger publications, that on british Feramuinifera,
issued by the Ray Society, has long been a standard work
of reference on both sides of the Atlantic.

In later years, however, he restricted himself to the
fossil plants of the coal-formation, and more especially. to.
the investigation of their structures as revealed by the
microscope. He. was. attracted to this by the specimens.
retaining their structure, which are found in nodules in
the coal-fields near Manchester as well as in the Scottish
coal-fields ; and he laboured day after day on this appa-
rently unpromising material, making with his own hands.
shees for the microscope in the directions necessary to
reveal the minute structures. As a mere labour for the
eye and hand. this was a herculean task; but with Wil-
lamson it was much more, for he possessed the scientific
knowledge and insight which enabled him to put together
the structure of a plant from detached fragments, and to:
interpret the true meaning of the parts of mineralized and
often distorted specimens. The writer had the pleasure

William Crawford Williamson, LL.D., PRS. 4465

of his friendship, and of more than once enjoying his hos-
pitality at Egerton Road, near Manchester, where he not
only had his studio, as it might be called, but a botanical
garden on a small scale, replete with rare and interesting
plants more or less illustrative of ancient vegetation. To
those who had the privilege of seeing him at work, nothing
could be more charming than his enthusiastic pursuit of
new facts, and the exultation with which he weleomed
them when found. In this he resembled Lyell more than
any other scientific man of my acquaintance.

As a worker in fossil plants and in the microscopic
structure of coal, Williamson’s collections were most
attractive to me, but showed at once that it was hope-
less to rival his work; and from the time when I made
his acquaintance I recognized this fact, and directed to
his mill any paleo-botanical grist of the structural kind

that came in my way.

In explanation of the nature of his work, it may be
stated that while some coal-formation plants—as the ferns,
the smaller Lycopods or club-mosses, and some trees allied
to the pines—have structures very similar to their modern
allies, others are widely different from any modern plants
both in structure and in those characters of their surfaces
and appendages which are related to the characters of the
stem. In addition to this, while their fruits ally them
with the flowerless or eryptogamous plants, their stems
assume complexities of structure which, in the modern
world, we find only in the flowering plants, and in the
kinds of these that possess woody stems. After all, this
is merely an arrangement to give strength to larger and
better developed forms than those of modern times; but
at first it was wholly at variance with orthodox botanical
rule, and Williamson had first to reconcile himself to it and
then to convince his scientific friends. The work is not
yet complete. I have sent to Williamson slices of stems
from Canada quite as anomalous as any he had figured,

446 Canadian Record of Science.

and which he admitted he had seen nothing like ; but he
would work seriously only at his own British material,
and things directly connected with it.

Williamson’s discoveries in this way were, many of
them, almost as strange as if he were to find in the older
geological formations, mollusks and crustaceans with back-
bones similar to those now restricted to vertebrate animals.

It was a necessity of the kind of investigation pursued
by Dr. Williamson that it could only to a limited degree
be methodical and continuous. Hence, a structure, fol-
lowed up and described as far as material would permit,
might in a short time be further illustrated by new speci-
mens, and had to be returned to perhaps more than once.
Thus, the numerous and beautifully illustrated papers
published in the Philosophical Transactions require careful
study, even on the part of special paleeo-botanists, before
they can be fully appreciated. Their author was himself
endeavouring, of late years, to remedy this by a systematic
index, and by gathering into later memoirs the substance
of the previous work; but he did not live fully to com-
plete the task, and a systematic and arranged summary
of his life’s work has still to be given to the world. The
German botanist, Solms-Laubach, has largely availed
himself of it in his work on “ Fossil Botany,” but he has
used Williamson’s material very imperfectly.

There are few, therefore, yet, who can walk in imagina-
tion through the carboniferous forests, and regard their
productions with the advantage of the new lhght thrown
on them by Wilhamson. Now and then, when in Man-
chester, he endeavoured, in popular lectures—which were
gems in their way—to explain the substance of his dis-
eoveries ; but only partially.

The twenty memoirs in the Zransactions of the Royal
Society (the last in conjunction with his friend Dr. Scott)
will form his most enduring monument. They consti-
tute a truly gigantic work, since every single fact which

William Crawford Williamson, LL.D., F RS. 447

they describe or delineate is the result of laborious
collecting, of skilful and painstaking preparation of slices,
of careful scrutiny under the microscope, of thoughtful
study and comparison, of nice and accurate drawing, and,
finally, of lucid description and scientific interpretation.

No man had a better title to indulge in large generali-
zations respecting the origin and development of the
vegetable kingdom, but he rarely referred to such sub-
jects; except now and then in conversation or in private
letters. He usually, like the greater naturalists of our
time, displayed in these matters that modesty which
attends on wide knowledge, and leaves hasty and pre-
sumptuous theories to those who are inflated with a little
wisdom and fail to realize how small it is. He ex-
pressed, some years ago, his position in one respect by
saying that the time had not yet come for constructing a
genealogical tree of the vegetable kingdom; and in his
address as president of the Geological Section at the South-
port meeting of the British Association, after discussing
in some detail the various types of fossil vegetation, and
insisting that if the Carboniferous and Devonian floras -
were evolved from pre-existing types, we have to look for
these in rocks which have afforded no trace of land vege-
tation, he refers to the few places in which Carboniferous
plants with well preserved structures are found, and the
wonderful revelations which these have afforded. He
then sums up as follows :

‘‘ Hence I conclude that there is a vast variety of Carboniferous
plants of which we have as yet seen no traces, but every one of which
must have played some part, however humble, in the development of
the plant races of later ages. We can only hope that time will bring
these now hidden treasures into the hands of future paleontologists.
Meanwhile, though far from wishing to check the construction of any
legitimate hypothesis calculated to aid scientific inquiry, I would re-
mind every too-ambitious student that there is a haste that retards
rather than promotes progress, that arouses opposition rather than
produces conviction, and that injures the cause of science by dis-
crediting its advocates.”*

* British Association Report, 1883.

448 Canadian Record of Science.

PROFESSOR JAMES. DWIGHT DANA.

The following notice, extracted from Nature, is of
especial interest as showing the estimation in which the
late distinguished geologist was held on the other side of
the Atlantic :— Hh |

By the sudden death of Prof. J. D. Dana, from heart-failure, on
April 15, America has lost a veteran man of science, who in his time
has not only played many widely varied parts, but has reached the
highest excellence in each. As a mineralogist he published, so long
ago as 1837, the first edition of a ‘‘ Descriptive Mineralogy,’ which by
reason of its completeness and accuracy soon became a standard work
of reference throughout the civilized world, and of which the sixth
edition (1134 pages), issued in 1892 under the superintendence of his
distinguished son, Prof. Edward Salisbury Dana, still maintains the
high reputation attained by the original work. As a geologist and
paleontologist, he published in 1863 a similarly excellent and well-
illustrated ‘‘ Manual of Geology,” having special regard to the geology
of the North American continent, and of which the fourth edition
(1087 pages) was issued only two or three months ago. Of his work
as a zoologist, we may cite as example his elaborate report on the
zoophytes, collected by an expedition in which he took a very active
part. The report is illustrated by 61 plates, and in it are described no
fewer than 230 new species. Attainments so diverse belong only to
the few.

James Dwight Dana was born on Februray 12, 1813, at Utica, in the
State of New York, U.S.A., and was therefore in his eighty-third
year at the time of his death. He was educated at Yale College, New
Haven, Connecticut, receiving there a sound training in mathematics,
physics and chemistry, which was of the greatest service to him in his
subsequent career ; he proceeded to his degree in the year 1833. His
appointment as Instructor of Mathematics to the midshipmen of the
United States Navy gave him splendid opportunities for the study of
nature in various parts of the world, particularly in France, Italy, and
Turkey, opportunities of which he was not slow to avail himself ; more
especially was his attention attracted to the study of volcanic pheno-
mena by an ascent of Vesuvius, a sight of Stromboli, and an excursion
in the Island of Milo in the year 1834. Settling down for a short time,
he acted as chemical assistant at Yale College to his old teacher and
friend, Prof. Silliman (1836-38) ; but an opportunity again presenting
itself of making a long voyage of marine observation, he accepted the
appointment of mineralogist and geologist to the United States explor-
ing expedition, which was to proceed round the world. This expedition,
under Charles Wilkes as Commander, was admirably equipped for the
objects in view, and consisted of two sloops-of-war, a store-ship, and a
brig ; the cruise extended over four years (1838-42), and the scientific

— eS --. #,
ir. F
abe mar
>»

i

...

.
3

Professor James Dwight Dana. 449

staff included, in addition to Dana, Pickering, Couthoy, and Peale as
_zoologists, Rich and Breckenridge as botanists, and Hale as philologist.

The memory of the events, scenes and labours of this cruise was a con-

stant joy to him during the remaining fifty-three years of life. On at

least two occasions, however, he was in imminent peril: at one time

his vessel narrowly escaped destruction on the rocks of Southern Fuegia,

when the sea was dashing up the cliffs to a height of two or three hun-

-dred feet,and all the anchors had given way; at another time his party

had to take to the boats empty-handed, and some hours afterwards they

_saw the last vestige of the vessel which had been their home for three
_years disappear beneath the waves.

The study of the material collected by the Sepsiniiea and the prepa-

ration of his reports occupied all the available time during the next
thirteen years. The first two or three years were spent at Washington,
-but after his marriage to the daughter of Prof. Silliman he removed
-back to New Haven, where he passed the rest of his life. In 1850 he

was appointed Silliman Professor of Geology and Natural History at
Yale College. In 1846 Mr. Dana had become associate-editor of the

American Journal of Science, and after the death of Prof. Silliman, in

1864, he became the principal editor of that important scientific organ.
Dana gave special attention to corals and coral islands, and also to
volcanoes. The Wilkes expedition of 1838-42 followed in part the

-course taken by the Beagle in 1831-36, and even where it diverged from

that route visited coral and volcanic islands such as have been carefully

-described by Charles Darwin. When the Wilkes expedition reached
Sydney in 1839, Dana read in the papers a brief statement of Darwin’s

theory of the origin of the atoll and barrier forms of reefs; this mere
paragraph was a great help to him in his later work, and he afterwards

‘regarded Darwin with feelings of the deepest gratitude. A visit to

the Fiji Islands in 1840 brought before him facts such as had been
already noticed by Darwin elsewhere; but there they were on a still

grander scale and of a more diversified character, thus enabling him to

speak even more positively of the theory than Darwin himself had
thought it philosophic to do. On other points the conclusions arrived

-at by Darwin and Dana, independently of each other, were for the

most part the same, and differed only in comparatively unimportant

-details. Dana’s special labours relative to corals ceased with the pub-

lication of his report on the zoophytes collected by the expedition,

‘but an elaborate account (406 pages) of Corals and Coral Islands was

prepared by him and issued in 1879: this was an extension of his

-expedition-report on Coral Reefs and Coral Islands, which had been

separately published in 1853. In 1890 appeared another considerable

‘work (399 pages) entitled ‘‘ Characteristics of Volcanoes, with contri-

butions of facts and principles from the Hawaiian Islands,” which

placed on record much useful information collected by him during his
travels.

450 Canadian Record of Science.

In addition to these larger works, he was the author of about two
hundred separate papers. Some of them are of a physical character :
his first paper, published as far back as 1833, dealing with the connec-
tion of electricity, heat and magnetism ; subsequent papers treated of
galvano-magnetic apparatus and the laws of cohesive attraction as
exemplified by crystals. Other papers, of a purely crystallographic
character (1835-52), treated of the drawing and lettering of crystal
figures, of crystallographic symbols, and of the formation of twin
growths ; a series of volcanic papers discussed both lunar and terres-
trial voleanoes, the latter including those of Vesuvius, Cotopaxi, Are-
quipa, Mauna Loa, and Kilauea (1835-68); a set of coral papers treated
of the temperature limiting the distribution of corals, on the area of
subsidence in the Pacific as indicated by the distribution of coral
islands, on the composition of corals and on fossil corals (1843-74).

About forty papers are on mineralogical topics: many of them are
descriptive of particnlar mineral species ; others treat of general sub-
jects, such as nomenclature, pseudomorphism, homceomorphism, the
connection between crystalline form and chemical constitution, and the
origin of the constituent and adventitious minerals of trap and the
allied rocks. As illustrations of the variety met with in his geological
publications, we may cite his papers on the origin of the grand outline
features of the earth, the origin of continents, mountains and prairies,
the early condition of the earth’s surface, the analogies between the
modern igneous rocks and the so-called primary formations, on erosion,
on denudation in the Pacific, on terraces, on southern New England
during the melting of the great glacier, on the degradation of the rocks
of New South Wales, and the formation of valleys. The remaining
papers, about seventy in number, deal with biological subjects, both
recent and fossil, and have a similarly varied character ; some being
descriptive of species, others treating of classification and similarly
general problems.

The importance of this scientific work was widely recognized, and
many marks of distinction were conferred upon him, both at home and
abroad. He was an original member of the National Academy of
Sciences of the United States, and in the year 1854 occupied the presi-
dential chair of the American Association for the Advancement of
Science. In 1851 he was elected a Foreign Member of the Geological
Society of London, and in 1872 received from that Society the Wollas-
_ ton Medal, the highest compliment the Geological Society can pay to

the man of science; in the same year the University of Munich honoured
him with the degree of Ph.D. ; in 1877 he was the recipient of the Cop-
ley Medal of the Royal Society, and in 1884 was elected one of the
foreign members ; in 1886 Harvard conferred upon him the degree of
LL.D. ; he was also an honorary member of the Academies of Paris,
Berlin, Vienna, St. Petersburg and Rome, and of the Mineralogical
Societies of England and of France.

The Right Hon. T. H. Hualey, D.C.L., PRS. 451
THE RicHt Hon. T. H. Huxtey, D.C.L., F.RS., &c.

Thomas Henry Huxley was in many respects the most
prominent English naturalist of our time. His early
training was that of a medical man, but his first serious
employment was in the scientific study of the pelagic
animals of the Southern Ocean, when assistant-surgeon of
H. M.S. Rattlesnake in her surveying expedition in the
years 1846-50. This work he did so ably as at once to
establish a high scientific reputation, though the govern-
ment, on his return, declined to publish the results. Hux-
ley was not officially naturalist to the expedition, and was
at the time unknown to fame. During his absence he had
sent several communications to the Linnean Society, but,
as he says, “with the same result as Noah when he sent
the raven out of the ark.” At length, in 1849, he sent a
paper to the Royal Society which was accepted and
printed ; but this was only at the end of the voyage. He
was, however, in 1854, appointed, on recommendation of
Sir H. De la Beche, naturalist to the Geological Survey,
and Professor of Paleontology in the Royal School of
Mines, and thenceforth held with much ability many and
varied scientific and educational positions. Active and
versatile in thought, and gifted with remarkable powers
of expression and illustration as a writer, he was now a
biologist, now a geologist or an educationist, or a social
reformer, a philosopher, or a theologian or anti-theologian,
as the case might be. He was the prominent and success-
ful advocate of the Darwinian evolution before the court
of public opinion, and gave to that revival of an old
philosophy a vitality and an interest into which it could
never have been galvanized by Darwin or Spencer or
Wallace or Heckel.

In all his various roles he was clever, incisive, subtle,
intensely interesting, and full of unexpected and startling

trains of thought and of happy analogies. Even those
33

452 Canadian Record of Science.

- who most thoroughly differed from many of his opinions
could not but be charmed with his manner of expressing
them. He himself has said that he was not one of those
fortunate persons who are able to regard “a popular lec-
ture as a mere hors d’euvre, unworthy of being ranked
among the serious efforts of a philosopher; and who keep
their fame as scientific hierophants unsullied by attempts,
—at least of the successful sort—to be understood by the
people.” On the contrary, he had found that ‘the task
of making truths learned in the field, the laboratory, and
the museum, at. once intelligible and accurate, taxed such
scientific and literary faculty as he possessed to the ut-
most.” This was no doubt true, for he was nervously
anxious as to public appearances, and careful that every-
thing he did was well done; but he was evidently a man
of genius, to whom the precise hght in which a complex
truth could be best seen came like a flash of inspiration.
With this he combined that realistic and pictorial turn of
mind to which a fact presented itself not merely as a bare
fact, but surrounded with all its accessories and results,
and glorified with a halo of fancy.
~ Huxley’s real scientific work, owing partly to his own
versatility and partly to the varied demands made on him,
was spread over so many fields—cultivated in patches by
specialists—that few are able to grasp its whole amount.
Yet his clearness of insight was so great that he com-
mended himself to all classes of specialists as an eminent
worker in every department which he undertook, while
he brought forth and made plain to the understanding of
the outer world multitudes of researches which would
scarcely have been heard of beyond the range of a few
special experts.
One thing only he wanted to raise his surpassing gifts
to the highest possible level, and that was, faith in nature
as a realization of infinite thought within the domain of

The Right Hon. T. H. Hualey, D.CL.,F RS. 453

the finite. The finite he saw and understood, but not the
Infinite unseen that lay beyond; and being thus short-
sighted, he was too honest to pretend to more distinct
vision, and too independent to be indebted to the vision
of others; so he called himself an agnostic—one who
does not know—a most gross misnomer in so far as all
natural knowledge is concerned. Butt he wished to dis-
_tinguish himself from those who thought they had attained
to a certain “gnosis” which enabled them to “solve the
problem of existence.” To him this problem was utter
darkness, as it must be to all who limit their views to the
material alone. So he says, “I took thought and invented
what I conceived to be the appropriate title of ‘Agnostic;
it came into my head as suggestively antithetic to the
‘Gnostic’ of Church history, who professed to know so
much about the very things of which I was ignorant.”
Yet his position was really of the same character with
that of the original Gnostics, who professed to reduce all
mysteries of faith to things merely of sight. ,
There is something heroic and pathetic in the attitude
of such a man, holding that there is no alleviation of the
sufferings of mankind except by taking them as inevitable
and inexplicable, and resolutely facing the world without
any of the garments “furnished by pious hands to cover
its deformities.” It was as if, rejecting the hopes of
Christianity, he had sought to combine the two hardest
features of ancient philosophy—the unbelief of Epicurus
with the stoicism of Zeno; yet so great was the fascina-
tion of the man that he could make this pessimistic attitude
even attractive to multitudes of minds. From what I
knew personally of Huxley, I fear that his position in
this respect was not so much a result of unbiassed inquiry
as of a moral repulsion from what he called “ the garment
of make-believe,” woven in the interest of clericalism, and
that “ecclesiastical spirit” which he regarded as the worst

454 Canadian Record of Science.

enemy of science, and consequently of human welfare.
The follies and hypocrisies which have assumed the name
of Christianity, albeit the extreme opposites of the reli-
gion of Jesus of Nazareth, have alienated from it some of
the best and most honest minds. Huxley’s straightforward
and vigorous thrusts against what he believed to be shams
and fallacies, were, after all, not meant for honest and
upright believers so much as for the Pharisees who as-
sumed their garb, and were far less harmful than the
blunders of the unwise or the misstatements of those
who are “wolves in sheep’s clothing.” His controversial
writings, hke most others of that class, will not survive
the special crises to which they belong. His clear and
attractive delineations of natural facts, processes and
relations, cannot be surpassed, and form the basis of his
permanent reputation. Agnostic though he called him-
self, he was one of the divinely-gifted prophets of nature
to whom is given more than to other mortals to penetrate
and explain the plans of the All-wise in the structure of
the world.

As Huxley was so largely the apostle of evolution, it
may be well to refer to his position in that connection.
He knew well that the word is one liable to much abuse,
and that a modal evolution or development should not be
confounded with a causal evolution, which is nothing
unless founded on well ascertained proximate and ulti-
mate causes. The first is merely a mode of development 5
the second leads back to origins. Yetin the loose popular
writings of the day they are often identified and inter-
changed. The perception of this made him more cautious
than many of his contemporaries in his statement of the
great problem. The processes by which, from an appar-

ently homogeneous egg, all the parts of a complex animal

are derived, is an evolution, and fulfils precisely the con- |

ditions of Spencer’s definition of that process. But it

—————————

The Right Hon. T. H. Huxley, D.CL., PRS. 458

will not satisfy the scientific mind to say that the develop-

ment arises simply from evolution. We know that there
are involved a variety of proximate conditions from the
incubation of the parent animal (or heat otherwise ob-
tained) to the complex causes which lead to the growth
and fertilization of the egg itself, and which we can fathom
only to a very limited extent. -Behind all these, again, lie
the causes which produced the parent animal, and these
we may have to follow back into past eras of geological
time without reaching the first and ultimate cause. All
this was clearly before the mind of Huxley; hence he was
not satisfied with the merely analogical argument which
seems sufficient to Heckel and some other biologists, or
with the doctrine of struggle for existence and survival
of the fittest. The analogy between the cycle of develop-
ment of the individual animal and the supposed develop-
ment of modern animals in geological time is imperfect,
and behind both hes the question—Has the ultimate germ
or simple animal hereditary properties? If it has, we
have to look for a parent of more developed organism
than itself; if not, then it is a product of creation, or,
as Clerk Maxwell phrased it in the case of chemical ele-
ments, a “manufactured article.”’ He therefore sought
to find the evidence of evolution in the past history of
living beings as represented in their fossil remains, where
alone, if it is to be found at all, the actual evidence must
lie concealed. Here he had, in the long lapse of geological
time, an evident development from the simpler to the
more complex, along the lines of a scheme or plan which
manifestly preserves its unity from the dawn of life on
our planet to the present day. It naturally occurred to
him that the record, even if imperfect, might show por-
tions at least of the links of connectian between successive
forms of life. Here, however, he had to distinguish, and

1 This dilemma of evolution was lucidly explained at the meeting of the British
Association this year by Miss Layard.

456 Canadian Record of Science.

did honestly endeavour to distinguish, between mere suc-
cession of forms, among which there might be no genetic
bond, and those which show at least a probability of such
connection. The difficulties in securing such facts he
frankly stated; and if, for example, he held it probable .
that the horse had been derived from an animal of the
type of Hipparion of the middle tertiary, he knew that
this required, not merely the successive changes in foot
and tooth, but a vast variety of correlated changes, and
these occurring under varied geographical and climatal
conditions, and movements of migration, accompanied
with partial extinctions, isolations and intermixtures,
none of which are certainly known to us in their detail,
and the greater part have to be imagined. Of these points
he gives intimations in his discourse of 1870 on Paleon-
tology and Evolution, reprinted under his own supervision
as late as last year. In face of all this, it is obvious that
the doctrine of natural selection becomes quite insig-
nificant as a factor in evolution, or is mixed with so many
questions as yet unsolved that the problem becomes in-
tensely complex. Small minds can easily cut this knot,
but Huxley strove to untie it, and that without the help
he might have derived from the belief in a pre-determined
plan of development.

Tracing back the evolutionary history of animals, he
further finds that he can by no means reach its beginning.
As he puts it, “If there is any truth in the doctrine of
Evolution, every class must be vastly older than the first
record of its appearance upon the surface of the globe.
But if considerations of this kind compel us to place the
origin of vertebrated animals at a period sufficiently dis-
tant from the silurian in which the first elasmo-branchii
and ganoids’ occur, to allow of the evolution of such
fishes from a vertebrate as simple as the Amphioxus, I
can only repeat that it is appalling to speculate upon the

1 Sharks and bony pikes.

The Right Hon. T. H. Hucley, D.C.L., F.RS.* 457

extent to which that origin must have preceded the epoch
of the first recorded appearance of vertebrate life.”

But beyond this lies the unfathomable gulf of the origin
of the living and organized from the merely mineral; of
this “abiogenesis ” science knows nothing, and even Hux-
ley can only fall back on the probability that at some
almost infinitely distant point of past time physical eon-
ditions may have been so different from those now existing
as to admit of the spontaneous origin of life. Here there
is no scope for natural selection, but we stand face to face
with what to our present ideas would be a miracle of
creation. But such abiogenesis must once at least, have
occurred; and if once, why not oftener? Yet now it
seems impossible, and by some is dismissed as unthinkable.
We can only say, “To man it is impossible, but to God
all things are possible; and, leaving Him out of the
account, we must be content to leave ourselves no rational
standing-place over the infinite void. This position Hux-
ley avowedly assumed, as an honest agnostic whose mind
was so constituted that he could not move one step
beyond phenomena, and declined to infer from these phe-
nomena any power or divinity behind them.

In point of fact, without God and without the Redeemer
and the great truths revealed by Him, it is impossibie
to solve the “problem of humanity ;” and it is impossible
wholly to divest the mind of the idea of a rational First
Cause, and a relation between Him and the spiritual
nature of man. The lines which it is said were by
Huxley’s request to form his epitaph, declare this :—
ji ** And if there be no meeting past the grave,

If all is darkness, silence yet is rest.
Be not afraid, ye waiting hearts that weep,

For God still giveth His beloved sleep, —
And if an endless sleep He wills, so best.”

Here we have God recognized as giving even the sleep of
death, and if so, why not also the future life and the

458 Canadian Record of Scrence.

re-union of human souls to the loved ones long lost and —
gone before. Thus the existence of a God is still at least
possible even to the agnostic ; and this possibility carries
with it that of all the dread and glorious realities of the
unseen world.

Huxley’s great merits gained for him a wide distinction ~
and many honours. Few scientific men in England could
boast so long a list of foreign honorary titles; and in his
own country he was loaded with University honours and
the Presidencies of the greatest scientific bodies, as well
as distinctions in the gift of the crown.

It was on the early voyage in the Rattlesnake that
Huxley met his future wife, at Sydney, New South Wales.
They became engaged after a short acquaintance, but the
ship had to leave Sydney in a few days, and it was seven
years before they met again. But so soon as Huxley
secured a fixed position he claimed his bride. Their union
was a most happy one, and Mrs. Huxley still survives her
husband.

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF MAY, 1895.
Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.
Sky CLOUDED J. = =
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER, WIND. In Tentus. Jo .-| 2 ag g
——— | Tse om eo —a/ eae —fesa| = 4 seat Tees
DAY. pressure relative peu Mean : Ses] Se a2 | 3s DAY
P of vapor.} it e General |velocity]} $ | 4| 2228) 85 Be ae
Mean.| Max. | Min. |Range.f Meaa. | Max. Min, | Range. we direction. |in mile} 8 | 5 |S 4282) 8” g= | 8 5
perhour) = Gg ie = D a
3 47 98 59.0 34.9 24.1 30.3788 | 30.498 50.2 = he yee fein ae I | me) Ps Nie 6 i one Fal siete ce
2 54-33 | 64.5 46.0 18.5 30.1767 30.282 | 30,068 .220 +2572 59-7 40.3 Si ie che oe ° 33 sents . 5
3| 67.20] 79.0 52.0 27.0 30.0075 | 30.100 29.925 175 3730 58.5 50.8 S.W. 15.6 2.3| 9| off 89 tees 5 3
4) 63.27 | 76.8 47° 29.8 30.0515 | 30.130 29: 998 132 4315 73-8 54.3 S.W. 13 2 5.2|10| o 43 cone 54 , 4
ISUNDAY... ..0.<005 Soren eos 44.8 35.0 Sect 3.1 re chee Acie 's Pe N 13.6
6 73.92 | 85.3 59-8 29.5 30.0760 | 30.143 30.018 +125 . 4840 60.0 57:8 S.W. oa 0.0 iG ° Re Bh es bea sees ees Me ees
7 | 72.08 | 84 6 61.0 23.6 30.0052 | 30.096 29 . OS -181 «5588 jo 8 61.8 S.W. 12.1 2.8] 10] 0 73 5 ee 7
8 | 67.78 | 75.8 63.6 HOD 29.9000 | 29.967 29.830 137 5670 83.5 62.3 S.W, 16.4 g92\|10] 7 20 : ase] 8
9 71.45 | 81.9 61.2 20.7 29.8350 | 29.861 29.792 -069 -5257 69.2 60.3 S.W. 18.5 0.5 8] oO 93 ae sees 9
10 74.22 | 84.0 62.8 21.2 29.8153 | 29.883 29.748 +135 -4960 58.5 58.5 S,W. 24.3 Pa |) GC) 88 830 sees | Io
u 72.67 || S7ex 61.2 25.9 29.5562 | 29.765 29.429 -336 -5250 67.2 59.8 Shy 13.0 4.7| 10] Off 65 55 Wek Sie
ISUNDAY.... ...12 Rane, ||) AOS 42.9 22.6 Socee not soe Bits SW
13 | 40.52 | 480 | 36.6 | a1.4 | 29.9848 | 30.089 | 29.899 | -190 We 6:5 PEE Teeec ciee lL ata Utena aaa
14 45.27 540 32.8 21.2 30.0353 30.161 29.907 =254 N. 5.8 | 10 ° 86 baits Be soos | Ty
15 45-17 | 51.5 40.7 10.8 29.8985 | 29.933 29.890 062 N. 8.8 | 10 3 25 ° 10 ce 0.10 | 15
16 45.05 53-8 38.2 15.6 29.8397 } 29-937 29 858 +079 Ww, 6.0] 10 | oO 75 Inap Inap.| 16
17 51.32 63.8 37-0 26.8 29.9565 29.991 29.807 +094 W 4.7 |) 109)" © 75 Inap eh Inap.| 17
18 56.07 | 66.2 42.5 2307 29.9497 30.008 29. 893 115 S.E. 6.0] 10] o 85 ae oa coos | 1B
SUNDAY... .....19 asses | 66.8 49.2 17.6 saccades BSReee wool 0 S.E. odhier leeenes 47 0.66 ere POHeo |ecicarcosncce SuNDAY
20 43.52 49-4 38.0 Il.4 30.0597 | 30.127 29.962 165 Ww. 7.8] 10] 0 20 0.01 stad o.o1 | 20
2E 42.77 47:5 37.0 10.5 30-1615 30.201 30. 125 .076 W. 10.0 | Io | 10 15 Inap Inap, | Inap.} 2r
22 49-25 57-2 36 9 20.3 30.0352 30. 160 29.025 +235 Ww. 3-5 | Io] o 79 eee a Velen lia
23 | 53-45 | 62.5 46 6 15-9 30 0162 | 30.056 29.069 .087 w. 4.7 | 10 | © 48 Inap. ar | Snap.y 23
24 53-97 62.9 44.5 18.4 30.1408 30.215 30.066 +149 N.E. 1.0 4) 0 89 Siciets cd sees | 24
25! 65.05] 78.9 45-5 33-4 29.9630 | 30 067 29. 865) +202 S.W. 4.2} 10] off 83 Inap. Race |ltbechst|| ca
SUNDAY........ 26 ne os 74.8 58.5 fee eae el a , Ss: iaaeleeealege 43 0.05 uate (OCOS 1 ABs « ++. ...SUNDAY
27 57-78 64.0 50.0 I4.0 29.6245 29.668 29.559 109 S.V 10.0 | 10] to 20 0.57 0.57 | 27
28 54:72 | 61.0 48.2 12.8 29.8123 29.951 29 685 266 S|W. 10.0 | 10 | 10 ff oo 0.53 eo 0.53 | 28
29 64.15 72.9 56.2 16.7 29.9950 | 30.051 29 ogE 130 S.E 4 3)) 10) V0 68 one Bere, [eee
30 73-97 86.1 60 0 26.1 29 .8608 29.927 2). 785 = X42 S_W. 27 || £Oi\) O 72 ° 06 aan 0,06 7 ‘oO
. 33 EereS Lae 6 60.8 98 29.8955 29,927 29.846 O81 ; S.W. 10.0 | Io | 10 tole} 0.08 Bale 0.08 | 3.
dort, | svee «Means 58.27 Geueee 48 27 139 96 paar 908s 30.044 29 889 155 9 AS 39340 w. 5.4/9 dat ue | 3.31 3 30 Sums: . 2.5 eiesatere
21 Years means a oh UL! fee arr (fst ah en : means for
A z 21 Years means for
forvand eis 54.6 | 63 91 | 45.63 18.75 | 29.9334 aaa coe Broo N- .2867 | 65.6 BP occ Blo wcclcee ee 62] ..| -. §Js50.4 | 2-95 2 96 Jana including this
Ontheeaees : month,
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | relative humidity was 93 on the 19th and 28th.
| Nl temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. Minimum relative humidity was 29 on the 18th.
Direction........| N. N.E. RB. S.E. ase S.W. | Ww. | N.W. CALM. § Observed. Rain fell on 17 days.
=—= ——— |— — | — —S| | —— | —— | — —_ | ES : Ane Snow fell on 1 day.
iil Cmocpecseanee 8 | Press ary. : =
1299" _ 3? eee ee E663 | 4057 | 2482 | am F ais f Sapua of vALORE in pouey of eto Reno enowitolloneliidags:
Duration in hrs. . 93 27 20 42 116 247 172 24 3 t Humidity relative, saturation being 10v. Fog on 1 day, 30th.
| Te | en | T 14 years only
Mean velocity... . Bie ; : 6 : i 1
vy a ee SC alee ae aoe 24:4 | 12 The greatest heat was 87.1° on the lith; the
; i SS greatest cold was 32.8° on the 14th, giving a
Greatest mileage in one hour was 44 on the 12th. Resultant mileage, 5685, range of temperature of 54.3 degrees.
Greatest velocity in gusts 60 miles per hour on Ta aS /— Warmest day hes he, 10e ae alee
the 12th and 30th. (inanideriand lichtuing aim > the 13th. Highest barometer reading was 30.495
and 30th. 6 Tiere, 7th, 8th, 11th on the Ist. Lowest barometer was 29.429 on the
Rainbow on 17th. lith, giving a range of 1.069 inches. Maximum

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE, 1895.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 teet. C. H. MclLEOD, Superintendent.

THERMOMETER.

— —_——_- — eS

Max. | Min. | Range.

80.3

SUNDAY. ....-.4- wees fPeoors
71.0
77-2
72.0
66.2
72.0

76.9

83.5
83.2
86.4
84.8
77-5
75-3
75-5

bon ORO

ww

ISUNDAY........ 2 76.2
810

85.0
85.2
85.5
75-5
76.0

Coburn
oOwb’bKONO

SUNDAY 78.0
77-5
80.0
83.0
70-9
79 +2
79-2

CAI ON

moe
-~~N
> h

77-8

17.14

69.54

78-53

73-83 | 58.50 17-33

zo Years means
for and including
this month

BAROMETER.

—_——_— —]} tMean

Mean. & Min, | Range.

29.8453

29.9877 29,913 +148

29-9953

pressure [relative é
of vapor.{ bumid-f point.

SKY CLOUDED

WIND. In TENTHS

Mean

General jyelocits} 2

direction. |in miles s
perhour

{ Mean —
Dew a =
a
=

ni
=

.
.

oe

why
"22
ONnNHO AN

Do Lone
ax %

2°35:

agve 2

Ce
[ote

aovgtes =

5
HHARARDA 0 Oh OUD OKHUIBWOY

Onwonood:

er cent. of
possible,
Sunshine.
Rainfall ip
inches
inches,
snow melted.
Rain and

| Snowfall in

20 Years means for
and including this
month,

ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. _

N-E.

Duration in hrs. . 128

Mean velocity... . has 4-7

S| Sw. | Ww.

4038

Greatest mileage in one hour was 31 on the Ist

land 2nd,
Greatest velocity in gusts, 36 miles per hour on
the 2nd,

Resultant mileage, 5002.

Resultant direction, S. 514° W,

Total mileage, 8336,

Thunder and lightning on 6 days, 4th, 12th, 13th
21st and 27th.

* Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and
temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.

§ Observed.

t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.

t Humidity relative, saturation being 10u.

1 14 years only.

The greatest heat was 86.4° on the lith; the
greatest cold was 52.8° on the 16th, giving a
range of temperature of 34.6 degrees.

Warmest day was the 19th. Coldest day was
the 6th. Highest barometer reading was 30.428
on the 17th. Lowest barometer was 29.603 on the

13th, giving a range of .825 inches. Maximum

relative humidity was 100 onthe 2Ist. Minimum

Minimum relative humidity was 44 on the 15th.
Rain fell on 12 days.

is abd were observed on 3 nights, Ist, 6th and

ery 2
SS

“t '
Sn I

tt 4
v8

wn

ot i
eS

™
22
ss

ab Ip gm

E t
; , , :
tae —e Tt ath er
re: igh
a: RRiat { h 7 py Al
“% {
fo j I
4. ys H ; J
7} i j ae hi .
| V .
hy 7 i
a a , ‘ \
at .. y ; ‘ =
4 ' {
’ A { ¥ gis \
HA } aan \
oe. eat ; fy Ya ga vie ovy CAT oe a
AG ; . The. iia”
Veen . Ls 4 { 72%, +. oe
‘a y t at. *) hos
gw ait oy thes Cate. i So
im an | Se er
? tht hn f ‘
; . ead oe ‘ ‘via 1 iy , P
i ‘Sb aay ki | \ . ‘oe ee:
Be Pe P t ? Ry ; 1%
UN wae , ie . ‘TAY ‘ . _ Mh Fo
Th a olen 7 y : : bs oe . abt es 4
wn 4 ‘ z ae ¢!
vie TE? tele : +
j
F
; ee aTKy ~ coef
iW . ;
i i hae
> \ : , ' A bat ie &

fh f 1 + ~ . 2 | i me).
' { cap:
it . |
; ica ‘ f } ne
Pek. ies he by: | » ee
; t r :
mf -
* ; j \ ny
et
I ; y
Se asf , y
} : id
wat we ; - Le
iva t +
' ty ani 5
} : . 1 \3 vif '
1 e 1
ot. ot
ead m pe! i‘.
r ‘ ia
ay +
wie ot
4 sR
y f { f
we .
p *
a i S m
’ ‘s
os
7 /.

ABSTRACT FORBEHE MONTH OF JULY,

7

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observaiays Montrea)], Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

1895.

=———— +
, SKY CLOUDED gx 3
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In Tentus. [° ; 6|- 8 & Bs
a =—<—<— | ———$—— ——— —-—y tMean ff Meau —_— —|— -—258) 33 asa [oa
DAY. pressure relative] Dew Meanf ¢ | . Sag 22 | 22 | da DAY.
, of vapor.f{ humid-f point. | General |velocity} <= 4} gfees| se ES Ba
Mean.| Max. | Min. |Range.J Mean. Max. Min. | Range. ity. direction. |tn miles} 3S at || Re) JSR es a- | ¢a
= |=/= 0 a a
—, Et! perhour Lees
1 63.25 [ 72.0 53-5 18.5 29.9877 | 30.035 29.939 .096 3708 64.2 50-5 N.W. 13-0 2.0| 4] Off 89 Inap. Inap.| 1
2| 68.78; 77.2 57-8 19.4 jo.1218 | 30.149 30 080 069 -3422 49.2 48-3 Ne 10.7 2.8} 7) 08 87 eoee 6 sialainl) ad
5 69.52 78.2 61.0 17.2 30.1138 | 30.189 30.02 165 ~4655 63.5 56 3 S.W. rSe5) 7-5| 10] 5 49 5000 ae eae 3
4| 75-02 | 85.3 62 2 23.1 29-9448 | 30.028 29 826 202 5735 67.7 62.7 N, 9.5 6.7]10/ 59 58 . ae ser 4
5 | 71.23 | 77-2 66.0 11.2 29.8820 | 29.934 29 . 806 128 4822 64.2 57-8 S.E, 14 2 48] 10] of 58 a a a 5
6| 70.13 | 77-5 62.0 15.5 29.7842 | 29.867 29 704 .163 5475 75.0 61.3 S.E. 8.8 3.0| 8] of 62 be é
SUNDAY. ....++2-7 eee 84.8 64.0 DO MMMRCE Sea) since || sveces Rises Pee ie see S.W. Ir 0 Sate) emtenthee 75 feria . ical | es ne nee . SUNDAY
78.5 87.5 69.0 18.5 29.6477 | 29.685 29.589 +096 6753 71 2 67.3 S.W. I2 4 8.5 | 10] 59 25 Inap Inap.| 8
9 79.43 81.9 58.5 23.4 29.7319 | 29.935 29 613 «322 5503 72.0 60.5 S.W. 18.5 55] 10 3 59 0.02 - 0.02 9
1o | 59.62| 67.8 51.2 10.6 30.0738 | 30.108 29.991 +117 +2955 58.3 44-7 N.W. 14-5 2.7| 8| Of 96 sees .- + | to
u 64.20 | 74.8 55-2 19.6 30.0810 | 30.152 30.029 123 +3653 62.7 50.0 Ss 14.6 3-5 | 10] Off 89 BoD . Ir
12 64.12 73-5 54.8 18.7 29.9873 | 30.054 29.917 +137 +4367 73.0 55.0 De 15.3 8.3] Io | Off 04 G.13 0.13 | 12
13 | 65.52 | 73-0 59.0 14.0 29.9225 | 29.961 29.899) 062 4427 71.2 55-5 w. 12.0 6.3| 10] 39 58 0.16 0.16 | 73
SUNDAY...5+-55+14 aos 740 60.0 TAC OM Mle enicers co | Feeeseraal MRO .. | ae Soom aot N g.2 scan lessens a 53 Inap Inap,| 1 SUNDAY
15 | 66.58) 75.0 58.2 16.8 29.9760 | 30.058 29.896 «162 5003 77-8 58.7 ES 6.9 4.8] 10] 0 59 ewes A Boo a pa
16 64.87 73-8 58.5 15.3 29.8620 | 29.884 29.845 039 +5105 83.7 59-7 Sas sl 8.3 | 10] 0 Ir 0.05 se) || 05 1 26
17 | 73-25 | 820 | 64.0 | 18.0 J 29.7862 | 29.867 | 29 667 .200 -6102 ff 75.2 Q 64.0 S.W, 129 | 6.7]10] off 56 ! Inap, .. | Imap.| 17
18 66.50 74-0 60.0 14.0 29.9838 | 30.084 29.846 238 3985 62.0 52.5 N.W. 11.8 ERE} 8 ° 85 Sialela an eee lhxe
19 | 66.33! 75-0 56.2 18.8 30.1020 | 30.161 30.034 127 4338 68.0 55 0 N 5-0 7-5|10| 5 46 Inap, se aaps larg)
20 | 75.72 | 86.0 65.0 21.0 29.9825 | 30.048 29.888 «160 5485 62.5 61.3 Ww, 9-0 6.0 | 10] 0 76 omer eee | 20
SUNDAY, ......-21 apis eal || 2 SONG 63.4 17.2 eel = (cies sc. . Sa veers ates ene N.E. 15.2 nea Serviieacs 59 cee atagie! | 2E« ale siam ater . SUNDAY
22 | 73.32] 82.0 65.2 16.8 29.8655 | 29.899 29,822 .077 5555 67.5 61.7 s.W, 10.1 6.2 | 10 | 0 48 Ses one |'22
23 | 68.50] 77.6 59.2 18.4 29.9835 | 30.052 29.950 102 3815 55°5 51.2 WwW 13.0 1.0] 4] Of 98 a ee) 23
24 jo.50 | 80.8 60.2 20.6 29.9037 | 29.985 29.814 +170 4792 64.8 57-5 S.W. 12.7 3-7 |, 10: )- © Sr ave woe | 24
25 | 64.35 | 68.5 61.0 755 29.7523 | 29-791 29.717 .074 4595 76.3 50.5 S,W. 11.7 5-3 | 10] Of 04 wee coe | 25
26 63.13 69.3 57-2 12. 29.8363 29 879 29.767 «112 4062 71.0 53-2 N, 7.9 8.5 | 10 3 40 | see ate se. | 26
27| 59-47] 64.0 56.5 755 29.8377 | 29.880 29.773 107 4518 89.0 56.0 Ss. 8.7 7-.5| 10] Off 90 0.41 0.41 | 27
SuNDAY........28 |... 72.0 54.0 18.0 Soe, =a Rae Sane sete aoe Ae w. ees! BABS A lac oo J 92 says me soe | 2B..-. 000 ... SUNDAY
29 66.15 76.2 52.0 24.2 29.8117 29.908 29.707 .201 +4007 62.3 52-7 S.W. 9-9 3-8 | 10 ° 8o Saat a Crete ZG),
30 60.35 | 69.2 52.0 17.2 29.5873 | 29.677 29.471 -206 4332 66 7 54-2 S.W. 17.0 7.8| 10] 39 36 1.24 Fe 1.24 | 30
. 3: 55-40 59.8 51.8 8.0 29.6017 29.644 29.557 .087 3835 87.5 51-5 S.W. 22.1 9.3 | 10 6 00 0.37 bes 9-37 | 31
scene -Means} 67.21 | 75.82 | 58.99 16.84 J 29.8944 | 29.959 29.821 +138 4632 69.0 56 LR, oe 56,° W 12.34 5.6] 9.31.49 55-9 | 2.38 pao ae 38 |Sums .... ninct’salae
SpA aioe | ae ae : oa 6 ee
E 75.| 977 2 0. 62 KGUGAIE CARER ZC foun | eases : fe J 5 ; 2 i i
aa band fhe alee 98935 ue | -a987 | r0.90f Po. s3.16] 55] --|-- fs | 4-00 sco | and incndng this
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and 30th, giving a range of .718 inches. Maximum
=e temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. relative humidity was 100 onthe 30th. Minimum
Direction..... Aap! dst N-E. E. S.E. 3S. S.W. | Ww. | N.W. Cato. § Observed. relative humidity was 38 on the 23rd.
——_—_—_—— |—-—— 5) Ss || _ eee —— EF. Rain fell on 12 days.
Miles ....+.2+.%| 88 8 | 416 Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.
DeBoer (ats | 253 | sere iaeam | seca | so | A), eee hee See ae Fog on 1 day, the 13th.
Duration in hrs. . 93 36 28 80 93 219 103 | gu ; t Humidity relative, saturation being 10v.
SSS ee —_—— | -—_—— — |_| — | — eo 114 yearsonly s Ten years only.
Mean velocity... . 5 6 3 z
city 9-51 10,64 9.04 | 12.58 | t1.09 | 14.62 The greatest heat was 87.5° on the 8th; the

11.25 | 3

Greatest mileage in one hour was 30 on the
30th.

Greatest velocity in gusts, 36 miles per hour on
the 30th and 31st.

Resultant mileage, 3650.
Resultant direction, S. 56}° W.
Total mileage, 9181.

Average mileage per hour, 12,34.

sreatest cold was 51.2° on the 10th, giving a
range of temperature of 36.3 degrees.

Warmest day was the 8th. Coldest day was
the 3lst. Ilighest barometer reading was 30.189
on the 3rd. Lowest barometer was 29.471 on the

EE TT I TT, TE DODD TITEL. TT TES TILT TEE, OPEL EE OLLIE OIL LED E LEE LLL LE ALLL LE DLL L LDL LOD LEE LLL IED EAE I LE AT

= et ae Sa eevee

<a eS ee

iene Z

a a ae ee ee

-

Ens

ea aes

Sn ae

Sa.
as Bae

NOTICES.

All communications and exchanges should be carefully
addressed to CANADIAN RecorpD or Sciences, Natural History
Society, 32 University Street, Montreal.

a Rejected articles will be returned if desired, and if stamps are

| enclosed for that purpose. The editors will not hold themselves
responsible for any views expressed by authors. .
Subscribers who fail to receive the RECORD, or who change

their residences, are requested to notify the Editors accordingly.
Back Numbers of the REcorD may be obtained of the Editors
at forty cents per number, ;
Volumes, unbound, may be had as follows:

Vout. 1.,4 Nos. - - - - - $1.50
Vous. II. & IIT., 8 Nos. each, - - 3.00 per vol.

_ The ReEcorD is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers,
or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage
paid, is as follows:

Canada and the United States, 3 et $3.00
Great Britain, - - - - £0 13 0

ISSUED 17TH JANUARY, 1896.

ee a

‘THE CANADIAN

wre a INCLUDING THE PROCEEDINGS OF
H i THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL,
Bay Wier AND REPLACING | i

THE CANADIAN NATURALIS’

CONTENTS.

ributions to Canadian Botany. By Jams M. MAcouN...... ...++00. 459
jew of the Evidence for the Animal Nature of Eozoén Canadense. By ;
fei WILETAM DAWSON, CMG ek lee ccs ebede sence cnceree’ S00iG Ran
Yhemical Composition of Andradite from Two Localitiesin Ontario. By = 8 8

PO TUELARBINGTOM MAG EDD ben gol becpecdussedecsdececacce senna: 190 nm
e Dykes Cutting the Laurentian System, Counties of Frontenac, Leeds neti
and Lanark, Ont. By W. G. Miuuer and R. W. Broox.. ............ 482 0
the Ferns in the Vicinity of Montreal. By Haroip B. CusHine, B.A... 489 | Lon as
d and Silver Ores of the Slocan, B.C. By J. C. Gwitum, B.A.Sc....... 494 BAe
ok Notices : ees.
_ Ein Pra-Kambrisches Fossil, Paleontologishe Notizen. By Von Car taht
The hn BARE V8 ES AO ET goa Se a oe salen’ Gans aa gee ae je ele
_ Minerals and How to Study Them: a Book for Beginners in Mineralogy. re
By Epwarp Satispury Dana ...... Bais Val alec ec ele ceitee ath aaa Hid
_ Life and Rocks: a Collection of Zoological and Geological Essays. By ceuh
R. | cacaiweag ak gh aiahaaadl A Ae pet sales'etled iste! p loreled a)yb er) BOE
4
‘MONTREAL: |
Bost PUBLISHED BY THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.
LONDON, ENGLAND: BOSTON, MASS. :
SOLLINS, 157 Great Portland St. = A.A. WarTeRMAN & Co., 36 Bromfield St,

1896.

it \ &
iy q f -

eve ik TF , aged APP LPTs,
BLA Sa yah seh t ofa fis tt Poa

J. H. R. Monson. - GEORGE SUMNER.
Str DonALD SMITH, K.C.M.G. J. H. JosEPH.
Hon. Justice WuURTELE.
Hon. pseu Secretary ; ‘ . Hon. Corresponding Secretary : .
Cuas. S. J. PHILLIPS. | Joun W. Srieuine, M.D., Edin,
Honorary Curator : Honorary Pee 5
J. B. WILLIAMS. | F. W. RicHarps.
Members of Council :
Gro. SuMNER, Chairman.
Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc.. Ph.D. JAMES GARDNER.
ALBERT HOLDEN. JOSEPH FORTIER.
Nevit Norton Evans. Hon. J. K. Warp.
—C. T. WiLuiaMs. Pror. JoHN Cox.

- OF FICERS_SESSION N 1895-96.
Patron: .
His ExcetLency THE Governor-GENERAL OF CANADA,

Hon. President :
‘Sire J. Witi1aAm Dawson, LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.8.C.

President :
Rev. Ropert CAMPBELL, D.D., M.A.

Ast Vice-President :
JOHN S. SHEARER.

Vice-Presidents :

Dr. WESLEY MILLs. B. J. Harrieron, Ph. D., F.R. s. 0

Hon. SENATOR MURPHY. J. STEVENSON Brown.

EpGAR JUDGE.

Editing and Hxchange Committee :
Frank D. Apams, M.A.Sc., Ph. D., Chairman.

G. F. Marruew, St. John, N.B. Rev. R. CampsBe.y, D.D.
J. T. WHITEAVES, Ottawa, Ont. Dr. WESLEY MILLs.
B.J. Harrineton, B.A., Ph.D.,F.G.S. | Nevin Norton Evans.
Pror. JoHN Cox.
Library Committee :
E. T. CHAMBERS, Chairman.
J. A. U. Beaupry, C.E. JOSEPH FORTIER,
R. W. McLACHLAN. A. F. Winn.
G. KEARLEY. W. DRAKE.
J. F. HAvSEN.
Museum Committee :
‘J. B. WiuuiaMs, Chairman.
A. F. WINN N. N. Evans.
J. F. HAUSEN J. S. Brown.
E. D. WINTLE G. KEARLEY.

Lecture Committee :
Rev. Rost. CAMPBELL, D.D., Chairman.
Cuas. 8S. J. PHILLIPS.
Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.
EDGAR JUDGE.

House Committee :
JNO. S. SHEARER, Chairman.
EDGAR JUDGE. | Guzo. SUMNER.’
W. DRAKE.

‘Membership Committee :
J. STEVENSON Brown, Chairman.
JOHN S. SHEARER. _ | JosepH FORTIER.
W. DRAKE.

Superintendent :
ALFRED GRIFFIN.

Pror. JoHN Cox.
Dr. WESLEY MILLs.
N. N. Evans.

ee

5 rire >

THE

CANADIAN RECORD

OF SCIENCH.

POL.’ V1. OCTOBER, 1895. No. 8.

CoNTRIBUTIONS TO CANADIAN Botany.
_ By James M. Macovun.
WOE.

AQUILEGIA JONESIL, Parry.

High slopes of Sheep Mountain, Waterton Lake, Rocky
Mountains, Lat. 49° 05’, July 29th, 1895. (John Macoun,
Herb. No. 10,029.) New to Canada.

BERBERIS NERVOSA, Pursh.

Not rare in deep, moist woods in Trinivy Valley, between
Mabel Lake and Enderby, B.C., 1895. (Jas. McHvoy, Herb.
No. 10,133.) Not before recorded east of Yale, B.C.

BERBERIS AQUIFOLIUM, Pursh.

In open thickets, Waterton Lake, Lat. 49° 05’, Rocky
Mountains, 1895. (John Macoun. Herb. No. 10,267.)
Eastern limit in Canada.

PAPAVER PYRENAICUM, L.

A single specimen collected by Dr. G. M. Dawson in the
South Kootanie Pass, Rocky Mountains, 1883. Re-dis-
34

460 Canadian Record of Sevence.

covered in 1895 by Prof. John Macoun on Sheep Moun-
tain, Waterton Lake, Rocky Mountains, alt. 7,500 feet,
Lat. 49° 05”. Herb. No. 10,269. New to America.

LESQUERELLA LUDOVICIANA, Wats.

Specimens collected at Medicine Hat, Assa., by Prof.
John Macoun, in 1895, (Herb. No. 10,308) are the only
specimens in our herbarium that can be referred here,
The pubescence of the oblanceolate radical leaves is con-
spicuously stellate.

‘LESQUERELLA LUDOVICIANA, WATS., var. ARENOSA, Wats.

Vesicaria Ludoviciana, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L.,
p. 54, in part, and Vol. L, p. 490.

From Western Manitoba to the Saskatchewan. The
reference under L. Ludoviciana, Wats., var. arenosa, Wats.,
Macoun Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IL, p. 305, should go with
LI. arctica, Wat. :

SISYMBRIUM VIRGATUM, Nutt.

In gravel amongst bushes, Police Point, Medicine Hat,
Assa. In fruit May 31st, 1894. Herb. No. 3,069; prairies,
12-Mile Lake, Wood Mountain, Assa., June 6th, 1895.
Herb. No. 10,007; meadows; Sucker Creek, Cypress
Lake, Assa., 1895. Herb. No. 10,006. (John Macown.)
New to Canada. The Canadian specimens have longer
pedicels and pods and are more paniculately branched
than those from the Rocky Mountains in the United
States, but Dr. Robinson, who examined our specimens,
has been unable to detect a single significant or constant
character to separate the plants from the two regions.

ARABIS DruMMONDI, Gray; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. L, p. 45, in part.

«

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 461

A. Lyall, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L., p.43; and
Vol. I., p. 487, in part; J. M. Macoun, Can. Rec. Science,
Wol. VE, p. 145.

From the Cypress Hills, Assiniboia, west to the Gold
Range in British Columbia. Our specimens are from
Cypress Hills, Assa.; Sheep Mountain, Waterton Lake,
Rocky Mountains; mountains north of Devil’s Lake, and
at Kicking Horse Lake, Rocky Mountains. (John Macown.)
Maple Creek, Assa.; Toad Mountain, Kootanie Lake, B.C.;
Mount Queest, Shuswap Lake, B.C. (Jas. i. Macoun,
Rocky Mountains. (Drummond.)

ARABIS LYALLII, Wats.

Our specimens of this species are from West Summit
of North Kootanie Pass. (Dr. G. If. Dawson.) Shore of
Waterton Lake, Rocky Mountains; mountains north of
Devil’s Lake, Rocky Mountains. (John Macoun.) Lookout
Mountain, Big Bend of Columbia River, B.C. tii |
Coleman.)

VioLta HOWELL, Gray.

V. canina, L. var. sylvestris, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol L, p. 63 in part.

V. canina, L. var. longipes, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Vol. L., p. 493 in part.

In woods, New Westminster, B.C.; Cedar Hill, Shawni-
gan Lake and Nanaimo, Vancouver Island. (John
Macoun.) Vancouver Island (Streets, vide Syn. Fl. North
Am. Vol. L, p. 202.)

VIOLA ORBICULATA, Geyer ; re-described and figured in
Contr. from U.S.. Herbarium, Vol. III., No. 4, p. 214.
V. sarmentosa, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L, p. 493

in part.
V. sarmentosa Dougl. var. orbiculata, Robinson, Syn.

PLN. Am, Voll. p; 199.

462 Canadian Record of Science.

Western Summit of North Kootanie Pass, Rocky
Mountains; Dean or Salmon River, B.C. (Dr. G I.
Dawson) Kicking Horse Lake, Rocky Mountains; sum-
mit of Selkirk Mountains, B.C.; Revelstoke, B.C.; moun-
tains near Ainsworth, Kootanie Lake, B.C. (John Macown.)
Viola sarmentosa Doug]. seems in Canada to be confined
to the Coast Range and Vancouver Island, all our speci-
mens from the interior being plainly V. orbiculata, Geyer.
The two plants have always been separated in our herba-
rium, though all were named V. sarmentosa.

ARENARIA CONGESTA, Nutt.

Open prairies, Sweet Grass Hills, Alberta, just north of
the International Boundary, 1895. (John Macoun.) Not
before recorded from Canada.

CLAYTONIA MEGARRHIZA, Parry.

Additional references for this species are: summit of
Saddle Mountain, Banff, Rocky Mountains ; summit of
Sheep Mountain, Waterton Lake, Lat. 49° 05’, Rocky |
Mountains, Herb. No. 10,091. (John Macoun.)

HYPERICUM KALMIANUM, L.; Macoun. Cat, Can. Plants,
Vol. I, p. 84.

On a small rocky island in the Ottawa River, Township
Clarendon, Pontiac Co., Que. In flower July 24th, 1895.
(Robt. H. Cowley.)

NEMOPANTHES CANADENSIS, DC.

Banks of west branch of Nottaway River, N.E. Ter.,
1895.; (Dr. ae Bell.)

LUPINUS PUSILLUS, Pursh.

L. Kingu, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L, 103.
Dry sand hills, five miles west of the northern elbow of

ae
¥ eee

ra

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 463

the South Saskatchewan; Crane Lake, Assa., Herb. No.
4,068 ; Police Point, Medicine Hat, Assa., Herb. No. 4,069 ;
South of Wood Mountain, Assa.; Many Berries Creek,
Milk River, Assa., Herb. No. 10,412; Milk River, Assa.,
Herb. No. 10,414. (John Macown.) Along the Belly
River, Alberta. (Dr. Geo. M. Dawson.)

LUPINUS MINIMUS, Dougl.; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Voli p.L0s.

Summit of Sheep Mountain, Waterton Lake, Lat. 49° 05’,
alt. 7,500 ft., July 31st, 1895. (John Macoun, Herb. No.
10,413.) The only authentic Canadian record, as it is
doubtful whether it was found by Douglas north of the.
boundary.

CICER ARIETINUM, L.
Vicia (?), Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IL, p. 512.

In dry soil at Chinaman’s Ranch, above Spence’s Bridge,
Thompson River, B.C., Aug. 1883. (Jas. Fletcher.) Intro-

duced ‘in wool at Wingham, Ont., 1891. (J. 4. Morton.)

A native of Bengal.

SPIRHA BETULIFOLIA, Pall.

Peel’s River, Mackenzie River Delta, July 14th, 1892.
(Miss E. Taylor.) Specimens from Qualco Lake, B.C.,
collected by Dr. G. M. Dawson, are doubtfully referred
here. These are the only specimens of this species in our
herbarium. :

SPIRHA LUCIDA, Dougl.; Pittonia, Vol. IL, p. 221.

S. betulifola, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. L, p. 126,
in part.

Common in thickets and on hillsides, from the Rocky
Mountains westward. Our specimens are from Kootanie
Pass, Rocky Mountains. (Dr. G. Mf. Dawson) Valleys of
the Rocky Mountains. (Drummond) Waterton Lake, Lat.

464 Canadian Record of Science.

49° 05’, Rocky Mountains; Bow River Pass and Kicking
Horse Lake, Rocky Mountains; Sproat and Deer Park,
Columbia River, B.C.; Sicamous, B.C.; Spence’s Bridge,
B.C. (John Macoun.) Red Deer, Alberta. (H. H. Gaetz.)

SPIRAA ARBUSCULA, Greene, Erythea, Vol. III. p. 63.

S. betulifola, Pall., var. rosea, Gray ; Macoun, Cat. Can.
Plants, Vol. L, p. 513.

In woods and thickets at the summit of the Selkirk
Range, B.C. (Sohn Macoun. Jas. Fletcher.)

NEILLIA OPULIFOLIA, Wats.

Banks of West Branch of Noni River, N. E. Ter.,
1895. (Dr. RB. Beil.)

POTENTILLA OVINA.

P. dissecta, var. pinnatisecta, Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
Meals: peo lr

Low, tufted, the multicipitous ligneous caudex partly
subterranean and clothed with the persistent bases of the
leaves ; leaves 14 to 4 inches long of from 4 to 7 pairs of
pinne, these parted into 2 or 3 linear pinne, villous-pilose
at apex and sparingly so on both surfaces. Flowering
stems scarcely leafy, 4 to 6 inches high, the flowers on
slender pedicels an inch or tyo long; achenes few,
obliquely obovoid, smooth and glabrous.

High slopes of Castle Mountain, Rocky Mountains,
Herb. No. 7,242; crevices of rocks at The Mound, Banff,
Rocky Mountains, Herb. No. 7,235; Sheep Mountain,
Waterton Lake, Lat. 49° 05’, Rocky Mountains, Herb. Nos.
10,488, 10,489. (John Macoun.)

Though considered a variety of P. ‘Plattensis by Dr.
Watson, Prof. Macoun always believed the Rocky Moun-
tain plant to be quite distinct from that species, and more
nearly related to P. dissecta. Later he came to the con-

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 465

clusion that it was a good species, and in this opinion he
is sustained by Dr. Edw. L. Greene, who has examined
the specimens collected on Sheep Mountain in 1895. The
above preliminary description is based on his diagnosis,
Prof. Macoun has seen the specimens labelled P. Plattensis,
var. pinnatisecta in the Grey Herbarium, and _ believes
them to be all referable here.

CALLITRICHE HAMULATA, Kiirtz.

Dr. Morong having examined the specimens referred
to this species (Macoun Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. IL, p. 322,)
pronounced them to be C. verna, L. We have no authentic
Canadian specimens of C. hamulata.

LUDWIGIA PALUSTRIS, Ell.

Wet places, Sproat Lake, Vancouver Island, 1887.
(John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of the Sas-
katchewan.

GAYOPHYTUM RAMOSISSIMUM, T. & G.

Near Dog Lake, Okanagan Valley, B.C., 1895. (Jas.
Fletcher.) New to Canada.

SANICULA.

Following Mr. Bicknell’s revision of the eastern species
of this genus, our herbarium specimens have been arranged
as below :—

S. MARYLANDICA, L.

From New Brunswick and Nova Scotia west to Van-
couver Island.

S. GREGARIA, Bicknell, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, Vol. XXII,
p. 354.
Near Belleville, Ont. (John Macown) Wingham, Ont.
(J. A. Morton.)

466 Canadian Record of Science.

S. CANADENSIS, L.

We have, in our herbarium, no specimens of this species
as diagnosed by Mr. Bicknell, though it may be common
enough throughout Eastern Canada.

S. TRIFOLIATA, Bicknell, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, Vol. XXL,
p. 360.

Casselman, Ont.; Hastings Co., Ont.; Amherstburg,
Ont. (John Macoun.) This Saniewla, with conspicuously
trifoliate, petioled cauline leaves, has been generally taken
in Canada to be typical S. Canadensis, L. |

OSMORRHIZA BREVISTYLIS, DC.

From Prince Edward Island west to Lake Winnipeg.

OSMORRHIZA LONGISTYLIS, DC.

From Nova Scotia west to the Saskatchewan.

OSMORRHIZA NUDA, Torr.

From the Eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains west
to Vancouver Island.

OSMORRHIZA OCCIDENTALIS, Torr.

Mountain woods at Ainsworth, Kootanie Lake, B.C.,
alt, 5,000 ft., 1890. (John Macown.) A new station for
this plant.

CicuTA CALIFORNICA, Gray.

New Westminster, B.C.; Ainsworth, Kootanie Lake,
B.C. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded from British
Columbia mainland.

CARUM CaARUI, L.

Waste places near the brick-yard at Banff, Rocky
Mountains. (John Macown.)

Low 4

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 467

Ligusticum Gray, ©. & R.; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants,
VolclT, p. 327.

Woods on the mountains at Ainsworth, Kootanie Lake,
B.C., alt. 5,000 feet. (John Macown.)

LIGUSTICUM SCOPULORUM, Gray.

Specimens collected by Prof. John Macoun, at Roger’s
Pass, Selkirk Mountains, B.C., in 1890, have been doubt-
fully referred here by Prof. Coulter. Not before recorded
from Canada.

HELIANTHUS GROSSE-SERRATUS, Martens.

Along the Grand Trunk Railway, near Stamford, Ont.,
1895. (R&. Cameron.) Introduced from United States.

CLADOTHAMNUS CAMPANULATUS, Greene, Erythea, Vol. IIL,
p. 65.

Shrub 3 to 5 feet high, with few and stoutish ascending
branches ; leaves lanceolate, 1 to 3 inches long, tapering
to a short petiole, which, together with the veins beneath,
is more or less strigose-hirsute with red hairs; flowers
solitary or in pairs or threes, from lateral buds, on pedicels
4 inch long, those setose-hispid with red hairs; sepals
ovate-oblong, densely ciliate with short gland-tipped hairs ;
corolla ight salmon colour, campanulate, the petals joined
at base into a short tube; anthers opening only by a pair
of large round terminal pores.

Credited to British Columbia by Dr. Greene, but all our
specimens, both from Vancouver Island and the mainland,
are C. pyroleflorus, Bong. The new species should be
looked for by collectors in British Columbia on the higher
mountains of the Coast Range. We have specimens of
C. pyroleflorus collected at Sitka by Bongard himself.

468 — Canadian Record of Science.
VINCA MAJOR, Linn.

In fields near Victoria, Vancouver Island, 1893. (John
Macoun.) Escaped from gardens.

GENTIANA PLATYPETALA, Griseb.
Mount Rapho, Bradford Inlet, Lat. 56°13’, Long. 131°36’,

alt. 4,050 ft., July 7th, 1894. (A.W. E.Canavan.) Yakoun

Lake, Queen Charlotte Islands, 1895. (Dr. C. F. Newcombe.) —
New to Canada.
MENYANTHES CRISTA-GALLI, Menzies.

Port Simpson, B.C., 1893. (Jas. McEvoy.) Shore of
Yakoun Lake, Queen Charlotte Islands, 1895. (Dr. C.F
Newcombe.)

MYOSOoTIS C&SPITOSA, Schultz.
Cartwright, Ont., 1891. (W. Scott.) New to Canada.

SOLANUM NIGRUM, L., var. VILLOSuUM, Mill. |
A new station for this plant is New Westminster, B.C.

1895. (4. J. Mill.)

VERBASCUM THASPUS, L.

Waste plates, Revelstoke, B.C.; Vernon, Lake Okana-
gan, B.C., and Sannach Road, near Victoria, Vancouver
Island. (John Macoun.) Not before recorded west of
Ontario.

VERBASCUM BLATTARIA, L.

Waste places, Revelstoke, B.C. (John Macoun.) On —
the sea shore at Union Mines, Comox, Vancouver Island.
(Anderson.) Not before recorded west of Ontario.

CHELONE GLABRA, Linn.

_ Banks of west branch of Nottaway River, N.E. Ter.,
18954-"CDr. Es Bell-)

Contributions to Canadian Botany. 469

EUNANUS BREWERI, Greene.

Amongst grass on hillsides at Sproat, Columbia River,
1890. (John Macoun, Herb. No. 10,307.) New to Canada.
Determined by Dr. Greene.

THYMUS CHAM2DRYS, Fries.

Stanley Park, Vancouver, B.C., September, 1895. (Rev.
H. H. Gowen.) T. Serpyllum, L., is not uncommon in
Eastern America, but this species has not been before
recorded from this country.

CALAMINTHA CLINOPODIUM, Benth.

New Westminster, B.C., 1895. (A. J. Hill.) Not
recorded west of Manitoba. Probably introduced.

POGONIA OPHIOGLOSSOIDES, Ker.

In bogs, near small lakes at head of Gatineau River,
Que. (Dr. R. Bell.)

ALLIUM GEYERI, Wats.

Gravelly banks, Botanie, west of Spence’s Bridge, B.C.,
1890. (Jas. McEvoy.) Found on Vancouver Island, but
not before on mainland of British Columbia. Referred
by mistake to Allium Nevii, Wats., in No. II. of these
papers.

ALLIUM ACUMINATUM, Hook.

On gravelly banks, Botanie, west of Spence’s Bridge,
B.C., 1890. (Jas. McEvoy.) Not before recorded from
mainland of British Columbia.

CAREX FESTIVA, Dew., var. GRACILIS, Olney.
Borders of coulees, Cypress Hills, Assa., 1894. (John

Macoun, Herb. No. 7,396.) Not before recorded east of
British Columbia.

470 — Canadian Record of Scienec.

REVIEW OF THE EVIDENCE FOR THE ANIMAL NATURE OF

E0ZOON CANADENSE.
By Sir Witi1am Dawson, C.M.G., LL.D., F.R.S., Ete.1
I. HISTORICAL AND STRATIGRAPHICAL.

The writer of these notes had hoped to have been able
long ago to let the vexed questions respecting Eozoén
repose 1n peace in so far as he was concerned, and he is
now induced to offer a short summary of the evidence in
the case only with the view of correcting some misappre-
hensions that seem to have arisen in regard to points well
established, and which, independently of any question as
to the nature of Eozoon, belong to the certain data of
geology. These misapprehensions lead to the confound-
ing of the structures originally discovered by Logan with
things in no way related to them, and from which they
had been clearly distinguished by my own original studies,
and by those of Hunt, Carpenter, and Rupert Jones. New
facts relating to pre-Cambrian life have also been coming
to ight from time to time, and many of these are con-
nected, either directly or indirectly, with the evidence
respecting Kozoon.

As early as 1858, Sir William Logan had begun to
suspect that the Stromatoporoid forms collected from the
great Laurentian limestones in different parts of Canada
must be of organic origin, and he ventured to mention
them as possibly of this nature at the meeting of the
American Association in 1859, and in his General Report
on the Geology of Canada in 1863. The evidence on
which he relied was their occurrence only in the lime-
stones, their similarity in form and general structure to
the Stromatoporee, or “Layer-Corals” of the Paleozoic, and
the circumstance that, while the forms and structures
seemed to be identical, they were mineralized by Serpent-

1 [Reprinted from the Geological Magazine, Decade IV., Vol. II., October, Novem-
"ber, December, 1895. ]

Animal Nature of Eozoin Canadense. 471.

ine, Loganite, Pyroxene, and Dolomite, an indication that.
a similar mould had been filled by diverse minerals.

At that time the little leisure that I could spare for
original work was occupied with Carboniferous and
Pleistocene geology, and I had no ambition to invade the-
great and difficult pre-Cambrian districts of Northern
Canada any further than might be necessary to my work
as a teacher of geology. In the interest of that work,
however, I had gone over considerable portions of the
Laurentian and Huronian districts surveyed by Logan and
Murray, with the aid of their maps and reports, and had
satisfied myself of the great accuracy of their work, which
led in my judgment to the following results :—

(1) That the upper part of the Lower Laurentian of
Logan, since called the Grenville Series,’ consisted of truly
stratified metamorphic deposits, including great and
extensive beds of limestone, quartzite, iron-ore, and other
rocks, evidently of aqueous origin, and that the condition.
and crystalline and chemical characters of these rocks.
were not essentially different from those of the altered
Paleozoic beds with which I was familiar in Nova Scotia.
and New England.

(2) That the Huronian, a less disturbed, less altered,
and in the main evidently a clastic series, rested uncon-
formably on the Laurentian, and was in part composed of
its materials.

(3) That the “ Upper Copper-bearing series” of Lake:
Superior, since known as Kewenian, was newer than the.
Huronian, but older than the oldest fossiliferous Cambrian
rocks then known in Canada.

(4) That, while the Kewenian and Huronian rocks, and
those designated by Logan as Upper Laurentian, indicated
by the presence of igneous masses, and, in the case of the
two former, by the prevalence of coarse, clastic material,
littoral conditions and much volcanic disturbance, the:

1 By Dr. Sterry Hunt,

7

472 Canadian Record of Science,

still older Grenville Series was of a character more indica-
tive of long-continued quiescence, accompanied by the
accumulation of great calcareous deposits, possibly of
organic origin.

These conclusions were noticed in papers contributed to
local societies, in published lecture-notes, and in class-
teaching, and were frequently discussed with Logan and
Hunt. Accordingly, when, in 1863, at the urgent request
of Logan, I undertook the microscopic examination of
large series of his supposed Laurentian fossils and the con-
taining limestones, as well as of other crystalline limestones
of various ages, slices of which he had caused to be made,
I was not unprepared to find the curious and beautiful
structures which developed themselves in his Stromato-
poroid forms, and in portions of the limestone in which
they were contained, but which appeared to resemble
those of Foraminifera rather than those of Corals.

The results thus attained, in 1864, were not fully pub-
lished until after Logan was prepared to sustain them by
detailed maps and sections of the district on the Ottawa
eontaining Eozoén, a work extending over many years of
arduous and skilful labour; and until Dr. W. B. Carpenter
and Prof. Rupert Jones had studied the original specimens
and others prepared for themselves, along with my notes,
and camera drawings executed by the artist of the
Geological Survey. Dr. Sterry Hunt had also examined
ehemically the serpentine and other minerals associated
with the supposed fossils, and various hydrous silicates
mineralizing organic remains in Silurian and other lime-
stones, as terms of comparison. The whole was then
communicated to the Geological Society of London, and
appeared in the somewhat elaborate joint paper published
in 1865." :

1 A preliminary accoount entitled ‘‘On the occurrence of Organic Remains in the
Laurentian Rocks of Canada.” had, however, been communicated to the British
Association at Bath, Sept. 15-21, 1864, and was subsequently published in the Geological
Magazine, Vol. I, for November, 1864, pp. 225-227.

i

Animal Nature of Eozoin Canadense. 473

I confess that in the intervening time I have scen no
good reason to induce me to doubt the essential validity
of the work embodied in this paper of 1865, or to modify
to any considerable extent the conclusions therein stated.
On the other hand, many new and confirmatory facts
have been disclosed, and after careful and, I trust, candid
study of the objections raised, down to those which have
recently appeared in the Dublin Transactions, I believe
that they largely depend on the want of knowledge of the
character of the Grenville formation, and on misapprehen-
sion as to the form and structure of EKozo6n and its mode
of occurrence.

It is true that in those members of the Laurentian
system of Logan which are below and above the Grenville
Series, later observations have not only failed to detect
fossils, but have shown valid reasons adverse to the prob-
ability of their occurrence, at least in the portions of those
formations hitherto open to our study.’

The lowest Laurentian gueiss of Logan (Trembling
Mountain gneiss, Ottawa gneiss, fundamental gneiss),which
occupies a vast area in Northern Canada,’ and is the only
part of the system known to many geologists, consists, so
far as known, wholly of foliated or massive orthoclase
gneiss, with bands of hornblendic schist (amphibolite), and
of hornblendo-micaceous schist. While in some places it
appears to have a truly bedded structure, especially where
different varieties of gneiss, amphibolite, and biotitice schist
alternate, in others its foliation 1s obscure, or seems to
have been induced by heat and pressure. Dr. F. D. Adams,
who has given much study both to its character on the
large scale, and to the microscopic structure of the rocks,
in his latest publication on the subject’ characterizes it as

1 See Geological Magazine, June, 1895.

2 Acccording to the geological map of Northern Canada prepared by Dr. G. M.
Dawson for the Geological Survey, the area of Laurantian rocks exceeds two millions
of square miles. Of this, so far as is known the older or fundamental gneiss occupies
by far the larger portion.

3 Journal of Geology, Vol. i, No. 4, 1893.

474 Canadian Record of Science.

a complicated series of rocks of unknown origin, but com-

prising a considerable amount of intrusive material. He
regards it as either
the remains of a
primitive crust pen-
etrated by much igne-
ous matter, or as a
series of altered rocks
older than the Gren-
ville Series, and
formed under differ-
ent conditions. In
any case it seems to
want the evidences of
ordinary aqueous de-
position presented by
the limestones, 1ron-
stones, quartzite, and
schists of the Gren-
ville Series. Similar
views were advocated
in my address on the
“Geological History

of the Atlantic,” be-
QQ. ee fore the British Asso-
iN Pe :
ciation, in 1886.1
Fic. 1.—Distribution of Grenville Limestone in the district north of
Papineauville, with section showing arrangement of the beds.
Scale of map 7 miles to an inch. (See also Dr. Bonney’s.
paper, Geological Magazine, July, 1895, p. 295.)
Dotted area: Limestone.
Horizontal lines: Upper gneiss (fourth gneiss of Logan. )
Vertical lines : Lower gneiss (third gneiss of Logan.)
Diagonal lines: Overlying Cambrian and Cambro-Silurian
(Ordovician. )

The Upper Laurentian of Logan (Labradorite, Anortho-
site, or Norian Series), supposed by him to overlie the

1 See also Museum Memoir on Eozoon, pp. 2, 3. Montreal, 1888.

oF:

;
;
‘

a

iad
i Sara
es

< -
- 2 we

ae | Animal Walure of Eozoon eamlcas
a Grenville ate G@ncouiformably, 3 is now stated by Adams
7 to consist of eruptive matter, mainly composed of triclinic
or lime felspars, and to which the name Anorthosite! may
_ properly be applied. These rocks, cutting the Grenville
_ Series, and apparently in some places, interbedded with
it, are not now regarded as a distinct series of beds, but
___ as indicating local outbursts of igneous action dating about
the close of the Grenville period. What aqueous rocks
may have been contemporaneous with these, or may have
filled the interval between the Grenville Series and the
_ _Huronian, we do not at present certainly know, though
possibly some of the rocks associated with the upper part
of the Laurentian, or the lower part of the Huronian in
____ the interior, and in the eastern part of Canada, may come
into this place.*

It is to be observed that in 1865 these facts respecting
the fundamental gneiss and the Upper Laurentian. of
Logan, were not distinctly before our minds, though in
subsequent papers I thought it best to consider the Gren-
ville group as a distinct series under the name “ Middle
Laurentian.” It is quite possible, however, that our
referring in the first instance to the Laurentian as a whole
may have led to erroneous impressions.

For the purpose of these notes, therefore, it will be best
and most accurate to confine ourselves to the Grenville
Series, which has been carefully explored and mapped by
the officers of the Geological Survey m the country lying
north of the Ottawa River, and also in some parts of the
areas between that river and the St. Lawrence. In these
regions Logan recognized a thickness of 17,250 feet of
deposits, of which no less than 4,750 feet consisted of
limestone, principally in three great bands, though with
intercalated gneissose layers. The Grenville Series may

1 Proposed by Hunt.
2 Some of these beds are regarded by Von Hise (Jour. of Geology, Vol. i) as a
lower member of the Huronian. They may be identical in part with the ‘“‘Kewatin”

group of Lawson.
35

A76 Canadian Record of Science. : ’

thus be regarded as one of the great caleareous systems, —
comparable with those of the Paleozoic period, which it —
also rivals in its association with carbonaceous and ferru-
ginous, deposits. Though minute globular forms, probably

Eozoon
Ree:
7 FA he a 7

Fie. 2.—Arrangement of beds in valley of Calumet River—(a) Upper
gneiss ; (6) Limestone partly covered with soil; (c) Included
bed of gneiss ; (d) Lower gneiss.

organic, have been found in the Middle Limestone, that of

Long Lake, Eozoén proper is confined, so far as known, to

the Upper Limestone, known specially as the Grenville

Band. This band and its accompaniments I have myself

studied in the region north of the Ottawa, at the Augment-

ation of Grenville, near the Calumet, in the quarries
opposite Lachute, at Cote St. Pierre, at Montebello, at

Buckingham, and Templeton, as well as in some of the

districts west of the Ottawa, where the same limestone is

supposed to recur. Everywhere it is a large and regular
bed, sometimes with even strike and dip, but at intervals
thrown into violent contortions along with the enclosing
beds, in the manner usually seen in disturbed strata of
later age, where it is common to find portions lttle
affected by plication alternating with strongly folded beds
having the harder ones dislocated ; others are merely bent
or folded (Figs. 4 and 5). It presents subordinate beds of
different qualities, dolomitic, serpentinous, or graphitic,
and is immediately associated with thin-bedded, fine-
grained gneisses, quartzite, and biotitic and hornblendic
schists. In some beds it has disseminated crystals of min-
erals usually found in metamorphic limestones, while in
others there are concretionary masses, nodules and grains
of serpentine and pyroxene. Eozojn in masses occurs
only in certain layers, most frequently in those which are
serpentinous, but a careful examination detects in many
layers, not showing perfect examples of Eozodn, small

’

Animal Nature of Eozoon Canadense. 477

fragments or patches having its characteristic structures,
or detached chamberlets or groups of these. The occur-
3 | rence of these frag-
ments | regard as an
important fact, and
"as showing that what
| may be termed “EKo-
zoon sand” enters
7 largely into the com-
position of the lime-
stone.

In illustration of this part of my subject, I present a
rough map of the district near the Petite Nation River, in
rear of Papineauville, referred to by Dr. Bonney in his
valuable paper in the July No. of the Geol. Magazine, and

in addition to the

FF tion given in
——— \ his paper, one

showing the
order of succes-

SN EZZA sion in the valley
—— —————S | of the Calumet,
see

a little Stream
: ~ some distance to
Fic. 4. the eastward. I

Ries.

———. =, = _- >

(
{——~

SSS
f

' Fies. 3 and 4.—Bent and dislocated Quartzite, in contorted schists
interstratified with Grenville Limestone, near Montebello. The
quartzites have been broken and displaced, while the schists have
been bent and twisted. In the immediate vicinity the same beds
may be seen slightly inclined and undisturbed.

also give examples of the manner in which the associated
gneiss, though often very regular, is along certain lines
contorted, and the manner in which, in these contorted
spots, the quartzite bands are cracked and broken, exactly
as may be observed in the shales and sandstones of the
Quebec group on the Lower St. Lawrence.

478 Canadian Record of Science.

I may add here that Dr. F. D. Adams has found that
in certain localities the rocks of the Grenville Series be-
come almost horizontal, though even in this case they
show evidence of having been subjected to much alteration
and great pressure. He has also shown, by comparison of |
a number of detailed analyses, that several of the gneisses
of the Grenville Series have the chemical composition of
Paleozoic slates, snd thus that there can be no chemical
objection to regarding them as altered sediments. This I
consider a very important observation; and I may refer
for details to his paper in the American Journal of Science,
1895, p. 58.

The summary of facts above given should, I think, be
sufficient to show that in the case of the Grenville lme-
stone we have phenomena which cannot be explained by
mere pressure acting on massive rocks, or by segregation
of calcite from igneous rocks, or by vein structures, or by
any contact structures arising at the junction of igneous
and aqueous deposits. We have, on the contrary, to deal
with a formation which indicates that in the early period
to which it belongs regular sedimentation was already in
full operation. The more precise vital and chemical
agencies which prevailed in the ocean of the Laurentian
period we must notice later.

I have merely to add here that the characters assigned
above to the Grenville Series have not only been fully
corroborated by the recent work of Adams and Ells in
Canada,’ but also by the surveys of Kemp and Smyth in
the more disturbed and elevated district of the Adirondack
Mountains in New York.?

We have thus paved the way for the consideration of
evidence of a structural and chemical character.

To be Continued.

x American Journal of Geology, 1893, No. 4., Also Reports Geol, Surv. of Canada.
2 Bulletin Geol. Soc. of America, March, 1895.

The Chemical Composition of Andradite. 479

THE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF ANDRADITE FROM
Two LOCALITIES IN ONTARIO.

By B. J. Harrineron, B.A., PH.D., McGiuL CoLuece.

(Presented to the Meeting of the Royal Society cf Canada,
May 17th, 1895).

1. LUTTERWORTH.

The specimens examined were collected by Dr. F. D.
Adams at the “Paxton Iron Mine,” in the township of
Lutterworth, Ontario! The magnetite at this locality is
associated with a number of other minerals, including
garnet, pyroxene, and hornblende. ‘The ore body is also
cut by reticulating veins holding quartz, calcite, ortho-
clase, pyroxene, scapolite, allanite, etc. The garnet is
black in colour, and looks exceedingly like ordinary black
tourmaline. It is mostly massive, but also found in crys-
tals, which are rhombic dodecahedrons with their edges
generally truncated by the tetragonal tris-octahedron
(co O,20 2). Carefully selected material was found
to have a specific gravity of 3.813 at 17°C., and gave on
analysis the following percentage compositions :——

Pmcumemiee att teecl tt Abe he tT 35.88
AM ae ks ehae so Pte he kas 5.88
Mere GRNe 6.005 4k ee Ce ee Y
WEnnOtls- OX ICC. 0-1), t ney acme lak 3.65
Waeanous OX1d6 - 45) Vevaiiset \) 4 .)ak 0.81
LL ES iO. EOE SRD ier aes tr tae Sia Sead: OF:
HCC AIRE go NE oe TO 0.35
Pope On Ten MON. Cla eo Bias drilstes .28

39799

The mineral was specially examined for titanium, but
no trace found.

1 See Report of the Geological Survey of Canada, Vol, VI., 1891-92-93, Part J, by
Dr. Adams,

480 Canadian Record of Science.

The atomic and quantivalent ratios deducible from thie
above figures are as follows :-—

Atomic. Quantivalent.

Si 595 x 4 = 2380 2380 2o801 La
Al 112) <3, = BaG
Fe" 296cx% 3B = ne) ace

Fell bls 9 =~ bO8 yd: Se A |
Mn Lox, 2 ev Yee

WCAdT. (DOO on Be

Meo 9-x2= 18

This shows that the mineral is a unisilicate, and it

agrees well with the garnet formula R, R, Si, Oy, R being
chiefly calcium and 8 chiefly ferric iron. Being, there-
fore, a lime-iron garnet, it should be referred to the
sub-species Andradite.

2. DUNGANNON.

Among the minerals in the Nepheline Syenite of Dun-
gannon, Ontario,’ is a brown garnet, sometimes showing
crystalline form, but occurring for the most part in small
irregular grains. After careful separation by means of
dense liquids, the grains were found to have a specific
gravity of 3.739 and the following percentage composi-
TON t=

ilies? Ur ree ee a eee 36.604
Pitanivny diexiden: eos A Lee EY 1.078
AShomamias ls) SA eS ae ee Se ii |
Herne soxithe 5 Moe eee RE 15.996
errONS OK WIG 2. easter cet eet ae 3.852
Manganous oxide Se SOL
TCE APRN tN Tate tac ORS ie 29.306
WASTE OBA (88 city Metta: os 4a NEY 1.384
WEY SUSE se uss, sree ee pects one ne se reresete .285

99.577

1 See papers on this rock and some of the minerals which it contains, by Dr. Adams
and the writer, in the American Journal of Science, Vol. XLVIII., July, 1894.

Record

of

Sc7ence.

No: 2. (3),
MICRO-PHOTOGRAPHS OF DYKES.

PLATE (i

Some Dykes cutting Laurentian Series. 481

The atomic and quantivalent ratios deducible from the
above analysis are as follows :—

Si 610 x 4 = 2440 )

a ax 4— 52 2492 2402... I
Al 192.x 3 = 576

Fe™ 200 x 3 = ae ae

Fe! 53 x 2= 106 abd cael
Mn ac Sy aaa a |

Ca peo toe

Meg DO eee ee FO

Evidently the mineral belongs to the sub-species Andra-
dite

SOME DYKES CUTTING THE LAURENTIAN SYSTEM IN THE
COUNTIES OF FRONTENAC, LEEDS, AND LANARK, ONT.

By W. G. MILLER AND R. W. Brock, Kineston, Ont.
[With Plate IIT. ]

During a canoe trip which the writers took last Sep-
tember in connection with a party in field geology from
the Kingston School of Mining, a large number of dykes
cutting the Laurentian series were examined. In the
district traversed, the county of Frontenac and adjoining
eastern counties, the dykes show a considerable variety in
mineralogical composition. It is proposed, in the present
paper, to give a short description of a few of the more
basic representatives of these.

The larger masses of more coarsely crystalline igneous
rocks throughout the district belong to the granite and
gabbro families. The characters of the more typical
granites in the south-western part of the district seem
worthy of notice. The quartz in these generally forms
about one-fourth of the mass of the rock, and possesses
a blue colour ; the feldspar consists of microperthite,
orthoclase, microcline, albite, and probably anorthoclase ;
while the ferro-magnesian constituents, which are usually

ony) A

482 Canadian Record of Science.

so much decomposed that their true characters are not
determinable even in specimens obtained from a consider- —

able distance beneath the surface of the ground, are to a —
large extent grouped in such a way that a face of the
rock shows numerous dark patches, often two inches or
more in diameter. In some of the most acid of these
granites, there are basic segregations which consist of lime-
soda feldspar, together with small amounts of pyroxene.

The granite dyke rocks, in many cases, are very coarse-
grained, and consist of microcline and other alkali feldspars,

quartz, and a light-coloured mica which occurs in varying
amounts.

Many of the schistose rocks of the district, with the
exception of the crystalline limestones, are in all proba-
bility of eruptive origin; but very little work has so far

been done on them.

_ The scapolite rocks are among the most. interesting
representatives of the schistose group. While it is likely

that some of these have been produced by the alteration 3 4

of gabbros, there are others in which such evidence of
their origin has not been obtained. The writers have
examined specimens, taken in some cases from a consider-
able distance beneath the surface of the ground, which
consisted of the two essential minerals, scapolite and.
pyroxene. Some grains of the latter constituent were
seen to be quite fresh, while others, especially in those
specimens from near the surface, were more or less changed
to hornblende. In the rock referred to, no plagioclase
was noticed.

Another rock of a very striking character, when exam-
ined microscopically, consists of the minerals microperthite
and pyroxene, together with small amounts of orthoclase,
lime-soda feldspar, and a finely-striated plagioclase which
is probably anorthoclase. The microperthite is present
in much greater quantity. than the other constituents.
The rock is undoubtedly of eruptive origin, and occurs in.

Some Dykes cutting Laurentian Series. 483

the district adjacent to the locality in which the mineral!
perthite was first discovered.!

Thin sections of the scapolite-pyroxene and micro-
perthite-pyroxene rocks referred to have a general resem-
blance to each other when examined. under the microscope
in ordinary transmitted light. The pyroxene has about
the same form and green colour, occurs in about the same
proportion, and is set in a colourless matrix in each. In
polarized light, however, the resemblance ends, the scapo-
lite possessing very much brighter colours than the
feldspar.

_ Masses of gabbro and norite are found at a number
of localities throughout the district traversed. These
coarse-grained rocks possess the same general characters
as those of their class which have been described from
other parts of Canada. In most of the masses a con-
siderable differentiation is shown; in one part they may
show the characters of a normal gabbro while in others
they are true norites; and again, in certain portions of
the mass free silica may be present. The gabbro-norite
mass which crosses the railroad a short distance north of
the village of Parham is interesting on account of the
comparatively large size of the inclusions which occur in
both the diallage and hypersthene. ‘This rock appears to
offer a good opportunity for the determination of the
characters of these materials which, except in size, are
similar in appearance to those commonly found in these
minerals. Prof. Judd, the late Prof. G. H. Williams,
and others, have examined such inclusions in rocks from
different parts of the world. In some rocks they have
been held to be of secondary origin, while in others it is
elaimed they are original constituents. Their chemical
composition is said to be different in different cases.

Dykes of the basic rocks occur in great numbers

1 This rock seems to resemble one referred to by Prof. K. de Kroustchoff, of St
Petersburg, Bulletin Soe. Franc. de Min., IX., 1886. Tschermak’s Min., u Pet. Mitth.
1887.

484 Canadian Record of Scrence.

throughout these counties. They do not cut the strata

of Cambrian and Silurian age, which are found at a —
number of places overlying the Laurentian, nor are any
surface flows known to occur, although, from the charac-

ters of one set of very fine-grained porphyrite dykes which © a

will be described, it seems not unlikely that such flows
have taken place over the Laurentian series, but the mate-
rial of which they were composed has been removed by the
excessive denudation to which these rocks have been
subjected since pre-Cambrian times.

The late Mr. H. G. Vennor mentions a dyke, composed
of “a fine-grained, black, glittering dolorite, weathering
greyish-white,’ discovered by him near the banks of the
Rideau canal, in the township of North Burgess, and
states that “in width it varies from four to one hundred
feet.”' Series of specimens were taken from this dyke,
and when examined in thin sections under the microscope
the rock is seen to consist of lime-soda feldspar and a
secondary ferro-magnesian mineral, together with small
amounts of brown mica, hornblende, and quartz. The
plagioclase occurs in more than one generation, so that
the rock is a porphyrite. The larger phenocrysts of this
mineral, whose length rarely exceeds 2°5 mm., occur
sparingly, and are of earler formation than any of the
other essential constituents of the rock. The most
important ferro-magnesian constituent is a uralitized
pyroxene which occurs in irregular grains, enclosed, to
some extent, in crystals of the second generation of pla-
gioclase. Individuals of this latter mineral, whose average
length is under 0°35 mm., have, like the older phenocrysts,
the “dusted” appearance commonly seen in the feldspar
of gabbros. Some of the inclusions are air cavities.
Filling up the interstices between the two generations of
crystals mentioned are grains of quartz and feldspar,
some of which is probably orthoclase. A considerable

1 Report of Progress, Geological Survey of Canada, 1872-3.

Some Dykes cutting Laurentian Series. 485,

proportion of these minerals forms an intergrowth of
micropegmatite. ‘The most important accessory minerals.
are magnetite and apatite. The latter occurs in needle-.
like forms, and, curiously enough, is most abundant in the:

_ minerals filling the interstitial spaces. The rock at the-

contact, and in the centre of the wider parts of the dyke,
is seen to vary considerably, specimens from the centre:
being somewhat coarser grained and more acid. The
latter point is illustrated by the more abundant occur--
rence of quartz and hornblende, and by the shorter and
broader form of the feldspar, which commonly shows.

_ twinning according to both the albite and pericline laws..

Phenocrysts of plagioclase of the first generation are also.
less abundant near the centre of the dyke. <A specimen
of the rock, taken some distance from the contact, was.
found to contain 52°96 per cent. of silica. Thin sections
of the rock taken from a number of dykes in the town-
ship of Bedford were found to be similar in character to:
those taken from the North Burgess dykes. These rocks,,.
from both townships, appear to belong to the gabbro:
family, the more acid representatives of which frequently
contain 53 per cent. of silica. We believe that they
should be described as quartziferous gabbro porphyrites..
The following table will show the relation they hold to-
other gabbro and diorite dyke rocks which have been.
described from other countries :—

GABBRO. DIORITE.
Gabbro aplite. Diorite aplite.
(Beerbachite).* (Malchite).?

Gabbro porphyrite. Diorite porphyrite.
Dyke Rocks (—-——-—_—) (Orbite)."

Gabbro lamprophyre. Diorite lamprophyre..
(Odinite)’ (1. Kersantite).
| (2. Camptonite)..

1 Dr. C. Chelius: Notizbl. Ver. Erdk. Darmstadt, IV., Folge,.1891 u. 1892.
2 Prof. A. Ossan: Mitth. grossh. bad. Geol., Landesanst, II.. 380..

486 Canadian Record of Science.

A number of dykes which occur near the west bank of —
the Rideau canal, in the vicinity of Seeley’s Bay, were
examined. One of the smaller of these, which cuts the fy
-graphite-holding crystalline limestone near a narrows in
the canal, has a width of four feet, and sends off branches
into the surrounding rock. It is dark in colour, very
fine-grained, and possesses a highly perfect columnar
‘structure, developed in a direction at right angles to its
walls. The rock has a specific gravity of 2°92, and on
analysis was found to have the following chemical com-
position :— | :

S10, 46.51, TiO, 2.90, Al,O, 12.33, Fe,O 11.14, Fe.O3 3.87,
CaO 9.37, MgO 6.48, Na,O 3.67, K,O 1.18, H,O + CO, 2.47,
8-16. Traces of copper and barium were observed. Man-
-ganese and nickel are both present.

The rock fuses readily. About twelve ounces of it
were finely pulverized, placed in a covered graphite cruci-
ble, and fused for some hours in a coal furnace. It was
then allowed to cool. On breaking the crucible the fused
mass was found to have separated into two parts—a highly
perfect, clear, shghtly amythistine glass, and a “ button”
containing most of the metallic matter. The latter rested
on the bottom of the crucible, and was easily detached
from the glass. It had a diameter of about 2°5 cm. and
a thickness of about 1 cm., and weighed about one and
one-quarter ounces.

In hand specimens many minute crystals are seen scat- -
tered through the rock. Examined microscopically, in
thin sections, the groundmass is found to be very fine-
‘grained, and, in the denser portions, microlitic. Abundant

phenocrysts of plagioclase and pyroxene are present.
These minerals are also constituents of the groundmass,

which contains, in addition, much magnetite. The
larger individuals of plagioclase of the groundmass, Fig.
2 (6), are in needle or lath-like forms, having an average
length of about 0°05 mm., but there are innumerable

Te

Some Dykes cutting Lawrentian Series. 487

smaller and less regular ones. The magnetite occurs.
in octahedrons, irregular grains, and in skeleton crystals.
or dendritic forms. A number of octahedrons are often
seen joined together into strings, having branches at
right angles. The porphyritic plagioclase, Fig. 2 (q),.
usually has the lath-shape and an average length of less
than 1 mm. Phenocrysts of this mineral are more abun-.
dant than those of pyroxene, with which they are often
intergrown—the pyroxene being the older, and having
served as a point of attachment for the feldspar when
it began to crystallize. The porphyritic crystals of
monoclinic pyroxene are light-brown to colourless, and.
frequently have a somewhat elongated form, with rough
edges. Some of the largest are 1‘8 mm. in length. An
irregular parting perpendicular to the longest axis of the:
crystal is present. Rhombic pyroxene occurs sparingly
in some of the sections. Its phenocrysts are smaller than
those of the monoclinic, and generally have a somewhat
regular octagonal outline. Patches or irregular grains of
chloritic material are present in all of the thin sections.
examined.

Thin sections were examined from some larger dykes.
in the same vicinity. These were found to possess the
general characters of the rocks just described. Pyroxene.,.
however, was not observed among the phenocrysts, and
olivine appeared to be absent. <A flow structure is often
seen in the sections from the narrow dyke. This struc--
ture is illustrated by the arrangement of the feldspar
phenocrysts and the constituents of the groundmass
around the earlier-formed individuals. This dyke rock,,.
which may be classed as a porphyrite, appears to resemble-

the members of the effusive group more closely than it.
does those of the plutonic. Effusive masses, however, are-

not known to overlie the Laurentian in any part of the
district.

A88 Canadian Record of Science. —

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES.—PLATE III.

No. 1.—Gabbro porphyrite from North Burgess. The
thin section was photographed in ordinary transmitted
‘ight, a number two objective being used in the micro-
scope. Two large phenocrysts of plagioclase are shown.
‘The feldspar of the second generation is also shown in
white. The minerals filling the interstitial spaces do not
come out distinctly.

No 2 (a).—Dyke rock (porphyrite) near Seeley’s bay,
Rideau canal. Photographed under the same conditions
as No. 1. A number of phenocrysts of plagioclase and
one or two of pyroxene are shown. The feldspar in the
-groundmass is also brought out.

No. 2 (6).—This is a portion of No. 2 (a) more highly
magnified, a number seven objective being used. The
white central portion represents an end of a plagioclase
--phenocryst. The feldspar of the groundmass is also
shown.

The writers are indebted to their friend Mr. William
Lawson, B.A.Sc., for the photo-micrographs from which
these figures are taken.

GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

SCHOOL OF MINING.

ON THE FERNS IN THE VICINITY OF MONTREAL.
By Haroxp B. CusHine, B.A.

Montreal has been spoken of by more than one writer
as a very favorable locality for collecting piants. How-
ever this may be with regard to plants in general, the
remark is certainly true of the ferns, principally on
account of the situation of the city at the foot of Mount
Royal. In the comparatively small area comprised by the
mountain, we have rich damp woods, rocky hillsides,

—

_ 2 eee
ee?
POE xs

4 Ra
eh ¥
ms
)

On the Ferns in the Vicinity of Montreal. 489

swamps and shaded cliffs, in fact, all the most favorable
conditions for the growth of the various species of ferns.
Thus, out of at most forty-five varieties which include
Montreal within the limits of their distribution, no less
than thirty-two have been found within an area of about
one square mile. My purpose in writing this paper is
to collect the past records of Montreal ferns, describe as
far as possible the present distribution of the various _
species in this vicinity, and contrast it with what can be
learned from the records of their distribution in the past.

Ferns have always received their due share of attention
by botanists. While the rest of the Cryptogams and
many of the orders of Phanerogams are persistently
neglected, except by specialists, the ferns form part of
every herbarium and are included in all manuals of
flowering plants. As a result of this, we find, on referring
to past records of Montreal plants, that we have a fairly
complete record of ferns from 1821, when the Holmes
Herbarium was made, to the present time. The more
important of these records are as follows ;—

Catalogue of the Holmes’ Herbarium ; Canadian Naturalist,
April, 1859.

List of Canadian Plants, by Dr. Maclagan; Annals of the
Kingston Botanical Society.

Synopsis of Canadian Ferns, by Dr. Geo. Lawson ; Canadian
Naturalist, August, 1864.

Notes on Canadian Ferns, by John B. Goode; Canadian
Naturalist, Vol. [X., p. 49. ;

Canadian Filicinee, by Macoun and Burgess ; Transactions of

‘the Royal Society of Canada, Vol. II.

Catalogue of Canadian Plants, Part V., by John Macoun,

Flora of Montreal Island, by Dr. Robt. Campbell ; Canadian
Record of Science, Vol. V., No. 4.

A few species have also been recorded from Montreal by
McCord, St. Cyr, Provancher, Parsons, and others.

I have made a careful comparison between these

490 Canadian Record of Science.

various records, and have for three years past carefully
examined the present distribution of Montreal ferns, to
observe how far their distribution corresponded to the
past records. I hoped by these means to be able to trace
the influence of civilization in exterminating species
through the clearing of land and draining of wet places.
The change in the flora should be especially evident in the
case of the ferns on account of their peculiar habitat, and,
* moreover, of no other group of plants have we such a com-
plete local record. The chief result of my investigation, ©
however, is a realization of the difficulty of exterminating
Species even ina limited locality. Thus, out of the thirty-
two varieties recorded, I have been able to discover
twenty-nine still occurring, though several of these were
spoken of thirty years ago as on the point of disappearing.
Doubtless this persistent survival of species, which have
become rare, is partly due to the mountain having been
preserved as a park, though great changes have been
made in it. The following instances will serve to illus-
trate what I have stated :—

Pellea gracilis is only recorded from Montreal by Dr.
Holmes in 1822. In view of the very complete character
of several of the above records, the absence of any
mention of it since that time is sufficient proof of its
rarity. However, it still occurs sparingly on the mountain
side. |

Asplenium angustifoliwm is recorded by McCord and
Goode as occurring on the smaller mountain with ©
Aspidiwm Goldianuwm, and a colony of this fern is still
found there, though A. Goldianwm has probably become
extinct.

Aspidium acrostichoides is recorded by Goode in 1879 as
occurring back of Sir Hugh Allan’s and behind the
cemeteries, but becoming scarce. It is still found, how-
ever, in sufficient abundance in both localities.

On the Ferns in the Vicinity of Montreal. 491

— Dicksonia pilosiuscula is only recorded by Maclagan, and
is found behind the cemeteries.

There are only three species which I have been so far
unable to discover, but which may possibly still occur.
These are Aspidium Goldianum, Camptosorus rhizophyllus
and Botrychiwm ternatum.

Aspidium Goldianum, Hooker, is of especial interest, as
Montreal is the locality where it was first discovered, in —
1818, by Mr. Goldie, after whom it was named by Sir
William Hooker. Since then it has been recorded by
Maclagan, McCord and Goode, though Mr. Goode writes,
in 1879, that he has not found it for some years. I have
been unable to discover it in the locality described by
these writers.

Camptosorus rhizophyllus, Link, is represented in the
Holmes Herbarium by a specimen from St. Helen’s
Island. It is recorded from lAbord-a-Plouffe and St-
Helen’s Island by McCord,and from Montreal Mountain
by Provancher. It probably does not now occur on the
mountain or on St. Helen’s Island. °

Botrychium ternatwm, Swz., var. lunarioides, has also
been recorded by MeCord and Goode, and a specimen,
marked “ Montreal, 1861,” is in the McGill Herbarium,
but I have not succeeded in finding the fern in this vicinity.

In the following list I have chiefly given the distribution
of the various species on the mountain, as tbat is the
locality to which I have devoted most attention. The
mountain consists of three separate hills, divided by Cote
des Neiges road and the cemeteries. For convenience of
description I have referred to these as Mount Royal and
the North and West Mountains.

Polypodium vulgare, Linn.—Polypody—Rather common,
especially abundant on the north-east slope of Mount
Royal, growing on loose rocks.

Adiantum pedatum, Linn.—Maidenhair.—Common in

many places, in rich woods and on wooded hillsides.
36

492 Canadian Record of Science.

Pteris aquilina, Linn.—Common Brake.—Common-
everywhere in thickets and open places, especially in sandy
soil. f

Pellea gracilis, Hook.—Cliff Brake.—Crevices in the
cliffs of volcanic rock on the north-east face of Mount |
Royal, rare. | 3

Asplenium Trichomanes, Linn.—‘ A few plants were |
found on the north slope of mountain, growing in the —
crevices of a huge detached rock in a very secluded and —
precipitous spot,” Goode, 1879. About a dozen rather —
weak and stunted plants still grow in this situation.

Asplenium angustifolium, Michx.—A small colony of
these ferns grows in the rich damp woods near the gate of
Mount Royal Cemetery. “Nun’s Island,” Parsons.

Asplenvum thelypteroides, Michx.—Rich woods and hill-

sides, round the base of Mount Royal, and on the north
mountain.

Asplenium Filiz-femina, Bernh.—Spleenwort.—Very
common and variable, growing in low grounds and in
woods.

Camptosorus rhizophyllus, Link. — Walking-Leaf.—
“ Montreal Mountain,’ Provancher. “ Dry rocks at
V Abord-a-Plouffe, Isle Jesus, not common,” McCord. “St.
Helen’s Island,” Sheppard. I have been unable to find it
either on St. Helen’s Island or on Mount Royal.

Phegopteris polypodioides, Fée—Beech Fern.—Damp
woods, at the north-east base of Mount Royal, and
between the cemeteries.

Phegopteris Dryopteris, Fee.—Oak Fern.—-Rocky woods
sand hillsides, north-east base of Mount Royal, and on the
north and west mountains.

Asyidium Thelypteris, Swartz.—Wet places, base of
Mount Royal, between the cemeteries, and on the west
mountain.

Aspidium Noveboracense, Swartz.—Wet places, rather
common, especially in the mountain swamps.

On the Ferns in the Vieinity of Montreal. 493

Aspidium spinulosum, Swartz.—Wood Fern.—In moun-
tain swamps, between the cemeteries, and on the west
mountain, not common.

Aspidium spinulosum, Swz., var. intermedium, D.C.E.—
Woods and shaded hillsides, in drier places than the last,
found in several localities on all three mountains, but
nowhere common.

Aspidium eristatum, Swartz.—Shield Fern.—Swamp
between the cemeteries and in mountain swamps, not
common.

Aspidium cristatum, Swz., var. Clintonianwm, D.C.E.—
In the same localities as the last, distinguished chiefly by
its size and the position of the sori.

Aspidium Goldianum, Hook.—Recorded from Montreal
Mountain, by Goldie, Maclagan, McCord and Goode, and
from Nun’s Island, by Parsons. I have Deen unable to
tind it on the mountain.

Aspidium marginale, Swartz—Shield Fern.—Rocky
hillsides, common in many places.

Aspidium acrostichoides, Swartz.—Christmas Fern.—
Not common, on the rocky hillside above Ravenscrag, and
on the north mountain. ‘The form known as var. zneiswin
is recorded by McCord in 1861. |

Cystopteris bulbifera, Bernh.—Bladder Fern.—Common
on the east slope of Mount Royal, and on the north and
west mountains.

Cystopteris fragilis, Bernh.—In crevices of shaded cliffs,
rather common in various places on all three mountains.

Onoclea sensibilis, Linn.—Sensitive Fern.—Common in
swampy places. The occasional form known as var.
obtusilobata occurs in the mountain swamps.

Onoclea Struthiopteris, Hoffm.—Ostrich Fern.—Common
in the swamp near the Riding Ring, Mount Royal ; occurs
also in the mountain swamps.

Woodsia Ilvensis, R. Br.—Woodsia.—Common all along
the exposed cliffs on the face of Mount Royal.

494 Canadian Record of Science.

Dicksonia spilosiuscula, Willd. —Dicksonia.—A few
plants were found growing in open places on the north —
mountain. 7 |

Osmunda regalis, Linn.—Flowering Fern.—Abundant in
mountain swamps and west of the Riding Ring. |

Osmunda Claytoniana, Linn.—Osmunda.—Rather com-
mon in swampy places. :

Osmunda cinnamomea, Linn.—Cinnamon Fern.—Com-
mon in swampy places. The occasional state, called var.
Jrondosa, occurs in the mountain swamps.

Botrychium simplex, Hitcheock.—On a grassy hillside
at the north-east base of Mount Royal, rare.

Botrychium ternatum, Swartz, var. lunarioides.—*< Dry
open spot, on top of mountain, back of the Redpath
property,’ Goode, 1879, also recorded by McCord. I have
been unable to find this station. .

Botrychium Virginianuwm, Swartz.—Moonwort.—Rich
woods, rather common in various places.

GOLD AND SILVER ORES OF THE SLOCAN, B.C.
By J. C. Gwiiiim, B.A.Sc.

One of the most striking physical features of the
interior of British Columbia is caused by the great system
of lakes and rivers which almost surrounds the Selkirks
within their Canadian limits.

These waterways form long north and south depressions
and are connected by low transverse passes, which drain
to the east and west.

This region is, therefore, fairly accessible to the explorer
or prospector. The geology has not as yet been fully
worked out, but enough has been learned to show it to
be a region of intrusive and of uplifted rocks of undeter-
mined age.

}
:
,
.

Gold and Silver Ores of the Slocan, B.C. 495

Bees 3} The western portion of this watershed is largely of a
granitic ~nature, but there are several large areas of

metamorphic rocks, such as quartzites, schists and cal-
eareous slates. The eastern portion is mainly composed
of slates and schists. ;

Up to the present time the most richly mineralized belt
appears to lie along the summits of this watershed. Yet
the whole region is well stocked with economic minerals
and offers to the mineralogist a rich and varied field for
study.

The existence of the chief galena silver districts appear

to be determined to a great extent by the large areas of

impure limestones and calcareous slates. Such districts

are the Slocan and Lardeau. Of this mineral, so abundant
and valuable, there are three principal varieties, and

these have come to be recognized as bearing certain
relations to one another in their silver bearing capacity.
Cubical, well crystallized galena, is by far the most
common; it forms the backbone of the silver mining
industry and assays, in the Slocan district, from 50 oz. to
200 oz. in silver. Here it occurs in fairly massive impure
limestones and slates. Galena differing in no way in
appearance, coming from Lower Kootenay Lake or the
Lardeau country, carries far less silver. The same is true
of the great galena bodies of East Kootenay.

This variety forms the largest ore bodies ; it seems to be
the mother mineral of the chief fissure veins. Calcite
crystals and chalcopyrite are sometimes intimately mixed
with it, as in the great “ Slocan Star” mine.

Steel galena is of a granular texture, with some
resemblance to broken iron. It occurs in patches through
the cubical variety, but is seldom found in large bodies.
Assays made upon this usually show it to carry a higher
percentage of silver than the preceding.

Wavy galena is of much the same texture as steel
galena, but is more lustrous and is foliated, giving it a

=
ch
a

496 | Canadian Record of Science.

somewhat laminated appearance. The value of this —
variety often exceeds that of the others mentioned. The ~
relative values of these varieties, together with the fact 4
that locality bears such a strong relation to their silver
value, may go to show that the silver itself exists outside
of a chemical combination with this mineral. Silver is
found throughout the whole range, pervading all forma-
tions and associated with so many different minerals that
the question of the form in which it is present becomes
interesting. |

Tetrahedrite, or “gray copper,” is widely represented,
and much sought after. It is usually of a dark grey color
with a faint iridescence and a texture like steel galena.
Specimens of this carry from 200 oz. to 800 oz. of silver.
It occurs associated with galena, zine blende and calcite,
giving, upon decomposition, very beautiful ores of azurite
and malachite. Silver has entered into many curious
relations where the absence of galena has caused its
association with some other mineral, One ease occurs
near Slocan Lake, where little bunches of native arsenic
have been found containing 1,000 oz. to the ton.

In one of the principal producing mines, the “ Alamo,”
upon Silver Mountain, it is found with antimony, giving
avery rich ore. This is known as “antimonial silver.”
The mineral is very dark grey, sometimes faintly streaked,
and occurs as small patches included in a matrix of cubical
galena.

Silver is found in combination, as Sylvanite in one
mine near Slocan Lake, as “ Ruby silver” in several places
and as native silver filaments and silver sulphides all
about the limits of the Slocan area of limestones, in
granite.

These latter constitute the dry ores of the district, and
are rarely found in the main galena limestone belt.

Argentite is usually associated with iron pyrites in a
coarsely crystallized gangue of quartz. Often this

Gold and Silver Ores of the Slocan, B.C. 497

mineral is well crystallized, but in most cases it occurs
chiefly as a fine black dust or stain. The veins, having a
comb-like structure, easily open to decomposing agencies,

Usually a paying quantity of gold is associated with the
argentite ores. Some of the veins are banded. A notable

example occurs at the “ Exchange” mine, near Slocan

City. Here there is first a band of opaque milky quartz
some inches in thickness. Next to this comes an inch
band of iron pyrites (always well crystallized) mixed with
silver sulphide dust. An inch from this, in a clearer
quartz, there occurs a distinct broken lamina of native
silver. This arrangement is repeated four times. The
pyritous band assays 270 oz. in silver. There are no
pyrites with the native silver band. It would be inter-
esting to find what relations exist between the pyrites and
silver sulphide and if the silver exists as a sulphide below
the line of decomposition.

As regards gold, there is little evidence of its occurrence
in a free state. It does occur so in a few places along the
east side of Slocan Lake, in @ quartz gangue, but even
here the ore body carries so much pyrites that it would
cause it to become unfit for free-milling. Usually the
gold is intimately associated with pyritous matter, such
as arsenical iron, chaleopyrrte and pyrrhotite, as in the
Trail Creek country. One of the deposits carrying gold
in a free state also carries it in combination as sylvanite,
but this is rare.

Very little gold is found in the galena mines. What is
produced seems to be derived from the pyritous matter
contained therein.

The Trail Creek gold ores are a mixture of chalcopyrite
and pyrrhotite, greatly resembling the Sudbury nickel
ores. They carry from half an ounce to five ounces of
gold. Assayers of this ore have come to the conclusion
that there is a direct proportion between the amount of
chalcopyrite present and the gold contained. Some such

498 - Canadian Record of Science.

relation as exists between the copper and nickel in certain —
nickel ores. , | 4

As this region becomes more developed, there will,
doubtless, be found many rare and interesting mineral |
combinations. It is but four years since it was a wilder- _
ness, in which some stray prospectors found the first a
galena lode. —

Book NOTICES.

Erxn PRA-KAmMpBRISCHES FosstL, PALENTOLOGISCHE NOTIZEN, VON
Cart Wiman.—Bull. Geol. Inst., Upsala, No. 3, Vol. II., 1894.

The above author, in this paper, offers a contribution toward the
explanation of an enigmatical fossil found in the pre-Cambrian rocks
of the Island of Visings6, in Lake Wetter, in Sweden. ;

The terrain which these rocks form is said to underlie unconformably
the Cambrian-Silurian! terrain, and is therefore clearly older than the
Olenellus Zone. It consists of a conglomerate, with yellow sandstone
at the base ; then 40-50 metres in thickness of red and green slate and
sandstone ; then 250 metres of slates—greyish-green below and white
above, where there are layers and seams of argillaceous limestone.

In the white slates appear small, round, black disks of 1 to 2 milli-
metres diameter. These fossils have caused considerable speculation
among Swedish geologists. (In 1879) A. G. Nathorst mentioned them,
and thought they were of organic origin. (In 1880) G. Linnarsson also
spoke of them as objects of organic origin, but of very uncertain nature.
(In 1885) G. Holm described them as being similar to a small flattened
Brachiopod, such as a Discina. (In 1886) Nathorst referred to the fossil
again, and says it reminded him of a small Estheria, although the agree-
ment was far from being decided.

Herr C. Wiman submitted these objects to various tests with Shultze’s
masceration fluid and other preparations, and from their resistance to
reagents concluded that the shell was chiefly Chitine, as in the grapto-
lites. He found that the object was originally globular, but had been
flattened in the shale, and that it was perforated with minute holes, for
the passage of pseudopoda, and had some larger openings. However,
he thinks that the affinities of these fossils (which are obscured by clay
clinging to the surface) are still so uncertain as to make it inadvisable -
to give them a name.

1 This is not the Cambro-Silurian of English authors.

Book Notices. | 499

Though their affiliations are obscure, the concensus of such high
Swedish authorities as those above cited, that the objects are organic,
is valuable, as making known a type of pre-Cambrian animal not
hitherto recognized.

Phe formation, or terrain, in which these fossils are found is described

‘as pre-Cambrian, but nevertheless Paleozoic ; hence it would appear

to hold the same relation to the Cambrian of Sweden that the Etchu-
ninian series does to that of Canada.

A plate, with figures and section of the fossil accompanies the
article. 3 Gi Bo

MINERALS, AND How To Stupy THEM: A Book For BEGINNERS IN
MrINeraLocy. — By Edward Salisbury Dana, Yale University, New
Haven. John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1895, pp. 380.

This little book is a most welcome addition to the rather scanty
literature of elementary mineralogy, and will, we hope, be widely read
not only by ‘‘ the young people of both sexes,” but by many of larger
growth. Books on ‘‘ popular science ” multiply apace, but while many
of them are popular, féw are scientific. In Dr. Dana’s new volume,
however, we have an example of a work which is thoroughly scientific,
and which, we think, is sure to prove popular. The author himself
tells us in the preface that ‘‘ the attempt has been made to present the
whole subject in a clear, simple, and so far as possible a readable form,
without too much detail, and at the same time without cheapening the
science.” The attempt has been successful.

As an example of the style in which the book is written, we give
the following extract from the introductory chapter :—

** And here it is important to realize how little we can know by
actual contact and direct observation about this earth, though we live
upon it. It is possible, indeed, to measure its size and shape, to find
out its density as a whole, to study its surface features and the changes
which they have undergone; but of the materials of which it is made

’ we can know little beyond those which form the surface upon which

we walk. The miner digs down a little distance, and the artesian-well
borer goes down still deeper, and we may have a chance to examine
the specimens that their work brings up; or perhaps we can go down
with the miner and see them in place. But the deepest mines descend
to less than three-quarters of a mile; and though this seems deep to
one who is let down a shaft in a bucket, it is but a little way compared
with the whole distance to the earth’s centre, which would require a
journey of nearly four thousand miles. Even the deepest artesian-well

borings hardly go down to the depth of one mile.

*« Thus the mineralogist is limited to the study of the little part of
the crust of the earth which he can reach with his hammer ; and he

500 Canadian Record of Scrence.

cannot extend his collection much beyond this, unless indeed he takes _
in some of those rare visitors from outer space—called meteorites—
which once in a while tumble down to the earth, usually with a bright
light and loud explosion.”

Chapter VIII., on the Determination of Minerals, gives some useful —
advice, a little of which may be reproduced here :—

‘* Confidence and hasty judgment,” Dr. Dana tells us, ‘‘ belong to
those who have little experience and a scanty knowledge of the diffi-
culties of the subject.

‘*But, on the other hand, to recognize most of the minerals which
are likely to be collected on a mineralogical excursion, or to be obtained
by exchange with other collectors, is generally easy even for the

beginner, if he goes at the subject in the right way.
* * * * * * * *

‘The best way, then, for one with a specimen of an unknown
mineral in hand, is to think of the common species first, and afterwards
of others which may suggest themselves, running over in mind, or by
reference to the book, the characters observed and those of the species
to which it is provisionally referred, but with care not to decide too
hastily, but to give each character full weight. Do not give the name
albite to a specimen of barite, either the tabular glassy crystals or the
white massive granular kind, because both species are often white
and also resemble each other in form, and overlook the fact that it is
much too heavy as well as too soft. Do not give the name beryl toa
crystal of apatite because it is a green hexagonal prism, and overlook
the fact that it is quite too hard. Finally, do not hesitate to confess
ignorance—that the experienced mineralogist is ever ready to do ; and
it is this fact that enables him from time to time to identify some rare
and interesting species, and perhaps occasionally one new to science.”

The chapters on the physical and chemical characters of minerals
are clear and to the point, and the descriptions of species, while neces-
sarily restricted, bring out well the essential characters of the minerals.

The book has an attractive cover, is well printed, and admirably
illustrated. B. J. HARRINGTON.

LIFE AND Rock: A COLLECTION OF ZOOLOGICAL AND GEOLOGICAL
Essays.—By R. Lydekker, B.A. Cantab., F.Z.S. (Knowledge Series).
London, 1894.

“* Life and Rock,” comprises a series of essays relating to zoological
and geological subjects, more especially to the former. Some of the
chapters deal with the natural history of certain animals; others treat
of the interesting problems of evolution and development in a popular
style, aimed to reach those lovers of nature who are repelled by the
technical phraseology of scientific treatises.

Book Notices. 5OT

The first few pages are devoted to the elephant, cousin of the extinct
mastodon, and differing from it chiefly in the structure of the teeth,
“The first and most obvious peculiarity in regard to its dentition is:
to be found in the tusks, which correspond to one of the pairs of
upper teeth in man, and also to the single pair of such teeth in the-
Rodents (rats, hares, etc.) Moreover, these teeth, like the incisors
of the Rodents, grow continuously through the life of the animal, owing
to the circumstance that the pulp cavity at their base always remains:
open and has a permanent connection with the soft structures of the-
gum. In our own teeth, on the contrary, the pulp cavity closes at a
certain period, after which there is a total cessation of growth.”

A rude shock to our common ideas of elephantine nature is afforded
by the extinct elephants of Malta, which show us that gigantic size is-
not a necessary concomitant of the group, and that when the area in
which a species dwelt was small the size of the species itself was pro-.
portionately reduced. ‘These little Maltese elephants were very closely
allied to the living African species, but whereas ‘‘ Jumbo” attained
eleven feet in height, and wild specimens of the African elephant may
be still larger, the smallest of the Maltese species was scarcely taller
than a donkey. So small, indeed, are the bones and teeth of this-
species, exhibited in the National History Museum, that it is sometimes.
difficult to convince people that they really belong to elephants at all.

As regards their distribution, elephants and mastodons formerly
roamed over the whole world, with the exception of Australia ; true-
elephants ranging over the whole Northern Hemisphere, while masto-
dons extended as far south in the New World as the confines of
Patagonia. It is in the north-east of India, Burma, and the Islands-
of the Malayan region that the fossil elephants connecting the living
species with the mastodons are alone found; and it is thus probable-
that from these regions the true elephants migrated westward into
Kurope and Africa, while the mammoth, in later times, crossed from
Asia into Alaska by way of Behring Strait. That the mammoth,
which ranged from the Arctic regions to the Alps and Pyrenees, was a
contemporary of the primeval hunters of Europe, is now a well-
established fact; but it appears that throughout the Old World
mastodons had utterly died out before the advent of man. In the
New World, however, the continuity between the old and the new
fauna was more fully sustained, the Missouri mastodon having survived
well into the human period, so that we have in this survival a good
instance of the vast changes that have taken place in the fauna of the
globe within what we may metaphorically call the memory of man.

In organized nature, two factors are in constant opposition ; one being
adherence to a particular type of structure—the other, adaptation to
a particular mode of life. The resultant of these two forces is usually
found to be, that animals living similar modes of existence become

502 Canadian Record of Science.

similar in external appearance, and may be distinguished only by their
internal anatomy. A striking example of this is the mole, which has —
‘taken to a burrowing existence. Moles, be they insectivorous, rodent,
or marsupial, have assumed a character adapted to their subterraneous —
-existence. A coat of spines lends resemblance to other members of
the same class of animals. Thus the author shows that though certain
animals may resemble one another very closely in external appearance, 7
-as the burrowing animals, or may possess certain peculiar structural —
features, as tusks, they may not be internally related, and the simi- —
larities of form and structure must therefore have becn independently ‘
acquired, and not inherited from a common ancestor. These so-called
-accidental resemblances indicate what may be termed parallel develop-
ment, or, to be brief, ‘‘ parallelism.” This parallelism is exemplified
‘in respect to teeth and dentition, and to the elongation of the limbs.
The resemblances between Unintatheres and Protoceras are clearly due
“to parallel development. |

Cestaceans next claim attention. Existing Cestaceans are divisible
into the two groups—Whalebone Whales and Toothed Whales ; differ-
‘ing, as the name implies, in the presence or absence of true teeth.
Whether these two groups have been derived from a common ancestral
-stock, or have had a totally independent origin, is as yet undecided.
The discovery in Patagonia of certain toothed whales that have nasal
bones nearly as well developed as is the case in whalebone whales,
removes one of the difficulties in regarding the latter as descended
from the former. Be that as it may, they are extremely ancient, and
have undergone parallel development. That the whalebone whale has
been developed from an ancestor provided with a full series of functional
‘teeth is proved by the fact that their young, in an early stage of
development, are provided with teeth germs, which are absorbed by
the gum prior to birth. As might be expected, closely associated with
‘the function of rumination is the complexity of the molar teeth, known
as selenodont structure. True ruwinants, or chewers of the cud, pos-
“sess hoofs, a cannon bone in both limbs, and no upper front teeth.

The tallest of all quadrupeds owes its towering stature to the
lengthening of two of the bones of the leg and of the vertebre of
‘the neck. In delegating to the giraffe the position it should take
-among mammals, especial notice must be taken of its three bony horns,
»covered with skin, and which are quite unlike those of any other rumi-
nant. Were it not for certain bodily peculiarities, the ‘‘ship of the
-desert”’ might find in the giraffe a formidable rival as a beast of
burden, since the latter is better adapted to life in desert places, and
‘can live much longer without water. Though in the Pliocene period
the giraffe roamed over Southern Europe and Asia, at the present day
‘it is confined to Kastern and Central Africa ; and unless care be taken
this unique animal will soon suffer extermination—shot by the relent-
less hunter solely for the paltry sums brought by the skins.

Book Notices. ° 503:

‘*There is one point to be mentioned in connection with the adapta--
tion of the giraffe to its surroundings, before passing on, and this.
relates to its coloration. When seen within the enclosures of a mena-
gerie—where, by the way, its pallid hue gives but a faint idea of the-
deep chestnut tinge of the dark blotches on the coat of the wild male—
the dappled hide of a giraffe appears conspicuous iu the extreme. We-
are told, however, that among the tall kameel-dhorn trees, or giraffe-
mimosas, on which they almost exclusively feed, giraffes are the most.
inconspicuous of all animals; their mottled coats harmonizing so exactly-
with the weather-beaten stems and with the splashes of light and
shade thrown on the ground by the sun shining through the leaves,
that at a comparatively short distance even the Bushman or Kaffr is.
frequently at a total loss to distinguish trees from giraffes or giraffes.
from trees.”

Previous to the discovery by Cuvier, in 1818, that the minute jaws-
found in the Stonesfield slate of the lower Jurassic were those of a
mammal, mammals were supposed to have been unknown before the
Tertiary period. It has been concluded that these jaws are those of a.
marsupial—the lowest of all living mammals. Some of the Jurassic:
mammals of Dorsetshire and North America may be more nearly allied
to insectivores. There seems to be a likelihood that some of the-
Jurassic mammals were actually the link connecting marsupials with:
insectivores.

The distinction between crocodiles and alligators is not a well known:
one. In the lower jaw of crocodiles there are invariably flfteen teeth ;.
the teeth of the two jaws interlock when the mouth is closed ; when
the jaws are in opposition, the first tooth on each side of the lower jaw
is received into a pit in the palate of the skull, while the fourth lower
tooth bites into a notch in the side of the skull, and is distinctly visible-
externally in the living animal. The alligator, on the other hand, has
never less than seventeen lower teeth; the upper teeth bite on the
outside of the lower without interlocking. ‘The first and fourth lower-
teeth are received into pits in the skull, and are invisible when the-
mouth is closed. Modern crocodiles show advance in organization over
those of the Jurassic period, in the backward placing of the internal.
nostrils, and in the ball-and-socket vertebre. Change in mode of life
has wrought a transference of body armour from the under surface to-
the back of the creature.

The fins and tails of fishes are of two types—the fringe-like and the
fan-like. The former is the older type, and has gradually become:
modified into the latter as best adapted for speed in locomotion. A
representative of the fringe-like type is the Australian lung-fish, allied
to Ceratodus, the name applied to certain teeth found in the Trias of
Europe. The lung-fish is the oldest type of vertebrate now living.

The term ‘‘ living fossil” is applied to types which, though more or-

504 Canadian Record of Science.

‘less abundant at the present day, are of extreme antiquity, or to such 4
as were abundant in past epochs, but are now represented by few forms. _
The most remarkable instance of this persistence of type is the
brachiopod—Lingula, which ranges from the Cambrian—the base of
the Palaeozoic, to the present day. Other examples are the crinoids —
-or stone lilies, the lung-fish above cited, and the water chervotain of _
Africa. Our world is fast being impoverished of many forms of
-animal life. Though this is due largely to the demon of destructive-
ness, inherent in human nature, other causes are at work. The
‘introduction of other animals by human agency has led in some cases
to final extinction. Occasionally it is a catastrophe of nature. As an
‘instance, may be cited the submergence of the breeding place of the
Great Auk. The African elephant, the walrus of the polar regions and
the New Zealand tuatera are in urgent need of protection if they are
to be preserved. Animals often endeavor to protect themselves from
their foes by simulating some object—animate or inanimate—that the
‘foe may be deceived thereby. This is especially true of the order of
Insecta.

“* As old as the plains” would, in many instances, be a more truthful

simile than the current saying, ‘‘as old as the hills,” The higher a

‘mountain range, the shorter we know is the time it has been subjected

to the denuding agencies of nature, and, therefore, the younger it is.

Nummulites are exceedingly interesting to those who study the

genesis and growth of mountain ranges, for the reason that they occur
in large numbers only in the Eocene period. Therefore when we find
limestones, rich in nummulites, as is the case in the Alps, Pyrennees,

‘Carpathians, Caucasus and Himalayas, we must conclude that elevation
in these cases must have taken place at a time subsequent to the
Kocene period.

Three great lessons, Mr. Lydekker informs us, may also be learned
from the chalk. First, that there is a certain Chalk or Cretaceous
‘style or Facico. Though the rock of this age be chalk, limestone,
-sandstone or slate, the Facico, or style of its fossils, will be the same,
with certain limitations the whole world over. Secondly, from the
‘researches carried on during the voyage of the ‘‘ Challenger,” the old
view that chalk was an abyssal deposit was entirely dissipated. All
“the stratified rocks, therefore, with which we are acquainted have been
laid down in comparatively shallow water. This leads to the general
~acceptance of the grand doctrine of the permanence of continents and
water basins. The study of the European chalk, in the third place,
has proved the former existence of two great seas, in which Cretaceous
rocks were laid down, the northern one being a ‘‘ mare clausum,” cut
-off from the Atlantic, and in which was deposited the white chalk,
while the southern one, in which the great limestones of Southern
»Kurope were laid down, connected the Atlantic and Indian oceans. It

Book Notices. 505

is almost certain that at this period there was land connection between

India and Southern Africa by way of Madagascar. This will account
for the remarkable similarity in many of the animals inhabiting these
countries.

The purity and thickness of the chalk deposit are hard to explain.
It has been suggested by an eminent geologist that in addition to
its partially organic origin it may have been formed as a chemical
precipitate of carbonate of lime. ‘The origin of flints in the chalk has
been a subject of great interest. It is believed that they were originally
an integral portion of the rock itself, which was then a slightly
silicated limestone, and that the silica has separated out by segregation,
a sponge spicule or an echinoid shell being the nucleus around which
the segregating process has taken place.

The conciseness and clearness with which this book is written is
worthy of notice- A large amount of information is presented\in a
small bulk (220 pp,). The illustrations are excellent, while here and
there the humor of the writer enlivens the discussion of dry facts.

RosaLind WATSON.

>

- +. 7S

TN DEX.

PAGE
ADAMS, (FRANK D.), M.A.Sc., Ph.D. :—
On the ‘‘ Norian” or Upper Laurentian Formation of Canada
aA Se Pea BS chai bos kit } nea ell Oy Se ge

Mis ewe elie =e) iy BS Sn tele! 6. "e

The Gold Deposit of Mount Morgan, Queensland..... nee 329
Ami, (H. M.) :—
Notes on Canadian Fossil Gryozoa.... .. ...2 2.2... hee eee 222

Brock, (R. W.) :—
See Miller, (G. W.)
Brégger, (Prof. W. C.), Stockholm :—

On the Formation of Pegmatite Veins.................... 33, 61
CAMPBELL, (RoBERT), D.D., M.A. :—

Some of the Rarer Summer Flowers of Canada... ......... 342

ite Plora oF Montreal Island<7. 55. vee. scsi. 8 Gh ua cele eks 397
Cushing, (Harold B.), B.A. :—

On the Ferns in the Vicinity of Montreal...... ..... ...... 489

Dawson, (Dr. GEORGE M.) :—
Notes on the Geology of Middleton Island, Alaska (Notice)... 58
Notes on the Occurrence of Mammoth Remains in the Yukon
District of Canada and in Alaska (Notice) ................ 59
Dawson, (Sir J. W.) :—
Preliminary Notes on Recent Discoveries of Batrachians and

other Air-breathers in the Coal Formation of Nova Scotia.. 1
Our Record of Canadian Earthquakes ..................... 8
The Canadian Ice Age ...... Soe i Eg OTe oe ee ane ee me 113
Notes on the Bivalve Shells of the Coal Formation of Nova

OOUG Ewe Piet. ee ERR AWE Oe a wk ee eel tk My
Appendix to Paper on Bivalve Shells..................... RT
Note on a Specimen of Beluga Catodon, from the Leda Clay,

Montreal...... Pee St RRR aes P's wc 351
Obituary Notice. Gaston, Marquis de Saporta..... ........ 367

Review of the Evidence for the Animal Nature of Eozoén
RI ANNs i ee RL dees ie ee ote ee 470

.

508 Canadian Record of Science.

PAGE
Deeks, (W. E.), B.A., M.D. :—

Patasitic Protogoa...20)°3 <x... Yas! saney ee anew oie ne ee ee 158

Where to :find: Ameebae in Winter ..0..5 0: 20.5. Ae ee 305
Drummond, (A. T.) :—

The Rides Takesii es 5 :i307, hae ee int Meee as Se
Ets, (R. W.), LL.D., F.R.S.C. :—

The Apatite Bearing Rocks of the Ottawa District.......... 213
Evans, (Nevil Norton), M.A.Se. :—

A Satisfactory Sulphuretted Hydrogen Generator.....:..... 210

GwiILim, (J. C.), B.A.Se. :—
Gold‘and Silver Ores of the Slocan, B.C..................:- 494

HARRINGTON, (B. J.), B.A., Ph.D. :—
The Composition of Limestones and Dolomites from a Number
of Geological, Horizons‘in Canada: .. 62/0. e.g Rie 27
- The Chemical Composition of Andradite from two Weer:
im Wmtarios :))2-1ce.!% Gategh MARY sate cat capes oe ee ee

INGALL, (ELFRIc DREW) :—
Preliminary Note on the Limestones of the Laurentian °

KInpDBERG, (N.-Conr.) Ph.D. :
Check-list of European and d Notth- American Mosses (Bryinez)
(DOLCE so ee es Gn elie fh Nan tate ona te en Lisate

Low, (ALBERT), B.A.Se. :—
The Recent Exploration of the Labrador Peninsula.......... 135

Macoun, (JAMES M.) :—
Contributions to Canadian Botany . 0.2... Sb tk.

EA) PP Set ..... 28, 76, 141, 198, 264, 318, 405, 459
Matthew (G. F.), F.R.S.C. :—
The Cambrian Terrain at Tejrovie, Bohemia........... ofty Ve
Ancient Myriapods i -.o4 : U ei esk ek re ee see 93
McGill, (Anthony), B.A., B.Se. :— \ ead
Viseomebry ee) 8. SORT ER eT et eer SUAS VE aa: 153
Note $0rdone: Di dicce 2 DERE PESTS, PE SS I ee 168

‘Miller, (W. G.), and Brock, (R. W.) :—
Some Dykes Cutting the Laurentian System, Counties of
Frontenae,. Leeds. and Lanark, -Ont:: 0: “\,). 27...) eee 482

Natura History Society :—
Proese@ings 0 25 Sedo en nh ee a ee, ee ee 48, 105, 113, 239, 308
Annual Presidential Address. By Professor Wesley Mills,
M.A M. Dit iekaest, oo dd ict ieral ea. Boe ae :99, 369

Tider 509

PAGE

Apouamrascia Day-to Labelle; P.Q 020.40 cies Oe 372
Do. do, — -to Phillipsburg; .P.Q. .. 2... eden ae 372
Reports Presented at Annual Meetings.................. 9 av as +15)

een Ooke ala tapers... ole. eet bee aes
_ TE een Fae 55, 58, 59, 113, 242, 310, 311, 498, 499, 500
Nestling, (Dr. Fritz) :— ;
On the Cambrian Formation of the Eastern Salt Range of

DiTA DUNNE EPEOIDY (sk. ee aes eo kee 242
‘Opitcary NOTICES :—
eee ermernpdom Williams. 2.0... OI 258
eet ate A POEbR, 2 ke ee ee ba Bee 367
Riebanihcrawiord VW WltamSOM. 2 i... he pete Se ae os 443
memrossor eames Dwight Dana... 6.2... 2... cede sen Se wick 448
NRE Re eNO Seen et oe oS a ho ee wens oo ae 45]

Osborn, (Henry Fairfield), Sc.D. :—
From the Greeks to Darwin ; an Outline of the Development
of the Evolution Idea (Book Notice)..........0............ 310

PENHALLow, (PROFEsSOR D. P.) :—
Teratological Notes....... Pe GN S25 “Blas ae A = abe

ScupDDER, (SAMUEL H.):
A Caddis-Fly from the Leda Clays of the Vicinity of Ottawa. 276

Warp, (Hon. J. K.) :—

eer aii eraeeee CAA), 28 ic eS lg oc one Wale Sele eee oe 354
Whiteaves, (J. F.) :—
Notes on Recent Canadian Unionide .......... sad 250, 365

Notes on some Fossils from the Cretaceous Rocks of British
Columbia, with Descriptions of two species that appear to
STO Cem eeiat Somes Ue Aes CAC Syl fn boi ew fs s . 313

Descriptions of eight New Species of Fossils from the (Galena)
Trenton Limestones of Lake Winnipeg and the Red River

Willey, (Arthur), B.Sc. :—

Amphioxus and the Ancestry of the Vertebrates (Book Notice) 311
Williams, (J. B.):— ;

Plotes oniipecial Micrations: 27" hoot ys eee Sk eae ee ee 248
Wintle, (EK. D.) :— d ;

Remarkable Flight of Certain Birds from the Atlantic Coast

up the St. Lawrence to the Great Lakes.................. 245
Unusual Occurrence of Razor-billed Auk at Montreal........ 247

ABSTRACT, FOR THE MONTH OF Sa@GUST,

Cc.

1895.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level. 187 feet.
1
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER.
— fj tMean
DAY. pressure
: of vapor.
Mean.| Max. | Min. |Range.J Mean. Max. Min. Range.
1 59-38 | 64.9 53.0 Ir.9 29.7065 | 29:778 29.659 +119 4048
2 61.52 | 68.0 55-2 12.8 29.8470 | 29.869 29.796 +073 4592
3) 63.27 | 68% 57:0 11.2 29-8567 | 29.910 29.803 107 -4628
SUNDAY. .......4 + 76.4 61.0 15 4 STEN, -tzctats . ae ate
5 68.97 77.2 59-5 17-7 29.8208 29.916 29.715 «201 5503
6 go.85 | 81.2 61.8 19.4 29.8642 | 29.946 29.760 186 -5787
7 | 67.80 | 75.2 65.3 99 29.6872 | 29.722 29.589 +133 . 6007
8 | 67.02] 75.3 63.0 12.3 29.8018 | 29.885 29.922 -163 5088
9 | 69.43 | 800 60.2 19.8 29.9332 | 29 976 29.906 070 4648
10 71.35 | 80.5 62 9 17.6 29-8770 | 29.944 29 825 119 - 4667
SuNvAY.... .. u seeee 78.8 61.5 17 Aa) siecle . é See | i meet
12 | 67.97] 78.0 63 7 14.3 29.7123 | 20.754 29 667 087 6345
13 | 68.42 | 76.8 62 2 14.6 29.8515 | 29.956 29.964 192 5318
14 69 15 | 76.0 62 2 13-8 29.9620 | 30.010 29.933 °77 -4058
15 | 69.07] 78.0 62.0 16.0 29.9768 | 30.027 29.927 099 5210
16 69.22 79-3 60.0 19.3 30.0607 30.118 30.024 +094 -4323
17 qo.o5; 81 8 58 0 23.8 29.7768 | 29.965 29 624 +341 -5913
Sunpay.. .... 18 mbatatatd 77-0 59.6 17 4 Gocos:||b stooce | Ae ae aged
19 | 61.38] 70.5 56.1 14.4 29.7598 | 29.867 29.686 «181 -4097
20 | 57.75 | 65.8 52.0 13.8 29.8717 | 29.914 29.838 076 -3550
2 54-92 60.8 50.5 10.3 29.9318 30.126 29.734 +342 3220
22 | 57.50] 65.2 47-7 17-5 30.1415 |. 30.242 30.040 202 -3620
23 64.67 71-5 56.8 147 29.8692 | 29.888 29.836 052 +5330
24 64.33! 66.2 62.8 3-4 29.7258 | 29.818 29 614 204 +5852
SUNDAY, .50..05- 25 CYaisie 72.2 61.2 TECOM fl vse : Sco) ee oo ainiaie os
26 67.907 76.2 60,0 16.2 29.9532 29.995 29 .892 104 5405
27 71.55 | 822 61.9 20.3 29 8878 | 29-979 29.794 «18, 5800
28 67.60 H 73-5 62.8 10.7 29-8443 | 29.902 29.780 122 4785
29 65.10 a2 59.9 2.3 29.8437 | 299 2 29 808 113 4558
30 67.97 76.5 60.8 choy 4 30.0017 30.049 29 965 084 5020
3: 63.57 17-5 54-2 Bars 29.8014 | 29.927 29 636 291 4742
...»Means| 65.84] 74.29 | 59 19 | 15.10 29.8658 | 29.9404 29.7921 1482 -4916
21 Years means me ty ee
for and including 66.71 | 75 03 | 58.70 16.39 29.9384 134 4810
this month 5
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD.
. . . . |
Direction.... ...| N. | N-E. E. S.E. = S.W. | W. | N.W. | CaM.
Miles ...... ae ae 522 36 72 107 2505 531 | 2305 | Toiz |
Duration in brs. . | 61 5 12 15 192 224 | 7 | 57 | I :
Mean velocity....| 8.56 7.20 6 00 13.13 13.05 15 76 13.02 17.75 ey
| |
Greatest mileage in one hour was 33 on the Resultant mileage, 6,900.
st. i= $33 Resultant direction, S. 54° W.
leeds velocity in gusts, 36 miles per hour on Total mileage, 10,180.
e Zist.

WIND. In Tenrus
{ Meau |__——_——— — —
relative! Dew Mean} 2
humid-| point. | General |velocity} <= | = | =
ity. direction. jin miles} = | = | =
perbour
80.3 53.0 Ww. 18.5 6.8] 10] 2
84.5 56.3 S.W. 149 5-3 | 10!) 0
80.2 56.7 Sz 14-5 9.8] 10] 9
ree Ss. fret .... alae
78.5 61.7 S.W. 8.9 5.0] 10] Oo
78.3 63.0 S,W. 13.1 5.0] 10] 0
88.5 64.2 Ss. 17-1 7.0 | 10 3
77-7 59-5 S.W, 22.1 6.0 | to 1
66.8 57-0 N.W. 18.3 P81 4 oe
61.2 56.8 WwW, g-1 2.8] 5 °
aes Sata N | i a
93 0 65.8 Se 6.5 B18 ll xGsll) 16
77-7 60.8 Ww. 10 6 5-5 | 10 | 2
66.0 57 0 N. 8.5 6eg || (gl) x
73-5 59-8 S.W. 147 5.2 | 10] ©
61.3 550 N, 7-6 Ov5| ai eo
79 8 63-5 Ss. 157 I 33] 10] ©
Aga aah Sow. ch | gs
76.3 3.2 W 18.1 F8,)) 5) 2
74-3 49.2 Ww. 115 3.3 | 10] o
75 5 40.7 N.W. 225 § 55] 10| ©
76.5 50.0 S.W, 118 4°7 \\10 {7 a
87.0 60 3 s.W, 21.4 [100 | 10 | to
97-2 63.3 Ss 10.8 Io o | 10 | Io
P6100 reer N.W. 7. | oe +
79 0 60.8 Ww. 15.2 7.0| 9] ©
76-3 63 2 S.W. 130 1/8, |e RO
71.5 57-5- Ww. 10 6 7-7|10| 2
71.3 56.2 N. 6.7 6.8] 10] 4
74.0 59 0 S.W. 10.9 rep | St ns
79 5 57-0 SF 18.5 5-5] 1a] ©
77-25 58.02 § S. 54° W 15-69) 53] 8.7 20
7BEO! WP) js: merges 512,82 “|:

SKY CLOUDED |

H. McLEOD, Supermmtendent.
= ze c
25a) = = | S|
Fea) Ss | 38 | EE
Sana) wc =. 5&5 DAY.
2g Ee: E E ‘S 2
7] Fe x:= a" ze
Ox ze D E
47 ers bine
60 Inap, Inap.| 2
04 lnap, a oo Inap, 3
42 0.30 pe | 0-30 | gues coweece SuNvDAY
72 aie’ ak fot 5
56 6.32 7 0.68 6
24 o 68 Qo 02 7
40 | 0.02 0.02 8
95 aah se | 9
gs ase 10
22 0.34 G13 | BX. vabscsms SuNDAY
35 °.71 0.71 | 12
69 Inap, Tuap.| 13
79 hel Pei keh
52 ° 03 | ° 08 | 15
99 / 16
93 1.08 1.08 | 17
69 1.24 ee Cy ero Suspay
96 Inap, Inap.' 19
64 0.02 0.02 | 20
73 0.32 0.32 | 2
69 Inap. Inap,| 22
oo Oo 22 0.02 | 23
vo | 1.43 I 43 | 24
gz ied ae GG ices ntiav ean SuNnvay
56 Inap. Inap,| 26
67 Inap. Inap.| 27
C9 0.02 0.02 | 28 -
43 0.06 0° 06) 29
92 aie ie eae G0
08 ©.08 om 0.08 31
577 | 6.92 6.92 {Sums .... Le ae
/ 21 Years means for
154-7 | 3-59 }and including this
month,

* Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and

temperature of 32° Fahrenheit.
§ Observed.
+ Pressure of vapour in inches of mercary.
t Humidity relative, saturation being 100.

114 yearsonly s Ten years only.

The greatest heat was 82.2° onthe 27th; the
greatest cold was 47-7° on the 22nd, giving a
range of temperature of 34.5 degrees.

Warmest day was the l0th. Coldest day was

Highest barometer reading was 30.242
on the 22nd" Lowest barometer was 29.589 on the
7th, giving a range of .653 inches. Maximum
relative humidity was 100 on the 12th and 24th.

the 2lst.

| Minimum relative humidity was 4 on the 16th.

Rain fell on 23 days.

Auroras were observed on 2 nights, the 9th and
10th.

99,

Solar halo on 22nd.

Thunder and lightning on 7 days, the 6th, 7th.
11th, 12th, 18th, 17th and 18th.

|

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF SEPTEMBER, 18985.

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory, Montreal, Canada. Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

KY CLOUDED f= | —
THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. iM WIND In Tentos |< 5 8 Ss = z 2
WLS Gos > —— Mean |t Meau a — -——f2s8| =. | 33 3
DAY, : relative| Dew z [Saa| a2 £5 ad DAY.
A humid-| point. ] General |y a@)a)/e%.38)| 82 Ee | ae
Mean.| Max. | Min. | Range.J Mean. Max. Min. ity. direction. s |s/S [8a 2° a7 i) 2
SUNDAY... 50--0-% Dore al Oxes 48.0 13-5 weereahits Me aie Sot Salad OFS w. Pe el lste eta cape EE BAA Pan RTM Ween een ¥
2 57-47 65.0 50.0 15.0 29.9302 30.017 29.860 71.3 47-3 S.W. 2.2| 6| 0 86 Ao uae see 2
3 | 65.33] 76-5 52-2 24.3 29.8457 | 29.900 29.803 73-3 55-8 S.W. 1.8| 10 | of go see oe 3
4 71-65 | 82.8 59.2 23.6 29.8642 | 29.908 29.840 74.8 63.0 Se 4.3] 10| Off go ae aoe sees 4
5 | 72-07] 79-9 64.8 15.1 30.0263 | 30.101 29.944 78.8 64.8 Sie g.0|10| 69 47 .* see ah Wa
6| 70.43| 80.0 61.5 18.5 30.1125 | 30.171 30.042 76.0 62.0 N.E. 3.7| 7| of 82 ts sae ose | 6
7| 69.981 78.8 | 62.2 16.6 29-9797 | 30.054 29.909 76.3 620 Ss. 7.5|10| 69 42 | 0.04 «. | 9-04) 7
SUNDAY....000. 8 | sees. ( 72-2 55-5 15.7 at codes ty dane oA - a8 S.W. SORPM ee acer | |G) eette al We Bis ck tae . SUNDAY
9| 60.02} 69.8 52.6 17.2 30-1193 | 30.185 30. 056 83.2 S.W. 4.3] 10] off 29 Inap wee nap-| 9
to | 64.17] 72-2 | 56.0 | 16.2 30-1350 | 30.229 30.CI5 81.7 Ss 2.3|10| of 83 sees seee | cose | 10
1x | 69.12] 77.0 [| 61.5 15.5 29.8388 | 29.953 29.716 92.5 Saws 8.0} 10] 29 49 1.69 sees 2 69 | ax
12| 64.20] 71-8 | 54.5 17.3 29.7353 | 29.827 29 . 663 86.5 > 8.8|10| 39 00 | 0.02 scos || 0.02 [haa
13| 51-57] 59-8 43-8 16.0 29.9722 | 30.156 29.844 63.8 N.W. 2.3| 8| of 96 ane 13
14 | 46.78] 53-4 29-5 13-9 30.1960 | 30.301 30.077 71.5 N. 3-7| 9| of 64 : 14
SUNDAY. ......-15° ADSL 56.6 30.0 17.6 curso atate SOY Aes ae | rags N, seas |\isemane “A 96 sees ra Woe 38-9427 Eas
16 | 53-20) 57-2 47-3 99 29.9553 | 30-113 29.827 88.3 Sy 72), 010) SOM COON nena sees -03 | 1
17| 56.60] 65.8 46.5 19.3 29.8460 | 29.890 29.815 63 3 N.W. 1.7] 9] Of 83 see = =|
mB] 49.05 | 55.3 42.0 13.3 29.7793 | 29-889 29.703 65.5 E 7-3 | 10 | © oe me :
19 | 56.20] 63.0 46.0 170 29.9395 | 29.968 29.880 74.3 S.W. GB: 2h 102) MOOR as *** | 0.02 pd
20 63.60 73-9 55-8 E72 29.0925 30.033 20.935 88.5 S‘E. 5-7 | 10 | ° 53 0.02 eae bre
2x | 76.48 | 840 62.0 22.0 29.9512 | 29.963 29.932 75-7 SW. 1.5 | ¢5') Olm “9 03 .
SUNDAY........22 | «2... | 84.8 69.0 moped |, oegegoc ODS ee ed are SW Laaa] hte ong 92 vale sone. |[taee $0 ..+<08 na
23 7%.88 | 86.3 56.3 30.0 29.8732 30.040 29.753 287 5753 73.2 S.W. 2/0." 7 jae 72 tee oy
24 55-05 61.0 49-0 12.0 30.1242 30.172 30.092 .080 +2972 69.7 ye 1.0 3 ° 96 re e
25 | 56.62 | 65.3 45-5 19.8 30.0538 | 30.149 29.886 -263 3293 71.8 Ss. 4.0| 8] Of 7 Es : Die =e
26 62.78 | 71.2 55-3 15.4 29.6568 | 29 757 29.587 «170 - 4688 81.3 S.W. 6.5|10| 0 24 L 2 | PRaS =
27 | 53.28/ 61.3 44.0 17.3 29.9238 | 30.143 29.730 .413 .2905 70 8 Ww. 5.0|10| of 78 nap. t p. J
28 | 44-40 | 49-3 36.5 12.8 30.2278 | 30.313 30.126 187 .1893 64.8 N.E. 2.7| 10}; 0 96 sees °
ISUNDAY........ 29 | ..... | 58-5 42.8 CP Ha) (MOBeic || ooccoo | - are & eed | uae ee im S.E. a4 (ie oo 0.79 38 0-79 29 oseetesene Sunpay
30 | 45-77 | 54-3 | 40-9 | 13.4 [| 29.6903 | 29.755 29.645 -110 2613 85.2 S.W. g.2|10| 5 5° | 0-56 te +50 | 3
seeee .seeeeMeans| 60.30 | 68.21 | 51 32 16.88 | 29.9508 | 30.0395 29.8672 -1723 42113 76.08 | 52.28. 8 © ..aces 4-7 9 888 63 4] 3 ek gos ze Sums .... Bi ccee?
otis oat ae Re a Li ae wat Care ae
Fe ne Inorg 58.60 | 66.72 | 50.83 15 88 J 30.0149 sagas ae 179 - 3834 Fer yi Weacindk | |v eeaacec 5:5 A 1) saith
; ; F =
i - : the 28th. Highest barometer reading was 30.313 |
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and the re 28th. Lowest barometer was 29.587 on the |
temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. 6th, giving a range of 0.736 inches. Sa
S relative humidity was. on the , 26th anc
Direction........| N. N.E. E. S.E. 8. S.W. Ww. N.W. CaLM. Sa HeuNee 99th. Minimum relative humidity was 41 on the
Mil a Thal 6 Sa) | SS See | SS t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercury. 17th.
iles . relate 2U 2 21 686 66 68 Fy : : ’
= ee 8 aS ee | eee ee | Bee | st Humidity relative, saturaigummping 100. Rain fell on 10 days.
uration in hrs. . 8 I 2 8 86 . ~enre , f
[ae ae es ee peas See oe a oR 1 14 years only. s Ten years only. Auroras were observed on 2 nights, the 14th and |
The greatest heat was 86.3° on the 23rd; the 16th.

Mean velocity....| 11.0 8.5 6.7 11.4 14.8 18.2 12.4 17.1
tical S| greatest cold was 36.5° on the 28th, giving a
range of temperature of 49.8 degrees.

Lunar halo on 6th.

Greatest mileage in one hour was 40 on the Resultant mileage, 5,876. 27
23rd. x Resultant direction. 8. 44}° Ww. Warmest day was the 22nd. Coldest day was Lunar corona on the 7th. |
Greatest velocity in gusts, 60 miles per hour on Total mileage, 10461.

the 23rd.

=

Meteorological Observations, McGill College Observatory. Montreal, Canada.

ABSTRACT FOR THE MONTH OF OCTOBER, 1898.

Height above sea level, 187 feet. C. H. McLEOD, Superintendent.

1KY CLOUDED

a < a 3
‘7 THERMOMETER. BAROMETER. WIND. In Teyrs. |° 536) 7 a =3
; —— ———_ — —— —— — — — —- — — ] Mean |f Meau —_—— —}j}— —-—— fe Al su aa a
‘ E Sac 3 20
DAY. pressure |relative| Dew Mean ore £2 23 | <8 DAY
4 : : of vapor.) humid-| point. | General |yelocity! = | 4#| ¢]228 62 Eo |ae :
Mean.| Max. | Min. |Range.J Mean. Max. Min. Range. ity. direction. jin miles} 2 |S /ayoaZ 87 Se leo
S/S /5 ff 5a) 2 ;
perhour| = a &
+ 1 | 42.57 | 47-4 36.2 £x.2 29.9315 | 30.050 29.670 380 ; -2188 80.7 36.5 S.W, 25.1 7.2|10] off 44 0.07 con OLOT ee
2| 53-17 | 60.2 40.2 20.0 30.0152 | 30 040 29.992 -048 +2207 78.8 46.5 Ss: 19.5 5.3] 10] of 53 0.00 0,00} 2 /
3 50.53 | 57-8 44-3 13-5 30.2153 | 30.315 30.081 +234 +2772 75-5 41.2 N. 13.7 4-5 | 10] off 65 oe 3
4 47-67] 555 39-4 16.1 30.2545 | 32.348 30.148 «200 -2617 79-2 41.2 N, 8.0 0.0] o| off 97 . 2 wen 4
5 | 48-10 | 54.8 39.8 15.0 30 0143 | 30.121 29.393 .228 .2723 81.2 42.3 N, 7-7 2.7|10| off 62 as eve 5
SUNDAY. .......6 dete 61.1 40.4 20.7 spices etl) LaeeaicieeF alae eieie'es q ° abot S.W. 12,0 areal (acaca elt. ote QI cane see Giwarcanes .- SUNDAY
7| 52.47] 57-8 43.3 14-5 29.5857 | 29.683 29-475 208 3188 80.3 46.5 Ss. 10.1 7.3| 10] off 2x 0.00 0,00} 7
8| 45.08] 53-5 38.0 15-5 29.6602 | 29.830 29.539 291 2027 66.5 34.3 S,W. 24.1 9-5 |10| 8§ 29 oes 8
9| 37-93] 43-8 32.2 11.6 30.0662 | 30.107 29.906 291 1570 69.0 28.5 Ww. 16.7 7.0|10| of 14 a 9
1o| 3752| 44-6 33-5 AOAC 30.2963 | 30.351 30.246 105 1527 69 0 27.8 Ww. 97 4.5|10| Off 89 33 sale) eee
11 | 47.30 | 56.6 34.0 22.6 30.0695 | 30.191 29.973 218 2180 67.7 36 5 Ss 18.3 5.3| 10] of 85 0.00 0 00 | Ir
12| 48.671 54.2 46.0 8.2 29.9570 | 40.003 29.905 098 3285 95:7 47-2 E 10.7 | 10.0] 10 | 10 J 00 0.24 0.24 | 12
SuUNDAY.... .. 13,| seee. | 58.0 45.0 beter | | dei 5 eaten aed A Aron| (Pe hace 5 as N. > a = 30 | i MR SuNDAY
14 45-25 56.7 38.0 18.7 29.9738 | 30.170 29.742 428 1933 63.5 33-0 N.W, 18.4 4.8] 10] o 79 baee [me
15 37-52 | 42-3 34.2 8.1 30.1183 | 30.17 30.046 133 1598 tas 28.7 N, 5.2 7.0| 10] 4 00 +» jon 16th} 15
16 41.98 48.0 34.1 13.9 29-7495 30.009 29.465 544 2225 83.8 37-2 S‘E. 15.2 9-8} 10] 9 00 | 9.07 ane 16
17 | 39-22 | 45-6 | 29.7 15.9 29.6943 | 29.933 29 544 389 1797 73-0 3r 2 N.W. 24.7 & 8.0] 10/ 49 58 ,; 0.00 «eee | 00] 17
18] 32.50) 40.4 24.0 10.4 30.0390 | 30.179 29.809 370 1517 80 2 29.2 Ww. 19.6 1.8] 10] off 85 eee sees | 18
19 47-40 | 58.2 34.6 23.6 29.5885 | 29.695 29.462 233 « 2302 69.7 37-7 Sa 25-4 £e0) || Slane, 39 0,00 eee | 000} 19
SUNDAWs. ..¢2-30 || cess 37-7 28.5 CEESAl liidiccos ag eéboe 1 | eee Magee N OSewes eee S.W. TAMMIE 000 |so..| +> § 99 ane 0.00 | 0 00 | 20...006.+++-SUNDAY
ae 32.60 | 366 25.8 to 8 30.0070 | 30.093 29.857 236 1457 83.2 26.8 Si 9.8 6.2 | 10] off 74 ass 0.80 | 007 | 2E
2a2| 42.62] 51.2 28.4 22.8 29 8680 |} 30.072 29.717 355 1810 66.0 31.5 SF 18.8 9.3 |10] 6 27 0.06 see | 0.06 | 22
23 | 36.17] 40.5 31.6 8.9 30.0803 | 30 136 29 951 185 1390 65.3 25-5 Ww. 14-5 5-3| 10] rf 37 0.01 » | O.or | 23
24 37-30 43-¢ 29.5 13.9 30.0993 30.094 29.860 234 1712 77-5 30.5 SF 14.8 8.0] 10} 3 7° gee sees | 24
25 | 37.37] 40.6 27.6 19.0 29.7218 | 29.951 29.553 398 1638 755 30.2 Ss 2212 7.8 | 10)|) = 08 ©.00 see | 0,00 | 25
26 | 32.18 | 41.7 23.8 17.9 29.8978 | 30.00! 29 702 306 1373 73-5 24.8 S.E. 7-1 70/10] off 07 woe | eves | 26
SUNDAY. Juaseeo47 | «coe. 58.6 33.8 24:8: || oceeo Eieeeieatenn ln. ‘ee do a ate ‘ Ste SF 12.6 Sell wees 07 0, 00 + | 0-00 | 27....00.... SUNDAY
28 | 44-10] 49.2 ) 35.5 | 13-7 ff 29-7433 | 29.902 29.569 333 1838 | 63.0 | 31.8 Ss. 27-5 J 8-3] 10) 5 20 | 0.06 +» | 0.06 | 28
29 32.47 | 39-3 29.8 9-5 30.1405 | 32.263 30 029 234 1285 79.0 23.8 S.W. 12.3 6.3] 10] o 19 oe 29
30 | 30-05) 34.9 | 25 4 9-5 | 30.4797 | 30.571 30.347 +224 1238 | 74.8 | 22.8 W. 10.7 9 59/10) OF 35 - a be
3h] 34-27} 42.2 | 24.1 18.4 30.3443 | 30.517 30.066 +451 1343 70.8 | 24.5 s 16.0 | 83/10] Of 02 2523. [32
Seode .2..»Means| 41.22 48.98 |733 89 15.09 20.9812 | 30.1074 29 .8350 «2724 19926 74.24 33-21 7S. 2 W.| 15-43 9 6.33/9.561.898 43.4 0.71 |Sums . as Tereces
I 21 ney ae non, = PeLiaulticn : | ta | \ocpiom 21 Years means for
or and including 45-35 | 52.40 | 38.6, 13 78 29.005T)| we stesteml cone a z 6. i 2 PF ¥.a¥ .22 | ¢and including this
Reece j 3 37 9.9951 2140 2433 WOwAOL|eisie oe Bl Maristeteye $13.82] 6.44 [49-4 | 3-09 3 3 Satie g
ANALYSIS OF WIND RECORD. * Barometer readings reduced to sea-level and | on the 0th. Lowest barometer was 29.462 on the
temperature of 32° Fahrenheit. 19th, giving a range of 1.109 inches. Maximum
| relative humidity was 100 oi 5th, Leh =
Direction........) N. N.E. BE. S.E. 5. S.W. Ww. NW. rere, § Observed. “ Minimum relative humidity was 43 on the
oo [OO ( OOF OOO | | S| OO | | — t Pressure of vapour in inches of mercury. .
Miles ...... Be ate 753 266 647 4108 2967 1732 976 _ ; . . Rain fell on 14 days.
aie ai SS | es eee ee) | eee re ee t Humidity relative, saturation being 10v. Snow fell on 2 days, 20th and 2ist
uré nors.. now fell on Z days, 2 F Zist.
AEA Sle Ee 0 a nae ese Fi 136 9 | = 6 7 14 years only. s Ten years only. Rai fou fall ant 16 (divs
1 ity...-| 8.8 a re ain or snow fell o ays.
viean velocity r 11,08 12.44 15.80 21.82 14.55 17.12 The greatest heat was 61.1° on the 6th; the ,
greatest cold was 23.8° on the 26th, giving a Auroras were observed on 1 night, the Mth.
: A range of temperature of 37.3 degrees. .
“ Greatest mileage in one hour was 48 on the Resultant mileage, 5,719. ¥ u oa Lunar halo onl night, 10th,
28th. aap © : Resultant direction, S. 254° W. Warmest day was the 2nd. Coldest day was F 4
Greatest velocity in gusts, 60 miles per hour on Total mileage, 11,489. the 30th. Highest barometer reading was 30.571 IIail storm on the 17th.
the 28th. Average velocity 15,54 m. p.h. |

be

NOTICES.

All communications and exchanges should be carefully
addressed to CANADIAN RECORD OF SCIENCE, Natural History
Society, 32 University Street, Montreal.

Rejected articles will be returned if desired, and if stamps are
enclosed for that purpose. The editors will not hold themselves
responsible for any views expressed by authors.

Subscribers who fail to receive the RecorD, or who change
their residences, are requested to notify the Editors accordingly.

Back Numbers of the RECORD may be obtained of the Editors,
at forty cents per number.

Volumes, unbound, may be had as follows:

Vou. 1.,4 Nos. - - - : - $1.50
Vots. II. & III., 8 Nos. each, - - 3.00 per vol.

The ReEcorp is issued quarterly and contains eight numbers,
or 512 pages, in each volume. The subscription price, postage
paid, is as follows:

Canada and the United States, Mi - $3.00
Great Britain, - - - : - £013 0

ISSUED 7TH APRIL, 1896.

Ui
ae

CALIF ACAD OF SCIENCES LIBRARY

aa

853 10006 4562